Merge branch 'master' into staging

1 files changed, 24155 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/doc/guix.de.texi b/doc/guix.de.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ef04eed346
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/guix.de.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,24155 @@
+\input texinfo
+@c ===========================================================================
+@c
+@c This file was generated with po4a. Translate the source file.
+@c
+@c ===========================================================================
+@c -*-texinfo-*-
+
+@c %**start of header
+@setfilename guix.de.info
+@documentencoding UTF-8
+@documentlanguage de
+@frenchspacing on
+@settitle Referenzhandbuch zu GNU Guix
+@c %**end of header
+
+@include version-de.texi
+
+@c Identifier of the OpenPGP key used to sign tarballs and such.
+@set OPENPGP-SIGNING-KEY-ID 3CE464558A84FDC69DB40CFB090B11993D9AEBB5
+@set KEY-SERVER pool.sks-keyservers.net
+
+@copying
+Copyright @copyright{} 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018 Ludovic
+Courtès@* Copyright @copyright{} 2013, 2014, 2016 Andreas Enge@* Copyright
+@copyright{} 2013 Nikita Karetnikov@* Copyright @copyright{} 2014, 2015,
+2016 Alex Kost@* Copyright @copyright{} 2015, 2016 Mathieu Lirzin@*
+Copyright @copyright{} 2014 Pierre-Antoine Rault@* Copyright @copyright{}
+2015 Taylan Ulrich Bayırlı/Kammer@* Copyright @copyright{} 2015, 2016, 2017
+Leo Famulari@* Copyright @copyright{} 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018 Ricardo
+Wurmus@* Copyright @copyright{} 2016 Ben Woodcroft@* Copyright @copyright{}
+2016, 2017, 2018 Chris Marusich@* Copyright @copyright{} 2016, 2017, 2018
+Efraim Flashner@* Copyright @copyright{} 2016 John Darrington@* Copyright
+@copyright{} 2016, 2017 Nils Gillmann@* Copyright @copyright{} 2016, 2017,
+2018 Jan Nieuwenhuizen@* Copyright @copyright{} 2016 Julien Lepiller@*
+Copyright @copyright{} 2016 Alex ter Weele@* Copyright @copyright{} 2017,
+2018 Clément Lassieur@* Copyright @copyright{} 2017, 2018 Mathieu Othacehe@*
+Copyright @copyright{} 2017 Federico Beffa@* Copyright @copyright{} 2017,
+2018 Carlo Zancanaro@* Copyright @copyright{} 2017 Thomas Danckaert@*
+Copyright @copyright{} 2017 humanitiesNerd@* Copyright @copyright{} 2017
+Christopher Allan Webber@* Copyright @copyright{} 2017, 2018 Marius Bakke@*
+Copyright @copyright{} 2017 Hartmut Goebel@* Copyright @copyright{} 2017
+Maxim Cournoyer@* Copyright @copyright{} 2017, 2018 Tobias Geerinckx-Rice@*
+Copyright @copyright{} 2017 George Clemmer@* Copyright @copyright{} 2017
+Andy Wingo@* Copyright @copyright{} 2017, 2018 Arun Isaac@* Copyright
+@copyright{} 2017 nee@* Copyright @copyright{} 2018 Rutger Helling@*
+Copyright @copyright{} 2018 Oleg Pykhalov@* Copyright @copyright{} 2018 Mike
+Gerwitz@* Copyright @copyright{} 2018 Pierre-Antoine Rouby@* Copyright
+@copyright{} 2018 Gábor Boskovits@* Copyright @copyright{} 2018 Florian
+Pelz@* Copyright @copyright{} 2018 Laura Lazzati@* Copyright @copyright{}
+2018 Alex Vong@*
+
+Es ist Ihnen gestattet, dieses Dokument zu vervielfältigen, weiterzugeben
+und/oder zu verändern, unter den Bedingungen der GNU Free Documentation
+License, entweder gemäß Version 1.3 der Lizenz oder (nach Ihrer Option)
+einer späteren Version, die von der Free Software Foundation veröffentlicht
+wurde, ohne unveränderliche Abschnitte, ohne vorderen Umschlagtext und ohne
+hinteren Umschlagtext. Eine Kopie der Lizenz finden Sie im Abschnitt mit dem
+Titel »GNU Free Documentation License«.
+@end copying
+
+@dircategory Systemadministration
+@direntry
+* Guix: (guix.de).           Installierte Software und Systemkonfigurationen 
+                               verwalten.
+* guix package: (guix.de)guix package aufrufen.  Pakete installieren, 
+                                                   entfernen und 
+                                                   aktualisieren.
+* guix gc: (guix.de)guix gc aufrufen.  Unbenutzten Plattenspeicher wieder 
+                                         freigeben.
+* guix pull: (guix.de)guix pull aufrufen.  Die Liste verfügbarer Pakete 
+                                             aktualisieren.
+* guix system: (guix.de)guix system aufrufen.  Die 
+                                                 Betriebssystemkonfiguration 
+                                                 verwalten.
+@end direntry
+
+@dircategory Softwareentwicklung
+@direntry
+* guix environment: (guix.de)guix environment aufrufen.  Umgebungen für 
+                                                           Entwickler 
+                                                           erstellen
+* guix build: (guix.de)guix build aufrufen.  Erstellen von Paketen.
+* guix pack: (guix.de)guix pack aufrufen.  Bündel aus Binärdateien 
+                                             erstellen.
+@end direntry
+
+@titlepage
+@title Referenzhandbuch zu GNU Guix
+@subtitle Den funktionalen Paketmanager GNU Guix benutzen
+@author Die GNU-Guix-Entwickler
+
+@page
+@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
+Edition @value{EDITION} @* @value{UPDATED} @*
+
+@insertcopying
+@end titlepage
+
+@contents
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node Top
+@top GNU Guix
+
+Dieses Dokument beschreibt GNU Guix, Version @value{VERSION}, ein
+funktionales Paketverwaltungswerkzeug, das für das GNU-System geschrieben
+wurde.
+
+@c TRANSLATORS: You can replace the following paragraph with information on
+@c how to join your own translation team and how to report issues with the
+@c translation.
+This manual is also available in French (@pxref{Top,,, guix.fr, Manuel de
+référence de GNU Guix}) and German (@pxref{Top,,, guix.de, Referenzhandbuch
+zu GNU Guix}).  If you would like to translate it in your native language,
+consider joining the
+@uref{https://translationproject.org/domain/guix-manual.html, Translation
+Project}.
+
+@menu
+* Einführung::              Was ist Guix überhaupt?
+* Installation::             Guix installieren.
+* Paketverwaltung::          Pakete installieren, aktualisieren usw.
+* Programmierschnittstelle::  Guix in Scheme verwenden.
+* Zubehör::                 Befehle zur Paketverwaltung.
+* GNU-Distribution::         Software für Ihr freundliches GNU-System.
+* Mitwirken::                Ihre Hilfe ist nötig!
+
+* Danksagungen::             Danke!
+* GNU-Lizenz für freie Dokumentation::  Die Lizenz dieses Handbuchs.
+* Konzeptverzeichnis::       Konzepte.
+* Programmierverzeichnis::   Datentypen, Funktionen und Variable.
+
+@detailmenu
+ --- Detaillierte Liste der Knoten ---
+
+
+
+Installation
+
+
+
+* Aus Binärdatei installieren::  Guix installieren, ohne Zeit zu verlieren!
+* Voraussetzungen::          Zum Erstellen und Benutzen von Guix nötige 
+                               Software.
+* Die Testsuite laufen lassen::  Guix testen.
+* Den Daemon einrichten::    Wie man die Umgebung des Erstellungs-Daemons 
+                               einrichtet.
+* Aufruf des guix-daemon::   Den Erstellungs-Daemon laufen lassen.
+* Anwendungen einrichten::   Anwendungsspezifische Einstellungen.
+
+Den Daemon einrichten
+
+
+
+* Einrichten der Erstellungsumgebung::  Die isolierte Umgebung zum Erstellen 
+                                          vorbereiten.
+* Auslagern des Daemons einrichten::  Erstellungen auf entfernte Maschinen 
+                                        auslagern.
+* SELinux-Unterstützung::   Wie man eine SELinux-Richtlinie für den Daemon 
+                               einrichtet.
+
+Paketverwaltung
+
+
+
+* Funktionalitäten::        Wie Guix Ihr Leben schöner machen wird.
+* Aufruf von guix package::  Pakete installieren, entfernen usw.
+* Substitute::               Vorerstelle Binärdateien herunterladen.
+* Pakete mit mehreren Ausgaben.::  Ein Quellpaket, mehrere Ausgaben.
+* Aufruf von guix gc::       Den Müllsammler laufen lassen.
+* Aufruf von guix pull::     Das neueste Guix samt Distribution laden.
+* Channels::                 Customizing the package collection.
+* Inferiors::                Interacting with another revision of Guix.
+* Invoking guix describe::   Display information about your Guix revision.
+* Aufruf von guix pack::     Software-Bündel erstellen.
+* Aufruf von guix archive::  Import und Export von Store-Dateien.
+
+Substitute
+
+
+
+* Offizieller Substitut-Server::  Eine besondere Quelle von Substituten.
+* Substitut-Server autorisieren::  Wie man Substitute an- und abschaltet.
+* Substitutauthentifizierung::  Wie Guix Substitute verifiziert.
+* Proxy-Einstellungen::      Wie Sie Substitute über einen Proxy beziehen.
+* Fehler bei der Substitution::  Was passiert, wenn die Substitution 
+                                   fehlschlägt.
+* Vom Vertrauen gegenüber Binärdateien::  Wie können Sie diesem binären 
+                                              Blob trauen?
+
+Programmierschnittstelle
+
+
+
+* Pakete definieren::        Wie Sie neue Pakete definieren.
+* Erstellungssysteme::       Angeben, wie Pakete erstellt werden.
+* Der Store::                Den Paket-Store verändern.
+* Ableitungen::              Systemnahe Schnittstelle für Paketableitungen.
+* Die Store-Monade::         Rein funktionale Schnittstelle zum Store.
+* G-Ausdrücke::             Erstellungsausdrücke verarbeiten.
+* Invoking guix repl::       Fiddling with Guix interactively.
+
+Pakete definieren
+
+
+
+* „package“-Referenz::   Der Datentyp für Pakete.
+* „origin“-Referenz::    Datentyp für Paketursprünge.
+
+Zubehör
+
+
+
+* Aufruf von guix build::    Pakete aus der Befehlszeile heraus erstellen.
+* Aufruf von guix edit::     Paketdefinitionen bearbeiten.
+* Aufruf von guix download::  Herunterladen einer Datei und Ausgabe ihres 
+                                Hashes.
+* Aufruf von guix hash::     Den kryptographischen Hash einer Datei 
+                               berechnen.
+* Aufruf von guix import::   Paketdefinitionen importieren.
+* Aufruf von guix refresh::  Paketdefinitionen aktualisieren.
+* Aufruf von guix lint::     Fehler in Paketdefinitionen finden.
+* Aufruf von guix size::     Plattenverbrauch profilieren.
+* Aufruf von guix graph::    Den Paketgraphen visualisieren.
+* Aufruf von guix environment::  Entwicklungsumgebungen einrichten.
+* Aufruf von guix publish::  Substitute teilen.
+* Aufruf von guix challenge::  Die Substitut-Server anfechten.
+* Aufruf von guix copy::     Mit einem entfernten Store Dateien austauschen.
+* Aufruf von guix container::  Prozesse isolieren.
+* Aufruf von guix weather::  Die Verfügbarkeit von Substituten 
+                               einschätzen.
+* Invoking guix processes::  Listing client processes.
+
+Aufruf von @command{guix build}
+
+
+
+* Gemeinsame Erstellungsoptionen::  Erstellungsoptionen für die meisten 
+                                      Befehle.
+* Paketumwandlungsoptionen::  Varianten von Paketen erzeugen.
+* Zusätzliche Erstellungsoptionen::  Optionen spezifisch für »guix 
+                                        build«.
+* Fehlschläge beim Erstellen untersuchen::  Praxiserfahrung bei der 
+                                               Paketerstellung.
+
+GNU-Distribution
+
+
+
+* Systeminstallation::       Das ganze Betriebssystem installieren.
+* Systemkonfiguration::      Das Betriebssystem konfigurieren.
+* Dokumentation::            Wie man Nutzerhandbücher von Software liest.
+* Dateien zur Fehlersuche installieren::  Womit man seinen Debugger 
+                                            füttert.
+* Sicherheitsaktualisierungen::  Sicherheits-Patches schnell einspielen.
+* Paketmodule::              Pakete aus Sicht des Programmierers.
+* Paketrichtlinien::         Die Distribution wachsen lassen.
+* Bootstrapping::            GNU/Linux von Grund auf selbst erstellen.
+* Portierung::               Guix auf andere Plattformen und Kernels 
+                               bringen.
+
+Systeminstallation
+
+
+
+* Einschränkungen::         Was Sie erwarten dürfen.
+* Hardware-Überlegungen::   Unterstützte Hardware.
+* Installation von USB-Stick oder DVD::  Das Installationsmedium 
+                                           vorbereiten.
+* Vor der Installation::     Netzwerkanbindung, Partitionierung etc.
+* Fortfahren mit der Installation::  Die Hauptsache.
+* GuixSD in einer VM installieren::  Ein GuixSD-Spielplatz.
+* Ein Abbild zur Installation erstellen::  Wie ein solches entsteht.
+
+Systemkonfiguration
+
+
+
+* Das Konfigurationssystem nutzen::  Ihr GNU-System anpassen.
+* „operating-system“-Referenz::  Details der 
+                                       Betriebssystem-Deklarationen.
+* Dateisysteme::             Die Dateisystemeinbindungen konfigurieren.
+* Abgebildete Geräte::      Näheres zu blockorientierten Speichermedien.
+* Benutzerkonten::           Benutzerkonten festlegen.
+* Locales::                  Sprache und kulturelle Konventionen.
+* Dienste::                  Systemdienste festlegen.
+* Setuid-Programme::         Mit Administratorrechten startende Programme.
+* X.509-Zertifikate::        HTTPS-Server authentifizieren.
+* Name Service Switch::      Den Name Service Switch von libc konfigurieren.
+* Initiale RAM-Disk::        Linux-libre hochfahren.
+* Bootloader-Konfiguration::  Den Bootloader konfigurieren.
+* Aufruf von guix system::   Instanzierung einer Systemkonfiguration.
+* GuixSD in einer VM starten::  Wie man GuixSD in einer virtuellen Maschine 
+                                  startet.
+* Dienste definieren::       Neue Dienstdefinitionen hinzufügen.
+
+Dienste
+
+
+
+* Basisdienste::             Essenzielle Systemdienste.
+* Geplante Auftragsausführung::  Der mcron-Dienst.
+* Log-Rotation::             Der rottlog-Dienst.
+* Netzwerkdienste::          Netzwerkeinrichtung, SSH-Daemon etc.
+* X Window::                 Graphische Anzeige.
+* Druckdienste::             Unterstützung für lokale und entfernte 
+                               Drucker.
+* Desktop-Dienste::          D-Bus- und Desktop-Dienste.
+* Sound Services::           ALSA and Pulseaudio services.
+* Datenbankdienste::         SQL-Datenbanken, Schlüssel-Wert-Speicher etc.
+* Mail-Dienste::             IMAP, POP3, SMTP und so weiter.
+* Kurznachrichtendienste::   Dienste für Kurznachrichten.
+* Telefondienste::           Telefoniedienste.
+* Überwachungsdienste::     Dienste zur Systemüberwachung.
+* Kerberos-Dienste::         Kerberos-Dienste.
+* Web-Dienste::              Web-Server.
+* Zertifikatsdienste::       TLS-Zertifikate via Let’s Encrypt.
+* DNS-Dienste::              DNS-Daemons.
+* VPN-Dienste::              VPN-Daemons.
+* Network File System::      Dienste mit Bezug zum Netzwerkdateisystem.
+* Kontinuierliche Integration::  Der Cuirass-Dienst.
+* Power Management Services::  Extending battery life.
+* Audio-Dienste::            Der MPD.
+* Virtualisierungsdienste::  Dienste für virtuelle Maschinen.
+* Versionskontrolldienste::  Entfernten Zugang zu Git-Repositorys bieten.
+* Spieldienste::             Spielserver.
+* Verschiedene Dienste::     Andere Dienste.
+
+Dienste definieren
+
+
+
+* Dienstkompositionen::      Wie Dienste zusammengestellt werden.
+* Diensttypen und Dienste::  Typen und Dienste.
+* Service-Referenz::         Referenz zur Programmierschnittstelle.
+* Shepherd-Dienste::         Eine spezielle Art von Dienst.
+
+Paketrichtlinien
+
+
+
+* Software-Freiheit::        Was in die Distribution aufgenommen werden 
+                               darf.
+* Paketbenennung::           Was macht einen Namen aus?
+* Versionsnummern::          Wenn der Name noch nicht genug ist.
+* Zusammenfassungen und Beschreibungen::  Den Nutzern helfen, das richtige 
+                                            Paket zu finden.
+* Python-Module::            Ein Touch britischer Comedy.
+* Perl-Module::              Kleine Perlen.
+* Java-Pakete::              Kaffeepause.
+* Schriftarten::             Schriften verschriftlicht.
+
+Mitwirken
+
+
+
+* Erstellung aus dem Git::   Das Neueste und Beste.
+* Guix vor der Installation ausführen::  Hacker-Tricks.
+* Perfekt eingerichtet::     Die richtigen Werkzeuge.
+* Code-Stil::                Wie Mitwirkende hygienisch arbeiten.
+* Einreichen von Patches::   Teilen Sie Ihre Arbeit.
+
+Code-Stil
+
+
+
+* Programmierparadigmen::    Wie Sie Ihre Elemente zusammenstellen.
+* Module::                   Wo Sie Ihren Code unterbringen.
+* Datentypen und Mustervergleich::  Implementierung von Datenstrukturen.
+* Formatierung von Code::    Schreibkonventionen.
+
+@end detailmenu
+@end menu
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node Einführung
+@chapter Einführung
+
+@cindex Zweck
+GNU Guix@footnote{»Guix« wird wie »geeks« ausgesprochen, also als »ɡiːks« in
+der Notation des Internationalen Phonetischen Alphabets (IPA).} ist ein
+Werkzeug zur Paketverwaltung für das GNU-System. Guix macht es
+unprivilegierten Nutzern leicht, Pakete zu installieren, zu aktualisieren
+oder zu entfernen, zu einem vorherigen Satz von Paketen zurückzuwechseln,
+Pakete aus ihrem Quellcode heraus zu erstellen und hilft allgemein bei der
+Schöpfung und Wartung von Software-Umgebungen.
+
+@cindex Benutzeroberflächen
+Guix bietet eine befehlszeilenbasierte Paketverwaltungsschnittstelle
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}), einen Satz Befehlszeilenwerkzeuge
+(@pxref{Zubehör}) sowie Schnittstellen zur Programmierung in Scheme
+(@pxref{Programmierschnittstelle}).
+@cindex Erstellungs-Daemon
+Der @dfn{Erstellungs-Daemon} ist für das Erstellen von Paketen im Auftrag
+von Nutzern verantwortlich (@pxref{Den Daemon einrichten}) und für das
+Herunterladen vorerstellter Binärdateien aus autorisierten Quellen
+(@pxref{Substitute}).
+
+@cindex Erweiterbarkeit der Distribution
+@cindex Anpassung, von Paketen
+Guix enthält Paketdefinitionen für viele Pakete, von GNU und nicht von GNU,
+die alle @uref{https://www.gnu.org/philosophy/free-sw.html, die Freiheit des
+Computernutzers respektieren}. Es ist @emph{erweiterbar}: Nutzer können ihre
+eigenen Paketdefinitionen schreiben (@pxref{Pakete definieren}) und sie als
+unabhängige Paketmodule verfügbar machen (@pxref{Paketmodule}). Es ist
+auch @emph{anpassbar}: Nutzer können spezialisierte Paketdefinitionen aus
+bestehenden @emph{ableiten}, auch von der Befehlszeile (@pxref{Paketumwandlungsoptionen}).
+
+@cindex Guix System Distribution
+@cindex GuixSD
+Sie können GNU@tie{}Guix auf ein bestehendes GNU/Linux-System aufsetzen, wo
+es die bereits verfügbaren Werkzeuge ergänzt, ohne zu stören
+(@pxref{Installation}), oder Sie können es eigenständig als Teil der
+@dfn{Guix System Distribution}, kurz GuixSD (@pxref{GNU-Distribution}),
+verwenden. Mit GNU@tie{}GuixSD @emph{deklarieren} Sie alle Aspekte der
+Betriebssystemkonfiguration und Guix kümmert sich darum, die Konfiguration
+auf transaktionsbasierte, reproduzierbare und zustandslose Weise zu
+instanzieren (@pxref{Systemkonfiguration}).
+
+@cindex funktionale Paketverwaltung
+@cindex isolation
+Intern implementiert Guix die Disziplin der @dfn{funktionalen
+Paketverwaltung}, zu der Nix schon die Pionierarbeit geleistet hat
+(@pxref{Danksagungen}). In Guix wird der Prozess, ein Paket zu erstellen
+und zu installieren, als eine @emph{Funktion} im mathematischen Sinn
+aufgefasst. Diese Funktion hat Eingaben, wie zum Beispiel
+Erstellungs-Skripts, einen Compiler und Bibliotheken, und liefert ein
+installiertes Paket. Als eine reine Funktion hängt sein Ergebnis allein von
+seinen Eingaben ab — zum Beispiel kann er nicht auf Software oder Skripts
+Bezug nehmen, die nicht ausdrücklich als Eingaben übergeben wurden. Eine
+Erstellungsfunktion führt immer zum selben Ergebnis, wenn ihr die gleiche
+Menge an Eingaben übergeben wurde. Sie kann die Umgebung des laufenden
+Systems auf keine Weise beeinflussen, zum Beispiel kann sie keine Dateien
+außerhalb ihrer Erstellungs- und Installationsverzeichnisse verändern. Um
+dies zu erreichen, laufen Erstellungsprozesse in isolieren Umgebungen
+(sogenannte @dfn{Container}), wo nur ausdrückliche Eingaben sichtbar sind.
+
+@cindex Store
+Das Ergebnis von Paketerstellungsfunktionen wird im Dateisystem
+@dfn{zwischengespeichert} in einem besonderen Verzeichnis, was als @dfn{der
+Store} bezeichnet wird (@pxref{Der Store}). Jedes Paket wird in sein eigenes
+Verzeichnis im Store installiert — standardmäßig ist er unter
+@file{/gnu/store} zu finden. Der Verzeichnisname enthält einen Hash aller
+Eingaben, anhand derer das Paket erzeugt wurde, somit hat das Ändern einer
+Eingabe einen völlig anderen Verzeichnisnamen zur Folge.
+
+Dieses Vorgehen ist die Grundlage für die Guix auszeichnenden
+Funktionalitäten: Unterstützung transaktionsbasierter Paketaktualisierungen
+und -rückstufungen, Installation von Paketen als einfacher Nutzer sowie
+Garbage Collection für Pakete (@pxref{Funktionalitäten}).
+
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node Installation
+@chapter Installation
+
+@cindex Guix installieren
+@cindex official website
+GNU Guix kann von seiner Webseite unter
+@url{http://www.gnu.org/software/guix/} heruntergeladen werden. Dieser
+Abschnitt beschreibt die Software-Voraussetzungen von Guix und wie man es
+installiert, so dass man es benutzen kann.
+
+Beachten Sie, dass es in diesem Abschnitt um die Installation des
+Paketverwaltungswerkzeugs geht, welche auf einem laufenden GNU/Linux-System
+vollzogen werden kann. Falls Sie stattdessen das vollständige
+GNU-Betriebssystem installieren möchten, werfen Sie einen Blick in den
+Abschnitt @pxref{Systeminstallation}.
+
+@cindex Fremddistribution
+@cindex directories related to foreign distro
+
+Wenn es auf ein bestehendes GNU/Linux-System installiert wird — im Folgenden
+als @dfn{Fremddistribution} bezeichnet —, ergänzt GNU@tie{}Guix die
+verfügbaren Werkzeuge, ohne dass sie sich gegenseitig stören. Guix’ Daten
+befinden sich ausschließlich in zwei Verzeichnissen, üblicherweise
+@file{/gnu/store} und @file{/var/guix}; andere Dateien auf Ihrem System wie
+@file{/etc} bleiben unberührt.
+
+Sobald es installiert ist, kann Guix durch Ausführen von @command{guix pull}
+aktualisiert werden (@pxref{Aufruf von guix pull}).
+
+@menu
+* Aus Binärdatei installieren::  Guix installieren, ohne Zeit zu verlieren!
+* Voraussetzungen::          Zum Erstellen und Benutzen von Guix nötige 
+                               Software.
+* Die Testsuite laufen lassen::  Guix testen.
+* Den Daemon einrichten::    Wie man die Umgebung des Erstellungs-Daemons 
+                               einrichtet.
+* Aufruf des guix-daemon::   Den Erstellungs-Daemon laufen lassen.
+* Anwendungen einrichten::   Anwendungsspezifische Einstellungen.
+@end menu
+
+@node Aus Binärdatei installieren
+@section Aus Binärdatei installieren
+
+@cindex Guix aus Binärdateien installieren
+@cindex installer script
+Dieser Abschnitt beschreibt, wie sich Guix auf einem beliebigen System aus
+einem alle Komponenten umfassenden Tarball installieren lässt, der
+Binärdateien für Guix und all seine Abhängigkeiten liefert. Dies geht in der
+Regel schneller, als Guix aus seinen Quelldateien zu installieren, was in
+den nächsten Abschnitten beschrieben wird. Vorausgesetzt wird hier
+lediglich, dass GNU@tie{}tar und Xz verfügbar sind.
+
+Wir bieten ein
+@uref{https://git.savannah.gnu.org/cgit/guix.git/plain/etc/guix-install.sh,
+Installations-Skript für die Shell}, welches Guix automatisch herunterlädt,
+installiert und eine erste Konfiguration von Guix mit sich bringt. Es sollte
+als der Administratornutzer (als »root«) ausgeführt werden.
+
+Die Installation läuft so ab:
+
+@enumerate
+@item
+@cindex Guix-Binärdatei herunterladen
+Download the binary tarball from
+@indicateurl{https://alpha.gnu.org/gnu/guix/guix-binary-@value{VERSION}.@var{system}.tar.xz},
+where @var{system} is @code{x86_64-linux} for an @code{x86_64} machine
+already running the kernel Linux, and so on.
+
+@c The following is somewhat duplicated in ``System Installation''.
+Achten Sie darauf, auch die zugehörige @file{.sig}-Datei herunterzuladen und
+verifizieren Sie damit die Authentizität des Tarballs, ungefähr so:
+
+@example
+$ wget https://alpha.gnu.org/gnu/guix/guix-binary-@value{VERSION}.@var{system}.tar.xz.sig
+$ gpg --verify guix-binary-@value{VERSION}.@var{system}.tar.xz.sig
+@end example
+
+Falls dieser Befehl fehlschlägt, weil Sie nicht über den nötigen
+öffentlichen Schlüssel verfügen, können Sie ihn mit diesem Befehl
+importieren:
+
+@example
+$ gpg --keyserver @value{KEY-SERVER} \
+      --recv-keys @value{OPENPGP-SIGNING-KEY-ID}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+@c end authentication part
+und den Befehl @code{gpg --verify} erneut ausführen.
+
+@item
+Nun müssen Sie zum Administratornutzer @code{root} wechseln. Abhängig von
+Ihrer Distribution müssen Sie dazu etwa @code{su -} oder @code{sudo -i}
+ausführen. Danach führen Sie als @code{root}-Nutzer aus:
+
+@example
+# cd /tmp
+# tar --warning=no-timestamp -xf \
+     guix-binary-@value{VERSION}.@var{system}.tar.xz
+# mv var/guix /var/ && mv gnu /
+@end example
+
+Dadurch wird @file{/gnu/store} (@pxref{Der Store}) und @file{/var/guix}
+erzeugt. Letzteres enthält ein fertiges Guix-Profil für den
+Administratornutzer @code{root} (wie im nächsten Schritt beschrieben).
+
+Entpacken Sie den Tarball @emph{nicht} auf einem schon funktionierenden
+Guix-System, denn es würde seine eigenen essenziellen Dateien überschreiben.
+
+Die Befehlszeilenoption @code{--warning=no-timestamp} stellt sicher, dass
+GNU@tie{}tar nicht vor »unplausibel alten Zeitstempeln« warnt (solche
+Warnungen traten bei GNU@tie{}tar 1.26 und älter auf, neue Versionen machen
+keine Probleme). Sie treten auf, weil alle Dateien im Archiv als
+Änderungszeitpunkt null eingetragen bekommen haben (das bezeichnet den
+1. Januar 1970). Das ist Absicht, damit der Inhalt des Archivs nicht davon
+abhängt, wann es erstellt wurde, und es somit reproduzierbar wird.
+
+@item
+Make the profile available under @file{~root/.config/guix/current}, which is
+where @command{guix pull} will install updates (@pxref{Aufruf von guix pull}):
+
+@example
+# mkdir -p ~root/.config/guix
+# ln -sf /var/guix/profiles/per-user/root/current-guix \
+         ~root/.config/guix/current
+@end example
+
+»Sourcen« Sie @file{etc/profile}, um @code{PATH} und andere relevante
+Umgebungsvariable zu ergänzen:
+
+@example
+# GUIX_PROFILE="`echo ~root`/.config/guix/current" ; \
+  source $GUIX_PROFILE/etc/profile
+@end example
+
+@item
+Erzeugen Sie Nutzergruppe und Nutzerkonten für die Erstellungs-Benutzer wie
+folgt (@pxref{Einrichten der Erstellungsumgebung}).
+
+@item
+Führen Sie den Daemon aus, und lassen Sie ihn automatisch bei jedem
+Hochfahren starten.
+
+Wenn Ihre Wirts-Distribution systemd als »init«-System verwendet, können Sie
+das mit folgenden Befehlen veranlassen:
+
+@c Versions of systemd that supported symlinked service files are not
+@c yet widely deployed, so we should suggest that users copy the service
+@c files into place.
+@c
+@c See this thread for more information:
+@c http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/guix-devel/2017-01/msg01199.html
+
+@example
+# cp ~root/.config/guix/current/lib/systemd/system/guix-daemon.service \
+     /etc/systemd/system/
+# systemctl start guix-daemon && systemctl enable guix-daemon
+@end example
+
+Wenn Ihre Wirts-Distribution als »init«-System Upstart verwendet:
+
+@example
+# initctl reload-configuration
+# cp ~root/.config/guix/current/lib/upstart/system/guix-daemon.conf \
+     /etc/init/
+# start guix-daemon
+@end example
+
+Andernfalls können Sie den Daemon immer noch manuell starten, mit:
+
+@example
+# ~root/.config/guix/current/bin/guix-daemon \
+       --build-users-group=guixbuild
+@end example
+
+@item
+Stellen Sie den @command{guix}-Befehl auch anderen Nutzern Ihrer Maschine
+zur Verfügung, zum Beispiel so:
+
+@example
+# mkdir -p /usr/local/bin
+# cd /usr/local/bin
+# ln -s /var/guix/profiles/per-user/root/current-guix/bin/guix
+@end example
+
+Es ist auch eine gute Idee, die Info-Version dieses Handbuchs ebenso
+verfügbar zu machen:
+
+@example
+# mkdir -p /usr/local/share/info
+# cd /usr/local/share/info
+# for i in /var/guix/profiles/per-user/root/current-guix/share/info/* ;
+  do ln -s $i ; done
+@end example
+
+Auf diese Art wird, unter der Annahme, dass bei Ihnen
+@file{/usr/local/share/info} im Suchpfad eingetragen ist, das Ausführen von
+@command{info guix} dieses Handbuch öffnen (@pxref{Other Info Directories,,,
+texinfo, GNU Texinfo} hat weitere Details, wie Sie den Info-Suchpfad ändern
+können).
+
+@item
+@cindex Substitute, deren Autorisierung
+Um Substitute von @code{hydra.gnu.org} oder einem Spiegelserver davon zu
+benutzen (@pxref{Substitute}), müssen sie erst autorisiert werden:
+
+@example
+# guix archive --authorize < \
+     ~root/.config/guix/current/share/guix/hydra.gnu.org.pub
+@end example
+
+@item
+Alle Nutzer müssen womöglich ein paar zusätzliche Schritte ausführen, damit
+ihre Guix-Umgebung genutzt werden kann, siehe @pxref{Anwendungen einrichten}.
+@end enumerate
+
+Voilà, die Installation ist fertig!
+
+Sie können nachprüfen, dass Guix funktioniert, indem Sie ein Beispielpaket
+in das root-Profil installieren:
+
+@example
+# guix package -i hello
+@end example
+
+The @code{guix} package must remain available in @code{root}'s profile, or
+it would become subject to garbage collection---in which case you would find
+yourself badly handicapped by the lack of the @command{guix} command.  In
+other words, do not remove @code{guix} by running @code{guix package -r
+guix}.
+
+Der Tarball zur Installation aus einer Binärdatei kann einfach durch
+Ausführung des folgenden Befehls im Guix-Quellbaum (re-)produziert und
+verifiziert werden:
+
+@example
+make guix-binary.@var{system}.tar.xz
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+...@: which, in turn, runs:
+
+@example
+guix pack -s @var{system} --localstatedir \
+  --profile-name=current-guix guix
+@end example
+
+Siehe @xref{Aufruf von guix pack} für weitere Informationen zu diesem
+praktischen Werkzeug.
+
+@node Voraussetzungen
+@section Voraussetzungen
+
+Dieser Abschnitt listet Voraussetzungen auf, um Guix aus seinem Quellcode zu
+erstellen. Der Erstellungsprozess für Guix ist derselbe wie für andere
+GNU-Software und wird hier nicht beschrieben. Bitte lesen Sie die Dateien
+@file{README} und @file{INSTALL} im Guix-Quellbaum, um weitere Details zu
+erfahren.
+
+GNU Guix hat folgende Pakete als Abhängigkeiten:
+
+@itemize
+@item @url{http://gnu.org/software/guile/, GNU Guile}, Version 2.0.13 oder
+neuer, einschließlich 2.2.x,
+@item @url{https://notabug.org/cwebber/guile-gcrypt, Guile-Gcrypt}, version
+0.1.0 or later;
+@item
+@uref{http://gnutls.org/, GnuTLS}, im Speziellen dessen Bindungen für Guile
+(@pxref{Guile Preparations, how to install the GnuTLS bindings for Guile,,
+gnutls-guile, GnuTLS-Guile}),
+@item
+@uref{https://notabug.org/guile-sqlite3/guile-sqlite3, Guile-SQLite3},
+version 0.1.0 or later;
+@item
+@c FIXME: Specify a version number once a release has been made.
+@uref{https://gitlab.com/guile-git/guile-git, Guile-Git}, vom August 2017
+oder neuer,
+@item @url{http://zlib.net, zlib},
+@item @url{http://www.gnu.org/software/make/, GNU Make}.
+@end itemize
+
+Folgende Abhängigkeiten sind optional:
+
+@itemize
+@item
+Wenn Sie @url{http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/guile-json/, Guile-JSON}
+installieren, können Sie den Befehl @command{guix import pypi} benutzen
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix import}). Das spielt hauptsächlich für Entwickler und
+nicht für Gelegenheitsnutzer eine Rolle.
+
+@item
+@c Note: We need at least 0.10.2 for 'channel-send-eof'.
+Unterstützung für das Auslagern von Erstellungen (@pxref{Auslagern des Daemons einrichten}) und @command{guix copy} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix copy}) hängt von
+@uref{https://github.com/artyom-poptsov/guile-ssh, Guile-SSH}, Version
+0.10.2 oder neuer, ab.
+
+@item
+Wenn @url{http://www.bzip.org, libbz2} verfügbar ist, kann
+@command{guix-daemon} damit Erstellungsprotokolle komprimieren.
+@end itemize
+
+Sofern nicht @code{--disable-daemon} beim Aufruf von @command{configure}
+übergeben wurde, benötigen Sie auch folgende Pakete:
+
+@itemize
+@item @url{http://gnupg.org/, GNU libgcrypt},
+@item @url{http://sqlite.org, SQLite 3},
+@item @url{http://gcc.gnu.org, GCC's g++} mit Unterstützung für den
+C++11-Standard.
+@end itemize
+
+@cindex Zustandsverzeichnis
+Sollten Sie Guix auf einem System konfigurieren, auf dem Guix bereits
+installiert ist, dann stellen Sie sicher, dasselbe Zustandsverzeichnis wie
+für die bestehende Installation zu verwenden. Benutzen Sie dazu die
+Befehlszeilenoption @code{--localstatedir} des @command{configure}-Skripts
+(@pxref{Directory Variables, @code{localstatedir},, standards, GNU Coding
+Standards}). Das @command{configure}-Skript schützt vor ungewollter
+Fehlkonfiguration der @var{localstatedir}, damit sie nicht versehentlich
+Ihren Store verfälschen (@pxref{Der Store}).
+
+@cindex Nix, Kompatibilität
+Wenn eine funktionierende Installation of @url{http://nixos.org/nix/, the
+Nix package manager} verfügbar ist, können Sie Guix stattdessen mit
+@code{--disable-daemon} konfigurieren. In diesem Fall ersetzt Nix die drei
+oben genannten Abhängigkeiten.
+
+Guix ist mit Nix kompatibel, daher ist es möglich, denselben Store für beide
+zu verwenden. Dazu müssen Sie an @command{configure} nicht nur denselben
+Wert für @code{--with-store-dir} übergeben, sondern auch denselben Wert für
+@code{--localstatedir}. Letzterer ist deswegen essenziell, weil er unter
+Anderem angibt, wo die Datenbank liegt, in der sich die Metainformationen
+über den Store befinden. Für Nix sind die Werte standardmäßig
+@code{--with-store-dir=/nix/store} und
+@code{--localstatedir=/nix/var}. Beachten Sie, dass @code{--disable-daemon}
+nicht erforderlich ist, wenn Sie die Absicht haben, den Store mit Nix zu
+teilen.
+
+@node Die Testsuite laufen lassen
+@section Die Testsuite laufen lassen
+
+@cindex Testkatalog
+Nachdem @command{configure} und @code{make} erfolgreich durchgelaufen sind,
+ist es ratsam, den Testkatalog auszuführen. Er kann dabei helfen, Probleme
+mit der Einrichtung oder Systemumgebung zu finden, oder auch Probleme in
+Guix selbst — und Testfehler zu melden ist eine wirklich gute Art und Weise,
+bei der Verbesserung von Guix mitzuhelfen. Um den Testkatalog auszuführen,
+geben Sie Folgendes ein:
+
+@example
+make check
+@end example
+
+Testfälle können parallel ausgeführt werden. Sie können die
+Befehlszeiltenoption @code{-j} von GNU@tie{}make benutzen, damit es
+schneller geht. Der erste Durchlauf kann auf neuen Maschinen ein paar
+Minuten dauern, nachfolgende Ausführungen werden schneller sein, weil der
+für die Tests erstellte Store schon einige Dinge zwischengespeichert haben
+wird.
+
+Es ist auch möglich, eine Teilmenge der Tests laufen zu lassen, indem Sie
+die @code{TESTS}-Variable des Makefiles ähnlich wie in diesem Beispiel
+definieren:
+
+@example
+make check TESTS="tests/store.scm tests/cpio.scm"
+@end example
+
+Standardmäßig werden Testergebnisse pro Datei angezeigt. Um die Details
+jedes einzelnen Testfalls zu sehen, können Sie wie in diesem Beispiel die
+@code{SCM_LOG_DRIVER_FLAGS}-Variable des Makefiles definieren:
+
+@example
+make check TESTS="tests/base64.scm" SCM_LOG_DRIVER_FLAGS="--brief=no"
+@end example
+
+Kommt es zum Fehlschlag, senden Sie bitte eine E-Mail an
+@email{bug-guix@@gnu.org} und fügen Sie die Datei @file{test-suite.log} als
+Anhang bei. Bitte geben Sie dabei in Ihrer Nachricht die benutzte Version
+von Guix an sowie die Versionsnummern der Abhängigkeiten
+(@pxref{Voraussetzungen}).
+
+Guix wird auch mit einem Testkatalog für das ganze System ausgeliefert, der
+vollständige Instanzen des GuixSD-Betriebssystems testet. Er kann nur auf
+Systemen benutzt werden, auf denen Guix bereits installiert ist, mit
+folgendem Befehl:
+
+@example
+make check-system
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Oder, auch hier, indem Sie @code{TESTS} definieren, um eine Teilmenge der
+auszuführenden Tests anzugeben:
+
+@example
+make check-system TESTS="basic mcron"
+@end example
+
+Diese Systemtests sind in den @code{(gnu tests @dots{})}-Modulen
+definiert. Sie funktionieren, indem Sie das getestete Betriebssystem mitsamt
+schlichter Instrumentierung in einer virtuellen Maschine (VM) ausführen. Die
+Tests können aufwendige Berechnungen durchführen oder sie günstig umgehen,
+je nachdem, ob für ihre Abhängigkeiten Substitute zur Verfügung stehen
+(@pxref{Substitute}). Manche von ihnen nehmen viel Speicherplatz in
+Anspruch, um die VM-Abbilder zu speichern.
+
+Auch hier gilt: Falls Testfehler auftreten, senden Sie bitte alle Details an
+@email{bug-guix@@gnu.org}.
+
+@node Den Daemon einrichten
+@section Den Daemon einrichten
+
+@cindex Daemon
+Operationen wie das Erstellen eines Pakets oder Laufenlassen des
+Müllsammlers werden alle durch einen spezialisierten Prozess durchgeführt,
+den @dfn{Erstellungs-Daemon}, im Auftrag seiner Kunden (den Clients). Nur
+der Daemon darf auf den Store und seine zugehörige Datenbank
+zugreifen. Daher wird jede den Store verändernde Operation durch den Daemon
+durchgeführt. Zum Beispiel kommunizieren Befehlszeilenwerkzeuge wie
+@command{guix package} und @command{guix build} mit dem Daemon (mittels
+entfernter Prozeduraufrufe), um ihm Anweisungen zu geben, was er tun soll.
+
+Folgende Abschnitte beschreiben, wie Sie die Umgebung des
+Erstellungs-Daemons ausstatten sollten. Siehe auch @ref{Substitute} für
+Informationen darüber, wie Sie es dem Daemon ermöglichen, vorerstellte
+Binärdateien herunterzuladen.
+
+@menu
+* Einrichten der Erstellungsumgebung::  Die isolierte Umgebung zum Erstellen 
+                                          vorbereiten.
+* Auslagern des Daemons einrichten::  Erstellungen auf entfernte Maschinen 
+                                        auslagern.
+* SELinux-Unterstützung::   Wie man eine SELinux-Richtlinie für den Daemon 
+                               einrichtet.
+@end menu
+
+@node Einrichten der Erstellungsumgebung
+@subsection Einrichten der Erstellungsumgebung
+
+@cindex Erstellungsumgebung
+In einem normalen Mehrbenutzersystem werden Guix und sein Daemon — das
+Programm @command{guix-daemon} — vom Systemadministrator installiert;
+@file{/gnu/store} gehört @code{root} und @command{guix-daemon} läuft als
+@code{root}. Nicht mit erweiterten Rechten ausgestattete Nutzer können
+Guix-Werkzeuge benutzen, um Pakete zu erstellen oder anderweitig auf den
+Store zuzugreifen, und der Daemon wird dies für sie erledigen und dabei
+sicherstellen, dass der Store in einem konsistenten Zustand verbleibt und
+sich die Nutzer erstellte Pakete teilen.
+
+@cindex Erstellungsbenutzer
+Wenn @command{guix-daemon} als Administratornutzer @code{root} läuft, wollen
+Sie aber vielleicht dennoch nicht, dass Paketerstellungsprozesse auch als
+@code{root} ablaufen, aus offensichtlichen Sicherheitsgründen. Um dies zu
+vermeiden, sollte ein besonderer Pool aus @dfn{Erstellungsbenutzern}
+geschaffen werden, damit vom Daemon gestartete Erstellungsprozesse ihn
+benutzen. Diese Erstellungsbenutzer müssen weder eine Shell noch einen
+Persönlichen Ordner zugewiesen bekommen, sie werden lediglich benutzt, wenn
+der Daemon @code{root}-Rechte in Erstellungsprozessen ablegt. Mehrere solche
+Benutzer zu haben, ermöglicht es dem Daemon, verschiedene
+Erstellungsprozessen unter verschiedenen Benutzeridentifikatoren (UIDs) zu
+starten, was garantiert, dass sie einander nicht stören — eine essenzielle
+Funktionalität, da Erstellungen als reine Funktionen angesehen werden
+(@pxref{Einführung}).
+
+Auf einem GNU/Linux-System kann ein Pool von Erstellungsbenutzern wie folgt
+erzeugt werden (mit Bash-Syntax und den Befehlen von @code{shadow}):
+
+@c See http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/bug-guix/2013-01/msg00239.html
+@c for why `-G' is needed.
+@example
+# groupadd --system guixbuild
+# for i in `seq -w 1 10`;
+  do
+    useradd -g guixbuild -G guixbuild                  \
+            -d /var/empty -s `which nologin`           \
+            -c "Guix-Erstellungsbenutzer $i" --system  \
+            guixbuilder$i;
+  done
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Die Anzahl der Erstellungsbenutzer entscheidet, wieviele Erstellungsaufträge
+parallel ausgeführt werden können, wie es mit der Befehlszeilenoption
+@option{--max-jobs} vorgegeben werden kann (@pxref{Aufruf des guix-daemon,
+@option{--max-jobs}}). Um @command{guix system vm} und ähnliche Befehle
+nutzen zu können, müssen Sie die Erstellungsbenutzer unter Umständen zur
+@code{kvm}-Benutzergruppe hinzufügen, damit sie Zugriff auf @file{/dev/kvm}
+haben, mit @code{-G guixbuild,kvm} statt @code{-G guixbuild}
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix system}).
+
+Das Programm @code{guix-daemon} kann mit dem folgenden Befehl als
+@code{root} gestartet werden@footnote{Wenn Ihre Maschine systemd als
+»init«-System verwendet, genügt es, die Datei
+@file{@var{prefix}/lib/systemd/system/guix-daemon.service} in
+@file{/etc/systemd/system} zu platzieren, damit @command{guix-daemon}
+automatisch gestartet wird. Ebenso können Sie, wenn Ihre Maschine Upstart
+als »init«-System benutzt, die Datei
+@file{@var{prefix}/lib/upstart/system/guix-daemon.conf} in @file{/etc/init}
+platzieren.}:
+
+@example
+# guix-daemon --build-users-group=guixbuild
+@end example
+
+@cindex chroot
+@noindent
+Auf diese Weise startet der Daemon Erstellungsprozesse in einem chroot als
+einer der @code{guixbuilder}-Benutzer. Auf GNU/Linux enthält die
+chroot-Umgebung standardmäßig nichts außer:
+
+@c Keep this list in sync with libstore/build.cc! -----------------------
+@itemize
+@item
+einem minimalen @code{/dev}-Verzeichnis, was größtenteils vom @code{/dev}
+des Wirtssystems unabhängig erstellt wurde@footnote{»Größtenteils«, denn
+obwohl die Menge an Dateien, die im @code{/dev} des chroots vorkommen, fest
+ist, können die meisten dieser Dateien nur dann erstellt werden, wenn das
+Wirtssystem sie auch hat.},
+
+@item
+dem @code{/proc}-Verzeichnis, es zeigt nur die Prozesse des Containers, weil
+ein separater Namensraum für Prozess-IDs (PIDs) benutzt wird,
+
+@item
+@file{/etc/passwd} mit einem Eintrag für den aktuellen Benutzer und einem
+Eintrag für den Benutzer @file{nobody},
+
+@item
+@file{/etc/group} mit einem Eintrag für die Gruppe des Benutzers,
+
+@item
+@file{/etc/hosts} mit einem Eintrag, der @code{localhost} auf
+@code{127.0.0.1} abbildet,
+
+@item
+einem @file{/tmp}-Verzeichnis mit Schreibrechten.
+@end itemize
+
+Sie können beeinflussen, in welchem Verzeichnis der Daemon Erstellungsbäume
+unterbringt, indem sie den Wert der Umgebungsvariablen @code{TMPDIR}
+ändern. Allerdings heißt innerhalb des chroots der Erstellungsbaum immer
+@file{/tmp/guix-build-@var{name}.drv-0}, wobei @var{name} der Ableitungsname
+ist — z.B. @code{coreutils-8.24}. Dadurch hat der Wert von @code{TMPDIR}
+keinen Einfluss auf die Erstellungsumgebung, wodurch Unterschiede vermieden
+werden, falls Erstellungsprozesse den Namen ihres Erstellungsbaumes
+einfangen.
+
+@vindex http_proxy
+Der Daemon befolgt außerdem den Wert der Umgebungsvariablen
+@code{http_proxy} für von ihm durchgeführte HTTP-Downloads, sei es für
+Ableitungen mit fester Ausgabe (@pxref{Ableitungen}) oder für Substitute
+(@pxref{Substitute}).
+
+Wenn Sie Guix als ein Benutzer ohne erweiterte Rechte installieren, ist es
+dennoch möglich, @command{guix-daemon} auszuführen, sofern Sie
+@code{--disable-chroot} übergeben. Allerdings können Erstellungsprozesse
+dann nicht voneinander und vom Rest des Systems isoliert werden. Daher
+können sich Erstellungsprozesse gegenseitig stören und auf Programme,
+Bibliotheken und andere Dateien zugreifen, die dem restlichen System zur
+Verfügung stehen — was es deutlich schwerer macht, sie als @emph{reine}
+Funktionen aufzufassen.
+
+
+@node Auslagern des Daemons einrichten
+@subsection Nutzung der Auslagerungsfunktionalität
+
+@cindex auslagern
+@cindex Build-Hook
+Wenn erwünscht kann der Erstellungs-Daemon Ableitungserstellungen
+@dfn{auslagern} auf andere Maschinen, auf denen Guix läuft, mit Hilfe des
+@code{offload}-»@dfn{Build-Hooks}«@footnote{Diese Funktionalität ist nur
+verfügbar, wenn @uref{https://github.com/artyom-poptsov/guile-ssh,
+Guile-SSH} vorhanden ist.}. Wenn diese Funktionalität aktiviert ist, wird
+eine nutzerspezifizierte Liste von Erstellungsmaschinen aus
+@file{/etc/guix/machines.scm} gelesen. Wann immer eine Erstellung angefragt
+wird, zum Beispiel durch @code{guix build}, versucht der Daemon, sie an eine
+der Erstellungsmaschinen auszulagern, die die Einschränkungen der Ableitung
+erfüllen, insbesondere ihren Systemtyp — z.B. @file{x86_64-linux}. Fehlende
+Voraussetzungen für die Erstellung werden über SSH auf die Zielmaschine
+kopiert, welche dann mit der Erstellung weitermacht. Hat sie Erfolg damit,
+so werden die Ausgabe oder Ausgaben der Erstellung zurück auf die
+ursprüngliche Maschine kopiert.
+
+Die Datei @file{/etc/guix/machines.scm} sieht normalerweise so aus:
+
+@example
+(list (build-machine
+        (name "eightysix.example.org")
+        (system "x86_64-linux")
+        (host-key "ssh-ed25519 AAAAC3Nza@dots{}")
+        (user "bob")
+        (speed 2.))     ;unglaublich schnell!
+
+      (build-machine
+        (name "meeps.example.org")
+        (system "mips64el-linux")
+        (host-key "ssh-rsa AAAAB3Nza@dots{}")
+        (user "alice")
+        (private-key
+         (string-append (getenv "HOME")
+                        "/.ssh/identität-für-guix"))))
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Im obigen Beispiel geben wir eine Liste mit zwei Erstellungsmaschinen vor,
+eine für die @code{x86_64}-Architektur und eine für die
+@code{mips64el}-Architektur.
+
+Tatsächlich ist diese Datei — wenig überraschend! — eine Scheme-Datei, die
+ausgewertet wird, wenn der @code{offload}-Hook gestartet wird. Der Wert, den
+sie zurückliefert, muss eine Liste von @code{build-machine}-Objekten
+sein. Obwohl dieses Beispiel eine feste Liste von Erstellungsmaschinen
+zeigt, könnte man auch auf die Idee kommen, etwa mit DNS-SD eine Liste
+möglicher im lokalen Netzwerk entdeckter Erstellungsmaschinen zu liefern
+(@pxref{Einführung, Guile-Avahi,, guile-avahi, Using Avahi in Guile Scheme
+Programs}). Der Datentyp @code{build-machine} wird im Folgenden weiter
+ausgeführt.
+
+@deftp {Datentyp} build-machine
+Dieser Datentyp repräsentiert Erstellungsmaschinen, an die der Daemon
+Erstellungen auslagern darf. Die wichtigen Felder sind:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item name
+Der Hostname der entfernten Maschine.
+
+@item system
+Der Systemtyp der entfernten Maschine — z.B. @code{"x86_64-linux"}.
+
+@item user
+Das Benutzerkonto, mit dem eine Verbindung zur entfernten Maschine über SSH
+aufgebaut werden soll. Beachten Sie, dass das SSH-Schlüsselpaar @emph{nicht}
+durch eine Passphrase geschützt sein darf, damit nicht-interaktive
+Anmeldungen möglich sind.
+
+@item host-key
+Dies muss der @dfn{öffentliche SSH-Host-Schlüssel} der Maschine im
+OpenSSH-Format sein. Er wird benutzt, um die Identität der Maschine zu
+prüfen, wenn wir uns mit ihr verbinden. Er ist eine lange Zeichenkette, die
+ungefähr so aussieht:
+
+@example
+ssh-ed25519 AAAAC3NzaC@dots{}mde+UhL hint@@example.org
+@end example
+
+Wenn auf der Maschine der OpenSSH-Daemon, @command{sshd}, läuft, ist der
+Host-Schlüssel in einer Datei wie @file{/etc/ssh/ssh_host_ed25519_key.pub}
+zu finden.
+
+Wenn auf der Maschine der SSH-Daemon von GNU@tie{}lsh, nämlich
+@command{lshd}, läuft, befindet sich der Host-Schlüssel in
+@file{/etc/lsh/host-key.pub} oder einer ähnlichen Datei. Er kann ins
+OpenSSH-Format umgewandelt werden durch @command{lsh-export-key}
+(@pxref{Converting keys,,, lsh, LSH Manual}):
+
+@example
+$ lsh-export-key --openssh < /etc/lsh/host-key.pub 
+ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAAEOp8FoQAAAQEAs1eB46LV@dots{}
+@end example
+
+@end table
+
+Eine Reihe optionaler Felder kann festgelegt werden:
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @code{port} (Vorgabe: @code{22})
+Portnummer des SSH-Servers auf der Maschine.
+
+@item @code{private-key} (Vorgabe: @file{~root/.ssh/id_rsa})
+The SSH private key file to use when connecting to the machine, in OpenSSH
+format.  This key must not be protected with a passphrase.
+
+Beachten Sie, dass als Vorgabewert der private Schlüssel @emph{des
+root-Benutzers} genommen wird. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass er existiert,
+wenn Sie die Standardeinstellung verwenden.
+
+@item @code{compression} (Vorgabe: @code{"zlib@@openssh.com,zlib"})
+@itemx @code{compression-level} (Vorgabe: @code{3})
+Die Kompressionsmethoden auf SSH-Ebene und das angefragte
+Kompressionsniveau.
+
+Beachten Sie, dass Auslagerungen SSH-Kompression benötigen, um beim
+Übertragen von Dateien an Erstellungsmaschinen und zurück weniger Bandbreite
+zu benutzen.
+
+@item @code{daemon-socket} (Vorgabe: @code{"/var/guix/daemon-socket/socket"})
+Dateiname des Unix-Sockets, auf dem @command{guix-daemon} auf der Maschine
+lauscht.
+
+@item @code{parallel-builds} (Vorgabe: @code{1})
+Die Anzahl der Erstellungen, die auf der Maschine parallel ausgeführt werden
+können.
+
+@item @code{speed} (Vorgabe: @code{1.0})
+Ein »relativer Geschwindigkeitsfaktor«. Der Auslagerungsplaner gibt
+tendenziell Maschinen mit höherem Geschwindigkeitsfaktor den Vorrang.
+
+@item @code{features} (Vorgabe: @code{'()})
+Eine Liste von Zeichenketten, die besondere von der Maschine unterstützte
+Funktionalitäten bezeichnen. Ein Beispiel ist @code{"kvm"} für Maschinen,
+die über die KVM-Linux-Module zusammen mit entsprechender
+Hardware-Unterstützung verfügen. Ableitungen können Funktionalitäten dem
+Namen nach anfragen und werden dann auf passenden Erstellungsmaschinen
+eingeplant.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+Der Befehl @code{guile} muss sich im Suchpfad der Erstellungsmaschinen
+befinden. Zusätzlich müssen die Guix-Module im @code{$GUILE_LOAD_PATH} auf
+den Erstellungsmaschinen zu finden sein — um dies nachzuprüfen, können Sie
+Folgendes ausführen:
+
+@example
+ssh build-machine guile -c "'(use-modules (guix config))'"
+@end example
+
+Es gibt noch eine weitere Sache zu tun, sobald @file{machines.scm}
+eingerichtet ist. Wie zuvor erklärt, werden beim Auslagern Dateien zwischen
+den Stores der Maschinen hin- und hergeschickt. Damit das funktioniert,
+müssen Sie als Erstes ein Schlüsselpaar auf jeder Maschine erzeugen, damit
+der Daemon signierte Archive mit den Dateien aus dem Store versenden kann
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix archive}):
+
+@example
+# guix archive --generate-key
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Jede Erstellungsmaschine muss den Schlüssel der Hauptmaschine autorisieren,
+damit diese Store-Objekte von der Hauptmaschine empfangen kann:
+
+@example
+# guix archive --authorize < öffentlicher-schlüssel-hauptmaschine.txt
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Andersherum muss auch die Hauptmaschine den jeweiligen Schlüssel jeder
+Erstellungsmaschine autorisieren.
+
+Der ganze Umstand mit den Schlüsseln soll ausdrücken, dass sich Haupt- und
+Erstellungsmaschinen paarweise gegenseitig vertrauen. Konkret kann der
+Erstellungs-Daemon auf der Hauptmaschine die Echtheit von den
+Erstellungsmaschinen empfangener Dateien gewährleisten (und umgekehrt), und
+auch dass sie nicht sabotiert wurden und mit einem autorisierten Schlüssel
+signiert wurden.
+
+@cindex Auslagerung testen
+Um zu testen, ob Ihr System funktioniert, führen Sie diesen Befehl auf der
+Hauptmaschine aus:
+
+@example
+# guix offload test
+@end example
+
+Dadurch wird versucht, zu jeder Erstellungsmaschine eine Verbindung
+herzustellen, die in @file{/etc/guix/machines.scm} angegeben wurde,
+sichergestellt, dass auf jeder Guile und die Guix-Module nutzbar sind, und
+jeweils versucht, etwas auf die Erstellungsmaschine zu exportieren und von
+dort zu imporieren. Dabei auftretende Fehler werden gemeldet.
+
+Wenn Sie stattdessen eine andere Maschinendatei verwenden möchten, geben Sie
+diese einfach auf der Befehlszeile an:
+
+@example
+# guix offload test maschinen-qualif.scm
+@end example
+
+Letztendlich können Sie hiermit nur die Teilmenge der Maschinen testen,
+deren Name zu einem regulären Ausdruck passt:
+
+@example
+# guix offload test maschinen.scm '\.gnu\.org$'
+@end example
+
+@cindex Auslagerungs-Lagebericht
+Um die momentane Auslastung aller Erstellungs-Hosts anzuzeigen, führen Sie
+diesen Befehl auf dem Hauptknoten aus:
+
+@example
+# guix offload status
+@end example
+
+
+@node SELinux-Unterstützung
+@subsection SELinux-Unterstützung
+
+@cindex SELinux, Policy für den Daemon
+@cindex Mandatory Access Control, SELinux
+@cindex Sicherheit, des guix-daemon
+Guix enthält eine SELinux-Richtliniendatei (»Policy«) unter
+@file{etc/guix-daemon.cil}, die auf einem System installiert werden
+kann, auf dem SELinux aktiviert ist, damit Guix-Dateien gekennzeichnet
+sind, und um das erwartete Verhalten des Daemons anzugeben. Da GuixSD
+keine Grundrichtlinie (»Base Policy«) für SELinux bietet, kann diese
+Richtlinie für den Daemon auf GuixSD nicht benutzt werden.
+
+@subsubsection Installieren der SELinux-Policy
+@cindex SELinux, Policy installieren
+Um die Richtlinie (Policy) zu installieren, führen Sie folgenden Befehl mit
+Administratorrechten aus:
+
+@example
+semodule -i etc/guix-daemon.cil
+@end example
+
+Kennzeichnen Sie dann das Dateisystem neu mit @code{restorecon} oder einem
+anderen, von Ihrem System angebotenen Mechanismus.
+
+Sobald die Richtlinie installiert ist, das Dateisystem neu gekennzeichnet
+wurde und der Daemon neugestartet wurde, sollte er im Kontext
+@code{guix_daemon_t} laufen. Sie können dies mit dem folgenden Befehl
+nachprüfen:
+
+@example
+ps -Zax | grep guix-daemon
+@end example
+
+Beobachten Sie die Protokolldateien von SELinux, wenn Sie einen Befehl wie
+@code{guix build hello} ausführen, um sich zu überzeugen, dass SELinux alle
+notwendigen Operationen gestattet.
+
+@subsubsection Einschränkungen
+@cindex SELinux, Einschränkungen
+
+Diese Richtlinie ist nicht perfekt. Im Folgenden finden Sie eine Liste von
+Einschränkungen oder merkwürdigen Verhaltensweisen, die bedacht werden
+sollten, wenn man die mitgelieferte SELinux-Richtlinie für den Guix-Daemon
+einspielt.
+
+@enumerate
+@item
+@code{guix_daemon_socket_t} wird nicht wirklich benutzt. Keine der
+Socket-Operationen benutzt Kontexte, die irgendetwas mit
+@code{guix_daemon_socket_t} zu tun haben. Es schadet nicht, diese ungenutzte
+Kennzeichnung zu haben, aber es wäre besser, für die Kennzeichnung auch
+Socket-Regeln festzulegen.
+
+@item
+@code{guix gc} kann nicht auf beliebige Verknüpfungen zu Profilen
+zugreifen. Die Kennzeichnung des Ziels einer symbolischen Verknüpfung ist
+notwendigerweise unabhängig von der Dateikennzeichnung der
+Verknüpfung. Obwohl alle Profile unter $localstatedir gekennzeichnet sind,
+erben die Verknüpfungen auf diese Profile die Kennzeichnung desjenigen
+Verzeichnisses, in dem sie sich befinden. Für Verknüpfungen im Persönlichen
+Ordner des Benutzers ist das @code{user_home_t}, aber Verknüpfungen aus dem
+Persönlichen Ordner des Administratornutzers, oder @file{/tmp}, oder das
+Arbeitsverzeichnis des HTTP-Servers, etc., funktioniert das
+nicht. @code{guix gc} würde es nicht gestattet, diese Verknüpfungen
+auszulesen oder zu verfolgen.
+
+@item
+Die vom Daemon gebotene Funktionalität, auf TCP-Verbindungen zu lauschen,
+könnte nicht mehr funktionieren. Dies könnte zusätzliche Regeln brauchen,
+weil SELinux Netzwerk-Sockets anders behandelt als Dateien.
+
+@item
+Derzeit wird allen Dateien mit einem Namen, der zum regulären Ausdruck
+@code{/gnu/store/.+-(guix-.+|profile)/bin/guix-daemon} passt, die
+Kennzeichnung @code{guix_daemon_exec_t} zugewiesen, wodurch @emph{jede
+beliebige} Datei mit diesem Namen in irgendeinem Profil gestattet wäre, in
+der Domäne @code{guix_daemon_t} ausgeführt zu werden. Das ist nicht
+ideal. Ein Angreifer könnte ein Paket erstellen, dass solch eine ausführbare
+Datei enthält, und den Nutzer überzeugen, es zu installieren und
+auszuführen. Dadurch käme es in die Domäne @code{guix_daemon_t}. Ab diesem
+Punkt könnte SELinux nicht mehr verhindern, dass es auf Dateien zugreift,
+auf die Prozesse in dieser Domäne zugreifen dürfen.
+
+Wir könnten zum Zeitpunkt der Installation eine wesentlich restriktivere
+Richtlinie generieren, für die nur @emph{genau derselbe} Dateiname des
+gerade installierten @code{guix-daemon}-Programms als
+@code{guix_daemon_exec_t} gekennzeichnet würde, statt einen vieles
+umfassenden regulären Ausdruck zu benutzen. Aber dann müsste der
+Administratornutzer zum Zeitpunkt der Installation jedes Mal die Richtlinie
+installieren oder aktualisieren müssen, sobald das Guix-Paket aktualisiert
+wird, dass das tatsächlich in Benutzung befindliche
+@code{guix-daemon}-Programm enthält.
+@end enumerate
+
+@node Aufruf des guix-daemon
+@section Aufruf von @command{guix-daemon}
+
+Das Programm @command{guix-daemon} implementiert alle Funktionalitäten, um
+auf den Store zuzugreifen. Dazu gehört das Starten von Erstellungsprozessen,
+das Ausführen des Müllsammlers, das Abfragen, ob ein Erstellungsergebnis
+verfügbar ist, etc. Normalerweise wird er so als Administratornutzer
+(@code{root}) gestartet:
+
+@example
+# guix-daemon --build-users-group=guixbuild
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Details, wie Sie ihn einrichten, finden Sie im Abschnitt @pxref{Den Daemon einrichten}.
+
+@cindex chroot
+@cindex Container, Erstellungsumgebung
+@cindex Erstellungsumgebung
+@cindex Reproduzierbare Erstellungen
+Standardmäßig führt @command{guix-daemon} Erstellungsprozesse mit
+unterschiedlichen UIDs aus, die aus der Erstellungsgruppe stammen, deren
+Name mit @code{--build-users-group} übergeben wurde. Außerdem läuft jeder
+Erstellungsprozess in einer chroot-Umgebung, die nur die Teilmenge des
+Stores enthält, von der der Erstellungsprozess abhängt, entsprechend seiner
+Ableitung (@pxref{Programmierschnittstelle, derivation}), und ein paar
+bestimmte Systemverzeichnisse, darunter standardmäßig auch @file{/dev} und
+@file{/dev/pts}. Zudem ist die Erstellungsumgebung auf GNU/Linux ein
+@dfn{Container}: Nicht nur hat er seinen eigenen Dateisystembaum, er hat
+auch einen separaten Namensraum zum Einhängen von Dateisystemen, seinen
+eigenen Namensraum für PIDs, für Netzwerke, etc. Dies hilft dabei,
+reproduzierbare Erstellungen zu garantieren (@pxref{Funktionalitäten}).
+
+When the daemon performs a build on behalf of the user, it creates a build
+directory under @file{/tmp} or under the directory specified by its
+@code{TMPDIR} environment variable.  This directory is shared with the
+container for the duration of the build, though within the container, the
+build tree is always called @file{/tmp/guix-build-@var{name}.drv-0}.
+
+Nach Abschluss der Erstellung wird das Erstellungsverzeichnis automatisch
+entfernt, außer wenn die Erstellung fehlgeschlagen ist und der Client
+@option{--keep-failed} angegeben hat (@pxref{Aufruf von guix build,
+@option{--keep-failed}}).
+
+The daemon listens for connections and spawns one sub-process for each
+session started by a client (one of the @command{guix} sub-commands.)  The
+@command{guix processes} command allows you to get an overview of the
+activity on your system by viewing each of the active sessions and clients.
+@xref{Invoking guix processes}, for more information.
+
+Die folgenden Befehlszeilenoptionen werden unterstützt:
+
+@table @code
+@item --build-users-group=@var{Gruppe}
+Verwende die Benutzerkonten aus der @var{Gruppe}, um Erstellungsprozesse
+auszuführen (@pxref{Den Daemon einrichten, build users}).
+
+@item --no-substitutes
+@cindex Substitute
+Benutze keine Substitute für Erstellungsergebnisse. Das heißt, dass alle
+Objekte lokal erstellt werden müssen, und kein Herunterladen von vorab
+erstellten Binärdateien erlaubt ist (@pxref{Substitute}).
+
+Wenn der Daemon mit @code{--no-substitutes} ausgeführt wird, können Clients
+trotzdem Substitute explizit aktivieren über den entfernten Prozeduraufruf
+@code{set-build-options} (@pxref{Der Store}).
+
+@item --substitute-urls=@var{URLs}
+@anchor{daemon-substitute-urls}
+Benutze @var{URLs} als standardmäßige, leerzeichengetrennte Liste der
+Quell-URLs für Substitute. Wenn diese Befehlszeilenoption nicht angegeben
+wird, wird @indicateurl{https://mirror.hydra.gnu.org https://hydra.gnu.org}
+verwendet (@code{mirror.hydra.gnu.org} ist ein Spiegelserver für
+@code{hydra.gnu.org}).
+
+Das hat zur Folge, dass Substitute von den @var{URLs} heruntergeladen werden
+können, solange sie mit einer Signatur versehen sind, der vertraut wird
+(@pxref{Substitute}).
+
+@cindex Build-Hook
+@item --no-build-hook
+Den »@dfn{Build-Hook}« nicht benutzen.
+
+»Build-Hook« ist der Name eines Hilfsprogramms, das der Daemon starten kann
+und an das er Erstellungsanfragen übermittelt. Durch diesen Mechanismus
+können Erstellungen an andere Maschinen ausgelagert werden (@pxref{Auslagern des Daemons einrichten}).
+
+@item --cache-failures
+Fehler bei der Erstellung zwischenspeichern. Normalerweise werden nur
+erfolgreiche Erstellungen gespeichert.
+
+Wenn diese Befehlszeilenoption benutzt wird, kann @command{guix gc
+--list-failures} benutzt werden, um die Menge an Store-Objekten abzufragen,
+die als Fehlschläge markiert sind; @command{guix gc --clear-failures}
+entfernt Store-Objekte aus der Menge zwischengespeicherter
+Fehlschläge. @xref{Aufruf von guix gc}.
+
+@item --cores=@var{n}
+@itemx -c @var{n}
+@var{n} CPU-Kerne zum Erstellen jeder Ableitung benutzen; @code{0} heißt, so
+viele wie verfügbar sind.
+
+Der Vorgabewert ist @code{0}, jeder Client kann jedoch eine abweichende
+Anzahl vorgeben, zum Beispiel mit der Befehlszeilenoption @code{--cores} von
+@command{guix build} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix build}).
+
+Dadurch wird die Umgebungsvariable @code{NIX_BUILD_CORES} im
+Erstellungsprozess definiert, welcher sie benutzen kann, um intern parallele
+Ausführungen zuzulassen — zum Beispiel durch Nutzung von @code{make
+-j$NIX_BUILD_CORES}.
+
+@item --max-jobs=@var{n}
+@itemx -M @var{n}
+Höchstenss @var{n} Erstellungsaufträge parallel bearbeiten. Der Vorgabewert
+liegt bei @code{1}. Wird er auf @code{0} gesetzt, werden keine Erstellungen
+lokal durchgeführt, stattdessen lagert der Daemon sie nur aus (@pxref{Auslagern des Daemons einrichten}) oder sie schlagen einfach fehl.
+
+@item --max-silent-time=@var{Sekunden}
+Wenn der Erstellungs- oder Substitutionsprozess länger als
+@var{Sekunden}-lang keine Ausgabe erzeugt, wird er abgebrochen und ein
+Fehler beim Erstellen gemeldet.
+
+Der Vorgabewert ist @code{0}, was bedeutet, dass es keine Zeitbeschränkung
+gibt.
+
+Clients können einen anderen Wert als den hier angegebenen verwenden lassen
+(@pxref{Gemeinsame Erstellungsoptionen, @code{--max-silent-time}}).
+
+@item --timeout=@var{Sekunden}
+Entsprechend wird hier der Erstellungs- oder Substitutionsprozess
+abgebrochen und als Fehlschlag gemeldet, wenn er mehr als
+@var{Sekunden}-lang dauert.
+
+Der Vorgabewert ist @code{0}, was bedeutet, dass es keine Zeitbeschränkung
+gibt.
+
+Clients können einen anderen Wert verwenden lassen (@pxref{Gemeinsame Erstellungsoptionen, @code{--timeout}}).
+
+@item --rounds=@var{N}
+Jede Ableitung @var{n}-mal hintereinander erstellen und einen Fehler melden,
+wenn nacheinander ausgewertete Erstellungsergebnisse nicht Bit für Bit
+identisch sind. Beachten Sie, dass Clients wie @command{guix build} einen
+anderen Wert verwenden lassen können (@pxref{Aufruf von guix build}).
+
+Wenn dies zusammen mit @option{--keep-failed} benutzt wird, bleiben die sich
+unterscheidenden Ausgaben im Store unter dem Namen
+@file{/gnu/store/@dots{}-check}. Dadurch können Unterschiede zwischen den
+beiden Ergebnissen leicht erkannt werden.
+
+@item --debug
+Informationen zur Fehlersuche ausgeben.
+
+Dies ist nützlich, um Probleme beim Starten des Daemons nachzuvollziehen;
+Clients könn aber auch ein abweichenden Wert verwenden lassen, zum Beispiel
+mit der Befehlszeilenoption @code{--verbosity} von @command{guix build}
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix build}).
+
+@item --chroot-directory=@var{Verzeichnis}
+Füge das @var{Verzeichnis} zum chroot von Erstellungen hinzu.
+
+Dadurch kann sich das Ergebnis von Erstellungsprozessen ändern — zum
+Beispiel, wenn diese optionale Abhängigkeiten aus dem @var{Verzeichnis}
+verwenden, wenn sie verfügbar sind, und nicht, wenn es fehlt. Deshalb ist es
+nicht empfohlen, dass Sie diese Befehlszeilenoption verwenden, besser
+sollten Sie dafür sorgen, dass jede Ableitung alle von ihr benötigten
+Eingabgen deklariert.
+
+@item --disable-chroot
+Erstellungen ohne chroot durchführen.
+
+Diese Befehlszeilenoption zu benutzen, wird nicht empfohlen, denn auch
+dadurch bekämen Erstellungsprozesse Zugriff auf nicht deklarierte
+Abhängigkeiten. Sie ist allerdings unvermeidlich, wenn @command{guix-daemon}
+auf einem Benutzerkonto ohne ausreichende Berechtigungen ausgeführt wird.
+
+@item --log-compression=@var{Typ}
+Erstellungsprotokolle werden entsprechend dem @var{Typ} komprimiert, der
+entweder @code{gzip}, @code{bzip2} oder @code{none} (für keine Kompression)
+sein muss.
+
+Sofern nicht @code{--lose-logs} angegeben wurde, werden alle
+Erstellungsprotokolle in der @var{localstatedir} gespeichert. Um Platz zu
+sparen, komprimiert sie der Daemon standardmäßig automatisch mit bzip2.
+
+@item --disable-deduplication
+@cindex Deduplizieren
+Automatische Dateien-»Deduplizierung« im Store ausschalten.
+
+Standardmäßig werden zum Store hinzugefügte Objekte automatisch
+»dedupliziert«: Wenn eine neue Datei mit einer anderen im Store
+übereinstimmt, wird die neue Datei stattdessen als harte Verknüpfung auf die
+andere Datei angelegt. Dies reduziert den Speicherverbrauch auf der Platte
+merklich, jedoch steigt andererseits die Auslastung bei der Ein-/Ausgabe im
+Erstellungsprozess geringfügig. Durch diese Option wird keine solche
+Optimierung durchgeführt.
+
+@item --gc-keep-outputs[=yes|no]
+Gibt an, ob der Müllsammler (Garbage Collector, GC) die Ausgaben lebendiger
+Ableitungen behalten muss (»yes«) oder nicht (»no«).
+
+@cindex GC-Wurzeln
+@cindex Müllsammlerwurzeln
+When set to ``yes'', the GC will keep the outputs of any live derivation
+available in the store---the @code{.drv} files.  The default is ``no'',
+meaning that derivation outputs are kept only if they are reachable from a
+GC root.  @xref{Aufruf von guix gc}, for more on GC roots.
+
+@item --gc-keep-derivations[=yes|no]
+Gibt an, ob der Müllsammler (GC) Ableitungen behalten muss (»yes«), wenn sie
+lebendige Ausgaben haben, oder nicht (»no«).
+
+Für »yes«, den Vorgabewert, behält der Müllsammler Ableitungen —
+z.B. @code{.drv}-Dateien —, solange zumindest eine ihrer Ausgaben lebendig
+ist. Dadurch können Nutzer den Ursprung der Dateien in ihrem Store
+nachvollziehen. Setzt man den Wert auf »no«, wird ein bisschen weniger
+Speicher auf der Platte verbraucht.
+
+In this way, setting @code{--gc-keep-derivations} to ``yes'' causes liveness
+to flow from outputs to derivations, and setting @code{--gc-keep-outputs} to
+``yes'' causes liveness to flow from derivations to outputs.  When both are
+set to ``yes'', the effect is to keep all the build prerequisites (the
+sources, compiler, libraries, and other build-time tools) of live objects in
+the store, regardless of whether these prerequisites are reachable from a GC
+root.  This is convenient for developers since it saves rebuilds or
+downloads.
+
+@item --impersonate-linux-2.6
+Auf Linux-basierten Systemen wird hiermit vorgetäuscht, dass es sich um
+Linux 2.6 handeln würde, indem der Kernel für einen
+@code{uname}-Systemaufruf als Version der Veröffentlichung mit 2.6
+antwortet.
+
+Dies kann hilfreich sein, um Programme zu erstellen, die (normalerweise zu
+Unrecht) von der Kernel-Versionsnummer abhängen.
+
+@item --lose-logs
+Keine Protokolle der Erstellungen vorhalten. Normalerweise würden solche in
+@code{@var{localstatedir}/guix/log} gespeichert.
+
+@item --system=@var{System}
+Verwende @var{System} als aktuellen Systemtyp. Standardmäßig ist dies das
+Paar aus Befehlssatz und Kernel, welches beim Aufruf von @code{configure}
+erkannt wurde, wie zum Beispiel @code{x86_64-linux}.
+
+@item --listen=@var{Endpunkt}
+Lausche am @var{Endpunkt} auf Verbindungen. Dabei wird der @var{Endpunkt}
+als Dateiname eines Unix-Sockets verstanden, wenn er mit einem @code{/}
+(Schrägstrich) beginnt. Andernfalls wird der @var{Endpunkt} als Hostname
+oder als Hostname-Port-Paar verstanden, auf dem gelauscht wird. Hier sind
+ein paar Beispiele:
+
+@table @code
+@item --listen=/gnu/var/daemon
+Lausche auf Verbindungen am Unix-Socket @file{/gnu/var/daemon}, falls nötig
+wird er dazu erstellt.
+
+@item --listen=localhost
+@cindex Daemon, Fernzugriff
+@cindex Fernzugriff auf den Daemon
+@cindex Daemon, Einrichten auf Clustern
+@cindex Cluster, Einrichtung des Daemons
+Lausche auf TCP-Verbindungen an der Netzwerkschnittstelle, die
+@code{localhost} entspricht, auf Port 44146.
+
+@item --listen=128.0.0.42:1234
+Lausche auf TCP-Verbindungen an der Netzwerkschnittstelle, die
+@code{128.0.0.42} entspricht, auf Port 1234.
+@end table
+
+Diese Befehlszeilenoption kann mehrmals wiederholt werden. In diesem Fall
+akzeptiert @command{guix-daemon} Verbindungen auf allen angegebenen
+Endpunkten. Benutzer können bei Client-Befehlen angeben, mit welchem
+Endpunkt sie sich verbinden möchten, indem sie die Umgebungsvariable
+@code{GUIX_DAEMON_SOCKET} festlegen (@pxref{Der Store,
+@code{GUIX_DAEMON_SOCKET}}).
+
+@quotation Anmerkung
+Das Daemon-Protokoll ist @emph{weder authentifiziert noch
+verschlüsselt}. Die Benutzung von @code{--listen=@var{Host}} eignet sich für
+lokale Netzwerke, wie z.B. in Rechen-Clustern, wo sich nur solche Knoten mit
+dem Daemon verbinden, denen man vertraut. In Situationen, wo ein Fernzugriff
+auf den Daemon durchgeführt wird, empfehlen wir, über Unix-Sockets in
+Verbindung mit SSH zuzugreifen.
+@end quotation
+
+Wird @code{--listen} nicht angegeben, lauscht @command{guix-daemon} auf
+Verbindungen auf dem Unix-Socket, der sich unter
+@file{@var{localstatedir}/guix/daemon-socket/socket} befindet.
+@end table
+
+
+@node Anwendungen einrichten
+@section Anwendungen einrichten
+
+@cindex Fremddistribution
+Läuft Guix aufgesetzt auf einer GNU/Linux-Distribution außer GuixSD — einer
+sogenannten @dfn{Fremddistribution} —, so sind ein paar zusätzliche Schritte
+bei der Einrichtung nötig. Hier finden Sie manche davon.
+
+@subsection Locales
+
+@anchor{locales-and-locpath}
+@cindex Locales, nicht auf GuixSD
+@vindex LOCPATH
+@vindex GUIX_LOCPATH
+Über Guix installierte Pakete benutzen nicht die Daten zu Regions- und
+Spracheinstellungen (Locales) des Wirtssystems. Stattdessen müssen Sie erst
+eines der Locale-Pakete installieren, die für Guix verfügbar sind, und dann
+den Wert Ihrer Umgebungsvariablen @code{GUIX_LOCPATH} passend festlegen:
+
+@example
+$ guix package -i glibc-locales
+$ export GUIX_LOCPATH=$HOME/.guix-profile/lib/locale
+@end example
+
+Beachten Sie, dass das Paket @code{glibc-locales} Daten für alle von
+GNU@tie{}libc unterstützten Locales enthält und deswegen um die 110@tie{}MiB
+wiegt. Alternativ gibt es auch @code{glibc-utf8-locales}, was kleiner, aber
+auf ein paar UTF-8-Locales beschränkt ist.
+
+Die Variable @code{GUIX_LOCPATH} spielt eine ähnliche Rolle wie
+@code{LOCPATH} (@pxref{Locale Names, @code{LOCPATH},, libc, The GNU C
+Library Reference Manual}). Es gibt jedoch zwei wichtige Unterschiede:
+
+@enumerate
+@item
+@code{GUIX_LOCPATH} wird nur von der libc in Guix beachtet und nicht der von
+Fremddistributionen bereitgestellten libc. Mit @code{GUIX_LOCPATH} können
+Sie daher sicherstellen, dass die Programme der Fremddistribution keine
+inkompatiblen Locale-Daten von Guix laden.
+
+@item
+libc hängt an jeden @code{GUIX_LOCPATH}-Eintrag @code{/X.Y} an, wobei
+@code{X.Y} die Version von libc ist — z.B. @code{2.22}. Sollte Ihr
+Guix-Profil eine Mischung aus Programmen enthalten, die an verschiedene
+libc-Versionen gebunden sind, wird jede nur die Locale-Daten im richtigen
+Format zu laden versuchen.
+@end enumerate
+
+Das ist wichtig, weil das Locale-Datenformat verschiedener libc-Versionen
+inkompatibel sein könnte.
+
+@subsection Name Service Switch
+
+@cindex Name Service Switch, glibc
+@cindex NSS (Name Service Switch), glibc
+@cindex nscd (Name Service Caching Daemon)
+@cindex Name Service Caching Daemon (nscd)
+Wenn Sie Guix auf einer Fremddistribution verwenden, @emph{empfehlen wir
+stärkstens}, dass Sie den @dfn{Name Service Cache Daemon} der
+GNU-C-Bibliothek, @command{nscd}, laufen lassen, welcher auf dem Socket
+@file{/var/run/nscd/socket} lauschen sollte. Wenn Sie das nicht tun, könnten
+mit Guix installierte Anwendungen Probleme beim Auflösen von Hostnamen oder
+Benutzerkonten haben, oder sogar abstürzen. Die nächsten Absätze erklären
+warum.
+
+@cindex @file{nsswitch.conf}
+Die GNU-C-Bibliothek implementiert einen @dfn{Name Service Switch} (NSS),
+welcher einen erweiterbaren Mechanismus zur allgemeinen »Namensauflösung«
+darstellt: Hostnamensauflösung, Benutzerkonten und weiteres (@pxref{Name Service Switch,,, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}).
+
+@cindex Network Information Service (NIS)
+@cindex NIS (Network Information Service)
+Für die Erweiterbarkeit unterstützt der NSS @dfn{Plugins}, welche neue
+Implementierungen zur Namensauflösung bieten: Zum Beispiel ermöglicht das
+Plugin @code{nss-mdns} die Namensauflösung für @code{.local}-Hostnamen, das
+Plugin @code{nis} gestattet die Auflösung von Benutzerkonten über den
+Network Information Service (NIS) und so weiter. Diese zusätzlichen
+»Auflösungsdienste« werden systemweit konfiguriert in
+@file{/etc/nsswitch.conf} und alle auf dem System laufenden Programme halten
+sich an diese Einstellungen (@pxref{NSS Configuration File,,, libc, The GNU
+C Reference Manual}).
+
+Wenn sie eine Namensauflösung durchführen — zum Beispiel, indem sie die
+@code{getaddrinfo}-Funktion in C aufrufen — versuchen die Anwendungen als
+Erstes, sich mit dem nscd zu verbinden; ist dies erfolgreich, führt nscd für
+sie die weiteren Namensauflösungen durch. Falls nscd nicht läuft, führen sie
+selbst die Namensauflösungen durch, indem sie die Namensauflösungsdienste in
+ihren eigenen Adressraum laden und ausführen. Diese Namensauflösungsdienste
+— die @file{libnss_*.so}-Dateien — werden mit @code{dlopen} geladen, aber
+sie kommen von der C-Bibliothek des Wirtssystems und nicht von der
+C-Bibliothek, mit der die Anwendung gebunden wurde (also der C-Bibliothek
+von Guix).
+
+Und hier kommt es zum Problem: Wenn die Anwendung mit der C-Bibliothek von
+Guix (etwa glibc 2.24) gebunden wurde und die NSS-Plugins von einer anderen
+C-Bibliothek (etwa @code{libnss_mdns.so} für glibc 2.22) zu laden versucht,
+wird sie vermutlich abstürzen oder die Namensauflösungen werden unerwartet
+fehlschlagen.
+
+Durch das Ausführen von @command{nscd} auf dem System wird, neben anderen
+Vorteilen, dieses Problem der binären Inkompatibilität vermieden, weil diese
+@code{libnss_*.so}-Dateien vom @command{nscd}-Prozess geladen werden, nicht
+in den Anwendungen selbst.
+
+@subsection X11-Schriftarten
+
+@cindex Schriftarten
+Die Mehrheit der graphischen Anwendungen benutzen Fontconfig zum Finden und
+Laden von Schriftarten und für die Darstellung im X11-Client. Im Paket
+@code{fontconfig} in Guix werden Schriftarten standardmäßig in
+@file{$HOME/.guix-profile} gesucht. Um es graphischen Anwendungen, die mit
+Guix installiert wurden, zu ermöglichen, Schriftarten anzuzeigen, müssen Sie
+die Schriftarten auch mit Guix installieren. Essenzielle Pakete für
+Schriftarten sind unter Anderem @code{gs-fonts}, @code{font-dejavu} und
+@code{font-gnu-freefont-ttf}.
+
+Um auf Chinesisch, Japanisch oder Koreanisch verfassten Text in graphischen
+Anwendungen anzeigen zu können, möchten Sie vielleicht
+@code{font-adobe-source-han-sans} oder @code{font-wqy-zenhei}
+installieren. Ersteres hat mehrere Ausgaben, für jede Sprachfamilie eine
+(@pxref{Pakete mit mehreren Ausgaben.}). Zum Beispiel installiert folgender
+Befehl Schriftarten für chinesische Sprachen:
+
+@example
+guix package -i font-adobe-source-han-sans:cn
+@end example
+
+@cindex @code{xterm}
+Ältere Programme wie @command{xterm} benutzen kein Fontconfig, sondern
+X-Server-seitige Schriftartendarstellung. Solche Programme setzen voraus,
+dass der volle Name einer Schriftart mit XLFD (X Logical Font Description)
+angegeben wird, z.B. so:
+
+@example
+-*-dejavu sans-medium-r-normal-*-*-100-*-*-*-*-*-1
+@end example
+
+Um solche vollen Namen für die in Ihrem Guix-Profil installierten
+TrueType-Schriftarten zu verwenden, müssen Sie den Pfad für Schriftarten
+(Font Path) des X-Servers anpassen:
+
+@c Note: 'xset' does not accept symlinks so the trick below arranges to
+@c get at the real directory.  See <https://bugs.gnu.org/30655>.
+@example
+xset +fp $(dirname $(readlink -f ~/.guix-profile/share/fonts/truetype/fonts.dir))
+@end example
+
+@cindex @code{xlsfonts}
+Danach können Sie den Befehl @code{xlsfonts} ausführen (aus dem Paket
+@code{xlsfonts}), um sicherzustellen, dass dort Ihre TrueType-Schriftarten
+aufgeführt sind.
+
+@cindex @code{fc-cache}
+@cindex Font-Cache
+Nach der Installation der Schriftarten müssen Sie unter Umständen den
+Schriftarten-Zwischenspeicher (Font-Cache) erneuern, um diese in Anwendungen
+benutzen zu können. Gleiches gilt, wenn mit Guix installierte Anwendungen
+anscheinend keine Schriftarten finden können. Um das Erneuern des
+Font-Caches zu erzwingen, führen Sie @code{fc-cache -f} aus. Der Befehl
+@code{fc-cache} wird vom Paket @code{fontconfig} angeboten.
+
+@subsection X.509-Zertifikate
+
+@cindex @code{nss-certs}
+Das Paket @code{nss-certs} bietet X.509-Zertifikate, womit Programme die
+Identität von Web-Servern authentifizieren können, auf die über HTTPS
+zugegriffen wird.
+
+Wenn Sie Guix auf einer Fremddistribution verwenden, können Sie dieses Paket
+installieren und die relevanten Umgebungsvariablen festlegen, damit Pakete
+wissen, wo sie Zertifikate finden. In @xref{X.509-Zertifikate} stehen
+genaue Informationen.
+
+@subsection Emacs-Pakete
+
+@cindex @code{emacs}
+Wenn Sie mit Guix Pakete für Emacs installieren, werden deren elisp-Dateien
+entweder in @file{$HOME/.guix-profile/share/emacs/site-lisp/} oder in
+Unterverzeichnissen von
+@file{$HOME/.guix-profile/share/emacs/site-lisp/guix.d/}
+gespeichert. Letzteres Verzeichnis gibt es, weil es Tausende von
+Emacs-Paketen gibt und sie alle im selben Verzeichnis zu speichern
+vielleicht nicht verlässlich funktioniert (wegen Namenskonflikten). Daher
+halten wir es für richtig, für jedes Paket ein anderes Verzeichnis zu
+benutzen. Das Emacs-Paketsystem organisiert die Dateistruktur ähnlich
+(@pxref{Package Files,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
+
+Standardmäßig »weiß« Emacs (wenn er mit Guix installiert wurde), wo diese
+Pakete liegen, Sie müssen also nichts selbst konfigurieren. Wenn Sie aber
+aus irgendeinem Grund mit Guix installierte Pakete nicht automatisch laden
+lassen möchten, können Sie Emacs mit der Befehlszeilenoption
+@code{--no-site-file} starten (@pxref{Init File,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs
+Manual}).
+
+@subsection GCC-Toolchain
+
+@cindex GCC
+@cindex ld-wrapper
+
+Guix bietet individuelle Compiler-Pakete wie etwa @code{gcc}, aber wenn Sie
+einen vollständigen Satz an Werkzeugen zum Kompilieren und Binden von
+Quellcode brauchen, werden Sie eigentlich das Paket @code{gcc-toolchain}
+haben wollen. Das Paket bietet eine vollständige GCC-Toolchain für die
+Entwicklung mit C/C++, einschließlich GCC selbst, der GNU-C-Bibliothek
+(Header-Dateien und Binärdateien samt Symbolen zur Fehlersuche/Debugging in
+der @code{debug}-Ausgabe), Binutils und einen Wrapper für den Binder/Linker.
+
+@cindex Versuch, unreine Bibliothek zu benutzen, Fehlermeldung
+
+Der Zweck des Wrappers ist, die an den Binder übergebenen
+Befehlszeilenoptionen mit @code{-L} und @code{-l} zu überprüfen und jeweils
+passende Argumente mit @code{-rpath} anzufügen, womit dann der echte Binder
+aufgerufen wird. Standardmäßig weigert sich der Binder-Wrapper, mit
+Bibliotheken außerhalb des Stores zu binden, um »Reinheit« zu
+gewährleisten. Das kann aber stören, wenn man die Toolchain benutzt, um mit
+lokalen Bibliotheken zu binden. Um Referenzen auf Bibliotheken außerhalb des
+Stores zu erlauben, müssen Sie die Umgebungsvariable
+@code{GUIX_LD_WRAPPER_ALLOW_IMPURITIES} setzen.
+
+@c TODO What else?
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node Paketverwaltung
+@chapter Paketverwaltung
+
+@cindex Pakete
+Der Zweck von GNU Guix ist, Benutzern die leichte Installation,
+Aktualisierung und Entfernung von Software-Paketen zu ermöglichen, ohne dass
+sie ihre Erstellungsprozeduren oder Abhängigkeiten kennen müssen. Guix kann
+natürlich noch mehr als diese offensichtlichen Funktionalitäten.
+
+Dieses Kapitel beschreibt die Hauptfunktionalitäten von Guix, sowie die von
+Guix angebotenen Paketverwaltungswerkzeuge. Zusätzlich von den im Folgenden
+beschriebenen Befehlszeilen-Benutzerschnittstellen (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package, @code{guix package}}) können Sie auch mit der
+Emacs-Guix-Schnittstelle (@pxref{Top,,, emacs-guix, The Emacs-Guix Reference
+Manual}) arbeiten, nachdem Sie das Paket @code{emacs-guix} installiert haben
+(führen Sie zum Einstieg in Emacs-Guix den Emacs-Befehl @kbd{M-x guix-help}
+aus):
+
+@example
+guix package -i emacs-guix
+@end example
+
+@menu
+* Funktionalitäten::        Wie Guix Ihr Leben schöner machen wird.
+* Aufruf von guix package::  Pakete installieren, entfernen usw.
+* Substitute::               Vorerstelle Binärdateien herunterladen.
+* Pakete mit mehreren Ausgaben.::  Ein Quellpaket, mehrere Ausgaben.
+* Aufruf von guix gc::       Den Müllsammler laufen lassen.
+* Aufruf von guix pull::     Das neueste Guix samt Distribution laden.
+* Channels::                 Customizing the package collection.
+* Inferiors::                Interacting with another revision of Guix.
+* Invoking guix describe::   Display information about your Guix revision.
+* Aufruf von guix pack::     Software-Bündel erstellen.
+* Aufruf von guix archive::  Import und Export von Store-Dateien.
+@end menu
+
+@node Funktionalitäten
+@section Funktionalitäten
+
+Wenn Sie Guix benutzen, landet jedes Paket schließlich im @dfn{Paket-Store}
+in seinem eigenen Verzeichnis — der Name ist ähnlich wie
+@file{/gnu/store/xxx-package-1.2}, wobei @code{xxx} eine Zeichenkette in
+Base32-Darstellung ist.
+
+Statt diese Verzeichnisse direkt anzugeben, haben Nutzer ihr eigenes
+@dfn{Profil}, welches auf diejenigen Pakete zeigt, die sie tatsächlich
+benutzen wollen. Diese Profile sind im Persönlichen Ordner des jeweiligen
+Nutzers gespeichert als @code{$HOME/.guix-profile}.
+
+Zum Beispiel installiert @code{alice} GCC 4.7.2. Dadurch zeigt dann
+@file{/home/alice/.guix-profile/bin/gcc} auf
+@file{/gnu/store/@dots{}-gcc-4.7.2/bin/gcc}. Auf demselben Rechner hat
+@code{bob} bereits GCC 4.8.0 installiert. Das Profil von @code{bob} zeigt
+dann einfach weiterhin auf @file{/gnu/store/@dots{}-gcc-4.8.0/bin/gcc} —
+d.h. beide Versionen von GCC koexistieren auf demselben System, ohne sich zu
+stören.
+
+Der Befehl @command{guix package} ist das zentrale Werkzeug, um Pakete zu
+verwalten (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}). Es arbeitet auf dem eigenen
+Profil jedes Nutzers und kann @emph{mit normalen Benutzerrechten} ausgeführt
+werden.
+
+@cindex Transaktionen
+Der Befehl stellt die offensichtlichen Installations-, Entfernungs- und
+Aktualisierungsoperationen zur Verfügung. Jeder Aufruf ist tatsächlich eine
+eigene @emph{Transaktion}: Entweder die angegebene Operation wird
+erfolgreich durchgeführt, oder gar nichts passiert. Wenn also der Prozess
+von @command{guix package} während der Transaktion beendet wird, oder es zum
+Stromausfall während der Transaktion kommt, dann bleibt der alte, nutzbare
+Zustands des Nutzerprofils erhalten.
+
+Zudem kann jede Pakettransaktion @emph{zurückgesetzt} werden
+(Rollback). Wird also zum Beispiel durch eine Aktualisierung eine neue
+Version eines Pakets installiert, die einen schwerwiegenden Fehler zur Folge
+hat, können Nutzer ihr Profil einfach auf die vorherige Profilinstanz
+zurücksetzen, von der sie wissen, dass sie gut lief. Ebenso unterliegt auf
+GuixSD auch die globale Systemkonfiguration transaktionellen
+Aktualisierungen und Rücksetzungen (@pxref{Das Konfigurationssystem nutzen}).
+
+Alle Pakete im Paket-Store können vom @emph{Müllsammler} (Garbage Collector)
+gelöscht werden. Guix ist in der Lage, festzustellen, welche Pakete noch
+durch Benutzerprofile referenziert werden, und entfernt nur diese, die
+nachweislich nicht mehr referenziert werden (@pxref{Aufruf von guix gc}). Benutzer können auch ausdrücklich alte Generationen ihres Profils
+löschen, damit die zugehörigen Pakete vom Müllsammler gelöscht werden
+können.
+
+@cindex Reproduzierbarkeit
+@cindex Reproduzierbare Erstellungen
+Guix takes a @dfn{purely functional} approach to package management, as
+described in the introduction (@pxref{Einführung}).  Each
+@file{/gnu/store} package directory name contains a hash of all the inputs
+that were used to build that package---compiler, libraries, build scripts,
+etc.  This direct correspondence allows users to make sure a given package
+installation matches the current state of their distribution.  It also helps
+maximize @dfn{build reproducibility}: thanks to the isolated build
+environments that are used, a given build is likely to yield bit-identical
+files when performed on different machines (@pxref{Aufruf des guix-daemon,
+container}).
+
+@cindex Substitute
+Auf dieser Grundlage kann Guix @dfn{transparent Binär- oder Quelldateien
+ausliefern}. Wenn eine vorerstellte Binärdatei für ein
+@file{/gnu/store}-Objekt von einer externen Quelle verfügbar ist — ein
+@dfn{Substitut} —, lädt Guix sie einfach herunter und entpackt sie,
+andernfalls erstellt Guix das Paket lokal aus seinem Quellcode
+(@pxref{Substitute}). Weil Erstellungsergebnisse normalerweise Bit für Bit
+reproduzierbar sind, müssen die Nutzer den Servern, die Substitute anbieten,
+nicht blind vertrauen; sie können eine lokale Erstellung erzwingen und
+Substitute @emph{anfechten} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix challenge}).
+
+Kontrolle über die Erstellungsumgebung ist eine auch für Entwickler
+nützliche Funktionalität. Der Befehl @command{guix environment} ermöglicht
+es Entwicklern eines Pakets, schnell die richtige Entwicklungsumgebung für
+ihr Paket einzurichten, ohne manuell die Abhängigkeiten des Pakets in ihr
+Profil installieren zu müssen (@pxref{Aufruf von guix environment}).
+
+@cindex replication, of software environments
+@cindex provenance tracking, of software artifacts
+All of Guix and its package definitions is version-controlled, and
+@command{guix pull} allows you to ``travel in time'' on the history of Guix
+itself (@pxref{Aufruf von guix pull}).  This makes it possible to replicate a
+Guix instance on a different machine or at a later point in time, which in
+turn allows you to @emph{replicate complete software environments}, while
+retaining precise @dfn{provenance tracking} of the software.
+
+@node Aufruf von guix package
+@section Invoking @command{guix package}
+
+@cindex Installieren von Paketen
+@cindex Entfernen von Paketen
+@cindex Paketinstallation
+@cindex Paketentfernung
+Der Befehl @command{guix package} ist ein Werkzeug, womit Nutzer Pakete
+installieren, aktualisieren, entfernen und auf vorherige Konfigurationen
+zurücksetzen können. Dabei wird nur das eigene Profil des Nutzers verwendet,
+und es funktioniert mit normalen Benutzerrechten, ohne Administratorrechte
+(@pxref{Funktionalitäten}). Die Syntax ist:
+
+@example
+guix package @var{Optionen}
+@end example
+@cindex Transaktionen
+In erster Linie geben die @var{Optionen} an, welche Operationen in der
+Transaktion durchgeführt werden sollen. Nach Abschluss wird ein neues Profil
+erzeugt, aber vorherige @dfn{Generationen} des Profils bleiben verfügbar,
+falls der Benutzer auf sie zurückwechseln will.
+
+Um zum Beispiel @code{lua} zu entfernen und @code{guile} und
+@code{guile-cairo} in einer einzigen Transaktion zu installieren:
+
+@example
+guix package -r lua -i guile guile-cairo
+@end example
+
+@command{guix package} unterstützt auch ein @dfn{deklaratives Vorgehen},
+wobei der Nutzer die genaue Menge an Paketen, die verfügbar sein sollen,
+festlegt und über die Befehlszeilenoption @option{--manifest} übergibt
+(@pxref{profile-manifest, @option{--manifest}}).
+
+@cindex Profil
+Für jeden Benutzer wird automatisch eine symbolische Verknüpfung zu seinem
+Standardprofil angelegt als @file{$HOME/.guix-profile}. Diese symbolische
+Verknüpfung zeigt immer auf die aktuelle Generation des Standardprofils des
+Benutzers. Somit können Nutzer @file{$HOME/.guix-profile/bin} z.B. zu ihrer
+Umgebungsvariablen @code{PATH} hinzufügen.
+@cindex Suchpfade
+Wenn Sie nicht die Guix System Distribution benutzen, sollten Sie in
+Betracht ziehen, folgende Zeilen zu Ihrem @file{~/.bash_profile}
+hinzuzufügen (@pxref{Bash Startup Files,,, bash, The GNU Bash Reference
+Manual}), damit in neu erzeugten Shells alle Umgebungsvariablen richtig
+definiert werden:
+
+@example
+GUIX_PROFILE="$HOME/.guix-profile" ; \
+source "$HOME/.guix-profile/etc/profile"
+@end example
+
+Ist Ihr System für mehrere Nutzer eingerichtet, werden Nutzerprofile an
+einem Ort gespeichert, der als @dfn{Müllsammlerwurzel} registriert ist, auf
+die @file{$HOME/.guix-profile} zeigt (@pxref{Aufruf von guix gc}). Dieses
+Verzeichnis ist normalerweise
+@code{@var{localstatedir}/guix/profiles/per-user/@var{Benutzer}}, wobei
+@var{localstatedir} der an @code{configure} als @code{--localstatedir}
+übergebene Wert ist und @var{Benutzer} für den jeweiligen Benutzernamen
+steht. Das @file{per-user}-Verzeichnis wird erstellt, wenn
+@command{guix-daemon} gestartet wird, und das Unterverzeichnis
+@var{Benutzer} wird durch @command{guix package} erstellt.
+
+Als @var{Optionen} kann vorkommen:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item --install=@var{Paket} @dots{}
+@itemx -i @var{Paket} @dots{}
+Die angegebenen @var{Paket}e installieren.
+
+Jedes @var{Paket} kann entweder einfach durch seinen Paketnamen aufgeführt
+werden, wie @code{guile}, oder als Paketname gefolgt von einem At-Zeichen @@
+und einer Versionsnummer, wie @code{guile@@1.8.8} oder auch nur
+@code{guile@@1.8} (in letzterem Fall wird die neueste Version mit Präfix
+@code{1.8} ausgewählt.)
+
+Wird keine Versionsnummer angegeben, wird die neueste verfügbare Version
+ausgewählt. Zudem kann im @var{Paket} ein Doppelpunkt auftauchen, gefolgt
+vom Namen einer der Ausgaben des Pakets, wie @code{gcc:doc} oder
+@code{binutils@@2.22:lib} (@pxref{Pakete mit mehreren Ausgaben.}). Pakete
+mit zugehörigem Namen (und optional der Version) werden unter den Modulen
+der GNU-Distribution gesucht (@pxref{Paketmodule}).
+
+@cindex propagierte Eingaben
+Manchmal haben Pakete @dfn{propagierte Eingaben}: Als solche werden
+Abhängigkeiten bezeichnet, die automatisch zusammen mit dem angeforderten
+Paket installiert werden (im Abschnitt @pxref{package-propagated-inputs,
+@code{propagated-inputs} in @code{package} objects} sind weitere
+Informationen über propagierte Eingaben in Paketdefinitionen zu finden).
+
+@anchor{package-cmd-propagated-inputs}
+Ein Beispiel ist die GNU-MPC-Bibliothek: Ihre C-Headerdateien verweisen auf
+die der GNU-MPFR-Bibliothek, welche wiederum auf die der GMP-Bibliothek
+verweisen. Wenn also MPC installiert wird, werden auch die MPFR- und
+GMP-Bibliotheken in das Profil installiert; entfernt man MPC, werden auch
+MPFR und GMP entfernt — außer sie wurden noch auf andere Art ausdrücklich
+vom Nutzer installiert.
+
+Abgesehen davon setzen Pakete manchmal die Definition von Umgebungsvariablen
+für ihre Suchpfade voraus (siehe die Erklärung von @code{--search-paths}
+weiter unten). Alle fehlenden oder womöglich falschen Definitionen von
+Umgebungsvariablen werden hierbei gemeldet.
+
+@item --install-from-expression=@var{Ausdruck}
+@itemx -e @var{Ausdruck}
+Das Paket installieren, zu dem der @var{Ausdruck} ausgewertet wird.
+
+Beim @var{Ausdruck} muss es sich um einen Scheme-Ausdruck handeln, der zu
+einem @code{<package>}-Objekt ausgewertet wird. Diese Option ist besonders
+nützlich, um zwischen gleichnamigen Varianten eines Pakets zu unterscheiden,
+durch Ausdrücke wie @code{(@@ (gnu packages base) guile-final)}.
+
+Beachten Sie, dass mit dieser Option die erste Ausgabe des angegebenen
+Pakets installiert wird, was unzureichend sein kann, wenn eine bestimmte
+Ausgabe eines Pakets mit mehreren Ausgaben gewünscht ist.
+
+@item --install-from-file=@var{Datei}
+@itemx -f @var{Datei}
+Das Paket installieren, zu dem der Code in der @var{Datei} ausgewertet wird.
+
+Zum Beispiel könnte die @var{Datei} eine Definition wie diese enthalten
+(@pxref{Pakete definieren}):
+
+@example
+@verbatiminclude package-hello.scm
+@end example
+
+Entwickler könnten es für nützlich erachten, eine solche
+@file{guix.scm}-Datei im Quellbaum ihres Projekts abzulegen, mit der
+Zwischenstände der Entwicklung getestet und reproduzierbare
+Erstellungsumgebungen aufgebaut werden können (@pxref{Aufruf von guix environment}).
+
+@item --remove=@var{Paket} @dots{}
+@itemx -r @var{Paket} @dots{}
+Die angegebenen @var{Paket}e entfernen.
+
+Wie auch bei @code{--install} kann jedes @var{Paket} neben dem Paketnamen
+auch eine Versionsnummer und/oder eine Ausgabe benennen. Zum Beispiel würde
+@code{-r glibc:debug} die @code{debug}-Ausgabe von @code{glibc} aus dem
+Profil entfernen.
+
+@item --upgrade[=@var{Regexp} @dots{}]
+@itemx -u [@var{Regexp} @dots{}]
+@cindex Pakete aktualisieren
+Alle installierten Pakete aktualisieren. Wenn einer oder mehr reguläre
+Ausdrücke (Regexps) angegeben wurden, werden nur diejenigen installierten
+Pakete aktualisiert, deren Name zu einer der @var{Regexp}s passt. Siehe auch
+weiter unten die Befehlszeilenoption @code{--do-not-upgrade}.
+
+Beachten Sie, dass das Paket so auf die neueste Version unter den Paketen
+gebracht wird, die in der aktuell installierten Distribution vorliegen. Um
+jedoch Ihre Distribution zu aktualisieren, sollten Sie regelmäßig
+@command{guix pull} ausführen (@pxref{Aufruf von guix pull}).
+
+@item --do-not-upgrade[=@var{Regexp} @dots{}]
+In Verbindung mit der Befehlszeilenoption @code{--upgrade}, führe
+@emph{keine} Aktualisierung von Paketen durch, deren Name zum regulären
+Ausdruck @var{Regexp} passt. Um zum Beispiel alle Pakete im aktuellen Profil
+zu aktualisieren mit Ausnahme derer, die »emacs« im Namen haben:
+
+@example
+$ guix package --upgrade . --do-not-upgrade emacs
+@end example
+
+@item @anchor{profile-manifest}--manifest=@var{Datei}
+@itemx -m @var{Datei}
+@cindex Profildeklaration
+@cindex Profilmanifest
+Erstellt eine neue Generation des Profils aus dem vom Scheme-Code in
+@var{Datei} gelieferten Manifest-Objekt.
+
+Dadurch könnrn Sie den Inhalt des Profils @emph{deklarieren}, statt ihn
+durch eine Folge von Befehlen wie @code{--install} u.Ä. zu generieren. Der
+Vorteil ist, dass die @var{Datei} unter Versionskontrolle gestellt werden
+kann, auf andere Maschinen zum Reproduzieren desselben Profils kopiert
+werden kann und Ähnliches.
+
+@c FIXME: Add reference to (guix profile) documentation when available.
+Der Code in der @var{Datei} muss ein @dfn{Manifest}-Objekt liefern, was
+ungefähr einer Liste von Paketen entspricht:
+
+@findex packages->manifest
+@example
+(use-package-modules guile emacs)
+
+(packages->manifest
+ (list emacs
+       guile-2.0
+       ;; Eine bestimmte Paketausgabe nutzen.
+       (list guile-2.0 "debug")))
+@end example
+
+@findex specifications->manifest
+In diesem Beispiel müssen wir wissen, welche Module die Variablen
+@code{emacs} und @code{guile-2.0} definieren, um die richtige Angabe mit
+@code{use-package-modules} machen zu können, was umständlich sein kann. Wir
+können auch normale Paketnamen angeben und sie durch
+@code{specifications->manifest} zu den entsprechenden Paketobjekten
+auflösen, zum Beispiel so:
+
+@example
+(specifications->manifest
+ '("emacs" "guile@@2.2" "guile@@2.2:debug"))
+@end example
+
+@item --roll-back
+@cindex rücksetzen
+@cindex Zurücksetzen von Transaktionen
+@cindex Transaktionen, zurücksetzen
+Wechselt zur vorherigen @dfn{Generation} des Profils zurück — d.h. macht die
+letzte Transaktion rückgängig.
+
+In Verbindung mit Befehlszeilenoptionen wie @code{--install} wird zuerst
+zurückgesetzt, bevor andere Aktionen durchgeführt werden.
+
+Ein Rücksetzen der ersten Generation, die installierte Pakete enthält,
+wechselt das Profil zur @dfn{nullten Generation}, die keinerlei Dateien
+enthält, abgesehen von Metadaten über sich selbst.
+
+Nach dem Zurücksetzen überschreibt das Installieren, Entfernen oder
+Aktualisieren von Paketen vormals zukünftige Generationen, d.h. der Verlauf
+der Generationen eines Profils ist immer linear.
+
+@item --switch-generation=@var{Muster}
+@itemx -S @var{Muster}
+@cindex Generationen
+Wechselt zu der bestimmten Generation, die durch das @var{Muster} bezeichnet
+wird.
+
+Als @var{Muster} kann entweder die Nummer einer Generation oder eine Nummer
+mit vorangestelltem »+« oder »-« dienen. Letzteres springt die angegebene
+Anzahl an Generationen vor oder zurück. Zum Beispiel kehrt
+@code{--switch-generation=+1} nach einem Zurücksetzen wieder zur neueren
+Generation zurück.
+
+Der Unterschied zwischen @code{--roll-back} und
+@code{--switch-generation=-1} ist, dass @code{--switch-generation} keine
+nullte Generation erzeugen wird; existiert die angegebene Generation nicht,
+bleibt schlicht die aktuelle Generation erhalten.
+
+@item --search-paths[=@var{Art}]
+@cindex Suchpfade
+Führe die Definitionen von Umgebungsvariablen auf, in Bash-Syntax, die nötig
+sein könnten, um alle installierten Pakete nutzen zu können. Diese
+Umgebungsvariablen werden benutzt, um die @dfn{Suchpfade} für Dateien
+festzulegen, die von einigen installierten Paketen benutzt werden.
+
+Zum Beispiel braucht GCC die Umgebungsvariablen @code{CPATH} und
+@code{LIBRARY_PATH}, um zu wissen, wo sich im Benutzerprofil Header und
+Bibliotheken befinden (@pxref{Environment Variables,,, gcc, Using the GNU
+Compiler Collection (GCC)}). Wenn GCC und, sagen wir, die C-Bibliothek im
+Profil installiert sind, schlägt @code{--search-paths} also vor, diese
+Variablen jeweils auf @code{@var{profile}/include} und
+@code{@var{profile}/lib} verweisen zu lassen.
+
+Die typische Nutzung ist, in der Shell diese Variablen zu definieren:
+
+@example
+$ eval `guix package --search-paths`
+@end example
+
+Als @var{Art} kann entweder @code{exact}, @code{prefix} oder @code{suffix}
+gewählt werden, wodurch die gelieferten Definitionen der Umgebungsvariablen
+entweder exakt die Einstellungen für Guix meldet, oder sie als Präfix oder
+Suffix an den aktuellen Wert dieser Variablen anhängt. Gibt man keine
+@var{Art} an, wird der Vorgabewert @code{exact} verwendet.
+
+Diese Befehlszeilenoption kann auch benutzt werden, um die
+@emph{kombinierten} Suchpfade mehrerer Profile zu berechnen. Betrachten Sie
+dieses Beispiel:
+
+@example
+$ guix package -p foo -i guile
+$ guix package -p bar -i guile-json
+$ guix package -p foo -p bar --search-paths
+@end example
+
+Der letzte Befehl oben meldet auch die Definition der Umgebungsvariablen
+@code{GUILE_LOAD_PATH}, obwohl für sich genommen weder @file{foo} noch
+@file{bar} zu dieser Empfehlung führen würden.
+
+
+@item --profile=@var{Profil}
+@itemx -p @var{Profil}
+Auf @var{Profil} anstelle des Standardprofils des Benutzers arbeiten.
+
+@cindex Kollisionen, in einem Profil
+@cindex Paketkollisionen in Profilen
+@cindex Profilkollisionen
+@item --allow-collisions
+Kollidierende Pakete im neuen Profil zulassen. Benutzung auf eigene Gefahr!
+
+Standardmäßig wird @command{guix package} @dfn{Kollisionen} als Fehler
+auffassen und melden. Zu Kollisionen kommt es, wenn zwei oder mehr
+verschiedene Versionen oder Varianten desselben Pakets im Profil landen.
+
+@item --verbose
+Erzeugt ausführliche Textausgaben. Insbesondere wird auch das
+Erstellungsprotokoll der Umgebung auf dem Standard-Fehler-Port (stderr)
+ausgegeben.
+
+@item --bootstrap
+Erstellt das Profil mit dem Bootstrap-Guile. Diese Option ist nur für
+Entwickler der Distribution nützlich.
+
+@end table
+
+Zusätzlich zu diesen Aktionen unterstützt @command{guix package} folgende
+Befehlszeilenoptionen, um den momentanen Zustand eines Profils oder die
+Verfügbarkeit von Paketen nachzulesen:
+
+@table @option
+
+@item --search=@var{Regexp}
+@itemx -s @var{Regexp}
+@cindex Suche nach Paketen
+Führt alle verfügbaren Pakete auf, deren Name, Zusammenfassung oder
+Beschreibung zum regulären Ausdruck @var{Regexp} passt, sortiert nach ihrer
+Relevanz. Alle Metadaten passender Pakete werden im @code{recutils}-Format
+geliefert (@pxref{Top, GNU recutils databases,, recutils, GNU recutils
+manual}).
+
+So können bestimmte Felder mit dem Befehl @command{recsel} extrahiert
+werden, zum Beispiel:
+
+@example
+$ guix package -s malloc | recsel -p name,version,relevance
+name: jemalloc
+version: 4.5.0
+relevance: 6
+
+name: glibc
+version: 2.25
+relevance: 1
+
+name: libgc
+version: 7.6.0
+relevance: 1
+@end example
+
+Ebenso kann der Name aller zu den Bedingungen der GNU@tie{}LGPL, Version 3,
+verfügbaren Pakete ermittelt werden:
+
+@example
+$ guix package -s "" | recsel -p name -e 'license ~ "LGPL 3"'
+name: elfutils
+
+name: gmp
+@dots{}
+@end example
+
+Es ist auch möglich, Suchergebnisse näher einzuschränken, indem Sie
+@code{-s} mehrmals übergeben. Zum Beispiel liefert folgender Befehl eines
+Liste von Brettspielen:
+
+@example
+$ guix package -s '\<board\>' -s game | recsel -p name
+name: gnubg
+@dots{}
+@end example
+
+Würden wir @code{-s game} weglassen, bekämen wir auch Software-Pakete
+aufgelistet, die mit »printed circuit boards« (elektronischen Leiterplatten)
+zu tun haben; ohne die spitzen Klammern um @code{board} bekämen wir auch
+Pakete, die mit »keyboards« (Tastaturen, oder musikalischen Keyboard) zu tun
+haben.
+
+Es ist Zeit für ein komplexeres Beispiel. Folgender Befehl sucht
+kryptographische Bibliotheken, filtert Haskell-, Perl-, Python- und
+Ruby-Bibliotheken heraus und gibt Namen und Zusammenfassung passender Pakete
+aus:
+
+@example
+$ guix package -s crypto -s library | \
+    recsel -e '! (name ~ "^(ghc|perl|python|ruby)")' -p name,synopsis
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+@xref{Selection Expressions,,, recutils, GNU recutils manual} enthält
+weitere Informationen über @dfn{Auswahlausdrücke} mit @code{recsel -e}.
+
+@item --show=@var{Paket}
+Zeigt Details über das @var{Paket} aus der Liste verfügbarer Pakete, im
+@code{recutils}-Format (@pxref{Top, GNU recutils databases,, recutils, GNU
+recutils manual}).
+
+@example
+$ guix package --show=python | recsel -p name,version
+name: python
+version: 2.7.6
+
+name: python
+version: 3.3.5
+@end example
+
+Sie können auch den vollständigen Namen eines Pakets angeben, um Details nur
+über diese Version angezeigt zu bekommen:
+@example
+$ guix package --show=python@@3.4 | recsel -p name,version
+name: python
+version: 3.4.3
+@end example
+
+
+
+@item --list-installed[=@var{Regexp}]
+@itemx -I [@var{Regexp}]
+Listet die derzeit installierten Pakete im angegebenen Profil auf, die
+zuletzt installierten Pakete zuletzt. Wenn ein regulärer Ausdruck
+@var{Regexp} angegeben wird, werden nur installierte Pakete aufgeführt,
+deren Name zu @var{Regexp} passt.
+
+Zu jedem installierten Paket werden folgende Informationen angezeigt, durch
+Tabulatorzeichen getrennt: der Paketname, die Version als Zeichenkette,
+welche Teile des Pakets installiert sind (zum Beispiel @code{out}, wenn die
+Standard-Paketausgabe installiert ist, @code{include}, wenn seine Header
+installiert sind, usw.) und an welchem Pfad das Paket im Store zu finden
+ist.
+
+@item --list-available[=@var{Regexp}]
+@itemx -A [@var{Regexp}]
+Listet Pakete auf, die in der aktuell installierten Distribution dieses
+Systems verfügbar sind (@pxref{GNU-Distribution}). Wenn ein regulärer
+Ausdruck @var{Regexp} angegeben wird, werden nur Pakete aufgeführt, deren
+Name zum regulären Ausdruck @var{Regexp} passt.
+
+Zu jedem Paket werden folgende Informationen getrennt durch Tabulatorzeichen
+ausgegeben: der Name, die Version als Zeichenkette, die Teile des Programms
+(@pxref{Pakete mit mehreren Ausgaben.}) und die Stelle im Quellcode, an der
+das Paket definiert ist.
+
+@item --list-generations[=@var{Muster}]
+@itemx -l [@var{Muster}]
+@cindex Generationen
+Liefert eine Liste der Generationen zusammen mit dem Datum, an dem sie
+erzeugt wurden; zu jeder Generation werden zudem die installierten Pakete
+angezeigt, zuletzt installierte Pakete zuletzt. Beachten Sie, dass die
+nullte Generation niemals angezeigt wird.
+
+Zu jedem installierten Paket werden folgende Informationen durch
+Tabulatorzeichen getrennt angezeigt: der Name des Pakets, die Version als
+Zeichenkette, welcher Teil des Pakets installiert ist (@pxref{Pakete mit mehreren Ausgaben.}) und an welcher Stelle sich das Paket im Store befindet.
+
+Wenn ein @var{Muster} angegeben wird, liefert der Befehl nur dazu passende
+Generationen. Gültige Muster sind zum Beispiel:
+
+@itemize
+@item @emph{Ganze Zahlen und kommagetrennte ganze Zahlen}. Beide Muster bezeichnen
+Generationsnummern. Zum Beispiel liefert @code{--list-generations=1} die
+erste Generation.
+
+Durch @code{--list-generations=1,8,2} werden drei Generationen in der
+angegebenen Reihenfolge angezeigt. Weder Leerzeichen noch ein Komma am
+Schluss der Liste ist erlaubt.
+
+@item @emph{Bereiche}. @code{--list-generations=2..9} gibt die
+angegebenen Generationen und alles dazwischen aus. Beachten Sie, dass der
+Bereichsanfang eine kleinere Zahl als das Bereichsende sein muss.
+
+Sie können auch kein Bereichsende angeben, zum Beispiel liefert
+@code{--list-generations=2..} alle Generationen ab der zweiten.
+
+@item @emph{Zeitdauern}. Sie können auch die letzten @emph{N}@tie{}Tage, Wochen
+or months by passing an integer along with the first letter of the
+duration.  For example, @code{--list-generations=20d} lists generations that
+are up to 20 days old.
+@end itemize
+
+@item --delete-generations[=@var{Muster}]
+@itemx -d [@var{Muster}]
+Wird kein @var{Muster} angegeben, werden alle Generationen außer der
+aktuellen entfernt.
+
+Dieser Befehl akzeptiert dieselben Muster wie
+@option{--list-generations}. Wenn ein @var{Muster} angegeben wird, werden
+die passenden Generationen gelöscht. Wenn das @var{Muster} für eine
+Zeitdauer steht, werden diejenigen Generationen gelöscht, die @emph{älter}
+als die angegebene Dauer sind. Zum Beispiel löscht
+@code{--delete-generations=1m} die Generationen, die mehr als einen Monat
+alt sind.
+
+Falls die aktuelle Generation zum Muster passt, wird sie @emph{nicht}
+gelöscht. Auch die nullte Generation wird niemals gelöscht.
+
+Beachten Sie, dass Sie auf gelöschte Generationen nicht zurückwechseln
+können. Dieser Befehl sollte also nur mit Vorsicht benutzt werden.
+
+@end table
+
+Zu guter Letzt können Sie, da @command{guix package} Erstellungsprozesse zu
+starten vermag, auch alle gemeinsamen Erstellungsoptionen (@pxref{Gemeinsame Erstellungsoptionen}) verwenden. Auch Paketumwandlungsoptionen wie
+@option{--with-source} sind möglich (@pxref{Paketumwandlungsoptionen}). Beachten Sie jedoch, dass die verwendeten
+Paketumwandlungsoptionen verloren gehen, nachdem Sie die Pakete aktualisiert
+haben. Damit Paketumwandlungen über Aktualisierungen hinweg erhalten
+bleiben, sollten Sie Ihre eigene Paketvariante in einem Guile-Modul
+definieren und zur Umgebungsvariablen @code{GUIX_PACKAGE_PATH} hinzufügen
+(@pxref{Pakete definieren}).
+
+@node Substitute
+@section Substitute
+
+@cindex Substitute
+@cindex vorerstellte Binärdateien
+Guix kann transparent Binär- oder Quelldateien ausliefern. Das heißt, Dinge
+können sowohl lokal erstellt, als auch als vorerstellte Objekte von einem
+Server heruntergeladen werden, oder beides gemischt. Wir bezeichnen diese
+vorerstellten Objekte als @dfn{Substitute} — sie substituieren lokale
+Erstellungsergebnisse. In vielen Fällen geht das Herunterladen eines
+Substituts wesentlich schneller, als Dinge lokal zu erstellen.
+
+Substitute können alles sein, was das Ergebnis einer Ableitungserstellung
+ist (@pxref{Ableitungen}). Natürlich sind sie üblicherweise vorerstellte
+Paket-Binärdateien, aber wenn zum Beispiel ein Quell-Tarball das Ergebnis
+einer Ableitungserstellung ist, kann auch er als Substitut verfügbar sein.
+
+@menu
+* Offizieller Substitut-Server::  Eine besondere Quelle von Substituten.
+* Substitut-Server autorisieren::  Wie man Substitute an- und abschaltet.
+* Substitutauthentifizierung::  Wie Guix Substitute verifiziert.
+* Proxy-Einstellungen::      Wie Sie Substitute über einen Proxy beziehen.
+* Fehler bei der Substitution::  Was passiert, wenn die Substitution 
+                                   fehlschlägt.
+* Vom Vertrauen gegenüber Binärdateien::  Wie können Sie diesem binären 
+                                              Blob trauen?
+@end menu
+
+@node Offizieller Substitut-Server
+@subsection Offizieller Substitut-Server
+
+@cindex Hydra
+@cindex Build-Farm
+Der Server @code{mirror.hydra.gnu.org} ist die Façade für eine offizielle
+»Build-Farm«, ein Erstellungswerk, das kontinuierlich Guix-Pakete für einige
+Prozessorarchitekturen erstellt und sie als Substitute zur Verfügung
+stellt. Dies ist die standardmäßige Quelle von Substituten; durch Übergeben
+der Befehlszeilenoption @option{--substitute-urls} an entweder den
+@command{guix-daemon} (@pxref{daemon-substitute-urls,, @code{guix-daemon
+--substitute-urls}}) oder Client-Werkzeuge wie @command{guix package}
+(@pxref{client-substitute-urls,, client @option{--substitute-urls} option})
+kann eine abweichende Einstellung benutzt werden.
+
+Substitut-URLs können entweder HTTP oder HTTPS sein. HTTPS wird empfohlen,
+weil die Kommunikation verschlüsselt ist; umgekehrt kann bei HTTP die
+Kommunikation belauscht werden, wodurch der Angreifer zum Beispiel erfahren
+könnte, ob Ihr System über noch nicht behobene Sicherheitsschwachstellen
+verfügt.
+
+Substitute von der offiziellen Build-Farm sind standardmäßig erlaubt, wenn
+Sie die Guix-System-Distribution verwenden (@pxref{GNU-Distribution}). Auf
+Fremddistributionen sind sie allerdings standardmäßig ausgeschaltet, solange
+Sie sie nicht ausdrücklich in einem der empfohlenen Installationsschritte
+erlaubt haben (@pxref{Installation}). Die folgenden Absätze beschreiben, wie
+Sie Substitute für die offizielle Build-Farm an- oder ausschalten; dieselbe
+Prozedur kann auch benutzt werden, um Substitute für einen beliebigen
+anderen Substitutsserver zu erlauben.
+
+@node Substitut-Server autorisieren
+@subsection Substitut-Server autorisieren
+
+@cindex Sicherheit
+@cindex Substitute, deren Autorisierung
+@cindex Access Control List (ACL), für Substitute
+@cindex ACL (Access Control List), für Substitute
+Um es Guix zu gestatten, Substitute von @code{hydra.gnu.org} oder einem
+Spiegelserver davon herunterzuladen, müssen Sie den zugehörigen öffentlichen
+Schlüssel zur Access Control List (ACL, Zugriffssteuerungsliste) für
+Archivimporte hinzufügen, mit Hilfe des Befehls @command{guix archive}
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix archive}). Dies impliziert, dass Sie darauf vertrauen,
+dass @code{hydra.gnu.org} nicht kompromittiert wurde und echte Substitute
+liefert.
+
+Der öffentliche Schlüssel für @code{hydra.gnu.org} wird zusammen mit Guix
+installiert, in das Verzeichnis
+@code{@var{prefix}/share/guix/hydra.gnu.org.pub}, wobei @var{prefix} das
+Installationspräfix von Guix ist. Wenn Sie Guix aus seinem Quellcode heraus
+installieren, stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie die GPG-Signatur von
+@file{guix-@value{VERSION}.tar.gz} prüfen, worin sich dieser öffentliche
+Schlüssel befindet. Dann können Sie so etwas wie hier ausführen:
+
+@example
+# guix archive --authorize < @var{prefix}/share/guix/hydra.gnu.org.pub
+@end example
+
+@quotation Anmerkung
+Genauso enthält die Datei @file{berlin.guixsd.org.pub} den öffentlichen
+Schlüssel für die neue Build-Farm des Guix-Projekts, die unter
+@indicateurl{https://berlin.guixsd.org} erreichbar ist.
+
+Derzeit, als dieser Text geschrieben wurde, wird @code{berlin.guixsd.org}
+ausgebaut, um besser skalieren zu können, aber Sie könnten es
+ausprobieren. Dahinter stecken 20 x86_64-/i686-Erstellungsknoten, die
+Substitute früher anbieten könnten als @code{mirror.hydra.gnu.org}.
+@end quotation
+
+Sobald es eingerichtet wurde, sollte sich die Ausgabe eines Befehls wie
+@code{guix build} von so etwas:
+
+@example
+$ guix build emacs --dry-run
+Folgende Ableitungen würden erstellt:
+   /gnu/store/yr7bnx8xwcayd6j95r2clmkdl1qh688w-emacs-24.3.drv
+   /gnu/store/x8qsh1hlhgjx6cwsjyvybnfv2i37z23w-dbus-1.6.4.tar.gz.drv
+   /gnu/store/1ixwp12fl950d15h2cj11c73733jay0z-alsa-lib-1.0.27.1.tar.bz2.drv
+   /gnu/store/nlma1pw0p603fpfiqy7kn4zm105r5dmw-util-linux-2.21.drv
+@dots{}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+in so etwas verwandeln:
+
+@example
+$ guix build emacs --dry-run
+112.3 MB würden heruntergeladen:
+   /gnu/store/pk3n22lbq6ydamyymqkkz7i69wiwjiwi-emacs-24.3
+   /gnu/store/2ygn4ncnhrpr61rssa6z0d9x22si0va3-libjpeg-8d
+   /gnu/store/71yz6lgx4dazma9dwn2mcjxaah9w77jq-cairo-1.12.16
+   /gnu/store/7zdhgp0n1518lvfn8mb96sxqfmvqrl7v-libxrender-0.9.7
+@dots{}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Das zeigt an, dass Substitute von @code{hydra.gnu.org} nutzbar sind und für
+zukünftige Erstellungen heruntergeladen werden, wann immer es möglich ist.
+
+@cindex Substitute, wie man sie ausschaltet
+Der Substitutsmechanismus kann global ausgeschaltet werden, indem Sie dem
+@code{guix-daemon} beim Starten die Befehlszeilenoption
+@code{--no-substitutes} übergeben (@pxref{Aufruf des guix-daemon}). Er kann
+auch temporär ausgeschaltet werden, indem Sie @code{--no-substitutes} an
+@command{guix package}, @command{guix build} und andere
+Befehlszeilenwerkzeuge übergeben.
+
+@node Substitutauthentifizierung
+@subsection Substitutauthentifizierung
+
+@cindex digitale Signaturen
+Guix erkennt, wenn ein verfälschtes Substitut benutzt würde, und meldet
+einen Fehler. Ebenso werden Substitute ignoriert, die nich signiert sind,
+oder nicht mit einem in der ACL aufgelisteten Schlüssel signiert sind.
+
+Es gibt nur eine Ausnahme: Wenn ein unautorisierter Server Substitute
+anbietet, die @emph{Bit für Bit identisch} mit denen von einem autorisierten
+Server sind, können sie auch vom unautorisierten Server heruntergeladen
+werden. Zum Beispiel, angenommen wir haben zwei Substitutserver mit dieser
+Befehlszeilenoption ausgewählt:
+
+@example
+--substitute-urls="https://a.example.org https://b.example.org"
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+@cindex Reproduzierbare Erstellungen
+Wenn in der ACL nur der Schlüssel für @code{b.example.org} aufgeführt wurde,
+aber @code{a.example.org} @emph{exakt dieselben} Substitute anbietet, wird
+Guix auch Substitute von @code{a.example.org} herunterladen, weil es in der
+Liste zuerst kommt und als Spiegelserver für @code{b.example.org} aufgefasst
+werden kann. In der Praxis haben unabhängige Maschinen bei der Erstellung
+normalerweise dieselben Binärdateien als Ergebnis, dank bit-reproduzierbarer
+Erstellungen (siehe unten).
+
+Wenn Sie HTTPS benutzen, wird das X.509-Zertifikat des Servers @emph{nicht}
+validiert (mit anderen Worten, die Identität des Servers wird nicht
+authentifiziert), entgegen dem, was HTTPS-Clients wie Web-Browser
+normalerweise tun. Da Guix Substitutinformationen selbst überprüft, wie oben
+erklärt, wäre es unnötig (wohingegen mit X.509-Zertifikaten geprüft wird, ob
+ein Domain-Name zu öffentlichen Schlüsseln passt).
+
+@node Proxy-Einstellungen
+@subsection Proxy-Einstellungen
+
+@vindex http_proxy
+Substitute werden über HTTP oder HTTPS heruntergeladen. Die
+Umgebungsvariable @code{http_proxy} kann in der Umgebung von
+@command{guix-daemon} definiert werden und wirkt sich dann auf das
+Herunterladen von Substituten aus. Beachten Sie, dass der Wert von
+@code{http_proxy} in der Umgebung, in der @command{guix build},
+@command{guix package} und andere Client-Befehle ausgeführt werden,
+@emph{keine Rolle spielt}.
+
+@node Fehler bei der Substitution
+@subsection Fehler bei der Substitution
+
+Selbst wenn ein Substitut für eine Ableitung verfügbar ist, schlägt die
+versuchte Substitution manchmal fehl. Das kann aus vielen Gründen geschehen:
+die Substitutsserver könnten offline sein, das Substitut könnte kürzlich
+gelöscht worden sein, die Netzwerkverbindunge könnte unterbrochen worden
+sein, usw.
+
+Wenn Substitute aktiviert sind und ein Substitut für eine Ableitung zwar
+verfügbar ist, aber die versuchte Substitution fehlschlägt, kann Guix
+versuchen, die Ableitung lokal zu erstellen, je nachdem, ob
+@code{--fallback} übergeben wurde (@pxref{fallback-option,, common build
+option @code{--fallback}}). Genauer gesagt, wird keine lokale Erstellung
+durchgeführt, solange kein @code{--fallback} angegeben wurde, und die
+Ableitung wird als Fehlschlag angesehen. Wenn @code{--fallback} übergeben
+wurde, wird Guix versuchen, die Ableitung lokal zu erstellen, und ob die
+Ableitung erfolgreich ist oder nicht, hängt davon ab, ob die lokale
+Erstellung erfolgreich ist oder nicht. Beachten Sie, dass, falls Substitute
+ausgeschaltet oder erst gar kein Substitut verfügbar ist, @emph{immer} eine
+lokale Erstellung durchgeführt wird, egal ob @code{--fallback} übergeben
+wurde oder nicht.
+
+Um eine Vorstellung zu bekommen, wieviele Substitute gerade verfügbar sind,
+können Sie den Befehl @command{guix weather} benutzen (@pxref{Aufruf von guix weather}). Dieser Befehl zeigt Statistiken darüber an, wie es um die von
+einem Server verfügbaren Substitute steht.
+
+@node Vom Vertrauen gegenüber Binärdateien
+@subsection Vom Vertrauen gegenüber Binärdateien
+
+@cindex Vertrauen, gegenüber vorerstellten Binärdateien
+Derzeit hängt die Kontrolle jedes Individuums über seine Rechner von
+Institutionen, Unternehmen und solchen Gruppierungen ab, die über genug
+Macht und Entschlusskraft verfügen, die Rechnerinfrastruktur zu sabotieren
+und ihre Schwachstellen auszunutzen. Auch wenn es bequem ist, Substitute von
+@code{hydra.gnu.org} zu benutzen, ermuntern wir Nutzer, auch selbst
+Erstellungen durchzuführen oder gar ihre eigene Build-Farm zu betreiben,
+damit @code{hydra.gnu.org} ein weniger interessantes Ziel wird. Eine Art,
+uns zu helfen, ist, die von Ihnen erstellte Software mit dem Befehl
+@command{guix publish} zu veröffentlichen, damit andere eine größere Auswahl
+haben, von welchem Server sie Substitute beziehen möchten (@pxref{Aufruf von guix publish}).
+
+Guix hat die richtigen Grundlagen, um die Reproduzierbarkeit von
+Erstellungen zu maximieren (@pxref{Funktionalitäten}). In den meisten Fällen sollten
+unabhängige Erstellungen eines bestimmten Pakets zu bitweise identischen
+Ergebnissen führen. Wir können also mit Hilfe einer vielschichtigen Menge an
+unabhängigen Paketerstellungen die Integrität unseres Systems besser
+gewährleisten. Der Befehl @command{guix challenge} hat das Ziel, Nutzern zu
+ermöglichen, Substitutserver zu beurteilen, und Entwickler dabei zu
+unterstützen, nichtdeterministische Paketerstellungen zu finden
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix challenge}). Ebenso ermöglicht es die
+Befehlszeilenoption @option{--check} von @command{guix build}, dass Nutzer
+bereits installierte Substitute auf Echtheit zu prüfen, indem sie lokal
+nachgebaut werden (@pxref{build-check, @command{guix build --check}}).
+
+In Zukunft wollen wir, dass Guix Binärdateien an und von Nutzern
+peer-to-peer veröffentlichen kann. Wenn Sie mit uns dieses Projekt
+diskuttieren möchten, kommen Sie auf unsere Mailing-Liste
+@email{guix-devel@@gnu.org}.
+
+@node Pakete mit mehreren Ausgaben.
+@section Pakete mit mehreren Ausgaben.
+
+@cindex mehrere Ausgaben, bei Paketen
+@cindex Paketausgaben
+@cindex Ausgaben
+
+Oft haben in Guix definierte Pakete eine einzige @dfn{Ausgabe} — d.h. aus
+dem Quellpaket entsteht genau ein Verzeichnis im Store. Wenn Sie
+@command{guix package -i glibc} ausführen, wird die Standard-Paketausgabe
+des GNU-libc-Pakets installiert; die Standardausgabe wird @code{out}
+genannt, aber ihr Name kann weggelassen werden, wie sie an obigem Befehl
+sehen. In diesem speziellen Fall enthält die Standard-Paketausgabe von
+@code{glibc} alle C-Headerdateien, gemeinsamen Bibliotheken (»Shared
+Libraries«), statische Bibliotheken (»Static Libraries«), Dokumentation für
+Info sowie andere zusätzliche Dateien.
+
+Manchmal ist es besser, die verschiedenen Arten von Dateien, die aus einem
+einzelnen Quellpaket hervorgehen, in getrennte Ausgaben zu unterteilen. Zum
+Beispiel installiert die GLib-C-Bibliothek (die von GTK+ und damit
+zusammenhängenden Paketen benutzt wird) mehr als 20 MiB an HTML-Seiten mit
+Referenzdokumentation. Um den Nutzern, die das nicht brauchen, Platz zu
+sparen, wird die Dokumentation in einer separaten Ausgabe abgelegt, genannt
+@code{doc}. Um also die Hauptausgabe von GLib zu installieren, zu der alles
+außer der Dokumentation gehört, ist der Befehl:
+
+@example
+guix package -i glib
+@end example
+
+@cindex Dokumentation
+Der Befehl, um die Dokumentation zu installieren, ist:
+
+@example
+guix package -i glib:doc
+@end example
+
+Manche Pakete installieren Programme mit unterschiedlich großem
+»Abhängigkeiten-Fußabdruck«. Zum Beispiel installiert das Paket WordNet
+sowohl Befehlszeilenwerkzeuge als auch grafische Benutzerschnittstellen
+(GUIs). Erstere hängen nur von der C-Bibliothek ab, während Letztere auch
+von Tcl/Tk und den zu Grunde liegenden X-Bibliotheken abhängen. Jedenfalls
+belassen wir deshalb die Befehlszeilenwerkzeuge in der
+Standard-Paketausgabe, während sich die GUIs in einer separaten Ausgabe
+befinden. So können Benutzer, die die GUIs nicht brauchen, Platz sparen. Der
+Befehl @command{guix size} kann dabei helfen, solche Situationen zu erkennen
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix size}). @command{guix graph} kann auch helfen
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix graph}).
+
+In der GNU-Distribution gibt es viele solche Pakete mit mehreren
+Ausgaben. Andere Konventionen für Ausgabenamen sind zum Beispiel @code{lib}
+für Bibliotheken und eventuell auch ihre Header-Dateien,, @code{bin} für
+eigenständige Programme und @code{debug} für Informationen zur
+Fehlerbehandlung (@pxref{Dateien zur Fehlersuche installieren}). Die Ausgaben eines
+Pakets stehen in der dritten Spalte der Anzeige von @command{guix package
+--list-available} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}).
+
+
+@node Aufruf von guix gc
+@section @command{guix gc} aufrufen
+
+@cindex Müllsammler
+@cindex Plattenspeicher
+Pakete, die zwar installiert sind, aber nicht benutzt werden, können vom
+@dfn{Müllsammler} entfernt werden. Mit dem Befehl @command{guix gc} können
+Benutzer den Müllsammler ausdrücklich aufrufen, um Speicher im Verzeichnis
+@file{/gnu/store} freizugeben. Dies ist der @emph{einzige} Weg, Dateien aus
+@file{/gnu/store} zu entfernen — das manuelle Entfernen von Dateien kann den
+Store irreparabel beschädigen!
+
+@cindex GC-Wurzeln
+@cindex Müllsammlerwurzeln
+Der Müllsammler kennt eine Reihe von @dfn{Wurzeln}: Jede Datei in
+@file{/gnu/store}, die von einer Wurzel aus erreichbar ist, gilt als
+@dfn{lebendig} und kann nicht entfernt werden; jede andere Datei gilt als
+@dfn{tot} und ist ein Kandidat, gelöscht zu werden. Die Menge der
+Müllsammlerwurzeln (kurz auch »GC-Wurzeln«, von englisch »Garbage
+Collector«) umfasst Standard-Benutzerprofile; standardmäßig werden diese
+Müllsammlerwurzeln durch symbolische Verknüpfungen in
+@file{/var/guix/gcroots} dargestellt. Neue Müllsammlerwurzeln können zum
+Beispiel mit @command{guix build --root} festgelegt werden (@pxref{Aufruf von guix build}).
+
+Bevor Sie mit @code{guix gc --collect-garbage} Speicher freimachen, wollen
+Sie vielleicht alte Generationen von Benutzerprofilen löschen, damit alte
+Paketerstellungen von diesen Generationen entfernt werden können. Führen Sie
+dazu @code{guix package --delete-generations} aus (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}).
+
+Unsere Empfehlung ist, dass Sie den Müllsammler regelmäßig laufen lassen und
+wenn Sie wenig freien Speicherplatz zur Verfügung haben. Um zum Beispiel
+sicherzustellen, dass Sie mindestens 5@tie{}GB auf Ihrer Platte zur
+Verfügung haben, benutzen Sie einfach:
+
+@example
+guix gc -F 5G
+@end example
+
+Es ist völlig sicher, dafür eine nicht interaktive, regelmäßige
+Auftragsausführung vorzugeben (@pxref{Geplante Auftragsausführung}, für eine
+Erklärung, wie man das in GuixSD tun kann). @command{guix gc} ohne
+Befehlszeilenargumente auszuführen, lässt so viel Müll wie möglich sammeln,
+aber das ist oft nicht, was man will, denn so muss man unter Umständen
+Software erneut erstellen oder erneut herunterladen, weil der Müllsammler
+sie als »tot« ansieht, sie aber zur Erstellung anderer Software wieder
+gebraucht wird — das trifft zum Beispiel auf die Compiler-Toolchain zu.
+
+Der Befehl @command{guix gc} hat drei Arbeitsmodi: Er kann benutzt werden,
+um als Müllsammler tote Dateien zu entfernen (das Standardverhalten), um
+ganz bestimmte, angegebene Datein zu löschen (mit der Befehlszeilenoption
+@code{--delete}), um Müllsammlerinformationen auszugeben oder
+fortgeschrittenere Anfragen zu verarbeiten. Die
+Müllsammler-Befehlszeilenoptionen sind wie folgt:
+
+@table @code
+@item --collect-garbage[=@var{Minimum}]
+@itemx -C [@var{Minimum}]
+Lässt Müll sammeln — z.B. nicht erreichbare Dateien in @file{/gnu/store} und
+seinen Unterverzeichnissen. Wird keine andere Befehlszeilenoption angegeben,
+wird standardmäßig diese durchgeführt.
+
+Wenn ein @var{Minimum} angegeben wurde, hört der Müllsammler auf, sobald
+@var{Minimum} Bytes gesammelt wurden. Das @var{Minimum} kann die Anzahl der
+Bytes bezeichnen oder mit einer Einheit als Suffix versehen sein, wie etwa
+@code{MiB} für Mebibytes und @code{GB} für Gigabytes (@pxref{Block size,
+size specifications,, coreutils, GNU Coreutils}).
+
+Wird kein @var{Minimum} angegeben, sammelt der Müllsammler allen Müll.
+
+@item --free-space=@var{Menge}
+@itemx -F @var{Menge}
+Sammelt Müll, bis die angegebene @var{Menge} an freiem Speicher in
+@file{/gnu/store} zur Verfügung steht, falls möglich; die @var{Menge} ist
+eine Speichergröße wie @code{500MiB}, wie oben beschrieben.
+
+Wenn die angegebene  @var{Menge} oder mehr bereits in @file{/gnu/store} frei
+verfügbar ist, passiert nichts.
+
+@item --delete
+@itemx -d
+Versucht, alle als Argumente angegebenen Dateien oder Verzeichnisse im Store
+zu löschen. Dies schlägt fehl, wenn manche der Dateien oder Verzeichnisse
+nicht im Store oder noch immer lebendig sind.
+
+@item --list-failures
+Store-Objekte auflisten, die zwischengespeicherten Erstellungsfehlern
+entsprechen.
+
+Hierbei wird nichts ausgegeben, sofern der Daemon nicht mit
+@option{--cache-failures} gestartet wurde (@pxref{Aufruf des guix-daemon,
+@option{--cache-failures}}).
+
+@item --clear-failures
+Die angegebenen Store-Objekte aus dem Zwischenspeicher für fehlgeschlagene
+Erstellungen entfernen.
+
+Auch diese Option macht nur Sinn, wenn der Daemon mit
+@option{--cache-failures} gestartet wurde. Andernfalls passiert nichts.
+
+@item --list-dead
+Zeigt die Liste toter Dateien und Verzeichnisse an, die sich noch im Store
+befinden — das heißt, Dateien, die von keiner Wurzel mehr erreichbar sind.
+
+@item --list-live
+Zeige die Liste lebendiger Store-Dateien und -Verzeichnisse.
+
+@end table
+
+Außerdem können Referenzen unter bestehenden Store-Dateien gefunden werden:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item --references
+@itemx --referrers
+@cindex Paketabhängigkeiten
+Listet die referenzierten bzw. sie referenzierenden Objekte der angegebenen
+Store-Dateien auf.
+
+@item --requisites
+@itemx -R
+@cindex Abschluss
+Listet alle Voraussetzungen der als Argumente übergebenen Store-Dateien
+auf. Voraussetzungen sind die Store-Dateien selbst, ihre Referenzen sowie
+die Referenzen davon, rekursiv. Mit anderen Worten, die zurückgelieferte
+Liste ist der @dfn{transitive Abschluss} dieser Store-Dateien.
+
+Der Abschnitt @xref{Aufruf von guix size} erklärt ein Werkzeug, um den
+Speicherbedarf des Abschlusses eines Elements zu ermitteln. Siehe
+@xref{Aufruf von guix graph} für ein Werkzeug, um den Referenzgraphen zu
+veranschaulichen.
+
+@item --derivers
+@cindex Ableitung
+Liefert die Ableitung(en), die zu den angegebenen Store-Objekten führen
+(@pxref{Ableitungen}).
+
+Zum Beispiel liefert dieser Befehl:
+
+@example
+guix gc --derivers `guix package -I ^emacs$ | cut -f4`
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+die @file{.drv}-Datei(en), die zum in Ihrem Profil installierten
+@code{emacs}-Paket führen.
+
+Beachten Sie, dass es auch sein kann, dass keine passenden
+@file{.drv}-Dateien existieren, zum Beispiel wenn diese Dateien bereits dem
+Müllsammler zum Opfer gefallen sind. Es kann auch passieren, dass es mehr
+als eine passende @file{.drv} gibt, bei Ableitungen mit fester Ausgabe.
+@end table
+
+Zuletzt können Sie mit folgenden Befehlszeilenoptionen die Integrität des
+Stores prüfen und den Plattenspeicherverbrauch im Zaum halten.
+
+@table @option
+
+@item --verify[=@var{Optionen}]
+@cindex Integrität, des Stores
+@cindex Integritätsprüfung
+Die Integrität des Stores verifizieren
+
+Standardmäßig wird sichergestellt, dass alle Store-Objekte, die in der
+Datenbank des Daemons als gültig markiert wurden, auch tatsächlich in
+@file{/gnu/store} existieren.
+
+Wenn angegeben, müssen die @var{Optionen} eine kommagetrennte Liste aus
+mindestens einem der Worte @code{contents} und @code{repair} sein.
+
+Wenn Sie @option{--verify=contents} übergeben, berechnet der Daemon den Hash
+des Inhalts jedes Store-Objekts und vergleicht ihn mit dem Hash in der
+Datenbank. Sind die Hashes ungleich, wird eine Datenbeschädigung
+gemeldet. Weil dabei @emph{alle Dateien im Store} durchlaufen werden, kann
+der Befehl viel Zeit brauchen, besonders auf Systemen mit langsamer Platte.
+
+@cindex Store, reparieren
+@cindex Datenbeschädigung, Behebung
+Mit @option{--verify=repair} oder @option{--verify=contents,repair} versucht
+der Daemon, beschädigte Store-Objekte zu reparieren, indem er Substitute für
+selbige herunterlädt (@pxref{Substitute}). Weil die Reparatur nicht atomar
+und daher womöglich riskant ist, kann nur der Systemadministrator den Befehl
+benutzen. Eine weniger aufwendige Alternative, wenn Sie wissen, welches
+Objekt beschädigt ist, ist, @command{guix build --repair} zu benutzen
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix build}).
+
+@item --optimize
+@cindex Deduplizieren
+Den Store durch Nutzung harter Verknüpfungen für identische Dateien
+optimieren — mit anderen Worten wird der Store @dfn{dedupliziert}.
+
+Der Daemon führt Deduplizierung automatisch nach jeder erfolgreichen
+Erstellung und jedem Importieren eines Archivs durch, sofern er nicht mit
+@code{--disable-deduplication} (@pxref{Aufruf des guix-daemon,
+@code{--disable-deduplication}}) gestartet wurde. Diese Befehlszeilenoption
+brauchen Sie also in erster Linie dann, wenn der Daemon zuvor mit
+@code{--disable-deduplication} gestartet worden ist.
+
+@end table
+
+@node Aufruf von guix pull
+@section @command{guix pull} aufrufen
+
+@cindex Aktualisieren von Guix
+@cindex Updaten von Guix
+@cindex @command{guix pull}
+@cindex pull
+Packages are installed or upgraded to the latest version available in the
+distribution currently available on your local machine.  To update that
+distribution, along with the Guix tools, you must run @command{guix pull}:
+the command downloads the latest Guix source code and package descriptions,
+and deploys it.  Source code is downloaded from a @uref{https://git-scm.com,
+Git} repository, by default the official GNU@tie{}Guix repository, though
+this can be customized.
+
+Danach wird @command{guix package} Pakete und ihre Versionen entsprechend
+der gerade heruntergeladenen Kopie von Guix benutzen. Nicht nur das, auch
+alle Guix-Befehle und Scheme-Module werden aus der neuesten Version von Guix
+kommen. Neue @command{guix}-Unterbefehle, die durch die Aktualisierung
+hinzugekommen sind, werden also auch verfügbar.
+
+Any user can update their Guix copy using @command{guix pull}, and the
+effect is limited to the user who run @command{guix pull}.  For instance,
+when user @code{root} runs @command{guix pull}, this has no effect on the
+version of Guix that user @code{alice} sees, and vice versa.
+
+The result of running @command{guix pull} is a @dfn{profile} available under
+@file{~/.config/guix/current} containing the latest Guix.  Thus, make sure
+to add it to the beginning of your search path so that you use the latest
+version, and similarly for the Info manual (@pxref{Dokumentation}):
+
+@example
+export PATH="$HOME/.config/guix/current/bin:$PATH"
+export INFOPATH="$HOME/.config/guix/current/share/info:$INFOPATH"
+@end example
+
+The @code{--list-generations} or @code{-l} option lists past generations
+produced by @command{guix pull}, along with details about their provenance:
+
+@example
+$ guix pull -l
+Generation 1	Jun 10 2018 00:18:18
+  guix 65956ad
+    repository URL: https://git.savannah.gnu.org/git/guix.git
+    branch: origin/master
+    commit: 65956ad3526ba09e1f7a40722c96c6ef7c0936fe
+
+Generation 2	Jun 11 2018 11:02:49
+  guix e0cc7f6
+    repository URL: https://git.savannah.gnu.org/git/guix.git
+    branch: origin/master
+    commit: e0cc7f669bec22c37481dd03a7941c7d11a64f1d
+  2 new packages: keepalived, libnfnetlink
+  6 packages upgraded: emacs-nix-mode@@2.0.4,
+    guile2.0-guix@@0.14.0-12.77a1aac, guix@@0.14.0-12.77a1aac,
+    heimdal@@7.5.0, milkytracker@@1.02.00, nix@@2.0.4
+
+Generation 3	Jun 13 2018 23:31:07	(current)
+  guix 844cc1c
+    repository URL: https://git.savannah.gnu.org/git/guix.git
+    branch: origin/master
+    commit: 844cc1c8f394f03b404c5bb3aee086922373490c
+  28 new packages: emacs-helm-ls-git, emacs-helm-mu, @dots{}
+  69 packages upgraded: borg@@1.1.6, cheese@@3.28.0, @dots{}
+@end example
+
+@ref{Invoking guix describe, @command{guix describe}}, for other ways to
+describe the current status of Guix.
+
+This @code{~/.config/guix/current} profile works like any other profile
+created by @command{guix package} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}).  That is,
+you can list generations, roll back to the previous generation---i.e., the
+previous Guix---and so on:
+
+@example
+$ guix package -p ~/.config/guix/current --roll-back
+switched from generation 3 to 2
+$ guix package -p ~/.config/guix/current --delete-generations=1
+deleting /var/guix/profiles/per-user/charlie/current-guix-1-link
+@end example
+
+Der Befehl @command{guix pull} wird in der Regel ohne Befehlszeilenargumente
+aufgerufen, aber er versteht auch folgende Befehlszeilenoptionen:
+
+@table @code
+@item --url=@var{URL}
+@itemx --commit=@var{Commit}
+@itemx --branch=@var{Branch}
+Download code from the specified @var{url}, at the given @var{commit} (a
+valid Git commit ID represented as a hexadecimal string), or @var{branch}.
+
+@cindex @file{channels.scm}, configuration file
+@cindex configuration file for channels
+These options are provided for convenience, but you can also specify your
+configuration in the @file{~/.config/guix/channels.scm} file or using the
+@option{--channels} option (see below).
+
+@item --channels=@var{file}
+@itemx -C @var{file}
+Read the list of channels from @var{file} instead of
+@file{~/.config/guix/channels.scm}.  @var{file} must contain Scheme code
+that evaluates to a list of channel objects.  @xref{Channels}, for more
+information.
+
+@item --list-generations[=@var{Muster}]
+@itemx -l [@var{Muster}]
+List all the generations of @file{~/.config/guix/current} or, if
+@var{pattern} is provided, the subset of generations that match
+@var{pattern}.  The syntax of @var{pattern} is the same as with @code{guix
+package --list-generations} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}).
+
+@ref{Invoking guix describe}, for a way to display information about the
+current generation only.
+
+@item --profile=@var{Profil}
+@itemx -p @var{Profil}
+Use @var{profile} instead of @file{~/.config/guix/current}.
+
+@item --dry-run
+@itemx -n
+Show which channel commit(s) would be used and what would be built or
+substituted but do not actually do it.
+
+@item --verbose
+Ausführliche Informationen ausgeben und Erstellungsprotokolle auf der
+Standardfehlerausgabe ausgeben.
+
+@item --bootstrap
+Use the bootstrap Guile to build the latest Guix.  This option is only
+useful to Guix developers.
+@end table
+
+The @dfn{channel} mechanism allows you to instruct @command{guix pull} which
+repository and branch to pull from, as well as @emph{additional}
+repositories containing package modules that should be deployed.
+@xref{Channels}, for more information.
+
+In addition, @command{guix pull} supports all the common build options
+(@pxref{Gemeinsame Erstellungsoptionen}).
+
+@node Channels
+@section Channels
+
+@cindex channels
+@cindex @file{channels.scm}, configuration file
+@cindex configuration file for channels
+@cindex @command{guix pull}, configuration file
+@cindex configuration of @command{guix pull}
+Guix and its package collection are updated by running @command{guix pull}
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix pull}).  By default @command{guix pull} downloads and
+deploys Guix itself from the official GNU@tie{}Guix repository.  This can be
+customized by defining @dfn{channels} in the
+@file{~/.config/guix/channels.scm} file.  A channel specifies a URL and
+branch of a Git repository to be deployed, and @command{guix pull} can be
+instructed to pull from one or more channels.  In other words, channels can
+be used to @emph{customize} and to @emph{extend} Guix, as we will see below.
+
+@subsection Using a Custom Guix Channel
+
+The channel called @code{guix} specifies where Guix itself---its
+command-line tools as well as its package collection---should be
+downloaded.  For instance, suppose you want to update from your own copy of
+the Guix repository at @code{example.org}, and specifically the
+@code{super-hacks} branch, you can write in
+@code{~/.config/guix/channels.scm} this specification:
+
+@lisp
+;; Tell 'guix pull' to use my own repo.
+(list (channel
+        (name 'guix)
+        (url "https://example.org/my-guix.git")
+        (branch "super-hacks")))
+@end lisp
+
+@noindent
+From there on, @command{guix pull} will fetch code from the
+@code{super-hacks} branch of the repository at @code{example.org}.
+
+@subsection Specifying Additional Channels
+
+@cindex extending the package collection (channels)
+@cindex personal packages (channels)
+@cindex channels, for personal packages
+You can also specify @emph{additional channels} to pull from.  Let's say you
+have a bunch of custom package variants or personal packages that you think
+would make little sense to contribute to the Guix project, but would like to
+have these packages transparently available to you at the command line.  You
+would first write modules containing those package definitions
+(@pxref{Paketmodule}), maintain them in a Git repository, and then you
+and anyone else can use it as an additional channel to get packages from.
+Neat, no?
+
+@c What follows stems from discussions at
+@c <https://debbugs.gnu.org/cgi/bugreport.cgi?bug=22629#134> as well as
+@c earlier discussions on guix-devel@gnu.org.
+@quotation Warning
+Before you, dear user, shout---``woow this is @emph{soooo coool}!''---and
+publish your personal channel to the world, we would like to share a few
+words of caution:
+
+@itemize
+@item
+Before publishing a channel, please consider contributing your package
+definitions to Guix proper (@pxref{Mitwirken}).  Guix as a project is
+open to free software of all sorts, and packages in Guix proper are readily
+available to all Guix users and benefit from the project's quality assurance
+process.
+
+@item
+When you maintain package definitions outside Guix, we, Guix developers,
+consider that @emph{the compatibility burden is on you}.  Remember that
+package modules and package definitions are just Scheme code that uses
+various programming interfaces (APIs).  We want to remain free to change
+these APIs to keep improving Guix, possibly in ways that break your
+channel.  We never change APIs gratuitously, but we will @emph{not} commit
+to freezing APIs either.
+
+@item
+Corollary: if you're using an external channel and that channel breaks,
+please @emph{report the issue to the channel authors}, not to the Guix
+project.
+@end itemize
+
+You've been warned! Having said this, we believe external channels are a
+practical way to exert your freedom to augment Guix' package collection and
+to share your improvements, which are basic tenets of
+@uref{https://www.gnu.org/philosophy/free-sw.html, free software}.  Please
+email us at @email{guix-devel@@gnu.org} if you'd like to discuss this.
+@end quotation
+
+Once you have a Git repository containing your own package modules, you can
+write @code{~/.config/guix/channels.scm} to instruct @command{guix pull} to
+pull from your personal channel @emph{in addition} to the default Guix
+channel(s):
+
+@vindex %default-channels
+@lisp
+;; Add my personal packages to those Guix provides.
+(cons (channel
+        (name 'my-personal-packages)
+        (url "https://example.org/personal-packages.git"))
+      %default-channels)
+@end lisp
+
+@noindent
+Note that the snippet above is (as always!)@: Scheme code; we use
+@code{cons} to add a channel the list of channels that the variable
+@code{%default-channels} is bound to (@pxref{Pairs, @code{cons} and lists,,
+guile, GNU Guile Reference Manual}).  With this file in place, @command{guix
+pull} builds not only Guix but also the package modules from your own
+repository.  The result in @file{~/.config/guix/current} is the union of
+Guix with your own package modules:
+
+@example
+$ guix pull --list-generations
+@dots{}
+Generation 19	Aug 27 2018 16:20:48
+  guix d894ab8
+    repository URL: https://git.savannah.gnu.org/git/guix.git
+    branch: master
+    commit: d894ab8e9bfabcefa6c49d9ba2e834dd5a73a300
+  my-personal-packages dd3df5e
+    repository URL: https://example.org/personal-packages.git
+    branch: master
+    commit: dd3df5e2c8818760a8fc0bd699e55d3b69fef2bb
+  11 new packages: my-gimp, my-emacs-with-cool-features, @dots{}
+  4 packages upgraded: emacs-racket-mode@@0.0.2-2.1b78827, @dots{}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The output of @command{guix pull} above shows that Generation@tie{}19
+includes both Guix and packages from the @code{my-personal-packages}
+channel.  Among the new and upgraded packages that are listed, some like
+@code{my-gimp} and @code{my-emacs-with-cool-features} might come from
+@code{my-personal-packages}, while others come from the Guix default
+channel.
+
+@subsection Replicating Guix
+
+@cindex pinning, channels
+@cindex replicating Guix
+@cindex reproducibility, of Guix
+The @command{guix pull --list-generations} output above shows precisely
+which commits were used to build this instance of Guix.  We can thus
+replicate it, say, on another machine, by providing a channel specification
+in @file{~/.config/guix/channels.scm} that is ``pinned'' to these commits:
+
+@lisp
+;; Deploy specific commits of my channels of interest.
+(list (channel
+       (name 'guix)
+       (url "https://git.savannah.gnu.org/git/guix.git")
+       (commit "d894ab8e9bfabcefa6c49d9ba2e834dd5a73a300"))
+      (channel
+       (name 'my-personal-packages)
+       (url "https://example.org/personal-packages.git")
+       (branch "dd3df5e2c8818760a8fc0bd699e55d3b69fef2bb")))
+@end lisp
+
+The @command{guix describe --format=channels} command can even generate this
+list of channels directly (@pxref{Invoking guix describe}).
+
+At this point the two machines run the @emph{exact same Guix}, with access
+to the @emph{exact same packages}.  The output of @command{guix build gimp}
+on one machine will be exactly the same, bit for bit, as the output of the
+same command on the other machine.  It also means both machines have access
+to all the source code of Guix and, transitively, to all the source code of
+every package it defines.
+
+This gives you super powers, allowing you to track the provenance of binary
+artifacts with very fine grain, and to reproduce software environments at
+will---some sort of ``meta reproducibility'' capabilities, if you will.
+@xref{Inferiors}, for another way to take advantage of these super powers.
+
+@node Inferiors
+@section Inferiors
+
+@c TODO: Remove this once we're more confident about API stability.
+@quotation Anmerkung
+The functionality described here is a ``technology preview'' as of version
+@value{VERSION}.  As such, the interface is subject to change.
+@end quotation
+
+@cindex inferiors
+@cindex composition of Guix revisions
+Sometimes you might need to mix packages from the revision of Guix you're
+currently running with packages available in a different revision of Guix.
+Guix @dfn{inferiors} allow you to achieve that by composing different Guix
+revisions in arbitrary ways.
+
+@cindex inferior packages
+Technically, an ``inferior'' is essentially a separate Guix process
+connected to your main Guix process through a REPL (@pxref{Invoking guix
+repl}).  The @code{(guix inferior)} module allows you to create inferiors
+and to communicate with them.  It also provides a high-level interface to
+browse and manipulate the packages that an inferior provides---@dfn{inferior
+packages}.
+
+When combined with channels (@pxref{Channels}), inferiors provide a simple
+way to interact with a separate revision of Guix.  For example, let's assume
+you want to install in your profile the current @code{guile} package, along
+with the @code{guile-json} as it existed in an older revision of
+Guix---perhaps because the newer @code{guile-json} has an incompatible API
+and you want to run your code against the old API@.  To do that, you could
+write a manifest for use by @code{guix package --manifest} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}); in that manifest, you would create an inferior for that old
+Guix revision you care about, and you would look up the @code{guile-json}
+package in the inferior:
+
+@lisp
+(use-modules (guix inferior) (guix channels)
+             (srfi srfi-1))   ;for 'first'
+
+(define channels
+  ;; This is the old revision from which we want to
+  ;; extract guile-json.
+  (list (channel
+         (name 'guix)
+         (url "https://git.savannah.gnu.org/git/guix.git")
+         (commit
+          "65956ad3526ba09e1f7a40722c96c6ef7c0936fe"))))
+
+(define inferior
+  ;; An inferior representing the above revision.
+  (inferior-for-channels channels))
+
+;; Now create a manifest with the current "guile" package
+;; and the old "guile-json" package.
+(packages->manifest
+ (list (first (lookup-inferior-packages inferior "guile-json"))
+       (specification->package "guile")))
+@end lisp
+
+On its first run, @command{guix package --manifest} might have to build the
+channel you specified before it can create the inferior; subsequent runs
+will be much faster because the Guix revision will be cached.
+
+The @code{(guix inferior)} module provides the following procedures to open
+an inferior:
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} inferior-for-channels @var{channels} @
+   [#:cache-directory] [#:ttl] Return an inferior for @var{channels}, a list of
+channels.  Use the cache at @var{cache-directory}, where entries can be
+reclaimed after @var{ttl} seconds.  This procedure opens a new connection to
+the build daemon.
+
+As a side effect, this procedure may build or substitute binaries for
+@var{channels}, which can take time.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} open-inferior @var{directory} @
+  [#:command "bin/guix"] Open the inferior Guix in @var{directory}, running
+@code{@var{directory}/@var{command} repl} or equivalent.  Return @code{#f}
+if the inferior could not be launched.
+@end deffn
+
+@cindex inferior packages
+The procedures listed below allow you to obtain and manipulate inferior
+packages.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} inferior-packages @var{inferior}
+Return the list of packages known to @var{inferior}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} lookup-inferior-packages @var{inferior} @var{name} @
+   [@var{version}] Return the sorted list of inferior packages matching
+@var{name} in @var{inferior}, with highest version numbers first.  If
+@var{version} is true, return only packages with a version number prefixed
+by @var{version}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} inferior-package? @var{obj}
+Return true if @var{obj} is an inferior package.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} inferior-package-name @var{package}
+@deffnx {Scheme Procedure} inferior-package-version @var{package}
+@deffnx {Scheme Procedure} inferior-package-synopsis @var{package}
+@deffnx {Scheme Procedure} inferior-package-description @var{package}
+@deffnx {Scheme Procedure} inferior-package-home-page @var{package}
+@deffnx {Scheme Procedure} inferior-package-location @var{package}
+@deffnx {Scheme Procedure} inferior-package-inputs @var{package}
+@deffnx {Scheme Procedure} inferior-package-native-inputs @var{package}
+@deffnx {Scheme Procedure} inferior-package-propagated-inputs @var{package}
+@deffnx {Scheme Procedure} inferior-package-transitive-propagated-inputs @var{package}
+@deffnx {Scheme Procedure} inferior-package-native-search-paths @var{package}
+@deffnx {Scheme Procedure} inferior-package-transitive-native-search-paths @var{package}
+@deffnx {Scheme Procedure} inferior-package-search-paths @var{package}
+These procedures are the counterpart of package record accessors
+(@pxref{„package“-Referenz}).  Most of them work by querying the inferior
+@var{package} comes from, so the inferior must still be live when you call
+these procedures.
+@end deffn
+
+Inferior packages can be used transparently like any other package or
+file-like object in G-expressions (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke}).  They are also
+transparently handled by the @code{packages->manifest} procedure, which is
+commonly use in manifests (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package, the
+@option{--manifest} option of @command{guix package}}).  Thus you can insert
+an inferior package pretty much anywhere you would insert a regular package:
+in manifests, in the @code{packages} field of your @code{operating-system}
+declaration, and so on.
+
+@node Invoking guix describe
+@section Invoking @command{guix describe}
+
+@cindex Reproduzierbarkeit
+@cindex replicating Guix
+Often you may want to answer questions like: ``Which revision of Guix am I
+using?'' or ``Which channels am I using?'' This is useful information in
+many situations: if you want to @emph{replicate} an environment on a
+different machine or user account, if you want to report a bug or to
+determine what change in the channels you are using caused it, or if you
+want to record your system state for reproducibility purposes.  The
+@command{guix describe} command answers these questions.
+
+When run from a @command{guix pull}ed @command{guix}, @command{guix
+describe} displays the channel(s) that it was built from, including their
+repository URL and commit IDs (@pxref{Channels}):
+
+@example
+$ guix describe
+Generation 10	Sep 03 2018 17:32:44	(current)
+  guix e0fa68c
+    repository URL: https://git.savannah.gnu.org/git/guix.git
+    branch: master
+    commit: e0fa68c7718fffd33d81af415279d6ddb518f727
+@end example
+
+If you're familiar with the Git version control system, this is similar in
+spirit to @command{git describe}; the output is also similar to that of
+@command{guix pull --list-generations}, but limited to the current
+generation (@pxref{Aufruf von guix pull, the @option{--list-generations}
+option}).  Because the Git commit ID shown above unambiguously refers to a
+snapshot of Guix, this information is all it takes to describe the revision
+of Guix you're using, and also to replicate it.
+
+To make it easier to replicate Guix, @command{guix describe} can also be
+asked to return a list of channels instead of the human-readable description
+above:
+
+@example
+$ guix describe -f channels
+(list (channel
+        (name 'guix)
+        (url "https://git.savannah.gnu.org/git/guix.git")
+        (commit
+          "e0fa68c7718fffd33d81af415279d6ddb518f727")))
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+You can save this to a file and feed it to @command{guix pull -C} on some
+other machine or at a later point in time, which will instantiate @emph{this
+exact Guix revision} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix pull, the @option{-C} option}).
+From there on, since you're able to deploy the same revision of Guix, you
+can just as well @emph{replicate a complete software environment}.  We
+humbly think that this is @emph{awesome}, and we hope you'll like it too!
+
+The details of the options supported by @command{guix describe} are as
+follows:
+
+@table @code
+@item --format=@var{format}
+@itemx -f @var{format}
+Produce output in the specified @var{format}, one of:
+
+@table @code
+@item human
+produce human-readable output;
+@item channels
+produce a list of channel specifications that can be passed to @command{guix
+pull -C} or installed as @file{~/.config/guix/channels.scm} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix pull});
+@item json
+@cindex JSON
+produce a list of channel specifications in JSON format;
+@item recutils
+produce a list of channel specifications in Recutils format.
+@end table
+
+@item --profile=@var{Profil}
+@itemx -p @var{Profil}
+Display information about @var{profile}.
+@end table
+
+@node Aufruf von guix pack
+@section Invoking @command{guix pack}
+
+Occasionally you want to pass software to people who are not (yet!)  lucky
+enough to be using Guix.  You'd tell them to run @command{guix package -i
+@var{something}}, but that's not possible in this case.  This is where
+@command{guix pack} comes in.
+
+@quotation Anmerkung
+If you are looking for ways to exchange binaries among machines that already
+run Guix, @pxref{Aufruf von guix copy}, @ref{Aufruf von guix publish}, and
+@ref{Aufruf von guix archive}.
+@end quotation
+
+@cindex pack
+@cindex bundle
+@cindex application bundle
+@cindex software bundle
+The @command{guix pack} command creates a shrink-wrapped @dfn{pack} or
+@dfn{software bundle}: it creates a tarball or some other archive containing
+the binaries of the software you're interested in, and all its
+dependencies.  The resulting archive can be used on any machine that does
+not have Guix, and people can run the exact same binaries as those you have
+with Guix.  The pack itself is created in a bit-reproducible fashion, so
+anyone can verify that it really contains the build results that you pretend
+to be shipping.
+
+For example, to create a bundle containing Guile, Emacs, Geiser, and all
+their dependencies, you can run:
+
+@example
+$ guix pack guile emacs geiser
+@dots{}
+/gnu/store/@dots{}-pack.tar.gz
+@end example
+
+The result here is a tarball containing a @file{/gnu/store} directory with
+all the relevant packages.  The resulting tarball contains a @dfn{profile}
+with the three packages of interest; the profile is the same as would be
+created by @command{guix package -i}.  It is this mechanism that is used to
+create Guix's own standalone binary tarball (@pxref{Aus Binärdatei installieren}).
+
+Users of this pack would have to run
+@file{/gnu/store/@dots{}-profile/bin/guile} to run Guile, which you may find
+inconvenient.  To work around it, you can create, say, a @file{/opt/gnu/bin}
+symlink to the profile:
+
+@example
+guix pack -S /opt/gnu/bin=bin guile emacs geiser
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+That way, users can happily type @file{/opt/gnu/bin/guile} and enjoy.
+
+@cindex relocatable binaries, with @command{guix pack}
+What if the recipient of your pack does not have root privileges on their
+machine, and thus cannot unpack it in the root file system? In that case,
+you will want to use the @code{--relocatable} option (see below).  This
+option produces @dfn{relocatable binaries}, meaning they they can be placed
+anywhere in the file system hierarchy: in the example above, users can
+unpack your tarball in their home directory and directly run
+@file{./opt/gnu/bin/guile}.
+
+@cindex Docker, build an image with guix pack
+Alternatively, you can produce a pack in the Docker image format using the
+following command:
+
+@example
+guix pack -f docker guile emacs geiser
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The result is a tarball that can be passed to the @command{docker load}
+command.  See the
+@uref{https://docs.docker.com/engine/reference/commandline/load/, Docker
+documentation} for more information.
+
+@cindex Singularity, build an image with guix pack
+@cindex SquashFS, build an image with guix pack
+Yet another option is to produce a SquashFS image with the following
+command:
+
+@example
+guix pack -f squashfs guile emacs geiser
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The result is a SquashFS file system image that can either be mounted or
+directly be used as a file system container image with the
+@uref{http://singularity.lbl.gov, Singularity container execution
+environment}, using commands like @command{singularity shell} or
+@command{singularity exec}.
+
+Several command-line options allow you to customize your pack:
+
+@table @code
+@item --format=@var{format}
+@itemx -f @var{format}
+Produce a pack in the given @var{format}.
+
+The available formats are:
+
+@table @code
+@item tarball
+This is the default format.  It produces a tarball containing all the
+specified binaries and symlinks.
+
+@item docker
+This produces a tarball that follows the
+@uref{https://github.com/docker/docker/blob/master/image/spec/v1.2.md,
+Docker Image Specification}.
+
+@item squashfs
+This produces a SquashFS image containing all the specified binaries and
+symlinks, as well as empty mount points for virtual file systems like
+procfs.
+@end table
+
+@item --relocatable
+@itemx -R
+Produce @dfn{relocatable binaries}---i.e., binaries that can be placed
+anywhere in the file system hierarchy and run from there.  For example, if
+you create a pack containing Bash with:
+
+@example
+guix pack -R -S /mybin=bin bash
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+...@: you can copy that pack to a machine that lacks Guix, and from your
+home directory as a normal user, run:
+
+@example
+tar xf pack.tar.gz
+./mybin/sh
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+In that shell, if you type @code{ls /gnu/store}, you'll notice that
+@file{/gnu/store} shows up and contains all the dependencies of @code{bash},
+even though the machine actually lacks @file{/gnu/store} altogether! That is
+probably the simplest way to deploy Guix-built software on a non-Guix
+machine.
+
+There's a gotcha though: this technique relies on the @dfn{user namespace}
+feature of the kernel Linux, which allows unprivileged users to mount or
+change root.  Old versions of Linux did not support it, and some GNU/Linux
+distributions turn it off; on these systems, programs from the pack
+@emph{will fail to run}, unless they are unpacked in the root file system.
+
+@item --expression=@var{expr}
+@itemx -e @var{expr}
+Consider the package @var{expr} evaluates to.
+
+This has the same purpose as the same-named option in @command{guix build}
+(@pxref{Zusätzliche Erstellungsoptionen, @code{--expression} in @command{guix
+build}}).
+
+@item --manifest=@var{Datei}
+@itemx -m @var{Datei}
+Use the packages contained in the manifest object returned by the Scheme
+code in @var{file}.
+
+This has a similar purpose as the same-named option in @command{guix
+package} (@pxref{profile-manifest, @option{--manifest}}) and uses the same
+manifest files.  It allows you to define a collection of packages once and
+use it both for creating profiles and for creating archives for use on
+machines that do not have Guix installed.  Note that you can specify
+@emph{either} a manifest file @emph{or} a list of packages, but not both.
+
+@item --system=@var{System}
+@itemx -s @var{system}
+Attempt to build for @var{system}---e.g., @code{i686-linux}---instead of the
+system type of the build host.
+
+@item --target=@var{triplet}
+@cindex cross-compilation
+Cross-build for @var{triplet}, which must be a valid GNU triplet, such as
+@code{"mips64el-linux-gnu"} (@pxref{Specifying target triplets, GNU
+configuration triplets,, autoconf, Autoconf}).
+
+@item --compression=@var{tool}
+@itemx -C @var{tool}
+Compress the resulting tarball using @var{tool}---one of @code{gzip},
+@code{bzip2}, @code{xz}, @code{lzip}, or @code{none} for no compression.
+
+@item --symlink=@var{spec}
+@itemx -S @var{spec}
+Add the symlinks specified by @var{spec} to the pack.  This option can
+appear several times.
+
+@var{spec} has the form @code{@var{source}=@var{target}}, where @var{source}
+is the symlink that will be created and @var{target} is the symlink target.
+
+For instance, @code{-S /opt/gnu/bin=bin} creates a @file{/opt/gnu/bin}
+symlink pointing to the @file{bin} sub-directory of the profile.
+
+@item --localstatedir
+@itemx --profile-name=@var{name}
+Include the ``local state directory'', @file{/var/guix}, in the resulting
+pack, and notably the @file{/var/guix/profiles/per-user/root/@var{name}}
+profile---by default @var{name} is @code{guix-profile}, which corresponds to
+@file{~root/.guix-profile}.
+
+@file{/var/guix} contains the store database (@pxref{Der Store}) as well as
+garbage-collector roots (@pxref{Aufruf von guix gc}).  Providing it in the
+pack means that the store is ``complete'' and manageable by Guix; not
+providing it pack means that the store is ``dead'': items cannot be added to
+it or removed from it after extraction of the pack.
+
+One use case for this is the Guix self-contained binary tarball
+(@pxref{Aus Binärdatei installieren}).
+
+@item --bootstrap
+Use the bootstrap binaries to build the pack.  This option is only useful to
+Guix developers.
+@end table
+
+In addition, @command{guix pack} supports all the common build options
+(@pxref{Gemeinsame Erstellungsoptionen}) and all the package transformation options
+(@pxref{Paketumwandlungsoptionen}).
+
+
+@node Aufruf von guix archive
+@section Invoking @command{guix archive}
+
+@cindex @command{guix archive}
+@cindex archive
+The @command{guix archive} command allows users to @dfn{export} files from
+the store into a single archive, and to later @dfn{import} them on a machine
+that runs Guix.  In particular, it allows store files to be transferred from
+one machine to the store on another machine.
+
+@quotation Anmerkung
+If you're looking for a way to produce archives in a format suitable for
+tools other than Guix, @pxref{Aufruf von guix pack}.
+@end quotation
+
+@cindex exporting store items
+To export store files as an archive to standard output, run:
+
+@example
+guix archive --export @var{options} @var{specifications}...
+@end example
+
+@var{specifications} may be either store file names or package
+specifications, as for @command{guix package} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}).  For instance, the following command creates an archive
+containing the @code{gui} output of the @code{git} package and the main
+output of @code{emacs}:
+
+@example
+guix archive --export git:gui /gnu/store/...-emacs-24.3 > great.nar
+@end example
+
+If the specified packages are not built yet, @command{guix archive}
+automatically builds them.  The build process may be controlled with the
+common build options (@pxref{Gemeinsame Erstellungsoptionen}).
+
+To transfer the @code{emacs} package to a machine connected over SSH, one
+would run:
+
+@example
+guix archive --export -r emacs | ssh the-machine guix archive --import
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Similarly, a complete user profile may be transferred from one machine to
+another like this:
+
+@example
+guix archive --export -r $(readlink -f ~/.guix-profile) | \
+  ssh the-machine guix-archive --import
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+However, note that, in both examples, all of @code{emacs} and the profile as
+well as all of their dependencies are transferred (due to @code{-r}),
+regardless of what is already available in the store on the target machine.
+The @code{--missing} option can help figure out which items are missing from
+the target store.  The @command{guix copy} command simplifies and optimizes
+this whole process, so this is probably what you should use in this case
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix copy}).
+
+@cindex nar, archive format
+@cindex normalized archive (nar)
+Archives are stored in the ``normalized archive'' or ``nar'' format, which
+is comparable in spirit to `tar', but with differences that make it more
+appropriate for our purposes.  First, rather than recording all Unix
+metadata for each file, the nar format only mentions the file type (regular,
+directory, or symbolic link); Unix permissions and owner/group are
+dismissed.  Second, the order in which directory entries are stored always
+follows the order of file names according to the C locale collation order.
+This makes archive production fully deterministic.
+
+@c FIXME: Add xref to daemon doc about signatures.
+When exporting, the daemon digitally signs the contents of the archive, and
+that digital signature is appended.  When importing, the daemon verifies the
+signature and rejects the import in case of an invalid signature or if the
+signing key is not authorized.
+
+The main options are:
+
+@table @code
+@item --export
+Export the specified store files or packages (see below.)  Write the
+resulting archive to the standard output.
+
+Dependencies are @emph{not} included in the output, unless
+@code{--recursive} is passed.
+
+@item -r
+@itemx --recursive
+When combined with @code{--export}, this instructs @command{guix archive} to
+include dependencies of the given items in the archive.  Thus, the resulting
+archive is self-contained: it contains the closure of the exported store
+items.
+
+@item --import
+Read an archive from the standard input, and import the files listed therein
+into the store.  Abort if the archive has an invalid digital signature, or
+if it is signed by a public key not among the authorized keys (see
+@code{--authorize} below.)
+
+@item --missing
+Read a list of store file names from the standard input, one per line, and
+write on the standard output the subset of these files missing from the
+store.
+
+@item --generate-key[=@var{parameters}]
+@cindex signing, archives
+Generate a new key pair for the daemon.  This is a prerequisite before
+archives can be exported with @code{--export}.  Note that this operation
+usually takes time, because it needs to gather enough entropy to generate
+the key pair.
+
+The generated key pair is typically stored under @file{/etc/guix}, in
+@file{signing-key.pub} (public key) and @file{signing-key.sec} (private key,
+which must be kept secret.)  When @var{parameters} is omitted, an ECDSA key
+using the Ed25519 curve is generated, or, for Libgcrypt versions before
+1.6.0, it is a 4096-bit RSA key.  Alternatively, @var{parameters} can
+specify @code{genkey} parameters suitable for Libgcrypt (@pxref{General
+public-key related Functions, @code{gcry_pk_genkey},, gcrypt, The Libgcrypt
+Reference Manual}).
+
+@item --authorize
+@cindex authorizing, archives
+Authorize imports signed by the public key passed on standard input.  The
+public key must be in ``s-expression advanced format''---i.e., the same
+format as the @file{signing-key.pub} file.
+
+The list of authorized keys is kept in the human-editable file
+@file{/etc/guix/acl}.  The file contains
+@url{http://people.csail.mit.edu/rivest/Sexp.txt, ``advanced-format
+s-expressions''} and is structured as an access-control list in the
+@url{http://theworld.com/~cme/spki.txt, Simple Public-Key Infrastructure
+(SPKI)}.
+
+@item --extract=@var{directory}
+@itemx -x @var{directory}
+Read a single-item archive as served by substitute servers
+(@pxref{Substitute}) and extract it to @var{directory}.  This is a
+low-level operation needed in only very narrow use cases; see below.
+
+For example, the following command extracts the substitute for Emacs served
+by @code{hydra.gnu.org} to @file{/tmp/emacs}:
+
+@example
+$ wget -O - \
+  https://hydra.gnu.org/nar/@dots{}-emacs-24.5 \
+  | bunzip2 | guix archive -x /tmp/emacs
+@end example
+
+Single-item archives are different from multiple-item archives produced by
+@command{guix archive --export}; they contain a single store item, and they
+do @emph{not} embed a signature.  Thus this operation does @emph{no}
+signature verification and its output should be considered unsafe.
+
+The primary purpose of this operation is to facilitate inspection of archive
+contents coming from possibly untrusted substitute servers.
+
+@end table
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node Programmierschnittstelle
+@chapter Programmierschnittstelle
+
+GNU Guix provides several Scheme programming interfaces (APIs) to define,
+build, and query packages.  The first interface allows users to write
+high-level package definitions.  These definitions refer to familiar
+packaging concepts, such as the name and version of a package, its build
+system, and its dependencies.  These definitions can then be turned into
+concrete build actions.
+
+Build actions are performed by the Guix daemon, on behalf of users.  In a
+standard setup, the daemon has write access to the store---the
+@file{/gnu/store} directory---whereas users do not.  The recommended setup
+also has the daemon perform builds in chroots, under a specific build users,
+to minimize interference with the rest of the system.
+
+@cindex Ableitung
+Lower-level APIs are available to interact with the daemon and the store.
+To instruct the daemon to perform a build action, users actually provide it
+with a @dfn{derivation}.  A derivation is a low-level representation of the
+build actions to be taken, and the environment in which they should
+occur---derivations are to package definitions what assembly is to C
+programs.  The term ``derivation'' comes from the fact that build results
+@emph{derive} from them.
+
+This chapter describes all these APIs in turn, starting from high-level
+package definitions.
+
+@menu
+* Pakete definieren::        Wie Sie neue Pakete definieren.
+* Erstellungssysteme::       Angeben, wie Pakete erstellt werden.
+* Der Store::                Den Paket-Store verändern.
+* Ableitungen::              Systemnahe Schnittstelle für Paketableitungen.
+* Die Store-Monade::         Rein funktionale Schnittstelle zum Store.
+* G-Ausdrücke::             Erstellungsausdrücke verarbeiten.
+* Invoking guix repl::       Fiddling with Guix interactively.
+@end menu
+
+@node Pakete definieren
+@section Pakete definieren
+
+The high-level interface to package definitions is implemented in the
+@code{(guix packages)} and @code{(guix build-system)} modules.  As an
+example, the package definition, or @dfn{recipe}, for the GNU Hello package
+looks like this:
+
+@example
+(define-module (gnu packages hello)
+  #:use-module (guix packages)
+  #:use-module (guix download)
+  #:use-module (guix build-system gnu)
+  #:use-module (guix licenses)
+  #:use-module (gnu packages gawk))
+
+(define-public hello
+  (package
+    (name "hello")
+    (version "2.10")
+    (source (origin
+              (method url-fetch)
+              (uri (string-append "mirror://gnu/hello/hello-" version
+                                  ".tar.gz"))
+              (sha256
+               (base32
+                "0ssi1wpaf7plaswqqjwigppsg5fyh99vdlb9kzl7c9lng89ndq1i"))))
+    (build-system gnu-build-system)
+    (arguments '(#:configure-flags '("--enable-silent-rules")))
+    (inputs `(("gawk" ,gawk)))
+    (synopsis "Hello, GNU world: An example GNU package")
+    (description "Guess what GNU Hello prints!")
+    (home-page "http://www.gnu.org/software/hello/")
+    (license gpl3+)))
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Without being a Scheme expert, the reader may have guessed the meaning of
+the various fields here.  This expression binds the variable @code{hello} to
+a @code{<package>} object, which is essentially a record (@pxref{SRFI-9,
+Scheme records,, guile, GNU Guile Reference Manual}).  This package object
+can be inspected using procedures found in the @code{(guix packages)}
+module; for instance, @code{(package-name hello)}
+returns---surprise!---@code{"hello"}.
+
+With luck, you may be able to import part or all of the definition of the
+package you are interested in from another repository, using the @code{guix
+import} command (@pxref{Aufruf von guix import}).
+
+In the example above, @var{hello} is defined in a module of its own,
+@code{(gnu packages hello)}.  Technically, this is not strictly necessary,
+but it is convenient to do so: all the packages defined in modules under
+@code{(gnu packages @dots{})} are automatically known to the command-line
+tools (@pxref{Paketmodule}).
+
+There are a few points worth noting in the above package definition:
+
+@itemize
+@item
+The @code{source} field of the package is an @code{<origin>} object
+(@pxref{„origin“-Referenz}, for the complete reference).  Here, the
+@code{url-fetch} method from @code{(guix download)} is used, meaning that
+the source is a file to be downloaded over FTP or HTTP.
+
+The @code{mirror://gnu} prefix instructs @code{url-fetch} to use one of the
+GNU mirrors defined in @code{(guix download)}.
+
+The @code{sha256} field specifies the expected SHA256 hash of the file being
+downloaded.  It is mandatory, and allows Guix to check the integrity of the
+file.  The @code{(base32 @dots{})} form introduces the base32 representation
+of the hash.  You can obtain this information with @code{guix download}
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix download}) and @code{guix hash} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix hash}).
+
+@cindex patches
+When needed, the @code{origin} form can also have a @code{patches} field
+listing patches to be applied, and a @code{snippet} field giving a Scheme
+expression to modify the source code.
+
+@item
+@cindex GNU-Erstellungssystem
+The @code{build-system} field specifies the procedure to build the package
+(@pxref{Erstellungssysteme}).  Here, @var{gnu-build-system} represents the
+familiar GNU Build System, where packages may be configured, built, and
+installed with the usual @code{./configure && make && make check && make
+install} command sequence.
+
+@item
+The @code{arguments} field specifies options for the build system
+(@pxref{Erstellungssysteme}).  Here it is interpreted by @var{gnu-build-system}
+as a request run @file{configure} with the @code{--enable-silent-rules}
+flag.
+
+@cindex quote
+@cindex quoting
+@findex '
+@findex quote
+What about these quote (@code{'}) characters? They are Scheme syntax to
+introduce a literal list; @code{'} is synonymous with @code{quote}.
+@xref{Expression Syntax, quoting,, guile, GNU Guile Reference Manual}, for
+details.  Here the value of the @code{arguments} field is a list of
+arguments passed to the build system down the road, as with @code{apply}
+(@pxref{Fly Evaluation, @code{apply},, guile, GNU Guile Reference Manual}).
+
+The hash-colon (@code{#:}) sequence defines a Scheme @dfn{keyword}
+(@pxref{Keywords,,, guile, GNU Guile Reference Manual}), and
+@code{#:configure-flags} is a keyword used to pass a keyword argument to the
+build system (@pxref{Coding With Keywords,,, guile, GNU Guile Reference
+Manual}).
+
+@item
+The @code{inputs} field specifies inputs to the build process---i.e.,
+build-time or run-time dependencies of the package.  Here, we define an
+input called @code{"gawk"} whose value is that of the @var{gawk} variable;
+@var{gawk} is itself bound to a @code{<package>} object.
+
+@cindex backquote (quasiquote)
+@findex `
+@findex quasiquote
+@cindex comma (unquote)
+@findex ,
+@findex unquote
+@findex ,@@
+@findex unquote-splicing
+Again, @code{`} (a backquote, synonymous with @code{quasiquote}) allows us
+to introduce a literal list in the @code{inputs} field, while @code{,} (a
+comma, synonymous with @code{unquote}) allows us to insert a value in that
+list (@pxref{Expression Syntax, unquote,, guile, GNU Guile Reference
+Manual}).
+
+Note that GCC, Coreutils, Bash, and other essential tools do not need to be
+specified as inputs here.  Instead, @var{gnu-build-system} takes care of
+ensuring that they are present (@pxref{Erstellungssysteme}).
+
+However, any other dependencies need to be specified in the @code{inputs}
+field.  Any dependency not specified here will simply be unavailable to the
+build process, possibly leading to a build failure.
+@end itemize
+
+@xref{„package“-Referenz}, for a full description of possible fields.
+
+Once a package definition is in place, the package may actually be built
+using the @code{guix build} command-line tool (@pxref{Aufruf von guix build}),
+troubleshooting any build failures you encounter (@pxref{Fehlschläge beim Erstellen untersuchen}).  You can easily jump back to the package definition using the
+@command{guix edit} command (@pxref{Aufruf von guix edit}).  @xref{Paketrichtlinien}, for more information on how to test package definitions, and
+@ref{Aufruf von guix lint}, for information on how to check a definition for
+style conformance.
+@vindex GUIX_PACKAGE_PATH
+Lastly, @pxref{Channels}, for information on how to extend the distribution
+by adding your own package definitions in a ``channel''.
+
+Finally, updating the package definition to a new upstream version can be
+partly automated by the @command{guix refresh} command (@pxref{Aufruf von guix refresh}).
+
+Behind the scenes, a derivation corresponding to the @code{<package>} object
+is first computed by the @code{package-derivation} procedure.  That
+derivation is stored in a @code{.drv} file under @file{/gnu/store}.  The
+build actions it prescribes may then be realized by using the
+@code{build-derivations} procedure (@pxref{Der Store}).
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} package-derivation @var{store} @var{package} [@var{system}]
+Return the @code{<derivation>} object of @var{package} for @var{system}
+(@pxref{Ableitungen}).
+
+@var{package} must be a valid @code{<package>} object, and @var{system} must
+be a string denoting the target system type---e.g., @code{"x86_64-linux"}
+for an x86_64 Linux-based GNU system.  @var{store} must be a connection to
+the daemon, which operates on the store (@pxref{Der Store}).
+@end deffn
+
+@noindent
+@cindex cross-compilation
+Similarly, it is possible to compute a derivation that cross-builds a
+package for some other system:
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} package-cross-derivation @var{store} @
+            @var{package} @var{target} [@var{system}] Return the @code{<derivation>}
+object of @var{package} cross-built from @var{system} to @var{target}.
+
+@var{target} must be a valid GNU triplet denoting the target hardware and
+operating system, such as @code{"mips64el-linux-gnu"} (@pxref{Configuration
+Names, GNU configuration triplets,, configure, GNU Configure and Build
+System}).
+@end deffn
+
+@cindex package transformations
+@cindex input rewriting
+@cindex dependency tree rewriting
+Packages can be manipulated in arbitrary ways.  An example of a useful
+transformation is @dfn{input rewriting}, whereby the dependency tree of a
+package is rewritten by replacing specific inputs by others:
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} package-input-rewriting @var{replacements} @
+           [@var{rewrite-name}] Return a procedure that, when passed a package,
+replaces its direct and indirect dependencies (but not its implicit inputs)
+according to @var{replacements}.  @var{replacements} is a list of package
+pairs; the first element of each pair is the package to replace, and the
+second one is the replacement.
+
+Optionally, @var{rewrite-name} is a one-argument procedure that takes the
+name of a package and returns its new name after rewrite.
+@end deffn
+
+@noindent
+Consider this example:
+
+@example
+(define libressl-instead-of-openssl
+  ;; This is a procedure to replace OPENSSL by LIBRESSL,
+  ;; recursively.
+  (package-input-rewriting `((,openssl . ,libressl))))
+
+(define git-with-libressl
+  (libressl-instead-of-openssl git))
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Here we first define a rewriting procedure that replaces @var{openssl} with
+@var{libressl}.  Then we use it to define a @dfn{variant} of the @var{git}
+package that uses @var{libressl} instead of @var{openssl}.  This is exactly
+what the @option{--with-input} command-line option does (@pxref{Paketumwandlungsoptionen, @option{--with-input}}).
+
+A more generic procedure to rewrite a package dependency graph is
+@code{package-mapping}: it supports arbitrary changes to nodes in the graph.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} package-mapping @var{proc} [@var{cut?}]
+Return a procedure that, given a package, applies @var{proc} to all the
+packages depended on and returns the resulting package.  The procedure stops
+recursion when @var{cut?} returns true for a given package.
+@end deffn
+
+@menu
+* „package“-Referenz::   Der Datentyp für Pakete.
+* „origin“-Referenz::    Datentyp für Paketursprünge.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node „package“-Referenz
+@subsection @code{package} Reference
+
+This section summarizes all the options available in @code{package}
+declarations (@pxref{Pakete definieren}).
+
+@deftp {Data Type} package
+This is the data type representing a package recipe.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{name}
+The name of the package, as a string.
+
+@item @code{version}
+The version of the package, as a string.
+
+@item @code{source}
+An object telling how the source code for the package should be acquired.
+Most of the time, this is an @code{origin} object, which denotes a file
+fetched from the Internet (@pxref{„origin“-Referenz}).  It can also be any
+other ``file-like'' object such as a @code{local-file}, which denotes a file
+from the local file system (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke, @code{local-file}}).
+
+@item @code{build-system}
+The build system that should be used to build the package (@pxref{Erstellungssysteme}).
+
+@item @code{arguments} (default: @code{'()})
+The arguments that should be passed to the build system.  This is a list,
+typically containing sequential keyword-value pairs.
+
+@item @code{inputs} (default: @code{'()})
+@itemx @code{native-inputs} (default: @code{'()})
+@itemx @code{propagated-inputs} (default: @code{'()})
+@cindex inputs, of packages
+These fields list dependencies of the package.  Each one is a list of
+tuples, where each tuple has a label for the input (a string) as its first
+element, a package, origin, or derivation as its second element, and
+optionally the name of the output thereof that should be used, which
+defaults to @code{"out"} (@pxref{Pakete mit mehreren Ausgaben.}, for more
+on package outputs).  For example, the list below specifies three inputs:
+
+@example
+`(("libffi" ,libffi)
+  ("libunistring" ,libunistring)
+  ("glib:bin" ,glib "bin"))  ;the "bin" output of Glib
+@end example
+
+@cindex cross compilation, package dependencies
+The distinction between @code{native-inputs} and @code{inputs} is necessary
+when considering cross-compilation.  When cross-compiling, dependencies
+listed in @code{inputs} are built for the @emph{target} architecture;
+conversely, dependencies listed in @code{native-inputs} are built for the
+architecture of the @emph{build} machine.
+
+@code{native-inputs} is typically used to list tools needed at build time,
+but not at run time, such as Autoconf, Automake, pkg-config, Gettext, or
+Bison.  @command{guix lint} can report likely mistakes in this area
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix lint}).
+
+@anchor{package-propagated-inputs}
+Lastly, @code{propagated-inputs} is similar to @code{inputs}, but the
+specified packages will be automatically installed alongside the package
+they belong to (@pxref{package-cmd-propagated-inputs, @command{guix
+package}}, for information on how @command{guix package} deals with
+propagated inputs.)
+
+For example this is necessary when a C/C++ library needs headers of another
+library to compile, or when a pkg-config file refers to another one @i{via}
+its @code{Requires} field.
+
+Another example where @code{propagated-inputs} is useful is for languages
+that lack a facility to record the run-time search path akin to the
+@code{RUNPATH} of ELF files; this includes Guile, Python, Perl, and more.
+To ensure that libraries written in those languages can find library code
+they depend on at run time, run-time dependencies must be listed in
+@code{propagated-inputs} rather than @code{inputs}.
+
+@item @code{self-native-input?} (default: @code{#f})
+This is a Boolean field telling whether the package should use itself as a
+native input when cross-compiling.
+
+@item @code{outputs} (default: @code{'("out")})
+The list of output names of the package.  @xref{Pakete mit mehreren Ausgaben.}, for typical uses of additional outputs.
+
+@item @code{native-search-paths} (default: @code{'()})
+@itemx @code{search-paths} (default: @code{'()})
+A list of @code{search-path-specification} objects describing search-path
+environment variables honored by the package.
+
+@item @code{replacement} (default: @code{#f})
+This must be either @code{#f} or a package object that will be used as a
+@dfn{replacement} for this package.  @xref{Sicherheitsaktualisierungen, grafts}, for
+details.
+
+@item @code{synopsis}
+Eine einzeilige Beschreibung des Pakets.
+
+@item @code{description}
+Eine ausführlichere Beschreibung des Pakets.
+
+@item @code{license}
+@cindex license, of packages
+The license of the package; a value from @code{(guix licenses)}, or a list
+of such values.
+
+@item @code{home-page}
+The URL to the home-page of the package, as a string.
+
+@item @code{supported-systems} (default: @var{%supported-systems})
+The list of systems supported by the package, as strings of the form
+@code{architecture-kernel}, for example @code{"x86_64-linux"}.
+
+@item @code{maintainers} (default: @code{'()})
+The list of maintainers of the package, as @code{maintainer} objects.
+
+@item @code{location} (default: source location of the @code{package} form)
+The source location of the package.  It is useful to override this when
+inheriting from another package, in which case this field is not
+automatically corrected.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+
+@node „origin“-Referenz
+@subsection @code{origin} Reference
+
+This section summarizes all the options available in @code{origin}
+declarations (@pxref{Pakete definieren}).
+
+@deftp {Data Type} origin
+This is the data type representing a source code origin.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{uri}
+An object containing the URI of the source.  The object type depends on the
+@code{method} (see below).  For example, when using the @var{url-fetch}
+method of @code{(guix download)}, the valid @code{uri} values are: a URL
+represented as a string, or a list thereof.
+
+@item @code{method}
+A procedure that handles the URI.
+
+Examples include:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @var{url-fetch} from @code{(guix download)}
+download a file from the HTTP, HTTPS, or FTP URL specified in the @code{uri}
+field;
+
+@vindex git-fetch
+@item @var{git-fetch} from @code{(guix git-download)}
+clone the Git version control repository, and check out the revision
+specified in the @code{uri} field as a @code{git-reference} object; a
+@code{git-reference} looks like this:
+
+@example
+(git-reference
+  (url "git://git.debian.org/git/pkg-shadow/shadow")
+  (commit "v4.1.5.1"))
+@end example
+@end table
+
+@item @code{sha256}
+A bytevector containing the SHA-256 hash of the source.  Typically the
+@code{base32} form is used here to generate the bytevector from a base-32
+string.
+
+You can obtain this information using @code{guix download} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix download}) or @code{guix hash} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix hash}).
+
+@item @code{file-name} (default: @code{#f})
+The file name under which the source code should be saved.  When this is
+@code{#f}, a sensible default value will be used in most cases.  In case the
+source is fetched from a URL, the file name from the URL will be used.  For
+version control checkouts, it is recommended to provide the file name
+explicitly because the default is not very descriptive.
+
+@item @code{patches} (default: @code{'()})
+A list of file names, origins, or file-like objects (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke,
+file-like objects}) pointing to patches to be applied to the source.
+
+This list of patches must be unconditional.  In particular, it cannot depend
+on the value of @code{%current-system} or @code{%current-target-system}.
+
+@item @code{snippet} (default: @code{#f})
+A G-expression (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke}) or S-expression that will be run in
+the source directory.  This is a convenient way to modify the source,
+sometimes more convenient than a patch.
+
+@item @code{patch-flags} (default: @code{'("-p1")})
+A list of command-line flags that should be passed to the @code{patch}
+command.
+
+@item @code{patch-inputs} (default: @code{#f})
+Input packages or derivations to the patching process.  When this is
+@code{#f}, the usual set of inputs necessary for patching are provided, such
+as GNU@tie{}Patch.
+
+@item @code{modules} (default: @code{'()})
+A list of Guile modules that should be loaded during the patching process
+and while running the code in the @code{snippet} field.
+
+@item @code{patch-guile} (default: @code{#f})
+The Guile package that should be used in the patching process.  When this is
+@code{#f}, a sensible default is used.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+
+@node Erstellungssysteme
+@section Erstellungssysteme
+
+@cindex build system
+Each package definition specifies a @dfn{build system} and arguments for
+that build system (@pxref{Pakete definieren}).  This @code{build-system}
+field represents the build procedure of the package, as well as implicit
+dependencies of that build procedure.
+
+Build systems are @code{<build-system>} objects.  The interface to create
+and manipulate them is provided by the @code{(guix build-system)} module,
+and actual build systems are exported by specific modules.
+
+@cindex bag (low-level package representation)
+Under the hood, build systems first compile package objects to @dfn{bags}.
+A @dfn{bag} is like a package, but with less ornamentation---in other words,
+a bag is a lower-level representation of a package, which includes all the
+inputs of that package, including some that were implicitly added by the
+build system.  This intermediate representation is then compiled to a
+derivation (@pxref{Ableitungen}).
+
+Build systems accept an optional list of @dfn{arguments}.  In package
+definitions, these are passed @i{via} the @code{arguments} field
+(@pxref{Pakete definieren}).  They are typically keyword arguments
+(@pxref{Optional Arguments, keyword arguments in Guile,, guile, GNU Guile
+Reference Manual}).  The value of these arguments is usually evaluated in
+the @dfn{build stratum}---i.e., by a Guile process launched by the daemon
+(@pxref{Ableitungen}).
+
+The main build system is @var{gnu-build-system}, which implements the
+standard build procedure for GNU and many other packages.  It is provided by
+the @code{(guix build-system gnu)} module.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} gnu-build-system
+@var{gnu-build-system} represents the GNU Build System, and variants thereof
+(@pxref{Configuration, configuration and makefile conventions,, standards,
+GNU Coding Standards}).
+
+@cindex build phases
+In a nutshell, packages using it are configured, built, and installed with
+the usual @code{./configure && make && make check && make install} command
+sequence.  In practice, a few additional steps are often needed.  All these
+steps are split up in separate @dfn{phases}, notably@footnote{Please see the
+@code{(guix build gnu-build-system)} modules for more details about the
+build phases.}:
+
+@table @code
+@item unpack
+Unpack the source tarball, and change the current directory to the extracted
+source tree.  If the source is actually a directory, copy it to the build
+tree, and enter that directory.
+
+@item patch-source-shebangs
+Patch shebangs encountered in source files so they refer to the right store
+file names.  For instance, this changes @code{#!/bin/sh} to
+@code{#!/gnu/store/@dots{}-bash-4.3/bin/sh}.
+
+@item configure
+Run the @file{configure} script with a number of default options, such as
+@code{--prefix=/gnu/store/@dots{}}, as well as the options specified by the
+@code{#:configure-flags} argument.
+
+@item build
+Run @code{make} with the list of flags specified with @code{#:make-flags}.
+If the @code{#:parallel-build?} argument is true (the default), build with
+@code{make -j}.
+
+@item check
+Run @code{make check}, or some other target specified with
+@code{#:test-target}, unless @code{#:tests? #f} is passed.  If the
+@code{#:parallel-tests?} argument is true (the default), run @code{make
+check -j}.
+
+@item install
+Run @code{make install} with the flags listed in @code{#:make-flags}.
+
+@item patch-shebangs
+Patch shebangs on the installed executable files.
+
+@item strip
+Strip debugging symbols from ELF files (unless @code{#:strip-binaries?} is
+false), copying them to the @code{debug} output when available
+(@pxref{Dateien zur Fehlersuche installieren}).
+@end table
+
+@vindex %standard-phases
+The build-side module @code{(guix build gnu-build-system)} defines
+@var{%standard-phases} as the default list of build phases.
+@var{%standard-phases} is a list of symbol/procedure pairs, where the
+procedure implements the actual phase.
+
+The list of phases used for a particular package can be changed with the
+@code{#:phases} parameter.  For instance, passing:
+
+@example
+#:phases (modify-phases %standard-phases (delete 'configure))
+@end example
+
+means that all the phases described above will be used, except the
+@code{configure} phase.
+
+In addition, this build system ensures that the ``standard'' environment for
+GNU packages is available.  This includes tools such as GCC, libc,
+Coreutils, Bash, Make, Diffutils, grep, and sed (see the @code{(guix
+build-system gnu)} module for a complete list).  We call these the
+@dfn{implicit inputs} of a package, because package definitions do not have
+to mention them.
+@end defvr
+
+Other @code{<build-system>} objects are defined to support other conventions
+and tools used by free software packages.  They inherit most of
+@var{gnu-build-system}, and differ mainly in the set of inputs implicitly
+added to the build process, and in the list of phases executed.  Some of
+these build systems are listed below.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} ant-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system ant)}.  It implements
+the build procedure for Java packages that can be built with
+@url{http://ant.apache.org/, Ant build tool}.
+
+It adds both @code{ant} and the @dfn{Java Development Kit} (JDK) as provided
+by the @code{icedtea} package to the set of inputs.  Different packages can
+be specified with the @code{#:ant} and @code{#:jdk} parameters,
+respectively.
+
+When the original package does not provide a suitable Ant build file, the
+parameter @code{#:jar-name} can be used to generate a minimal Ant build file
+@file{build.xml} with tasks to build the specified jar archive.  In this
+case the parameter @code{#:source-dir} can be used to specify the source
+sub-directory, defaulting to ``src''.
+
+The @code{#:main-class} parameter can be used with the minimal ant buildfile
+to specify the main class of the resulting jar.  This makes the jar file
+executable.  The @code{#:test-include} parameter can be used to specify the
+list of junit tests to run. It defaults to @code{(list "**/*Test.java")}.
+The @code{#:test-exclude} can be used to disable some tests. It defaults to
+@code{(list "**/Abstract*.java")}, because abstract classes cannot be run as
+tests.
+
+The parameter @code{#:build-target} can be used to specify the Ant task that
+should be run during the @code{build} phase.  By default the ``jar'' task
+will be run.
+
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} android-ndk-build-system
+@cindex Android distribution
+@cindex Android NDK build system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system android-ndk)}.  It
+implements a build procedure for Android NDK (native development kit)
+packages using a Guix-specific build process.
+
+The build system assumes that packages install their public interface
+(header) files to the subdirectory "include" of the "out" output and their
+libraries to the subdirectory "lib" of the "out" output.
+
+It's also assumed that the union of all the dependencies of a package has no
+conflicting files.
+
+For the time being, cross-compilation is not supported - so right now the
+libraries and header files are assumed to be host tools.
+
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} asdf-build-system/source
+@defvrx {Scheme Variable} asdf-build-system/sbcl
+@defvrx {Scheme Variable} asdf-build-system/ecl
+
+These variables, exported by @code{(guix build-system asdf)}, implement
+build procedures for Common Lisp packages using
+@url{https://common-lisp.net/project/asdf/, ``ASDF''}. ASDF is a system
+definition facility for Common Lisp programs and libraries.
+
+The @code{asdf-build-system/source} system installs the packages in source
+form, and can be loaded using any common lisp implementation, via ASDF.  The
+others, such as @code{asdf-build-system/sbcl}, install binary systems in the
+format which a particular implementation understands.  These build systems
+can also be used to produce executable programs, or lisp images which
+contain a set of packages pre-loaded.
+
+The build system uses naming conventions.  For binary packages, the package
+name should be prefixed with the lisp implementation, such as @code{sbcl-}
+for @code{asdf-build-system/sbcl}.
+
+Additionally, the corresponding source package should be labeled using the
+same convention as python packages (see @ref{Python-Module}), using the
+@code{cl-} prefix.
+
+For binary packages, each system should be defined as a Guix package.  If
+one package @code{origin} contains several systems, package variants can be
+created in order to build all the systems.  Source packages, which use
+@code{asdf-build-system/source}, may contain several systems.
+
+In order to create executable programs and images, the build-side procedures
+@code{build-program} and @code{build-image} can be used.  They should be
+called in a build phase after the @code{create-symlinks} phase, so that the
+system which was just built can be used within the resulting image.
+@code{build-program} requires a list of Common Lisp expressions to be passed
+as the @code{#:entry-program} argument.
+
+If the system is not defined within its own @code{.asd} file of the same
+name, then the @code{#:asd-file} parameter should be used to specify which
+file the system is defined in.  Furthermore, if the package defines a system
+for its tests in a separate file, it will be loaded before the tests are run
+if it is specified by the @code{#:test-asd-file} parameter.  If it is not
+set, the files @code{<system>-tests.asd}, @code{<system>-test.asd},
+@code{tests.asd}, and @code{test.asd} will be tried if they exist.
+
+If for some reason the package must be named in a different way than the
+naming conventions suggest, the @code{#:asd-system-name} parameter can be
+used to specify the name of the system.
+
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} cargo-build-system
+@cindex Rust programming language
+@cindex Cargo (Rust build system)
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system cargo)}.  It supports
+builds of packages using Cargo, the build tool of the
+@uref{https://www.rust-lang.org, Rust programming language}.
+
+In its @code{configure} phase, this build system replaces dependencies
+specified in the @file{Carto.toml} file with inputs to the Guix package.
+The @code{install} phase installs the binaries, and it also installs the
+source code and @file{Cargo.toml} file.
+@end defvr
+
+@cindex Clojure (programming language)
+@cindex simple Clojure build system
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} clojure-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system clojure)}.  It
+implements a simple build procedure for @uref{https://clojure.org/, Clojure}
+packages using plain old @code{compile} in Clojure.  Cross-compilation is
+not supported yet.
+
+It adds @code{clojure}, @code{icedtea} and @code{zip} to the set of inputs.
+Different packages can be specified with the @code{#:clojure}, @code{#:jdk}
+and @code{#:zip} parameters, respectively.
+
+A list of source directories, test directories and jar names can be
+specified with the @code{#:source-dirs}, @code{#:test-dirs} and
+@code{#:jar-names} parameters, respectively.  Compile directory and main
+class can be specified with the @code{#:compile-dir} and @code{#:main-class}
+parameters, respectively.  Other parameters are documented below.
+
+This build system is an extension of @var{ant-build-system}, but with the
+following phases changed:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item build
+This phase calls @code{compile} in Clojure to compile source files and runs
+@command{jar} to create jars from both source files and compiled files
+according to the include list and exclude list specified in
+@code{#:aot-include} and @code{#:aot-exclude}, respectively.  The exclude
+list has priority over the include list.  These lists consist of symbols
+representing Clojure libraries or the special keyword @code{#:all}
+representing all Clojure libraries found under the source directories.  The
+parameter @code{#:omit-source?} decides if source should be included into
+the jars.
+
+@item check
+This phase runs tests according to the include list and exclude list
+specified in @code{#:test-include} and @code{#:test-exclude}, respectively.
+Their meanings are analogous to that of @code{#:aot-include} and
+@code{#:aot-exclude}, except that the special keyword @code{#:all} now
+stands for all Clojure libraries found under the test directories.  The
+parameter @code{#:tests?} decides if tests should be run.
+
+@item install
+This phase installs all jars built previously.
+@end table
+
+Apart from the above, this build system also contains an additional phase:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item install-doc
+This phase installs all top-level files with base name matching
+@var{%doc-regex}.  A different regex can be specified with the
+@code{#:doc-regex} parameter.  All files (recursively) inside the
+documentation directories specified in @code{#:doc-dirs} are installed as
+well.
+@end table
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} cmake-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system cmake)}.  It
+implements the build procedure for packages using the
+@url{http://www.cmake.org, CMake build tool}.
+
+It automatically adds the @code{cmake} package to the set of inputs.  Which
+package is used can be specified with the @code{#:cmake} parameter.
+
+The @code{#:configure-flags} parameter is taken as a list of flags passed to
+the @command{cmake} command.  The @code{#:build-type} parameter specifies in
+abstract terms the flags passed to the compiler; it defaults to
+@code{"RelWithDebInfo"} (short for ``release mode with debugging
+information''), which roughly means that code is compiled with @code{-O2
+-g}, as is the case for Autoconf-based packages by default.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} go-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system go)}.  It implements a
+build procedure for Go packages using the standard
+@url{https://golang.org/cmd/go/#hdr-Compile_packages_and_dependencies, Go
+build mechanisms}.
+
+The user is expected to provide a value for the key @code{#:import-path}
+and, in some cases, @code{#:unpack-path}.  The
+@url{https://golang.org/doc/code.html#ImportPaths, import path} corresponds
+to the file system path expected by the package's build scripts and any
+referring packages, and provides a unique way to refer to a Go package.  It
+is typically based on a combination of the package source code's remote URI
+and file system hierarchy structure.  In some cases, you will need to unpack
+the package's source code to a different directory structure than the one
+indicated by the import path, and @code{#:unpack-path} should be used in
+such cases.
+
+Packages that provide Go libraries should be installed along with their
+source code.  The key @code{#:install-source?}, which defaults to @code{#t},
+controls whether or not the source code is installed.  It can be set to
+@code{#f} for packages that only provide executable files.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} glib-or-gtk-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system glib-or-gtk)}.  It is
+intended for use with packages making use of GLib or GTK+.
+
+This build system adds the following two phases to the ones defined by
+@var{gnu-build-system}:
+
+@table @code
+@item glib-or-gtk-wrap
+The phase @code{glib-or-gtk-wrap} ensures that programs in @file{bin/} are
+able to find GLib ``schemas'' and
+@uref{https://developer.gnome.org/gtk3/stable/gtk-running.html, GTK+
+modules}.  This is achieved by wrapping the programs in launch scripts that
+appropriately set the @code{XDG_DATA_DIRS} and @code{GTK_PATH} environment
+variables.
+
+It is possible to exclude specific package outputs from that wrapping
+process by listing their names in the
+@code{#:glib-or-gtk-wrap-excluded-outputs} parameter.  This is useful when
+an output is known not to contain any GLib or GTK+ binaries, and where
+wrapping would gratuitously add a dependency of that output on GLib and
+GTK+.
+
+@item glib-or-gtk-compile-schemas
+The phase @code{glib-or-gtk-compile-schemas} makes sure that all
+@uref{https://developer.gnome.org/gio/stable/glib-compile-schemas.html,
+GSettings schemas} of GLib are compiled.  Compilation is performed by the
+@command{glib-compile-schemas} program.  It is provided by the package
+@code{glib:bin} which is automatically imported by the build system.  The
+@code{glib} package providing @command{glib-compile-schemas} can be
+specified with the @code{#:glib} parameter.
+@end table
+
+Both phases are executed after the @code{install} phase.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} guile-build-system
+This build system is for Guile packages that consist exclusively of Scheme
+code and that are so lean that they don't even have a makefile, let alone a
+@file{configure} script.  It compiles Scheme code using @command{guild
+compile} (@pxref{Compilation,,, guile, GNU Guile Reference Manual}) and
+installs the @file{.scm} and @file{.go} files in the right place.  It also
+installs documentation.
+
+This build system supports cross-compilation by using the @code{--target}
+option of @command{guild compile}.
+
+Packages built with @code{guile-build-system} must provide a Guile package
+in their @code{native-inputs} field.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} minify-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system minify)}.  It
+implements a minification procedure for simple JavaScript packages.
+
+It adds @code{uglify-js} to the set of inputs and uses it to compress all
+JavaScript files in the @file{src} directory.  A different minifier package
+can be specified with the @code{#:uglify-js} parameter, but it is expected
+that the package writes the minified code to the standard output.
+
+When the input JavaScript files are not all located in the @file{src}
+directory, the parameter @code{#:javascript-files} can be used to specify a
+list of file names to feed to the minifier.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} ocaml-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system ocaml)}.  It
+implements a build procedure for @uref{https://ocaml.org, OCaml} packages,
+which consists of choosing the correct set of commands to run for each
+package.  OCaml packages can expect many different commands to be run.  This
+build system will try some of them.
+
+When the package has a @file{setup.ml} file present at the top-level, it
+will run @code{ocaml setup.ml -configure}, @code{ocaml setup.ml -build} and
+@code{ocaml setup.ml -install}.  The build system will assume that this file
+was generated by @uref{http://oasis.forge.ocamlcore.org/, OASIS} and will
+take care of setting the prefix and enabling tests if they are not
+disabled.  You can pass configure and build flags with the
+@code{#:configure-flags} and @code{#:build-flags}.  The @code{#:test-flags}
+key can be passed to change the set of flags used to enable tests.  The
+@code{#:use-make?} key can be used to bypass this system in the build and
+install phases.
+
+When the package has a @file{configure} file, it is assumed that it is a
+hand-made configure script that requires a different argument format than in
+the @code{gnu-build-system}.  You can add more flags with the
+@code{#:configure-flags} key.
+
+When the package has a @file{Makefile} file (or @code{#:use-make?} is
+@code{#t}), it will be used and more flags can be passed to the build and
+install phases with the @code{#:make-flags} key.
+
+Finally, some packages do not have these files and use a somewhat standard
+location for its build system.  In that case, the build system will run
+@code{ocaml pkg/pkg.ml} or @code{ocaml pkg/build.ml} and take care of
+providing the path to the required findlib module.  Additional flags can be
+passed via the @code{#:build-flags} key.  Install is taken care of by
+@command{opam-installer}.  In this case, the @code{opam} package must be
+added to the @code{native-inputs} field of the package definition.
+
+Note that most OCaml packages assume they will be installed in the same
+directory as OCaml, which is not what we want in guix.  In particular, they
+will install @file{.so} files in their module's directory, which is usually
+fine because it is in the OCaml compiler directory.  In guix though, these
+libraries cannot be found and we use @code{CAML_LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.  This
+variable points to @file{lib/ocaml/site-lib/stubslibs} and this is where
+@file{.so} libraries should be installed.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} python-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system python)}.  It
+implements the more or less standard build procedure used by Python
+packages, which consists in running @code{python setup.py build} and then
+@code{python setup.py install --prefix=/gnu/store/@dots{}}.
+
+For packages that install stand-alone Python programs under @code{bin/}, it
+takes care of wrapping these programs so that their @code{PYTHONPATH}
+environment variable points to all the Python libraries they depend on.
+
+Which Python package is used to perform the build can be specified with the
+@code{#:python} parameter.  This is a useful way to force a package to be
+built for a specific version of the Python interpreter, which might be
+necessary if the package is only compatible with a single interpreter
+version.
+
+By default guix calls @code{setup.py} under control of @code{setuptools},
+much like @command{pip} does.  Some packages are not compatible with
+setuptools (and pip), thus you can disable this by setting the
+@code{#:use-setuptools} parameter to @code{#f}.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} perl-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system perl)}.  It implements
+the standard build procedure for Perl packages, which either consists in
+running @code{perl Build.PL --prefix=/gnu/store/@dots{}}, followed by
+@code{Build} and @code{Build install}; or in running @code{perl Makefile.PL
+PREFIX=/gnu/store/@dots{}}, followed by @code{make} and @code{make install},
+depending on which of @code{Build.PL} or @code{Makefile.PL} is present in
+the package distribution.  Preference is given to the former if both
+@code{Build.PL} and @code{Makefile.PL} exist in the package distribution.
+This preference can be reversed by specifying @code{#t} for the
+@code{#:make-maker?} parameter.
+
+The initial @code{perl Makefile.PL} or @code{perl Build.PL} invocation
+passes flags specified by the @code{#:make-maker-flags} or
+@code{#:module-build-flags} parameter, respectively.
+
+Which Perl package is used can be specified with @code{#:perl}.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} r-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system r)}.  It implements
+the build procedure used by @uref{http://r-project.org, R} packages, which
+essentially is little more than running @code{R CMD INSTALL
+--library=/gnu/store/@dots{}} in an environment where @code{R_LIBS_SITE}
+contains the paths to all R package inputs.  Tests are run after
+installation using the R function @code{tools::testInstalledPackage}.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} texlive-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system texlive)}.  It is used
+to build TeX packages in batch mode with a specified engine.  The build
+system sets the @code{TEXINPUTS} variable to find all TeX source files in
+the inputs.
+
+By default it runs @code{luatex} on all files ending on @code{ins}.  A
+different engine and format can be specified with the @code{#:tex-format}
+argument.  Different build targets can be specified with the
+@code{#:build-targets} argument, which expects a list of file names.  The
+build system adds only @code{texlive-bin} and @code{texlive-latex-base}
+(both from @code{(gnu packages tex}) to the inputs.  Both can be overridden
+with the arguments @code{#:texlive-bin} and @code{#:texlive-latex-base},
+respectively.
+
+The @code{#:tex-directory} parameter tells the build system where to install
+the built files under the texmf tree.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} ruby-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system ruby)}.  It implements
+the RubyGems build procedure used by Ruby packages, which involves running
+@code{gem build} followed by @code{gem install}.
+
+The @code{source} field of a package that uses this build system typically
+references a gem archive, since this is the format that Ruby developers use
+when releasing their software.  The build system unpacks the gem archive,
+potentially patches the source, runs the test suite, repackages the gem, and
+installs it.  Additionally, directories and tarballs may be referenced to
+allow building unreleased gems from Git or a traditional source release
+tarball.
+
+Which Ruby package is used can be specified with the @code{#:ruby}
+parameter.  A list of additional flags to be passed to the @command{gem}
+command can be specified with the @code{#:gem-flags} parameter.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} waf-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system waf)}.  It implements
+a build procedure around the @code{waf} script.  The common
+phases---@code{configure}, @code{build}, and @code{install}---are
+implemented by passing their names as arguments to the @code{waf} script.
+
+The @code{waf} script is executed by the Python interpreter.  Which Python
+package is used to run the script can be specified with the @code{#:python}
+parameter.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} scons-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system scons)}.  It
+implements the build procedure used by the SCons software construction
+tool.  This build system runs @code{scons} to build the package, @code{scons
+test} to run tests, and then @code{scons install} to install the package.
+
+Additional flags to be passed to @code{scons} can be specified with the
+@code{#:scons-flags} parameter.  The version of Python used to run SCons can
+be specified by selecting the appropriate SCons package with the
+@code{#:scons} parameter.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} haskell-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system haskell)}.  It
+implements the Cabal build procedure used by Haskell packages, which
+involves running @code{runhaskell Setup.hs configure
+--prefix=/gnu/store/@dots{}} and @code{runhaskell Setup.hs build}.  Instead
+of installing the package by running @code{runhaskell Setup.hs install}, to
+avoid trying to register libraries in the read-only compiler store
+directory, the build system uses @code{runhaskell Setup.hs copy}, followed
+by @code{runhaskell Setup.hs register}.  In addition, the build system
+generates the package documentation by running @code{runhaskell Setup.hs
+haddock}, unless @code{#:haddock? #f} is passed.  Optional Haddock
+parameters can be passed with the help of the @code{#:haddock-flags}
+parameter.  If the file @code{Setup.hs} is not found, the build system looks
+for @code{Setup.lhs} instead.
+
+Which Haskell compiler is used can be specified with the @code{#:haskell}
+parameter which defaults to @code{ghc}.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} dub-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system dub)}.  It implements
+the Dub build procedure used by D packages, which involves running @code{dub
+build} and @code{dub run}.  Installation is done by copying the files
+manually.
+
+Which D compiler is used can be specified with the @code{#:ldc} parameter
+which defaults to @code{ldc}.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} emacs-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system emacs)}.  It
+implements an installation procedure similar to the packaging system of
+Emacs itself (@pxref{Packages,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
+
+It first creates the @code{@var{package}-autoloads.el} file, then it byte
+compiles all Emacs Lisp files.  Differently from the Emacs packaging system,
+the Info documentation files are moved to the standard documentation
+directory and the @file{dir} file is deleted.  Each package is installed in
+its own directory under @file{share/emacs/site-lisp/guix.d}.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} font-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system font)}.  It implements
+an installation procedure for font packages where upstream provides
+pre-compiled TrueType, OpenType, etc.@: font files that merely need to be
+copied into place.  It copies font files to standard locations in the output
+directory.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} meson-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system meson)}.  It
+implements the build procedure for packages that use
+@url{http://mesonbuild.com, Meson} as their build system.
+
+It adds both Meson and @uref{https://ninja-build.org/, Ninja} to the set of
+inputs, and they can be changed with the parameters @code{#:meson} and
+@code{#:ninja} if needed.  The default Meson is @code{meson-for-build},
+which is special because it doesn't clear the @code{RUNPATH} of binaries and
+libraries when they are installed.
+
+This build system is an extension of @var{gnu-build-system}, but with the
+following phases changed to some specific for Meson:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item configure
+The phase runs @code{meson} with the flags specified in
+@code{#:configure-flags}.  The flag @code{--build-type} is always set to
+@code{plain} unless something else is specified in @code{#:build-type}.
+
+@item build
+The phase runs @code{ninja} to build the package in parallel by default, but
+this can be changed with @code{#:parallel-build?}.
+
+@item check
+The phase runs @code{ninja} with the target specified in
+@code{#:test-target}, which is @code{"test"} by default.
+
+@item install
+The phase runs @code{ninja install} and can not be changed.
+@end table
+
+Apart from that, the build system also adds the following phases:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item fix-runpath
+This phase ensures that all binaries can find the libraries they need.  It
+searches for required libraries in subdirectories of the package being
+built, and adds those to @code{RUNPATH} where needed.  It also removes
+references to libraries left over from the build phase by
+@code{meson-for-build}, such as test dependencies, that aren't actually
+required for the program to run.
+
+@item glib-or-gtk-wrap
+This phase is the phase provided by @code{glib-or-gtk-build-system}, and it
+is not enabled by default.  It can be enabled with @code{#:glib-or-gtk?}.
+
+@item glib-or-gtk-compile-schemas
+This phase is the phase provided by @code{glib-or-gtk-build-system}, and it
+is not enabled by default.  It can be enabled with @code{#:glib-or-gtk?}.
+@end table
+@end defvr
+
+Lastly, for packages that do not need anything as sophisticated, a
+``trivial'' build system is provided.  It is trivial in the sense that it
+provides basically no support: it does not pull any implicit inputs, and
+does not have a notion of build phases.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} trivial-build-system
+This variable is exported by @code{(guix build-system trivial)}.
+
+This build system requires a @code{#:builder} argument.  This argument must
+be a Scheme expression that builds the package output(s)---as with
+@code{build-expression->derivation} (@pxref{Ableitungen,
+@code{build-expression->derivation}}).
+@end defvr
+
+@node Der Store
+@section Der Store
+
+@cindex Store
+@cindex store items
+@cindex store paths
+
+Conceptually, the @dfn{store} is the place where derivations that have been
+built successfully are stored---by default, @file{/gnu/store}.
+Sub-directories in the store are referred to as @dfn{store items} or
+sometimes @dfn{store paths}.  The store has an associated database that
+contains information such as the store paths referred to by each store path,
+and the list of @emph{valid} store items---results of successful builds.
+This database resides in @file{@var{localstatedir}/guix/db}, where
+@var{localstatedir} is the state directory specified @i{via}
+@option{--localstatedir} at configure time, usually @file{/var}.
+
+The store is @emph{always} accessed by the daemon on behalf of its clients
+(@pxref{Aufruf des guix-daemon}).  To manipulate the store, clients connect to
+the daemon over a Unix-domain socket, send requests to it, and read the
+result---these are remote procedure calls, or RPCs.
+
+@quotation Anmerkung
+Users must @emph{never} modify files under @file{/gnu/store} directly.  This
+would lead to inconsistencies and break the immutability assumptions of
+Guix's functional model (@pxref{Einführung}).
+
+@xref{Aufruf von guix gc, @command{guix gc --verify}}, for information on how
+to check the integrity of the store and attempt recovery from accidental
+modifications.
+@end quotation
+
+The @code{(guix store)} module provides procedures to connect to the daemon,
+and to perform RPCs.  These are described below.  By default,
+@code{open-connection}, and thus all the @command{guix} commands, connect to
+the local daemon or to the URI specified by the @code{GUIX_DAEMON_SOCKET}
+environment variable.
+
+@defvr {Environment Variable} GUIX_DAEMON_SOCKET
+When set, the value of this variable should be a file name or a URI
+designating the daemon endpoint.  When it is a file name, it denotes a
+Unix-domain socket to connect to.  In addition to file names, the supported
+URI schemes are:
+
+@table @code
+@item file
+@itemx unix
+These are for Unix-domain sockets.
+@code{file:///var/guix/daemon-socket/socket} is equivalent to
+@file{/var/guix/daemon-socket/socket}.
+
+@item guix
+@cindex Daemon, Fernzugriff
+@cindex Fernzugriff auf den Daemon
+@cindex Daemon, Einrichten auf Clustern
+@cindex Cluster, Einrichtung des Daemons
+These URIs denote connections over TCP/IP, without encryption nor
+authentication of the remote host.  The URI must specify the host name and
+optionally a port number (by default port 44146 is used):
+
+@example
+guix://master.guix.example.org:1234
+@end example
+
+This setup is suitable on local networks, such as clusters, where only
+trusted nodes may connect to the build daemon at
+@code{master.guix.example.org}.
+
+The @code{--listen} option of @command{guix-daemon} can be used to instruct
+it to listen for TCP connections (@pxref{Aufruf des guix-daemon,
+@code{--listen}}).
+
+@item ssh
+@cindex SSH access to build daemons
+These URIs allow you to connect to a remote daemon over SSH@footnote{This
+feature requires Guile-SSH (@pxref{Voraussetzungen}).}.  A typical URL might
+look like this:
+
+@example
+ssh://charlie@@guix.example.org:22
+@end example
+
+As for @command{guix copy}, the usual OpenSSH client configuration files are
+honored (@pxref{Aufruf von guix copy}).
+@end table
+
+Additional URI schemes may be supported in the future.
+
+@c XXX: Remove this note when the protocol incurs fewer round trips
+@c and when (guix derivations) no longer relies on file system access.
+@quotation Anmerkung
+The ability to connect to remote build daemons is considered experimental as
+of @value{VERSION}.  Please get in touch with us to share any problems or
+suggestions you may have (@pxref{Mitwirken}).
+@end quotation
+@end defvr
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} open-connection [@var{uri}] [#:reserve-space? #t]
+Connect to the daemon over the Unix-domain socket at @var{uri} (a string).
+When @var{reserve-space?} is true, instruct it to reserve a little bit of
+extra space on the file system so that the garbage collector can still
+operate should the disk become full.  Return a server object.
+
+@var{file} defaults to @var{%default-socket-path}, which is the normal
+location given the options that were passed to @command{configure}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} close-connection @var{server}
+Close the connection to @var{server}.
+@end deffn
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} current-build-output-port
+This variable is bound to a SRFI-39 parameter, which refers to the port
+where build and error logs sent by the daemon should be written.
+@end defvr
+
+Procedures that make RPCs all take a server object as their first argument.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} valid-path? @var{server} @var{path}
+@cindex invalid store items
+Return @code{#t} when @var{path} designates a valid store item and @code{#f}
+otherwise (an invalid item may exist on disk but still be invalid, for
+instance because it is the result of an aborted or failed build.)
+
+A @code{&nix-protocol-error} condition is raised if @var{path} is not
+prefixed by the store directory (@file{/gnu/store}).
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} add-text-to-store @var{server} @var{name} @var{text} [@var{references}]
+Add @var{text} under file @var{name} in the store, and return its store
+path.  @var{references} is the list of store paths referred to by the
+resulting store path.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} build-derivations @var{server} @var{derivations}
+Build @var{derivations} (a list of @code{<derivation>} objects or derivation
+paths), and return when the worker is done building them.  Return @code{#t}
+on success.
+@end deffn
+
+Note that the @code{(guix monads)} module provides a monad as well as
+monadic versions of the above procedures, with the goal of making it more
+convenient to work with code that accesses the store (@pxref{Die Store-Monade}).
+
+@c FIXME
+@i{This section is currently incomplete.}
+
+@node Ableitungen
+@section Ableitungen
+
+@cindex derivations
+Low-level build actions and the environment in which they are performed are
+represented by @dfn{derivations}.  A derivation contains the following
+pieces of information:
+
+@itemize
+@item
+The outputs of the derivation---derivations produce at least one file or
+directory in the store, but may produce more.
+
+@item
+The inputs of the derivations, which may be other derivations or plain files
+in the store (patches, build scripts, etc.)
+
+@item
+The system type targeted by the derivation---e.g., @code{x86_64-linux}.
+
+@item
+The file name of a build script in the store, along with the arguments to be
+passed.
+
+@item
+A list of environment variables to be defined.
+
+@end itemize
+
+@cindex derivation path
+Derivations allow clients of the daemon to communicate build actions to the
+store.  They exist in two forms: as an in-memory representation, both on the
+client- and daemon-side, and as files in the store whose name end in
+@code{.drv}---these files are referred to as @dfn{derivation paths}.
+Derivations paths can be passed to the @code{build-derivations} procedure to
+perform the build actions they prescribe (@pxref{Der Store}).
+
+@cindex fixed-output derivations
+Operations such as file downloads and version-control checkouts for which
+the expected content hash is known in advance are modeled as
+@dfn{fixed-output derivations}.  Unlike regular derivations, the outputs of
+a fixed-output derivation are independent of its inputs---e.g., a source
+code download produces the same result regardless of the download method and
+tools being used.
+
+The @code{(guix derivations)} module provides a representation of
+derivations as Scheme objects, along with procedures to create and otherwise
+manipulate derivations.  The lowest-level primitive to create a derivation
+is the @code{derivation} procedure:
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} derivation @var{store} @var{name} @var{builder} @
+  @var{args} [#:outputs '("out")] [#:hash #f] [#:hash-algo #f] @ [#:recursive?
+#f] [#:inputs '()] [#:env-vars '()] @ [#:system (%current-system)]
+[#:references-graphs #f] @ [#:allowed-references #f]
+[#:disallowed-references #f] @ [#:leaked-env-vars #f] [#:local-build? #f] @
+[#:substitutable? #t] [#:properties '()] Build a derivation with the given
+arguments, and return the resulting @code{<derivation>} object.
+
+When @var{hash} and @var{hash-algo} are given, a @dfn{fixed-output
+derivation} is created---i.e., one whose result is known in advance, such as
+a file download.  If, in addition, @var{recursive?} is true, then that fixed
+output may be an executable file or a directory and @var{hash} must be the
+hash of an archive containing this output.
+
+When @var{references-graphs} is true, it must be a list of file name/store
+path pairs.  In that case, the reference graph of each store path is
+exported in the build environment in the corresponding file, in a simple
+text format.
+
+When @var{allowed-references} is true, it must be a list of store items or
+outputs that the derivation's output may refer to.  Likewise,
+@var{disallowed-references}, if true, must be a list of things the outputs
+may @emph{not} refer to.
+
+When @var{leaked-env-vars} is true, it must be a list of strings denoting
+environment variables that are allowed to ``leak'' from the daemon's
+environment to the build environment.  This is only applicable to
+fixed-output derivations---i.e., when @var{hash} is true.  The main use is
+to allow variables such as @code{http_proxy} to be passed to derivations
+that download files.
+
+When @var{local-build?} is true, declare that the derivation is not a good
+candidate for offloading and should rather be built locally (@pxref{Auslagern des Daemons einrichten}).  This is the case for small derivations where the costs of
+data transfers would outweigh the benefits.
+
+When @var{substitutable?} is false, declare that substitutes of the
+derivation's output should not be used (@pxref{Substitute}).  This is
+useful, for instance, when building packages that capture details of the
+host CPU instruction set.
+
+@var{properties} must be an association list describing ``properties'' of
+the derivation.  It is kept as-is, uninterpreted, in the derivation.
+@end deffn
+
+@noindent
+Here's an example with a shell script as its builder, assuming @var{store}
+is an open connection to the daemon, and @var{bash} points to a Bash
+executable in the store:
+
+@lisp
+(use-modules (guix utils)
+             (guix store)
+             (guix derivations))
+
+(let ((builder   ; add the Bash script to the store
+        (add-text-to-store store "my-builder.sh"
+                           "echo hello world > $out\n" '())))
+  (derivation store "foo"
+              bash `("-e" ,builder)
+              #:inputs `((,bash) (,builder))
+              #:env-vars '(("HOME" . "/homeless"))))
+@result{} #<derivation /gnu/store/@dots{}-foo.drv => /gnu/store/@dots{}-foo>
+@end lisp
+
+As can be guessed, this primitive is cumbersome to use directly.  A better
+approach is to write build scripts in Scheme, of course! The best course of
+action for that is to write the build code as a ``G-expression'', and to
+pass it to @code{gexp->derivation}.  For more information,
+@pxref{G-Ausdrücke}.
+
+Once upon a time, @code{gexp->derivation} did not exist and constructing
+derivations with build code written in Scheme was achieved with
+@code{build-expression->derivation}, documented below.  This procedure is
+now deprecated in favor of the much nicer @code{gexp->derivation}.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} build-expression->derivation @var{store} @
+       @var{name} @var{exp} @ [#:system (%current-system)] [#:inputs '()] @
+[#:outputs '("out")] [#:hash #f] [#:hash-algo #f] @ [#:recursive? #f]
+[#:env-vars '()] [#:modules '()] @ [#:references-graphs #f]
+[#:allowed-references #f] @ [#:disallowed-references #f] @ [#:local-build?
+#f] [#:substitutable? #t] [#:guile-for-build #f] Return a derivation that
+executes Scheme expression @var{exp} as a builder for derivation
+@var{name}.  @var{inputs} must be a list of @code{(name drv-path sub-drv)}
+tuples; when @var{sub-drv} is omitted, @code{"out"} is assumed.
+@var{modules} is a list of names of Guile modules from the current search
+path to be copied in the store, compiled, and made available in the load
+path during the execution of @var{exp}---e.g., @code{((guix build utils)
+(guix build gnu-build-system))}.
+
+@var{exp} is evaluated in an environment where @code{%outputs} is bound to a
+list of output/path pairs, and where @code{%build-inputs} is bound to a list
+of string/output-path pairs made from @var{inputs}.  Optionally,
+@var{env-vars} is a list of string pairs specifying the name and value of
+environment variables visible to the builder.  The builder terminates by
+passing the result of @var{exp} to @code{exit}; thus, when @var{exp} returns
+@code{#f}, the build is considered to have failed.
+
+@var{exp} is built using @var{guile-for-build} (a derivation).  When
+@var{guile-for-build} is omitted or is @code{#f}, the value of the
+@code{%guile-for-build} fluid is used instead.
+
+See the @code{derivation} procedure for the meaning of
+@var{references-graphs}, @var{allowed-references},
+@var{disallowed-references}, @var{local-build?}, and @var{substitutable?}.
+@end deffn
+
+@noindent
+Here's an example of a single-output derivation that creates a directory
+containing one file:
+
+@lisp
+(let ((builder '(let ((out (assoc-ref %outputs "out")))
+                  (mkdir out)    ; create /gnu/store/@dots{}-goo
+                  (call-with-output-file (string-append out "/test")
+                    (lambda (p)
+                      (display '(hello guix) p))))))
+  (build-expression->derivation store "goo" builder))
+
+@result{} #<derivation /gnu/store/@dots{}-goo.drv => @dots{}>
+@end lisp
+
+
+@node Die Store-Monade
+@section Die Store-Monade
+
+@cindex monad
+
+The procedures that operate on the store described in the previous sections
+all take an open connection to the build daemon as their first argument.
+Although the underlying model is functional, they either have side effects
+or depend on the current state of the store.
+
+The former is inconvenient: the connection to the build daemon has to be
+carried around in all those functions, making it impossible to compose
+functions that do not take that parameter with functions that do.  The
+latter can be problematic: since store operations have side effects and/or
+depend on external state, they have to be properly sequenced.
+
+@cindex monadic values
+@cindex monadic functions
+This is where the @code{(guix monads)} module comes in.  This module
+provides a framework for working with @dfn{monads}, and a particularly
+useful monad for our uses, the @dfn{store monad}.  Monads are a construct
+that allows two things: associating ``context'' with values (in our case,
+the context is the store), and building sequences of computations (here
+computations include accesses to the store).  Values in a monad---values
+that carry this additional context---are called @dfn{monadic values};
+procedures that return such values are called @dfn{monadic procedures}.
+
+Consider this ``normal'' procedure:
+
+@example
+(define (sh-symlink store)
+  ;; Return a derivation that symlinks the 'bash' executable.
+  (let* ((drv (package-derivation store bash))
+         (out (derivation->output-path drv))
+         (sh  (string-append out "/bin/bash")))
+    (build-expression->derivation store "sh"
+                                  `(symlink ,sh %output))))
+@end example
+
+Using @code{(guix monads)} and @code{(guix gexp)}, it may be rewritten as a
+monadic function:
+
+@example
+(define (sh-symlink)
+  ;; Same, but return a monadic value.
+  (mlet %store-monad ((drv (package->derivation bash)))
+    (gexp->derivation "sh"
+                      #~(symlink (string-append #$drv "/bin/bash")
+                                 #$output))))
+@end example
+
+There are several things to note in the second version: the @code{store}
+parameter is now implicit and is ``threaded'' in the calls to the
+@code{package->derivation} and @code{gexp->derivation} monadic procedures,
+and the monadic value returned by @code{package->derivation} is @dfn{bound}
+using @code{mlet} instead of plain @code{let}.
+
+As it turns out, the call to @code{package->derivation} can even be omitted
+since it will take place implicitly, as we will see later
+(@pxref{G-Ausdrücke}):
+
+@example
+(define (sh-symlink)
+  (gexp->derivation "sh"
+                    #~(symlink (string-append #$bash "/bin/bash")
+                               #$output)))
+@end example
+
+@c See
+@c <https://syntaxexclamation.wordpress.com/2014/06/26/escaping-continuations/>
+@c for the funny quote.
+Calling the monadic @code{sh-symlink} has no effect.  As someone once said,
+``you exit a monad like you exit a building on fire: by running''.  So, to
+exit the monad and get the desired effect, one must use
+@code{run-with-store}:
+
+@example
+(run-with-store (open-connection) (sh-symlink))
+@result{} /gnu/store/...-sh-symlink
+@end example
+
+Note that the @code{(guix monad-repl)} module extends the Guile REPL with
+new ``meta-commands'' to make it easier to deal with monadic procedures:
+@code{run-in-store}, and @code{enter-store-monad}.  The former is used to
+``run'' a single monadic value through the store:
+
+@example
+scheme@@(guile-user)> ,run-in-store (package->derivation hello)
+$1 = #<derivation /gnu/store/@dots{}-hello-2.9.drv => @dots{}>
+@end example
+
+The latter enters a recursive REPL, where all the return values are
+automatically run through the store:
+
+@example
+scheme@@(guile-user)> ,enter-store-monad
+store-monad@@(guile-user) [1]> (package->derivation hello)
+$2 = #<derivation /gnu/store/@dots{}-hello-2.9.drv => @dots{}>
+store-monad@@(guile-user) [1]> (text-file "foo" "Hello!")
+$3 = "/gnu/store/@dots{}-foo"
+store-monad@@(guile-user) [1]> ,q
+scheme@@(guile-user)>
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Note that non-monadic values cannot be returned in the @code{store-monad}
+REPL.
+
+The main syntactic forms to deal with monads in general are provided by the
+@code{(guix monads)} module and are described below.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Syntax} with-monad @var{monad} @var{body} ...
+Evaluate any @code{>>=} or @code{return} forms in @var{body} as being in
+@var{monad}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Syntax} return @var{val}
+Return a monadic value that encapsulates @var{val}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Syntax} >>= @var{mval} @var{mproc} ...
+@dfn{Bind} monadic value @var{mval}, passing its ``contents'' to monadic
+procedures @var{mproc}@dots{}@footnote{This operation is commonly referred
+to as ``bind'', but that name denotes an unrelated procedure in Guile.  Thus
+we use this somewhat cryptic symbol inherited from the Haskell language.}.
+There can be one @var{mproc} or several of them, as in this example:
+
+@example
+(run-with-state
+    (with-monad %state-monad
+      (>>= (return 1)
+           (lambda (x) (return (+ 1 x)))
+           (lambda (x) (return (* 2 x)))))
+  'some-state)
+
+@result{} 4
+@result{} some-state
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Syntax} mlet @var{monad} ((@var{var} @var{mval}) ...) @
+       @var{body} ...
+@deffnx {Scheme Syntax} mlet* @var{monad} ((@var{var} @var{mval}) ...) @
+       @var{body} ...  Bind the variables @var{var} to the monadic values
+@var{mval} in @var{body}, which is a sequence of expressions.  As with the
+bind operator, this can be thought of as ``unpacking'' the raw, non-monadic
+value ``contained'' in @var{mval} and making @var{var} refer to that raw,
+non-monadic value within the scope of the @var{body}.  The form (@var{var}
+-> @var{val}) binds @var{var} to the ``normal'' value @var{val}, as per
+@code{let}.  The binding operations occur in sequence from left to right.
+The last expression of @var{body} must be a monadic expression, and its
+result will become the result of the @code{mlet} or @code{mlet*} when run in
+the @var{monad}.
+
+@code{mlet*} is to @code{mlet} what @code{let*} is to @code{let}
+(@pxref{Local Bindings,,, guile, GNU Guile Reference Manual}).
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme System} mbegin @var{monad} @var{mexp} ...
+Bind @var{mexp} and the following monadic expressions in sequence, returning
+the result of the last expression.  Every expression in the sequence must be
+a monadic expression.
+
+This is akin to @code{mlet}, except that the return values of the monadic
+expressions are ignored.  In that sense, it is analogous to @code{begin},
+but applied to monadic expressions.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme System} mwhen @var{condition} @var{mexp0} @var{mexp*} ...
+When @var{condition} is true, evaluate the sequence of monadic expressions
+@var{mexp0}..@var{mexp*} as in an @code{mbegin}.  When @var{condition} is
+false, return @code{*unspecified*} in the current monad.  Every expression
+in the sequence must be a monadic expression.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme System} munless @var{condition} @var{mexp0} @var{mexp*} ...
+When @var{condition} is false, evaluate the sequence of monadic expressions
+@var{mexp0}..@var{mexp*} as in an @code{mbegin}.  When @var{condition} is
+true, return @code{*unspecified*} in the current monad.  Every expression in
+the sequence must be a monadic expression.
+@end deffn
+
+@cindex state monad
+The @code{(guix monads)} module provides the @dfn{state monad}, which allows
+an additional value---the state---to be @emph{threaded} through monadic
+procedure calls.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %state-monad
+The state monad.  Procedures in the state monad can access and change the
+state that is threaded.
+
+Consider the example below.  The @code{square} procedure returns a value in
+the state monad.  It returns the square of its argument, but also increments
+the current state value:
+
+@example
+(define (square x)
+  (mlet %state-monad ((count (current-state)))
+    (mbegin %state-monad
+      (set-current-state (+ 1 count))
+      (return (* x x)))))
+
+(run-with-state (sequence %state-monad (map square (iota 3))) 0)
+@result{} (0 1 4)
+@result{} 3
+@end example
+
+When ``run'' through @var{%state-monad}, we obtain that additional state
+value, which is the number of @code{square} calls.
+@end defvr
+
+@deffn {Monadic Procedure} current-state
+Return the current state as a monadic value.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Monadic Procedure} set-current-state @var{value}
+Set the current state to @var{value} and return the previous state as a
+monadic value.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Monadic Procedure} state-push @var{value}
+Push @var{value} to the current state, which is assumed to be a list, and
+return the previous state as a monadic value.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Monadic Procedure} state-pop
+Pop a value from the current state and return it as a monadic value.  The
+state is assumed to be a list.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} run-with-state @var{mval} [@var{state}]
+Run monadic value @var{mval} starting with @var{state} as the initial
+state.  Return two values: the resulting value, and the resulting state.
+@end deffn
+
+The main interface to the store monad, provided by the @code{(guix store)}
+module, is as follows.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %store-monad
+The store monad---an alias for @var{%state-monad}.
+
+Values in the store monad encapsulate accesses to the store.  When its
+effect is needed, a value of the store monad must be ``evaluated'' by
+passing it to the @code{run-with-store} procedure (see below.)
+@end defvr
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} run-with-store @var{store} @var{mval} [#:guile-for-build] [#:system (%current-system)]
+Run @var{mval}, a monadic value in the store monad, in @var{store}, an open
+store connection.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Monadic Procedure} text-file @var{name} @var{text} [@var{references}]
+Return as a monadic value the absolute file name in the store of the file
+containing @var{text}, a string.  @var{references} is a list of store items
+that the resulting text file refers to; it defaults to the empty list.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Monadic Procedure} binary-file @var{name} @var{data} [@var{references}]
+Return as a monadic value the absolute file name in the store of the file
+containing @var{data}, a bytevector.  @var{references} is a list of store
+items that the resulting binary file refers to; it defaults to the empty
+list.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Monadic Procedure} interned-file @var{file} [@var{name}] @
+         [#:recursive? #t] [#:select? (const #t)] Return the name of @var{file} once
+interned in the store.  Use @var{name} as its store name, or the basename of
+@var{file} if @var{name} is omitted.
+
+When @var{recursive?} is true, the contents of @var{file} are added
+recursively; if @var{file} designates a flat file and @var{recursive?} is
+true, its contents are added, and its permission bits are kept.
+
+When @var{recursive?} is true, call @code{(@var{select?} @var{file}
+@var{stat})} for each directory entry, where @var{file} is the entry's
+absolute file name and @var{stat} is the result of @code{lstat}; exclude
+entries for which @var{select?} does not return true.
+
+The example below adds a file to the store, under two different names:
+
+@example
+(run-with-store (open-connection)
+  (mlet %store-monad ((a (interned-file "README"))
+                      (b (interned-file "README" "LEGU-MIN")))
+    (return (list a b))))
+
+@result{} ("/gnu/store/rwm@dots{}-README" "/gnu/store/44i@dots{}-LEGU-MIN")
+@end example
+
+@end deffn
+
+The @code{(guix packages)} module exports the following package-related
+monadic procedures:
+
+@deffn {Monadic Procedure} package-file @var{package} [@var{file}] @
+       [#:system (%current-system)] [#:target #f] @ [#:output "out"] Return as a
+monadic value in the absolute file name of @var{file} within the
+@var{output} directory of @var{package}.  When @var{file} is omitted, return
+the name of the @var{output} directory of @var{package}.  When @var{target}
+is true, use it as a cross-compilation target triplet.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Monadic Procedure} package->derivation @var{package} [@var{system}]
+@deffnx {Monadic Procedure} package->cross-derivation @var{package} @
+          @var{target} [@var{system}] Monadic version of @code{package-derivation} and
+@code{package-cross-derivation} (@pxref{Pakete definieren}).
+@end deffn
+
+
+@node G-Ausdrücke
+@section G-Ausdrücke
+
+@cindex G-expression
+@cindex build code quoting
+So we have ``derivations'', which represent a sequence of build actions to
+be performed to produce an item in the store (@pxref{Ableitungen}).  These
+build actions are performed when asking the daemon to actually build the
+derivations; they are run by the daemon in a container (@pxref{Aufruf des guix-daemon}).
+
+@cindex strata of code
+It should come as no surprise that we like to write these build actions in
+Scheme.  When we do that, we end up with two @dfn{strata} of Scheme
+code@footnote{The term @dfn{stratum} in this context was coined by Manuel
+Serrano et al.@: in the context of their work on Hop.  Oleg Kiselyov, who
+has written insightful
+@url{http://okmij.org/ftp/meta-programming/#meta-scheme, essays and code on
+this topic}, refers to this kind of code generation as @dfn{staging}.}: the
+``host code''---code that defines packages, talks to the daemon, etc.---and
+the ``build code''---code that actually performs build actions, such as
+making directories, invoking @command{make}, etc.
+
+To describe a derivation and its build actions, one typically needs to embed
+build code inside host code.  It boils down to manipulating build code as
+data, and the homoiconicity of Scheme---code has a direct representation as
+data---comes in handy for that.  But we need more than the normal
+@code{quasiquote} mechanism in Scheme to construct build expressions.
+
+The @code{(guix gexp)} module implements @dfn{G-expressions}, a form of
+S-expressions adapted to build expressions.  G-expressions, or @dfn{gexps},
+consist essentially of three syntactic forms: @code{gexp}, @code{ungexp},
+and @code{ungexp-splicing} (or simply: @code{#~}, @code{#$}, and
+@code{#$@@}), which are comparable to @code{quasiquote}, @code{unquote}, and
+@code{unquote-splicing}, respectively (@pxref{Expression Syntax,
+@code{quasiquote},, guile, GNU Guile Reference Manual}).  However, there are
+major differences:
+
+@itemize
+@item
+Gexps are meant to be written to a file and run or manipulated by other
+processes.
+
+@item
+When a high-level object such as a package or derivation is unquoted inside
+a gexp, the result is as if its output file name had been introduced.
+
+@item
+Gexps carry information about the packages or derivations they refer to, and
+these dependencies are automatically added as inputs to the build processes
+that use them.
+@end itemize
+
+@cindex lowering, of high-level objects in gexps
+This mechanism is not limited to package and derivation objects:
+@dfn{compilers} able to ``lower'' other high-level objects to derivations or
+files in the store can be defined, such that these objects can also be
+inserted into gexps.  For example, a useful type of high-level objects that
+can be inserted in a gexp is ``file-like objects'', which make it easy to
+add files to the store and to refer to them in derivations and such (see
+@code{local-file} and @code{plain-file} below.)
+
+To illustrate the idea, here is an example of a gexp:
+
+@example
+(define build-exp
+  #~(begin
+      (mkdir #$output)
+      (chdir #$output)
+      (symlink (string-append #$coreutils "/bin/ls")
+               "list-files")))
+@end example
+
+This gexp can be passed to @code{gexp->derivation}; we obtain a derivation
+that builds a directory containing exactly one symlink to
+@file{/gnu/store/@dots{}-coreutils-8.22/bin/ls}:
+
+@example
+(gexp->derivation "the-thing" build-exp)
+@end example
+
+As one would expect, the @code{"/gnu/store/@dots{}-coreutils-8.22"} string
+is substituted to the reference to the @var{coreutils} package in the actual
+build code, and @var{coreutils} is automatically made an input to the
+derivation.  Likewise, @code{#$output} (equivalent to @code{(ungexp
+output)}) is replaced by a string containing the directory name of the
+output of the derivation.
+
+@cindex cross compilation
+In a cross-compilation context, it is useful to distinguish between
+references to the @emph{native} build of a package---that can run on the
+host---versus references to cross builds of a package.  To that end, the
+@code{#+} plays the same role as @code{#$}, but is a reference to a native
+package build:
+
+@example
+(gexp->derivation "vi"
+   #~(begin
+       (mkdir #$output)
+       (system* (string-append #+coreutils "/bin/ln")
+                "-s"
+                (string-append #$emacs "/bin/emacs")
+                (string-append #$output "/bin/vi")))
+   #:target "mips64el-linux-gnu")
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+In the example above, the native build of @var{coreutils} is used, so that
+@command{ln} can actually run on the host; but then the cross-compiled build
+of @var{emacs} is referenced.
+
+@cindex imported modules, for gexps
+@findex with-imported-modules
+Another gexp feature is @dfn{imported modules}: sometimes you want to be
+able to use certain Guile modules from the ``host environment'' in the gexp,
+so those modules should be imported in the ``build environment''.  The
+@code{with-imported-modules} form allows you to express that:
+
+@example
+(let ((build (with-imported-modules '((guix build utils))
+               #~(begin
+                   (use-modules (guix build utils))
+                   (mkdir-p (string-append #$output "/bin"))))))
+  (gexp->derivation "empty-dir"
+                    #~(begin
+                        #$build
+                        (display "success!\n")
+                        #t)))
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+In this example, the @code{(guix build utils)} module is automatically
+pulled into the isolated build environment of our gexp, such that
+@code{(use-modules (guix build utils))} works as expected.
+
+@cindex module closure
+@findex source-module-closure
+Usually you want the @emph{closure} of the module to be imported---i.e., the
+module itself and all the modules it depends on---rather than just the
+module; failing to do that, attempts to use the module will fail because of
+missing dependent modules.  The @code{source-module-closure} procedure
+computes the closure of a module by looking at its source file headers,
+which comes in handy in this case:
+
+@example
+(use-modules (guix modules))   ;for 'source-module-closure'
+
+(with-imported-modules (source-module-closure
+                         '((guix build utils)
+                           (gnu build vm)))
+  (gexp->derivation "something-with-vms"
+                    #~(begin
+                        (use-modules (guix build utils)
+                                     (gnu build vm))
+                        @dots{})))
+@end example
+
+@cindex extensions, for gexps
+@findex with-extensions
+In the same vein, sometimes you want to import not just pure-Scheme modules,
+but also ``extensions'' such as Guile bindings to C libraries or other
+``full-blown'' packages.  Say you need the @code{guile-json} package
+available on the build side, here's how you would do it:
+
+@example
+(use-modules (gnu packages guile))  ;for 'guile-json'
+
+(with-extensions (list guile-json)
+  (gexp->derivation "something-with-json"
+                    #~(begin
+                        (use-modules (json))
+                        @dots{})))
+@end example
+
+The syntactic form to construct gexps is summarized below.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Syntax} #~@var{exp}
+@deffnx {Scheme Syntax} (gexp @var{exp})
+Return a G-expression containing @var{exp}.  @var{exp} may contain one or
+more of the following forms:
+
+@table @code
+@item #$@var{obj}
+@itemx (ungexp @var{obj})
+Introduce a reference to @var{obj}.  @var{obj} may have one of the supported
+types, for example a package or a derivation, in which case the
+@code{ungexp} form is replaced by its output file name---e.g.,
+@code{"/gnu/store/@dots{}-coreutils-8.22}.
+
+If @var{obj} is a list, it is traversed and references to supported objects
+are substituted similarly.
+
+If @var{obj} is another gexp, its contents are inserted and its dependencies
+are added to those of the containing gexp.
+
+If @var{obj} is another kind of object, it is inserted as is.
+
+@item #$@var{obj}:@var{output}
+@itemx (ungexp @var{obj} @var{output})
+This is like the form above, but referring explicitly to the @var{output} of
+@var{obj}---this is useful when @var{obj} produces multiple outputs
+(@pxref{Pakete mit mehreren Ausgaben.}).
+
+@item #+@var{obj}
+@itemx #+@var{obj}:output
+@itemx (ungexp-native @var{obj})
+@itemx (ungexp-native @var{obj} @var{output})
+Same as @code{ungexp}, but produces a reference to the @emph{native} build
+of @var{obj} when used in a cross compilation context.
+
+@item #$output[:@var{output}]
+@itemx (ungexp output [@var{output}])
+Insert a reference to derivation output @var{output}, or to the main output
+when @var{output} is omitted.
+
+This only makes sense for gexps passed to @code{gexp->derivation}.
+
+@item #$@@@var{lst}
+@itemx (ungexp-splicing @var{lst})
+Like the above, but splices the contents of @var{lst} inside the containing
+list.
+
+@item #+@@@var{lst}
+@itemx (ungexp-native-splicing @var{lst})
+Like the above, but refers to native builds of the objects listed in
+@var{lst}.
+
+@end table
+
+G-expressions created by @code{gexp} or @code{#~} are run-time objects of
+the @code{gexp?} type (see below.)
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Syntax} with-imported-modules @var{modules} @var{body}@dots{}
+Mark the gexps defined in @var{body}@dots{} as requiring @var{modules} in
+their execution environment.
+
+Each item in @var{modules} can be the name of a module, such as @code{(guix
+build utils)}, or it can be a module name, followed by an arrow, followed by
+a file-like object:
+
+@example
+`((guix build utils)
+  (guix gcrypt)
+  ((guix config) => ,(scheme-file "config.scm"
+                                  #~(define-module @dots{}))))
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+In the example above, the first two modules are taken from the search path,
+and the last one is created from the given file-like object.
+
+This form has @emph{lexical} scope: it has an effect on the gexps directly
+defined in @var{body}@dots{}, but not on those defined, say, in procedures
+called from @var{body}@dots{}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Syntax} with-extensions @var{extensions} @var{body}@dots{}
+Mark the gexps defined in @var{body}@dots{} as requiring @var{extensions} in
+their build and execution environment.  @var{extensions} is typically a list
+of package objects such as those defined in the @code{(gnu packages guile)}
+module.
+
+Concretely, the packages listed in @var{extensions} are added to the load
+path while compiling imported modules in @var{body}@dots{}; they are also
+added to the load path of the gexp returned by @var{body}@dots{}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} gexp? @var{obj}
+Return @code{#t} if @var{obj} is a G-expression.
+@end deffn
+
+G-expressions are meant to be written to disk, either as code building some
+derivation, or as plain files in the store.  The monadic procedures below
+allow you to do that (@pxref{Die Store-Monade}, for more information about
+monads.)
+
+@deffn {Monadic Procedure} gexp->derivation @var{name} @var{exp} @
+       [#:system (%current-system)] [#:target #f] [#:graft? #t] @ [#:hash #f]
+[#:hash-algo #f] @ [#:recursive? #f] [#:env-vars '()] [#:modules '()] @
+[#:module-path @var{%load-path}] @ [#:effective-version "2.2"] @
+[#:references-graphs #f] [#:allowed-references #f] @
+[#:disallowed-references #f] @ [#:leaked-env-vars #f] @ [#:script-name
+(string-append @var{name} "-builder")] @ [#:deprecation-warnings #f] @
+[#:local-build? #f] [#:substitutable? #t] @ [#:properties '()]
+[#:guile-for-build #f] Return a derivation @var{name} that runs @var{exp} (a
+gexp) with @var{guile-for-build} (a derivation) on @var{system}; @var{exp}
+is stored in a file called @var{script-name}.  When @var{target} is true, it
+is used as the cross-compilation target triplet for packages referred to by
+@var{exp}.
+
+@var{modules} is deprecated in favor of @code{with-imported-modules}.  Its
+meaning is to make @var{modules} available in the evaluation context of
+@var{exp}; @var{modules} is a list of names of Guile modules searched in
+@var{module-path} to be copied in the store, compiled, and made available in
+the load path during the execution of @var{exp}---e.g., @code{((guix build
+utils) (guix build gnu-build-system))}.
+
+@var{effective-version} determines the string to use when adding extensions
+of @var{exp} (see @code{with-extensions}) to the search path---e.g.,
+@code{"2.2"}.
+
+@var{graft?} determines whether packages referred to by @var{exp} should be
+grafted when applicable.
+
+When @var{references-graphs} is true, it must be a list of tuples of one of
+the following forms:
+
+@example
+(@var{file-name} @var{package})
+(@var{file-name} @var{package} @var{output})
+(@var{file-name} @var{derivation})
+(@var{file-name} @var{derivation} @var{output})
+(@var{file-name} @var{store-item})
+@end example
+
+The right-hand-side of each element of @var{references-graphs} is
+automatically made an input of the build process of @var{exp}.  In the build
+environment, each @var{file-name} contains the reference graph of the
+corresponding item, in a simple text format.
+
+@var{allowed-references} must be either @code{#f} or a list of output names
+and packages.  In the latter case, the list denotes store items that the
+result is allowed to refer to.  Any reference to another store item will
+lead to a build error.  Similarly for @var{disallowed-references}, which can
+list items that must not be referenced by the outputs.
+
+@var{deprecation-warnings} determines whether to show deprecation warnings
+while compiling modules.  It can be @code{#f}, @code{#t}, or
+@code{'detailed}.
+
+The other arguments are as for @code{derivation} (@pxref{Ableitungen}).
+@end deffn
+
+@cindex file-like objects
+The @code{local-file}, @code{plain-file}, @code{computed-file},
+@code{program-file}, and @code{scheme-file} procedures below return
+@dfn{file-like objects}.  That is, when unquoted in a G-expression, these
+objects lead to a file in the store.  Consider this G-expression:
+
+@example
+#~(system* #$(file-append glibc "/sbin/nscd") "-f"
+           #$(local-file "/tmp/my-nscd.conf"))
+@end example
+
+The effect here is to ``intern'' @file{/tmp/my-nscd.conf} by copying it to
+the store.  Once expanded, for instance @i{via} @code{gexp->derivation}, the
+G-expression refers to that copy under @file{/gnu/store}; thus, modifying or
+removing the file in @file{/tmp} does not have any effect on what the
+G-expression does.  @code{plain-file} can be used similarly; it differs in
+that the file content is directly passed as a string.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} local-file @var{file} [@var{name}] @
+   [#:recursive? #f] [#:select? (const #t)] Return an object representing local
+file @var{file} to add to the store; this object can be used in a gexp.  If
+@var{file} is a relative file name, it is looked up relative to the source
+file where this form appears.  @var{file} will be added to the store under
+@var{name}--by default the base name of @var{file}.
+
+When @var{recursive?} is true, the contents of @var{file} are added
+recursively; if @var{file} designates a flat file and @var{recursive?} is
+true, its contents are added, and its permission bits are kept.
+
+When @var{recursive?} is true, call @code{(@var{select?} @var{file}
+@var{stat})} for each directory entry, where @var{file} is the entry's
+absolute file name and @var{stat} is the result of @code{lstat}; exclude
+entries for which @var{select?} does not return true.
+
+This is the declarative counterpart of the @code{interned-file} monadic
+procedure (@pxref{Die Store-Monade, @code{interned-file}}).
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} plain-file @var{name} @var{content}
+Return an object representing a text file called @var{name} with the given
+@var{content} (a string or a bytevector) to be added to the store.
+
+This is the declarative counterpart of @code{text-file}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} computed-file @var{name} @var{gexp} @
+          [#:options '(#:local-build? #t)] Return an object representing the store
+item @var{name}, a file or directory computed by @var{gexp}.  @var{options}
+is a list of additional arguments to pass to @code{gexp->derivation}.
+
+This is the declarative counterpart of @code{gexp->derivation}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Monadic Procedure} gexp->script @var{name} @var{exp} @
+  [#:guile (default-guile)] [#:module-path %load-path] Return an executable
+script @var{name} that runs @var{exp} using @var{guile}, with @var{exp}'s
+imported modules in its search path.  Look up @var{exp}'s modules in
+@var{module-path}.
+
+The example below builds a script that simply invokes the @command{ls}
+command:
+
+@example
+(use-modules (guix gexp) (gnu packages base))
+
+(gexp->script "list-files"
+              #~(execl #$(file-append coreutils "/bin/ls")
+                       "ls"))
+@end example
+
+When ``running'' it through the store (@pxref{Die Store-Monade,
+@code{run-with-store}}), we obtain a derivation that produces an executable
+file @file{/gnu/store/@dots{}-list-files} along these lines:
+
+@example
+#!/gnu/store/@dots{}-guile-2.0.11/bin/guile -ds
+!#
+(execl "/gnu/store/@dots{}-coreutils-8.22"/bin/ls" "ls")
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} program-file @var{name} @var{exp} @
+          [#:guile #f] [#:module-path %load-path] Return an object representing the
+executable store item @var{name} that runs @var{gexp}.  @var{guile} is the
+Guile package used to execute that script.  Imported modules of @var{gexp}
+are looked up in @var{module-path}.
+
+This is the declarative counterpart of @code{gexp->script}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Monadic Procedure} gexp->file @var{name} @var{exp} @
+            [#:set-load-path? #t] [#:module-path %load-path] @ [#:splice? #f] @ [#:guile
+(default-guile)] Return a derivation that builds a file @var{name}
+containing @var{exp}.  When @var{splice?} is true, @var{exp} is considered
+to be a list of expressions that will be spliced in the resulting file.
+
+When @var{set-load-path?} is true, emit code in the resulting file to set
+@code{%load-path} and @code{%load-compiled-path} to honor @var{exp}'s
+imported modules.  Look up @var{exp}'s modules in @var{module-path}.
+
+The resulting file holds references to all the dependencies of @var{exp} or
+a subset thereof.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} scheme-file @var{name} @var{exp} [#:splice? #f]
+Return an object representing the Scheme file @var{name} that contains
+@var{exp}.
+
+This is the declarative counterpart of @code{gexp->file}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Monadic Procedure} text-file* @var{name} @var{text} @dots{}
+Return as a monadic value a derivation that builds a text file containing
+all of @var{text}.  @var{text} may list, in addition to strings, objects of
+any type that can be used in a gexp: packages, derivations, local file
+objects, etc.  The resulting store file holds references to all these.
+
+This variant should be preferred over @code{text-file} anytime the file to
+create will reference items from the store.  This is typically the case when
+building a configuration file that embeds store file names, like this:
+
+@example
+(define (profile.sh)
+  ;; Return the name of a shell script in the store that
+  ;; initializes the 'PATH' environment variable.
+  (text-file* "profile.sh"
+              "export PATH=" coreutils "/bin:"
+              grep "/bin:" sed "/bin\n"))
+@end example
+
+In this example, the resulting @file{/gnu/store/@dots{}-profile.sh} file
+will reference @var{coreutils}, @var{grep}, and @var{sed}, thereby
+preventing them from being garbage-collected during its lifetime.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} mixed-text-file @var{name} @var{text} @dots{}
+Return an object representing store file @var{name} containing @var{text}.
+@var{text} is a sequence of strings and file-like objects, as in:
+
+@example
+(mixed-text-file "profile"
+                 "export PATH=" coreutils "/bin:" grep "/bin")
+@end example
+
+This is the declarative counterpart of @code{text-file*}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} file-union @var{name} @var{files}
+Return a @code{<computed-file>} that builds a directory containing all of
+@var{files}.  Each item in @var{files} must be a two-element list where the
+first element is the file name to use in the new directory, and the second
+element is a gexp denoting the target file.  Here's an example:
+
+@example
+(file-union "etc"
+            `(("hosts" ,(plain-file "hosts"
+                                    "127.0.0.1 localhost"))
+              ("bashrc" ,(plain-file "bashrc"
+                                     "alias ls='ls --color=auto'"))))
+@end example
+
+This yields an @code{etc} directory containing these two files.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} directory-union @var{name} @var{things}
+Return a directory that is the union of @var{things}, where @var{things} is
+a list of file-like objects denoting directories.  For example:
+
+@example
+(directory-union "guile+emacs" (list guile emacs))
+@end example
+
+yields a directory that is the union of the @code{guile} and @code{emacs}
+packages.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} file-append @var{obj} @var{suffix} @dots{}
+Return a file-like object that expands to the concatenation of @var{obj} and
+@var{suffix}, where @var{obj} is a lowerable object and each @var{suffix} is
+a string.
+
+As an example, consider this gexp:
+
+@example
+(gexp->script "run-uname"
+              #~(system* #$(file-append coreutils
+                                        "/bin/uname")))
+@end example
+
+The same effect could be achieved with:
+
+@example
+(gexp->script "run-uname"
+              #~(system* (string-append #$coreutils
+                                        "/bin/uname")))
+@end example
+
+There is one difference though: in the @code{file-append} case, the
+resulting script contains the absolute file name as a string, whereas in the
+second case, the resulting script contains a @code{(string-append @dots{})}
+expression to construct the file name @emph{at run time}.
+@end deffn
+
+
+Of course, in addition to gexps embedded in ``host'' code, there are also
+modules containing build tools.  To make it clear that they are meant to be
+used in the build stratum, these modules are kept in the @code{(guix build
+@dots{})} name space.
+
+@cindex lowering, of high-level objects in gexps
+Internally, high-level objects are @dfn{lowered}, using their compiler, to
+either derivations or store items.  For instance, lowering a package yields
+a derivation, and lowering a @code{plain-file} yields a store item.  This is
+achieved using the @code{lower-object} monadic procedure.
+
+@deffn {Monadic Procedure} lower-object @var{obj} [@var{system}] @
+           [#:target #f] Return as a value in @var{%store-monad} the derivation or
+store item corresponding to @var{obj} for @var{system}, cross-compiling for
+@var{target} if @var{target} is true.  @var{obj} must be an object that has
+an associated gexp compiler, such as a @code{<package>}.
+@end deffn
+
+@node Invoking guix repl
+@section Invoking @command{guix repl}
+
+@cindex REPL, read-eval-print loop
+The @command{guix repl} command spawns a Guile @dfn{read-eval-print loop}
+(REPL) for interactive programming (@pxref{Using Guile Interactively,,,
+guile, GNU Guile Reference Manual}).  Compared to just launching the
+@command{guile} command, @command{guix repl} guarantees that all the Guix
+modules and all its dependencies are available in the search path.  You can
+use it this way:
+
+@example
+$ guix repl
+scheme@@(guile-user)> ,use (gnu packages base)
+scheme@@(guile-user)> coreutils
+$1 = #<package coreutils@@8.29 gnu/packages/base.scm:327 3e28300>
+@end example
+
+@cindex inferiors
+In addition, @command{guix repl} implements a simple machine-readable REPL
+protocol for use by @code{(guix inferior)}, a facility to interact with
+@dfn{inferiors}, separate processes running a potentially different revision
+of Guix.
+
+The available options are as follows:
+
+@table @code
+@item --type=@var{type}
+@itemx -t @var{type}
+Start a REPL of the given @var{TYPE}, which can be one of the following:
+
+@table @code
+@item guile
+This is default, and it spawns a standard full-featured Guile REPL.
+@item machine
+Spawn a REPL that uses the machine-readable protocol.  This is the protocol
+that the @code{(guix inferior)} module speaks.
+@end table
+
+@item --listen=@var{Endpunkt}
+By default, @command{guix repl} reads from standard input and writes to
+standard output.  When this option is passed, it will instead listen for
+connections on @var{endpoint}.  Here are examples of valid options:
+
+@table @code
+@item --listen=tcp:37146
+Accept connections on localhost on port 37146.
+
+@item --listen=unix:/tmp/socket
+Accept connections on the Unix-domain socket @file{/tmp/socket}.
+@end table
+@end table
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node Zubehör
+@chapter Zubehör
+
+This section describes Guix command-line utilities.  Some of them are
+primarily targeted at developers and users who write new package
+definitions, while others are more generally useful.  They complement the
+Scheme programming interface of Guix in a convenient way.
+
+@menu
+* Aufruf von guix build::    Pakete aus der Befehlszeile heraus erstellen.
+* Aufruf von guix edit::     Paketdefinitionen bearbeiten.
+* Aufruf von guix download::  Herunterladen einer Datei und Ausgabe ihres 
+                                Hashes.
+* Aufruf von guix hash::     Den kryptographischen Hash einer Datei 
+                               berechnen.
+* Aufruf von guix import::   Paketdefinitionen importieren.
+* Aufruf von guix refresh::  Paketdefinitionen aktualisieren.
+* Aufruf von guix lint::     Fehler in Paketdefinitionen finden.
+* Aufruf von guix size::     Plattenverbrauch profilieren.
+* Aufruf von guix graph::    Den Paketgraphen visualisieren.
+* Aufruf von guix environment::  Entwicklungsumgebungen einrichten.
+* Aufruf von guix publish::  Substitute teilen.
+* Aufruf von guix challenge::  Die Substitut-Server anfechten.
+* Aufruf von guix copy::     Mit einem entfernten Store Dateien austauschen.
+* Aufruf von guix container::  Prozesse isolieren.
+* Aufruf von guix weather::  Die Verfügbarkeit von Substituten 
+                               einschätzen.
+* Invoking guix processes::  Listing client processes.
+@end menu
+
+@node Aufruf von guix build
+@section Aufruf von @command{guix build}
+
+@cindex package building
+@cindex @command{guix build}
+The @command{guix build} command builds packages or derivations and their
+dependencies, and prints the resulting store paths.  Note that it does not
+modify the user's profile---this is the job of the @command{guix package}
+command (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}).  Thus, it is mainly useful for
+distribution developers.
+
+The general syntax is:
+
+@example
+guix build @var{options} @var{package-or-derivation}@dots{}
+@end example
+
+As an example, the following command builds the latest versions of Emacs and
+of Guile, displays their build logs, and finally displays the resulting
+directories:
+
+@example
+guix build emacs guile
+@end example
+
+Similarly, the following command builds all the available packages:
+
+@example
+guix build --quiet --keep-going \
+  `guix package -A | cut -f1,2 --output-delimiter=@@`
+@end example
+
+@var{package-or-derivation} may be either the name of a package found in the
+software distribution such as @code{coreutils} or @code{coreutils@@8.20}, or
+a derivation such as @file{/gnu/store/@dots{}-coreutils-8.19.drv}.  In the
+former case, a package with the corresponding name (and optionally version)
+is searched for among the GNU distribution modules (@pxref{Paketmodule}).
+
+Alternatively, the @code{--expression} option may be used to specify a
+Scheme expression that evaluates to a package; this is useful when
+disambiguating among several same-named packages or package variants is
+needed.
+
+There may be zero or more @var{options}.  The available options are
+described in the subsections below.
+
+@menu
+* Gemeinsame Erstellungsoptionen::  Erstellungsoptionen für die meisten 
+                                      Befehle.
+* Paketumwandlungsoptionen::  Varianten von Paketen erzeugen.
+* Zusätzliche Erstellungsoptionen::  Optionen spezifisch für »guix 
+                                        build«.
+* Fehlschläge beim Erstellen untersuchen::  Praxiserfahrung bei der 
+                                               Paketerstellung.
+@end menu
+
+@node Gemeinsame Erstellungsoptionen
+@subsection Gemeinsame Erstellungsoptionen
+
+A number of options that control the build process are common to
+@command{guix build} and other commands that can spawn builds, such as
+@command{guix package} or @command{guix archive}.  These are the following:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item --load-path=@var{directory}
+@itemx -L @var{directory}
+Add @var{directory} to the front of the package module search path
+(@pxref{Paketmodule}).
+
+This allows users to define their own packages and make them visible to the
+command-line tools.
+
+@item --keep-failed
+@itemx -K
+Keep the build tree of failed builds.  Thus, if a build fails, its build
+tree is kept under @file{/tmp}, in a directory whose name is shown at the
+end of the build log.  This is useful when debugging build issues.
+@xref{Fehlschläge beim Erstellen untersuchen}, for tips and tricks on how to debug build
+issues.
+
+This option has no effect when connecting to a remote daemon with a
+@code{guix://} URI (@pxref{Der Store, the @code{GUIX_DAEMON_SOCKET}
+variable}).
+
+@item --keep-going
+@itemx -k
+Keep going when some of the derivations fail to build; return only once all
+the builds have either completed or failed.
+
+The default behavior is to stop as soon as one of the specified derivations
+has failed.
+
+@item --dry-run
+@itemx -n
+Do not build the derivations.
+
+@anchor{fallback-option}
+@item --fallback
+When substituting a pre-built binary fails, fall back to building packages
+locally (@pxref{Fehler bei der Substitution}).
+
+@item --substitute-urls=@var{URLs}
+@anchor{client-substitute-urls}
+Consider @var{urls} the whitespace-separated list of substitute source URLs,
+overriding the default list of URLs of @command{guix-daemon}
+(@pxref{daemon-substitute-urls,, @command{guix-daemon} URLs}).
+
+This means that substitutes may be downloaded from @var{urls}, provided they
+are signed by a key authorized by the system administrator
+(@pxref{Substitute}).
+
+When @var{urls} is the empty string, substitutes are effectively disabled.
+
+@item --no-substitutes
+Benutze keine Substitute für Erstellungsergebnisse. Das heißt, dass alle
+Objekte lokal erstellt werden müssen, und kein Herunterladen von vorab
+erstellten Binärdateien erlaubt ist (@pxref{Substitute}).
+
+@item --no-grafts
+Do not ``graft'' packages.  In practice, this means that package updates
+available as grafts are not applied.  @xref{Sicherheitsaktualisierungen}, for more
+information on grafts.
+
+@item --rounds=@var{n}
+Build each derivation @var{n} times in a row, and raise an error if
+consecutive build results are not bit-for-bit identical.
+
+This is a useful way to detect non-deterministic builds processes.
+Non-deterministic build processes are a problem because they make it
+practically impossible for users to @emph{verify} whether third-party
+binaries are genuine.  @xref{Aufruf von guix challenge}, for more.
+
+Note that, currently, the differing build results are not kept around, so
+you will have to manually investigate in case of an error---e.g., by
+stashing one of the build results with @code{guix archive --export}
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix archive}), then rebuilding, and finally comparing the
+two results.
+
+@item --no-build-hook
+Nicht versuchen, Erstellungen über den »Build-Hook« des Daemons auszulagern
+(@pxref{Auslagern des Daemons einrichten}). Somit wird lokal erstellt, statt
+Erstellungen auf entfernte Maschinen auszulagern.
+
+@item --max-silent-time=@var{Sekunden}
+Wenn der Erstellungs- oder Substitutionsprozess länger als
+@var{Sekunden}-lang keine Ausgabe erzeugt, wird er abgebrochen und ein
+Fehler beim Erstellen gemeldet.
+
+By default, the daemon's setting is honored (@pxref{Aufruf des guix-daemon,
+@code{--max-silent-time}}).
+
+@item --timeout=@var{Sekunden}
+Entsprechend wird hier der Erstellungs- oder Substitutionsprozess
+abgebrochen und als Fehlschlag gemeldet, wenn er mehr als
+@var{Sekunden}-lang dauert.
+
+By default, the daemon's setting is honored (@pxref{Aufruf des guix-daemon,
+@code{--timeout}}).
+
+@item --verbosity=@var{level}
+Use the given verbosity level.  @var{level} must be an integer between 0 and
+5; higher means more verbose output.  Setting a level of 4 or more may be
+helpful when debugging setup issues with the build daemon.
+
+@item --cores=@var{n}
+@itemx -c @var{n}
+Allow the use of up to @var{n} CPU cores for the build.  The special value
+@code{0} means to use as many CPU cores as available.
+
+@item --max-jobs=@var{n}
+@itemx -M @var{n}
+Allow at most @var{n} build jobs in parallel.  @xref{Aufruf des guix-daemon,
+@code{--max-jobs}}, for details about this option and the equivalent
+@command{guix-daemon} option.
+
+@end table
+
+Behind the scenes, @command{guix build} is essentially an interface to the
+@code{package-derivation} procedure of the @code{(guix packages)} module,
+and to the @code{build-derivations} procedure of the @code{(guix
+derivations)} module.
+
+In addition to options explicitly passed on the command line, @command{guix
+build} and other @command{guix} commands that support building honor the
+@code{GUIX_BUILD_OPTIONS} environment variable.
+
+@defvr {Environment Variable} GUIX_BUILD_OPTIONS
+Users can define this variable to a list of command line options that will
+automatically be used by @command{guix build} and other @command{guix}
+commands that can perform builds, as in the example below:
+
+@example
+$ export GUIX_BUILD_OPTIONS="--no-substitutes -c 2 -L /foo/bar"
+@end example
+
+These options are parsed independently, and the result is appended to the
+parsed command-line options.
+@end defvr
+
+
+@node Paketumwandlungsoptionen
+@subsection Paketumwandlungsoptionen
+
+@cindex package variants
+Another set of command-line options supported by @command{guix build} and
+also @command{guix package} are @dfn{package transformation options}.  These
+are options that make it possible to define @dfn{package variants}---for
+instance, packages built from different source code.  This is a convenient
+way to create customized packages on the fly without having to type in the
+definitions of package variants (@pxref{Pakete definieren}).
+
+@table @code
+
+@item --with-source=@var{source}
+@itemx --with-source=@var{package}=@var{source}
+@itemx --with-source=@var{package}@@@var{version}=@var{source}
+Use @var{source} as the source of @var{package}, and @var{version} as its
+version number.  @var{source} must be a file name or a URL, as for
+@command{guix download} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix download}).
+
+When @var{package} is omitted, it is taken to be the package name specified
+on the command line that matches the base of @var{source}---e.g., if
+@var{source} is @code{/src/guile-2.0.10.tar.gz}, the corresponding package
+is @code{guile}.
+
+Likewise, when @var{version} is omitted, the version string is inferred from
+@var{source}; in the previous example, it is @code{2.0.10}.
+
+This option allows users to try out versions of packages other than the one
+provided by the distribution.  The example below downloads
+@file{ed-1.7.tar.gz} from a GNU mirror and uses that as the source for the
+@code{ed} package:
+
+@example
+guix build ed --with-source=mirror://gnu/ed/ed-1.7.tar.gz
+@end example
+
+As a developer, @code{--with-source} makes it easy to test release
+candidates:
+
+@example
+guix build guile --with-source=../guile-2.0.9.219-e1bb7.tar.xz
+@end example
+
+@dots{} or to build from a checkout in a pristine environment:
+
+@example
+$ git clone git://git.sv.gnu.org/guix.git
+$ guix build guix --with-source=guix@@1.0=./guix
+@end example
+
+@item --with-input=@var{package}=@var{replacement}
+Replace dependency on @var{package} by a dependency on @var{replacement}.
+@var{package} must be a package name, and @var{replacement} must be a
+package specification such as @code{guile} or @code{guile@@1.8}.
+
+For instance, the following command builds Guix, but replaces its dependency
+on the current stable version of Guile with a dependency on the legacy
+version of Guile, @code{guile@@2.0}:
+
+@example
+guix build --with-input=guile=guile@@2.0 guix
+@end example
+
+This is a recursive, deep replacement.  So in this example, both @code{guix}
+and its dependency @code{guile-json} (which also depends on @code{guile})
+get rebuilt against @code{guile@@2.0}.
+
+This is implemented using the @code{package-input-rewriting} Scheme
+procedure (@pxref{Pakete definieren, @code{package-input-rewriting}}).
+
+@item --with-graft=@var{package}=@var{replacement}
+This is similar to @code{--with-input} but with an important difference:
+instead of rebuilding the whole dependency chain, @var{replacement} is built
+and then @dfn{grafted} onto the binaries that were initially referring to
+@var{package}.  @xref{Sicherheitsaktualisierungen}, for more information on grafts.
+
+For example, the command below grafts version 3.5.4 of GnuTLS onto Wget and
+all its dependencies, replacing references to the version of GnuTLS they
+currently refer to:
+
+@example
+guix build --with-graft=gnutls=gnutls@@3.5.4 wget
+@end example
+
+This has the advantage of being much faster than rebuilding everything.  But
+there is a caveat: it works if and only if @var{package} and
+@var{replacement} are strictly compatible---for example, if they provide a
+library, the application binary interface (ABI) of those libraries must be
+compatible.  If @var{replacement} is somehow incompatible with
+@var{package}, then the resulting package may be unusable.  Use with care!
+
+@item --with-branch=@var{package}=@var{branch}
+@cindex Git, using the latest commit
+@cindex latest commit, building
+Build @var{package} from the latest commit of @var{branch}.  The
+@code{source} field of @var{package} must be an origin with the
+@code{git-fetch} method (@pxref{„origin“-Referenz}) or a @code{git-checkout}
+object; the repository URL is taken from that @code{source}.
+
+For instance, the following command builds @code{guile-sqlite3} from the
+latest commit of its @code{master} branch, and then builds @code{guix}
+(which depends on it) and @code{cuirass} (which depends on @code{guix})
+against this specific @code{guile-sqlite3} build:
+
+@example
+guix build --with-branch=guile-sqlite3=master cuirass
+@end example
+
+@cindex continuous integration
+Obviously, since it uses the latest commit of the given branch, the result
+of such a command varies over time.  Nevertheless it is a convenient way to
+rebuild entire software stacks against the latest commit of one or more
+packages.  This is particularly useful in the context of continuous
+integration (CI).
+
+Checkouts are kept in a cache under @file{~/.cache/guix/checkouts} to speed
+up consecutive accesses to the same repository.  You may want to clean it up
+once in a while to save disk space.
+
+@item --with-commit=@var{package}=@var{commit}
+This is similar to @code{--with-branch}, except that it builds from
+@var{commit} rather than the tip of a branch.  @var{commit} must be a valid
+Git commit SHA1 identifier.
+@end table
+
+@node Zusätzliche Erstellungsoptionen
+@subsection Zusätzliche Erstellungsoptionen
+
+The command-line options presented below are specific to @command{guix
+build}.
+
+@table @code
+
+@item --quiet
+@itemx -q
+Build quietly, without displaying the build log.  Upon completion, the build
+log is kept in @file{/var} (or similar) and can always be retrieved using
+the @option{--log-file} option.
+
+@item --file=@var{file}
+@itemx -f @var{Datei}
+Build the package, derivation, or other file-like object that the code
+within @var{file} evaluates to (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke, file-like objects}).
+
+As an example, @var{file} might contain a package definition like this
+(@pxref{Pakete definieren}):
+
+@example
+@verbatiminclude package-hello.scm
+@end example
+
+@item --expression=@var{expr}
+@itemx -e @var{expr}
+Build the package or derivation @var{expr} evaluates to.
+
+For example, @var{expr} may be @code{(@@ (gnu packages guile)  guile-1.8)},
+which unambiguously designates this specific variant of version 1.8 of
+Guile.
+
+Alternatively, @var{expr} may be a G-expression, in which case it is used as
+a build program passed to @code{gexp->derivation} (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke}).
+
+Lastly, @var{expr} may refer to a zero-argument monadic procedure
+(@pxref{Die Store-Monade}).  The procedure must return a derivation as a
+monadic value, which is then passed through @code{run-with-store}.
+
+@item --source
+@itemx -S
+Build the source derivations of the packages, rather than the packages
+themselves.
+
+For instance, @code{guix build -S gcc} returns something like
+@file{/gnu/store/@dots{}-gcc-4.7.2.tar.bz2}, which is the GCC source
+tarball.
+
+The returned source tarball is the result of applying any patches and code
+snippets specified in the package @code{origin} (@pxref{Pakete definieren}).
+
+@item --sources
+Fetch and return the source of @var{package-or-derivation} and all their
+dependencies, recursively.  This is a handy way to obtain a local copy of
+all the source code needed to build @var{packages}, allowing you to
+eventually build them even without network access.  It is an extension of
+the @code{--source} option and can accept one of the following optional
+argument values:
+
+@table @code
+@item package
+This value causes the @code{--sources} option to behave in the same way as
+the @code{--source} option.
+
+@item all
+Build the source derivations of all packages, including any source that
+might be listed as @code{inputs}.  This is the default value.
+
+@example
+$ guix build --sources tzdata
+The following derivations will be built:
+   /gnu/store/@dots{}-tzdata2015b.tar.gz.drv
+   /gnu/store/@dots{}-tzcode2015b.tar.gz.drv
+@end example
+
+@item transitive
+Build the source derivations of all packages, as well of all transitive
+inputs to the packages.  This can be used e.g.@: to prefetch package source
+for later offline building.
+
+@example
+$ guix build --sources=transitive tzdata
+The following derivations will be built:
+   /gnu/store/@dots{}-tzcode2015b.tar.gz.drv
+   /gnu/store/@dots{}-findutils-4.4.2.tar.xz.drv
+   /gnu/store/@dots{}-grep-2.21.tar.xz.drv
+   /gnu/store/@dots{}-coreutils-8.23.tar.xz.drv
+   /gnu/store/@dots{}-make-4.1.tar.xz.drv
+   /gnu/store/@dots{}-bash-4.3.tar.xz.drv
+@dots{}
+@end example
+
+@end table
+
+@item --system=@var{System}
+@itemx -s @var{system}
+Attempt to build for @var{system}---e.g., @code{i686-linux}---instead of the
+system type of the build host.
+
+@quotation Anmerkung
+The @code{--system} flag is for @emph{native} compilation and must not be
+confused with cross-compilation.  See @code{--target} below for information
+on cross-compilation.
+@end quotation
+
+An example use of this is on Linux-based systems, which can emulate
+different personalities.  For instance, passing @code{--system=i686-linux}
+on an @code{x86_64-linux} system or @code{--system=armhf-linux} on an
+@code{aarch64-linux} system allows you to build packages in a complete
+32-bit environment.
+
+@quotation Anmerkung
+Building for an @code{armhf-linux} system is unconditionally enabled on
+@code{aarch64-linux} machines, although certain aarch64 chipsets do not
+allow for this functionality, notably the ThunderX.
+@end quotation
+
+Similarly, when transparent emulation with QEMU and @code{binfmt_misc} is
+enabled (@pxref{Virtualisierungsdienste, @code{qemu-binfmt-service-type}}),
+you can build for any system for which a QEMU @code{binfmt_misc} handler is
+installed.
+
+Builds for a system other than that of the machine you are using can also be
+offloaded to a remote machine of the right architecture.  @xref{Auslagern des Daemons einrichten}, for more information on offloading.
+
+@item --target=@var{triplet}
+@cindex cross-compilation
+Cross-build for @var{triplet}, which must be a valid GNU triplet, such as
+@code{"mips64el-linux-gnu"} (@pxref{Specifying target triplets, GNU
+configuration triplets,, autoconf, Autoconf}).
+
+@anchor{build-check}
+@item --check
+@cindex determinism, checking
+@cindex reproducibility, checking
+Rebuild @var{package-or-derivation}, which are already available in the
+store, and raise an error if the build results are not bit-for-bit
+identical.
+
+This mechanism allows you to check whether previously installed substitutes
+are genuine (@pxref{Substitute}), or whether the build result of a package
+is deterministic.  @xref{Aufruf von guix challenge}, for more background
+information and tools.
+
+Wenn dies zusammen mit @option{--keep-failed} benutzt wird, bleiben die sich
+unterscheidenden Ausgaben im Store unter dem Namen
+@file{/gnu/store/@dots{}-check}. Dadurch können Unterschiede zwischen den
+beiden Ergebnissen leicht erkannt werden.
+
+@item --repair
+@cindex repairing store items
+@cindex Datenbeschädigung, Behebung
+Attempt to repair the specified store items, if they are corrupt, by
+re-downloading or rebuilding them.
+
+This operation is not atomic and thus restricted to @code{root}.
+
+@item --derivations
+@itemx -d
+Return the derivation paths, not the output paths, of the given packages.
+
+@item --root=@var{file}
+@itemx -r @var{file}
+@cindex GC roots, adding
+@cindex garbage collector roots, adding
+Make @var{file} a symlink to the result, and register it as a garbage
+collector root.
+
+Consequently, the results of this @command{guix build} invocation are
+protected from garbage collection until @var{file} is removed.  When that
+option is omitted, build results are eligible for garbage collection as soon
+as the build completes.  @xref{Aufruf von guix gc}, for more on GC roots.
+
+@item --log-file
+@cindex build logs, access
+Return the build log file names or URLs for the given
+@var{package-or-derivation}, or raise an error if build logs are missing.
+
+This works regardless of how packages or derivations are specified.  For
+instance, the following invocations are equivalent:
+
+@example
+guix build --log-file `guix build -d guile`
+guix build --log-file `guix build guile`
+guix build --log-file guile
+guix build --log-file -e '(@@ (gnu packages guile) guile-2.0)'
+@end example
+
+If a log is unavailable locally, and unless @code{--no-substitutes} is
+passed, the command looks for a corresponding log on one of the substitute
+servers (as specified with @code{--substitute-urls}.)
+
+So for instance, imagine you want to see the build log of GDB on MIPS, but
+you are actually on an @code{x86_64} machine:
+
+@example
+$ guix build --log-file gdb -s mips64el-linux
+https://hydra.gnu.org/log/@dots{}-gdb-7.10
+@end example
+
+You can freely access a huge library of build logs!
+@end table
+
+@node Fehlschläge beim Erstellen untersuchen
+@subsection Fehlschläge beim Erstellen untersuchen
+
+@cindex build failures, debugging
+When defining a new package (@pxref{Pakete definieren}), you will probably
+find yourself spending some time debugging and tweaking the build until it
+succeeds.  To do that, you need to operate the build commands yourself in an
+environment as close as possible to the one the build daemon uses.
+
+To that end, the first thing to do is to use the @option{--keep-failed} or
+@option{-K} option of @command{guix build}, which will keep the failed build
+tree in @file{/tmp} or whatever directory you specified as @code{TMPDIR}
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix build, @code{--keep-failed}}).
+
+From there on, you can @command{cd} to the failed build tree and source the
+@file{environment-variables} file, which contains all the environment
+variable definitions that were in place when the build failed.  So let's say
+you're debugging a build failure in package @code{foo}; a typical session
+would look like this:
+
+@example
+$ guix build foo -K
+@dots{} @i{build fails}
+$ cd /tmp/guix-build-foo.drv-0
+$ source ./environment-variables
+$ cd foo-1.2
+@end example
+
+Now, you can invoke commands as if you were the daemon (almost) and
+troubleshoot your build process.
+
+Sometimes it happens that, for example, a package's tests pass when you run
+them manually but they fail when the daemon runs them.  This can happen
+because the daemon runs builds in containers where, unlike in our
+environment above, network access is missing, @file{/bin/sh} does not exist,
+etc. (@pxref{Einrichten der Erstellungsumgebung}).
+
+In such cases, you may need to run inspect the build process from within a
+container similar to the one the build daemon creates:
+
+@example
+$ guix build -K foo
+@dots{}
+$ cd /tmp/guix-build-foo.drv-0
+$ guix environment --no-grafts -C foo --ad-hoc strace gdb
+[env]# source ./environment-variables
+[env]# cd foo-1.2
+@end example
+
+Here, @command{guix environment -C} creates a container and spawns a new
+shell in it (@pxref{Aufruf von guix environment}).  The @command{--ad-hoc
+strace gdb} part adds the @command{strace} and @command{gdb} commands to the
+container, which would may find handy while debugging.  The
+@option{--no-grafts} option makes sure we get the exact same environment,
+with ungrafted packages (@pxref{Sicherheitsaktualisierungen}, for more info on grafts).
+
+To get closer to a container like that used by the build daemon, we can
+remove @file{/bin/sh}:
+
+@example
+[env]# rm /bin/sh
+@end example
+
+(Don't worry, this is harmless: this is all happening in the throw-away
+container created by @command{guix environment}.)
+
+The @command{strace} command is probably not in the search path, but we can
+run:
+
+@example
+[env]# $GUIX_ENVIRONMENT/bin/strace -f -o log make check
+@end example
+
+In this way, not only you will have reproduced the environment variables the
+daemon uses, you will also be running the build process in a container
+similar to the one the daemon uses.
+
+
+@node Aufruf von guix edit
+@section Invoking @command{guix edit}
+
+@cindex @command{guix edit}
+@cindex package definition, editing
+So many packages, so many source files! The @command{guix edit} command
+facilitates the life of users and packagers by pointing their editor at the
+source file containing the definition of the specified packages.  For
+instance:
+
+@example
+guix edit gcc@@4.9 vim
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+launches the program specified in the @code{VISUAL} or in the @code{EDITOR}
+environment variable to view the recipe of GCC@tie{}4.9.3 and that of Vim.
+
+If you are using a Guix Git checkout (@pxref{Erstellung aus dem Git}), or have
+created your own packages on @code{GUIX_PACKAGE_PATH} (@pxref{Paketmodule}), you will be able to edit the package recipes.  In other cases,
+you will be able to examine the read-only recipes for packages currently in
+the store.
+
+
+@node Aufruf von guix download
+@section Invoking @command{guix download}
+
+@cindex @command{guix download}
+@cindex downloading package sources
+When writing a package definition, developers typically need to download a
+source tarball, compute its SHA256 hash, and write that hash in the package
+definition (@pxref{Pakete definieren}).  The @command{guix download} tool
+helps with this task: it downloads a file from the given URI, adds it to the
+store, and prints both its file name in the store and its SHA256 hash.
+
+The fact that the downloaded file is added to the store saves bandwidth:
+when the developer eventually tries to build the newly defined package with
+@command{guix build}, the source tarball will not have to be downloaded
+again because it is already in the store.  It is also a convenient way to
+temporarily stash files, which may be deleted eventually (@pxref{Aufruf von guix gc}).
+
+The @command{guix download} command supports the same URIs as used in
+package definitions.  In particular, it supports @code{mirror://} URIs.
+@code{https} URIs (HTTP over TLS) are supported @emph{provided} the Guile
+bindings for GnuTLS are available in the user's environment; when they are
+not available, an error is raised.  @xref{Guile Preparations, how to install
+the GnuTLS bindings for Guile,, gnutls-guile, GnuTLS-Guile}, for more
+information.
+
+@command{guix download} verifies HTTPS server certificates by loading the
+certificates of X.509 authorities from the directory pointed to by the
+@code{SSL_CERT_DIR} environment variable (@pxref{X.509-Zertifikate}),
+unless @option{--no-check-certificate} is used.
+
+The following options are available:
+
+@table @code
+@item --format=@var{fmt}
+@itemx -f @var{fmt}
+Write the hash in the format specified by @var{fmt}.  For more information
+on the valid values for @var{fmt}, @pxref{Aufruf von guix hash}.
+
+@item --no-check-certificate
+Do not validate the X.509 certificates of HTTPS servers.
+
+When using this option, you have @emph{absolutely no guarantee} that you are
+communicating with the authentic server responsible for the given URL, which
+makes you vulnerable to ``man-in-the-middle'' attacks.
+
+@item --output=@var{file}
+@itemx -o @var{file}
+Save the downloaded file to @var{file} instead of adding it to the store.
+@end table
+
+@node Aufruf von guix hash
+@section Invoking @command{guix hash}
+
+@cindex @command{guix hash}
+The @command{guix hash} command computes the SHA256 hash of a file.  It is
+primarily a convenience tool for anyone contributing to the distribution: it
+computes the cryptographic hash of a file, which can be used in the
+definition of a package (@pxref{Pakete definieren}).
+
+The general syntax is:
+
+@example
+guix hash @var{option} @var{file}
+@end example
+
+When @var{file} is @code{-} (a hyphen), @command{guix hash} computes the
+hash of data read from standard input.  @command{guix hash} has the
+following options:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item --format=@var{fmt}
+@itemx -f @var{fmt}
+Write the hash in the format specified by @var{fmt}.
+
+Supported formats: @code{nix-base32}, @code{base32}, @code{base16}
+(@code{hex} and @code{hexadecimal} can be used as well).
+
+If the @option{--format} option is not specified, @command{guix hash} will
+output the hash in @code{nix-base32}.  This representation is used in the
+definitions of packages.
+
+@item --recursive
+@itemx -r
+Compute the hash on @var{file} recursively.
+
+@c FIXME: Replace xref above with xref to an ``Archive'' section when
+@c it exists.
+In this case, the hash is computed on an archive containing @var{file},
+including its children if it is a directory.  Some of the metadata of
+@var{file} is part of the archive; for instance, when @var{file} is a
+regular file, the hash is different depending on whether @var{file} is
+executable or not.  Metadata such as time stamps has no impact on the hash
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix archive}).
+
+@item --exclude-vcs
+@itemx -x
+When combined with @option{--recursive}, exclude version control system
+directories (@file{.bzr}, @file{.git}, @file{.hg}, etc.)
+
+@vindex git-fetch
+As an example, here is how you would compute the hash of a Git checkout,
+which is useful when using the @code{git-fetch} method (@pxref{„origin“-Referenz}):
+
+@example
+$ git clone http://example.org/foo.git
+$ cd foo
+$ guix hash -rx .
+@end example
+@end table
+
+@node Aufruf von guix import
+@section Invoking @command{guix import}
+
+@cindex importing packages
+@cindex package import
+@cindex package conversion
+@cindex Invoking @command{guix import}
+The @command{guix import} command is useful for people who would like to add
+a package to the distribution with as little work as possible---a legitimate
+demand.  The command knows of a few repositories from which it can
+``import'' package metadata.  The result is a package definition, or a
+template thereof, in the format we know (@pxref{Pakete definieren}).
+
+The general syntax is:
+
+@example
+guix import @var{importer} @var{options}@dots{}
+@end example
+
+@var{importer} specifies the source from which to import package metadata,
+and @var{options} specifies a package identifier and other options specific
+to @var{importer}.  Currently, the available ``importers'' are:
+
+@table @code
+@item gnu
+Import metadata for the given GNU package.  This provides a template for the
+latest version of that GNU package, including the hash of its source
+tarball, and its canonical synopsis and description.
+
+Additional information such as the package dependencies and its license
+needs to be figured out manually.
+
+For example, the following command returns a package definition for
+GNU@tie{}Hello:
+
+@example
+guix import gnu hello
+@end example
+
+Specific command-line options are:
+
+@table @code
+@item --key-download=@var{policy}
+As for @code{guix refresh}, specify the policy to handle missing OpenPGP
+keys when verifying the package signature.  @xref{Aufruf von guix refresh,
+@code{--key-download}}.
+@end table
+
+@item pypi
+@cindex pypi
+Import metadata from the @uref{https://pypi.python.org/, Python Package
+Index}@footnote{This functionality requires Guile-JSON to be installed.
+@xref{Voraussetzungen}.}.  Information is taken from the JSON-formatted
+description available at @code{pypi.python.org} and usually includes all the
+relevant information, including package dependencies.  For maximum
+efficiency, it is recommended to install the @command{unzip} utility, so
+that the importer can unzip Python wheels and gather data from them.
+
+The command below imports metadata for the @code{itsdangerous} Python
+package:
+
+@example
+guix import pypi itsdangerous
+@end example
+
+@table @code
+@item --recursive
+@itemx -r
+Traverse the dependency graph of the given upstream package recursively and
+generate package expressions for all those packages that are not yet in
+Guix.
+@end table
+
+@item gem
+@cindex gem
+Import metadata from @uref{https://rubygems.org/, RubyGems}@footnote{This
+functionality requires Guile-JSON to be installed.  @xref{Voraussetzungen}.}.
+Information is taken from the JSON-formatted description available at
+@code{rubygems.org} and includes most relevant information, including
+runtime dependencies.  There are some caveats, however.  The metadata
+doesn't distinguish between synopses and descriptions, so the same string is
+used for both fields.  Additionally, the details of non-Ruby dependencies
+required to build native extensions is unavailable and left as an exercise
+to the packager.
+
+The command below imports metadata for the @code{rails} Ruby package:
+
+@example
+guix import gem rails
+@end example
+
+@table @code
+@item --recursive
+@itemx -r
+Traverse the dependency graph of the given upstream package recursively and
+generate package expressions for all those packages that are not yet in
+Guix.
+@end table
+
+@item cpan
+@cindex CPAN
+Import metadata from @uref{https://www.metacpan.org/,
+MetaCPAN}@footnote{This functionality requires Guile-JSON to be installed.
+@xref{Voraussetzungen}.}.  Information is taken from the JSON-formatted
+metadata provided through @uref{https://fastapi.metacpan.org/, MetaCPAN's
+API} and includes most relevant information, such as module dependencies.
+License information should be checked closely.  If Perl is available in the
+store, then the @code{corelist} utility will be used to filter core modules
+out of the list of dependencies.
+
+The command command below imports metadata for the @code{Acme::Boolean} Perl
+module:
+
+@example
+guix import cpan Acme::Boolean
+@end example
+
+@item cran
+@cindex CRAN
+@cindex Bioconductor
+Import metadata from @uref{https://cran.r-project.org/, CRAN}, the central
+repository for the @uref{http://r-project.org, GNU@tie{}R statistical and
+graphical environment}.
+
+Information is extracted from the @code{DESCRIPTION} file of the package.
+
+The command command below imports metadata for the @code{Cairo} R package:
+
+@example
+guix import cran Cairo
+@end example
+
+When @code{--recursive} is added, the importer will traverse the dependency
+graph of the given upstream package recursively and generate package
+expressions for all those packages that are not yet in Guix.
+
+When @code{--archive=bioconductor} is added, metadata is imported from
+@uref{https://www.bioconductor.org/, Bioconductor}, a repository of R
+packages for for the analysis and comprehension of high-throughput genomic
+data in bioinformatics.
+
+Information is extracted from the @code{DESCRIPTION} file of a package
+published on the web interface of the Bioconductor SVN repository.
+
+The command below imports metadata for the @code{GenomicRanges} R package:
+
+@example
+guix import cran --archive=bioconductor GenomicRanges
+@end example
+
+@item texlive
+@cindex TeX Live
+@cindex CTAN
+Import metadata from @uref{http://www.ctan.org/, CTAN}, the comprehensive
+TeX archive network for TeX packages that are part of the
+@uref{https://www.tug.org/texlive/, TeX Live distribution}.
+
+Information about the package is obtained through the XML API provided by
+CTAN, while the source code is downloaded from the SVN repository of the Tex
+Live project.  This is done because the CTAN does not keep versioned
+archives.
+
+The command command below imports metadata for the @code{fontspec} TeX
+package:
+
+@example
+guix import texlive fontspec
+@end example
+
+When @code{--archive=DIRECTORY} is added, the source code is downloaded not
+from the @file{latex} sub-directory of the @file{texmf-dist/source} tree in
+the TeX Live SVN repository, but from the specified sibling directory under
+the same root.
+
+The command below imports metadata for the @code{ifxetex} package from CTAN
+while fetching the sources from the directory @file{texmf/source/generic}:
+
+@example
+guix import texlive --archive=generic ifxetex
+@end example
+
+@item json
+@cindex JSON, import
+Import package metadata from a local JSON file@footnote{This functionality
+requires Guile-JSON to be installed.  @xref{Voraussetzungen}.}.  Consider the
+following example package definition in JSON format:
+
+@example
+@{
+  "name": "hello",
+  "version": "2.10",
+  "source": "mirror://gnu/hello/hello-2.10.tar.gz",
+  "build-system": "gnu",
+  "home-page": "https://www.gnu.org/software/hello/",
+  "synopsis": "Hello, GNU world: An example GNU package",
+  "description": "GNU Hello prints a greeting.",
+  "license": "GPL-3.0+",
+  "native-inputs": ["gcc@@6"]
+@}
+@end example
+
+The field names are the same as for the @code{<package>} record
+(@xref{Pakete definieren}).  References to other packages are provided as
+JSON lists of quoted package specification strings such as @code{guile} or
+@code{guile@@2.0}.
+
+The importer also supports a more explicit source definition using the
+common fields for @code{<origin>} records:
+
+@example
+@{
+  @dots{}
+  "source": @{
+    "method": "url-fetch",
+    "uri": "mirror://gnu/hello/hello-2.10.tar.gz",
+    "sha256": @{
+      "base32": "0ssi1wpaf7plaswqqjwigppsg5fyh99vdlb9kzl7c9lng89ndq1i"
+    @}
+  @}
+  @dots{}
+@}
+@end example
+
+The command below reads metadata from the JSON file @code{hello.json} and
+outputs a package expression:
+
+@example
+guix import json hello.json
+@end example
+
+@item nix
+Import metadata from a local copy of the source of the
+@uref{http://nixos.org/nixpkgs/, Nixpkgs distribution}@footnote{This relies
+on the @command{nix-instantiate} command of @uref{http://nixos.org/nix/,
+Nix}.}.  Package definitions in Nixpkgs are typically written in a mixture
+of Nix-language and Bash code.  This command only imports the high-level
+package structure that is written in the Nix language.  It normally includes
+all the basic fields of a package definition.
+
+When importing a GNU package, the synopsis and descriptions are replaced by
+their canonical upstream variant.
+
+Usually, you will first need to do:
+
+@example
+export NIX_REMOTE=daemon
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+so that @command{nix-instantiate} does not try to open the Nix database.
+
+As an example, the command below imports the package definition of
+LibreOffice (more precisely, it imports the definition of the package bound
+to the @code{libreoffice} top-level attribute):
+
+@example
+guix import nix ~/path/to/nixpkgs libreoffice
+@end example
+
+@item hackage
+@cindex hackage
+Import metadata from the Haskell community's central package archive
+@uref{https://hackage.haskell.org/, Hackage}.  Information is taken from
+Cabal files and includes all the relevant information, including package
+dependencies.
+
+Specific command-line options are:
+
+@table @code
+@item --stdin
+@itemx -s
+Read a Cabal file from standard input.
+@item --no-test-dependencies
+@itemx -t
+Do not include dependencies required only by the test suites.
+@item --cabal-environment=@var{alist}
+@itemx -e @var{alist}
+@var{alist} is a Scheme alist defining the environment in which the Cabal
+conditionals are evaluated.  The accepted keys are: @code{os}, @code{arch},
+@code{impl} and a string representing the name of a flag.  The value
+associated with a flag has to be either the symbol @code{true} or
+@code{false}.  The value associated with other keys has to conform to the
+Cabal file format definition.  The default value associated with the keys
+@code{os}, @code{arch} and @code{impl} is @samp{linux}, @samp{x86_64} and
+@samp{ghc}, respectively.
+@item --recursive
+@itemx -r
+Traverse the dependency graph of the given upstream package recursively and
+generate package expressions for all those packages that are not yet in
+Guix.
+@end table
+
+The command below imports metadata for the latest version of the @code{HTTP}
+Haskell package without including test dependencies and specifying the value
+of the flag @samp{network-uri} as @code{false}:
+
+@example
+guix import hackage -t -e "'((\"network-uri\" . false))" HTTP
+@end example
+
+A specific package version may optionally be specified by following the
+package name by an at-sign and a version number as in the following example:
+
+@example
+guix import hackage mtl@@2.1.3.1
+@end example
+
+@item stackage
+@cindex stackage
+The @code{stackage} importer is a wrapper around the @code{hackage} one.  It
+takes a package name, looks up the package version included in a long-term
+support (LTS) @uref{https://www.stackage.org, Stackage} release and uses the
+@code{hackage} importer to retrieve its metadata.  Note that it is up to you
+to select an LTS release compatible with the GHC compiler used by Guix.
+
+Specific command-line options are:
+
+@table @code
+@item --no-test-dependencies
+@itemx -t
+Do not include dependencies required only by the test suites.
+@item --lts-version=@var{version}
+@itemx -l @var{version}
+@var{version} is the desired LTS release version.  If omitted the latest
+release is used.
+@item --recursive
+@itemx -r
+Traverse the dependency graph of the given upstream package recursively and
+generate package expressions for all those packages that are not yet in
+Guix.
+@end table
+
+The command below imports metadata for the @code{HTTP} Haskell package
+included in the LTS Stackage release version 7.18:
+
+@example
+guix import stackage --lts-version=7.18 HTTP
+@end example
+
+@item elpa
+@cindex elpa
+Import metadata from an Emacs Lisp Package Archive (ELPA) package repository
+(@pxref{Packages,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
+
+Specific command-line options are:
+
+@table @code
+@item --archive=@var{repo}
+@itemx -a @var{repo}
+@var{repo} identifies the archive repository from which to retrieve the
+information.  Currently the supported repositories and their identifiers
+are:
+@itemize -
+@item
+@uref{http://elpa.gnu.org/packages, GNU}, selected by the @code{gnu}
+identifier.  This is the default.
+
+Packages from @code{elpa.gnu.org} are signed with one of the keys contained
+in the GnuPG keyring at @file{share/emacs/25.1/etc/package-keyring.gpg} (or
+similar) in the @code{emacs} package (@pxref{Package Installation, ELPA
+package signatures,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
+
+@item
+@uref{http://stable.melpa.org/packages, MELPA-Stable}, selected by the
+@code{melpa-stable} identifier.
+
+@item
+@uref{http://melpa.org/packages, MELPA}, selected by the @code{melpa}
+identifier.
+@end itemize
+
+@item --recursive
+@itemx -r
+Traverse the dependency graph of the given upstream package recursively and
+generate package expressions for all those packages that are not yet in
+Guix.
+@end table
+
+@item crate
+@cindex crate
+Import metadata from the crates.io Rust package repository
+@uref{https://crates.io, crates.io}.
+
+@item opam
+@cindex OPAM
+@cindex OCaml
+Import metadata from the @uref{https://opam.ocaml.org/, OPAM} package
+repository used by the OCaml community.
+@end table
+
+The structure of the @command{guix import} code is modular.  It would be
+useful to have more importers for other package formats, and your help is
+welcome here (@pxref{Mitwirken}).
+
+@node Aufruf von guix refresh
+@section Invoking @command{guix refresh}
+
+@cindex @command{guix refresh}
+The primary audience of the @command{guix refresh} command is developers of
+the GNU software distribution.  By default, it reports any packages provided
+by the distribution that are outdated compared to the latest upstream
+version, like this:
+
+@example
+$ guix refresh
+gnu/packages/gettext.scm:29:13: gettext would be upgraded from 0.18.1.1 to 0.18.2.1
+gnu/packages/glib.scm:77:12: glib would be upgraded from 2.34.3 to 2.37.0
+@end example
+
+Alternately, one can specify packages to consider, in which case a warning
+is emitted for packages that lack an updater:
+
+@example
+$ guix refresh coreutils guile guile-ssh
+gnu/packages/ssh.scm:205:2: warning: no updater for guile-ssh
+gnu/packages/guile.scm:136:12: guile would be upgraded from 2.0.12 to 2.0.13
+@end example
+
+@command{guix refresh} browses the upstream repository of each package and
+determines the highest version number of the releases therein.  The command
+knows how to update specific types of packages: GNU packages, ELPA packages,
+etc.---see the documentation for @option{--type} below.  There are many
+packages, though, for which it lacks a method to determine whether a new
+upstream release is available.  However, the mechanism is extensible, so
+feel free to get in touch with us to add a new method!
+
+Sometimes the upstream name differs from the package name used in Guix, and
+@command{guix refresh} needs a little help.  Most updaters honor the
+@code{upstream-name} property in package definitions, which can be used to
+that effect:
+
+@example
+(define-public network-manager
+  (package
+    (name "network-manager")
+    ;; @dots{}
+    (properties '((upstream-name . "NetworkManager")))))
+@end example
+
+When passed @code{--update}, it modifies distribution source files to update
+the version numbers and source tarball hashes of those package recipes
+(@pxref{Pakete definieren}).  This is achieved by downloading each package's
+latest source tarball and its associated OpenPGP signature, authenticating
+the downloaded tarball against its signature using @command{gpg}, and
+finally computing its hash.  When the public key used to sign the tarball is
+missing from the user's keyring, an attempt is made to automatically
+retrieve it from a public key server; when this is successful, the key is
+added to the user's keyring; otherwise, @command{guix refresh} reports an
+error.
+
+The following options are supported:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item --expression=@var{expr}
+@itemx -e @var{expr}
+Consider the package @var{expr} evaluates to.
+
+This is useful to precisely refer to a package, as in this example:
+
+@example
+guix refresh -l -e '(@@@@ (gnu packages commencement) glibc-final)'
+@end example
+
+This command lists the dependents of the ``final'' libc (essentially all the
+packages.)
+
+@item --update
+@itemx -u
+Update distribution source files (package recipes) in place.  This is
+usually run from a checkout of the Guix source tree (@pxref{Guix vor der Installation ausführen}):
+
+@example
+$ ./pre-inst-env guix refresh -s non-core -u
+@end example
+
+@xref{Pakete definieren}, for more information on package definitions.
+
+@item --select=[@var{subset}]
+@itemx -s @var{subset}
+Select all the packages in @var{subset}, one of @code{core} or
+@code{non-core}.
+
+The @code{core} subset refers to all the packages at the core of the
+distribution---i.e., packages that are used to build ``everything else''.
+This includes GCC, libc, Binutils, Bash, etc.  Usually, changing one of
+these packages in the distribution entails a rebuild of all the others.
+Thus, such updates are an inconvenience to users in terms of build time or
+bandwidth used to achieve the upgrade.
+
+The @code{non-core} subset refers to the remaining packages.  It is
+typically useful in cases where an update of the core packages would be
+inconvenient.
+
+@item --manifest=@var{Datei}
+@itemx -m @var{Datei}
+Select all the packages from the manifest in @var{file}. This is useful to
+check if any packages of the user manifest can be updated.
+
+@item --type=@var{updater}
+@itemx -t @var{updater}
+Select only packages handled by @var{updater} (may be a comma-separated list
+of updaters).  Currently, @var{updater} may be one of:
+
+@table @code
+@item gnu
+the updater for GNU packages;
+@item gnome
+the updater for GNOME packages;
+@item kde
+the updater for KDE packages;
+@item xorg
+the updater for X.org packages;
+@item kernel.org
+the updater for packages hosted on kernel.org;
+@item elpa
+the updater for @uref{http://elpa.gnu.org/, ELPA} packages;
+@item cran
+the updater for @uref{https://cran.r-project.org/, CRAN} packages;
+@item bioconductor
+the updater for @uref{https://www.bioconductor.org/, Bioconductor} R
+packages;
+@item cpan
+the updater for @uref{http://www.cpan.org/, CPAN} packages;
+@item pypi
+the updater for @uref{https://pypi.python.org, PyPI} packages.
+@item gem
+the updater for @uref{https://rubygems.org, RubyGems} packages.
+@item github
+the updater for @uref{https://github.com, GitHub} packages.
+@item hackage
+the updater for @uref{https://hackage.haskell.org, Hackage} packages.
+@item stackage
+the updater for @uref{https://www.stackage.org, Stackage} packages.
+@item crate
+the updater for @uref{https://crates.io, Crates} packages.
+@end table
+
+For instance, the following command only checks for updates of Emacs
+packages hosted at @code{elpa.gnu.org} and for updates of CRAN packages:
+
+@example
+$ guix refresh --type=elpa,cran
+gnu/packages/statistics.scm:819:13: r-testthat would be upgraded from 0.10.0 to 0.11.0
+gnu/packages/emacs.scm:856:13: emacs-auctex would be upgraded from 11.88.6 to 11.88.9
+@end example
+
+@end table
+
+In addition, @command{guix refresh} can be passed one or more package names,
+as in this example:
+
+@example
+$ ./pre-inst-env guix refresh -u emacs idutils gcc@@4.8
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The command above specifically updates the @code{emacs} and @code{idutils}
+packages.  The @code{--select} option would have no effect in this case.
+
+When considering whether to upgrade a package, it is sometimes convenient to
+know which packages would be affected by the upgrade and should be checked
+for compatibility.  For this the following option may be used when passing
+@command{guix refresh} one or more package names:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item --list-updaters
+@itemx -L
+List available updaters and exit (see @option{--type} above.)
+
+For each updater, display the fraction of packages it covers; at the end,
+display the fraction of packages covered by all these updaters.
+
+@item --list-dependent
+@itemx -l
+List top-level dependent packages that would need to be rebuilt as a result
+of upgrading one or more packages.
+
+@xref{Aufruf von guix graph, the @code{reverse-package} type of @command{guix
+graph}}, for information on how to visualize the list of dependents of a
+package.
+
+@end table
+
+Be aware that the @code{--list-dependent} option only @emph{approximates}
+the rebuilds that would be required as a result of an upgrade.  More
+rebuilds might be required under some circumstances.
+
+@example
+$ guix refresh --list-dependent flex
+Building the following 120 packages would ensure 213 dependent packages are rebuilt:
+hop@@2.4.0 geiser@@0.4 notmuch@@0.18 mu@@0.9.9.5 cflow@@1.4 idutils@@4.6 @dots{}
+@end example
+
+The command above lists a set of packages that could be built to check for
+compatibility with an upgraded @code{flex} package.
+
+The following options can be used to customize GnuPG operation:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item --gpg=@var{command}
+Use @var{command} as the GnuPG 2.x command.  @var{command} is searched for
+in @code{$PATH}.
+
+@item --keyring=@var{file}
+Use @var{file} as the keyring for upstream keys.  @var{file} must be in the
+@dfn{keybox format}.  Keybox files usually have a name ending in @file{.kbx}
+and the GNU@tie{}Privacy Guard (GPG) can manipulate these files
+(@pxref{kbxutil, @command{kbxutil},, gnupg, Using the GNU Privacy Guard},
+for information on a tool to manipulate keybox files).
+
+When this option is omitted, @command{guix refresh} uses
+@file{~/.config/guix/upstream/trustedkeys.kbx} as the keyring for upstream
+signing keys.  OpenPGP signatures are checked against keys from this
+keyring; missing keys are downloaded to this keyring as well (see
+@option{--key-download} below.)
+
+You can export keys from your default GPG keyring into a keybox file using
+commands like this one:
+
+@example
+gpg --export rms@@gnu.org | kbxutil --import-openpgp >> mykeyring.kbx
+@end example
+
+Likewise, you can fetch keys to a specific keybox file like this:
+
+@example
+gpg --no-default-keyring --keyring mykeyring.kbx \
+  --recv-keys @value{OPENPGP-SIGNING-KEY-ID}
+@end example
+
+@ref{GPG Configuration Options, @option{--keyring},, gnupg, Using the GNU
+Privacy Guard}, for more information on GPG's @option{--keyring} option.
+
+@item --key-download=@var{policy}
+Handle missing OpenPGP keys according to @var{policy}, which may be one of:
+
+@table @code
+@item always
+Always download missing OpenPGP keys from the key server, and add them to
+the user's GnuPG keyring.
+
+@item never
+Never try to download missing OpenPGP keys.  Instead just bail out.
+
+@item interactive
+When a package signed with an unknown OpenPGP key is encountered, ask the
+user whether to download it or not.  This is the default behavior.
+@end table
+
+@item --key-server=@var{host}
+Use @var{host} as the OpenPGP key server when importing a public key.
+
+@end table
+
+The @code{github} updater uses the @uref{https://developer.github.com/v3/,
+GitHub API} to query for new releases.  When used repeatedly e.g.@: when
+refreshing all packages, GitHub will eventually refuse to answer any further
+API requests.  By default 60 API requests per hour are allowed, and a full
+refresh on all GitHub packages in Guix requires more than this.
+Authentication with GitHub through the use of an API token alleviates these
+limits.  To use an API token, set the environment variable
+@code{GUIX_GITHUB_TOKEN} to a token procured from
+@uref{https://github.com/settings/tokens} or otherwise.
+
+
+@node Aufruf von guix lint
+@section Invoking @command{guix lint}
+
+@cindex @command{guix lint}
+@cindex package, checking for errors
+The @command{guix lint} command is meant to help package developers avoid
+common errors and use a consistent style.  It runs a number of checks on a
+given set of packages in order to find common mistakes in their
+definitions.  Available @dfn{checkers} include (see @code{--list-checkers}
+for a complete list):
+
+@table @code
+@item synopsis
+@itemx description
+Validate certain typographical and stylistic rules about package
+descriptions and synopses.
+
+@item inputs-should-be-native
+Identify inputs that should most likely be native inputs.
+
+@item source
+@itemx home-page
+@itemx mirror-url
+@itemx source-file-name
+Probe @code{home-page} and @code{source} URLs and report those that are
+invalid.  Suggest a @code{mirror://} URL when applicable.  Check that the
+source file name is meaningful, e.g.@: is not just a version number or
+``git-checkout'', without a declared @code{file-name} (@pxref{„origin“-Referenz}).
+
+@item cve
+@cindex security vulnerabilities
+@cindex CVE, Common Vulnerabilities and Exposures
+Report known vulnerabilities found in the Common Vulnerabilities and
+Exposures (CVE) databases of the current and past year
+@uref{https://nvd.nist.gov/download.cfm#CVE_FEED, published by the US NIST}.
+
+To view information about a particular vulnerability, visit pages such as:
+
+@itemize
+@item
+@indicateurl{https://web.nvd.nist.gov/view/vuln/detail?vulnId=CVE-YYYY-ABCD}
+@item
+@indicateurl{https://cve.mitre.org/cgi-bin/cvename.cgi?name=CVE-YYYY-ABCD}
+@end itemize
+
+@noindent
+where @code{CVE-YYYY-ABCD} is the CVE identifier---e.g.,
+@code{CVE-2015-7554}.
+
+Package developers can specify in package recipes the
+@uref{https://nvd.nist.gov/cpe.cfm,Common Platform Enumeration (CPE)} name
+and version of the package when they differ from the name or version that
+Guix uses, as in this example:
+
+@example
+(package
+  (name "grub")
+  ;; @dots{}
+  ;; CPE calls this package "grub2".
+  (properties '((cpe-name . "grub2")
+                (cpe-version . "2.3")))
+@end example
+
+@c See <http://www.openwall.com/lists/oss-security/2017/03/15/3>.
+Some entries in the CVE database do not specify which version of a package
+they apply to, and would thus ``stick around'' forever.  Package developers
+who found CVE alerts and verified they can be ignored can declare them as in
+this example:
+
+@example
+(package
+  (name "t1lib")
+  ;; @dots{}
+  ;; These CVEs no longer apply and can be safely ignored.
+  (properties `((lint-hidden-cve . ("CVE-2011-0433"
+                                    "CVE-2011-1553"
+                                    "CVE-2011-1554"
+                                    "CVE-2011-5244")))))
+@end example
+
+@item formatting
+Warn about obvious source code formatting issues: trailing white space, use
+of tabulations, etc.
+@end table
+
+The general syntax is:
+
+@example
+guix lint @var{options} @var{package}@dots{}
+@end example
+
+If no package is given on the command line, then all packages are checked.
+The @var{options} may be zero or more of the following:
+
+@table @code
+@item --list-checkers
+@itemx -l
+List and describe all the available checkers that will be run on packages
+and exit.
+
+@item --checkers
+@itemx -c
+Only enable the checkers specified in a comma-separated list using the names
+returned by @code{--list-checkers}.
+
+@end table
+
+@node Aufruf von guix size
+@section Invoking @command{guix size}
+
+@cindex size
+@cindex package size
+@cindex Abschluss
+@cindex @command{guix size}
+The @command{guix size} command helps package developers profile the disk
+usage of packages.  It is easy to overlook the impact of an additional
+dependency added to a package, or the impact of using a single output for a
+package that could easily be split (@pxref{Pakete mit mehreren Ausgaben.}).  Such are the typical issues that @command{guix size} can
+highlight.
+
+The command can be passed one or more package specifications such as
+@code{gcc@@4.8} or @code{guile:debug}, or a file name in the store.
+Consider this example:
+
+@example
+$ guix size coreutils
+store item                               total    self
+/gnu/store/@dots{}-gcc-5.5.0-lib           60.4    30.1  38.1%
+/gnu/store/@dots{}-glibc-2.27              30.3    28.8  36.6%
+/gnu/store/@dots{}-coreutils-8.28          78.9    15.0  19.0%
+/gnu/store/@dots{}-gmp-6.1.2               63.1     2.7   3.4%
+/gnu/store/@dots{}-bash-static-4.4.12       1.5     1.5   1.9%
+/gnu/store/@dots{}-acl-2.2.52              61.1     0.4   0.5%
+/gnu/store/@dots{}-attr-2.4.47             60.6     0.2   0.3%
+/gnu/store/@dots{}-libcap-2.25             60.5     0.2   0.2%
+total: 78.9 MiB
+@end example
+
+@cindex Abschluss
+The store items listed here constitute the @dfn{transitive closure} of
+Coreutils---i.e., Coreutils and all its dependencies, recursively---as would
+be returned by:
+
+@example
+$ guix gc -R /gnu/store/@dots{}-coreutils-8.23
+@end example
+
+Here the output shows three columns next to store items.  The first column,
+labeled ``total'', shows the size in mebibytes (MiB) of the closure of the
+store item---that is, its own size plus the size of all its dependencies.
+The next column, labeled ``self'', shows the size of the item itself.  The
+last column shows the ratio of the size of the item itself to the space
+occupied by all the items listed here.
+
+In this example, we see that the closure of Coreutils weighs in at
+79@tie{}MiB, most of which is taken by libc and GCC's run-time support
+libraries.  (That libc and GCC's libraries represent a large fraction of the
+closure is not a problem @i{per se} because they are always available on the
+system anyway.)
+
+When the package(s) passed to @command{guix size} are available in the
+store@footnote{More precisely, @command{guix size} looks for the
+@emph{ungrafted} variant of the given package(s), as returned by @code{guix
+build @var{package} --no-grafts}.  @xref{Sicherheitsaktualisierungen}, for information
+on grafts.}, @command{guix size} queries the daemon to determine its
+dependencies, and measures its size in the store, similar to @command{du -ms
+--apparent-size} (@pxref{du invocation,,, coreutils, GNU Coreutils}).
+
+When the given packages are @emph{not} in the store, @command{guix size}
+reports information based on the available substitutes
+(@pxref{Substitute}).  This makes it possible it to profile disk usage of
+store items that are not even on disk, only available remotely.
+
+You can also specify several package names:
+
+@example
+$ guix size coreutils grep sed bash
+store item                               total    self
+/gnu/store/@dots{}-coreutils-8.24          77.8    13.8  13.4%
+/gnu/store/@dots{}-grep-2.22               73.1     0.8   0.8%
+/gnu/store/@dots{}-bash-4.3.42             72.3     4.7   4.6%
+/gnu/store/@dots{}-readline-6.3            67.6     1.2   1.2%
+@dots{}
+total: 102.3 MiB
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+In this example we see that the combination of the four packages takes
+102.3@tie{}MiB in total, which is much less than the sum of each closure
+since they have a lot of dependencies in common.
+
+The available options are:
+
+@table @option
+
+@item --substitute-urls=@var{URLs}
+Use substitute information from @var{urls}.  @xref{client-substitute-urls,
+the same option for @code{guix build}}.
+
+@item --sort=@var{key}
+Sort lines according to @var{key}, one of the following options:
+
+@table @code
+@item self
+the size of each item (the default);
+@item Abschluss
+the total size of the item's closure.
+@end table
+
+@item --map-file=@var{file}
+Write a graphical map of disk usage in PNG format to @var{file}.
+
+For the example above, the map looks like this:
+
+@image{images/coreutils-size-map,5in,, map of Coreutils disk usage produced
+by @command{guix size}}
+
+This option requires that
+@uref{http://wingolog.org/software/guile-charting/, Guile-Charting} be
+installed and visible in Guile's module search path.  When that is not the
+case, @command{guix size} fails as it tries to load it.
+
+@item --system=@var{System}
+@itemx -s @var{system}
+Consider packages for @var{system}---e.g., @code{x86_64-linux}.
+
+@end table
+
+@node Aufruf von guix graph
+@section Invoking @command{guix graph}
+
+@cindex DAG
+@cindex @command{guix graph}
+@cindex Paketabhängigkeiten
+Packages and their dependencies form a @dfn{graph}, specifically a directed
+acyclic graph (DAG).  It can quickly become difficult to have a mental model
+of the package DAG, so the @command{guix graph} command provides a visual
+representation of the DAG.  By default, @command{guix graph} emits a DAG
+representation in the input format of @uref{http://www.graphviz.org/,
+Graphviz}, so its output can be passed directly to the @command{dot} command
+of Graphviz.  It can also emit an HTML page with embedded JavaScript code to
+display a ``chord diagram'' in a Web browser, using the
+@uref{https://d3js.org/, d3.js} library, or emit Cypher queries to construct
+a graph in a graph database supporting the @uref{http://www.opencypher.org/,
+openCypher} query language.  The general syntax is:
+
+@example
+guix graph @var{options} @var{package}@dots{}
+@end example
+
+For example, the following command generates a PDF file representing the
+package DAG for the GNU@tie{}Core Utilities, showing its build-time
+dependencies:
+
+@example
+guix graph coreutils | dot -Tpdf > dag.pdf
+@end example
+
+The output looks like this:
+
+@image{images/coreutils-graph,2in,,Dependency graph of the GNU Coreutils}
+
+Nice little graph, no?
+
+But there is more than one graph! The one above is concise: it is the graph
+of package objects, omitting implicit inputs such as GCC, libc, grep, etc.
+It is often useful to have such a concise graph, but sometimes one may want
+to see more details.  @command{guix graph} supports several types of graphs,
+allowing you to choose the level of detail:
+
+@table @code
+@item package
+This is the default type used in the example above.  It shows the DAG of
+package objects, excluding implicit dependencies.  It is concise, but
+filters out many details.
+
+@item reverse-package
+This shows the @emph{reverse} DAG of packages.  For example:
+
+@example
+guix graph --type=reverse-package ocaml
+@end example
+
+...@: yields the graph of packages that depend on OCaml.
+
+Note that for core packages this can yield huge graphs.  If all you want is
+to know the number of packages that depend on a given package, use
+@command{guix refresh --list-dependent} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix refresh,
+@option{--list-dependent}}).
+
+@item bag-emerged
+This is the package DAG, @emph{including} implicit inputs.
+
+For instance, the following command:
+
+@example
+guix graph --type=bag-emerged coreutils | dot -Tpdf > dag.pdf
+@end example
+
+...@: yields this bigger graph:
+
+@image{images/coreutils-bag-graph,,5in,Detailed dependency graph of the GNU
+Coreutils}
+
+At the bottom of the graph, we see all the implicit inputs of
+@var{gnu-build-system} (@pxref{Erstellungssysteme, @code{gnu-build-system}}).
+
+Now, note that the dependencies of these implicit inputs---that is, the
+@dfn{bootstrap dependencies} (@pxref{Bootstrapping})---are not shown here,
+for conciseness.
+
+@item bag
+Similar to @code{bag-emerged}, but this time including all the bootstrap
+dependencies.
+
+@item bag-with-origins
+Similar to @code{bag}, but also showing origins and their dependencies.
+
+@item Ableitung
+This is the most detailed representation: It shows the DAG of derivations
+(@pxref{Ableitungen}) and plain store items.  Compared to the above
+representation, many additional nodes are visible, including build scripts,
+patches, Guile modules, etc.
+
+For this type of graph, it is also possible to pass a @file{.drv} file name
+instead of a package name, as in:
+
+@example
+guix graph -t derivation `guix system build -d my-config.scm`
+@end example
+
+@item module
+This is the graph of @dfn{package modules} (@pxref{Paketmodule}).  For
+example, the following command shows the graph for the package module that
+defines the @code{guile} package:
+
+@example
+guix graph -t module guile | dot -Tpdf > module-graph.pdf
+@end example
+@end table
+
+All the types above correspond to @emph{build-time dependencies}.  The
+following graph type represents the @emph{run-time dependencies}:
+
+@table @code
+@item references
+This is the graph of @dfn{references} of a package output, as returned by
+@command{guix gc --references} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix gc}).
+
+If the given package output is not available in the store, @command{guix
+graph} attempts to obtain dependency information from substitutes.
+
+Here you can also pass a store file name instead of a package name.  For
+example, the command below produces the reference graph of your profile
+(which can be big!):
+
+@example
+guix graph -t references `readlink -f ~/.guix-profile`
+@end example
+
+@item referrers
+This is the graph of the @dfn{referrers} of a store item, as returned by
+@command{guix gc --referrers} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix gc}).
+
+This relies exclusively on local information from your store.  For instance,
+let us suppose that the current Inkscape is available in 10 profiles on your
+machine; @command{guix graph -t referrers inkscape} will show a graph rooted
+at Inkscape and with those 10 profiles linked to it.
+
+It can help determine what is preventing a store item from being garbage
+collected.
+
+@end table
+
+The available options are the following:
+
+@table @option
+@item --type=@var{type}
+@itemx -t @var{type}
+Produce a graph output of @var{type}, where @var{type} must be one of the
+values listed above.
+
+@item --list-types
+List the supported graph types.
+
+@item --backend=@var{backend}
+@itemx -b @var{backend}
+Produce a graph using the selected @var{backend}.
+
+@item --list-backends
+List the supported graph backends.
+
+Currently, the available backends are Graphviz and d3.js.
+
+@item --expression=@var{expr}
+@itemx -e @var{expr}
+Consider the package @var{expr} evaluates to.
+
+This is useful to precisely refer to a package, as in this example:
+
+@example
+guix graph -e '(@@@@ (gnu packages commencement) gnu-make-final)'
+@end example
+
+@item --system=@var{System}
+@itemx -s @var{system}
+Display the graph for @var{system}---e.g., @code{i686-linux}.
+
+The package dependency graph is largely architecture-independent, but there
+are some architecture-dependent bits that this option allows you to
+visualize.
+@end table
+
+
+@node Aufruf von guix environment
+@section Invoking @command{guix environment}
+
+@cindex reproducible build environments
+@cindex development environments
+@cindex @command{guix environment}
+@cindex environment, package build environment
+The purpose of @command{guix environment} is to assist hackers in creating
+reproducible development environments without polluting their package
+profile.  The @command{guix environment} tool takes one or more packages,
+builds all of their inputs, and creates a shell environment to use them.
+
+The general syntax is:
+
+@example
+guix environment @var{options} @var{package}@dots{}
+@end example
+
+The following example spawns a new shell set up for the development of
+GNU@tie{}Guile:
+
+@example
+guix environment guile
+@end example
+
+If the needed dependencies are not built yet, @command{guix environment}
+automatically builds them.  The environment of the new shell is an augmented
+version of the environment that @command{guix environment} was run in.  It
+contains the necessary search paths for building the given package added to
+the existing environment variables.  To create a ``pure'' environment, in
+which the original environment variables have been unset, use the
+@code{--pure} option@footnote{Users sometimes wrongfully augment environment
+variables such as @code{PATH} in their @file{~/.bashrc} file.  As a
+consequence, when @code{guix environment} launches it, Bash may read
+@file{~/.bashrc}, thereby introducing ``impurities'' in these environment
+variables.  It is an error to define such environment variables in
+@file{.bashrc}; instead, they should be defined in @file{.bash_profile},
+which is sourced only by log-in shells.  @xref{Bash Startup Files,,, bash,
+The GNU Bash Reference Manual}, for details on Bash start-up files.}.
+
+@vindex GUIX_ENVIRONMENT
+@command{guix environment} defines the @code{GUIX_ENVIRONMENT} variable in
+the shell it spawns; its value is the file name of the profile of this
+environment.  This allows users to, say, define a specific prompt for
+development environments in their @file{.bashrc} (@pxref{Bash Startup
+Files,,, bash, The GNU Bash Reference Manual}):
+
+@example
+if [ -n "$GUIX_ENVIRONMENT" ]
+then
+    export PS1="\u@@\h \w [dev]\$ "
+fi
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+...@: or to browse the profile:
+
+@example
+$ ls "$GUIX_ENVIRONMENT/bin"
+@end example
+
+Additionally, more than one package may be specified, in which case the
+union of the inputs for the given packages are used.  For example, the
+command below spawns a shell where all of the dependencies of both Guile and
+Emacs are available:
+
+@example
+guix environment guile emacs
+@end example
+
+Sometimes an interactive shell session is not desired.  An arbitrary command
+may be invoked by placing the @code{--} token to separate the command from
+the rest of the arguments:
+
+@example
+guix environment guile -- make -j4
+@end example
+
+In other situations, it is more convenient to specify the list of packages
+needed in the environment.  For example, the following command runs
+@command{python} from an environment containing Python@tie{}2.7 and NumPy:
+
+@example
+guix environment --ad-hoc python2-numpy python-2.7 -- python
+@end example
+
+Furthermore, one might want the dependencies of a package and also some
+additional packages that are not build-time or runtime dependencies, but are
+useful when developing nonetheless.  Because of this, the @code{--ad-hoc}
+flag is positional.  Packages appearing before @code{--ad-hoc} are
+interpreted as packages whose dependencies will be added to the
+environment.  Packages appearing after are interpreted as packages that will
+be added to the environment directly.  For example, the following command
+creates a Guix development environment that additionally includes Git and
+strace:
+
+@example
+guix environment guix --ad-hoc git strace
+@end example
+
+Sometimes it is desirable to isolate the environment as much as possible,
+for maximal purity and reproducibility.  In particular, when using Guix on a
+host distro that is not GuixSD, it is desirable to prevent access to
+@file{/usr/bin} and other system-wide resources from the development
+environment.  For example, the following command spawns a Guile REPL in a
+``container'' where only the store and the current working directory are
+mounted:
+
+@example
+guix environment --ad-hoc --container guile -- guile
+@end example
+
+@quotation Anmerkung
+The @code{--container} option requires Linux-libre 3.19 or newer.
+@end quotation
+
+The available options are summarized below.
+
+@table @code
+@item --root=@var{file}
+@itemx -r @var{file}
+@cindex persistent environment
+@cindex garbage collector root, for environments
+Make @var{file} a symlink to the profile for this environment, and register
+it as a garbage collector root.
+
+This is useful if you want to protect your environment from garbage
+collection, to make it ``persistent''.
+
+When this option is omitted, the environment is protected from garbage
+collection only for the duration of the @command{guix environment} session.
+This means that next time you recreate the same environment, you could have
+to rebuild or re-download packages.  @xref{Aufruf von guix gc}, for more on GC
+roots.
+
+@item --expression=@var{expr}
+@itemx -e @var{expr}
+Create an environment for the package or list of packages that @var{expr}
+evaluates to.
+
+For example, running:
+
+@example
+guix environment -e '(@@ (gnu packages maths) petsc-openmpi)'
+@end example
+
+starts a shell with the environment for this specific variant of the PETSc
+package.
+
+Running:
+
+@example
+guix environment --ad-hoc -e '(@@ (gnu) %base-packages)'
+@end example
+
+starts a shell with all the GuixSD base packages available.
+
+The above commands only use the default output of the given packages.  To
+select other outputs, two element tuples can be specified:
+
+@example
+guix environment --ad-hoc -e '(list (@@ (gnu packages bash) bash) "include")'
+@end example
+
+@item --load=@var{file}
+@itemx -l @var{file}
+Create an environment for the package or list of packages that the code
+within @var{file} evaluates to.
+
+Zum Beispiel könnte die @var{Datei} eine Definition wie diese enthalten
+(@pxref{Pakete definieren}):
+
+@example
+@verbatiminclude environment-gdb.scm
+@end example
+
+@item --manifest=@var{Datei}
+@itemx -m @var{Datei}
+Create an environment for the packages contained in the manifest object
+returned by the Scheme code in @var{file}.
+
+This is similar to the same-named option in @command{guix package}
+(@pxref{profile-manifest, @option{--manifest}}) and uses the same manifest
+files.
+
+@item --ad-hoc
+Include all specified packages in the resulting environment, as if an @i{ad
+hoc} package were defined with them as inputs.  This option is useful for
+quickly creating an environment without having to write a package expression
+to contain the desired inputs.
+
+For instance, the command:
+
+@example
+guix environment --ad-hoc guile guile-sdl -- guile
+@end example
+
+runs @command{guile} in an environment where Guile and Guile-SDL are
+available.
+
+Note that this example implicitly asks for the default output of
+@code{guile} and @code{guile-sdl}, but it is possible to ask for a specific
+output---e.g., @code{glib:bin} asks for the @code{bin} output of @code{glib}
+(@pxref{Pakete mit mehreren Ausgaben.}).
+
+This option may be composed with the default behavior of @command{guix
+environment}.  Packages appearing before @code{--ad-hoc} are interpreted as
+packages whose dependencies will be added to the environment, the default
+behavior.  Packages appearing after are interpreted as packages that will be
+added to the environment directly.
+
+@item --pure
+Unset existing environment variables when building the new environment.
+This has the effect of creating an environment in which search paths only
+contain package inputs.
+
+@item --search-paths
+Display the environment variable definitions that make up the environment.
+
+@item --system=@var{System}
+@itemx -s @var{system}
+Attempt to build for @var{system}---e.g., @code{i686-linux}.
+
+@item --container
+@itemx -C
+@cindex container
+Run @var{command} within an isolated container.  The current working
+directory outside the container is mapped inside the container.
+Additionally, unless overridden with @code{--user}, a dummy home directory
+is created that matches the current user's home directory, and
+@file{/etc/passwd} is configured accordingly.  The spawned process runs as
+the current user outside the container, but has root privileges in the
+context of the container.
+
+@item --network
+@itemx -N
+For containers, share the network namespace with the host system.
+Containers created without this flag only have access to the loopback
+device.
+
+@item --link-profile
+@itemx -P
+For containers, link the environment profile to @file{~/.guix-profile}
+within the container.  This is equivalent to running the command @command{ln
+-s $GUIX_ENVIRONMENT ~/.guix-profile} within the container.  Linking will
+fail and abort the environment if the directory already exists, which will
+certainly be the case if @command{guix environment} was invoked in the
+user's home directory.
+
+Certain packages are configured to look in @code{~/.guix-profile} for
+configuration files and data;@footnote{For example, the @code{fontconfig}
+package inspects @file{~/.guix-profile/share/fonts} for additional fonts.}
+@code{--link-profile} allows these programs to behave as expected within the
+environment.
+
+@item --user=@var{user}
+@itemx -u @var{user}
+For containers, use the username @var{user} in place of the current user.
+The generated @file{/etc/passwd} entry within the container will contain the
+name @var{user}; the home directory will be @file{/home/USER}; and no user
+GECOS data will be copied.  @var{user} need not exist on the system.
+
+Additionally, any shared or exposed path (see @code{--share} and
+@code{--expose} respectively) whose target is within the current user's home
+directory will be remapped relative to @file{/home/USER}; this includes the
+automatic mapping of the current working directory.
+
+@example
+# will expose paths as /home/foo/wd, /home/foo/test, and /home/foo/target
+cd $HOME/wd
+guix environment --container --user=foo \
+     --expose=$HOME/test \
+     --expose=/tmp/target=$HOME/target
+@end example
+
+While this will limit the leaking of user identity through home paths and
+each of the user fields, this is only one useful component of a broader
+privacy/anonymity solution---not one in and of itself.
+
+@item --expose=@var{source}[=@var{target}]
+For containers, expose the file system @var{source} from the host system as
+the read-only file system @var{target} within the container.  If
+@var{target} is not specified, @var{source} is used as the target mount
+point in the container.
+
+The example below spawns a Guile REPL in a container in which the user's
+home directory is accessible read-only via the @file{/exchange} directory:
+
+@example
+guix environment --container --expose=$HOME=/exchange --ad-hoc guile -- guile
+@end example
+
+@item --share=@var{source}[=@var{target}]
+For containers, share the file system @var{source} from the host system as
+the writable file system @var{target} within the container.  If @var{target}
+is not specified, @var{source} is used as the target mount point in the
+container.
+
+The example below spawns a Guile REPL in a container in which the user's
+home directory is accessible for both reading and writing via the
+@file{/exchange} directory:
+
+@example
+guix environment --container --share=$HOME=/exchange --ad-hoc guile -- guile
+@end example
+@end table
+
+@command{guix environment} also supports all of the common build options
+that @command{guix build} supports (@pxref{Gemeinsame Erstellungsoptionen}).
+
+
+@node Aufruf von guix publish
+@section Invoking @command{guix publish}
+
+@cindex @command{guix publish}
+The purpose of @command{guix publish} is to enable users to easily share
+their store with others, who can then use it as a substitute server
+(@pxref{Substitute}).
+
+When @command{guix publish} runs, it spawns an HTTP server which allows
+anyone with network access to obtain substitutes from it.  This means that
+any machine running Guix can also act as if it were a build farm, since the
+HTTP interface is compatible with Hydra, the software behind the
+@code{hydra.gnu.org} build farm.
+
+For security, each substitute is signed, allowing recipients to check their
+authenticity and integrity (@pxref{Substitute}).  Because @command{guix
+publish} uses the signing key of the system, which is only readable by the
+system administrator, it must be started as root; the @code{--user} option
+makes it drop root privileges early on.
+
+The signing key pair must be generated before @command{guix publish} is
+launched, using @command{guix archive --generate-key} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix archive}).
+
+The general syntax is:
+
+@example
+guix publish @var{options}@dots{}
+@end example
+
+Running @command{guix publish} without any additional arguments will spawn
+an HTTP server on port 8080:
+
+@example
+guix publish
+@end example
+
+Once a publishing server has been authorized (@pxref{Aufruf von guix archive}), the daemon may download substitutes from it:
+
+@example
+guix-daemon --substitute-urls=http://example.org:8080
+@end example
+
+By default, @command{guix publish} compresses archives on the fly as it
+serves them.  This ``on-the-fly'' mode is convenient in that it requires no
+setup and is immediately available.  However, when serving lots of clients,
+we recommend using the @option{--cache} option, which enables caching of the
+archives before they are sent to clients---see below for details.  The
+@command{guix weather} command provides a handy way to check what a server
+provides (@pxref{Aufruf von guix weather}).
+
+As a bonus, @command{guix publish} also serves as a content-addressed mirror
+for source files referenced in @code{origin} records (@pxref{„origin“-Referenz}).  For instance, assuming @command{guix publish} is running on
+@code{example.org}, the following URL returns the raw
+@file{hello-2.10.tar.gz} file with the given SHA256 hash (represented in
+@code{nix-base32} format, @pxref{Aufruf von guix hash}):
+
+@example
+http://example.org/file/hello-2.10.tar.gz/sha256/0ssi1@dots{}ndq1i
+@end example
+
+Obviously, these URLs only work for files that are in the store; in other
+cases, they return 404 (``Not Found'').
+
+@cindex build logs, publication
+Build logs are available from @code{/log} URLs like:
+
+@example
+http://example.org/log/gwspk@dots{}-guile-2.2.3
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+When @command{guix-daemon} is configured to save compressed build logs, as
+is the case by default (@pxref{Aufruf des guix-daemon}), @code{/log} URLs
+return the compressed log as-is, with an appropriate @code{Content-Type}
+and/or @code{Content-Encoding} header.  We recommend running
+@command{guix-daemon} with @code{--log-compression=gzip} since Web browsers
+can automatically decompress it, which is not the case with bzip2
+compression.
+
+The following options are available:
+
+@table @code
+@item --port=@var{port}
+@itemx -p @var{port}
+Listen for HTTP requests on @var{port}.
+
+@item --listen=@var{host}
+Listen on the network interface for @var{host}.  The default is to accept
+connections from any interface.
+
+@item --user=@var{user}
+@itemx -u @var{user}
+Change privileges to @var{user} as soon as possible---i.e., once the server
+socket is open and the signing key has been read.
+
+@item --compression[=@var{level}]
+@itemx -C [@var{level}]
+Compress data using the given @var{level}.  When @var{level} is zero,
+disable compression.  The range 1 to 9 corresponds to different gzip
+compression levels: 1 is the fastest, and 9 is the best (CPU-intensive).
+The default is 3.
+
+Unless @option{--cache} is used, compression occurs on the fly and the
+compressed streams are not cached.  Thus, to reduce load on the machine that
+runs @command{guix publish}, it may be a good idea to choose a low
+compression level, to run @command{guix publish} behind a caching proxy, or
+to use @option{--cache}.  Using @option{--cache} has the advantage that it
+allows @command{guix publish} to add @code{Content-Length} HTTP header to
+its responses.
+
+@item --cache=@var{directory}
+@itemx -c @var{directory}
+Cache archives and meta-data (@code{.narinfo} URLs) to @var{directory} and
+only serve archives that are in cache.
+
+When this option is omitted, archives and meta-data are created on-the-fly.
+This can reduce the available bandwidth, especially when compression is
+enabled, since this may become CPU-bound.  Another drawback of the default
+mode is that the length of archives is not known in advance, so
+@command{guix publish} does not add a @code{Content-Length} HTTP header to
+its responses, which in turn prevents clients from knowing the amount of
+data being downloaded.
+
+Conversely, when @option{--cache} is used, the first request for a store
+item (@i{via} a @code{.narinfo} URL) returns 404 and triggers a background
+process to @dfn{bake} the archive---computing its @code{.narinfo} and
+compressing the archive, if needed.  Once the archive is cached in
+@var{directory}, subsequent requests succeed and are served directly from
+the cache, which guarantees that clients get the best possible bandwidth.
+
+The ``baking'' process is performed by worker threads.  By default, one
+thread per CPU core is created, but this can be customized.  See
+@option{--workers} below.
+
+When @option{--ttl} is used, cached entries are automatically deleted when
+they have expired.
+
+@item --workers=@var{N}
+When @option{--cache} is used, request the allocation of @var{N} worker
+threads to ``bake'' archives.
+
+@item --ttl=@var{ttl}
+Produce @code{Cache-Control} HTTP headers that advertise a time-to-live
+(TTL) of @var{ttl}.  @var{ttl} must denote a duration: @code{5d} means 5
+days, @code{1m} means 1 month, and so on.
+
+This allows the user's Guix to keep substitute information in cache for
+@var{ttl}.  However, note that @code{guix publish} does not itself guarantee
+that the store items it provides will indeed remain available for as long as
+@var{ttl}.
+
+Additionally, when @option{--cache} is used, cached entries that have not
+been accessed for @var{ttl} and that no longer have a corresponding item in
+the store, may be deleted.
+
+@item --nar-path=@var{path}
+Use @var{path} as the prefix for the URLs of ``nar'' files (@pxref{Aufruf von guix archive, normalized archives}).
+
+By default, nars are served at a URL such as
+@code{/nar/gzip/@dots{}-coreutils-8.25}.  This option allows you to change
+the @code{/nar} part to @var{path}.
+
+@item --public-key=@var{file}
+@itemx --private-key=@var{file}
+Use the specific @var{file}s as the public/private key pair used to sign the
+store items being published.
+
+The files must correspond to the same key pair (the private key is used for
+signing and the public key is merely advertised in the signature metadata).
+They must contain keys in the canonical s-expression format as produced by
+@command{guix archive --generate-key} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix archive}).  By
+default, @file{/etc/guix/signing-key.pub} and
+@file{/etc/guix/signing-key.sec} are used.
+
+@item --repl[=@var{port}]
+@itemx -r [@var{port}]
+Spawn a Guile REPL server (@pxref{REPL Servers,,, guile, GNU Guile Reference
+Manual}) on @var{port} (37146 by default).  This is used primarily for
+debugging a running @command{guix publish} server.
+@end table
+
+Enabling @command{guix publish} on a GuixSD system is a one-liner: just
+instantiate a @code{guix-publish-service-type} service in the
+@code{services} field of the @code{operating-system} declaration
+(@pxref{guix-publish-service-type, @code{guix-publish-service-type}}).
+
+If you are instead running Guix on a ``foreign distro'', follow these
+instructions:”
+
+@itemize
+@item
+If your host distro uses the systemd init system:
+
+@example
+# ln -s ~root/.guix-profile/lib/systemd/system/guix-publish.service \
+        /etc/systemd/system/
+# systemctl start guix-publish && systemctl enable guix-publish
+@end example
+
+@item
+Wenn Ihre Wirts-Distribution als »init«-System Upstart verwendet:
+
+@example
+# ln -s ~root/.guix-profile/lib/upstart/system/guix-publish.conf /etc/init/
+# start guix-publish
+@end example
+
+@item
+Otherwise, proceed similarly with your distro's init system.
+@end itemize
+
+@node Aufruf von guix challenge
+@section Invoking @command{guix challenge}
+
+@cindex Reproduzierbare Erstellungen
+@cindex verifiable builds
+@cindex @command{guix challenge}
+@cindex challenge
+Do the binaries provided by this server really correspond to the source code
+it claims to build? Is a package build process deterministic? These are the
+questions the @command{guix challenge} command attempts to answer.
+
+The former is obviously an important question: Before using a substitute
+server (@pxref{Substitute}), one had better @emph{verify} that it provides
+the right binaries, and thus @emph{challenge} it.  The latter is what
+enables the former: If package builds are deterministic, then independent
+builds of the package should yield the exact same result, bit for bit; if a
+server provides a binary different from the one obtained locally, it may be
+either corrupt or malicious.
+
+We know that the hash that shows up in @file{/gnu/store} file names is the
+hash of all the inputs of the process that built the file or
+directory---compilers, libraries, build scripts,
+etc. (@pxref{Einführung}).  Assuming deterministic build processes, one
+store file name should map to exactly one build output.  @command{guix
+challenge} checks whether there is, indeed, a single mapping by comparing
+the build outputs of several independent builds of any given store item.
+
+The command output looks like this:
+
+@smallexample
+$ guix challenge --substitute-urls="https://hydra.gnu.org https://guix.example.org"
+updating list of substitutes from 'https://hydra.gnu.org'... 100.0%
+updating list of substitutes from 'https://guix.example.org'... 100.0%
+/gnu/store/@dots{}-openssl-1.0.2d contents differ:
+  local hash: 0725l22r5jnzazaacncwsvp9kgf42266ayyp814v7djxs7nk963q
+  https://hydra.gnu.org/nar/@dots{}-openssl-1.0.2d: 0725l22r5jnzazaacncwsvp9kgf42266ayyp814v7djxs7nk963q
+  https://guix.example.org/nar/@dots{}-openssl-1.0.2d: 1zy4fmaaqcnjrzzajkdn3f5gmjk754b43qkq47llbyak9z0qjyim
+/gnu/store/@dots{}-git-2.5.0 contents differ:
+  local hash: 00p3bmryhjxrhpn2gxs2fy0a15lnip05l97205pgbk5ra395hyha
+  https://hydra.gnu.org/nar/@dots{}-git-2.5.0: 069nb85bv4d4a6slrwjdy8v1cn4cwspm3kdbmyb81d6zckj3nq9f
+  https://guix.example.org/nar/@dots{}-git-2.5.0: 0mdqa9w1p6cmli6976v4wi0sw9r4p5prkj7lzfd1877wk11c9c73
+/gnu/store/@dots{}-pius-2.1.1 contents differ:
+  local hash: 0k4v3m9z1zp8xzzizb7d8kjj72f9172xv078sq4wl73vnq9ig3ax
+  https://hydra.gnu.org/nar/@dots{}-pius-2.1.1: 0k4v3m9z1zp8xzzizb7d8kjj72f9172xv078sq4wl73vnq9ig3ax
+  https://guix.example.org/nar/@dots{}-pius-2.1.1: 1cy25x1a4fzq5rk0pmvc8xhwyffnqz95h2bpvqsz2mpvlbccy0gs
+
+@dots{}
+
+6,406 store items were analyzed:
+  - 4,749 (74.1%) were identical
+  - 525 (8.2%) differed
+  - 1,132 (17.7%) were inconclusive
+@end smallexample
+
+@noindent
+In this example, @command{guix challenge} first scans the store to determine
+the set of locally-built derivations---as opposed to store items that were
+downloaded from a substitute server---and then queries all the substitute
+servers.  It then reports those store items for which the servers obtained a
+result different from the local build.
+
+@cindex non-determinism, in package builds
+As an example, @code{guix.example.org} always gets a different answer.
+Conversely, @code{hydra.gnu.org} agrees with local builds, except in the
+case of Git.  This might indicate that the build process of Git is
+non-deterministic, meaning that its output varies as a function of various
+things that Guix does not fully control, in spite of building packages in
+isolated environments (@pxref{Funktionalitäten}).  Most common sources of
+non-determinism include the addition of timestamps in build results, the
+inclusion of random numbers, and directory listings sorted by inode number.
+See @uref{https://reproducible-builds.org/docs/}, for more information.
+
+To find out what is wrong with this Git binary, we can do something along
+these lines (@pxref{Aufruf von guix archive}):
+
+@example
+$ wget -q -O - https://hydra.gnu.org/nar/@dots{}-git-2.5.0 \
+   | guix archive -x /tmp/git
+$ diff -ur --no-dereference /gnu/store/@dots{}-git.2.5.0 /tmp/git
+@end example
+
+This command shows the difference between the files resulting from the local
+build, and the files resulting from the build on @code{hydra.gnu.org}
+(@pxref{Overview, Comparing and Merging Files,, diffutils, Comparing and
+Merging Files}).  The @command{diff} command works great for text files.
+When binary files differ, a better option is @uref{https://diffoscope.org/,
+Diffoscope}, a tool that helps visualize differences for all kinds of files.
+
+Once you have done that work, you can tell whether the differences are due
+to a non-deterministic build process or to a malicious server.  We try hard
+to remove sources of non-determinism in packages to make it easier to verify
+substitutes, but of course, this is a process that involves not just Guix,
+but a large part of the free software community.  In the meantime,
+@command{guix challenge} is one tool to help address the problem.
+
+If you are writing packages for Guix, you are encouraged to check whether
+@code{hydra.gnu.org} and other substitute servers obtain the same build
+result as you did with:
+
+@example
+$ guix challenge @var{package}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+where @var{package} is a package specification such as @code{guile@@2.0} or
+@code{glibc:debug}.
+
+The general syntax is:
+
+@example
+guix challenge @var{options} [@var{packages}@dots{}]
+@end example
+
+When a difference is found between the hash of a locally-built item and that
+of a server-provided substitute, or among substitutes provided by different
+servers, the command displays it as in the example above and its exit code
+is 2 (other non-zero exit codes denote other kinds of errors.)
+
+The one option that matters is:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item --substitute-urls=@var{URLs}
+Consider @var{urls} the whitespace-separated list of substitute source URLs
+to compare to.
+
+@item --verbose
+@itemx -v
+Show details about matches (identical contents) in addition to information
+about mismatches.
+
+@end table
+
+@node Aufruf von guix copy
+@section Invoking @command{guix copy}
+
+@cindex copy, of store items, over SSH
+@cindex SSH, copy of store items
+@cindex sharing store items across machines
+@cindex transferring store items across machines
+The @command{guix copy} command copies items from the store of one machine
+to that of another machine over a secure shell (SSH)
+connection@footnote{This command is available only when Guile-SSH was
+found.  @xref{Voraussetzungen}, for details.}.  For example, the following
+command copies the @code{coreutils} package, the user's profile, and all
+their dependencies over to @var{host}, logged in as @var{user}:
+
+@example
+guix copy --to=@var{user}@@@var{host} \
+          coreutils `readlink -f ~/.guix-profile`
+@end example
+
+If some of the items to be copied are already present on @var{host}, they
+are not actually sent.
+
+The command below retrieves @code{libreoffice} and @code{gimp} from
+@var{host}, assuming they are available there:
+
+@example
+guix copy --from=@var{host} libreoffice gimp
+@end example
+
+The SSH connection is established using the Guile-SSH client, which is
+compatible with OpenSSH: it honors @file{~/.ssh/known_hosts} and
+@file{~/.ssh/config}, and uses the SSH agent for authentication.
+
+The key used to sign items that are sent must be accepted by the remote
+machine.  Likewise, the key used by the remote machine to sign items you are
+retrieving must be in @file{/etc/guix/acl} so it is accepted by your own
+daemon.  @xref{Aufruf von guix archive}, for more information about store item
+authentication.
+
+The general syntax is:
+
+@example
+guix copy [--to=@var{spec}|--from=@var{spec}] @var{items}@dots{}
+@end example
+
+You must always specify one of the following options:
+
+@table @code
+@item --to=@var{spec}
+@itemx --from=@var{spec}
+Specify the host to send to or receive from.  @var{spec} must be an SSH spec
+such as @code{example.org}, @code{charlie@@example.org}, or
+@code{charlie@@example.org:2222}.
+@end table
+
+The @var{items} can be either package names, such as @code{gimp}, or store
+items, such as @file{/gnu/store/@dots{}-idutils-4.6}.
+
+When specifying the name of a package to send, it is first built if needed,
+unless @option{--dry-run} was specified.  Common build options are supported
+(@pxref{Gemeinsame Erstellungsoptionen}).
+
+
+@node Aufruf von guix container
+@section Invoking @command{guix container}
+@cindex container
+@cindex @command{guix container}
+@quotation Anmerkung
+As of version @value{VERSION}, this tool is experimental.  The interface is
+subject to radical change in the future.
+@end quotation
+
+The purpose of @command{guix container} is to manipulate processes running
+within an isolated environment, commonly known as a ``container'', typically
+created by the @command{guix environment} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix environment}) and @command{guix system container} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix system}) commands.
+
+The general syntax is:
+
+@example
+guix container @var{action} @var{options}@dots{}
+@end example
+
+@var{action} specifies the operation to perform with a container, and
+@var{options} specifies the context-specific arguments for the action.
+
+The following actions are available:
+
+@table @code
+@item exec
+Execute a command within the context of a running container.
+
+The syntax is:
+
+@example
+guix container exec @var{pid} @var{program} @var{arguments}@dots{}
+@end example
+
+@var{pid} specifies the process ID of the running container.  @var{program}
+specifies an executable file name within the root file system of the
+container.  @var{arguments} are the additional options that will be passed
+to @var{program}.
+
+The following command launches an interactive login shell inside a GuixSD
+container, started by @command{guix system container}, and whose process ID
+is 9001:
+
+@example
+guix container exec 9001 /run/current-system/profile/bin/bash --login
+@end example
+
+Note that the @var{pid} cannot be the parent process of a container.  It
+must be PID 1 of the container or one of its child processes.
+
+@end table
+
+@node Aufruf von guix weather
+@section Invoking @command{guix weather}
+
+Occasionally you're grumpy because substitutes are lacking and you end up
+building packages by yourself (@pxref{Substitute}).  The @command{guix
+weather} command reports on substitute availability on the specified servers
+so you can have an idea of whether you'll be grumpy today.  It can sometimes
+be useful info as a user, but it is primarily useful to people running
+@command{guix publish} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix publish}).
+
+@cindex statistics, for substitutes
+@cindex availability of substitutes
+@cindex substitute availability
+@cindex weather, substitute availability
+Here's a sample run:
+
+@example
+$ guix weather --substitute-urls=https://guix.example.org
+computing 5,872 package derivations for x86_64-linux...
+looking for 6,128 store items on https://guix.example.org..
+updating list of substitutes from 'https://guix.example.org'... 100.0%
+https://guix.example.org
+  43.4% substitutes available (2,658 out of 6,128)
+  7,032.5 MiB of nars (compressed)
+  19,824.2 MiB on disk (uncompressed)
+  0.030 seconds per request (182.9 seconds in total)
+  33.5 requests per second
+
+  9.8% (342 out of 3,470) of the missing items are queued
+  867 queued builds
+      x86_64-linux: 518 (59.7%)
+      i686-linux: 221 (25.5%)
+      aarch64-linux: 128 (14.8%)
+  build rate: 23.41 builds per hour
+      x86_64-linux: 11.16 builds per hour
+      i686-linux: 6.03 builds per hour
+      aarch64-linux: 6.41 builds per hour
+@end example
+
+@cindex continuous integration, statistics
+As you can see, it reports the fraction of all the packages for which
+substitutes are available on the server---regardless of whether substitutes
+are enabled, and regardless of whether this server's signing key is
+authorized.  It also reports the size of the compressed archives (``nars'')
+provided by the server, the size the corresponding store items occupy in the
+store (assuming deduplication is turned off), and the server's throughput.
+The second part gives continuous integration (CI) statistics, if the server
+supports it.
+
+To achieve that, @command{guix weather} queries over HTTP(S) meta-data
+(@dfn{narinfos}) for all the relevant store items.  Like @command{guix
+challenge}, it ignores signatures on those substitutes, which is innocuous
+since the command only gathers statistics and cannot install those
+substitutes.
+
+Among other things, it is possible to query specific system types and
+specific package sets.  The available options are listed below.
+
+@table @code
+@item --substitute-urls=@var{URLs}
+@var{urls} is the space-separated list of substitute server URLs to query.
+When this option is omitted, the default set of substitute servers is
+queried.
+
+@item --system=@var{System}
+@itemx -s @var{system}
+Query substitutes for @var{system}---e.g., @code{aarch64-linux}.  This
+option can be repeated, in which case @command{guix weather} will query
+substitutes for several system types.
+
+@item --manifest=@var{Datei}
+Instead of querying substitutes for all the packages, only ask for those
+specified in @var{file}.  @var{file} must contain a @dfn{manifest}, as with
+the @code{-m} option of @command{guix package} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}).
+@end table
+
+@node Invoking guix processes
+@section Invoking @command{guix processes}
+
+The @command{guix processes} command can be useful to developers and system
+administrators, especially on multi-user machines and on build farms: it
+lists the current sessions (connections to the daemon), as well as
+information about the processes involved@footnote{Remote sessions, when
+@command{guix-daemon} is started with @option{--listen} specifying a TCP
+endpoint, are @emph{not} listed.}.  Here's an example of the information it
+returns:
+
+@example
+$ sudo guix processes
+SessionPID: 19002
+ClientPID: 19090
+ClientCommand: guix environment --ad-hoc python
+
+SessionPID: 19402
+ClientPID: 19367
+ClientCommand: guix publish -u guix-publish -p 3000 -C 9 @dots{}
+
+SessionPID: 19444
+ClientPID: 19419
+ClientCommand: cuirass --cache-directory /var/cache/cuirass @dots{}
+LockHeld: /gnu/store/@dots{}-perl-ipc-cmd-0.96.lock
+LockHeld: /gnu/store/@dots{}-python-six-bootstrap-1.11.0.lock
+LockHeld: /gnu/store/@dots{}-libjpeg-turbo-2.0.0.lock
+ChildProcess: 20495: guix offload x86_64-linux 7200 1 28800
+ChildProcess: 27733: guix offload x86_64-linux 7200 1 28800
+ChildProcess: 27793: guix offload x86_64-linux 7200 1 28800
+@end example
+
+In this example we see that @command{guix-daemon} has three clients:
+@command{guix environment}, @command{guix publish}, and the Cuirass
+continuous integration tool; their process identifier (PID) is given by the
+@code{ClientPID} field.  The @code{SessionPID} field gives the PID of the
+@command{guix-daemon} sub-process of this particular session.
+
+The @code{LockHeld} fields show which store items are currently locked by
+this session, which corresponds to store items being built or substituted
+(the @code{LockHeld} field is not displayed when @command{guix processes} is
+not running as root.)  Last, by looking at the @code{ChildProcess} field, we
+understand that these three builds are being offloaded (@pxref{Auslagern des Daemons einrichten}).
+
+The output is in Recutils format so we can use the handy @command{recsel}
+command to select sessions of interest (@pxref{Selection Expressions,,,
+recutils, GNU recutils manual}).  As an example, the command shows the
+command line and PID of the client that triggered the build of a Perl
+package:
+
+@example
+$ sudo guix processes | \
+    recsel -p ClientPID,ClientCommand -e 'LockHeld ~ "perl"'
+ClientPID: 19419
+ClientCommand: cuirass --cache-directory /var/cache/cuirass @dots{}
+@end example
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node GNU-Distribution
+@chapter GNU-Distribution
+
+@cindex Guix System Distribution
+@cindex GuixSD
+Guix comes with a distribution of the GNU system consisting entirely of free
+software@footnote{The term ``free'' here refers to the
+@url{http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/free-sw.html,freedom provided to users of
+that software}.}.  The distribution can be installed on its own
+(@pxref{Systeminstallation}), but it is also possible to install Guix as a
+package manager on top of an installed GNU/Linux system
+(@pxref{Installation}).  To distinguish between the two, we refer to the
+standalone distribution as the Guix System Distribution, or GuixSD.
+
+The distribution provides core GNU packages such as GNU libc, GCC, and
+Binutils, as well as many GNU and non-GNU applications.  The complete list
+of available packages can be browsed
+@url{http://www.gnu.org/software/guix/packages,on-line} or by running
+@command{guix package} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}):
+
+@example
+guix package --list-available
+@end example
+
+Our goal is to provide a practical 100% free software distribution of
+Linux-based and other variants of GNU, with a focus on the promotion and
+tight integration of GNU components, and an emphasis on programs and tools
+that help users exert that freedom.
+
+Packages are currently available on the following platforms:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item x86_64-linux
+Intel/AMD @code{x86_64} architecture, Linux-Libre kernel;
+
+@item i686-linux
+Intel 32-bit architecture (IA32), Linux-Libre kernel;
+
+@item armhf-linux
+ARMv7-A architecture with hard float, Thumb-2 and NEON, using the EABI
+hard-float application binary interface (ABI), and Linux-Libre kernel.
+
+@item aarch64-linux
+little-endian 64-bit ARMv8-A processors, Linux-Libre kernel.  This is
+currently in an experimental stage, with limited support.
+@xref{Mitwirken}, for how to help!
+
+@item mips64el-linux
+little-endian 64-bit MIPS processors, specifically the Loongson series, n32
+ABI, and Linux-Libre kernel.
+
+@end table
+
+GuixSD itself is currently only available on @code{i686} and @code{x86_64}.
+
+@noindent
+For information on porting to other architectures or kernels,
+@pxref{Portierung}.
+
+@menu
+* Systeminstallation::       Das ganze Betriebssystem installieren.
+* Systemkonfiguration::      Das Betriebssystem konfigurieren.
+* Dokumentation::            Wie man Nutzerhandbücher von Software liest.
+* Dateien zur Fehlersuche installieren::  Womit man seinen Debugger 
+                                            füttert.
+* Sicherheitsaktualisierungen::  Sicherheits-Patches schnell einspielen.
+* Paketmodule::              Pakete aus Sicht des Programmierers.
+* Paketrichtlinien::         Die Distribution wachsen lassen.
+* Bootstrapping::            GNU/Linux von Grund auf selbst erstellen.
+* Portierung::               Guix auf andere Plattformen und Kernels 
+                               bringen.
+@end menu
+
+Building this distribution is a cooperative effort, and you are invited to
+join! @xref{Mitwirken}, for information about how you can help.
+
+@node Systeminstallation
+@section Systeminstallation
+
+@cindex installing GuixSD
+@cindex Guix System Distribution
+This section explains how to install the Guix System Distribution (GuixSD)
+on a machine.  The Guix package manager can also be installed on top of a
+running GNU/Linux system, @pxref{Installation}.
+
+@ifinfo
+@quotation Anmerkung
+@c This paragraph is for people reading this from tty2 of the
+@c installation image.
+You are reading this documentation with an Info reader.  For details on how
+to use it, hit the @key{RET} key (``return'' or ``enter'') on the link that
+follows: @pxref{Top, Info reader,, info-stnd, Stand-alone GNU Info}.  Hit
+@kbd{l} afterwards to come back here.
+
+Alternately, run @command{info info} in another tty to keep the manual
+available.
+@end quotation
+@end ifinfo
+
+@menu
+* Einschränkungen::         Was Sie erwarten dürfen.
+* Hardware-Überlegungen::   Unterstützte Hardware.
+* Installation von USB-Stick oder DVD::  Das Installationsmedium 
+                                           vorbereiten.
+* Vor der Installation::     Netzwerkanbindung, Partitionierung etc.
+* Fortfahren mit der Installation::  Die Hauptsache.
+* GuixSD in einer VM installieren::  Ein GuixSD-Spielplatz.
+* Ein Abbild zur Installation erstellen::  Wie ein solches entsteht.
+@end menu
+
+@node Einschränkungen
+@subsection Einschränkungen
+
+As of version @value{VERSION}, the Guix System Distribution (GuixSD) is not
+production-ready.  It may contain bugs and lack important features.  Thus,
+if you are looking for a stable production system that respects your freedom
+as a computer user, a good solution at this point is to consider
+@url{http://www.gnu.org/distros/free-distros.html, one of the more
+established GNU/Linux distributions}.  We hope you can soon switch to the
+GuixSD without fear, of course.  In the meantime, you can also keep using
+your distribution and try out the package manager on top of it
+(@pxref{Installation}).
+
+Before you proceed with the installation, be aware of the following
+noteworthy limitations applicable to version @value{VERSION}:
+
+@itemize
+@item
+The installation process does not include a graphical user interface and
+requires familiarity with GNU/Linux (see the following subsections to get a
+feel of what that means.)
+
+@item
+Support for the Logical Volume Manager (LVM) is missing.
+
+@item
+More and more system services are provided (@pxref{Dienste}), but some may
+be missing.
+
+@item
+More than 7,500 packages are available, but you might occasionally find that
+a useful package is missing.
+
+@item
+GNOME, Xfce, LXDE, and Enlightenment are available (@pxref{Desktop-Dienste}), as well as a number of X11 window managers.  However, some
+graphical applications may be missing, as well as KDE.
+@end itemize
+
+You have been warned! But more than a disclaimer, this is an invitation to
+report issues (and success stories!), and to join us in improving it.
+@xref{Mitwirken}, for more info.
+
+
+@node Hardware-Überlegungen
+@subsection Hardware-Überlegungen
+
+@cindex hardware support on GuixSD
+GNU@tie{}GuixSD focuses on respecting the user's computing freedom.  It
+builds around the kernel Linux-libre, which means that only hardware for
+which free software drivers and firmware exist is supported.  Nowadays, a
+wide range of off-the-shelf hardware is supported on GNU/Linux-libre---from
+keyboards to graphics cards to scanners and Ethernet controllers.
+Unfortunately, there are still areas where hardware vendors deny users
+control over their own computing, and such hardware is not supported on
+GuixSD.
+
+@cindex WiFi, hardware support
+One of the main areas where free drivers or firmware are lacking is WiFi
+devices.  WiFi devices known to work include those using Atheros chips
+(AR9271 and AR7010), which corresponds to the @code{ath9k} Linux-libre
+driver, and those using Broadcom/AirForce chips (BCM43xx with Wireless-Core
+Revision 5), which corresponds to the @code{b43-open} Linux-libre driver.
+Free firmware exists for both and is available out-of-the-box on GuixSD, as
+part of @var{%base-firmware} (@pxref{„operating-system“-Referenz,
+@code{firmware}}).
+
+@cindex RYF, Respects Your Freedom
+The @uref{https://www.fsf.org/, Free Software Foundation} runs
+@uref{https://www.fsf.org/ryf, @dfn{Respects Your Freedom}} (RYF), a
+certification program for hardware products that respect your freedom and
+your privacy and ensure that you have control over your device.  We
+encourage you to check the list of RYF-certified devices.
+
+Another useful resource is the @uref{https://www.h-node.org/, H-Node} web
+site.  It contains a catalog of hardware devices with information about
+their support in GNU/Linux.
+
+
+@node Installation von USB-Stick oder DVD
+@subsection Installation von USB-Stick oder DVD
+
+An ISO-9660 installation image that can be written to a USB stick or burnt
+to a DVD can be downloaded from
+@indicateurl{https://alpha.gnu.org/gnu/guix/guixsd-install-@value{VERSION}.@var{system}.iso.xz},
+where @var{system} is one of:
+
+@table @code
+@item x86_64-linux
+for a GNU/Linux system on Intel/AMD-compatible 64-bit CPUs;
+
+@item i686-linux
+for a 32-bit GNU/Linux system on Intel-compatible CPUs.
+@end table
+
+@c start duplication of authentication part from ``Binary Installation''
+Make sure to download the associated @file{.sig} file and to verify the
+authenticity of the image against it, along these lines:
+
+@example
+$ wget https://alpha.gnu.org/gnu/guix/guixsd-install-@value{VERSION}.@var{system}.iso.xz.sig
+$ gpg --verify guixsd-install-@value{VERSION}.@var{system}.iso.xz.sig
+@end example
+
+Falls dieser Befehl fehlschlägt, weil Sie nicht über den nötigen
+öffentlichen Schlüssel verfügen, können Sie ihn mit diesem Befehl
+importieren:
+
+@example
+$ gpg --keyserver @value{KEY-SERVER} \
+      --recv-keys @value{OPENPGP-SIGNING-KEY-ID}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+@c end duplication
+und den Befehl @code{gpg --verify} erneut ausführen.
+
+This image contains the tools necessary for an installation.  It is meant to
+be copied @emph{as is} to a large-enough USB stick or DVD.
+
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Copying to a USB Stick
+
+To copy the image to a USB stick, follow these steps:
+
+@enumerate
+@item
+Decompress the image using the @command{xz} command:
+
+@example
+xz -d guixsd-install-@value{VERSION}.@var{system}.iso.xz
+@end example
+
+@item
+Insert a USB stick of 1@tie{}GiB or more into your machine, and determine
+its device name.  Assuming that the USB stick is known as @file{/dev/sdX},
+copy the image with:
+
+@example
+dd if=guixsd-install-@value{VERSION}.x86_64-linux.iso of=/dev/sdX
+sync
+@end example
+
+Access to @file{/dev/sdX} usually requires root privileges.
+@end enumerate
+
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Burning on a DVD
+
+To copy the image to a DVD, follow these steps:
+
+@enumerate
+@item
+Decompress the image using the @command{xz} command:
+
+@example
+xz -d guixsd-install-@value{VERSION}.@var{system}.iso.xz
+@end example
+
+@item
+Insert a blank DVD into your machine, and determine its device name.
+Assuming that the DVD drive is known as @file{/dev/srX}, copy the image
+with:
+
+@example
+growisofs -dvd-compat -Z /dev/srX=guixsd-install-@value{VERSION}.x86_64.iso
+@end example
+
+Access to @file{/dev/srX} usually requires root privileges.
+@end enumerate
+
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Booting
+
+Once this is done, you should be able to reboot the system and boot from the
+USB stick or DVD.  The latter usually requires you to get in the BIOS or
+UEFI boot menu, where you can choose to boot from the USB stick.
+
+@xref{GuixSD in einer VM installieren}, if, instead, you would like to install
+GuixSD in a virtual machine (VM).
+
+
+@node Vor der Installation
+@subsection Vor der Installation
+
+Once you have successfully booted your computer using the installation
+medium, you should end up with a root prompt.  Several console TTYs are
+configured and can be used to run commands as root.  TTY2 shows this
+documentation, browsable using the Info reader commands (@pxref{Top,,,
+info-stnd, Stand-alone GNU Info}).  The installation system runs the GPM
+mouse daemon, which allows you to select text with the left mouse button and
+to paste it with the middle button.
+
+@quotation Anmerkung
+Installation requires access to the Internet so that any missing
+dependencies of your system configuration can be downloaded.  See the
+``Networking'' section below.
+@end quotation
+
+The installation system includes many common tools needed for this task.
+But it is also a full-blown GuixSD system, which means that you can install
+additional packages, should you need it, using @command{guix package}
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}).
+
+@subsubsection Keyboard Layout
+
+@cindex keyboard layout
+The installation image uses the US qwerty keyboard layout.  If you want to
+change it, you can use the @command{loadkeys} command.  For example, the
+following command selects the Dvorak keyboard layout:
+
+@example
+loadkeys dvorak
+@end example
+
+See the files under @file{/run/current-system/profile/share/keymaps} for a
+list of available keyboard layouts.  Run @command{man loadkeys} for more
+information.
+
+@subsubsection Networking
+
+Run the following command to see what your network interfaces are called:
+
+@example
+ifconfig -a
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+@dots{} or, using the GNU/Linux-specific @command{ip} command:
+
+@example
+ip a
+@end example
+
+@c http://cgit.freedesktop.org/systemd/systemd/tree/src/udev/udev-builtin-net_id.c#n20
+Wired interfaces have a name starting with @samp{e}; for example, the
+interface corresponding to the first on-board Ethernet controller is called
+@samp{eno1}.  Wireless interfaces have a name starting with @samp{w}, like
+@samp{w1p2s0}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item Wired connection
+To configure a wired network run the following command, substituting
+@var{interface} with the name of the wired interface you want to use.
+
+@example
+ifconfig @var{interface} up
+@end example
+
+@item Wireless connection
+@cindex wireless
+@cindex WiFi
+To configure wireless networking, you can create a configuration file for
+the @command{wpa_supplicant} configuration tool (its location is not
+important) using one of the available text editors such as @command{nano}:
+
+@example
+nano wpa_supplicant.conf
+@end example
+
+As an example, the following stanza can go to this file and will work for
+many wireless networks, provided you give the actual SSID and passphrase for
+the network you are connecting to:
+
+@example
+network=@{
+  ssid="@var{my-ssid}"
+  key_mgmt=WPA-PSK
+  psk="the network's secret passphrase"
+@}
+@end example
+
+Start the wireless service and run it in the background with the following
+command (substitute @var{interface} with the name of the network interface
+you want to use):
+
+@example
+wpa_supplicant -c wpa_supplicant.conf -i @var{interface} -B
+@end example
+
+Run @command{man wpa_supplicant} for more information.
+@end table
+
+@cindex DHCP
+At this point, you need to acquire an IP address.  On a network where IP
+addresses are automatically assigned @i{via} DHCP, you can run:
+
+@example
+dhclient -v @var{interface}
+@end example
+
+Try to ping a server to see if networking is up and running:
+
+@example
+ping -c 3 gnu.org
+@end example
+
+Setting up network access is almost always a requirement because the image
+does not contain all the software and tools that may be needed.
+
+@cindex installing over SSH
+If you want to, you can continue the installation remotely by starting an
+SSH server:
+
+@example
+herd start ssh-daemon
+@end example
+
+Make sure to either set a password with @command{passwd}, or configure
+OpenSSH public key authentication before logging in.
+
+@subsubsection Disk Partitioning
+
+Unless this has already been done, the next step is to partition, and then
+format the target partition(s).
+
+The installation image includes several partitioning tools, including Parted
+(@pxref{Overview,,, parted, GNU Parted User Manual}), @command{fdisk}, and
+@command{cfdisk}.  Run it and set up your disk with the partition layout you
+want:
+
+@example
+cfdisk
+@end example
+
+If your disk uses the GUID Partition Table (GPT) format and you plan to
+install BIOS-based GRUB (which is the default), make sure a BIOS Boot
+Partition is available (@pxref{BIOS installation,,, grub, GNU GRUB manual}).
+
+@cindex EFI, installation
+@cindex UEFI, installation
+@cindex ESP, EFI system partition
+If you instead wish to use EFI-based GRUB, a FAT32 @dfn{EFI System
+Partition} (ESP) is required.  This partition should be mounted at
+@file{/boot/efi} and must have the @code{esp} flag set.  E.g., for
+@command{parted}:
+
+@example
+parted /dev/sda set 1 esp on
+@end example
+
+@quotation Anmerkung
+@vindex grub-bootloader
+@vindex grub-efi-bootloader
+Unsure whether to use EFI- or BIOS-based GRUB? If the directory
+@file{/sys/firmware/efi} exists in the installation image, then you should
+probably perform an EFI installation, using @code{grub-efi-bootloader}.
+Otherwise you should use the BIOS-based GRUB, known as
+@code{grub-bootloader}.  @xref{Bootloader-Konfiguration}, for more info on
+bootloaders.
+@end quotation
+
+Once you are done partitioning the target hard disk drive, you have to
+create a file system on the relevant partition(s)@footnote{Currently GuixSD
+only supports ext4 and btrfs file systems.  In particular, code that reads
+file system UUIDs and labels only works for these file system types.}.  For
+the ESP, if you have one and assuming it is @file{/dev/sda1}, run:
+
+@example
+mkfs.fat -F32 /dev/sda1
+@end example
+
+Preferably, assign file systems a label so that you can easily and reliably
+refer to them in @code{file-system} declarations (@pxref{Dateisysteme}).
+This is typically done using the @code{-L} option of @command{mkfs.ext4} and
+related commands.  So, assuming the target root partition lives at
+@file{/dev/sda2}, a file system with the label @code{my-root} can be created
+with:
+
+@example
+mkfs.ext4 -L my-root /dev/sda2
+@end example
+
+@cindex encrypted disk
+If you are instead planning to encrypt the root partition, you can use the
+Cryptsetup/LUKS utilities to do that (see @inlinefmtifelse{html,
+@uref{https://linux.die.net/man/8/cryptsetup, @code{man cryptsetup}},
+@code{man cryptsetup}} for more information.)  Assuming you want to store
+the root partition on @file{/dev/sda2}, the command sequence would be along
+these lines:
+
+@example
+cryptsetup luksFormat /dev/sda2
+cryptsetup open --type luks /dev/sda2 my-partition
+mkfs.ext4 -L my-root /dev/mapper/my-partition
+@end example
+
+Once that is done, mount the target file system under @file{/mnt} with a
+command like (again, assuming @code{my-root} is the label of the root file
+system):
+
+@example
+mount LABEL=my-root /mnt
+@end example
+
+Also mount any other file systems you would like to use on the target system
+relative to this path.  If you have @file{/boot} on a separate partition for
+example, mount it at @file{/mnt/boot} now so it is found by @code{guix
+system init} afterwards.
+
+Finally, if you plan to use one or more swap partitions (@pxref{Memory
+Concepts, swap space,, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}), make sure
+to initialize them with @command{mkswap}.  Assuming you have one swap
+partition on @file{/dev/sda3}, you would run:
+
+@example
+mkswap /dev/sda3
+swapon /dev/sda3
+@end example
+
+Alternatively, you may use a swap file.  For example, assuming that in the
+new system you want to use the file @file{/swapfile} as a swap file, you
+would run@footnote{This example will work for many types of file systems
+(e.g., ext4).  However, for copy-on-write file systems (e.g., btrfs), the
+required steps may be different.  For details, see the manual pages for
+@command{mkswap} and @command{swapon}.}:
+
+@example
+# This is 10 GiB of swap space.  Adjust "count" to change the size.
+dd if=/dev/zero of=/mnt/swapfile bs=1MiB count=10240
+# For security, make the file readable and writable only by root.
+chmod 600 /mnt/swapfile
+mkswap /mnt/swapfile
+swapon /mnt/swapfile
+@end example
+
+Note that if you have encrypted the root partition and created a swap file
+in its file system as described above, then the encryption also protects the
+swap file, just like any other file in that file system.
+
+@node Fortfahren mit der Installation
+@subsection Fortfahren mit der Installation
+
+With the target partitions ready and the target root mounted on @file{/mnt},
+we're ready to go.  First, run:
+
+@example
+herd start cow-store /mnt
+@end example
+
+This makes @file{/gnu/store} copy-on-write, such that packages added to it
+during the installation phase are written to the target disk on @file{/mnt}
+rather than kept in memory.  This is necessary because the first phase of
+the @command{guix system init} command (see below) entails downloads or
+builds to @file{/gnu/store} which, initially, is an in-memory file system.
+
+Next, you have to edit a file and provide the declaration of the operating
+system to be installed.  To that end, the installation system comes with
+three text editors.  We recommend GNU nano (@pxref{Top,,, nano, GNU nano
+Manual}), which supports syntax highlighting and parentheses matching; other
+editors include GNU Zile (an Emacs clone), and nvi (a clone of the original
+BSD @command{vi} editor).  We strongly recommend storing that file on the
+target root file system, say, as @file{/mnt/etc/config.scm}.  Failing to do
+that, you will have lost your configuration file once you have rebooted into
+the newly-installed system.
+
+@xref{Das Konfigurationssystem nutzen}, for an overview of the configuration
+file.  The example configurations discussed in that section are available
+under @file{/etc/configuration} in the installation image.  Thus, to get
+started with a system configuration providing a graphical display server (a
+``desktop'' system), you can run something along these lines:
+
+@example
+# mkdir /mnt/etc
+# cp /etc/configuration/desktop.scm /mnt/etc/config.scm
+# nano /mnt/etc/config.scm
+@end example
+
+You should pay attention to what your configuration file contains, and in
+particular:
+
+@itemize
+@item
+Make sure the @code{bootloader-configuration} form refers to the target you
+want to install GRUB on.  It should mention @code{grub-bootloader} if you
+are installing GRUB in the legacy way, or @code{grub-efi-bootloader} for
+newer UEFI systems.  For legacy systems, the @code{target} field names a
+device, like @code{/dev/sda}; for UEFI systems it names a path to a mounted
+EFI partition, like @code{/boot/efi}, and do make sure the path is actually
+mounted.
+
+@item
+Be sure that your file system labels match the value of their respective
+@code{device} fields in your @code{file-system} configuration, assuming your
+@code{file-system} configuration uses the @code{file-system-label} procedure
+in its @code{device} field.
+
+@item
+If there are encrypted or RAID partitions, make sure to add a
+@code{mapped-devices} field to describe them (@pxref{Abgebildete Geräte}).
+@end itemize
+
+Once you are done preparing the configuration file, the new system must be
+initialized (remember that the target root file system is mounted under
+@file{/mnt}):
+
+@example
+guix system init /mnt/etc/config.scm /mnt
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+This copies all the necessary files and installs GRUB on @file{/dev/sdX},
+unless you pass the @option{--no-bootloader} option.  For more information,
+@pxref{Aufruf von guix system}.  This command may trigger downloads or builds
+of missing packages, which can take some time.
+
+Once that command has completed---and hopefully succeeded!---you can run
+@command{reboot} and boot into the new system.  The @code{root} password in
+the new system is initially empty; other users' passwords need to be
+initialized by running the @command{passwd} command as @code{root}, unless
+your configuration specifies otherwise (@pxref{user-account-password, user
+account passwords}).
+
+@cindex upgrading GuixSD
+From then on, you can update GuixSD whenever you want by running
+@command{guix pull} as @code{root} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix pull}), and then
+running @command{guix system reconfigure} to build a new system generation
+with the latest packages and services (@pxref{Aufruf von guix system}).  We
+recommend doing that regularly so that your system includes the latest
+security updates (@pxref{Sicherheitsaktualisierungen}).
+
+Join us on @code{#guix} on the Freenode IRC network or on
+@file{guix-devel@@gnu.org} to share your experience---good or not so good.
+
+@node GuixSD in einer VM installieren
+@subsection Installing GuixSD in a Virtual Machine
+
+@cindex virtual machine, GuixSD installation
+@cindex virtual private server (VPS)
+@cindex VPS (virtual private server)
+If you'd like to install GuixSD in a virtual machine (VM) or on a virtual
+private server (VPS) rather than on your beloved machine, this section is
+for you.
+
+To boot a @uref{http://qemu.org/,QEMU} VM for installing GuixSD in a disk
+image, follow these steps:
+
+@enumerate
+@item
+First, retrieve and decompress the GuixSD installation image as described
+previously (@pxref{Installation von USB-Stick oder DVD}).
+
+@item
+Create a disk image that will hold the installed system.  To make a
+qcow2-formatted disk image, use the @command{qemu-img} command:
+
+@example
+qemu-img create -f qcow2 guixsd.img 50G
+@end example
+
+The resulting file will be much smaller than 50 GB (typically less than 1
+MB), but it will grow as the virtualized storage device is filled up.
+
+@item
+Boot the USB installation image in an VM:
+
+@example
+qemu-system-x86_64 -m 1024 -smp 1 \
+  -net user -net nic,model=virtio -boot menu=on \
+  -drive file=guixsd-install-@value{VERSION}.@var{system}.iso \
+  -drive file=guixsd.img
+@end example
+
+The ordering of the drives matters.
+
+In the VM console, quickly press the @kbd{F12} key to enter the boot menu.
+Then press the @kbd{2} key and the @kbd{RET} key to validate your selection.
+
+@item
+You're now root in the VM, proceed with the installation process.
+@xref{Vor der Installation}, and follow the instructions.
+@end enumerate
+
+Once installation is complete, you can boot the system that's on your
+@file{guixsd.img} image.  @xref{GuixSD in einer VM starten}, for how to do that.
+
+@node Ein Abbild zur Installation erstellen
+@subsection Ein Abbild zur Installation erstellen
+
+@cindex installation image
+The installation image described above was built using the @command{guix
+system} command, specifically:
+
+@example
+guix system disk-image gnu/system/install.scm
+@end example
+
+Have a look at @file{gnu/system/install.scm} in the source tree, and see
+also @ref{Aufruf von guix system} for more information about the installation
+image.
+
+@subsection Building the Installation Image for ARM Boards
+
+Many ARM boards require a specific variant of the
+@uref{http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot/, U-Boot} bootloader.
+
+If you build a disk image and the bootloader is not available otherwise (on
+another boot drive etc), it's advisable to build an image that includes the
+bootloader, specifically:
+
+@example
+guix system disk-image --system=armhf-linux -e '((@@ (gnu system install) os-with-u-boot) (@@ (gnu system install) installation-os) "A20-OLinuXino-Lime2")'
+@end example
+
+@code{A20-OLinuXino-Lime2} is the name of the board.  If you specify an
+invalid board, a list of possible boards will be printed.
+
+@node Systemkonfiguration
+@section Systemkonfiguration
+
+@cindex system configuration
+The Guix System Distribution supports a consistent whole-system
+configuration mechanism.  By that we mean that all aspects of the global
+system configuration---such as the available system services, timezone and
+locale settings, user accounts---are declared in a single place.  Such a
+@dfn{system configuration} can be @dfn{instantiated}---i.e., effected.
+
+@c Yes, we're talking of Puppet, Chef, & co. here.  ↑
+One of the advantages of putting all the system configuration under the
+control of Guix is that it supports transactional system upgrades, and makes
+it possible to roll back to a previous system instantiation, should
+something go wrong with the new one (@pxref{Funktionalitäten}).  Another advantage
+is that it makes it easy to replicate the exact same configuration across
+different machines, or at different points in time, without having to resort
+to additional administration tools layered on top of the own tools of the
+system.
+
+This section describes this mechanism.  First we focus on the system
+administrator's viewpoint---explaining how the system is configured and
+instantiated.  Then we show how this mechanism can be extended, for instance
+to support new system services.
+
+@menu
+* Das Konfigurationssystem nutzen::  Ihr GNU-System anpassen.
+* „operating-system“-Referenz::  Details der 
+                                       Betriebssystem-Deklarationen.
+* Dateisysteme::             Die Dateisystemeinbindungen konfigurieren.
+* Abgebildete Geräte::      Näheres zu blockorientierten Speichermedien.
+* Benutzerkonten::           Benutzerkonten festlegen.
+* Locales::                  Sprache und kulturelle Konventionen.
+* Dienste::                  Systemdienste festlegen.
+* Setuid-Programme::         Mit Administratorrechten startende Programme.
+* X.509-Zertifikate::        HTTPS-Server authentifizieren.
+* Name Service Switch::      Den Name Service Switch von libc konfigurieren.
+* Initiale RAM-Disk::        Linux-libre hochfahren.
+* Bootloader-Konfiguration::  Den Bootloader konfigurieren.
+* Aufruf von guix system::   Instanzierung einer Systemkonfiguration.
+* GuixSD in einer VM starten::  Wie man GuixSD in einer virtuellen Maschine 
+                                  startet.
+* Dienste definieren::       Neue Dienstdefinitionen hinzufügen.
+@end menu
+
+@node Das Konfigurationssystem nutzen
+@subsection Das Konfigurationssystem nutzen
+
+The operating system is configured by providing an @code{operating-system}
+declaration in a file that can then be passed to the @command{guix system}
+command (@pxref{Aufruf von guix system}).  A simple setup, with the default
+system services, the default Linux-Libre kernel, initial RAM disk, and boot
+loader looks like this:
+
+@findex operating-system
+@lisp
+@include os-config-bare-bones.texi
+@end lisp
+
+This example should be self-describing.  Some of the fields defined above,
+such as @code{host-name} and @code{bootloader}, are mandatory.  Others, such
+as @code{packages} and @code{services}, can be omitted, in which case they
+get a default value.
+
+Below we discuss the effect of some of the most important fields
+(@pxref{„operating-system“-Referenz}, for details about all the available
+fields), and how to @dfn{instantiate} the operating system using
+@command{guix system}.
+
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Bootloader
+
+@cindex legacy boot, on Intel machines
+@cindex BIOS boot, on Intel machines
+@cindex UEFI boot
+@cindex EFI boot
+The @code{bootloader} field describes the method that will be used to boot
+your system.  Machines based on Intel processors can boot in ``legacy'' BIOS
+mode, as in the example above.  However, more recent machines rely instead
+on the @dfn{Unified Extensible Firmware Interface} (UEFI) to boot.  In that
+case, the @code{bootloader} field should contain something along these
+lines:
+
+@example
+(bootloader-configuration
+  (bootloader grub-efi-bootloader)
+  (target "/boot/efi"))
+@end example
+
+@xref{Bootloader-Konfiguration}, for more information on the available
+configuration options.
+
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Globally-Visible Packages
+
+@vindex %base-packages
+The @code{packages} field lists packages that will be globally visible on
+the system, for all user accounts---i.e., in every user's @code{PATH}
+environment variable---in addition to the per-user profiles (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}).  The @var{%base-packages} variable provides all the tools
+one would expect for basic user and administrator tasks---including the GNU
+Core Utilities, the GNU Networking Utilities, the GNU Zile lightweight text
+editor, @command{find}, @command{grep}, etc.  The example above adds
+GNU@tie{}Screen to those, taken from the @code{(gnu packages screen)} module
+(@pxref{Paketmodule}).  The @code{(list package output)} syntax can be
+used to add a specific output of a package:
+
+@lisp
+(use-modules (gnu packages))
+(use-modules (gnu packages dns))
+
+(operating-system
+  ;; ...
+  (packages (cons (list bind "utils")
+                  %base-packages)))
+@end lisp
+
+@findex specification->package
+Referring to packages by variable name, like @code{bind} above, has the
+advantage of being unambiguous; it also allows typos and such to be
+diagnosed right away as ``unbound variables''.  The downside is that one
+needs to know which module defines which package, and to augment the
+@code{use-package-modules} line accordingly.  To avoid that, one can use the
+@code{specification->package} procedure of the @code{(gnu packages)} module,
+which returns the best package for a given name or name and version:
+
+@lisp
+(use-modules (gnu packages))
+
+(operating-system
+  ;; ...
+  (packages (append (map specification->package
+                         '("tcpdump" "htop" "gnupg@@2.0"))
+                    %base-packages)))
+@end lisp
+
+@unnumberedsubsubsec System Services
+
+@cindex services
+@vindex %base-services
+The @code{services} field lists @dfn{system services} to be made available
+when the system starts (@pxref{Dienste}).  The @code{operating-system}
+declaration above specifies that, in addition to the basic services, we want
+the @command{lshd} secure shell daemon listening on port 2222
+(@pxref{Netzwerkdienste, @code{lsh-service}}).  Under the hood,
+@code{lsh-service} arranges so that @code{lshd} is started with the right
+command-line options, possibly with supporting configuration files generated
+as needed (@pxref{Dienste definieren}).
+
+@cindex customization, of services
+@findex modify-services
+Occasionally, instead of using the base services as is, you will want to
+customize them.  To do this, use @code{modify-services} (@pxref{Service-Referenz, @code{modify-services}}) to modify the list.
+
+For example, suppose you want to modify @code{guix-daemon} and Mingetty (the
+console log-in) in the @var{%base-services} list (@pxref{Basisdienste,
+@code{%base-services}}).  To do that, you can write the following in your
+operating system declaration:
+
+@lisp
+(define %my-services
+  ;; My very own list of services.
+  (modify-services %base-services
+    (guix-service-type config =>
+                       (guix-configuration
+                        (inherit config)
+                        (use-substitutes? #f)
+                        (extra-options '("--gc-keep-derivations"))))
+    (mingetty-service-type config =>
+                           (mingetty-configuration
+                            (inherit config)))))
+
+(operating-system
+  ;; @dots{}
+  (services %my-services))
+@end lisp
+
+This changes the configuration---i.e., the service parameters---of the
+@code{guix-service-type} instance, and that of all the
+@code{mingetty-service-type} instances in the @var{%base-services} list.
+Observe how this is accomplished: first, we arrange for the original
+configuration to be bound to the identifier @code{config} in the @var{body},
+and then we write the @var{body} so that it evaluates to the desired
+configuration.  In particular, notice how we use @code{inherit} to create a
+new configuration which has the same values as the old configuration, but
+with a few modifications.
+
+@cindex encrypted disk
+The configuration for a typical ``desktop'' usage, with an encrypted root
+partition, the X11 display server, GNOME and Xfce (users can choose which of
+these desktop environments to use at the log-in screen by pressing
+@kbd{F1}), network management, power management, and more, would look like
+this:
+
+@lisp
+@include os-config-desktop.texi
+@end lisp
+
+A graphical system with a choice of lightweight window managers instead of
+full-blown desktop environments would look like this:
+
+@lisp
+@include os-config-lightweight-desktop.texi
+@end lisp
+
+This example refers to the @file{/boot/efi} file system by its UUID,
+@code{1234-ABCD}.  Replace this UUID with the right UUID on your system, as
+returned by the @command{blkid} command.
+
+@xref{Desktop-Dienste}, for the exact list of services provided by
+@var{%desktop-services}.  @xref{X.509-Zertifikate}, for background
+information about the @code{nss-certs} package that is used here.
+
+Again, @var{%desktop-services} is just a list of service objects.  If you
+want to remove services from there, you can do so using the procedures for
+list filtering (@pxref{SRFI-1 Filtering and Partitioning,,, guile, GNU Guile
+Reference Manual}).  For instance, the following expression returns a list
+that contains all the services in @var{%desktop-services} minus the Avahi
+service:
+
+@example
+(remove (lambda (service)
+          (eq? (service-kind service) avahi-service-type))
+        %desktop-services)
+@end example
+
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Instantiating the System
+
+Assuming the @code{operating-system} declaration is stored in the
+@file{my-system-config.scm} file, the @command{guix system reconfigure
+my-system-config.scm} command instantiates that configuration, and makes it
+the default GRUB boot entry (@pxref{Aufruf von guix system}).
+
+The normal way to change the system configuration is by updating this file
+and re-running @command{guix system reconfigure}.  One should never have to
+touch files in @file{/etc} or to run commands that modify the system state
+such as @command{useradd} or @command{grub-install}.  In fact, you must
+avoid that since that would not only void your warranty but also prevent you
+from rolling back to previous versions of your system, should you ever need
+to.
+
+@cindex roll-back, of the operating system
+Speaking of roll-back, each time you run @command{guix system reconfigure},
+a new @dfn{generation} of the system is created---without modifying or
+deleting previous generations.  Old system generations get an entry in the
+bootloader boot menu, allowing you to boot them in case something went wrong
+with the latest generation.  Reassuring, no? The @command{guix system
+list-generations} command lists the system generations available on disk.
+It is also possible to roll back the system via the commands @command{guix
+system roll-back} and @command{guix system switch-generation}.
+
+Although the @command{guix system reconfigure} command will not modify
+previous generations, you must take care when the current generation is not
+the latest (e.g., after invoking @command{guix system roll-back}), since the
+operation might overwrite a later generation (@pxref{Aufruf von guix system}).
+
+@unnumberedsubsubsec The Programming Interface
+
+At the Scheme level, the bulk of an @code{operating-system} declaration is
+instantiated with the following monadic procedure (@pxref{Die Store-Monade}):
+
+@deffn {Monadic Procedure} operating-system-derivation os
+Return a derivation that builds @var{os}, an @code{operating-system} object
+(@pxref{Ableitungen}).
+
+The output of the derivation is a single directory that refers to all the
+packages, configuration files, and other supporting files needed to
+instantiate @var{os}.
+@end deffn
+
+This procedure is provided by the @code{(gnu system)} module.  Along with
+@code{(gnu services)} (@pxref{Dienste}), this module contains the guts of
+GuixSD.  Make sure to visit it!
+
+
+@node „operating-system“-Referenz
+@subsection @code{operating-system} Reference
+
+This section summarizes all the options available in @code{operating-system}
+declarations (@pxref{Das Konfigurationssystem nutzen}).
+
+@deftp {Data Type} operating-system
+This is the data type representing an operating system configuration.  By
+that, we mean all the global system configuration, not per-user
+configuration (@pxref{Das Konfigurationssystem nutzen}).
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{kernel} (default: @var{linux-libre})
+The package object of the operating system kernel to use@footnote{Currently
+only the Linux-libre kernel is supported.  In the future, it will be
+possible to use the GNU@tie{}Hurd.}.
+
+@item @code{kernel-arguments} (default: @code{'()})
+List of strings or gexps representing additional arguments to pass on the
+command-line of the kernel---e.g., @code{("console=ttyS0")}.
+
+@item @code{bootloader}
+The system bootloader configuration object.  @xref{Bootloader-Konfiguration}.
+
+@item @code{initrd-modules} (default: @code{%base-initrd-modules})
+@cindex initrd
+@cindex initial RAM disk
+The list of Linux kernel modules that need to be available in the initial
+RAM disk.  @xref{Initiale RAM-Disk}.
+
+@item @code{initrd} (default: @code{base-initrd})
+A procedure that returns an initial RAM disk for the Linux kernel.  This
+field is provided to support low-level customization and should rarely be
+needed for casual use.  @xref{Initiale RAM-Disk}.
+
+@item @code{firmware} (default: @var{%base-firmware})
+@cindex firmware
+List of firmware packages loadable by the operating system kernel.
+
+The default includes firmware needed for Atheros- and Broadcom-based WiFi
+devices (Linux-libre modules @code{ath9k} and @code{b43-open},
+respectively).  @xref{Hardware-Überlegungen}, for more info on supported
+hardware.
+
+@item @code{host-name}
+The host name.
+
+@item @code{hosts-file}
+@cindex hosts file
+A file-like object (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke, file-like objects}) for use as
+@file{/etc/hosts} (@pxref{Host Names,,, libc, The GNU C Library Reference
+Manual}).  The default is a file with entries for @code{localhost} and
+@var{host-name}.
+
+@item @code{mapped-devices} (default: @code{'()})
+A list of mapped devices.  @xref{Abgebildete Geräte}.
+
+@item @code{file-systems}
+A list of file systems.  @xref{Dateisysteme}.
+
+@item @code{swap-devices} (default: @code{'()})
+@cindex swap devices
+A list of strings identifying devices or files to be used for ``swap space''
+(@pxref{Memory Concepts,,, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}).  For
+example, @code{'("/dev/sda3")} or @code{'("/swapfile")}.  It is possible to
+specify a swap file in a file system on a mapped device, provided that the
+necessary device mapping and file system are also specified.  @xref{Abgebildete Geräte} and @ref{Dateisysteme}.
+
+@item @code{users} (default: @code{%base-user-accounts})
+@itemx @code{groups} (default: @var{%base-groups})
+List of user accounts and groups.  @xref{Benutzerkonten}.
+
+If the @code{users} list lacks a user account with UID@tie{}0, a ``root''
+account with UID@tie{}0 is automatically added.
+
+@item @code{skeletons} (default: @code{(default-skeletons)})
+A list target file name/file-like object tuples (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke,
+file-like objects}).  These are the skeleton files that will be added to the
+home directory of newly-created user accounts.
+
+For instance, a valid value may look like this:
+
+@example
+`((".bashrc" ,(plain-file "bashrc" "echo Hello\n"))
+  (".guile" ,(plain-file "guile"
+                         "(use-modules (ice-9 readline))
+                          (activate-readline)")))
+@end example
+
+@item @code{issue} (default: @var{%default-issue})
+A string denoting the contents of the @file{/etc/issue} file, which is
+displayed when users log in on a text console.
+
+@item @code{packages} (default: @var{%base-packages})
+The set of packages installed in the global profile, which is accessible at
+@file{/run/current-system/profile}.
+
+The default set includes core utilities and it is good practice to install
+non-core utilities in user profiles (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}).
+
+@item @code{timezone}
+A timezone identifying string---e.g., @code{"Europe/Paris"}.
+
+You can run the @command{tzselect} command to find out which timezone string
+corresponds to your region.  Choosing an invalid timezone name causes
+@command{guix system} to fail.
+
+@item @code{locale} (default: @code{"en_US.utf8"})
+The name of the default locale (@pxref{Locale Names,,, libc, The GNU C
+Library Reference Manual}).  @xref{Locales}, for more information.
+
+@item @code{locale-definitions} (default: @var{%default-locale-definitions})
+The list of locale definitions to be compiled and that may be used at run
+time.  @xref{Locales}.
+
+@item @code{locale-libcs} (default: @code{(list @var{glibc})})
+The list of GNU@tie{}libc packages whose locale data and tools are used to
+build the locale definitions.  @xref{Locales}, for compatibility
+considerations that justify this option.
+
+@item @code{name-service-switch} (default: @var{%default-nss})
+Configuration of the libc name service switch (NSS)---a
+@code{<name-service-switch>} object.  @xref{Name Service Switch}, for
+details.
+
+@item @code{services} (default: @var{%base-services})
+A list of service objects denoting system services.  @xref{Dienste}.
+
+@item @code{pam-services} (default: @code{(base-pam-services)})
+@cindex PAM
+@cindex pluggable authentication modules
+@c FIXME: Add xref to PAM services section.
+Linux @dfn{pluggable authentication module} (PAM) services.
+
+@item @code{setuid-programs} (default: @var{%setuid-programs})
+List of string-valued G-expressions denoting setuid programs.  @xref{Setuid-Programme}.
+
+@item @code{sudoers-file} (default: @var{%sudoers-specification})
+@cindex sudoers file
+The contents of the @file{/etc/sudoers} file as a file-like object
+(@pxref{G-Ausdrücke, @code{local-file} and @code{plain-file}}).
+
+This file specifies which users can use the @command{sudo} command, what
+they are allowed to do, and what privileges they may gain.  The default is
+that only @code{root} and members of the @code{wheel} group may use
+@code{sudo}.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@node Dateisysteme
+@subsection Dateisysteme
+
+The list of file systems to be mounted is specified in the
+@code{file-systems} field of the operating system declaration (@pxref{Das Konfigurationssystem nutzen}).  Each file system is declared using the
+@code{file-system} form, like this:
+
+@example
+(file-system
+  (mount-point "/home")
+  (device "/dev/sda3")
+  (type "ext4"))
+@end example
+
+As usual, some of the fields are mandatory---those shown in the example
+above---while others can be omitted.  These are described below.
+
+@deftp {Data Type} file-system
+Objects of this type represent file systems to be mounted.  They contain the
+following members:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{type}
+This is a string specifying the type of the file system---e.g.,
+@code{"ext4"}.
+
+@item @code{mount-point}
+This designates the place where the file system is to be mounted.
+
+@item @code{device}
+This names the ``source'' of the file system.  It can be one of three
+things: a file system label, a file system UUID, or the name of a
+@file{/dev} node.  Labels and UUIDs offer a way to refer to file systems
+without having to hard-code their actual device name@footnote{Note that,
+while it is tempting to use @file{/dev/disk/by-uuid} and similar device
+names to achieve the same result, this is not recommended: These special
+device nodes are created by the udev daemon and may be unavailable at the
+time the device is mounted.}.
+
+@findex file-system-label
+File system labels are created using the @code{file-system-label} procedure,
+UUIDs are created using @code{uuid}, and @file{/dev} node are plain
+strings.  Here's an example of a file system referred to by its label, as
+shown by the @command{e2label} command:
+
+@example
+(file-system
+  (mount-point "/home")
+  (type "ext4")
+  (device (file-system-label "my-home")))
+@end example
+
+@findex uuid
+UUIDs are converted from their string representation (as shown by the
+@command{tune2fs -l} command) using the @code{uuid} form@footnote{The
+@code{uuid} form expects 16-byte UUIDs as defined in
+@uref{https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4122, RFC@tie{}4122}.  This is the form
+of UUID used by the ext2 family of file systems and others, but it is
+different from ``UUIDs'' found in FAT file systems, for instance.}, like
+this:
+
+@example
+(file-system
+  (mount-point "/home")
+  (type "ext4")
+  (device (uuid "4dab5feb-d176-45de-b287-9b0a6e4c01cb")))
+@end example
+
+When the source of a file system is a mapped device (@pxref{Abgebildete Geräte}), its @code{device} field @emph{must} refer to the mapped device
+name---e.g., @file{"/dev/mapper/root-partition"}.  This is required so that
+the system knows that mounting the file system depends on having the
+corresponding device mapping established.
+
+@item @code{flags} (default: @code{'()})
+This is a list of symbols denoting mount flags.  Recognized flags include
+@code{read-only}, @code{bind-mount}, @code{no-dev} (disallow access to
+special files), @code{no-suid} (ignore setuid and setgid bits), and
+@code{no-exec} (disallow program execution.)
+
+@item @code{options} (default: @code{#f})
+This is either @code{#f}, or a string denoting mount options.
+
+@item @code{mount?} (default: @code{#t})
+This value indicates whether to automatically mount the file system when the
+system is brought up.  When set to @code{#f}, the file system gets an entry
+in @file{/etc/fstab} (read by the @command{mount} command) but is not
+automatically mounted.
+
+@item @code{needed-for-boot?} (default: @code{#f})
+This Boolean value indicates whether the file system is needed when
+booting.  If that is true, then the file system is mounted when the initial
+RAM disk (initrd) is loaded.  This is always the case, for instance, for the
+root file system.
+
+@item @code{check?} (default: @code{#t})
+This Boolean indicates whether the file system needs to be checked for
+errors before being mounted.
+
+@item @code{create-mount-point?} (default: @code{#f})
+When true, the mount point is created if it does not exist yet.
+
+@item @code{dependencies} (default: @code{'()})
+This is a list of @code{<file-system>} or @code{<mapped-device>} objects
+representing file systems that must be mounted or mapped devices that must
+be opened before (and unmounted or closed after) this one.
+
+As an example, consider a hierarchy of mounts: @file{/sys/fs/cgroup} is a
+dependency of @file{/sys/fs/cgroup/cpu} and @file{/sys/fs/cgroup/memory}.
+
+Another example is a file system that depends on a mapped device, for
+example for an encrypted partition (@pxref{Abgebildete Geräte}).
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+The @code{(gnu system file-systems)} exports the following useful variables.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %base-file-systems
+These are essential file systems that are required on normal systems, such
+as @var{%pseudo-terminal-file-system} and @var{%immutable-store} (see
+below.)  Operating system declarations should always contain at least these.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %pseudo-terminal-file-system
+This is the file system to be mounted as @file{/dev/pts}.  It supports
+@dfn{pseudo-terminals} created @i{via} @code{openpty} and similar functions
+(@pxref{Pseudo-Terminals,,, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}).
+Pseudo-terminals are used by terminal emulators such as @command{xterm}.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %shared-memory-file-system
+This file system is mounted as @file{/dev/shm} and is used to support memory
+sharing across processes (@pxref{Memory-mapped I/O, @code{shm_open},, libc,
+The GNU C Library Reference Manual}).
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %immutable-store
+This file system performs a read-only ``bind mount'' of @file{/gnu/store},
+making it read-only for all the users including @code{root}.  This prevents
+against accidental modification by software running as @code{root} or by
+system administrators.
+
+The daemon itself is still able to write to the store: it remounts it
+read-write in its own ``name space.''
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %binary-format-file-system
+The @code{binfmt_misc} file system, which allows handling of arbitrary
+executable file types to be delegated to user space.  This requires the
+@code{binfmt.ko} kernel module to be loaded.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %fuse-control-file-system
+The @code{fusectl} file system, which allows unprivileged users to mount and
+unmount user-space FUSE file systems.  This requires the @code{fuse.ko}
+kernel module to be loaded.
+@end defvr
+
+@node Abgebildete Geräte
+@subsection Abgebildete Geräte
+
+@cindex device mapping
+@cindex mapped devices
+The Linux kernel has a notion of @dfn{device mapping}: a block device, such
+as a hard disk partition, can be @dfn{mapped} into another device, usually
+in @code{/dev/mapper/}, with additional processing over the data that flows
+through it@footnote{Note that the GNU@tie{}Hurd makes no difference between
+the concept of a ``mapped device'' and that of a file system: both boil down
+to @emph{translating} input/output operations made on a file to operations
+on its backing store.  Thus, the Hurd implements mapped devices, like file
+systems, using the generic @dfn{translator} mechanism (@pxref{Translators,,,
+hurd, The GNU Hurd Reference Manual}).}.  A typical example is encryption
+device mapping: all writes to the mapped device are encrypted, and all reads
+are deciphered, transparently.  Guix extends this notion by considering any
+device or set of devices that are @dfn{transformed} in some way to create a
+new device; for instance, RAID devices are obtained by @dfn{assembling}
+several other devices, such as hard disks or partitions, into a new one that
+behaves as one partition.  Other examples, not yet implemented, are LVM
+logical volumes.
+
+Mapped devices are declared using the @code{mapped-device} form, defined as
+follows; for examples, see below.
+
+@deftp {Data Type} mapped-device
+Objects of this type represent device mappings that will be made when the
+system boots up.
+
+@table @code
+@item source
+This is either a string specifying the name of the block device to be
+mapped, such as @code{"/dev/sda3"}, or a list of such strings when several
+devices need to be assembled for creating a new one.
+
+@item target
+This string specifies the name of the resulting mapped device.  For kernel
+mappers such as encrypted devices of type @code{luks-device-mapping},
+specifying @code{"my-partition"} leads to the creation of the
+@code{"/dev/mapper/my-partition"} device.  For RAID devices of type
+@code{raid-device-mapping}, the full device name such as @code{"/dev/md0"}
+needs to be given.
+
+@item type
+This must be a @code{mapped-device-kind} object, which specifies how
+@var{source} is mapped to @var{target}.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} luks-device-mapping
+This defines LUKS block device encryption using the @command{cryptsetup}
+command from the package with the same name.  It relies on the
+@code{dm-crypt} Linux kernel module.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} raid-device-mapping
+This defines a RAID device, which is assembled using the @code{mdadm}
+command from the package with the same name.  It requires a Linux kernel
+module for the appropriate RAID level to be loaded, such as @code{raid456}
+for RAID-4, RAID-5 or RAID-6, or @code{raid10} for RAID-10.
+@end defvr
+
+@cindex disk encryption
+@cindex LUKS
+The following example specifies a mapping from @file{/dev/sda3} to
+@file{/dev/mapper/home} using LUKS---the
+@url{https://gitlab.com/cryptsetup/cryptsetup,Linux Unified Key Setup}, a
+standard mechanism for disk encryption.  The @file{/dev/mapper/home} device
+can then be used as the @code{device} of a @code{file-system} declaration
+(@pxref{Dateisysteme}).
+
+@example
+(mapped-device
+  (source "/dev/sda3")
+  (target "home")
+  (type luks-device-mapping))
+@end example
+
+Alternatively, to become independent of device numbering, one may obtain the
+LUKS UUID (@dfn{unique identifier}) of the source device by a command like:
+
+@example
+cryptsetup luksUUID /dev/sda3
+@end example
+
+and use it as follows:
+
+@example
+(mapped-device
+  (source (uuid "cb67fc72-0d54-4c88-9d4b-b225f30b0f44"))
+  (target "home")
+  (type luks-device-mapping))
+@end example
+
+@cindex swap encryption
+It is also desirable to encrypt swap space, since swap space may contain
+sensitive data.  One way to accomplish that is to use a swap file in a file
+system on a device mapped via LUKS encryption.  In this way, the swap file
+is encrypted because the entire device is encrypted.  @xref{Vor der Installation,,Disk Partitioning}, for an example.
+
+A RAID device formed of the partitions @file{/dev/sda1} and @file{/dev/sdb1}
+may be declared as follows:
+
+@example
+(mapped-device
+  (source (list "/dev/sda1" "/dev/sdb1"))
+  (target "/dev/md0")
+  (type raid-device-mapping))
+@end example
+
+The @file{/dev/md0} device can then be used as the @code{device} of a
+@code{file-system} declaration (@pxref{Dateisysteme}).  Note that the RAID
+level need not be given; it is chosen during the initial creation and
+formatting of the RAID device and is determined automatically later.
+
+
+@node Benutzerkonten
+@subsection Benutzerkonten
+
+@cindex users
+@cindex accounts
+@cindex user accounts
+User accounts and groups are entirely managed through the
+@code{operating-system} declaration.  They are specified with the
+@code{user-account} and @code{user-group} forms:
+
+@example
+(user-account
+  (name "alice")
+  (group "users")
+  (supplementary-groups '("wheel"   ;allow use of sudo, etc.
+                          "audio"   ;sound card
+                          "video"   ;video devices such as webcams
+                          "cdrom")) ;the good ol' CD-ROM
+  (comment "Bob's sister")
+  (home-directory "/home/alice"))
+@end example
+
+When booting or upon completion of @command{guix system reconfigure}, the
+system ensures that only the user accounts and groups specified in the
+@code{operating-system} declaration exist, and with the specified
+properties.  Thus, account or group creations or modifications made by
+directly invoking commands such as @command{useradd} are lost upon
+reconfiguration or reboot.  This ensures that the system remains exactly as
+declared.
+
+@deftp {Data Type} user-account
+Objects of this type represent user accounts.  The following members may be
+specified:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{name}
+The name of the user account.
+
+@item @code{group}
+@cindex groups
+This is the name (a string) or identifier (a number) of the user group this
+account belongs to.
+
+@item @code{supplementary-groups} (default: @code{'()})
+Optionally, this can be defined as a list of group names that this account
+belongs to.
+
+@item @code{uid} (default: @code{#f})
+This is the user ID for this account (a number), or @code{#f}.  In the
+latter case, a number is automatically chosen by the system when the account
+is created.
+
+@item @code{comment} (default: @code{""})
+A comment about the account, such as the account owner's full name.
+
+@item @code{home-directory}
+This is the name of the home directory for the account.
+
+@item @code{create-home-directory?} (default: @code{#t})
+Indicates whether the home directory of this account should be created if it
+does not exist yet.
+
+@item @code{shell} (default: Bash)
+This is a G-expression denoting the file name of a program to be used as the
+shell (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke}).
+
+@item @code{system?} (default: @code{#f})
+This Boolean value indicates whether the account is a ``system'' account.
+System accounts are sometimes treated specially; for instance, graphical
+login managers do not list them.
+
+@anchor{user-account-password}
+@item @code{password} (default: @code{#f})
+You would normally leave this field to @code{#f}, initialize user passwords
+as @code{root} with the @command{passwd} command, and then let users change
+it with @command{passwd}.  Passwords set with @command{passwd} are of course
+preserved across reboot and reconfiguration.
+
+If you @emph{do} want to have a preset password for an account, then this
+field must contain the encrypted password, as a string.  @xref{crypt,,,
+libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}, for more information on password
+encryption, and @ref{Encryption,,, guile, GNU Guile Reference Manual}, for
+information on Guile's @code{crypt} procedure.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@cindex groups
+User group declarations are even simpler:
+
+@example
+(user-group (name "students"))
+@end example
+
+@deftp {Data Type} user-group
+This type is for, well, user groups.  There are just a few fields:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{name}
+The name of the group.
+
+@item @code{id} (default: @code{#f})
+The group identifier (a number).  If @code{#f}, a new number is
+automatically allocated when the group is created.
+
+@item @code{system?} (default: @code{#f})
+This Boolean value indicates whether the group is a ``system'' group.
+System groups have low numerical IDs.
+
+@item @code{password} (default: @code{#f})
+What, user groups can have a password? Well, apparently yes.  Unless
+@code{#f}, this field specifies the password of the group.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+For convenience, a variable lists all the basic user groups one may expect:
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %base-groups
+This is the list of basic user groups that users and/or packages expect to
+be present on the system.  This includes groups such as ``root'', ``wheel'',
+and ``users'', as well as groups used to control access to specific devices
+such as ``audio'', ``disk'', and ``cdrom''.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %base-user-accounts
+This is the list of basic system accounts that programs may expect to find
+on a GNU/Linux system, such as the ``nobody'' account.
+
+Note that the ``root'' account is not included here.  It is a special-case
+and is automatically added whether or not it is specified.
+@end defvr
+
+@node Locales
+@subsection Locales
+
+@cindex locale
+A @dfn{locale} defines cultural conventions for a particular language and
+region of the world (@pxref{Locales,,, libc, The GNU C Library Reference
+Manual}).  Each locale has a name that typically has the form
+@code{@var{language}_@var{territory}.@var{codeset}}---e.g.,
+@code{fr_LU.utf8} designates the locale for the French language, with
+cultural conventions from Luxembourg, and using the UTF-8 encoding.
+
+@cindex locale definition
+Usually, you will want to specify the default locale for the machine using
+the @code{locale} field of the @code{operating-system} declaration
+(@pxref{„operating-system“-Referenz, @code{locale}}).
+
+The selected locale is automatically added to the @dfn{locale definitions}
+known to the system if needed, with its codeset inferred from its
+name---e.g., @code{bo_CN.utf8} will be assumed to use the @code{UTF-8}
+codeset.  Additional locale definitions can be specified in the
+@code{locale-definitions} slot of @code{operating-system}---this is useful,
+for instance, if the codeset could not be inferred from the locale name.
+The default set of locale definitions includes some widely used locales, but
+not all the available locales, in order to save space.
+
+For instance, to add the North Frisian locale for Germany, the value of that
+field may be:
+
+@example
+(cons (locale-definition
+        (name "fy_DE.utf8") (source "fy_DE"))
+      %default-locale-definitions)
+@end example
+
+Likewise, to save space, one might want @code{locale-definitions} to list
+only the locales that are actually used, as in:
+
+@example
+(list (locale-definition
+        (name "ja_JP.eucjp") (source "ja_JP")
+        (charset "EUC-JP")))
+@end example
+
+@vindex LOCPATH
+The compiled locale definitions are available at
+@file{/run/current-system/locale/X.Y}, where @code{X.Y} is the libc version,
+which is the default location where the GNU@tie{}libc provided by Guix looks
+for locale data.  This can be overridden using the @code{LOCPATH}
+environment variable (@pxref{locales-and-locpath, @code{LOCPATH} and locale
+packages}).
+
+The @code{locale-definition} form is provided by the @code{(gnu system
+locale)} module.  Details are given below.
+
+@deftp {Data Type} locale-definition
+This is the data type of a locale definition.
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @code{name}
+The name of the locale.  @xref{Locale Names,,, libc, The GNU C Library
+Reference Manual}, for more information on locale names.
+
+@item @code{source}
+The name of the source for that locale.  This is typically the
+@code{@var{language}_@var{territory}} part of the locale name.
+
+@item @code{charset} (default: @code{"UTF-8"})
+The ``character set'' or ``code set'' for that locale,
+@uref{http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets, as defined by IANA}.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %default-locale-definitions
+A list of commonly used UTF-8 locales, used as the default value of the
+@code{locale-definitions} field of @code{operating-system} declarations.
+
+@cindex locale name
+@cindex normalized codeset in locale names
+These locale definitions use the @dfn{normalized codeset} for the part that
+follows the dot in the name (@pxref{Using gettextized software, normalized
+codeset,, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}).  So for instance it
+has @code{uk_UA.utf8} but @emph{not}, say, @code{uk_UA.UTF-8}.
+@end defvr
+
+@subsubsection Locale Data Compatibility Considerations
+
+@cindex incompatibility, of locale data
+@code{operating-system} declarations provide a @code{locale-libcs} field to
+specify the GNU@tie{}libc packages that are used to compile locale
+declarations (@pxref{„operating-system“-Referenz}).  ``Why would I care?'',
+you may ask.  Well, it turns out that the binary format of locale data is
+occasionally incompatible from one libc version to another.
+
+@c See <https://sourceware.org/ml/libc-alpha/2015-09/msg00575.html>
+@c and <https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/guix-devel/2015-08/msg00737.html>.
+For instance, a program linked against libc version 2.21 is unable to read
+locale data produced with libc 2.22; worse, that program @emph{aborts}
+instead of simply ignoring the incompatible locale data@footnote{Versions
+2.23 and later of GNU@tie{}libc will simply skip the incompatible locale
+data, which is already an improvement.}.  Similarly, a program linked
+against libc 2.22 can read most, but not all, of the locale data from libc
+2.21 (specifically, @code{LC_COLLATE} data is incompatible); thus calls to
+@code{setlocale} may fail, but programs will not abort.
+
+The ``problem'' in GuixSD is that users have a lot of freedom: They can
+choose whether and when to upgrade software in their profiles, and might be
+using a libc version different from the one the system administrator used to
+build the system-wide locale data.
+
+Fortunately, unprivileged users can also install their own locale data and
+define @var{GUIX_LOCPATH} accordingly (@pxref{locales-and-locpath,
+@code{GUIX_LOCPATH} and locale packages}).
+
+Still, it is best if the system-wide locale data at
+@file{/run/current-system/locale} is built for all the libc versions
+actually in use on the system, so that all the programs can access it---this
+is especially crucial on a multi-user system.  To do that, the administrator
+can specify several libc packages in the @code{locale-libcs} field of
+@code{operating-system}:
+
+@example
+(use-package-modules base)
+
+(operating-system
+  ;; @dots{}
+  (locale-libcs (list glibc-2.21 (canonical-package glibc))))
+@end example
+
+This example would lead to a system containing locale definitions for both
+libc 2.21 and the current version of libc in
+@file{/run/current-system/locale}.
+
+
+@node Dienste
+@subsection Dienste
+
+@cindex system services
+An important part of preparing an @code{operating-system} declaration is
+listing @dfn{system services} and their configuration (@pxref{Das Konfigurationssystem nutzen}).  System services are typically daemons launched when
+the system boots, or other actions needed at that time---e.g., configuring
+network access.
+
+GuixSD has a broad definition of ``service'' (@pxref{Dienstkompositionen}),
+but many services are managed by the GNU@tie{}Shepherd (@pxref{Shepherd-Dienste}).  On a running system, the @command{herd} command allows you to
+list the available services, show their status, start and stop them, or do
+other specific operations (@pxref{Jump Start,,, shepherd, The GNU Shepherd
+Manual}).  For example:
+
+@example
+# herd status
+@end example
+
+The above command, run as @code{root}, lists the currently defined
+services.  The @command{herd doc} command shows a synopsis of the given
+service and its associated actions:
+
+@example
+# herd doc nscd
+Run libc's name service cache daemon (nscd).
+
+# herd doc nscd action invalidate
+invalidate: Invalidate the given cache--e.g., 'hosts' for host name lookups.
+@end example
+
+The @command{start}, @command{stop}, and @command{restart} sub-commands have
+the effect you would expect.  For instance, the commands below stop the nscd
+service and restart the Xorg display server:
+
+@example
+# herd stop nscd
+Service nscd has been stopped.
+# herd restart xorg-server
+Service xorg-server has been stopped.
+Service xorg-server has been started.
+@end example
+
+The following sections document the available services, starting with the
+core services, that may be used in an @code{operating-system} declaration.
+
+@menu
+* Basisdienste::             Essenzielle Systemdienste.
+* Geplante Auftragsausführung::  Der mcron-Dienst.
+* Log-Rotation::             Der rottlog-Dienst.
+* Netzwerkdienste::          Netzwerkeinrichtung, SSH-Daemon etc.
+* X Window::                 Graphische Anzeige.
+* Druckdienste::             Unterstützung für lokale und entfernte 
+                               Drucker.
+* Desktop-Dienste::          D-Bus- und Desktop-Dienste.
+* Sound Services::           ALSA and Pulseaudio services.
+* Datenbankdienste::         SQL-Datenbanken, Schlüssel-Wert-Speicher etc.
+* Mail-Dienste::             IMAP, POP3, SMTP und so weiter.
+* Kurznachrichtendienste::   Dienste für Kurznachrichten.
+* Telefondienste::           Telefoniedienste.
+* Überwachungsdienste::     Dienste zur Systemüberwachung.
+* Kerberos-Dienste::         Kerberos-Dienste.
+* Web-Dienste::              Web-Server.
+* Zertifikatsdienste::       TLS-Zertifikate via Let’s Encrypt.
+* DNS-Dienste::              DNS-Daemons.
+* VPN-Dienste::              VPN-Daemons.
+* Network File System::      Dienste mit Bezug zum Netzwerkdateisystem.
+* Kontinuierliche Integration::  Der Cuirass-Dienst.
+* Power Management Services::  Extending battery life.
+* Audio-Dienste::            Der MPD.
+* Virtualisierungsdienste::  Dienste für virtuelle Maschinen.
+* Versionskontrolldienste::  Entfernten Zugang zu Git-Repositorys bieten.
+* Spieldienste::             Spielserver.
+* Verschiedene Dienste::     Andere Dienste.
+@end menu
+
+@node Basisdienste
+@subsubsection Basisdienste
+
+The @code{(gnu services base)} module provides definitions for the basic
+services that one expects from the system.  The services exported by this
+module are listed below.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %base-services
+This variable contains a list of basic services (@pxref{Diensttypen und Dienste}, for more information on service objects) one would expect from
+the system: a login service (mingetty) on each tty, syslogd, the libc name
+service cache daemon (nscd), the udev device manager, and more.
+
+This is the default value of the @code{services} field of
+@code{operating-system} declarations.  Usually, when customizing a system,
+you will want to append services to @var{%base-services}, like this:
+
+@example
+(cons* (avahi-service) (lsh-service) %base-services)
+@end example
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} special-files-service-type
+This is the service that sets up ``special files'' such as @file{/bin/sh};
+an instance of it is part of @code{%base-services}.
+
+The value associated with @code{special-files-service-type} services must be
+a list of tuples where the first element is the ``special file'' and the
+second element is its target.  By default it is:
+
+@cindex @file{/bin/sh}
+@cindex @file{sh}, in @file{/bin}
+@example
+`(("/bin/sh" ,(file-append @var{bash} "/bin/sh")))
+@end example
+
+@cindex @file{/usr/bin/env}
+@cindex @file{env}, in @file{/usr/bin}
+If you want to add, say, @code{/usr/bin/env} to your system, you can change
+it to:
+
+@example
+`(("/bin/sh" ,(file-append @var{bash} "/bin/sh"))
+  ("/usr/bin/env" ,(file-append @var{coreutils} "/bin/env")))
+@end example
+
+Since this is part of @code{%base-services}, you can use
+@code{modify-services} to customize the set of special files (@pxref{Service-Referenz, @code{modify-services}}).  But the simple way to add a special
+file is @i{via} the @code{extra-special-file} procedure (see below.)
+@end defvr
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} extra-special-file @var{file} @var{target}
+Use @var{target} as the ``special file'' @var{file}.
+
+For example, adding the following lines to the @code{services} field of your
+operating system declaration leads to a @file{/usr/bin/env} symlink:
+
+@example
+(extra-special-file "/usr/bin/env"
+                    (file-append coreutils "/bin/env"))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} host-name-service @var{name}
+Return a service that sets the host name to @var{name}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} login-service @var{config}
+Return a service to run login according to @var{config}, a
+@code{<login-configuration>} object, which specifies the message of the day,
+among other things.
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} login-configuration
+This is the data type representing the configuration of login.
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @code{motd}
+@cindex message of the day
+A file-like object containing the ``message of the day''.
+
+@item @code{allow-empty-passwords?} (default: @code{#t})
+Allow empty passwords by default so that first-time users can log in when
+the 'root' account has just been created.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} mingetty-service @var{config}
+Return a service to run mingetty according to @var{config}, a
+@code{<mingetty-configuration>} object, which specifies the tty to run,
+among other things.
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} mingetty-configuration
+This is the data type representing the configuration of Mingetty, which
+provides the default implementation of virtual console log-in.
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @code{tty}
+The name of the console this Mingetty runs on---e.g., @code{"tty1"}.
+
+@item @code{auto-login} (default: @code{#f})
+When true, this field must be a string denoting the user name under which
+the system automatically logs in.  When it is @code{#f}, a user name and
+password must be entered to log in.
+
+@item @code{login-program} (default: @code{#f})
+This must be either @code{#f}, in which case the default log-in program is
+used (@command{login} from the Shadow tool suite), or a gexp denoting the
+name of the log-in program.
+
+@item @code{login-pause?} (default: @code{#f})
+When set to @code{#t} in conjunction with @var{auto-login}, the user will
+have to press a key before the log-in shell is launched.
+
+@item @code{mingetty} (default: @var{mingetty})
+The Mingetty package to use.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} agetty-service @var{config}
+Return a service to run agetty according to @var{config}, an
+@code{<agetty-configuration>} object, which specifies the tty to run, among
+other things.
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} agetty-configuration
+This is the data type representing the configuration of agetty, which
+implements virtual and serial console log-in.  See the @code{agetty(8)} man
+page for more information.
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @code{tty}
+The name of the console this agetty runs on, as a string---e.g.,
+@code{"ttyS0"}. This argument is optional, it will default to a reasonable
+default serial port used by the kernel Linux.
+
+For this, if there is a value for an option @code{agetty.tty} in the kernel
+command line, agetty will extract the device name of the serial port from it
+and use that.
+
+If not and if there is a value for an option @code{console} with a tty in
+the Linux command line, agetty will extract the device name of the serial
+port from it and use that.
+
+In both cases, agetty will leave the other serial device settings (baud rate
+etc.)@: alone---in the hope that Linux pinned them to the correct values.
+
+@item @code{baud-rate} (default: @code{#f})
+A string containing a comma-separated list of one or more baud rates, in
+descending order.
+
+@item @code{term} (default: @code{#f})
+A string containing the value used for the @code{TERM} environment variable.
+
+@item @code{eight-bits?} (default: @code{#f})
+When @code{#t}, the tty is assumed to be 8-bit clean, and parity detection
+is disabled.
+
+@item @code{auto-login} (default: @code{#f})
+When passed a login name, as a string, the specified user will be logged in
+automatically without prompting for their login name or password.
+
+@item @code{no-reset?} (default: @code{#f})
+When @code{#t}, don't reset terminal cflags (control modes).
+
+@item @code{host} (default: @code{#f})
+This accepts a string containing the "login_host", which will be written
+into the @file{/var/run/utmpx} file.
+
+@item @code{remote?} (default: @code{#f})
+When set to @code{#t} in conjunction with @var{host}, this will add an
+@code{-r} fakehost option to the command line of the login program specified
+in @var{login-program}.
+
+@item @code{flow-control?} (default: @code{#f})
+When set to @code{#t}, enable hardware (RTS/CTS) flow control.
+
+@item @code{no-issue?} (default: @code{#f})
+When set to @code{#t}, the contents of the @file{/etc/issue} file will not
+be displayed before presenting the login prompt.
+
+@item @code{init-string} (default: @code{#f})
+This accepts a string that will be sent to the tty or modem before sending
+anything else.  It can be used to initialize a modem.
+
+@item @code{no-clear?} (default: @code{#f})
+When set to @code{#t}, agetty will not clear the screen before showing the
+login prompt.
+
+@item @code{login-program} (default: (file-append shadow "/bin/login"))
+This must be either a gexp denoting the name of a log-in program, or unset,
+in which case the default value is the @command{login} from the Shadow tool
+suite.
+
+@item @code{local-line} (default: @code{#f})
+Control the CLOCAL line flag.  This accepts one of three symbols as
+arguments, @code{'auto}, @code{'always}, or @code{'never}. If @code{#f}, the
+default value chosen by agetty is @code{'auto}.
+
+@item @code{extract-baud?} (default: @code{#f})
+When set to @code{#t}, instruct agetty to try to extract the baud rate from
+the status messages produced by certain types of modems.
+
+@item @code{skip-login?} (default: @code{#f})
+When set to @code{#t}, do not prompt the user for a login name.  This can be
+used with @var{login-program} field to use non-standard login systems.
+
+@item @code{no-newline?} (default: @code{#f})
+When set to @code{#t}, do not print a newline before printing the
+@file{/etc/issue} file.
+
+@c Is this dangerous only when used with login-program, or always?
+@item @code{login-options} (default: @code{#f})
+This option accepts a string containing options that are passed to the login
+program.  When used with the @var{login-program}, be aware that a malicious
+user could try to enter a login name containing embedded options that could
+be parsed by the login program.
+
+@item @code{login-pause} (default: @code{#f})
+When set to @code{#t}, wait for any key before showing the login prompt.
+This can be used in conjunction with @var{auto-login} to save memory by
+lazily spawning shells.
+
+@item @code{chroot} (default: @code{#f})
+Change root to the specified directory.  This option accepts a directory
+path as a string.
+
+@item @code{hangup?} (default: @code{#f})
+Use the Linux system call @code{vhangup} to do a virtual hangup of the
+specified terminal.
+
+@item @code{keep-baud?} (default: @code{#f})
+When set to @code{#t}, try to keep the existing baud rate.  The baud rates
+from @var{baud-rate} are used when agetty receives a @key{BREAK} character.
+
+@item @code{timeout} (default: @code{#f})
+When set to an integer value, terminate if no user name could be read within
+@var{timeout} seconds.
+
+@item @code{detect-case?} (default: @code{#f})
+When set to @code{#t}, turn on support for detecting an uppercase-only
+terminal.  This setting will detect a login name containing only uppercase
+letters as indicating an uppercase-only terminal and turn on some
+upper-to-lower case conversions.  Note that this will not support Unicode
+characters.
+
+@item @code{wait-cr?} (default: @code{#f})
+When set to @code{#t}, wait for the user or modem to send a carriage-return
+or linefeed character before displaying @file{/etc/issue} or login prompt.
+This is typically used with the @var{init-string} option.
+
+@item @code{no-hints?} (default: @code{#f})
+When set to @code{#t}, do not print hints about Num, Caps, and Scroll locks.
+
+@item @code{no-hostname?} (default: @code{#f})
+By default, the hostname is printed.  When this option is set to @code{#t},
+no hostname will be shown at all.
+
+@item @code{long-hostname?} (default: @code{#f})
+By default, the hostname is only printed until the first dot.  When this
+option is set to @code{#t}, the fully qualified hostname by
+@code{gethostname} or @code{getaddrinfo} is shown.
+
+@item @code{erase-characters} (default: @code{#f})
+This option accepts a string of additional characters that should be
+interpreted as backspace when the user types their login name.
+
+@item @code{kill-characters} (default: @code{#f})
+This option accepts a string that should be interpreted to mean "ignore all
+previous characters" (also called a "kill" character) when the types their
+login name.
+
+@item @code{chdir} (default: @code{#f})
+This option accepts, as a string, a directory path that will be changed to
+before login.
+
+@item @code{delay} (default: @code{#f})
+This options accepts, as an integer, the number of seconds to sleep before
+opening the tty and displaying the login prompt.
+
+@item @code{nice} (default: @code{#f})
+This option accepts, as an integer, the nice value with which to run the
+@command{login} program.
+
+@item @code{extra-options} (default: @code{'()})
+This option provides an "escape hatch" for the user to provide arbitrary
+command-line arguments to @command{agetty} as a list of strings.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} kmscon-service-type @var{config}
+Return a service to run
+@uref{https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/kmscon,kmscon} according to
+@var{config}, a @code{<kmscon-configuration>} object, which specifies the
+tty to run, among other things.
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} kmscon-configuration
+This is the data type representing the configuration of Kmscon, which
+implements virtual console log-in.
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @code{virtual-terminal}
+The name of the console this Kmscon runs on---e.g., @code{"tty1"}.
+
+@item @code{login-program} (default: @code{#~(string-append #$shadow "/bin/login")})
+A gexp denoting the name of the log-in program. The default log-in program
+is @command{login} from the Shadow tool suite.
+
+@item @code{login-arguments} (default: @code{'("-p")})
+A list of arguments to pass to @command{login}.
+
+@item @code{auto-login} (default: @code{#f})
+When passed a login name, as a string, the specified user will be logged in
+automatically without prompting for their login name or password.
+
+@item @code{hardware-acceleration?} (default: #f)
+Whether to use hardware acceleration.
+
+@item @code{kmscon} (default: @var{kmscon})
+The Kmscon package to use.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@cindex name service cache daemon
+@cindex nscd
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} nscd-service [@var{config}] [#:glibc glibc] @
+                [#:name-services '()] Return a service that runs the libc name service cache
+daemon (nscd) with the given @var{config}---an @code{<nscd-configuration>}
+object.  @xref{Name Service Switch}, for an example.
+
+For convenience, the Shepherd service for nscd provides the following
+actions:
+
+@table @code
+@item invalidate
+@cindex cache invalidation, nscd
+@cindex nscd, cache invalidation
+This invalidate the given cache.  For instance, running:
+
+@example
+herd invalidate nscd hosts
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+invalidates the host name lookup cache of nscd.
+
+@item statistics
+Running @command{herd statistics nscd} displays information about nscd usage
+and caches.
+@end table
+
+@end deffn
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %nscd-default-configuration
+This is the default @code{<nscd-configuration>} value (see below) used by
+@code{nscd-service}.  It uses the caches defined by
+@var{%nscd-default-caches}; see below.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} nscd-configuration
+This is the data type representing the name service cache daemon (nscd)
+configuration.
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @code{name-services} (default: @code{'()})
+List of packages denoting @dfn{name services} that must be visible to the
+nscd---e.g., @code{(list @var{nss-mdns})}.
+
+@item @code{glibc} (default: @var{glibc})
+Package object denoting the GNU C Library providing the @command{nscd}
+command.
+
+@item @code{log-file} (default: @code{"/var/log/nscd.log"})
+Name of the nscd log file.  This is where debugging output goes when
+@code{debug-level} is strictly positive.
+
+@item @code{debug-level} (default: @code{0})
+Integer denoting the debugging levels.  Higher numbers mean that more
+debugging output is logged.
+
+@item @code{caches} (default: @var{%nscd-default-caches})
+List of @code{<nscd-cache>} objects denoting things to be cached; see below.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} nscd-cache
+Data type representing a cache database of nscd and its parameters.
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @code{database}
+This is a symbol representing the name of the database to be cached.  Valid
+values are @code{passwd}, @code{group}, @code{hosts}, and @code{services},
+which designate the corresponding NSS database (@pxref{NSS Basics,,, libc,
+The GNU C Library Reference Manual}).
+
+@item @code{positive-time-to-live}
+@itemx @code{negative-time-to-live} (default: @code{20})
+A number representing the number of seconds during which a positive or
+negative lookup result remains in cache.
+
+@item @code{check-files?} (default: @code{#t})
+Whether to check for updates of the files corresponding to @var{database}.
+
+For instance, when @var{database} is @code{hosts}, setting this flag
+instructs nscd to check for updates in @file{/etc/hosts} and to take them
+into account.
+
+@item @code{persistent?} (default: @code{#t})
+Whether the cache should be stored persistently on disk.
+
+@item @code{shared?} (default: @code{#t})
+Whether the cache should be shared among users.
+
+@item @code{max-database-size} (default: 32@tie{}MiB)
+Maximum size in bytes of the database cache.
+
+@c XXX: 'suggested-size' and 'auto-propagate?' seem to be expert
+@c settings, so leave them out.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %nscd-default-caches
+List of @code{<nscd-cache>} objects used by default by
+@code{nscd-configuration} (see above).
+
+It enables persistent and aggressive caching of service and host name
+lookups.  The latter provides better host name lookup performance,
+resilience in the face of unreliable name servers, and also better
+privacy---often the result of host name lookups is in local cache, so
+external name servers do not even need to be queried.
+@end defvr
+
+@anchor{syslog-configuration-type}
+@cindex syslog
+@cindex logging
+@deftp {Data Type} syslog-configuration
+This data type represents the configuration of the syslog daemon.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{syslogd} (default: @code{#~(string-append #$inetutils "/libexec/syslogd")})
+The syslog daemon to use.
+
+@item @code{config-file} (default: @code{%default-syslog.conf})
+The syslog configuration file to use.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@anchor{syslog-service}
+@cindex syslog
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} syslog-service @var{config}
+Return a service that runs a syslog daemon according to @var{config}.
+
+@xref{syslogd invocation,,, inetutils, GNU Inetutils}, for more information
+on the configuration file syntax.
+@end deffn
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} guix-service-type
+This is the type of the service that runs the build daemon,
+@command{guix-daemon} (@pxref{Aufruf des guix-daemon}).  Its value must be a
+@code{guix-configuration} record as described below.
+@end defvr
+
+@anchor{guix-configuration-type}
+@deftp {Data Type} guix-configuration
+This data type represents the configuration of the Guix build daemon.
+@xref{Aufruf des guix-daemon}, for more information.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{guix} (default: @var{guix})
+The Guix package to use.
+
+@item @code{build-group} (default: @code{"guixbuild"})
+Name of the group for build user accounts.
+
+@item @code{build-accounts} (default: @code{10})
+Number of build user accounts to create.
+
+@item @code{authorize-key?} (default: @code{#t})
+@cindex Substitute, deren Autorisierung
+Whether to authorize the substitute keys listed in
+@code{authorized-keys}---by default that of @code{hydra.gnu.org}
+(@pxref{Substitute}).
+
+@vindex %default-authorized-guix-keys
+@item @code{authorized-keys} (default: @var{%default-authorized-guix-keys})
+The list of authorized key files for archive imports, as a list of
+string-valued gexps (@pxref{Aufruf von guix archive}).  By default, it
+contains that of @code{hydra.gnu.org} (@pxref{Substitute}).
+
+@item @code{use-substitutes?} (default: @code{#t})
+Whether to use substitutes.
+
+@item @code{substitute-urls} (default: @var{%default-substitute-urls})
+The list of URLs where to look for substitutes by default.
+
+@item @code{max-silent-time} (default: @code{0})
+@itemx @code{timeout} (default: @code{0})
+The number of seconds of silence and the number of seconds of activity,
+respectively, after which a build process times out.  A value of zero
+disables the timeout.
+
+@item @code{log-compression} (default: @code{'bzip2})
+The type of compression used for build logs---one of @code{gzip},
+@code{bzip2}, or @code{none}.
+
+@item @code{extra-options} (default: @code{'()})
+List of extra command-line options for @command{guix-daemon}.
+
+@item @code{log-file} (default: @code{"/var/log/guix-daemon.log"})
+File where @command{guix-daemon}'s standard output and standard error are
+written.
+
+@item @code{http-proxy} (default: @code{#f})
+The HTTP proxy used for downloading fixed-output derivations and
+substitutes.
+
+@item @code{tmpdir} (default: @code{#f})
+A directory path where the @command{guix-daemon} will perform builds.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} udev-service [#:udev @var{eudev} #:rules @code{'()}]
+Run @var{udev}, which populates the @file{/dev} directory dynamically.  udev
+rules can be provided as a list of files through the @var{rules} variable.
+The procedures @var{udev-rule} and @var{file->udev-rule} from @code{(gnu
+services base)} simplify the creation of such rule files.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} udev-rule [@var{file-name} @var{contents}]
+Return a udev-rule file named @var{file-name} containing the rules defined
+by the @var{contents} literal.
+
+In the following example, a rule for a USB device is defined to be stored in
+the file @file{90-usb-thing.rules}.  The rule runs a script upon detecting a
+USB device with a given product identifier.
+
+@example
+(define %example-udev-rule
+  (udev-rule
+    "90-usb-thing.rules"
+    (string-append "ACTION==\"add\", SUBSYSTEM==\"usb\", "
+                   "ATTR@{product@}==\"Example\", "
+                   "RUN+=\"/path/to/script\"")))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+Here we show how the default @var{udev-service} can be extended with it.
+
+@example
+(operating-system
+ ;; @dots{}
+ (services
+ (modify-services %desktop-services
+   (udev-service-type config =>
+     (udev-configuration (inherit config)
+      (rules (append (udev-configuration-rules config)
+                     (list %example-udev-rule))))))))
+@end example
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} file->udev-rule [@var{file-name} @var{file}]
+Return a udev file named @var{file-name} containing the rules defined within
+@var{file}, a file-like object.
+
+The following example showcases how we can use an existing rule file.
+
+@example
+(use-modules (guix download)     ;for url-fetch
+             (guix packages)     ;for origin
+             ;; @dots{})
+
+(define %android-udev-rules
+  (file->udev-rule
+    "51-android-udev.rules"
+    (let ((version "20170910"))
+      (origin
+       (method url-fetch)
+       (uri (string-append "https://raw.githubusercontent.com/M0Rf30/"
+                           "android-udev-rules/" version "/51-android.rules"))
+       (sha256
+        (base32 "0lmmagpyb6xsq6zcr2w1cyx9qmjqmajkvrdbhjx32gqf1d9is003"))))))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+Additionally, Guix package definitions can be included in @var{rules} in
+order to extend the udev rules with the definitions found under their
+@file{lib/udev/rules.d} sub-directory.  In lieu of the previous
+@var{file->udev-rule} example, we could have used the
+@var{android-udev-rules} package which exists in Guix in the @code{(gnu
+packages android)} module.
+
+The following example shows how to use the @var{android-udev-rules} package
+so that the Android tool @command{adb} can detect devices without root
+privileges.  It also details how to create the @code{adbusers} group, which
+is required for the proper functioning of the rules defined within the
+@var{android-udev-rules} package.  To create such a group, we must define it
+both as part of the @var{supplementary-groups} of our @var{user-account}
+declaration, as well as in the @var{groups} field of the
+@var{operating-system} record.
+
+@example
+(use-modules (gnu packages android)  ;for android-udev-rules
+             (gnu system shadow)     ;for user-group
+             ;; @dots{})
+
+(operating-system
+  ;; @dots{}
+  (users (cons (user-acount
+                ;; @dots{}
+                (supplementary-groups
+                 '("adbusers"   ;for adb
+                   "wheel" "netdev" "audio" "video"))
+                ;; @dots{})))
+
+  (groups (cons (user-group (system? #t) (name "adbusers"))
+                %base-groups))
+
+  ;; @dots{}
+
+  (services
+    (modify-services %desktop-services
+      (udev-service-type config =>
+       (udev-configuration (inherit config)
+       (rules (cons* android-udev-rules
+              (udev-configuration-rules config))))))))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} urandom-seed-service-type
+Save some entropy in @var{%random-seed-file} to seed @file{/dev/urandom}
+when rebooting.  It also tries to seed @file{/dev/urandom} from
+@file{/dev/hwrng} while booting, if @file{/dev/hwrng} exists and is
+readable.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %random-seed-file
+This is the name of the file where some random bytes are saved by
+@var{urandom-seed-service} to seed @file{/dev/urandom} when rebooting.  It
+defaults to @file{/var/lib/random-seed}.
+@end defvr
+
+@cindex keymap
+@cindex keyboard
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} console-keymap-service @var{files} ...
+@cindex keyboard layout
+Return a service to load console keymaps from @var{files} using
+@command{loadkeys} command.  Most likely, you want to load some default
+keymap, which can be done like this:
+
+@example
+(console-keymap-service "dvorak")
+@end example
+
+Or, for example, for a Swedish keyboard, you may need to combine the
+following keymaps:
+@example
+(console-keymap-service "se-lat6" "se-fi-lat6")
+@end example
+
+Also you can specify a full file name (or file names) of your keymap(s).
+See @code{man loadkeys} for details.
+
+@end deffn
+
+@cindex mouse
+@cindex gpm
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} gpm-service-type
+This is the type of the service that runs GPM, the @dfn{general-purpose
+mouse daemon}, which provides mouse support to the Linux console.  GPM
+allows users to use the mouse in the console, notably to select, copy, and
+paste text.
+
+The value for services of this type must be a @code{gpm-configuration} (see
+below).  This service is not part of @var{%base-services}.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} gpm-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of GPM.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{options} (default: @code{%default-gpm-options})
+Command-line options passed to @command{gpm}.  The default set of options
+instruct @command{gpm} to listen to mouse events on @file{/dev/input/mice}.
+@xref{Command Line,,, gpm, gpm manual}, for more information.
+
+@item @code{gpm} (default: @code{gpm})
+The GPM package to use.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@anchor{guix-publish-service-type}
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} guix-publish-service-type
+This is the service type for @command{guix publish} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix publish}).  Its value must be a @code{guix-configuration} object, as
+described below.
+
+This assumes that @file{/etc/guix} already contains a signing key pair as
+created by @command{guix archive --generate-key} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix archive}).  If that is not the case, the service will fail to start.
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} guix-publish-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of the @code{guix publish} service.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{guix} (default: @code{guix})
+The Guix package to use.
+
+@item @code{port} (default: @code{80})
+The TCP port to listen for connections.
+
+@item @code{host} (default: @code{"localhost"})
+The host (and thus, network interface) to listen to.  Use @code{"0.0.0.0"}
+to listen on all the network interfaces.
+
+@item @code{compression-level} (Vorgabe: @code{3})
+The gzip compression level at which substitutes are compressed.  Use
+@code{0} to disable compression altogether, and @code{9} to get the best
+compression ratio at the expense of increased CPU usage.
+
+@item @code{nar-path} (default: @code{"nar"})
+The URL path at which ``nars'' can be fetched.  @xref{Aufruf von guix publish,
+@code{--nar-path}}, for details.
+
+@item @code{cache} (default: @code{#f})
+When it is @code{#f}, disable caching and instead generate archives on
+demand.  Otherwise, this should be the name of a directory---e.g.,
+@code{"/var/cache/guix/publish"}---where @command{guix publish} caches
+archives and meta-data ready to be sent.  @xref{Aufruf von guix publish,
+@option{--cache}}, for more information on the tradeoffs involved.
+
+@item @code{workers} (default: @code{#f})
+When it is an integer, this is the number of worker threads used for
+caching; when @code{#f}, the number of processors is used.  @xref{Aufruf von guix publish, @option{--workers}}, for more information.
+
+@item @code{ttl} (default: @code{#f})
+When it is an integer, this denotes the @dfn{time-to-live} in seconds of the
+published archives.  @xref{Aufruf von guix publish, @option{--ttl}}, for more
+information.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@anchor{rngd-service}
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} rngd-service [#:rng-tools @var{rng-tools}] @
+            [#:device "/dev/hwrng"] Return a service that runs the @command{rngd}
+program from @var{rng-tools} to add @var{device} to the kernel's entropy
+pool.  The service will fail if @var{device} does not exist.
+@end deffn
+
+@anchor{pam-limits-service}
+@cindex session limits
+@cindex ulimit
+@cindex priority
+@cindex realtime
+@cindex jackd
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} pam-limits-service [#:limits @code{'()}]
+
+Return a service that installs a configuration file for the
+@uref{http://linux-pam.org/Linux-PAM-html/sag-pam_limits.html,
+@code{pam_limits} module}.  The procedure optionally takes a list of
+@code{pam-limits-entry} values, which can be used to specify @code{ulimit}
+limits and nice priority limits to user sessions.
+
+The following limits definition sets two hard and soft limits for all login
+sessions of users in the @code{realtime} group:
+
+@example
+(pam-limits-service
+ (list
+  (pam-limits-entry "@@realtime" 'both 'rtprio 99)
+  (pam-limits-entry "@@realtime" 'both 'memlock 'unlimited)))
+@end example
+
+The first entry increases the maximum realtime priority for non-privileged
+processes; the second entry lifts any restriction of the maximum address
+space that can be locked in memory.  These settings are commonly used for
+real-time audio systems.
+@end deffn
+
+@node Geplante Auftragsausführung
+@subsubsection Geplante Auftragsausführung
+
+@cindex cron
+@cindex mcron
+@cindex scheduling jobs
+The @code{(gnu services mcron)} module provides an interface to
+GNU@tie{}mcron, a daemon to run jobs at scheduled times (@pxref{Top,,,
+mcron, GNU@tie{}mcron}).  GNU@tie{}mcron is similar to the traditional Unix
+@command{cron} daemon; the main difference is that it is implemented in
+Guile Scheme, which provides a lot of flexibility when specifying the
+scheduling of jobs and their actions.
+
+The example below defines an operating system that runs the
+@command{updatedb} (@pxref{Invoking updatedb,,, find, Finding Files})  and
+the @command{guix gc} commands (@pxref{Aufruf von guix gc}) daily, as well as
+the @command{mkid} command on behalf of an unprivileged user (@pxref{mkid
+invocation,,, idutils, ID Database Utilities}).  It uses gexps to introduce
+job definitions that are passed to mcron (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke}).
+
+@lisp
+(use-modules (guix) (gnu) (gnu services mcron))
+(use-package-modules base idutils)
+
+(define updatedb-job
+  ;; Run 'updatedb' at 3AM every day.  Here we write the
+  ;; job's action as a Scheme procedure.
+  #~(job '(next-hour '(3))
+         (lambda ()
+           (execl (string-append #$findutils "/bin/updatedb")
+                  "updatedb"
+                  "--prunepaths=/tmp /var/tmp /gnu/store"))))
+
+(define garbage-collector-job
+  ;; Collect garbage 5 minutes after midnight every day.
+  ;; The job's action is a shell command.
+  #~(job "5 0 * * *"            ;Vixie cron syntax
+         "guix gc -F 1G"))
+
+(define idutils-job
+  ;; Update the index database as user "charlie" at 12:15PM
+  ;; and 19:15PM.  This runs from the user's home directory.
+  #~(job '(next-minute-from (next-hour '(12 19)) '(15))
+         (string-append #$idutils "/bin/mkid src")
+         #:user "charlie"))
+
+(operating-system
+  ;; @dots{}
+  (services (cons (mcron-service (list garbage-collector-job
+                                       updatedb-job
+                                       idutils-job))
+                  %base-services)))
+@end lisp
+
+@xref{Guile Syntax, mcron job specifications,, mcron, GNU@tie{}mcron}, for
+more information on mcron job specifications.  Below is the reference of the
+mcron service.
+
+On a running system, you can use the @code{schedule} action of the service
+to visualize the mcron jobs that will be executed next:
+
+@example
+# herd schedule mcron
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The example above lists the next five tasks that will be executed, but you
+can also specify the number of tasks to display:
+
+@example
+# herd schedule mcron 10
+@end example
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} mcron-service @var{jobs} [#:mcron @var{mcron}]
+Return an mcron service running @var{mcron} that schedules @var{jobs}, a
+list of gexps denoting mcron job specifications.
+
+This is a shorthand for:
+@example
+(service mcron-service-type
+         (mcron-configuration (mcron mcron) (jobs jobs)))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} mcron-service-type
+This is the type of the @code{mcron} service, whose value is an
+@code{mcron-configuration} object.
+
+This service type can be the target of a service extension that provides it
+additional job specifications (@pxref{Dienstkompositionen}).  In other
+words, it is possible to define services that provide additional mcron jobs
+to run.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} mcron-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of mcron.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{mcron} (default: @var{mcron})
+The mcron package to use.
+
+@item @code{jobs}
+This is a list of gexps (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke}), where each gexp corresponds
+to an mcron job specification (@pxref{Syntax, mcron job specifications,,
+mcron, GNU@tie{}mcron}).
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+
+@node Log-Rotation
+@subsubsection Log-Rotation
+
+@cindex rottlog
+@cindex log rotation
+@cindex logging
+Log files such as those found in @file{/var/log} tend to grow endlessly, so
+it's a good idea to @dfn{rotate} them once in a while---i.e., archive their
+contents in separate files, possibly compressed.  The @code{(gnu services
+admin)} module provides an interface to GNU@tie{}Rot[t]log, a log rotation
+tool (@pxref{Top,,, rottlog, GNU Rot[t]log Manual}).
+
+The example below defines an operating system that provides log rotation
+with the default settings, for commonly encountered log files.
+
+@lisp
+(use-modules (guix) (gnu))
+(use-service-modules admin mcron)
+(use-package-modules base idutils)
+
+(operating-system
+  ;; @dots{}
+  (services (cons (service rottlog-service-type)
+                  %base-services)))
+@end lisp
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} rottlog-service-type
+This is the type of the Rottlog service, whose value is a
+@code{rottlog-configuration} object.
+
+Other services can extend this one with new @code{log-rotation} objects (see
+below), thereby augmenting the set of files to be rotated.
+
+This service type can define mcron jobs (@pxref{Geplante Auftragsausführung}) to
+run the rottlog service.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} rottlog-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of rottlog.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{rottlog} (default: @code{rottlog})
+The Rottlog package to use.
+
+@item @code{rc-file} (default: @code{(file-append rottlog "/etc/rc")})
+The Rottlog configuration file to use (@pxref{Mandatory RC Variables,,,
+rottlog, GNU Rot[t]log Manual}).
+
+@item @code{rotations} (default: @code{%default-rotations})
+A list of @code{log-rotation} objects as defined below.
+
+@item @code{jobs}
+This is a list of gexps where each gexp corresponds to an mcron job
+specification (@pxref{Geplante Auftragsausführung}).
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} log-rotation
+Data type representing the rotation of a group of log files.
+
+Taking an example from the Rottlog manual (@pxref{Period Related File
+Examples,,, rottlog, GNU Rot[t]log Manual}), a log rotation might be defined
+like this:
+
+@example
+(log-rotation
+  (frequency 'daily)
+  (files '("/var/log/apache/*"))
+  (options '("storedir apache-archives"
+             "rotate 6"
+             "notifempty"
+             "nocompress")))
+@end example
+
+The list of fields is as follows:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{frequency} (default: @code{'weekly})
+The log rotation frequency, a symbol.
+
+@item @code{files}
+The list of files or file glob patterns to rotate.
+
+@item @code{options} (default: @code{'()})
+The list of rottlog options for this rotation (@pxref{Configuration
+parameters,,, rottlog, GNU Rot[t]lg Manual}).
+
+@item @code{post-rotate} (default: @code{#f})
+Either @code{#f} or a gexp to execute once the rotation has completed.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %default-rotations
+Specifies weekly rotation of @var{%rotated-files} and a couple of other
+files.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %rotated-files
+The list of syslog-controlled files to be rotated.  By default it is:
+@code{'("/var/log/messages" "/var/log/secure")}.
+@end defvr
+
+@node Netzwerkdienste
+@subsubsection Netzwerkdienste
+
+The @code{(gnu services networking)} module provides services to configure
+the network interface.
+
+@cindex DHCP, networking service
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} dhcp-client-service-type
+This is the type of services that run @var{dhcp}, a Dynamic Host
+Configuration Protocol (DHCP) client, on all the non-loopback network
+interfaces.  Its value is the DHCP client package to use, @code{isc-dhcp} by
+default.
+@end defvr
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} dhcpd-service-type
+This type defines a service that runs a DHCP daemon.  To create a service of
+this type, you must supply a @code{<dhcpd-configuration>}.  For example:
+
+@example
+(service dhcpd-service-type
+         (dhcpd-configuration
+          (config-file (local-file "my-dhcpd.conf"))
+          (interfaces '("enp0s25"))))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} dhcpd-configuration
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @code{isc-dhcp})
+The package that provides the DHCP daemon.  This package is expected to
+provide the daemon at @file{sbin/dhcpd} relative to its output directory.
+The default package is the @uref{http://www.isc.org/products/DHCP, ISC's
+DHCP server}.
+@item @code{config-file} (default: @code{#f})
+The configuration file to use.  This is required.  It will be passed to
+@code{dhcpd} via its @code{-cf} option.  This may be any ``file-like''
+object (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke, file-like objects}).  See @code{man
+dhcpd.conf} for details on the configuration file syntax.
+@item @code{version} (default: @code{"4"})
+The DHCP version to use.  The ISC DHCP server supports the values ``4'',
+``6'', and ``4o6''.  These correspond to the @code{dhcpd} program options
+@code{-4}, @code{-6}, and @code{-4o6}.  See @code{man dhcpd} for details.
+@item @code{run-directory} (default: @code{"/run/dhcpd"})
+The run directory to use.  At service activation time, this directory will
+be created if it does not exist.
+@item @code{pid-file} (default: @code{"/run/dhcpd/dhcpd.pid"})
+The PID file to use.  This corresponds to the @code{-pf} option of
+@code{dhcpd}.  See @code{man dhcpd} for details.
+@item @code{interfaces} (default: @code{'()})
+The names of the network interfaces on which dhcpd should listen for
+broadcasts.  If this list is not empty, then its elements (which must be
+strings) will be appended to the @code{dhcpd} invocation when starting the
+daemon.  It may not be necessary to explicitly specify any interfaces here;
+see @code{man dhcpd} for details.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} static-networking-service-type
+@c TODO Document <static-networking> data structures.
+This is the type for statically-configured network interfaces.
+@end defvr
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} static-networking-service @var{interface} @var{ip} @
+       [#:netmask #f] [#:gateway #f] [#:name-servers @code{'()}] @ [#:requirement
+@code{'(udev)}] Return a service that starts @var{interface} with address
+@var{ip}.  If @var{netmask} is true, use it as the network mask.  If
+@var{gateway} is true, it must be a string specifying the default network
+gateway.  @var{requirement} can be used to declare a dependency on another
+service before configuring the interface.
+
+This procedure can be called several times, one for each network interface
+of interest.  Behind the scenes what it does is extend
+@code{static-networking-service-type} with additional network interfaces to
+handle.
+
+For example:
+
+@example
+(static-networking-service "eno1" "192.168.1.82"
+                           #:gateway "192.168.1.2"
+                           #:name-servers '("192.168.1.2"))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@cindex wicd
+@cindex wireless
+@cindex WiFi
+@cindex network management
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} wicd-service [#:wicd @var{wicd}]
+Return a service that runs @url{https://launchpad.net/wicd,Wicd}, a network
+management daemon that aims to simplify wired and wireless networking.
+
+This service adds the @var{wicd} package to the global profile, providing
+several commands to interact with the daemon and configure networking:
+@command{wicd-client}, a graphical user interface, and the
+@command{wicd-cli} and @command{wicd-curses} user interfaces.
+@end deffn
+
+@cindex ModemManager
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} modem-manager-service-type
+This is the service type for the
+@uref{https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/ModemManager, ModemManager}
+service. The value for this service type is a
+@code{modem-manager-configuration} record.
+
+This service is part of @code{%desktop-services} (@pxref{Desktop-Dienste}).
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} modem-manager-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of ModemManager.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{modem-manager} (default: @code{modem-manager})
+The ModemManager package to use.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@cindex NetworkManager
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} network-manager-service-type
+This is the service type for the
+@uref{https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/NetworkManager, NetworkManager}
+service. The value for this service type is a
+@code{network-manager-configuration} record.
+
+This service is part of @code{%desktop-services} (@pxref{Desktop-Dienste}).
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} network-manager-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of NetworkManager.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{network-manager} (default: @code{network-manager})
+The NetworkManager package to use.
+
+@item @code{dns} (default: @code{"default"})
+Processing mode for DNS, which affects how NetworkManager uses the
+@code{resolv.conf} configuration file.
+
+@table @samp
+@item default
+NetworkManager will update @code{resolv.conf} to reflect the nameservers
+provided by currently active connections.
+
+@item dnsmasq
+NetworkManager will run @code{dnsmasq} as a local caching nameserver, using
+a "split DNS" configuration if you are connected to a VPN, and then update
+@code{resolv.conf} to point to the local nameserver.
+
+@item none
+NetworkManager will not modify @code{resolv.conf}.
+@end table
+
+@item @code{vpn-plugins} (default: @code{'()})
+This is the list of available plugins for virtual private networks (VPNs).
+An example of this is the @code{network-manager-openvpn} package, which
+allows NetworkManager to manage VPNs @i{via} OpenVPN.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@cindex Connman
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} connman-service-type
+This is the service type to run @url{https://01.org/connman,Connman}, a
+network connection manager.
+
+Its value must be an @code{connman-configuration} record as in this example:
+
+@example
+(service connman-service-type
+         (connman-configuration
+           (disable-vpn? #t)))
+@end example
+
+See below for details about @code{connman-configuration}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} connman-configuration
+Data Type representing the configuration of connman.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{connman} (default: @var{connman})
+The connman package to use.
+
+@item @code{disable-vpn?} (default: @code{#f})
+When true, disable connman's vpn plugin.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@cindex WPA Supplicant
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} wpa-supplicant-service-type
+This is the service type to run @url{https://w1.fi/wpa_supplicant/,WPA
+supplicant}, an authentication daemon required to authenticate against
+encrypted WiFi or ethernet networks.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} wpa-supplicant-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of WPA Supplicant.
+
+It takes the following parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{wpa-supplicant} (default: @code{wpa-supplicant})
+The WPA Supplicant package to use.
+
+@item @code{dbus?} (default: @code{#t})
+Whether to listen for requests on D-Bus.
+
+@item @code{pid-file} (default: @code{"/var/run/wpa_supplicant.pid"})
+Where to store the PID file.
+
+@item @code{interface} (default: @code{#f})
+If this is set, it must specify the name of a network interface that WPA
+supplicant will control.
+
+@item @code{config-file} (default: @code{#f})
+Optional configuration file to use.
+
+@item @code{extra-options} (default: @code{'()})
+List of additional command-line arguments to pass to the daemon.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@cindex iptables
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} iptables-service-type
+This is the service type to set up an iptables configuration.  iptables is a
+packet filtering framework supported by the Linux kernel.  This service
+supports configuring iptables for both IPv4 and IPv6.  A simple example
+configuration rejecting all incoming connections except those to the ssh
+port 22 is shown below.
+
+@lisp
+(service iptables-service-type
+         (iptables-configuration
+          (ipv4-rules (plain-file "iptables.rules" "*filter
+:INPUT ACCEPT
+:FORWARD ACCEPT
+:OUTPUT ACCEPT
+-A INPUT -p tcp --dport 22 -j ACCEPT
+-A INPUT -j REJECT --reject-with icmp-port-unreachable
+COMMIT
+"))
+          (ipv6-rules (plain-file "ip6tables.rules" "*filter
+:INPUT ACCEPT
+:FORWARD ACCEPT
+:OUTPUT ACCEPT
+-A INPUT -p tcp --dport 22 -j ACCEPT
+-A INPUT -j REJECT --reject-with icmp6-port-unreachable
+COMMIT
+"))))
+@end lisp
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} iptables-configuration
+The data type representing the configuration of iptables.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{iptables} (default: @code{iptables})
+The iptables package that provides @code{iptables-restore} and
+@code{ip6tables-restore}.
+@item @code{ipv4-rules} (default: @code{%iptables-accept-all-rules})
+The iptables rules to use.  It will be passed to @code{iptables-restore}.
+This may be any ``file-like'' object (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke, file-like
+objects}).
+@item @code{ipv6-rules} (default: @code{%iptables-accept-all-rules})
+The ip6tables rules to use.  It will be passed to @code{ip6tables-restore}.
+This may be any ``file-like'' object (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke, file-like
+objects}).
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@cindex NTP (Network Time Protocol), service
+@cindex real time clock
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} ntp-service-type
+This is the type of the service running the @uref{http://www.ntp.org,
+Network Time Protocol (NTP)} daemon, @command{ntpd}.  The daemon will keep
+the system clock synchronized with that of the specified NTP servers.
+
+The value of this service is an @code{ntpd-configuration} object, as
+described below.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} ntp-configuration
+This is the data type for the NTP service configuration.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{servers} (default: @code{%ntp-servers})
+This is the list of servers (host names) with which @command{ntpd} will be
+synchronized.
+
+@item @code{allow-large-adjustment?} (default: @code{#f})
+This determines whether @command{ntpd} is allowed to make an initial
+adjustment of more than 1,000 seconds.
+
+@item @code{ntp} (default: @code{ntp})
+The NTP package to use.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %ntp-servers
+List of host names used as the default NTP servers.  These are servers of
+the @uref{https://www.ntppool.org/en/, NTP Pool Project}.
+@end defvr
+
+@cindex OpenNTPD
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} openntpd-service-type
+Run the @command{ntpd}, the Network Time Protocol (NTP) daemon, as
+implemented by @uref{http://www.openntpd.org, OpenNTPD}.  The daemon will
+keep the system clock synchronized with that of the given servers.
+
+@example
+(service
+ openntpd-service-type
+ (openntpd-configuration
+  (listen-on '("127.0.0.1" "::1"))
+  (sensor '("udcf0 correction 70000"))
+  (constraint-from '("www.gnu.org"))
+  (constraints-from '("https://www.google.com/"))
+  (allow-large-adjustment? #t)))
+
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} openntpd-configuration
+@table @asis
+@item @code{openntpd} (default: @code{(file-append openntpd "/sbin/ntpd")})
+The openntpd executable to use.
+@item @code{listen-on} (default: @code{'("127.0.0.1" "::1")})
+A list of local IP addresses or hostnames the ntpd daemon should listen on.
+@item @code{query-from} (default: @code{'()})
+A list of local IP address the ntpd daemon should use for outgoing queries.
+@item @code{sensor} (default: @code{'()})
+Specify a list of timedelta sensor devices ntpd should use.  @code{ntpd}
+will listen to each sensor that acutally exists and ignore non-existant
+ones.  See @uref{https://man.openbsd.org/ntpd.conf, upstream documentation}
+for more information.
+@item @code{server} (default: @var{%ntp-servers})
+Specify a list of IP addresses or hostnames of NTP servers to synchronize
+to.
+@item @code{servers} (default: @code{'()})
+Specify a list of IP addresses or hostnames of NTP pools to synchronize to.
+@item @code{constraint-from} (default: @code{'()})
+@code{ntpd} can be configured to query the ‘Date’ from trusted HTTPS servers
+via TLS.  This time information is not used for precision but acts as an
+authenticated constraint, thereby reducing the impact of unauthenticated NTP
+man-in-the-middle attacks.  Specify a list of URLs, IP addresses or
+hostnames of HTTPS servers to provide a constraint.
+@item @code{constraints-from} (default: @code{'()})
+As with constraint from, specify a list of URLs, IP addresses or hostnames
+of HTTPS servers to provide a constraint.  Should the hostname resolve to
+multiple IP addresses, @code{ntpd} will calculate a median constraint from
+all of them.
+@item @code{allow-large-adjustment?} (default: @code{#f})
+Determines if @code{ntpd} is allowed to make an initial adjustment of more
+than 180 seconds.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@cindex inetd
+@deffn {Scheme variable} inetd-service-type
+This service runs the @command{inetd} (@pxref{inetd invocation,,, inetutils,
+GNU Inetutils}) daemon.  @command{inetd} listens for connections on internet
+sockets, and lazily starts the specified server program when a connection is
+made on one of these sockets.
+
+The value of this service is an @code{inetd-configuration} object.  The
+following example configures the @command{inetd} daemon to provide the
+built-in @command{echo} service, as well as an smtp service which forwards
+smtp traffic over ssh to a server @code{smtp-server} behind a gateway
+@code{hostname}:
+
+@example
+(service
+ inetd-service-type
+ (inetd-configuration
+  (entries (list
+            (inetd-entry
+             (name "echo")
+             (socket-type 'stream)
+             (protocol "tcp")
+             (wait? #f)
+             (user "root"))
+            (inetd-entry
+             (node "127.0.0.1")
+             (name "smtp")
+             (socket-type 'stream)
+             (protocol "tcp")
+             (wait? #f)
+             (user "root")
+             (program (file-append openssh "/bin/ssh"))
+             (arguments
+              '("ssh" "-qT" "-i" "/path/to/ssh_key"
+                "-W" "smtp-server:25" "user@@hostname")))))
+@end example
+
+See below for more details about @code{inetd-configuration}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} inetd-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of @command{inetd}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{program} (default: @code{(file-append inetutils "/libexec/inetd")})
+The @command{inetd} executable to use.
+
+@item @code{entries} (default: @code{'()})
+A list of @command{inetd} service entries.  Each entry should be created by
+the @code{inetd-entry} constructor.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} inetd-entry
+Data type representing an entry in the @command{inetd} configuration.  Each
+entry corresponds to a socket where @command{inetd} will listen for
+requests.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{node} (Vorgabe: @code{#f})
+Optional string, a comma-separated list of local addresses @command{inetd}
+should use when listening for this service.  @xref{Configuration file,,,
+inetutils, GNU Inetutils} for a complete description of all options.
+@item @code{name}
+A string, the name must correspond to an entry in @code{/etc/services}.
+@item @code{socket-type}
+One of @code{'stream}, @code{'dgram}, @code{'raw}, @code{'rdm} or
+@code{'seqpacket}.
+@item @code{protocol}
+A string, must correspond to an entry in @code{/etc/protocols}.
+@item @code{wait?} (Vorgabe: @code{#t})
+Whether @command{inetd} should wait for the server to exit before listening
+to new service requests.
+@item @code{user}
+A string containing the user (and, optionally, group) name of the user as
+whom the server should run.  The group name can be specified in a suffix,
+separated by a colon or period, i.e.@: @code{"user"}, @code{"user:group"} or
+@code{"user.group"}.
+@item @code{program} (default: @code{"internal"})
+The server program which will serve the requests, or @code{"internal"} if
+@command{inetd} should use a built-in service.
+@item @code{arguments} (default: @code{'()})
+A list strings or file-like objects, which are the server program's
+arguments, starting with the zeroth argument, i.e.@: the name of the program
+itself.  For @command{inetd}'s internal services, this entry must be
+@code{'()} or @code{'("internal")}.
+@end table
+
+@xref{Configuration file,,, inetutils, GNU Inetutils} for a more detailed
+discussion of each configuration field.
+@end deftp
+
+@cindex Tor
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} tor-service-type
+This is the type for a service that runs the @uref{https://torproject.org,
+Tor} anonymous networking daemon.  The service is configured using a
+@code{<tor-configuration>} record.  By default, the Tor daemon runs as the
+@code{tor} unprivileged user, which is a member of the @code{tor} group.
+
+@end defvr
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} tor-service [@var{config-file}] [#:tor @var{tor}]
+This procedure is deprecated and will be removed in a future release.
+Return a service of the @code{tor-service-type} type.  @var{config-file} and
+@var{tor} have the same meaning as in @code{<tor-configuration>}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} tor-configuration
+@table @asis
+@item @code{tor} (default: @code{tor})
+The package that provides the Tor daemon.  This package is expected to
+provide the daemon at @file{bin/tor} relative to its output directory.  The
+default package is the @uref{https://www.torproject.org, Tor Project's}
+implementation.
+
+@item @code{config-file} (default: @code{(plain-file "empty" "")})
+The configuration file to use.  It will be appended to a default
+configuration file, and the final configuration file will be passed to
+@code{tor} via its @code{-f} option.  This may be any ``file-like'' object
+(@pxref{G-Ausdrücke, file-like objects}).  See @code{man tor} for details
+on the configuration file syntax.
+
+@item @code{hidden-services} (default: @code{'()})
+The list of @code{<hidden-service>} records to use.  For any hidden service
+you include in this list, appropriate configuration to enable the hidden
+service will be automatically added to the default configuration file.  You
+may conveniently create @code{<hidden-service>} records using the
+@code{tor-hidden-service} procedure described below.
+
+@item @code{socks-socket-type} (default: @code{'tcp})
+The default socket type that Tor should use for its SOCKS socket.  This must
+be either @code{'tcp} or @code{'unix}.  If it is @code{'tcp}, then by
+default Tor will listen on TCP port 9050 on the loopback interface (i.e.,
+localhost).  If it is @code{'unix}, then Tor will listen on the UNIX domain
+socket @file{/var/run/tor/socks-sock}, which will be made writable by
+members of the @code{tor} group.
+
+If you want to customize the SOCKS socket in more detail, leave
+@code{socks-socket-type} at its default value of @code{'tcp} and use
+@code{config-file} to override the default by providing your own
+@code{SocksPort} option.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@cindex hidden service
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} tor-hidden-service @var{name} @var{mapping}
+Define a new Tor @dfn{hidden service} called @var{name} and implementing
+@var{mapping}.  @var{mapping} is a list of port/host tuples, such as:
+
+@example
+ '((22 "127.0.0.1:22")
+   (80 "127.0.0.1:8080"))
+@end example
+
+In this example, port 22 of the hidden service is mapped to local port 22,
+and port 80 is mapped to local port 8080.
+
+This creates a @file{/var/lib/tor/hidden-services/@var{name}} directory,
+where the @file{hostname} file contains the @code{.onion} host name for the
+hidden service.
+
+See @uref{https://www.torproject.org/docs/tor-hidden-service.html.en, the
+Tor project's documentation} for more information.
+@end deffn
+
+The @code{(gnu services rsync)} module provides the following services:
+
+You might want an rsync daemon if you have files that you want available so
+anyone (or just yourself) can download existing files or upload new files.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} rsync-service-type
+This is the type for the @uref{https://rsync.samba.org, rsync} rsync daemon,
+@command{rsync-configuration} record as in this example:
+
+@example
+(service rsync-service-type)
+@end example
+
+See below for details about @code{rsync-configuration}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} rsync-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration for @code{rsync-service}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @var{rsync})
+@code{rsync} package to use.
+
+@item @code{port-number} (default: @code{873})
+TCP port on which @command{rsync} listens for incoming connections.  If port
+is less than @code{1024} @command{rsync} needs to be started as the
+@code{root} user and group.
+
+@item @code{pid-file} (default: @code{"/var/run/rsyncd/rsyncd.pid"})
+Name of the file where @command{rsync} writes its PID.
+
+@item @code{lock-file} (default: @code{"/var/run/rsyncd/rsyncd.lock"})
+Name of the file where @command{rsync} writes its lock file.
+
+@item @code{log-file} (default: @code{"/var/log/rsyncd.log"})
+Name of the file where @command{rsync} writes its log file.
+
+@item @code{use-chroot?} (default: @var{#t})
+Whether to use chroot for @command{rsync} shared directory.
+
+@item @code{share-path} (default: @file{/srv/rsync})
+Location of the @command{rsync} shared directory.
+
+@item @code{share-comment} (default: @code{"Rsync share"})
+Comment of the @command{rsync} shared directory.
+
+@item @code{read-only?} (default: @var{#f})
+Read-write permissions to shared directory.
+
+@item @code{timeout} (default: @code{300})
+I/O timeout in seconds.
+
+@item @code{user} (default: @var{"root"})
+Owner of the @code{rsync} process.
+
+@item @code{group} (default: @var{"root"})
+Group of the @code{rsync} process.
+
+@item @code{uid} (default: @var{"rsyncd"})
+User name or user ID that file transfers to and from that module should take
+place as when the daemon was run as @code{root}.
+
+@item @code{gid} (default: @var{"rsyncd"})
+Group name or group ID that will be used when accessing the module.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+Furthermore, @code{(gnu services ssh)} provides the following services.
+@cindex SSH
+@cindex SSH server
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} lsh-service [#:host-key "/etc/lsh/host-key"] @
+       [#:daemonic? #t] [#:interfaces '()] [#:port-number 22] @
+[#:allow-empty-passwords? #f] [#:root-login? #f] @ [#:syslog-output? #t]
+[#:x11-forwarding? #t] @ [#:tcp/ip-forwarding? #t]
+[#:password-authentication? #t] @ [#:public-key-authentication? #t]
+[#:initialize? #t] Run the @command{lshd} program from @var{lsh} to listen
+on port @var{port-number}.  @var{host-key} must designate a file containing
+the host key, and readable only by root.
+
+When @var{daemonic?} is true, @command{lshd} will detach from the
+controlling terminal and log its output to syslogd, unless one sets
+@var{syslog-output?} to false.  Obviously, it also makes lsh-service depend
+on existence of syslogd service.  When @var{pid-file?} is true,
+@command{lshd} writes its PID to the file called @var{pid-file}.
+
+When @var{initialize?} is true, automatically create the seed and host key
+upon service activation if they do not exist yet.  This may take long and
+require interaction.
+
+When @var{initialize?} is false, it is up to the user to initialize the
+randomness generator (@pxref{lsh-make-seed,,, lsh, LSH Manual}), and to
+create a key pair with the private key stored in file @var{host-key}
+(@pxref{lshd basics,,, lsh, LSH Manual}).
+
+When @var{interfaces} is empty, lshd listens for connections on all the
+network interfaces; otherwise, @var{interfaces} must be a list of host names
+or addresses.
+
+@var{allow-empty-passwords?} specifies whether to accept log-ins with empty
+passwords, and @var{root-login?} specifies whether to accept log-ins as
+root.
+
+The other options should be self-descriptive.
+@end deffn
+
+@cindex SSH
+@cindex SSH server
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} openssh-service-type
+This is the type for the @uref{http://www.openssh.org, OpenSSH} secure shell
+daemon, @command{sshd}.  Its value must be an @code{openssh-configuration}
+record as in this example:
+
+@example
+(service openssh-service-type
+         (openssh-configuration
+           (x11-forwarding? #t)
+           (permit-root-login 'without-password)
+           (authorized-keys
+             `(("alice" ,(local-file "alice.pub"))
+               ("bob" ,(local-file "bob.pub"))))))
+@end example
+
+See below for details about @code{openssh-configuration}.
+
+This service can be extended with extra authorized keys, as in this example:
+
+@example
+(service-extension openssh-service-type
+                   (const `(("charlie"
+                             ,(local-file "charlie.pub")))))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} openssh-configuration
+This is the configuration record for OpenSSH's @command{sshd}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{pid-file} (default: @code{"/var/run/sshd.pid"})
+Name of the file where @command{sshd} writes its PID.
+
+@item @code{port-number} (default: @code{22})
+TCP port on which @command{sshd} listens for incoming connections.
+
+@item @code{permit-root-login} (default: @code{#f})
+This field determines whether and when to allow logins as root.  If
+@code{#f}, root logins are disallowed; if @code{#t}, they are allowed.  If
+it's the symbol @code{'without-password}, then root logins are permitted but
+not with password-based authentication.
+
+@item @code{allow-empty-passwords?} (default: @code{#f})
+When true, users with empty passwords may log in.  When false, they may not.
+
+@item @code{password-authentication?} (default: @code{#t})
+When true, users may log in with their password.  When false, they have
+other authentication methods.
+
+@item @code{public-key-authentication?} (default: @code{#t})
+When true, users may log in using public key authentication.  When false,
+users have to use other authentication method.
+
+Authorized public keys are stored in @file{~/.ssh/authorized_keys}.  This is
+used only by protocol version 2.
+
+@item @code{x11-forwarding?} (default: @code{#f})
+When true, forwarding of X11 graphical client connections is enabled---in
+other words, @command{ssh} options @option{-X} and @option{-Y} will work.
+
+@item @code{allow-agent-forwarding?} (default: @code{#t})
+Whether to allow agent forwarding.
+
+@item @code{allow-tcp-forwarding?} (default: @code{#t})
+Whether to allow TCP forwarding.
+
+@item @code{gateway-ports?} (default: @code{#f})
+Whether to allow gateway ports.
+
+@item @code{challenge-response-authentication?} (default: @code{#f})
+Specifies whether challenge response authentication is allowed (e.g.@: via
+PAM).
+
+@item @code{use-pam?} (default: @code{#t})
+Enables the Pluggable Authentication Module interface.  If set to @code{#t},
+this will enable PAM authentication using
+@code{challenge-response-authentication?} and
+@code{password-authentication?}, in addition to PAM account and session
+module processing for all authentication types.
+
+Because PAM challenge response authentication usually serves an equivalent
+role to password authentication, you should disable either
+@code{challenge-response-authentication?} or
+@code{password-authentication?}.
+
+@item @code{print-last-log?} (default: @code{#t})
+Specifies whether @command{sshd} should print the date and time of the last
+user login when a user logs in interactively.
+
+@item @code{subsystems} (default: @code{'(("sftp" "internal-sftp"))})
+Configures external subsystems (e.g.@: file transfer daemon).
+
+This is a list of two-element lists, each of which containing the subsystem
+name and a command (with optional arguments) to execute upon subsystem
+request.
+
+The command @command{internal-sftp} implements an in-process SFTP server.
+Alternately, one can specify the @command{sftp-server} command:
+@example
+(service openssh-service-type
+         (openssh-configuration
+          (subsystems
+           `(("sftp" ,(file-append openssh "/libexec/sftp-server"))))))
+@end example
+
+@item @code{accepted-environment} (default: @code{'()})
+List of strings describing which environment variables may be exported.
+
+Each string gets on its own line.  See the @code{AcceptEnv} option in
+@code{man sshd_config}.
+
+This example allows ssh-clients to export the @code{COLORTERM} variable.  It
+is set by terminal emulators, which support colors.  You can use it in your
+shell's ressource file to enable colors for the prompt and commands if this
+variable is set.
+
+@example
+(service openssh-service-type
+         (openssh-configuration
+           (accepted-environment '("COLORTERM"))))
+@end example
+
+@item @code{authorized-keys} (default: @code{'()})
+@cindex authorized keys, SSH
+@cindex SSH authorized keys
+This is the list of authorized keys.  Each element of the list is a user
+name followed by one or more file-like objects that represent SSH public
+keys.  For example:
+
+@example
+(openssh-configuration
+  (authorized-keys
+    `(("rekado" ,(local-file "rekado.pub"))
+      ("chris" ,(local-file "chris.pub"))
+      ("root" ,(local-file "rekado.pub") ,(local-file "chris.pub")))))
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+registers the specified public keys for user accounts @code{rekado},
+@code{chris}, and @code{root}.
+
+Additional authorized keys can be specified @i{via}
+@code{service-extension}.
+
+Note that this does @emph{not} interfere with the use of
+@file{~/.ssh/authorized_keys}.
+
+@item @code{log-level} (default: @code{'info})
+This is a symbol specifying the logging level: @code{quiet}, @code{fatal},
+@code{error}, @code{info}, @code{verbose}, @code{debug}, etc.  See the man
+page for @file{sshd_config} for the full list of level names.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} dropbear-service [@var{config}]
+Run the @uref{https://matt.ucc.asn.au/dropbear/dropbear.html,Dropbear SSH
+daemon} with the given @var{config}, a @code{<dropbear-configuration>}
+object.
+
+For example, to specify a Dropbear service listening on port 1234, add this
+call to the operating system's @code{services} field:
+
+@example
+(dropbear-service (dropbear-configuration
+                    (port-number 1234)))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} dropbear-configuration
+This data type represents the configuration of a Dropbear SSH daemon.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{dropbear} (default: @var{dropbear})
+The Dropbear package to use.
+
+@item @code{port-number} (default: 22)
+The TCP port where the daemon waits for incoming connections.
+
+@item @code{syslog-output?} (default: @code{#t})
+Whether to enable syslog output.
+
+@item @code{pid-file} (default: @code{"/var/run/dropbear.pid"})
+File name of the daemon's PID file.
+
+@item @code{root-login?} (default: @code{#f})
+Whether to allow @code{root} logins.
+
+@item @code{allow-empty-passwords?} (default: @code{#f})
+Whether to allow empty passwords.
+
+@item @code{password-authentication?} (default: @code{#t})
+Whether to enable password-based authentication.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %facebook-host-aliases
+This variable contains a string for use in @file{/etc/hosts} (@pxref{Host
+Names,,, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}).  Each line contains a
+entry that maps a known server name of the Facebook on-line service---e.g.,
+@code{www.facebook.com}---to the local host---@code{127.0.0.1} or its IPv6
+equivalent, @code{::1}.
+
+This variable is typically used in the @code{hosts-file} field of an
+@code{operating-system} declaration (@pxref{„operating-system“-Referenz,
+@file{/etc/hosts}}):
+
+@example
+(use-modules (gnu) (guix))
+
+(operating-system
+  (host-name "mymachine")
+  ;; ...
+  (hosts-file
+    ;; Create a /etc/hosts file with aliases for "localhost"
+    ;; and "mymachine", as well as for Facebook servers.
+    (plain-file "hosts"
+                (string-append (local-host-aliases host-name)
+                               %facebook-host-aliases))))
+@end example
+
+This mechanism can prevent programs running locally, such as Web browsers,
+from accessing Facebook.
+@end defvr
+
+The @code{(gnu services avahi)} provides the following definition.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} avahi-service [#:avahi @var{avahi}] @
+          [#:host-name #f] [#:publish? #t] [#:ipv4? #t] @ [#:ipv6? #t] [#:wide-area?
+#f] @ [#:domains-to-browse '()] [#:debug? #f] Return a service that runs
+@command{avahi-daemon}, a system-wide mDNS/DNS-SD responder that allows for
+service discovery and "zero-configuration" host name lookups (see
+@uref{http://avahi.org/}), and extends the name service cache daemon (nscd)
+so that it can resolve @code{.local} host names using
+@uref{http://0pointer.de/lennart/projects/nss-mdns/, nss-mdns}.
+Additionally, add the @var{avahi} package to the system profile so that
+commands such as @command{avahi-browse} are directly usable.
+
+If @var{host-name} is different from @code{#f}, use that as the host name to
+publish for this machine; otherwise, use the machine's actual host name.
+
+When @var{publish?} is true, publishing of host names and services is
+allowed; in particular, avahi-daemon will publish the machine's host name
+and IP address via mDNS on the local network.
+
+When @var{wide-area?} is true, DNS-SD over unicast DNS is enabled.
+
+Boolean values @var{ipv4?} and @var{ipv6?} determine whether to use
+IPv4/IPv6 sockets.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} openvswitch-service-type
+This is the type of the @uref{http://www.openvswitch.org, Open vSwitch}
+service, whose value should be an @code{openvswitch-configuration} object.
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} openvswitch-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of Open vSwitch, a multilayer
+virtual switch which is designed to enable massive network automation
+through programmatic extension.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @var{openvswitch})
+Package object of the Open vSwitch.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@node X Window
+@subsubsection X Window
+
+@cindex X11
+@cindex X Window System
+@cindex login manager
+Support for the X Window graphical display system---specifically Xorg---is
+provided by the @code{(gnu services xorg)} module.  Note that there is no
+@code{xorg-service} procedure.  Instead, the X server is started by the
+@dfn{login manager}, by default SLiM.
+
+@cindex window manager
+To use X11, you must install at least one @dfn{window manager}---for example
+the @code{windowmaker} or @code{openbox} packages---preferably by adding it
+to the @code{packages} field of your operating system definition
+(@pxref{„operating-system“-Referenz, system-wide packages}).
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} slim-service-type
+This is the type for the SLiM graphical login manager for X11.
+
+@cindex session types (X11)
+@cindex X11 session types
+SLiM looks for @dfn{session types} described by the @file{.desktop} files in
+@file{/run/current-system/profile/share/xsessions} and allows users to
+choose a session from the log-in screen using @kbd{F1}.  Packages such as
+@code{xfce}, @code{sawfish}, and @code{ratpoison} provide @file{.desktop}
+files; adding them to the system-wide set of packages automatically makes
+them available at the log-in screen.
+
+In addition, @file{~/.xsession} files are honored.  When available,
+@file{~/.xsession} must be an executable that starts a window manager and/or
+other X clients.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} slim-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of @code{slim-service-type}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{allow-empty-passwords?} (default: @code{#t})
+Whether to allow logins with empty passwords.
+
+@item @code{auto-login?} (default: @code{#f})
+@itemx @code{default-user} (default: @code{""})
+When @code{auto-login?} is false, SLiM presents a log-in screen.
+
+When @code{auto-login?} is true, SLiM logs in directly as
+@code{default-user}.
+
+@item @code{theme} (default: @code{%default-slim-theme})
+@itemx @code{theme-name} (default: @code{%default-slim-theme-name})
+The graphical theme to use and its name.
+
+@item @code{auto-login-session} (default: @code{#f})
+If true, this must be the name of the executable to start as the default
+session---e.g., @code{(file-append windowmaker "/bin/windowmaker")}.
+
+If false, a session described by one of the available @file{.desktop} files
+in @code{/run/current-system/profile} and @code{~/.guix-profile} will be
+used.
+
+@quotation Anmerkung
+You must install at least one window manager in the system profile or in
+your user profile.  Failing to do that, if @code{auto-login-session} is
+false, you will be unable to log in.
+@end quotation
+
+@item @code{startx} (default: @code{(xorg-start-command)})
+The command used to start the X11 graphical server.
+
+@item @code{xauth} (default: @code{xauth})
+The XAuth package to use.
+
+@item @code{shepherd} (default: @code{shepherd})
+The Shepherd package used when invoking @command{halt} and @command{reboot}.
+
+@item @code{sessreg} (default: @code{sessreg})
+The sessreg package used in order to register the session.
+
+@item @code{slim} (default: @code{slim})
+The SLiM package to use.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %default-theme
+@defvrx {Scheme Variable} %default-theme-name
+The default SLiM theme and its name.
+@end defvr
+
+
+@deftp {Data Type} sddm-configuration
+This is the data type representing the sddm service configuration.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{display-server} (default: "x11")
+Select display server to use for the greeter. Valid values are "x11" or
+"wayland".
+
+@item @code{numlock} (default: "on")
+Valid values are "on", "off" or "none".
+
+@item @code{halt-command} (default @code{#~(string-apppend #$shepherd "/sbin/halt")})
+Command to run when halting.
+
+@item @code{reboot-command} (default @code{#~(string-append #$shepherd "/sbin/reboot")})
+Command to run when rebooting.
+
+@item @code{theme} (default "maldives")
+Theme to use. Default themes provided by SDDM are "elarun" or "maldives".
+
+@item @code{themes-directory} (default "/run/current-system/profile/share/sddm/themes")
+Directory to look for themes.
+
+@item @code{faces-directory} (default "/run/current-system/profile/share/sddm/faces")
+Directory to look for faces.
+
+@item @code{default-path} (default "/run/current-system/profile/bin")
+Default PATH to use.
+
+@item @code{minimum-uid} (default 1000)
+Minimum UID to display in SDDM.
+
+@item @code{maximum-uid} (default 2000)
+Maximum UID to display in SDDM
+
+@item @code{remember-last-user?} (default #t)
+Remember last user.
+
+@item @code{remember-last-session?} (default #t)
+Remember last session.
+
+@item @code{hide-users} (default "")
+Usernames to hide from SDDM greeter.
+
+@item @code{hide-shells} (default @code{#~(string-append #$shadow "/sbin/nologin")})
+Users with shells listed will be hidden from the SDDM greeter.
+
+@item @code{session-command} (default @code{#~(string-append #$sddm "/share/sddm/scripts/wayland-session")})
+Script to run before starting a wayland session.
+
+@item @code{sessions-directory} (default "/run/current-system/profile/share/wayland-sessions")
+Directory to look for desktop files starting wayland sessions.
+
+@item @code{xorg-server-path} (default @code{xorg-start-command})
+Path to xorg-server.
+
+@item @code{xauth-path} (default @code{#~(string-append #$xauth "/bin/xauth")})
+Path to xauth.
+
+@item @code{xephyr-path} (default @code{#~(string-append #$xorg-server "/bin/Xephyr")})
+Path to Xephyr.
+
+@item @code{xdisplay-start} (default @code{#~(string-append #$sddm "/share/sddm/scripts/Xsetup")})
+Script to run after starting xorg-server.
+
+@item @code{xdisplay-stop} (default @code{#~(string-append #$sddm "/share/sddm/scripts/Xstop")})
+Script to run before stopping xorg-server.
+
+@item @code{xsession-command} (default: @code{xinitrc})
+Script to run before starting a X session.
+
+@item @code{xsessions-directory} (default: "/run/current-system/profile/share/xsessions")
+Directory to look for desktop files starting X sessions.
+
+@item @code{minimum-vt} (default: 7)
+Minimum VT to use.
+
+@item @code{xserver-arguments} (default "-nolisten tcp")
+Arguments to pass to xorg-server.
+
+@item @code{auto-login-user} (default "")
+User to use for auto-login.
+
+@item @code{auto-login-session} (default "")
+Desktop file to use for auto-login.
+
+@item @code{relogin?} (default #f)
+Relogin after logout.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@cindex login manager
+@cindex X11 login
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} sddm-service config
+Return a service that spawns the SDDM graphical login manager for config of
+type @code{<sddm-configuration>}.
+
+@example
+  (sddm-service (sddm-configuration
+                 (auto-login-user "Alice")
+                 (auto-login-session "xfce.desktop")))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} xorg-start-command [#:guile] @
+  [#:modules %default-xorg-modules] @ [#:fonts %default-xorg-fonts] @
+[#:configuration-file (xorg-configuration-file @dots{})] @ [#:xorg-server
+@var{xorg-server}] Return a @code{startx} script in which @var{modules}, a
+list of X module packages, and @var{fonts}, a list of X font directories,
+are available.  See @code{xorg-wrapper} for more details on the arguments.
+The result should be used in place of @code{startx}.
+
+Usually the X server is started by a login manager.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} xorg-configuration-file @
+  [#:modules %default-xorg-modules] @ [#:fonts %default-xorg-fonts] @
+[#:drivers '()] [#:resolutions '()] [#:extra-config '()] Return a
+configuration file for the Xorg server containing search paths for all the
+common drivers.
+
+@var{modules} must be a list of @dfn{module packages} loaded by the Xorg
+server---e.g., @code{xf86-video-vesa}, @code{xf86-input-keyboard}, and so
+on.  @var{fonts} must be a list of font directories to add to the server's
+@dfn{font path}.
+
+@var{drivers} must be either the empty list, in which case Xorg chooses a
+graphics driver automatically, or a list of driver names that will be tried
+in this order---e.g., @code{("modesetting" "vesa")}.
+
+Likewise, when @var{resolutions} is the empty list, Xorg chooses an
+appropriate screen resolution; otherwise, it must be a list of
+resolutions---e.g., @code{((1024 768) (640 480))}.
+
+Last, @var{extra-config} is a list of strings or objects appended to the
+configuration file.  It is used to pass extra text to be added verbatim to
+the configuration file.
+
+@cindex keymap
+@cindex keyboard layout
+This procedure is especially useful to configure a different keyboard layout
+than the default US keymap.  For instance, to use the ``bépo'' keymap by
+default on the display manager:
+
+@example
+(define bepo-evdev
+  "Section \"InputClass\"
+        Identifier \"evdev keyboard catchall\"
+        Driver \"evdev\"
+        MatchIsKeyboard \"on\"
+        Option \"xkb_layout\" \"fr\"
+        Option \"xkb_variant\" \"bepo\"
+EndSection")
+
+(operating-system
+  ...
+  (services
+    (modify-services %desktop-services
+      (slim-service-type config =>
+        (slim-configuration
+          (inherit config)
+          (startx (xorg-start-command
+                   #:configuration-file
+                   (xorg-configuration-file
+                     #:extra-config
+                     (list bepo-evdev)))))))))
+@end example
+
+The @code{MatchIsKeyboard} line specifies that we only apply the
+configuration to keyboards.  Without this line, other devices such as
+touchpad may not work correctly because they will be attached to the wrong
+driver.  In this example, the user typically used @code{setxkbmap fr bepo}
+to set their favorite keymap once logged in.  The first argument corresponds
+to the layout, while the second argument corresponds to the variant.  The
+@code{xkb_variant} line can be omitted to select the default variant.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} screen-locker-service @var{package} [@var{program}]
+Add @var{package}, a package for a screen locker or screen saver whose
+command is @var{program}, to the set of setuid programs and add a PAM entry
+for it.  For example:
+
+@lisp
+(screen-locker-service xlockmore "xlock")
+@end lisp
+
+makes the good ol' XlockMore usable.
+@end deffn
+
+
+@node Druckdienste
+@subsubsection Druckdienste
+
+@cindex printer support with CUPS
+The @code{(gnu services cups)} module provides a Guix service definition for
+the CUPS printing service.  To add printer support to a GuixSD system, add a
+@code{cups-service} to the operating system definition:
+
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} cups-service-type
+The service type for the CUPS print server.  Its value should be a valid
+CUPS configuration (see below).  To use the default settings, simply write:
+@example
+(service cups-service-type)
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+The CUPS configuration controls the basic things about your CUPS
+installation: what interfaces it listens on, what to do if a print job
+fails, how much logging to do, and so on.  To actually add a printer, you
+have to visit the @url{http://localhost:631} URL, or use a tool such as
+GNOME's printer configuration services.  By default, configuring a CUPS
+service will generate a self-signed certificate if needed, for secure
+connections to the print server.
+
+Suppose you want to enable the Web interface of CUPS and also add support
+for Epson printers @i{via} the @code{escpr} package and for HP printers
+@i{via} the @code{hplip-minimal} package.  You can do that directly, like
+this (you need to use the @code{(gnu packages cups)} module):
+
+@example
+(service cups-service-type
+         (cups-configuration
+           (web-interface? #t)
+           (extensions
+             (list cups-filters escpr hplip-minimal))))
+@end example
+
+Note: If you wish to use the Qt5 based GUI which comes with the hplip
+package then it is suggested that you install the @code{hplip} package,
+either in your OS configuration file or as your user.
+
+The available configuration parameters follow.  Each parameter definition is
+preceded by its type; for example, @samp{string-list foo} indicates that the
+@code{foo} parameter should be specified as a list of strings.  There is
+also a way to specify the configuration as a string, if you have an old
+@code{cupsd.conf} file that you want to port over from some other system;
+see the end for more details.
+
+@c The following documentation was initially generated by
+@c (generate-documentation) in (gnu services cups).  Manually maintained
+@c documentation is better, so we shouldn't hesitate to edit below as
+@c needed.  However if the change you want to make to this documentation
+@c can be done in an automated way, it's probably easier to change
+@c (generate-documentation) than to make it below and have to deal with
+@c the churn as CUPS updates.
+
+
+Available @code{cups-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} package cups
+The CUPS package.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} package-list extensions
+Drivers and other extensions to the CUPS package.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} files-configuration files-configuration
+Configuration of where to write logs, what directories to use for print
+spools, and related privileged configuration parameters.
+
+Available @code{files-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} log-location access-log
+Defines the access log filename.  Specifying a blank filename disables
+access log generation.  The value @code{stderr} causes log entries to be
+sent to the standard error file when the scheduler is running in the
+foreground, or to the system log daemon when run in the background.  The
+value @code{syslog} causes log entries to be sent to the system log daemon.
+The server name may be included in filenames using the string @code{%s}, as
+in @code{/var/log/cups/%s-access_log}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/var/log/cups/access_log"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} file-name cache-dir
+Where CUPS should cache data.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/var/cache/cups"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} string config-file-perm
+Specifies the permissions for all configuration files that the scheduler
+writes.
+
+Note that the permissions for the printers.conf file are currently masked to
+only allow access from the scheduler user (typically root).  This is done
+because printer device URIs sometimes contain sensitive authentication
+information that should not be generally known on the system.  There is no
+way to disable this security feature.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"0640"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} log-location error-log
+Defines the error log filename.  Specifying a blank filename disables access
+log generation.  The value @code{stderr} causes log entries to be sent to
+the standard error file when the scheduler is running in the foreground, or
+to the system log daemon when run in the background.  The value
+@code{syslog} causes log entries to be sent to the system log daemon.  The
+server name may be included in filenames using the string @code{%s}, as in
+@code{/var/log/cups/%s-error_log}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/var/log/cups/error_log"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} string fatal-errors
+Specifies which errors are fatal, causing the scheduler to exit.  The kind
+strings are:
+
+@table @code
+@item none
+No errors are fatal.
+
+@item all
+All of the errors below are fatal.
+
+@item browse
+Browsing initialization errors are fatal, for example failed connections to
+the DNS-SD daemon.
+
+@item config
+Configuration file syntax errors are fatal.
+
+@item listen
+Listen or Port errors are fatal, except for IPv6 failures on the loopback or
+@code{any} addresses.
+
+@item log
+Log file creation or write errors are fatal.
+
+@item permissions
+Bad startup file permissions are fatal, for example shared TLS certificate
+and key files with world-read permissions.
+@end table
+
+Defaults to @samp{"all -browse"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} boolean file-device?
+Specifies whether the file pseudo-device can be used for new printer
+queues.  The URI @uref{file:///dev/null} is always allowed.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} string group
+Specifies the group name or ID that will be used when executing external
+programs.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"lp"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} string log-file-perm
+Specifies the permissions for all log files that the scheduler writes.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"0644"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} log-location page-log
+Defines the page log filename.  Specifying a blank filename disables access
+log generation.  The value @code{stderr} causes log entries to be sent to
+the standard error file when the scheduler is running in the foreground, or
+to the system log daemon when run in the background.  The value
+@code{syslog} causes log entries to be sent to the system log daemon.  The
+server name may be included in filenames using the string @code{%s}, as in
+@code{/var/log/cups/%s-page_log}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/var/log/cups/page_log"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} string remote-root
+Specifies the username that is associated with unauthenticated accesses by
+clients claiming to be the root user.  The default is @code{remroot}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"remroot"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} file-name request-root
+Specifies the directory that contains print jobs and other HTTP request
+data.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/var/spool/cups"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} sandboxing sandboxing
+Specifies the level of security sandboxing that is applied to print filters,
+backends, and other child processes of the scheduler; either @code{relaxed}
+or @code{strict}.  This directive is currently only used/supported on macOS.
+
+Defaults to @samp{strict}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} file-name server-keychain
+Specifies the location of TLS certificates and private keys.  CUPS will look
+for public and private keys in this directory: a @code{.crt} files for
+PEM-encoded certificates and corresponding @code{.key} files for PEM-encoded
+private keys.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/etc/cups/ssl"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} file-name server-root
+Specifies the directory containing the server configuration files.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/etc/cups"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} boolean sync-on-close?
+Specifies whether the scheduler calls fsync(2) after writing configuration
+or state files.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list system-group
+Specifies the group(s) to use for @code{@@SYSTEM} group authentication.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} file-name temp-dir
+Specifies the directory where temporary files are stored.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/var/spool/cups/tmp"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{files-configuration} parameter} string user
+Specifies the user name or ID that is used when running external programs.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"lp"}.
+@end deftypevr
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} access-log-level access-log-level
+Specifies the logging level for the AccessLog file.  The @code{config} level
+logs when printers and classes are added, deleted, or modified and when
+configuration files are accessed or updated.  The @code{actions} level logs
+when print jobs are submitted, held, released, modified, or canceled, and
+any of the conditions for @code{config}.  The @code{all} level logs all
+requests.
+
+Defaults to @samp{actions}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} boolean auto-purge-jobs?
+Specifies whether to purge job history data automatically when it is no
+longer required for quotas.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} browse-local-protocols browse-local-protocols
+Specifies which protocols to use for local printer sharing.
+
+Defaults to @samp{dnssd}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} boolean browse-web-if?
+Specifies whether the CUPS web interface is advertised.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} boolean browsing?
+Specifies whether shared printers are advertised.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} string classification
+Specifies the security classification of the server.  Any valid banner name
+can be used, including "classified", "confidential", "secret", "topsecret",
+and "unclassified", or the banner can be omitted to disable secure printing
+functions.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} boolean classify-override?
+Specifies whether users may override the classification (cover page) of
+individual print jobs using the @code{job-sheets} option.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} default-auth-type default-auth-type
+Specifies the default type of authentication to use.
+
+Defaults to @samp{Basic}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} default-encryption default-encryption
+Specifies whether encryption will be used for authenticated requests.
+
+Defaults to @samp{Required}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} string default-language
+Specifies the default language to use for text and web content.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"en"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} string default-paper-size
+Specifies the default paper size for new print queues.  @samp{"Auto"} uses a
+locale-specific default, while @samp{"None"} specifies there is no default
+paper size.  Specific size names are typically @samp{"Letter"} or
+@samp{"A4"}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"Auto"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} string default-policy
+Specifies the default access policy to use.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"default"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} boolean default-shared?
+Specifies whether local printers are shared by default.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer dirty-clean-interval
+Specifies the delay for updating of configuration and state files, in
+seconds.  A value of 0 causes the update to happen as soon as possible,
+typically within a few milliseconds.
+
+Defaults to @samp{30}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} error-policy error-policy
+Specifies what to do when an error occurs.  Possible values are
+@code{abort-job}, which will discard the failed print job; @code{retry-job},
+which will retry the job at a later time; @code{retry-this-job}, which
+retries the failed job immediately; and @code{stop-printer}, which stops the
+printer.
+
+Defaults to @samp{stop-printer}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer filter-limit
+Specifies the maximum cost of filters that are run concurrently, which can
+be used to minimize disk, memory, and CPU resource problems.  A limit of 0
+disables filter limiting.  An average print to a non-PostScript printer
+needs a filter limit of about 200.  A PostScript printer needs about half
+that (100).  Setting the limit below these thresholds will effectively limit
+the scheduler to printing a single job at any time.
+
+Defaults to @samp{0}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer filter-nice
+Specifies the scheduling priority of filters that are run to print a job.
+The nice value ranges from 0, the highest priority, to 19, the lowest
+priority.
+
+Defaults to @samp{0}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} host-name-lookups host-name-lookups
+Specifies whether to do reverse lookups on connecting clients.  The
+@code{double} setting causes @code{cupsd} to verify that the hostname
+resolved from the address matches one of the addresses returned for that
+hostname.  Double lookups also prevent clients with unregistered addresses
+from connecting to your server.  Only set this option to @code{#t} or
+@code{double} if absolutely required.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer job-kill-delay
+Specifies the number of seconds to wait before killing the filters and
+backend associated with a canceled or held job.
+
+Defaults to @samp{30}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer job-retry-interval
+Specifies the interval between retries of jobs in seconds.  This is
+typically used for fax queues but can also be used with normal print queues
+whose error policy is @code{retry-job} or @code{retry-current-job}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{30}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer job-retry-limit
+Specifies the number of retries that are done for jobs.  This is typically
+used for fax queues but can also be used with normal print queues whose
+error policy is @code{retry-job} or @code{retry-current-job}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} boolean keep-alive?
+Specifies whether to support HTTP keep-alive connections.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer keep-alive-timeout
+Specifies how long an idle client connection remains open, in seconds.
+
+Defaults to @samp{30}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer limit-request-body
+Specifies the maximum size of print files, IPP requests, and HTML form
+data.  A limit of 0 disables the limit check.
+
+Defaults to @samp{0}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} multiline-string-list listen
+Listens on the specified interfaces for connections.  Valid values are of
+the form @var{address}:@var{port}, where @var{address} is either an IPv6
+address enclosed in brackets, an IPv4 address, or @code{*} to indicate all
+addresses.  Values can also be file names of local UNIX domain sockets.  The
+Listen directive is similar to the Port directive but allows you to restrict
+access to specific interfaces or networks.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer listen-back-log
+Specifies the number of pending connections that will be allowed.  This
+normally only affects very busy servers that have reached the MaxClients
+limit, but can also be triggered by large numbers of simultaneous
+connections.  When the limit is reached, the operating system will refuse
+additional connections until the scheduler can accept the pending ones.
+
+Defaults to @samp{128}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} location-access-control-list location-access-controls
+Specifies a set of additional access controls.
+
+Available @code{location-access-controls} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{location-access-controls} parameter} file-name path
+Specifies the URI path to which the access control applies.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{location-access-controls} parameter} access-control-list access-controls
+Access controls for all access to this path, in the same format as the
+@code{access-controls} of @code{operation-access-control}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{location-access-controls} parameter} method-access-control-list method-access-controls
+Access controls for method-specific access to this path.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+Available @code{method-access-controls} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{method-access-controls} parameter} boolean reverse?
+If @code{#t}, apply access controls to all methods except the listed
+methods.  Otherwise apply to only the listed methods.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{method-access-controls} parameter} method-list methods
+Methods to which this access control applies.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{method-access-controls} parameter} access-control-list access-controls
+Access control directives, as a list of strings.  Each string should be one
+directive, such as "Order allow,deny".
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+@end deftypevr
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer log-debug-history
+Specifies the number of debugging messages that are retained for logging if
+an error occurs in a print job.  Debug messages are logged regardless of the
+LogLevel setting.
+
+Defaults to @samp{100}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} log-level log-level
+Specifies the level of logging for the ErrorLog file.  The value @code{none}
+stops all logging while @code{debug2} logs everything.
+
+Defaults to @samp{info}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} log-time-format log-time-format
+Specifies the format of the date and time in the log files.  The value
+@code{standard} logs whole seconds while @code{usecs} logs microseconds.
+
+Defaults to @samp{standard}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer max-clients
+Specifies the maximum number of simultaneous clients that are allowed by the
+scheduler.
+
+Defaults to @samp{100}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer max-clients-per-host
+Specifies the maximum number of simultaneous clients that are allowed from a
+single address.
+
+Defaults to @samp{100}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer max-copies
+Specifies the maximum number of copies that a user can print of each job.
+
+Defaults to @samp{9999}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer max-hold-time
+Specifies the maximum time a job may remain in the @code{indefinite} hold
+state before it is canceled.  A value of 0 disables cancellation of held
+jobs.
+
+Defaults to @samp{0}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer max-jobs
+Specifies the maximum number of simultaneous jobs that are allowed.  Set to
+0 to allow an unlimited number of jobs.
+
+Defaults to @samp{500}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer max-jobs-per-printer
+Specifies the maximum number of simultaneous jobs that are allowed per
+printer.  A value of 0 allows up to MaxJobs jobs per printer.
+
+Defaults to @samp{0}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer max-jobs-per-user
+Specifies the maximum number of simultaneous jobs that are allowed per
+user.  A value of 0 allows up to MaxJobs jobs per user.
+
+Defaults to @samp{0}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer max-job-time
+Specifies the maximum time a job may take to print before it is canceled, in
+seconds.  Set to 0 to disable cancellation of "stuck" jobs.
+
+Defaults to @samp{10800}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer max-log-size
+Specifies the maximum size of the log files before they are rotated, in
+bytes.  The value 0 disables log rotation.
+
+Defaults to @samp{1048576}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer multiple-operation-timeout
+Specifies the maximum amount of time to allow between files in a multiple
+file print job, in seconds.
+
+Defaults to @samp{300}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} string page-log-format
+Specifies the format of PageLog lines.  Sequences beginning with percent
+(@samp{%}) characters are replaced with the corresponding information, while
+all other characters are copied literally.  The following percent sequences
+are recognized:
+
+@table @samp
+@item %%
+insert a single percent character
+
+@item %@{name@}
+insert the value of the specified IPP attribute
+
+@item %C
+insert the number of copies for the current page
+
+@item %P
+insert the current page number
+
+@item %T
+insert the current date and time in common log format
+
+@item %j
+insert the job ID
+
+@item %p
+insert the printer name
+
+@item %u
+insert the username
+@end table
+
+A value of the empty string disables page logging.  The string @code{%p %u
+%j %T %P %C %@{job-billing@} %@{job-originating-host-name@} %@{job-name@}
+%@{media@} %@{sides@}} creates a page log with the standard items.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} environment-variables environment-variables
+Passes the specified environment variable(s) to child processes; a list of
+strings.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} policy-configuration-list policies
+Specifies named access control policies.
+
+Available @code{policy-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{policy-configuration} parameter} string name
+Name of the policy.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{policy-configuration} parameter} string job-private-access
+Specifies an access list for a job's private values.  @code{@@ACL} maps to
+the printer's requesting-user-name-allowed or requesting-user-name-denied
+values.  @code{@@OWNER} maps to the job's owner.  @code{@@SYSTEM} maps to
+the groups listed for the @code{system-group} field of the
+@code{files-config} configuration, which is reified into the
+@code{cups-files.conf(5)} file.  Other possible elements of the access list
+include specific user names, and @code{@@@var{group}} to indicate members of
+a specific group.  The access list may also be simply @code{all} or
+@code{default}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"@@OWNER @@SYSTEM"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{policy-configuration} parameter} string job-private-values
+Specifies the list of job values to make private, or @code{all},
+@code{default}, or @code{none}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"job-name job-originating-host-name
+job-originating-user-name phone"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{policy-configuration} parameter} string subscription-private-access
+Specifies an access list for a subscription's private values.  @code{@@ACL}
+maps to the printer's requesting-user-name-allowed or
+requesting-user-name-denied values.  @code{@@OWNER} maps to the job's
+owner.  @code{@@SYSTEM} maps to the groups listed for the
+@code{system-group} field of the @code{files-config} configuration, which is
+reified into the @code{cups-files.conf(5)} file.  Other possible elements of
+the access list include specific user names, and @code{@@@var{group}} to
+indicate members of a specific group.  The access list may also be simply
+@code{all} or @code{default}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"@@OWNER @@SYSTEM"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{policy-configuration} parameter} string subscription-private-values
+Specifies the list of job values to make private, or @code{all},
+@code{default}, or @code{none}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"notify-events notify-pull-method notify-recipient-uri
+notify-subscriber-user-name notify-user-data"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{policy-configuration} parameter} operation-access-control-list access-controls
+Access control by IPP operation.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} boolean-or-non-negative-integer preserve-job-files
+Specifies whether job files (documents) are preserved after a job is
+printed.  If a numeric value is specified, job files are preserved for the
+indicated number of seconds after printing.  Otherwise a boolean value
+applies indefinitely.
+
+Defaults to @samp{86400}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} boolean-or-non-negative-integer preserve-job-history
+Specifies whether the job history is preserved after a job is printed.  If a
+numeric value is specified, the job history is preserved for the indicated
+number of seconds after printing.  If @code{#t}, the job history is
+preserved until the MaxJobs limit is reached.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer reload-timeout
+Specifies the amount of time to wait for job completion before restarting
+the scheduler.
+
+Defaults to @samp{30}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} string rip-cache
+Specifies the maximum amount of memory to use when converting documents into
+bitmaps for a printer.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"128m"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} string server-admin
+Specifies the email address of the server administrator.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"root@@localhost.localdomain"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} host-name-list-or-* server-alias
+The ServerAlias directive is used for HTTP Host header validation when
+clients connect to the scheduler from external interfaces.  Using the
+special name @code{*} can expose your system to known browser-based DNS
+rebinding attacks, even when accessing sites through a firewall.  If the
+auto-discovery of alternate names does not work, we recommend listing each
+alternate name with a ServerAlias directive instead of using @code{*}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{*}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} string server-name
+Specifies the fully-qualified host name of the server.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"localhost"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} server-tokens server-tokens
+Specifies what information is included in the Server header of HTTP
+responses.  @code{None} disables the Server header.  @code{ProductOnly}
+reports @code{CUPS}.  @code{Major} reports @code{CUPS 2}.  @code{Minor}
+reports @code{CUPS 2.0}.  @code{Minimal} reports @code{CUPS 2.0.0}.
+@code{OS} reports @code{CUPS 2.0.0 (@var{uname})} where @var{uname} is the
+output of the @code{uname} command.  @code{Full} reports @code{CUPS 2.0.0
+(@var{uname}) IPP/2.0}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{Minimal}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} string set-env
+Set the specified environment variable to be passed to child processes.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"variable value"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} multiline-string-list ssl-listen
+Listens on the specified interfaces for encrypted connections.  Valid values
+are of the form @var{address}:@var{port}, where @var{address} is either an
+IPv6 address enclosed in brackets, an IPv4 address, or @code{*} to indicate
+all addresses.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} ssl-options ssl-options
+Sets encryption options.  By default, CUPS only supports encryption using
+TLS v1.0 or higher using known secure cipher suites.  The @code{AllowRC4}
+option enables the 128-bit RC4 cipher suites, which are required for some
+older clients that do not implement newer ones.  The @code{AllowSSL3} option
+enables SSL v3.0, which is required for some older clients that do not
+support TLS v1.0.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} boolean strict-conformance?
+Specifies whether the scheduler requires clients to strictly adhere to the
+IPP specifications.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer timeout
+Specifies the HTTP request timeout, in seconds.
+
+Defaults to @samp{300}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cups-configuration} parameter} boolean web-interface?
+Specifies whether the web interface is enabled.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+At this point you're probably thinking ``oh dear, Guix manual, I like you
+but you can stop already with the configuration options''.  Indeed.
+However, one more point: it could be that you have an existing
+@code{cupsd.conf} that you want to use.  In that case, you can pass an
+@code{opaque-cups-configuration} as the configuration of a
+@code{cups-service-type}.
+
+Available @code{opaque-cups-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{opaque-cups-configuration} parameter} package cups
+The CUPS package.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{opaque-cups-configuration} parameter} string cupsd.conf
+The contents of the @code{cupsd.conf}, as a string.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{opaque-cups-configuration} parameter} string cups-files.conf
+The contents of the @code{cups-files.conf} file, as a string.
+@end deftypevr
+
+For example, if your @code{cupsd.conf} and @code{cups-files.conf} are in
+strings of the same name, you could instantiate a CUPS service like this:
+
+@example
+(service cups-service-type
+         (opaque-cups-configuration
+           (cupsd.conf cupsd.conf)
+           (cups-files.conf cups-files.conf)))
+@end example
+
+
+@node Desktop-Dienste
+@subsubsection Desktop-Dienste
+
+The @code{(gnu services desktop)} module provides services that are usually
+useful in the context of a ``desktop'' setup---that is, on a machine running
+a graphical display server, possibly with graphical user interfaces, etc.
+It also defines services that provide specific desktop environments like
+GNOME, XFCE or MATE.
+
+To simplify things, the module defines a variable containing the set of
+services that users typically expect on a machine with a graphical
+environment and networking:
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %desktop-services
+This is a list of services that builds upon @var{%base-services} and adds or
+adjusts services for a typical ``desktop'' setup.
+
+In particular, it adds a graphical login manager (@pxref{X Window,
+@code{slim-service}}), screen lockers, a network management tool
+(@pxref{Netzwerkdienste, @code{network-manager-service-type}}), energy
+and color management services, the @code{elogind} login and seat manager,
+the Polkit privilege service, the GeoClue location service, the
+AccountsService daemon that allows authorized users change system passwords,
+an NTP client (@pxref{Netzwerkdienste}), the Avahi daemon, and has the
+name service switch service configured to be able to use @code{nss-mdns}
+(@pxref{Name Service Switch, mDNS}).
+@end defvr
+
+The @var{%desktop-services} variable can be used as the @code{services}
+field of an @code{operating-system} declaration (@pxref{„operating-system“-Referenz, @code{services}}).
+
+Additionally, the @code{gnome-desktop-service}, @code{xfce-desktop-service},
+@code{mate-desktop-service} and @code{enlightenment-desktop-service-type}
+procedures can add GNOME, XFCE, MATE and/or Enlightenment to a system.  To
+``add GNOME'' means that system-level services like the backlight adjustment
+helpers and the power management utilities are added to the system,
+extending @code{polkit} and @code{dbus} appropriately, allowing GNOME to
+operate with elevated privileges on a limited number of special-purpose
+system interfaces.  Additionally, adding a service made by
+@code{gnome-desktop-service} adds the GNOME metapackage to the system
+profile.  Likewise, adding the XFCE service not only adds the @code{xfce}
+metapackage to the system profile, but it also gives the Thunar file manager
+the ability to open a ``root-mode'' file management window, if the user
+authenticates using the administrator's password via the standard polkit
+graphical interface.  To ``add MATE'' means that @code{polkit} and
+@code{dbus} are extended appropriately, allowing MATE to operate with
+elevated privileges on a limited number of special-purpose system
+interfaces.  Additionally, adding a service made by
+@code{mate-desktop-service} adds the MATE metapackage to the system
+profile.  ``Adding ENLIGHTENMENT'' means that @code{dbus} is extended
+appropriately, and several of Enlightenment's binaries are set as setuid,
+allowing Enlightenment's screen locker and other functionality to work as
+expetected.
+
+The desktop environments in Guix use the Xorg display server by default.  If
+you'd like to use the newer display server protocol called Wayland, you need
+to use the @code{sddm-service} instead of the @code{slim-service} for the
+graphical login manager.  You should then select the ``GNOME (Wayland)''
+session in SDDM.  Alternatively you can also try starting GNOME on Wayland
+manually from a TTY with the command ``XDG_SESSION_TYPE=wayland exec
+dbus-run-session gnome-session``.  Currently only GNOME has support for
+Wayland.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} gnome-desktop-service
+Return a service that adds the @code{gnome} package to the system profile,
+and extends polkit with the actions from @code{gnome-settings-daemon}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} xfce-desktop-service
+Return a service that adds the @code{xfce} package to the system profile,
+and extends polkit with the ability for @code{thunar} to manipulate the file
+system as root from within a user session, after the user has authenticated
+with the administrator's password.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} mate-desktop-service
+Return a service that adds the @code{mate} package to the system profile,
+and extends polkit with the actions from @code{mate-settings-daemon}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} enlightenment-desktop-service-type
+Return a service that adds the @code{enlightenment} package to the system
+profile, and extends dbus with actions from @code{efl}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} enlightenment-desktop-service-configuration
+@table @asis
+@item @code{enlightenment} (default @code{enlightenment})
+The enlightenment package to use.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+Because the GNOME, XFCE and MATE desktop services pull in so many packages,
+the default @code{%desktop-services} variable doesn't include any of them by
+default.  To add GNOME, XFCE or MATE, just @code{cons} them onto
+@code{%desktop-services} in the @code{services} field of your
+@code{operating-system}:
+
+@example
+(use-modules (gnu))
+(use-service-modules desktop)
+(operating-system
+  ...
+  ;; cons* adds items to the list given as its last argument.
+  (services (cons* (gnome-desktop-service)
+                   (xfce-desktop-service)
+                   %desktop-services))
+  ...)
+@end example
+
+These desktop environments will then be available as options in the
+graphical login window.
+
+The actual service definitions included in @code{%desktop-services} and
+provided by @code{(gnu services dbus)} and @code{(gnu services desktop)} are
+described below.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} dbus-service [#:dbus @var{dbus}] [#:services '()]
+Return a service that runs the ``system bus'', using @var{dbus}, with
+support for @var{services}.
+
+@uref{http://dbus.freedesktop.org/, D-Bus} is an inter-process communication
+facility.  Its system bus is used to allow system services to communicate
+and to be notified of system-wide events.
+
+@var{services} must be a list of packages that provide an
+@file{etc/dbus-1/system.d} directory containing additional D-Bus
+configuration and policy files.  For example, to allow avahi-daemon to use
+the system bus, @var{services} must be equal to @code{(list avahi)}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} elogind-service [#:config @var{config}]
+Return a service that runs the @code{elogind} login and seat management
+daemon.  @uref{https://github.com/elogind/elogind, Elogind} exposes a D-Bus
+interface that can be used to know which users are logged in, know what kind
+of sessions they have open, suspend the system, inhibit system suspend,
+reboot the system, and other tasks.
+
+Elogind handles most system-level power events for a computer, for example
+suspending the system when a lid is closed, or shutting it down when the
+power button is pressed.
+
+The @var{config} keyword argument specifies the configuration for elogind,
+and should be the result of an @code{(elogind-configuration (@var{parameter}
+@var{value})...)} invocation.  Available parameters and their default values
+are:
+
+@table @code
+@item kill-user-processes?
+@code{#f}
+@item kill-only-users
+@code{()}
+@item kill-exclude-users
+@code{("root")}
+@item inhibit-delay-max-seconds
+@code{5}
+@item handle-power-key
+@code{poweroff}
+@item handle-suspend-key
+@code{suspend}
+@item handle-hibernate-key
+@code{hibernate}
+@item handle-lid-switch
+@code{suspend}
+@item handle-lid-switch-docked
+@code{ignore}
+@item power-key-ignore-inhibited?
+@code{#f}
+@item suspend-key-ignore-inhibited?
+@code{#f}
+@item hibernate-key-ignore-inhibited?
+@code{#f}
+@item lid-switch-ignore-inhibited?
+@code{#t}
+@item holdoff-timeout-seconds
+@code{30}
+@item idle-action
+@code{ignore}
+@item idle-action-seconds
+@code{(* 30 60)}
+@item runtime-directory-size-percent
+@code{10}
+@item runtime-directory-size
+@code{#f}
+@item remove-ipc?
+@code{#t}
+@item suspend-state
+@code{("mem" "standby" "freeze")}
+@item suspend-mode
+@code{()}
+@item hibernate-state
+@code{("disk")}
+@item hibernate-mode
+@code{("platform" "shutdown")}
+@item hybrid-sleep-state
+@code{("disk")}
+@item hybrid-sleep-mode
+@code{("suspend" "platform" "shutdown")}
+@end table
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} accountsservice-service @
+       [#:accountsservice @var{accountsservice}] Return a service that runs
+AccountsService, a system service that can list available accounts, change
+their passwords, and so on.  AccountsService integrates with PolicyKit to
+enable unprivileged users to acquire the capability to modify their system
+configuration.
+@uref{https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/AccountsService/, the
+accountsservice web site} for more information.
+
+The @var{accountsservice} keyword argument is the @code{accountsservice}
+package to expose as a service.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} polkit-service @
+                         [#:polkit @var{polkit}] Return a service that runs the
+@uref{http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/polkit/, Polkit privilege
+management service}, which allows system administrators to grant access to
+privileged operations in a structured way.  By querying the Polkit service,
+a privileged system component can know when it should grant additional
+capabilities to ordinary users.  For example, an ordinary user can be
+granted the capability to suspend the system if the user is logged in
+locally.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} upower-service [#:upower @var{upower}] @
+                         [#:watts-up-pro? #f] @ [#:poll-batteries? #t] @ [#:ignore-lid? #f] @
+[#:use-percentage-for-policy? #f] @ [#:percentage-low 10] @
+[#:percentage-critical 3] @ [#:percentage-action 2] @ [#:time-low 1200] @
+[#:time-critical 300] @ [#:time-action 120] @ [#:critical-power-action
+'hybrid-sleep] Return a service that runs
+@uref{http://upower.freedesktop.org/, @command{upowerd}}, a system-wide
+monitor for power consumption and battery levels, with the given
+configuration settings.  It implements the @code{org.freedesktop.UPower}
+D-Bus interface, and is notably used by GNOME.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} udisks-service [#:udisks @var{udisks}]
+Return a service for @uref{http://udisks.freedesktop.org/docs/latest/,
+UDisks}, a @dfn{disk management} daemon that provides user interfaces with
+notifications and ways to mount/unmount disks.  Programs that talk to UDisks
+include the @command{udisksctl} command, part of UDisks, and GNOME Disks.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} colord-service [#:colord @var{colord}]
+Return a service that runs @command{colord}, a system service with a D-Bus
+interface to manage the color profiles of input and output devices such as
+screens and scanners.  It is notably used by the GNOME Color Manager
+graphical tool.  See @uref{http://www.freedesktop.org/software/colord/, the
+colord web site} for more information.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} geoclue-application name [#:allowed? #t] [#:system? #f] [#:users '()]
+Return a configuration allowing an application to access GeoClue location
+data.  @var{name} is the Desktop ID of the application, without the
+@code{.desktop} part.  If @var{allowed?} is true, the application will have
+access to location information by default.  The boolean @var{system?} value
+indicates whether an application is a system component or not.  Finally
+@var{users} is a list of UIDs of all users for which this application is
+allowed location info access.  An empty users list means that all users are
+allowed.
+@end deffn
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %standard-geoclue-applications
+The standard list of well-known GeoClue application configurations, granting
+authority to the GNOME date-and-time utility to ask for the current location
+in order to set the time zone, and allowing the IceCat and Epiphany web
+browsers to request location information.  IceCat and Epiphany both query
+the user before allowing a web page to know the user's location.
+@end defvr
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} geoclue-service [#:colord @var{colord}] @
+                         [#:whitelist '()] @ [#:wifi-geolocation-url
+"https://location.services.mozilla.com/v1/geolocate?key=geoclue"] @
+[#:submit-data? #f] [#:wifi-submission-url
+"https://location.services.mozilla.com/v1/submit?key=geoclue"] @
+[#:submission-nick "geoclue"] @ [#:applications
+%standard-geoclue-applications] Return a service that runs the GeoClue
+location service.  This service provides a D-Bus interface to allow
+applications to request access to a user's physical location, and optionally
+to add information to online location databases.  See
+@uref{https://wiki.freedesktop.org/www/Software/GeoClue/, the GeoClue web
+site} for more information.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} bluetooth-service [#:bluez @var{bluez}] @
+       [@w{#:auto-enable? #f}] Return a service that runs the @command{bluetoothd}
+daemon, which manages all the Bluetooth devices and provides a number of
+D-Bus interfaces.  When AUTO-ENABLE? is true, the bluetooth controller is
+powered automatically at boot, which can be useful when using a bluetooth
+keyboard or mouse.
+
+Users need to be in the @code{lp} group to access the D-Bus service.
+@end deffn
+
+@node Sound Services
+@subsubsection Sound Services
+
+@cindex sound support
+@cindex ALSA
+@cindex PulseAudio, sound support
+
+The @code{(gnu services sound)} module provides a service to configure the
+Advanced Linux Sound Architecture (ALSA) system, which makes PulseAudio the
+preferred ALSA output driver.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} alsa-service-type
+This is the type for the @uref{https://alsa-project.org/, Advanced Linux
+Sound Architecture} (ALSA) system, which generates the
+@file{/etc/asound.conf} configuration file.  The value for this type is a
+@command{alsa-configuration} record as in this example:
+
+@example
+(service alsa-service-type)
+@end example
+
+See below for details about @code{alsa-configuration}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} alsa-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration for @code{alsa-service}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{alsa-plugins} (default: @var{alsa-plugins})
+@code{alsa-plugins} package to use.
+
+@item @code{pulseaudio?} (default: @var{#t})
+Whether ALSA applications should transparently be made to use the
+@uref{http://www.pulseaudio.org/, PulseAudio} sound server.
+
+Using PulseAudio allows you to run several sound-producing applications at
+the same time and to individual control them @i{via} @command{pavucontrol},
+among other things.
+
+@item @code{extra-options} (default: @var{""})
+String to append to the @file{/etc/asound.conf} file.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+Individual users who want to override the system configuration of ALSA can
+do it with the @file{~/.asoundrc} file:
+
+@example
+# In guix, we have to specify the absolute path for plugins.
+pcm_type.jack @{
+  lib "/home/alice/.guix-profile/lib/alsa-lib/libasound_module_pcm_jack.so"
+@}
+
+# Routing ALSA to jack:
+# <http://jackaudio.org/faq/routing_alsa.html>.
+pcm.rawjack @{
+  type jack
+  playback_ports @{
+    0 system:playback_1
+    1 system:playback_2
+  @}
+
+  capture_ports @{
+    0 system:capture_1
+    1 system:capture_2
+  @}
+@}
+
+pcm.!default @{
+  type plug
+  slave @{
+    pcm "rawjack"
+  @}
+@}
+@end example
+
+See @uref{https://www.alsa-project.org/main/index.php/Asoundrc} for the
+details.
+
+
+@node Datenbankdienste
+@subsubsection Datenbankdienste
+
+@cindex database
+@cindex SQL
+The @code{(gnu services databases)} module provides the following services.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} postgresql-service [#:postgresql postgresql] @
+       [#:config-file] [#:data-directory ``/var/lib/postgresql/data''] @ [#:port
+5432] [#:locale ``en_US.utf8''] Return a service that runs @var{postgresql},
+the PostgreSQL database server.
+
+The PostgreSQL daemon loads its runtime configuration from
+@var{config-file}, creates a database cluster with @var{locale} as the
+default locale, stored in @var{data-directory}.  It then listens on
+@var{port}.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} mysql-service [#:config (mysql-configuration)]
+Return a service that runs @command{mysqld}, the MySQL or MariaDB database
+server.
+
+The optional @var{config} argument specifies the configuration for
+@command{mysqld}, which should be a @code{<mysql-configuration>} object.
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} mysql-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of @var{mysql-service}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{mysql} (default: @var{mariadb})
+Package object of the MySQL database server, can be either @var{mariadb} or
+@var{mysql}.
+
+For MySQL, a temporary root password will be displayed at activation time.
+For MariaDB, the root password is empty.
+
+@item @code{port} (default: @code{3306})
+TCP port on which the database server listens for incoming connections.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} memcached-service-type
+This is the service type for the @uref{https://memcached.org/, Memcached}
+service, which provides a distributed in memory cache.  The value for the
+service type is a @code{memcached-configuration} object.
+@end defvr
+
+@example
+(service memcached-service-type)
+@end example
+
+@deftp {Data Type} memcached-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of memcached.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{memcached} (default: @code{memcached})
+The Memcached package to use.
+
+@item @code{interfaces} (default: @code{'("0.0.0.0")})
+Network interfaces on which to listen.
+
+@item @code{tcp-port} (default: @code{11211})
+Port on which to accept connections on,
+
+@item @code{udp-port} (default: @code{11211})
+Port on which to accept UDP connections on, a value of 0 will disable
+listening on a UDP socket.
+
+@item @code{additional-options} (default: @code{'()})
+Additional command line options to pass to @code{memcached}.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} mongodb-service-type
+This is the service type for @uref{https://www.mongodb.com/, MongoDB}.  The
+value for the service type is a @code{mongodb-configuration} object.
+@end defvr
+
+@example
+(service mongodb-service-type)
+@end example
+
+@deftp {Data Type} mongodb-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of mongodb.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{mongodb} (default: @code{mongodb})
+The MongoDB package to use.
+
+@item @code{config-file} (default: @code{%default-mongodb-configuration-file})
+The configuration file for MongoDB.
+
+@item @code{data-directory} (default: @code{"/var/lib/mongodb"})
+This value is used to create the directory, so that it exists and is owned
+by the mongodb user.  It should match the data-directory which MongoDB is
+configured to use through the configuration file.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} redis-service-type
+This is the service type for the @uref{https://redis.io/, Redis} key/value
+store, whose value is a @code{redis-configuration} object.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} redis-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of redis.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{redis} (default: @code{redis})
+The Redis package to use.
+
+@item @code{bind} (default: @code{"127.0.0.1"})
+Network interface on which to listen.
+
+@item @code{port} (default: @code{6379})
+Port on which to accept connections on, a value of 0 will disable listening
+on a TCP socket.
+
+@item @code{working-directory} (default: @code{"/var/lib/redis"})
+Directory in which to store the database and related files.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@node Mail-Dienste
+@subsubsection Mail-Dienste
+
+@cindex mail
+@cindex email
+The @code{(gnu services mail)} module provides Guix service definitions for
+email services: IMAP, POP3, and LMTP servers, as well as mail transport
+agents (MTAs).  Lots of acronyms! These services are detailed in the
+subsections below.
+
+@subsubheading Dovecot Service
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} dovecot-service [#:config (dovecot-configuration)]
+Return a service that runs the Dovecot IMAP/POP3/LMTP mail server.
+@end deffn
+
+By default, Dovecot does not need much configuration; the default
+configuration object created by @code{(dovecot-configuration)} will suffice
+if your mail is delivered to @code{~/Maildir}.  A self-signed certificate
+will be generated for TLS-protected connections, though Dovecot will also
+listen on cleartext ports by default.  There are a number of options,
+though, which mail administrators might need to change, and as is the case
+with other services, Guix allows the system administrator to specify these
+parameters via a uniform Scheme interface.
+
+For example, to specify that mail is located at @code{maildir~/.mail}, one
+would instantiate the Dovecot service like this:
+
+@example
+(dovecot-service #:config
+                 (dovecot-configuration
+                  (mail-location "maildir:~/.mail")))
+@end example
+
+The available configuration parameters follow.  Each parameter definition is
+preceded by its type; for example, @samp{string-list foo} indicates that the
+@code{foo} parameter should be specified as a list of strings.  There is
+also a way to specify the configuration as a string, if you have an old
+@code{dovecot.conf} file that you want to port over from some other system;
+see the end for more details.
+
+@c The following documentation was initially generated by
+@c (generate-documentation) in (gnu services mail).  Manually maintained
+@c documentation is better, so we shouldn't hesitate to edit below as
+@c needed.  However if the change you want to make to this documentation
+@c can be done in an automated way, it's probably easier to change
+@c (generate-documentation) than to make it below and have to deal with
+@c the churn as dovecot updates.
+
+Available @code{dovecot-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} package dovecot
+The dovecot package.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} comma-separated-string-list listen
+A list of IPs or hosts where to listen for connections.  @samp{*} listens on
+all IPv4 interfaces, @samp{::} listens on all IPv6 interfaces.  If you want
+to specify non-default ports or anything more complex, customize the address
+and port fields of the @samp{inet-listener} of the specific services you are
+interested in.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} protocol-configuration-list protocols
+List of protocols we want to serve.  Available protocols include
+@samp{imap}, @samp{pop3}, and @samp{lmtp}.
+
+Available @code{protocol-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{protocol-configuration} parameter} string name
+The name of the protocol.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{protocol-configuration} parameter} string auth-socket-path
+UNIX socket path to the master authentication server to find users.  This is
+used by imap (for shared users) and lda.  It defaults to
+@samp{"/var/run/dovecot/auth-userdb"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{protocol-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list mail-plugins
+Space separated list of plugins to load.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{protocol-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer mail-max-userip-connections
+Maximum number of IMAP connections allowed for a user from each IP address.
+NOTE: The username is compared case-sensitively.  Defaults to @samp{10}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} service-configuration-list services
+List of services to enable.  Available services include @samp{imap},
+@samp{imap-login}, @samp{pop3}, @samp{pop3-login}, @samp{auth}, and
+@samp{lmtp}.
+
+Available @code{service-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{service-configuration} parameter} string kind
+The service kind.  Valid values include @code{director}, @code{imap-login},
+@code{pop3-login}, @code{lmtp}, @code{imap}, @code{pop3}, @code{auth},
+@code{auth-worker}, @code{dict}, @code{tcpwrap}, @code{quota-warning}, or
+anything else.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{service-configuration} parameter} listener-configuration-list listeners
+Listeners for the service.  A listener is either a
+@code{unix-listener-configuration}, a @code{fifo-listener-configuration}, or
+an @code{inet-listener-configuration}.  Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+Available @code{unix-listener-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{unix-listener-configuration} parameter} string path
+Path to the file, relative to @code{base-dir} field.  This is also used as
+the section name.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{unix-listener-configuration} parameter} string mode
+The access mode for the socket.  Defaults to @samp{"0600"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{unix-listener-configuration} parameter} string user
+The user to own the socket.  Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{unix-listener-configuration} parameter} string group
+The group to own the socket.  Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+
+Available @code{fifo-listener-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{fifo-listener-configuration} parameter} string path
+Path to the file, relative to @code{base-dir} field.  This is also used as
+the section name.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{fifo-listener-configuration} parameter} string mode
+The access mode for the socket.  Defaults to @samp{"0600"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{fifo-listener-configuration} parameter} string user
+The user to own the socket.  Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{fifo-listener-configuration} parameter} string group
+The group to own the socket.  Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+
+Available @code{inet-listener-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{inet-listener-configuration} parameter} string protocol
+The protocol to listen for.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{inet-listener-configuration} parameter} string address
+The address on which to listen, or empty for all addresses.  Defaults to
+@samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{inet-listener-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer port
+The port on which to listen.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{inet-listener-configuration} parameter} boolean ssl?
+Whether to use SSL for this service; @samp{yes}, @samp{no}, or
+@samp{required}.  Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{service-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer client-limit
+Maximum number of simultaneous client connections per process.  Once this
+number of connections is received, the next incoming connection will prompt
+Dovecot to spawn another process.  If set to 0, @code{default-client-limit}
+is used instead.
+
+Defaults to @samp{0}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{service-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer service-count
+Number of connections to handle before starting a new process.  Typically
+the only useful values are 0 (unlimited) or 1.  1 is more secure, but 0 is
+faster.  <doc/wiki/LoginProcess.txt>.  Defaults to @samp{1}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{service-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer process-limit
+Maximum number of processes that can exist for this service.  If set to 0,
+@code{default-process-limit} is used instead.
+
+Defaults to @samp{0}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{service-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer process-min-avail
+Number of processes to always keep waiting for more connections.  Defaults
+to @samp{0}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{service-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer vsz-limit
+If you set @samp{service-count 0}, you probably need to grow this.  Defaults
+to @samp{256000000}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} dict-configuration dict
+Dict configuration, as created by the @code{dict-configuration} constructor.
+
+Available @code{dict-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dict-configuration} parameter} free-form-fields entries
+A list of key-value pairs that this dict should hold.  Defaults to
+@samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} passdb-configuration-list passdbs
+A list of passdb configurations, each one created by the
+@code{passdb-configuration} constructor.
+
+Available @code{passdb-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{passdb-configuration} parameter} string driver
+The driver that the passdb should use.  Valid values include @samp{pam},
+@samp{passwd}, @samp{shadow}, @samp{bsdauth}, and @samp{static}.  Defaults
+to @samp{"pam"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{passdb-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list args
+Space separated list of arguments to the passdb driver.  Defaults to
+@samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} userdb-configuration-list userdbs
+List of userdb configurations, each one created by the
+@code{userdb-configuration} constructor.
+
+Available @code{userdb-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{userdb-configuration} parameter} string driver
+The driver that the userdb should use.  Valid values include @samp{passwd}
+and @samp{static}.  Defaults to @samp{"passwd"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{userdb-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list args
+Space separated list of arguments to the userdb driver.  Defaults to
+@samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{userdb-configuration} parameter} free-form-args override-fields
+Override fields from passwd.  Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} plugin-configuration plugin-configuration
+Plug-in configuration, created by the @code{plugin-configuration}
+constructor.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} list-of-namespace-configuration namespaces
+List of namespaces.  Each item in the list is created by the
+@code{namespace-configuration} constructor.
+
+Available @code{namespace-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{namespace-configuration} parameter} string name
+Name for this namespace.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{namespace-configuration} parameter} string type
+Namespace type: @samp{private}, @samp{shared} or @samp{public}.  Defaults to
+@samp{"private"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{namespace-configuration} parameter} string separator
+Hierarchy separator to use. You should use the same separator for all
+namespaces or some clients get confused.  @samp{/} is usually a good one.
+The default however depends on the underlying mail storage format.  Defaults
+to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{namespace-configuration} parameter} string prefix
+Prefix required to access this namespace.  This needs to be different for
+all namespaces. For example @samp{Public/}.  Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{namespace-configuration} parameter} string location
+Physical location of the mailbox. This is in the same format as
+mail_location, which is also the default for it.  Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{namespace-configuration} parameter} boolean inbox?
+There can be only one INBOX, and this setting defines which namespace has
+it.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{namespace-configuration} parameter} boolean hidden?
+If namespace is hidden, it's not advertised to clients via NAMESPACE
+extension. You'll most likely also want to set @samp{list? #f}.  This is
+mostly useful when converting from another server with different namespaces
+which you want to deprecate but still keep working.  For example you can
+create hidden namespaces with prefixes @samp{~/mail/}, @samp{~%u/mail/} and
+@samp{mail/}.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{namespace-configuration} parameter} boolean list?
+Show the mailboxes under this namespace with the LIST command. This makes
+the namespace visible for clients that do not support the NAMESPACE
+extension.  The special @code{children} value lists child mailboxes, but
+hides the namespace prefix.  Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{namespace-configuration} parameter} boolean subscriptions?
+Namespace handles its own subscriptions.  If set to @code{#f}, the parent
+namespace handles them.  The empty prefix should always have this as
+@code{#t}).  Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{namespace-configuration} parameter} mailbox-configuration-list mailboxes
+List of predefined mailboxes in this namespace.  Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+Available @code{mailbox-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{mailbox-configuration} parameter} string name
+Name for this mailbox.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{mailbox-configuration} parameter} string auto
+@samp{create} will automatically create this mailbox.  @samp{subscribe} will
+both create and subscribe to the mailbox.  Defaults to @samp{"no"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{mailbox-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list special-use
+List of IMAP @code{SPECIAL-USE} attributes as specified by RFC 6154.  Valid
+values are @code{\All}, @code{\Archive}, @code{\Drafts}, @code{\Flagged},
+@code{\Junk}, @code{\Sent}, and @code{\Trash}.  Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} file-name base-dir
+Base directory where to store runtime data.  Defaults to
+@samp{"/var/run/dovecot/"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string login-greeting
+Greeting message for clients.  Defaults to @samp{"Dovecot ready."}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list login-trusted-networks
+List of trusted network ranges.  Connections from these IPs are allowed to
+override their IP addresses and ports (for logging and for authentication
+checks).  @samp{disable-plaintext-auth} is also ignored for these networks.
+Typically you would specify your IMAP proxy servers here.  Defaults to
+@samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list login-access-sockets
+List of login access check sockets (e.g.@: tcpwrap).  Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean verbose-proctitle?
+Show more verbose process titles (in ps).  Currently shows user name and IP
+address.  Useful for seeing who is actually using the IMAP processes (e.g.@:
+shared mailboxes or if the same uid is used for multiple accounts).
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean shutdown-clients?
+Should all processes be killed when Dovecot master process shuts down.
+Setting this to @code{#f} means that Dovecot can be upgraded without forcing
+existing client connections to close (although that could also be a problem
+if the upgrade is e.g.@: due to a security fix).  Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer doveadm-worker-count
+If non-zero, run mail commands via this many connections to doveadm server,
+instead of running them directly in the same process.  Defaults to @samp{0}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string doveadm-socket-path
+UNIX socket or host:port used for connecting to doveadm server.  Defaults to
+@samp{"doveadm-server"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list import-environment
+List of environment variables that are preserved on Dovecot startup and
+passed down to all of its child processes.  You can also give key=value
+pairs to always set specific settings.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean disable-plaintext-auth?
+Disable LOGIN command and all other plaintext authentications unless SSL/TLS
+is used (LOGINDISABLED capability).  Note that if the remote IP matches the
+local IP (i.e.@: you're connecting from the same computer), the connection
+is considered secure and plaintext authentication is allowed.  See also
+ssl=required setting.  Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer auth-cache-size
+Authentication cache size (e.g.@: @samp{#e10e6}).  0 means it's disabled.
+Note that bsdauth, PAM and vpopmail require @samp{cache-key} to be set for
+caching to be used.  Defaults to @samp{0}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string auth-cache-ttl
+Time to live for cached data.  After TTL expires the cached record is no
+longer used, *except* if the main database lookup returns internal failure.
+We also try to handle password changes automatically: If user's previous
+authentication was successful, but this one wasn't, the cache isn't used.
+For now this works only with plaintext authentication.  Defaults to @samp{"1
+hour"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string auth-cache-negative-ttl
+TTL for negative hits (user not found, password mismatch).  0 disables
+caching them completely.  Defaults to @samp{"1 hour"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list auth-realms
+List of realms for SASL authentication mechanisms that need them.  You can
+leave it empty if you don't want to support multiple realms.  Many clients
+simply use the first one listed here, so keep the default realm first.
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string auth-default-realm
+Default realm/domain to use if none was specified.  This is used for both
+SASL realms and appending @@domain to username in plaintext logins.
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string auth-username-chars
+List of allowed characters in username.  If the user-given username contains
+a character not listed in here, the login automatically fails.  This is just
+an extra check to make sure user can't exploit any potential quote escaping
+vulnerabilities with SQL/LDAP databases.  If you want to allow all
+characters, set this value to empty.  Defaults to
+@samp{"abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ01234567890.-_@@"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string auth-username-translation
+Username character translations before it's looked up from databases.  The
+value contains series of from -> to characters.  For example @samp{#@@/@@}
+means that @samp{#} and @samp{/} characters are translated to @samp{@@}.
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string auth-username-format
+Username formatting before it's looked up from databases.  You can use the
+standard variables here, e.g.@: %Lu would lowercase the username, %n would
+drop away the domain if it was given, or @samp{%n-AT-%d} would change the
+@samp{@@} into @samp{-AT-}.  This translation is done after
+@samp{auth-username-translation} changes.  Defaults to @samp{"%Lu"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string auth-master-user-separator
+If you want to allow master users to log in by specifying the master
+username within the normal username string (i.e.@: not using SASL
+mechanism's support for it), you can specify the separator character here.
+The format is then <username><separator><master username>.  UW-IMAP uses
+@samp{*} as the separator, so that could be a good choice.  Defaults to
+@samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string auth-anonymous-username
+Username to use for users logging in with ANONYMOUS SASL mechanism.
+Defaults to @samp{"anonymous"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer auth-worker-max-count
+Maximum number of dovecot-auth worker processes.  They're used to execute
+blocking passdb and userdb queries (e.g.@: MySQL and PAM).  They're
+automatically created and destroyed as needed.  Defaults to @samp{30}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string auth-gssapi-hostname
+Host name to use in GSSAPI principal names.  The default is to use the name
+returned by gethostname().  Use @samp{$ALL} (with quotes) to allow all
+keytab entries.  Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string auth-krb5-keytab
+Kerberos keytab to use for the GSSAPI mechanism.  Will use the system
+default (usually @file{/etc/krb5.keytab}) if not specified.  You may need to
+change the auth service to run as root to be able to read this file.
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean auth-use-winbind?
+Do NTLM and GSS-SPNEGO authentication using Samba's winbind daemon and
+@samp{ntlm-auth} helper.  <doc/wiki/Authentication/Mechanisms/Winbind.txt>.
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} file-name auth-winbind-helper-path
+Path for Samba's @samp{ntlm-auth} helper binary.  Defaults to
+@samp{"/usr/bin/ntlm_auth"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string auth-failure-delay
+Time to delay before replying to failed authentications.  Defaults to
+@samp{"2 secs"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean auth-ssl-require-client-cert?
+Require a valid SSL client certificate or the authentication fails.
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean auth-ssl-username-from-cert?
+Take the username from client's SSL certificate, using
+@code{X509_NAME_get_text_by_NID()} which returns the subject's DN's
+CommonName.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list auth-mechanisms
+List of wanted authentication mechanisms.  Supported mechanisms are:
+@samp{plain}, @samp{login}, @samp{digest-md5}, @samp{cram-md5}, @samp{ntlm},
+@samp{rpa}, @samp{apop}, @samp{anonymous}, @samp{gssapi}, @samp{otp},
+@samp{skey}, and @samp{gss-spnego}.  NOTE: See also
+@samp{disable-plaintext-auth} setting.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list director-servers
+List of IPs or hostnames to all director servers, including ourself.  Ports
+can be specified as ip:port.  The default port is the same as what director
+service's @samp{inet-listener} is using.  Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list director-mail-servers
+List of IPs or hostnames to all backend mail servers.  Ranges are allowed
+too, like 10.0.0.10-10.0.0.30.  Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string director-user-expire
+How long to redirect users to a specific server after it no longer has any
+connections.  Defaults to @samp{"15 min"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string director-username-hash
+How the username is translated before being hashed.  Useful values include
+%Ln if user can log in with or without @@domain, %Ld if mailboxes are shared
+within domain.  Defaults to @samp{"%Lu"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string log-path
+Log file to use for error messages.  @samp{syslog} logs to syslog,
+@samp{/dev/stderr} logs to stderr.  Defaults to @samp{"syslog"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string info-log-path
+Log file to use for informational messages.  Defaults to @samp{log-path}.
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string debug-log-path
+Log file to use for debug messages.  Defaults to @samp{info-log-path}.
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string syslog-facility
+Syslog facility to use if you're logging to syslog.  Usually if you don't
+want to use @samp{mail}, you'll use local0..local7.  Also other standard
+facilities are supported.  Defaults to @samp{"mail"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean auth-verbose?
+Log unsuccessful authentication attempts and the reasons why they failed.
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean auth-verbose-passwords?
+In case of password mismatches, log the attempted password.  Valid values
+are no, plain and sha1.  sha1 can be useful for detecting brute force
+password attempts vs.  user simply trying the same password over and over
+again.  You can also truncate the value to n chars by appending ":n" (e.g.@:
+sha1:6).  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean auth-debug?
+Even more verbose logging for debugging purposes.  Shows for example SQL
+queries.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean auth-debug-passwords?
+In case of password mismatches, log the passwords and used scheme so the
+problem can be debugged.  Enabling this also enables @samp{auth-debug}.
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean mail-debug?
+Enable mail process debugging.  This can help you figure out why Dovecot
+isn't finding your mails.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean verbose-ssl?
+Show protocol level SSL errors.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string log-timestamp
+Prefix for each line written to log file.  % codes are in strftime(3)
+format.  Defaults to @samp{"\"%b %d %H:%M:%S \""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list login-log-format-elements
+List of elements we want to log.  The elements which have a non-empty
+variable value are joined together to form a comma-separated string.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string login-log-format
+Login log format.  %s contains @samp{login-log-format-elements} string, %$
+contains the data we want to log.  Defaults to @samp{"%$: %s"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string mail-log-prefix
+Log prefix for mail processes.  See doc/wiki/Variables.txt for list of
+possible variables you can use.  Defaults to
+@samp{"\"%s(%u)<%@{pid@}><%@{session@}>: \""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string deliver-log-format
+Format to use for logging mail deliveries.  You can use variables:
+@table @code
+@item %$
+Delivery status message (e.g.@: @samp{saved to INBOX})
+@item %m
+Message-ID
+@item %s
+Subject
+@item %f
+From address
+@item %p
+Physical size
+@item %w
+Virtual size.
+@end table
+Defaults to @samp{"msgid=%m: %$"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string mail-location
+Location for users' mailboxes.  The default is empty, which means that
+Dovecot tries to find the mailboxes automatically.  This won't work if the
+user doesn't yet have any mail, so you should explicitly tell Dovecot the
+full location.
+
+If you're using mbox, giving a path to the INBOX file (e.g.@: /var/mail/%u)
+isn't enough.  You'll also need to tell Dovecot where the other mailboxes
+are kept.  This is called the "root mail directory", and it must be the
+first path given in the @samp{mail-location} setting.
+
+There are a few special variables you can use, eg.:
+
+@table @samp
+@item %u
+username
+@item %n
+user part in user@@domain, same as %u if there's no domain
+@item %d
+domain part in user@@domain, empty if there's no domain
+@item %h
+home director
+@end table
+
+See doc/wiki/Variables.txt for full list.  Some examples:
+@table @samp
+@item maildir:~/Maildir
+@item mbox:~/mail:INBOX=/var/mail/%u
+@item mbox:/var/mail/%d/%1n/%n:INDEX=/var/indexes/%d/%1n/%
+@end table
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string mail-uid
+System user and group used to access mails.  If you use multiple, userdb can
+override these by returning uid or gid fields.  You can use either numbers
+or names.  <doc/wiki/UserIds.txt>.  Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string mail-gid
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string mail-privileged-group
+Group to enable temporarily for privileged operations.  Currently this is
+used only with INBOX when either its initial creation or dotlocking fails.
+Typically this is set to "mail" to give access to /var/mail.  Defaults to
+@samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string mail-access-groups
+Grant access to these supplementary groups for mail processes.  Typically
+these are used to set up access to shared mailboxes.  Note that it may be
+dangerous to set these if users can create symlinks (e.g.@: if "mail" group
+is set here, ln -s /var/mail ~/mail/var could allow a user to delete others'
+mailboxes, or ln -s /secret/shared/box ~/mail/mybox would allow reading
+it).  Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean mail-full-filesystem-access?
+Allow full file system access to clients.  There's no access checks other
+than what the operating system does for the active UID/GID.  It works with
+both maildir and mboxes, allowing you to prefix mailboxes names with e.g.@:
+/path/ or ~user/.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean mmap-disable?
+Don't use mmap() at all.  This is required if you store indexes to shared
+file systems (NFS or clustered file system).  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean dotlock-use-excl?
+Rely on @samp{O_EXCL} to work when creating dotlock files.  NFS supports
+@samp{O_EXCL} since version 3, so this should be safe to use nowadays by
+default.  Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string mail-fsync
+When to use fsync() or fdatasync() calls:
+@table @code
+@item optimized
+Whenever necessary to avoid losing important data
+@item always
+Useful with e.g.@: NFS when write()s are delayed
+@item never
+Never use it (best performance, but crashes can lose data).
+@end table
+Defaults to @samp{"optimized"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean mail-nfs-storage?
+Mail storage exists in NFS.  Set this to yes to make Dovecot flush NFS
+caches whenever needed.  If you're using only a single mail server this
+isn't needed.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean mail-nfs-index?
+Mail index files also exist in NFS.  Setting this to yes requires
+@samp{mmap-disable? #t} and @samp{fsync-disable? #f}.  Defaults to
+@samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string lock-method
+Locking method for index files.  Alternatives are fcntl, flock and dotlock.
+Dotlocking uses some tricks which may create more disk I/O than other
+locking methods.  NFS users: flock doesn't work, remember to change
+@samp{mmap-disable}.  Defaults to @samp{"fcntl"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} file-name mail-temp-dir
+Directory in which LDA/LMTP temporarily stores incoming mails >128 kB.
+Defaults to @samp{"/tmp"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer first-valid-uid
+Valid UID range for users.  This is mostly to make sure that users can't log
+in as daemons or other system users.  Note that denying root logins is
+hardcoded to dovecot binary and can't be done even if @samp{first-valid-uid}
+is set to 0.  Defaults to @samp{500}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer last-valid-uid
+
+Defaults to @samp{0}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer first-valid-gid
+Valid GID range for users.  Users having non-valid GID as primary group ID
+aren't allowed to log in.  If user belongs to supplementary groups with
+non-valid GIDs, those groups are not set.  Defaults to @samp{1}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer last-valid-gid
+
+Defaults to @samp{0}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer mail-max-keyword-length
+Maximum allowed length for mail keyword name.  It's only forced when trying
+to create new keywords.  Defaults to @samp{50}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} colon-separated-file-name-list valid-chroot-dirs
+List of directories under which chrooting is allowed for mail processes
+(i.e.@: /var/mail will allow chrooting to /var/mail/foo/bar too).  This
+setting doesn't affect @samp{login-chroot} @samp{mail-chroot} or auth chroot
+settings.  If this setting is empty, "/./" in home dirs are ignored.
+WARNING: Never add directories here which local users can modify, that may
+lead to root exploit.  Usually this should be done only if you don't allow
+shell access for users.  <doc/wiki/Chrooting.txt>.  Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string mail-chroot
+Default chroot directory for mail processes.  This can be overridden for
+specific users in user database by giving /./ in user's home directory
+(e.g.@: /home/./user chroots into /home).  Note that usually there is no
+real need to do chrooting, Dovecot doesn't allow users to access files
+outside their mail directory anyway.  If your home directories are prefixed
+with the chroot directory, append "/."@: to @samp{mail-chroot}.
+<doc/wiki/Chrooting.txt>.  Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} file-name auth-socket-path
+UNIX socket path to master authentication server to find users.  This is
+used by imap (for shared users) and lda.  Defaults to
+@samp{"/var/run/dovecot/auth-userdb"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} file-name mail-plugin-dir
+Directory where to look up mail plugins.  Defaults to
+@samp{"/usr/lib/dovecot"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list mail-plugins
+List of plugins to load for all services.  Plugins specific to IMAP, LDA,
+etc.@: are added to this list in their own .conf files.  Defaults to
+@samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer mail-cache-min-mail-count
+The minimum number of mails in a mailbox before updates are done to cache
+file.  This allows optimizing Dovecot's behavior to do less disk writes at
+the cost of more disk reads.  Defaults to @samp{0}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string mailbox-idle-check-interval
+When IDLE command is running, mailbox is checked once in a while to see if
+there are any new mails or other changes.  This setting defines the minimum
+time to wait between those checks.  Dovecot can also use dnotify, inotify
+and kqueue to find out immediately when changes occur.  Defaults to
+@samp{"30 secs"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean mail-save-crlf?
+Save mails with CR+LF instead of plain LF.  This makes sending those mails
+take less CPU, especially with sendfile() syscall with Linux and FreeBSD.
+But it also creates a bit more disk I/O which may just make it slower.  Also
+note that if other software reads the mboxes/maildirs, they may handle the
+extra CRs wrong and cause problems.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean maildir-stat-dirs?
+By default LIST command returns all entries in maildir beginning with a
+dot.  Enabling this option makes Dovecot return only entries which are
+directories.  This is done by stat()ing each entry, so it causes more disk
+I/O.  (For systems setting struct @samp{dirent->d_type} this check is free
+and it's done always regardless of this setting).  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean maildir-copy-with-hardlinks?
+When copying a message, do it with hard links whenever possible.  This makes
+the performance much better, and it's unlikely to have any side effects.
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean maildir-very-dirty-syncs?
+Assume Dovecot is the only MUA accessing Maildir: Scan cur/ directory only
+when its mtime changes unexpectedly or when we can't find the mail
+otherwise.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list mbox-read-locks
+Which locking methods to use for locking mbox.  There are four available:
+
+@table @code
+@item dotlock
+Create <mailbox>.lock file.  This is the oldest and most NFS-safe solution.
+If you want to use /var/mail/ like directory, the users will need write
+access to that directory.
+@item dotlock-try
+Same as dotlock, but if it fails because of permissions or because there
+isn't enough disk space, just skip it.
+@item fcntl
+Use this if possible.  Works with NFS too if lockd is used.
+@item flock
+May not exist in all systems.  Doesn't work with NFS.
+@item lockf
+May not exist in all systems.  Doesn't work with NFS.
+@end table
+
+You can use multiple locking methods; if you do the order they're declared
+in is important to avoid deadlocks if other MTAs/MUAs are using multiple
+locking methods as well.  Some operating systems don't allow using some of
+them simultaneously.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list mbox-write-locks
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string mbox-lock-timeout
+Maximum time to wait for lock (all of them) before aborting.  Defaults to
+@samp{"5 mins"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string mbox-dotlock-change-timeout
+If dotlock exists but the mailbox isn't modified in any way, override the
+lock file after this much time.  Defaults to @samp{"2 mins"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean mbox-dirty-syncs?
+When mbox changes unexpectedly we have to fully read it to find out what
+changed.  If the mbox is large this can take a long time.  Since the change
+is usually just a newly appended mail, it'd be faster to simply read the new
+mails.  If this setting is enabled, Dovecot does this but still safely
+fallbacks to re-reading the whole mbox file whenever something in mbox isn't
+how it's expected to be.  The only real downside to this setting is that if
+some other MUA changes message flags, Dovecot doesn't notice it
+immediately.  Note that a full sync is done with SELECT, EXAMINE, EXPUNGE
+and CHECK commands.  Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean mbox-very-dirty-syncs?
+Like @samp{mbox-dirty-syncs}, but don't do full syncs even with SELECT,
+EXAMINE, EXPUNGE or CHECK commands.  If this is set, @samp{mbox-dirty-syncs}
+is ignored.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean mbox-lazy-writes?
+Delay writing mbox headers until doing a full write sync (EXPUNGE and CHECK
+commands and when closing the mailbox).  This is especially useful for POP3
+where clients often delete all mails.  The downside is that our changes
+aren't immediately visible to other MUAs.  Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer mbox-min-index-size
+If mbox size is smaller than this (e.g.@: 100k), don't write index files.
+If an index file already exists it's still read, just not updated.  Defaults
+to @samp{0}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer mdbox-rotate-size
+Maximum dbox file size until it's rotated.  Defaults to @samp{10000000}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string mdbox-rotate-interval
+Maximum dbox file age until it's rotated.  Typically in days.  Day begins
+from midnight, so 1d = today, 2d = yesterday, etc.  0 = check disabled.
+Defaults to @samp{"1d"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean mdbox-preallocate-space?
+When creating new mdbox files, immediately preallocate their size to
+@samp{mdbox-rotate-size}.  This setting currently works only in Linux with
+some file systems (ext4, xfs).  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string mail-attachment-dir
+sdbox and mdbox support saving mail attachments to external files, which
+also allows single instance storage for them.  Other backends don't support
+this for now.
+
+WARNING: This feature hasn't been tested much yet.  Use at your own risk.
+
+Directory root where to store mail attachments.  Disabled, if empty.
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer mail-attachment-min-size
+Attachments smaller than this aren't saved externally.  It's also possible
+to write a plugin to disable saving specific attachments externally.
+Defaults to @samp{128000}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string mail-attachment-fs
+File system backend to use for saving attachments:
+@table @code
+@item posix
+No SiS done by Dovecot (but this might help FS's own deduplication)
+@item sis posix
+SiS with immediate byte-by-byte comparison during saving
+@item sis-queue posix
+SiS with delayed comparison and deduplication.
+@end table
+Defaults to @samp{"sis posix"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string mail-attachment-hash
+Hash format to use in attachment filenames.  You can add any text and
+variables: @code{%@{md4@}}, @code{%@{md5@}}, @code{%@{sha1@}},
+@code{%@{sha256@}}, @code{%@{sha512@}}, @code{%@{size@}}.  Variables can be
+truncated, e.g.@: @code{%@{sha256:80@}} returns only first 80 bits.
+Defaults to @samp{"%@{sha1@}"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer default-process-limit
+
+Defaults to @samp{100}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer default-client-limit
+
+Defaults to @samp{1000}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer default-vsz-limit
+Default VSZ (virtual memory size) limit for service processes.  This is
+mainly intended to catch and kill processes that leak memory before they eat
+up everything.  Defaults to @samp{256000000}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string default-login-user
+Login user is internally used by login processes.  This is the most
+untrusted user in Dovecot system.  It shouldn't have access to anything at
+all.  Defaults to @samp{"dovenull"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string default-internal-user
+Internal user is used by unprivileged processes.  It should be separate from
+login user, so that login processes can't disturb other processes.  Defaults
+to @samp{"dovecot"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string ssl?
+SSL/TLS support: yes, no, required.  <doc/wiki/SSL.txt>.  Defaults to
+@samp{"required"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string ssl-cert
+PEM encoded X.509 SSL/TLS certificate (public key).  Defaults to
+@samp{"</etc/dovecot/default.pem"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string ssl-key
+PEM encoded SSL/TLS private key.  The key is opened before dropping root
+privileges, so keep the key file unreadable by anyone but root.  Defaults to
+@samp{"</etc/dovecot/private/default.pem"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string ssl-key-password
+If key file is password protected, give the password here.  Alternatively
+give it when starting dovecot with -p parameter.  Since this file is often
+world-readable, you may want to place this setting instead to a different.
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string ssl-ca
+PEM encoded trusted certificate authority.  Set this only if you intend to
+use @samp{ssl-verify-client-cert? #t}.  The file should contain the CA
+certificate(s) followed by the matching CRL(s).  (e.g.@: @samp{ssl-ca
+</etc/ssl/certs/ca.pem}).  Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean ssl-require-crl?
+Require that CRL check succeeds for client certificates.  Defaults to
+@samp{#t}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean ssl-verify-client-cert?
+Request client to send a certificate.  If you also want to require it, set
+@samp{auth-ssl-require-client-cert? #t} in auth section.  Defaults to
+@samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string ssl-cert-username-field
+Which field from certificate to use for username.  commonName and
+x500UniqueIdentifier are the usual choices.  You'll also need to set
+@samp{auth-ssl-username-from-cert? #t}.  Defaults to @samp{"commonName"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string ssl-min-protocol
+Minimum SSL protocol version to accept.  Defaults to @samp{"TLSv1"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string ssl-cipher-list
+SSL ciphers to use.  Defaults to
+@samp{"ALL:!kRSA:!SRP:!kDHd:!DSS:!aNULL:!eNULL:!EXPORT:!DES:!3DES:!MD5:!PSK:!RC4:!ADH:!LOW@@STRENGTH"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string ssl-crypto-device
+SSL crypto device to use, for valid values run "openssl engine".  Defaults
+to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string postmaster-address
+Address to use when sending rejection mails.  %d expands to recipient
+domain.  Defaults to @samp{"postmaster@@%d"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string hostname
+Hostname to use in various parts of sent mails (e.g.@: in Message-Id)  and
+in LMTP replies.  Default is the system's real hostname@@domain.  Defaults
+to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean quota-full-tempfail?
+If user is over quota, return with temporary failure instead of bouncing the
+mail.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} file-name sendmail-path
+Binary to use for sending mails.  Defaults to @samp{"/usr/sbin/sendmail"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string submission-host
+If non-empty, send mails via this SMTP host[:port] instead of sendmail.
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string rejection-subject
+Subject: header to use for rejection mails.  You can use the same variables
+as for @samp{rejection-reason} below.  Defaults to @samp{"Rejected: %s"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string rejection-reason
+Human readable error message for rejection mails.  You can use variables:
+
+@table @code
+@item %n
+CRLF
+@item %r
+reason
+@item %s
+original subject
+@item %t
+recipient
+@end table
+Defaults to @samp{"Your message to <%t> was automatically rejected:%n%r"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string recipient-delimiter
+Delimiter character between local-part and detail in email address.
+Defaults to @samp{"+"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string lda-original-recipient-header
+Header where the original recipient address (SMTP's RCPT TO: address) is
+taken from if not available elsewhere.  With dovecot-lda -a parameter
+overrides this.  A commonly used header for this is X-Original-To.  Defaults
+to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean lda-mailbox-autocreate?
+Should saving a mail to a nonexistent mailbox automatically create it?.
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} boolean lda-mailbox-autosubscribe?
+Should automatically created mailboxes be also automatically subscribed?.
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer imap-max-line-length
+Maximum IMAP command line length.  Some clients generate very long command
+lines with huge mailboxes, so you may need to raise this if you get "Too
+long argument" or "IMAP command line too large" errors often.  Defaults to
+@samp{64000}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string imap-logout-format
+IMAP logout format string:
+@table @code
+@item %i
+total number of bytes read from client
+@item %o
+total number of bytes sent to client.
+@end table
+See @file{doc/wiki/Variables.txt} for a list of all the variables you can
+use.  Defaults to @samp{"in=%i out=%o deleted=%@{deleted@}
+expunged=%@{expunged@} trashed=%@{trashed@} hdr_count=%@{fetch_hdr_count@}
+hdr_bytes=%@{fetch_hdr_bytes@} body_count=%@{fetch_body_count@}
+body_bytes=%@{fetch_body_bytes@}"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string imap-capability
+Override the IMAP CAPABILITY response.  If the value begins with '+', add
+the given capabilities on top of the defaults (e.g.@: +XFOO XBAR).  Defaults
+to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string imap-idle-notify-interval
+How long to wait between "OK Still here" notifications when client is
+IDLEing.  Defaults to @samp{"2 mins"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string imap-id-send
+ID field names and values to send to clients.  Using * as the value makes
+Dovecot use the default value.  The following fields have default values
+currently: name, version, os, os-version, support-url, support-email.
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string imap-id-log
+ID fields sent by client to log.  * means everything.  Defaults to
+@samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list imap-client-workarounds
+Workarounds for various client bugs:
+
+@table @code
+@item delay-newmail
+Send EXISTS/RECENT new mail notifications only when replying to NOOP and
+CHECK commands.  Some clients ignore them otherwise, for example OSX Mail
+(<v2.1).  Outlook Express breaks more badly though, without this it may show
+user "Message no longer in server" errors.  Note that OE6 still breaks even
+with this workaround if synchronization is set to "Headers Only".
+
+@item tb-extra-mailbox-sep
+Thunderbird gets somehow confused with LAYOUT=fs (mbox and dbox) and adds
+extra @samp{/} suffixes to mailbox names.  This option causes Dovecot to
+ignore the extra @samp{/} instead of treating it as invalid mailbox name.
+
+@item tb-lsub-flags
+Show \Noselect flags for LSUB replies with LAYOUT=fs (e.g.@: mbox).  This
+makes Thunderbird realize they aren't selectable and show them greyed out,
+instead of only later giving "not selectable" popup error.
+@end table
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{dovecot-configuration} parameter} string imap-urlauth-host
+Host allowed in URLAUTH URLs sent by client.  "*" allows all.  Defaults to
+@samp{""}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+
+Whew! Lots of configuration options.  The nice thing about it though is that
+GuixSD has a complete interface to Dovecot's configuration language.  This
+allows not only a nice way to declare configurations, but also offers
+reflective capabilities as well: users can write code to inspect and
+transform configurations from within Scheme.
+
+However, it could be that you just want to get a @code{dovecot.conf} up and
+running.  In that case, you can pass an @code{opaque-dovecot-configuration}
+as the @code{#:config} parameter to @code{dovecot-service}.  As its name
+indicates, an opaque configuration does not have easy reflective
+capabilities.
+
+Available @code{opaque-dovecot-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{opaque-dovecot-configuration} parameter} package dovecot
+The dovecot package.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{opaque-dovecot-configuration} parameter} string string
+The contents of the @code{dovecot.conf}, as a string.
+@end deftypevr
+
+For example, if your @code{dovecot.conf} is just the empty string, you could
+instantiate a dovecot service like this:
+
+@example
+(dovecot-service #:config
+                 (opaque-dovecot-configuration
+                  (string "")))
+@end example
+
+@subsubheading OpenSMTPD Service
+
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} opensmtpd-service-type
+This is the type of the @uref{https://www.opensmtpd.org, OpenSMTPD} service,
+whose value should be an @code{opensmtpd-configuration} object as in this
+example:
+
+@example
+(service opensmtpd-service-type
+         (opensmtpd-configuration
+           (config-file (local-file "./my-smtpd.conf"))))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} opensmtpd-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of opensmtpd.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @var{opensmtpd})
+Package object of the OpenSMTPD SMTP server.
+
+@item @code{config-file} (default: @var{%default-opensmtpd-file})
+File-like object of the OpenSMTPD configuration file to use.  By default it
+listens on the loopback network interface, and allows for mail from users
+and daemons on the local machine, as well as permitting email to remote
+servers.  Run @command{man smtpd.conf} for more information.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@subsubheading Exim Service
+
+@cindex mail transfer agent (MTA)
+@cindex MTA (mail transfer agent)
+@cindex SMTP
+
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} exim-service-type
+This is the type of the @uref{https://exim.org, Exim} mail transfer agent
+(MTA), whose value should be an @code{exim-configuration} object as in this
+example:
+
+@example
+(service exim-service-type
+         (exim-configuration
+           (config-file (local-file "./my-exim.conf"))))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+In order to use an @code{exim-service-type} service you must also have a
+@code{mail-aliases-service-type} service present in your
+@code{operating-system} (even if it has no aliases).
+
+@deftp {Data Type} exim-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of exim.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @var{exim})
+Package object of the Exim server.
+
+@item @code{config-file} (default: @code{#f})
+File-like object of the Exim configuration file to use. If its value is
+@code{#f} then use the default configuration file from the package provided
+in @code{package}. The resulting configuration file is loaded after setting
+the @code{exim_user} and @code{exim_group} configuration variables.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@subsubheading Mail Aliases Service
+
+@cindex email aliases
+@cindex aliases, for email addresses
+
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} mail-aliases-service-type
+This is the type of the service which provides @code{/etc/aliases},
+specifying how to deliver mail to users on this system.
+
+@example
+(service mail-aliases-service-type
+         '(("postmaster" "bob")
+           ("bob" "bob@@example.com" "bob@@example2.com")))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+The configuration for a @code{mail-aliases-service-type} service is an
+association list denoting how to deliver mail that comes to this
+system. Each entry is of the form @code{(alias addresses ...)}, with
+@code{alias} specifying the local alias and @code{addresses} specifying
+where to deliver this user's mail.
+
+The aliases aren't required to exist as users on the local system. In the
+above example, there doesn't need to be a @code{postmaster} entry in the
+@code{operating-system}'s @code{user-accounts} in order to deliver the
+@code{postmaster} mail to @code{bob} (which subsequently would deliver mail
+to @code{bob@@example.com} and @code{bob@@example2.com}).
+
+@node Kurznachrichtendienste
+@subsubsection Kurznachrichtendienste
+
+@cindex messaging
+@cindex jabber
+@cindex XMPP
+The @code{(gnu services messaging)} module provides Guix service definitions
+for messaging services: currently only Prosody is supported.
+
+@subsubheading Prosody Service
+
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} prosody-service-type
+This is the type for the @uref{https://prosody.im, Prosody XMPP
+communication server}.  Its value must be a @code{prosody-configuration}
+record as in this example:
+
+@example
+(service prosody-service-type
+         (prosody-configuration
+          (modules-enabled (cons "groups" "mam" %default-modules-enabled))
+          (int-components
+           (list
+            (int-component-configuration
+             (hostname "conference.example.net")
+             (plugin "muc")
+             (mod-muc (mod-muc-configuration)))))
+          (virtualhosts
+           (list
+            (virtualhost-configuration
+             (domain "example.net"))))))
+@end example
+
+See below for details about @code{prosody-configuration}.
+
+@end deffn
+
+By default, Prosody does not need much configuration.  Only one
+@code{virtualhosts} field is needed: it specifies the domain you wish
+Prosody to serve.
+
+You can perform various sanity checks on the generated configuration with
+the @code{prosodyctl check} command.
+
+Prosodyctl will also help you to import certificates from the
+@code{letsencrypt} directory so that the @code{prosody} user can access
+them.  See @url{https://prosody.im/doc/letsencrypt}.
+
+@example
+prosodyctl --root cert import /etc/letsencrypt/live
+@end example
+
+The available configuration parameters follow.  Each parameter definition is
+preceded by its type; for example, @samp{string-list foo} indicates that the
+@code{foo} parameter should be specified as a list of strings.  Types
+starting with @code{maybe-} denote parameters that won't show up in
+@code{prosody.cfg.lua} when their value is @code{'disabled}.
+
+There is also a way to specify the configuration as a string, if you have an
+old @code{prosody.cfg.lua} file that you want to port over from some other
+system; see the end for more details.
+
+The @code{file-object} type designates either a file-like object
+(@pxref{G-Ausdrücke, file-like objects}) or a file name.
+
+@c The following documentation was initially generated by
+@c (generate-documentation) in (gnu services messaging).  Manually maintained
+@c documentation is better, so we shouldn't hesitate to edit below as
+@c needed.  However if the change you want to make to this documentation
+@c can be done in an automated way, it's probably easier to change
+@c (generate-documentation) than to make it below and have to deal with
+@c the churn as Prosody updates.
+
+Available @code{prosody-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} package prosody
+The Prosody package.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} file-name data-path
+Location of the Prosody data storage directory.  See
+@url{https://prosody.im/doc/configure}.  Defaults to
+@samp{"/var/lib/prosody"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} file-object-list plugin-paths
+Additional plugin directories.  They are searched in all the specified paths
+in order.  See @url{https://prosody.im/doc/plugins_directory}.  Defaults to
+@samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} file-name certificates
+Every virtual host and component needs a certificate so that clients and
+servers can securely verify its identity.  Prosody will automatically load
+certificates/keys from the directory specified here.  Defaults to
+@samp{"/etc/prosody/certs"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} string-list admins
+This is a list of accounts that are admins for the server.  Note that you
+must create the accounts separately.  See
+@url{https://prosody.im/doc/admins} and
+@url{https://prosody.im/doc/creating_accounts}.  Example: @code{(admins
+'("user1@@example.com" "user2@@example.net"))} Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} boolean use-libevent?
+Enable use of libevent for better performance under high load.  See
+@url{https://prosody.im/doc/libevent}.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} module-list modules-enabled
+This is the list of modules Prosody will load on startup.  It looks for
+@code{mod_modulename.lua} in the plugins folder, so make sure that exists
+too.  Documentation on modules can be found at:
+@url{https://prosody.im/doc/modules}.  Defaults to @samp{("roster"
+"saslauth" "tls" "dialback" "disco" "carbons" "private" "blocklist" "vcard"
+"version" "uptime" "time" "ping" "pep" "register" "admin_adhoc")}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} string-list modules-disabled
+@samp{"offline"}, @samp{"c2s"} and @samp{"s2s"} are auto-loaded, but should
+you want to disable them then add them to this list.  Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} file-object groups-file
+Path to a text file where the shared groups are defined.  If this path is
+empty then @samp{mod_groups} does nothing.  See
+@url{https://prosody.im/doc/modules/mod_groups}.  Defaults to
+@samp{"/var/lib/prosody/sharedgroups.txt"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} boolean allow-registration?
+Disable account creation by default, for security.  See
+@url{https://prosody.im/doc/creating_accounts}.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} maybe-ssl-configuration ssl
+These are the SSL/TLS-related settings.  Most of them are disabled so to use
+Prosody's defaults.  If you do not completely understand these options, do
+not add them to your config, it is easy to lower the security of your server
+using them.  See @url{https://prosody.im/doc/advanced_ssl_config}.
+
+Available @code{ssl-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ssl-configuration} parameter} maybe-string protocol
+This determines what handshake to use.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ssl-configuration} parameter} maybe-file-name key
+Path to your private key file.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ssl-configuration} parameter} maybe-file-name certificate
+Path to your certificate file.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ssl-configuration} parameter} file-object capath
+Path to directory containing root certificates that you wish Prosody to
+trust when verifying the certificates of remote servers.  Defaults to
+@samp{"/etc/ssl/certs"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ssl-configuration} parameter} maybe-file-object cafile
+Path to a file containing root certificates that you wish Prosody to trust.
+Similar to @code{capath} but with all certificates concatenated together.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ssl-configuration} parameter} maybe-string-list verify
+A list of verification options (these mostly map to OpenSSL's
+@code{set_verify()} flags).
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ssl-configuration} parameter} maybe-string-list options
+A list of general options relating to SSL/TLS.  These map to OpenSSL's
+@code{set_options()}.  For a full list of options available in LuaSec, see
+the LuaSec source.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ssl-configuration} parameter} maybe-non-negative-integer depth
+How long a chain of certificate authorities to check when looking for a
+trusted root certificate.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ssl-configuration} parameter} maybe-string ciphers
+An OpenSSL cipher string.  This selects what ciphers Prosody will offer to
+clients, and in what order.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ssl-configuration} parameter} maybe-file-name dhparam
+A path to a file containing parameters for Diffie-Hellman key exchange.  You
+can create such a file with: @code{openssl dhparam -out
+/etc/prosody/certs/dh-2048.pem 2048}
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ssl-configuration} parameter} maybe-string curve
+Curve for Elliptic curve Diffie-Hellman. Prosody's default is
+@samp{"secp384r1"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ssl-configuration} parameter} maybe-string-list verifyext
+A list of "extra" verification options.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ssl-configuration} parameter} maybe-string password
+Password for encrypted private keys.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} boolean c2s-require-encryption?
+Whether to force all client-to-server connections to be encrypted or not.
+See @url{https://prosody.im/doc/modules/mod_tls}.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} string-list disable-sasl-mechanisms
+Set of mechanisms that will never be offered.  See
+@url{https://prosody.im/doc/modules/mod_saslauth}.  Defaults to
+@samp{("DIGEST-MD5")}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} boolean s2s-require-encryption?
+Whether to force all server-to-server connections to be encrypted or not.
+See @url{https://prosody.im/doc/modules/mod_tls}.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} boolean s2s-secure-auth?
+Whether to require encryption and certificate authentication.  This provides
+ideal security, but requires servers you communicate with to support
+encryption AND present valid, trusted certificates.  See
+@url{https://prosody.im/doc/s2s#security}.  Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} string-list s2s-insecure-domains
+Many servers don't support encryption or have invalid or self-signed
+certificates.  You can list domains here that will not be required to
+authenticate using certificates.  They will be authenticated using DNS.  See
+@url{https://prosody.im/doc/s2s#security}.  Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} string-list s2s-secure-domains
+Even if you leave @code{s2s-secure-auth?} disabled, you can still require
+valid certificates for some domains by specifying a list here.  See
+@url{https://prosody.im/doc/s2s#security}.  Defaults to @samp{()}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} string authentication
+Select the authentication backend to use.  The default provider stores
+passwords in plaintext and uses Prosody's configured data storage to store
+the authentication data.  If you do not trust your server please see
+@url{https://prosody.im/doc/modules/mod_auth_internal_hashed} for
+information about using the hashed backend.  See also
+@url{https://prosody.im/doc/authentication} Defaults to
+@samp{"internal_plain"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} maybe-string log
+Set logging options.  Advanced logging configuration is not yet supported by
+the GuixSD Prosody Service.  See @url{https://prosody.im/doc/logging}.
+Defaults to @samp{"*syslog"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} file-name pidfile
+File to write pid in.  See @url{https://prosody.im/doc/modules/mod_posix}.
+Defaults to @samp{"/var/run/prosody/prosody.pid"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} maybe-non-negative-integer http-max-content-size
+Maximum allowed size of the HTTP body (in bytes).
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} maybe-string http-external-url
+Some modules expose their own URL in various ways.  This URL is built from
+the protocol, host and port used.  If Prosody sits behind a proxy, the
+public URL will be @code{http-external-url} instead.  See
+@url{https://prosody.im/doc/http#external_url}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} virtualhost-configuration-list virtualhosts
+A host in Prosody is a domain on which user accounts can be created.  For
+example if you want your users to have addresses like
+@samp{"john.smith@@example.com"} then you need to add a host
+@samp{"example.com"}.  All options in this list will apply only to this
+host.
+
+Note: the name "virtual" host is used in configuration to avoid confusion
+with the actual physical host that Prosody is installed on.  A single
+Prosody instance can serve many domains, each one defined as a VirtualHost
+entry in Prosody's configuration.  Conversely a server that hosts a single
+domain would have just one VirtualHost entry.
+
+See @url{https://prosody.im/doc/configure#virtual_host_settings}.
+
+Available @code{virtualhost-configuration} fields are:
+
+all these @code{prosody-configuration} fields: @code{admins},
+@code{use-libevent?}, @code{modules-enabled}, @code{modules-disabled},
+@code{groups-file}, @code{allow-registration?}, @code{ssl},
+@code{c2s-require-encryption?}, @code{disable-sasl-mechanisms},
+@code{s2s-require-encryption?}, @code{s2s-secure-auth?},
+@code{s2s-insecure-domains}, @code{s2s-secure-domains},
+@code{authentication}, @code{log}, @code{http-max-content-size},
+@code{http-external-url}, @code{raw-content}, plus:
+@deftypevr {@code{virtualhost-configuration} parameter} string domain
+Domain you wish Prosody to serve.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} int-component-configuration-list int-components
+Components are extra services on a server which are available to clients,
+usually on a subdomain of the main server (such as
+@samp{"mycomponent.example.com"}).  Example components might be chatroom
+servers, user directories, or gateways to other protocols.
+
+Internal components are implemented with Prosody-specific plugins.  To add
+an internal component, you simply fill the hostname field, and the plugin
+you wish to use for the component.
+
+See @url{https://prosody.im/doc/components}.  Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+Available @code{int-component-configuration} fields are:
+
+all these @code{prosody-configuration} fields: @code{admins},
+@code{use-libevent?}, @code{modules-enabled}, @code{modules-disabled},
+@code{groups-file}, @code{allow-registration?}, @code{ssl},
+@code{c2s-require-encryption?}, @code{disable-sasl-mechanisms},
+@code{s2s-require-encryption?}, @code{s2s-secure-auth?},
+@code{s2s-insecure-domains}, @code{s2s-secure-domains},
+@code{authentication}, @code{log}, @code{http-max-content-size},
+@code{http-external-url}, @code{raw-content}, plus:
+@deftypevr {@code{int-component-configuration} parameter} string hostname
+Hostname of the component.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{int-component-configuration} parameter} string plugin
+Plugin you wish to use for the component.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{int-component-configuration} parameter} maybe-mod-muc-configuration mod-muc
+Multi-user chat (MUC) is Prosody's module for allowing you to create hosted
+chatrooms/conferences for XMPP users.
+
+General information on setting up and using multi-user chatrooms can be
+found in the "Chatrooms" documentation
+(@url{https://prosody.im/doc/chatrooms}), which you should read if you are
+new to XMPP chatrooms.
+
+See also @url{https://prosody.im/doc/modules/mod_muc}.
+
+Available @code{mod-muc-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{mod-muc-configuration} parameter} string name
+The name to return in service discovery responses.  Defaults to
+@samp{"Prosody Chatrooms"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{mod-muc-configuration} parameter} string-or-boolean restrict-room-creation
+If @samp{#t}, this will only allow admins to create new chatrooms.
+Otherwise anyone can create a room.  The value @samp{"local"} restricts room
+creation to users on the service's parent domain.  E.g.@:
+@samp{user@@example.com} can create rooms on @samp{rooms.example.com}.  The
+value @samp{"admin"} restricts to service administrators only.  Defaults to
+@samp{#f}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{mod-muc-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer max-history-messages
+Maximum number of history messages that will be sent to the member that has
+just joined the room.  Defaults to @samp{20}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} ext-component-configuration-list ext-components
+External components use XEP-0114, which most standalone components support.
+To add an external component, you simply fill the hostname field.  See
+@url{https://prosody.im/doc/components}.  Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+Available @code{ext-component-configuration} fields are:
+
+all these @code{prosody-configuration} fields: @code{admins},
+@code{use-libevent?}, @code{modules-enabled}, @code{modules-disabled},
+@code{groups-file}, @code{allow-registration?}, @code{ssl},
+@code{c2s-require-encryption?}, @code{disable-sasl-mechanisms},
+@code{s2s-require-encryption?}, @code{s2s-secure-auth?},
+@code{s2s-insecure-domains}, @code{s2s-secure-domains},
+@code{authentication}, @code{log}, @code{http-max-content-size},
+@code{http-external-url}, @code{raw-content}, plus:
+@deftypevr {@code{ext-component-configuration} parameter} string component-secret
+Password which the component will use to log in.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ext-component-configuration} parameter} string hostname
+Hostname of the component.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer-list component-ports
+Port(s) Prosody listens on for component connections.  Defaults to
+@samp{(5347)}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} string component-interface
+Interface Prosody listens on for component connections.  Defaults to
+@samp{"127.0.0.1"}.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{prosody-configuration} parameter} maybe-raw-content raw-content
+Raw content that will be added to the configuration file.
+@end deftypevr
+
+It could be that you just want to get a @code{prosody.cfg.lua} up and
+running.  In that case, you can pass an @code{opaque-prosody-configuration}
+record as the value of @code{prosody-service-type}.  As its name indicates,
+an opaque configuration does not have easy reflective capabilities.
+Available @code{opaque-prosody-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{opaque-prosody-configuration} parameter} package prosody
+The prosody package.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{opaque-prosody-configuration} parameter} string prosody.cfg.lua
+The contents of the @code{prosody.cfg.lua} to use.
+@end deftypevr
+
+For example, if your @code{prosody.cfg.lua} is just the empty string, you
+could instantiate a prosody service like this:
+
+@example
+(service prosody-service-type
+         (opaque-prosody-configuration
+          (prosody.cfg.lua "")))
+@end example
+
+@c end of Prosody auto-generated documentation
+
+@subsubheading BitlBee Service
+
+@cindex IRC (Internet Relay Chat)
+@cindex IRC gateway
+@url{http://bitlbee.org,BitlBee} is a gateway that provides an IRC interface
+to a variety of messaging protocols such as XMPP.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} bitlbee-service-type
+This is the service type for the @url{http://bitlbee.org,BitlBee} IRC
+gateway daemon.  Its value is a @code{bitlbee-configuration} (see below).
+
+To have BitlBee listen on port 6667 on localhost, add this line to your
+services:
+
+@example
+(service bitlbee-service-type)
+@end example
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} bitlbee-configuration
+This is the configuration for BitlBee, with the following fields:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{interface} (default: @code{"127.0.0.1"})
+@itemx @code{port} (default: @code{6667})
+Listen on the network interface corresponding to the IP address specified in
+@var{interface}, on @var{port}.
+
+When @var{interface} is @code{127.0.0.1}, only local clients can connect;
+when it is @code{0.0.0.0}, connections can come from any networking
+interface.
+
+@item @code{package} (default: @code{bitlbee})
+The BitlBee package to use.
+
+@item @code{plugins} (default: @code{'()})
+List of plugin packages to use---e.g., @code{bitlbee-discord}.
+
+@item @code{extra-settings} (default: @code{""})
+Configuration snippet added as-is to the BitlBee configuration file.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+
+@node Telefondienste
+@subsubsection Telefondienste
+
+@cindex Murmur (VoIP server)
+@cindex VoIP server
+This section describes how to set up and run a Murmur server.  Murmur is the
+server of the @uref{https://mumble.info, Mumble} voice-over-IP (VoIP) suite.
+
+@deftp {Data Type} murmur-configuration
+The service type for the Murmur server.  An example configuration can look
+like this:
+
+@example
+(service murmur-service-type
+         (murmur-configuration
+          (welcome-text
+            "Welcome to this Mumble server running on GuixSD!")
+          (cert-required? #t) ;disallow text password logins
+          (ssl-cert "/etc/letsencrypt/live/mumble.example.com/fullchain.pem")
+          (ssl-key "/etc/letsencrypt/live/mumble.example.com/privkey.pem")))
+@end example
+
+After reconfiguring your system, you can manually set the murmur
+@code{SuperUser} password with the command that is printed during the
+activation phase.
+
+It is recommended to register a normal Mumble user account and grant it
+admin or moderator rights.  You can use the @code{mumble} client to login as
+new normal user, register yourself, and log out.  For the next step login
+with the name @code{SuperUser} use the @code{SuperUser} password that you
+set previously, and grant your newly registered mumble user administrator or
+moderator rights and create some channels.
+
+Available @code{murmur-configuration} fields are:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @code{mumble})
+Package that contains @code{bin/murmurd}.
+
+@item @code{user} (default: @code{"murmur"})
+User who will run the Murmur server.
+
+@item @code{group} (default: @code{"murmur"})
+Group of the user who will run the murmur server.
+
+@item @code{port} (default: @code{64738})
+Port on which the server will listen.
+
+@item @code{welcome-text} (default: @code{""})
+Welcome text sent to clients when they connect.
+
+@item @code{server-password} (default: @code{""})
+Password the clients have to enter in order to connect.
+
+@item @code{max-users} (default: @code{100})
+Maximum of users that can be connected to the server at once.
+
+@item @code{max-user-bandwidth} (default: @code{#f})
+Maximum voice traffic a user can send per second.
+
+@item @code{database-file} (default: @code{"/var/lib/murmur/db.sqlite"})
+File name of the sqlite database.  The service's user will become the owner
+of the directory.
+
+@item @code{log-file} (default: @code{"/var/log/murmur/murmur.log"})
+File name of the log file.  The service's user will become the owner of the
+directory.
+
+@item @code{autoban-attempts} (default: @code{10})
+Maximum number of logins a user can make in @code{autoban-timeframe} without
+getting auto banned for @code{autoban-time}.
+
+@item @code{autoban-timeframe} (default: @code{120})
+Timeframe for autoban in seconds.
+
+@item @code{autoban-time} (default: @code{300})
+Amount of time in seconds for which a client gets banned when violating the
+autoban limits.
+
+@item @code{opus-threshold} (default: @code{100})
+Percentage of clients that need to support opus before switching over to
+opus audio codec.
+
+@item @code{channel-nesting-limit} (default: @code{10})
+How deep channels can be nested at maximum.
+
+@item @code{channelname-regex} (default: @code{#f})
+A string in form of a Qt regular expression that channel names must conform
+to.
+
+@item @code{username-regex} (default: @code{#f})
+A string in form of a Qt regular expression that user names must conform to.
+
+@item @code{text-message-length} (default: @code{5000})
+Maximum size in bytes that a user can send in one text chat message.
+
+@item @code{image-message-length} (default: @code{(* 128 1024)})
+Maximum size in bytes that a user can send in one image message.
+
+@item @code{cert-required?} (default: @code{#f})
+If it is set to @code{#t} clients that use weak password authentification
+will not be accepted. Users must have completed the certificate wizard to
+join.
+
+@item @code{remember-channel?} (default: @code{#f})
+Should murmur remember the last channel each user was in when they
+disconnected and put them into the remembered channel when they rejoin.
+
+@item @code{allow-html?} (default: @code{#f})
+Should html be allowed in text messages, user comments, and channel
+descriptions.
+
+@item @code{allow-ping?} (default: @code{#f})
+Setting to true exposes the current user count, the maximum user count, and
+the server's maximum bandwidth per client to unauthenticated users. In the
+Mumble client, this information is shown in the Connect dialog.
+
+Disabling this setting will prevent public listing of the server.
+
+@item @code{bonjour?} (default: @code{#f})
+Should the server advertise itself in the local network through the bonjour
+protocol.
+
+@item @code{send-version?} (default: @code{#f})
+Should the murmur server version be exposed in ping requests.
+
+@item @code{log-days} (default: @code{31})
+Murmur also stores logs in the database, which are accessible via RPC.  The
+default is 31 days of months, but you can set this setting to 0 to keep logs
+forever, or -1 to disable logging to the database.
+
+@item @code{obfuscate-ips?} (default: @code{#t})
+Should logged ips be obfuscated to protect the privacy of users.
+
+@item @code{ssl-cert} (default: @code{#f})
+File name of the SSL/TLS certificate used for encrypted connections.
+
+@example
+(ssl-cert "/etc/letsencrypt/live/example.com/fullchain.pem")
+@end example
+@item @code{ssl-key} (default: @code{#f})
+Filepath to the ssl private key used for encrypted connections.
+@example
+(ssl-key "/etc/letsencrypt/live/example.com/privkey.pem")
+@end example
+
+@item @code{ssl-dh-params} (default: @code{#f})
+File name of a PEM-encoded file with Diffie-Hellman parameters for the
+SSL/TLS encryption.  Alternatively you set it to @code{"@@ffdhe2048"},
+@code{"@@ffdhe3072"}, @code{"@@ffdhe4096"}, @code{"@@ffdhe6144"} or
+@code{"@@ffdhe8192"} to use bundled parameters from RFC 7919.
+
+@item @code{ssl-ciphers} (default: @code{#f})
+The @code{ssl-ciphers} option chooses the cipher suites to make available
+for use in SSL/TLS.
+
+This option is specified using
+@uref{https://www.openssl.org/docs/apps/ciphers.html#CIPHER-LIST-FORMAT,
+OpenSSL cipher list notation}.
+
+It is recommended that you try your cipher string using 'openssl ciphers
+<string>' before setting it here, to get a feel for which cipher suites you
+will get.  After setting this option, it is recommend that you inspect your
+Murmur log to ensure that Murmur is using the cipher suites that you
+expected it to.
+
+Note: Changing this option may impact the backwards compatibility of your
+Murmur server, and can remove the ability for older Mumble clients to be
+able to connect to it.
+
+@item @code{public-registration} (default: @code{#f})
+Must be a @code{<murmur-public-registration-configuration>} record or
+@code{#f}.
+
+You can optionally register your server in the public server list that the
+@code{mumble} client shows on startup.  You cannot register your server if
+you have set a @code{server-password}, or set @code{allow-ping} to
+@code{#f}.
+
+It might take a few hours until it shows up in the public list.
+
+@item @code{file} (default: @code{#f})
+Optional alternative override for this configuration.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} murmur-public-registration-configuration
+Configuration for public registration of a murmur service.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{name}
+This is a display name for your server. Not to be confused with the
+hostname.
+
+@item @code{password}
+A password to identify your registration.  Subsequent updates will need the
+same password. Don't lose your password.
+
+@item @code{url}
+This should be a @code{http://} or @code{https://} link to your web site.
+
+@item @code{hostname} (default: @code{#f})
+By default your server will be listed by its IP address.  If it is set your
+server will be linked by this host name instead.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+
+
+@node Überwachungsdienste
+@subsubsection Überwachungsdienste
+
+@subsubheading Tailon Service
+
+@uref{https://tailon.readthedocs.io/, Tailon} is a web application for
+viewing and searching log files.
+
+The following example will configure the service with default values.  By
+default, Tailon can be accessed on port 8080 (@code{http://localhost:8080}).
+
+@example
+(service tailon-service-type)
+@end example
+
+The following example customises more of the Tailon configuration, adding
+@command{sed} to the list of allowed commands.
+
+@example
+(service tailon-service-type
+         (tailon-configuration
+           (config-file
+             (tailon-configuration-file
+               (allowed-commands '("tail" "grep" "awk" "sed"))))))
+@end example
+
+
+@deftp {Data Type} tailon-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of Tailon.  This type has the
+following parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{config-file} (default: @code{(tailon-configuration-file)})
+The configuration file to use for Tailon. This can be set to a
+@dfn{tailon-configuration-file} record value, or any gexp
+(@pxref{G-Ausdrücke}).
+
+For example, to instead use a local file, the @code{local-file} function can
+be used:
+
+@example
+(service tailon-service-type
+         (tailon-configuration
+           (config-file (local-file "./my-tailon.conf"))))
+@end example
+
+@item @code{package} (default: @code{tailon})
+The tailon package to use.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} tailon-configuration-file
+Data type representing the configuration options for Tailon.  This type has
+the following parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{files} (default: @code{(list "/var/log")})
+List of files to display. The list can include strings for a single file or
+directory, or a list, where the first item is the name of a subsection, and
+the remaining items are the files or directories in that subsection.
+
+@item @code{bind} (default: @code{"localhost:8080"})
+Address and port to which Tailon should bind on.
+
+@item @code{relative-root} (default: @code{#f})
+URL path to use for Tailon, set to @code{#f} to not use a path.
+
+@item @code{allow-transfers?} (default: @code{#t})
+Allow downloading the log files in the web interface.
+
+@item @code{follow-names?} (default: @code{#t})
+Allow tailing of not-yet existent files.
+
+@item @code{tail-lines} (default: @code{200})
+Number of lines to read initially from each file.
+
+@item @code{allowed-commands} (default: @code{(list "tail" "grep" "awk")})
+Commands to allow running. By default, @code{sed} is disabled.
+
+@item @code{debug?} (default: @code{#f})
+Set @code{debug?} to @code{#t} to show debug messages.
+
+@item @code{wrap-lines} (default: @code{#t})
+Initial line wrapping state in the web interface. Set to @code{#t} to
+initially wrap lines (the default), or to @code{#f} to initially not wrap
+lines.
+
+@item @code{http-auth} (default: @code{#f})
+HTTP authentication type to use. Set to @code{#f} to disable authentication
+(the default). Supported values are @code{"digest"} or @code{"basic"}.
+
+@item @code{users} (default: @code{#f})
+If HTTP authentication is enabled (see @code{http-auth}), access will be
+restricted to the credentials provided here. To configure users, use a list
+of pairs, where the first element of the pair is the username, and the 2nd
+element of the pair is the password.
+
+@example
+(tailon-configuration-file
+  (http-auth "basic")
+  (users     '(("user1" . "password1")
+               ("user2" . "password2"))))
+@end example
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+
+@subsubheading Darkstat Service
+@cindex darkstat
+Darkstat is a packet sniffer that captures network traffic, calculates
+statistics about usage, and serves reports over HTTP.
+
+@defvar {Scheme Variable} darkstat-service-type
+This is the service type for the @uref{https://unix4lyfe.org/darkstat/,
+darkstat} service, its value must be a @code{darkstat-configuration} record
+as in this example:
+
+@example
+(service darkstat-service-type
+         (darkstat-configuration
+           (interface "eno1")))
+@end example
+@end defvar
+
+@deftp {Data Type} darkstat-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of @command{darkstat}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @code{darkstat})
+The darkstat package to use.
+
+@item @code{interface}
+Capture traffic on the specified network interface.
+
+@item @code{port} (default: @code{"667"})
+Bind the web interface to the specified port.
+
+@item @code{bind-address} (default: @code{"127.0.0.1"})
+Bind the web interface to the specified address.
+
+@item @code{base} (default: @code{"/"})
+Specify the path of the base URL.  This can be useful if @command{darkstat}
+is accessed via a reverse proxy.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@subsubheading Prometheus Node Exporter Service
+
+@cindex prometheus-node-exporter
+The Prometheus ``node exporter'' makes hardware and operating system
+statistics provided by the Linux kernel available for the Prometheus
+monitoring system.  This service should be deployed on all physical nodes
+and virtual machines, where monitoring these statistics is desirable.
+
+@defvar {Scheme variable} prometheus-node-exporter-service-type
+This is the service type for the
+@uref{https://github.com/prometheus/node_exporter/,
+prometheus-node-exporter} service, its value must be a
+@code{prometheus-node-exporter-configuration} record as in this example:
+
+@example
+(service prometheus-node-exporter-service-type
+         (prometheus-node-exporter-configuration
+           (web-listen-address ":9100")))
+@end example
+@end defvar
+
+@deftp {Data Type} prometheus-node-exporter-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of @command{node_exporter}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @code{go-github-com-prometheus-node-exporter})
+The prometheus-node-exporter package to use.
+
+@item @code{web-listen-address} (default: @code{":9100"})
+Bind the web interface to the specified address.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@node Kerberos-Dienste
+@subsubsection Kerberos-Dienste
+@cindex Kerberos
+
+The @code{(gnu services kerberos)} module provides services relating to the
+authentication protocol @dfn{Kerberos}.
+
+@subsubheading Krb5 Service
+
+Programs using a Kerberos client library normally expect a configuration
+file in @file{/etc/krb5.conf}.  This service generates such a file from a
+definition provided in the operating system declaration.  It does not cause
+any daemon to be started.
+
+No ``keytab'' files are provided by this service---you must explicitly
+create them.  This service is known to work with the MIT client library,
+@code{mit-krb5}.  Other implementations have not been tested.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} krb5-service-type
+A service type for Kerberos 5 clients.
+@end defvr
+
+@noindent
+Here is an example of its use:
+@lisp
+(service krb5-service-type
+         (krb5-configuration
+          (default-realm "EXAMPLE.COM")
+          (allow-weak-crypto? #t)
+          (realms (list
+                   (krb5-realm
+                    (name "EXAMPLE.COM")
+                    (admin-server "groucho.example.com")
+                    (kdc "karl.example.com"))
+                   (krb5-realm
+                    (name "ARGRX.EDU")
+                    (admin-server "kerb-admin.argrx.edu")
+                    (kdc "keys.argrx.edu"))))))
+@end lisp
+
+@noindent
+This example provides a Kerberos@tie{}5 client configuration which:
+@itemize
+@item Recognizes two realms, @i{viz:} ``EXAMPLE.COM'' and ``ARGRX.EDU'', both
+of which have distinct administration servers and key distribution centers;
+@item Will default to the realm ``EXAMPLE.COM'' if the realm is not explicitly
+specified by clients;
+@item Accepts services which only support encryption types known to be weak.
+@end itemize
+
+The @code{krb5-realm} and @code{krb5-configuration} types have many fields.
+Only the most commonly used ones are described here.  For a full list, and
+more detailed explanation of each, see the MIT
+@uref{http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/krb5-devel/doc/admin/conf_files/krb5_conf.html,,krb5.conf}
+documentation.
+
+
+@deftp {Data Type} krb5-realm
+@cindex realm, kerberos
+@table @asis
+@item @code{name}
+This field is a string identifying the name of the realm.  A common
+convention is to use the fully qualified DNS name of your organization,
+converted to upper case.
+
+@item @code{admin-server}
+This field is a string identifying the host where the administration server
+is running.
+
+@item @code{kdc}
+This field is a string identifying the key distribution center for the
+realm.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} krb5-configuration
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{allow-weak-crypto?} (default: @code{#f})
+If this flag is @code{#t} then services which only offer encryption
+algorithms known to be weak will be accepted.
+
+@item @code{default-realm} (default: @code{#f})
+This field should be a string identifying the default Kerberos realm for the
+client.  You should set this field to the name of your Kerberos realm.  If
+this value is @code{#f} then a realm must be specified with every Kerberos
+principal when invoking programs such as @command{kinit}.
+
+@item @code{realms}
+This should be a non-empty list of @code{krb5-realm} objects, which clients
+may access.  Normally, one of them will have a @code{name} field matching
+the @code{default-realm} field.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+
+@subsubheading PAM krb5 Service
+@cindex pam-krb5
+
+The @code{pam-krb5} service allows for login authentication and password
+management via Kerberos.  You will need this service if you want PAM enabled
+applications to authenticate users using Kerberos.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} pam-krb5-service-type
+A service type for the Kerberos 5 PAM module.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} pam-krb5-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of the Kerberos 5 PAM module This
+type has the following parameters:
+@table @asis
+@item @code{pam-krb5} (default: @code{pam-krb5})
+The pam-krb5 package to use.
+
+@item @code{minimum-uid} (default: @code{1000})
+The smallest user ID for which Kerberos authentications should be
+attempted.  Local accounts with lower values will silently fail to
+authenticate.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+
+@node Web-Dienste
+@subsubsection Web-Dienste
+
+@cindex web
+@cindex www
+@cindex HTTP
+The @code{(gnu services web)} module provides the Apache HTTP Server, the
+nginx web server, and also a fastcgi wrapper daemon.
+
+@subsubheading Apache HTTP Server
+
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} httpd-service-type
+Service type for the @uref{https://httpd.apache.org/,Apache HTTP} server
+(@dfn{httpd}).  The value for this service type is a
+@code{httpd-configuration} record.
+
+A simple example configuration is given below.
+
+@example
+(service httpd-service-type
+         (httpd-configuration
+           (config
+             (httpd-config-file
+               (server-name "www.example.com")
+               (document-root "/srv/http/www.example.com")))))
+@end example
+
+Other services can also extend the @code{httpd-service-type} to add to the
+configuration.
+
+@example
+(simple-service 'my-extra-server httpd-service-type
+                (list
+                  (httpd-virtualhost
+                    "*:80"
+                    (list (string-append
+                           "ServerName "www.example.com
+                            DocumentRoot \"/srv/http/www.example.com\"")))))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+The details for the @code{httpd-configuration}, @code{httpd-module},
+@code{httpd-config-file} and @code{httpd-virtualhost} record types are given
+below.
+
+@deffn {Data Type} httpd-configuration
+This data type represents the configuration for the httpd service.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @code{httpd})
+The httpd package to use.
+
+@item @code{pid-file} (default: @code{"/var/run/httpd"})
+The pid file used by the shepherd-service.
+
+@item @code{config} (default: @code{(httpd-config-file)})
+The configuration file to use with the httpd service. The default value is a
+@code{httpd-config-file} record, but this can also be a different
+G-expression that generates a file, for example a @code{plain-file}. A file
+outside of the store can also be specified through a string.
+
+@end table
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Data Type} httpd-module
+This data type represents a module for the httpd service.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{name}
+The name of the module.
+
+@item @code{file}
+The file for the module. This can be relative to the httpd package being
+used, the absolute location of a file, or a G-expression for a file within
+the store, for example @code{(file-append mod-wsgi "/modules/mod_wsgi.so")}.
+
+@end table
+@end deffn
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %default-httpd-modules
+A default list of @code{httpd-module} objects.
+@end defvr
+
+@deffn {Data Type} httpd-config-file
+This data type represents a configuration file for the httpd service.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{modules} (default: @code{%default-httpd-modules})
+The modules to load. Additional modules can be added here, or loaded by
+additional configuration.
+
+For example, in order to handle requests for PHP files, you can use Apache’s
+@code{mod_proxy_fcgi} module along with @code{php-fpm-service-type}:
+
+@example
+(service httpd-service-type
+         (httpd-configuration
+          (config
+           (httpd-config-file
+            (modules (cons*
+                      (httpd-module
+                       (name "proxy_module")
+                       (file "modules/mod_proxy.so"))
+                      (httpd-module
+                       (name "proxy_fcgi_module")
+                       (file "modules/mod_proxy_fcgi.so"))
+                      %default-httpd-modules))
+            (extra-config (list "\
+<FilesMatch \\.php$>
+    SetHandler \"proxy:unix:/var/run/php-fpm.sock|fcgi://localhost/\"
+</FilesMatch>"))))))
+(service php-fpm-service-type
+         (php-fpm-configuration
+          (socket "/var/run/php-fpm.sock")
+          (socket-group "httpd")))
+@end example
+
+@item @code{server-root} (default: @code{httpd})
+The @code{ServerRoot} in the configuration file, defaults to the httpd
+package. Directives including @code{Include} and @code{LoadModule} are taken
+as relative to the server root.
+
+@item @code{server-name} (default: @code{#f})
+The @code{ServerName} in the configuration file, used to specify the request
+scheme, hostname and port that the server uses to identify itself.
+
+This doesn't need to be set in the server config, and can be specifyed in
+virtual hosts. The default is @code{#f} to not specify a @code{ServerName}.
+
+@item @code{document-root} (default: @code{"/srv/http"})
+The @code{DocumentRoot} from which files will be served.
+
+@item @code{listen} (default: @code{'("80")})
+The list of values for the @code{Listen} directives in the config file. The
+value should be a list of strings, when each string can specify the port
+number to listen on, and optionally the IP address and protocol to use.
+
+@item @code{pid-file} (default: @code{"/var/run/httpd"})
+The @code{PidFile} to use. This should match the @code{pid-file} set in the
+@code{httpd-configuration} so that the Shepherd service is configured
+correctly.
+
+@item @code{error-log} (default: @code{"/var/log/httpd/error_log"})
+The @code{ErrorLog} to which the server will log errors.
+
+@item @code{user} (default: @code{"httpd"})
+The @code{User} which the server will answer requests as.
+
+@item @code{group} (default: @code{"httpd"})
+The @code{Group} which the server will answer requests as.
+
+@item @code{extra-config} (default: @code{(list "TypesConfig etc/httpd/mime.types")})
+A flat list of strings and G-expressions which will be added to the end of
+the configuration file.
+
+Any values which the service is extended with will be appended to this list.
+
+@end table
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Data Type} httpd-virtualhost
+This data type represents a virtualhost configuration block for the httpd
+service.
+
+These should be added to the extra-config for the httpd-service.
+
+@example
+(simple-service 'my-extra-server httpd-service-type
+                (list
+                  (httpd-virtualhost
+                    "*:80"
+                    (list (string-append
+                           "ServerName "www.example.com
+                            DocumentRoot \"/srv/http/www.example.com\"")))))
+@end example
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{addresses-and-ports}
+The addresses and ports for the @code{VirtualHost} directive.
+
+@item @code{contents}
+The contents of the @code{VirtualHost} directive, this should be a list of
+strings and G-expressions.
+
+@end table
+@end deffn
+
+@subsubheading NGINX
+
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} nginx-service-type
+Service type for the @uref{https://nginx.org/,NGinx} web server.  The value
+for this service type is a @code{<nginx-configuration>} record.
+
+A simple example configuration is given below.
+
+@example
+(service nginx-service-type
+         (nginx-configuration
+           (server-blocks
+             (list (nginx-server-configuration
+                     (server-name '("www.example.com"))
+                     (root "/srv/http/www.example.com"))))))
+@end example
+
+In addition to adding server blocks to the service configuration directly,
+this service can be extended by other services to add server blocks, as in
+this example:
+
+@example
+(simple-service 'my-extra-server nginx-service-type
+                (list (nginx-server-configuration
+                        (root "/srv/http/extra-website")
+                        (try-files (list "$uri" "$uri/index.html")))))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+At startup, @command{nginx} has not yet read its configuration file, so it
+uses a default file to log error messages.  If it fails to load its
+configuration file, that is where error messages are logged.  After the
+configuration file is loaded, the default error log file changes as per
+configuration.  In our case, startup error messages can be found in
+@file{/var/run/nginx/logs/error.log}, and after configuration in
+@file{/var/log/nginx/error.log}.  The second location can be changed with
+the @var{log-directory} configuration option.
+
+@deffn {Data Type} nginx-configuration
+This data type represents the configuration for NGinx. Some configuration
+can be done through this and the other provided record types, or
+alternatively, a config file can be provided.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{nginx} (default: @code{nginx})
+The nginx package to use.
+
+@item @code{log-directory} (default: @code{"/var/log/nginx"})
+The directory to which NGinx will write log files.
+
+@item @code{run-directory} (default: @code{"/var/run/nginx"})
+The directory in which NGinx will create a pid file, and write temporary
+files.
+
+@item @code{server-blocks} (default: @code{'()})
+A list of @dfn{server blocks} to create in the generated configuration file,
+the elements should be of type @code{<nginx-server-configuration>}.
+
+The following example would setup NGinx to serve @code{www.example.com} from
+the @code{/srv/http/www.example.com} directory, without using HTTPS.
+@example
+(service nginx-service-type
+         (nginx-configuration
+           (server-blocks
+             (list (nginx-server-configuration
+                     (server-name '("www.example.com"))
+                     (root "/srv/http/www.example.com"))))))
+@end example
+
+@item @code{upstream-blocks} (default: @code{'()})
+A list of @dfn{upstream blocks} to create in the generated configuration
+file, the elements should be of type @code{<nginx-upstream-configuration>}.
+
+Configuring upstreams through the @code{upstream-blocks} can be useful when
+combined with @code{locations} in the @code{<nginx-server-configuration>}
+records.  The following example creates a server configuration with one
+location configuration, that will proxy requests to a upstream
+configuration, which will handle requests with two servers.
+
+@example
+(service
+  nginx-service-type
+  (nginx-configuration
+    (server-blocks
+      (list (nginx-server-configuration
+              (server-name '("www.example.com"))
+              (root "/srv/http/www.example.com")
+              (locations
+                (list
+                  (nginx-location-configuration
+                  (uri "/path1")
+                  (body '("proxy_pass http://server-proxy;"))))))))
+    (upstream-blocks
+      (list (nginx-upstream-configuration
+              (name "server-proxy")
+              (servers (list "server1.example.com"
+                             "server2.example.com")))))))
+@end example
+
+@item @code{file} (default: @code{#f})
+If a configuration @var{file} is provided, this will be used, rather than
+generating a configuration file from the provided @code{log-directory},
+@code{run-directory}, @code{server-blocks} and @code{upstream-blocks}.  For
+proper operation, these arguments should match what is in @var{file} to
+ensure that the directories are created when the service is activated.
+
+This can be useful if you have an existing configuration file, or it's not
+possible to do what is required through the other parts of the
+nginx-configuration record.
+
+@item @code{server-names-hash-bucket-size} (default: @code{#f})
+Bucket size for the server names hash tables, defaults to @code{#f} to use
+the size of the processors cache line.
+
+@item @code{server-names-hash-bucket-max-size} (default: @code{#f})
+Maximum bucket size for the server names hash tables.
+
+@item @code{extra-content} (default: @code{""})
+Extra content for the @code{http} block.  Should be string or a string
+valued G-expression.
+
+@end table
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} nginx-server-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of an nginx server block.  This
+type has the following parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{listen} (default: @code{'("80" "443 ssl")})
+Each @code{listen} directive sets the address and port for IP, or the path
+for a UNIX-domain socket on which the server will accept requests.  Both
+address and port, or only address or only port can be specified.  An address
+may also be a hostname, for example:
+
+@example
+'("127.0.0.1:8000" "127.0.0.1" "8000" "*:8000" "localhost:8000")
+@end example
+
+@item @code{server-name} (default: @code{(list 'default)})
+A list of server names this server represents. @code{'default} represents
+the default server for connections matching no other server.
+
+@item @code{root} (default: @code{"/srv/http"})
+Root of the website nginx will serve.
+
+@item @code{locations} (default: @code{'()})
+A list of @dfn{nginx-location-configuration} or
+@dfn{nginx-named-location-configuration} records to use within this server
+block.
+
+@item @code{index} (default: @code{(list "index.html")})
+Index files to look for when clients ask for a directory.  If it cannot be
+found, Nginx will send the list of files in the directory.
+
+@item @code{try-files} (default: @code{'()})
+A list of files whose existence is checked in the specified order.
+@code{nginx} will use the first file it finds to process the request.
+
+@item @code{ssl-certificate} (default: @code{#f})
+Where to find the certificate for secure connections.  Set it to @code{#f}
+if you don't have a certificate or you don't want to use HTTPS.
+
+@item @code{ssl-certificate-key} (default: @code{#f})
+Where to find the private key for secure connections.  Set it to @code{#f}
+if you don't have a key or you don't want to use HTTPS.
+
+@item @code{server-tokens?} (default: @code{#f})
+Whether the server should add its configuration to response.
+
+@item @code{raw-content} (default: @code{'()})
+A list of raw lines added to the server block.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} nginx-upstream-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of an nginx @code{upstream} block.
+This type has the following parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{name}
+Name for this group of servers.
+
+@item @code{servers}
+Specify the addresses of the servers in the group.  The address can be
+specified as a IP address (e.g.@: @samp{127.0.0.1}), domain name (e.g.@:
+@samp{backend1.example.com}) or a path to a UNIX socket using the prefix
+@samp{unix:}.  For addresses using an IP address or domain name, the default
+port is 80, and a different port can be specified explicitly.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} nginx-location-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of an nginx @code{location} block.
+This type has the following parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{uri}
+URI which this location block matches.
+
+@anchor{nginx-location-configuration body}
+@item @code{body}
+Body of the location block, specified as a list of strings. This can contain
+many configuration directives.  For example, to pass requests to a upstream
+server group defined using an @code{nginx-upstream-configuration} block, the
+following directive would be specified in the body @samp{(list "proxy_pass
+http://upstream-name;")}.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} nginx-named-location-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of an nginx named location block.
+Named location blocks are used for request redirection, and not used for
+regular request processing.  This type has the following parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{name}
+Name to identify this location block.
+
+@item @code{body}
+@xref{nginx-location-configuration body}, as the body for named location
+blocks can be used in a similar way to the
+@code{nginx-location-configuration body}.  One restriction is that the body
+of a named location block cannot contain location blocks.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@subsubheading Varnish Cache
+@cindex Varnish
+Varnish is a fast cache server that sits in between web applications and end
+users.  It proxies requests from clients and caches the accessed URLs such
+that multiple requests for the same resource only creates one request to the
+back-end.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} varnish-service-type
+Service type for the Varnish daemon.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} varnish-configuration
+Data type representing the @code{varnish} service configuration.  This type
+has the following parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @code{varnish})
+The Varnish package to use.
+
+@item @code{name} (default: @code{"default"})
+A name for this Varnish instance.  Varnish will create a directory in
+@file{/var/varnish/} with this name and keep temporary files there.  If the
+name starts with a forward slash, it is interpreted as an absolute directory
+name.
+
+Pass the @code{-n} argument to other Varnish programs to connect to the
+named instance, e.g.@: @command{varnishncsa -n default}.
+
+@item @code{backend} (default: @code{"localhost:8080"})
+The backend to use.  This option has no effect if @code{vcl} is set.
+
+@item @code{vcl} (default: #f)
+The @dfn{VCL} (Varnish Configuration Language) program to run.  If this is
+@code{#f}, Varnish will proxy @code{backend} using the default
+configuration.  Otherwise this must be a file-like object with valid VCL
+syntax.
+
+@c Varnish does not support HTTPS, so keep this URL to avoid confusion.
+For example, to mirror @url{http://www.gnu.org,www.gnu.org} with VCL you can
+do something along these lines:
+
+@example
+(define %gnu-mirror
+  (plain-file
+   "gnu.vcl"
+   "vcl 4.1;
+backend gnu @{ .host = "www.gnu.org"; @}"))
+
+(operating-system
+  ...
+  (services (cons (service varnish-service-type
+                           (varnish-configuration
+                            (listen '(":80"))
+                            (vcl %gnu-mirror)))
+                  %base-services)))
+@end example
+
+The configuration of an already running Varnish instance can be inspected
+and changed using the @command{varnishadm} program.
+
+Consult the @url{https://varnish-cache.org/docs/,Varnish User Guide} and
+@url{https://book.varnish-software.com/4.0/,Varnish Book} for comprehensive
+documentation on Varnish and its configuration language.
+
+@item @code{listen} (default: @code{'("localhost:80")})
+List of addresses Varnish will listen on.
+
+@item @code{storage} (default: @code{'("malloc,128m")})
+List of storage backends that will be available in VCL.
+
+@item @code{parameters} (default: @code{'()})
+List of run-time parameters in the form @code{'(("parameter" . "value"))}.
+
+@item @code{extra-options} (default: @code{'()})
+Additional arguments to pass to the @command{varnishd} process.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@subsubheading FastCGI
+@cindex fastcgi
+@cindex fcgiwrap
+FastCGI is an interface between the front-end and the back-end of a web
+service.  It is a somewhat legacy facility; new web services should
+generally just talk HTTP between the front-end and the back-end.  However
+there are a number of back-end services such as PHP or the optimized HTTP
+Git repository access that use FastCGI, so we have support for it in Guix.
+
+To use FastCGI, you configure the front-end web server (e.g., nginx) to
+dispatch some subset of its requests to the fastcgi backend, which listens
+on a local TCP or UNIX socket.  There is an intermediary @code{fcgiwrap}
+program that sits between the actual backend process and the web server.
+The front-end indicates which backend program to run, passing that
+information to the @code{fcgiwrap} process.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} fcgiwrap-service-type
+A service type for the @code{fcgiwrap} FastCGI proxy.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} fcgiwrap-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of the @code{fcgiwrap} serice.
+This type has the following parameters:
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @code{fcgiwrap})
+The fcgiwrap package to use.
+
+@item @code{socket} (default: @code{tcp:127.0.0.1:9000})
+The socket on which the @code{fcgiwrap} process should listen, as a string.
+Valid @var{socket} values include @code{unix:@var{/path/to/unix/socket}},
+@code{tcp:@var{dot.ted.qu.ad}:@var{port}} and
+@code{tcp6:[@var{ipv6_addr}]:port}.
+
+@item @code{user} (default: @code{fcgiwrap})
+@itemx @code{group} (default: @code{fcgiwrap})
+The user and group names, as strings, under which to run the @code{fcgiwrap}
+process.  The @code{fastcgi} service will ensure that if the user asks for
+the specific user or group names @code{fcgiwrap} that the corresponding user
+and/or group is present on the system.
+
+It is possible to configure a FastCGI-backed web service to pass HTTP
+authentication information from the front-end to the back-end, and to allow
+@code{fcgiwrap} to run the back-end process as a corresponding local user.
+To enable this capability on the back-end., run @code{fcgiwrap} as the
+@code{root} user and group.  Note that this capability also has to be
+configured on the front-end as well.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@cindex php-fpm
+PHP-FPM (FastCGI Process Manager) is an alternative PHP FastCGI
+implementation with some additional features useful for sites of any size.
+
+These features include:
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Adaptive process spawning
+@item Basic statistics (similar to Apache's mod_status)
+@item Advanced process management with graceful stop/start
+@item Ability to start workers with different uid/gid/chroot/environment
+and different php.ini (replaces safe_mode)
+@item Stdout & stderr logging
+@item Emergency restart in case of accidental opcode cache destruction
+@item Accelerated upload support
+@item Support for a "slowlog"
+@item Enhancements to FastCGI, such as fastcgi_finish_request() -
+a special function to finish request & flush all data while continuing to do
+something time-consuming (video converting, stats processing, etc.)
+@end itemize
+...@: and much more.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} php-fpm-service-type
+A Service type for @code{php-fpm}.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} php-fpm-configuration
+Data Type for php-fpm service configuration.
+@table @asis
+@item @code{php} (default: @code{php})
+The php package to use.
+@item @code{socket} (default: @code{(string-append "/var/run/php" (version-major (package-version php)) "-fpm.sock")})
+The address on which to accept FastCGI requests.  Valid syntaxes are:
+@table @asis
+@item @code{"ip.add.re.ss:port"}
+Listen on a TCP socket to a specific address on a specific port.
+@item @code{"port"}
+Listen on a TCP socket to all addresses on a specific port.
+@item @code{"/path/to/unix/socket"}
+Listen on a unix socket.
+@end table
+
+@item @code{user} (default: @code{php-fpm})
+User who will own the php worker processes.
+@item @code{group} (default: @code{php-fpm})
+Group of the worker processes.
+@item @code{socket-user} (default: @code{php-fpm})
+User who can speak to the php-fpm socket.
+@item @code{socket-group} (default: @code{php-fpm})
+Group that can speak to the php-fpm socket.
+@item @code{pid-file} (default: @code{(string-append "/var/run/php" (version-major (package-version php)) "-fpm.pid")})
+The process id of the php-fpm process is written to this file once the
+service has started.
+@item @code{log-file} (default: @code{(string-append "/var/log/php" (version-major (package-version php)) "-fpm.log")})
+Log for the php-fpm master process.
+@item @code{process-manager} (default: @code{(php-fpm-dynamic-process-manager-configuration)})
+Detailed settings for the php-fpm process manager.  Must be either:
+@table @asis
+@item @code{<php-fpm-dynamic-process-manager-configuration>}
+@item @code{<php-fpm-static-process-manager-configuration>}
+@item @code{<php-fpm-on-demand-process-manager-configuration>}
+@end table
+@item @code{display-errors} (default @code{#f})
+Determines whether php errors and warning should be sent to clients and
+displayed in their browsers.  This is useful for local php development, but
+a security risk for public sites, as error messages can reveal passwords and
+personal data.
+@item @code{workers-logfile} (default @code{(string-append "/var/log/php" (version-major (package-version php)) "-fpm.www.log")})
+This file will log the @code{stderr} outputs of php worker processes.  Can
+be set to @code{#f} to disable logging.
+@item @code{file} (default @code{#f})
+An optional override of the whole configuration.  You can use the
+@code{mixed-text-file} function or an absolute filepath for it.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data type} php-fpm-dynamic-process-manager-configuration
+Data Type for the @code{dynamic} php-fpm process manager.  With the
+@code{dynamic} process manager, spare worker processes are kept around based
+on it's configured limits.
+@table @asis
+@item @code{max-children} (default: @code{5})
+Maximum of worker processes.
+@item @code{start-servers} (default: @code{2})
+How many worker processes should be started on start-up.
+@item @code{min-spare-servers} (default: @code{1})
+How many spare worker processes should be kept around at minimum.
+@item @code{max-spare-servers} (default: @code{3})
+How many spare worker processes should be kept around at maximum.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data type} php-fpm-static-process-manager-configuration
+Data Type for the @code{static} php-fpm process manager.  With the
+@code{static} process manager, an unchanging number of worker processes are
+created.
+@table @asis
+@item @code{max-children} (default: @code{5})
+Maximum of worker processes.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data type} php-fpm-on-demand-process-manager-configuration
+Data Type for the @code{on-demand} php-fpm process manager.  With the
+@code{on-demand} process manager, worker processes are only created as
+requests arrive.
+@table @asis
+@item @code{max-children} (default: @code{5})
+Maximum of worker processes.
+@item @code{process-idle-timeout} (default: @code{10})
+The time in seconds after which a process with no requests is killed.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} nginx-php-fpm-location @
+       [#:nginx-package nginx] @ [socket (string-append "/var/run/php" @
+(version-major (package-version php)) @ "-fpm.sock")] A helper function to
+quickly add php to an @code{nginx-server-configuration}.
+@end deffn
+
+A simple services setup for nginx with php can look like this:
+@example
+(services (cons* (service dhcp-client-service-type)
+                 (service php-fpm-service-type)
+                 (service nginx-service-type
+                          (nginx-server-configuration
+                           (server-name '("example.com"))
+                           (root "/srv/http/")
+                           (locations
+                            (list (nginx-php-location)))
+                           (https-port #f)
+                           (ssl-certificate #f)
+                           (ssl-certificate-key #f)))
+                 %base-services))
+@end example
+
+@cindex cat-avatar-generator
+The cat avatar generator is a simple service to demonstrate the use of
+php-fpm in @code{Nginx}.  It is used to generate cat avatar from a seed, for
+instance the hash of a user's email address.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} cat-avatar-generator-serice @
+       [#:cache-dir "/var/cache/cat-avatar-generator"] @ [#:package
+cat-avatar-generator] @ [#:configuration (nginx-server-configuration)]
+Returns an nginx-server-configuration that inherits @code{configuration}.
+It extends the nginx configuration to add a server block that serves
+@code{package}, a version of cat-avatar-generator.  During execution,
+cat-avatar-generator will be able to use @code{cache-dir} as its cache
+directory.
+@end deffn
+
+A simple setup for cat-avatar-generator can look like this:
+@example
+(services (cons* (cat-avatar-generator-service
+                  #:configuration
+                  (nginx-server-configuration
+                    (server-name '("example.com"))))
+                 ...
+                 %base-services))
+@end example
+
+@subsubheading Hpcguix-web
+
+@cindex hpcguix-web
+The @uref{hpcguix-web, https://github.com/UMCUGenetics/hpcguix-web/} program
+is a customizable web interface to browse Guix packages, initially designed
+for users of high-performance computing (HPC)  clusters.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} hpcguix-web-service-type
+The service type for @code{hpcguix-web}.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} hpcguix-web-configuration
+Data type for the hpcguix-web service configuration.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{specs}
+A gexp (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke}) specifying the hpcguix-web service
+configuration.  The main items available in this spec are:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{title-prefix} (default: @code{"hpcguix | "})
+The page title prefix.
+
+@item @code{guix-command} (default: @code{"guix"})
+The @command{guix} command.
+
+@item @code{package-filter-proc} (default: @code{(const #t)})
+A procedure specifying how to filter packages that are displayed.
+
+@item @code{package-page-extension-proc} (default: @code{(const '())})
+Extension package for @code{hpcguix-web}.
+
+@item @code{menu} (default: @code{'()})
+Additional entry in page @code{menu}.
+
+@item @code{channels} (default: @code{%default-channels})
+List of channels from which the package list is built (@pxref{Channels}).
+
+@item @code{package-list-expiration} (default: @code{(* 12 3600)})
+The expiration time, in seconds, after which the package list is rebuilt
+from the latest instances of the given channels.
+@end table
+
+See the hpcguix-web repository for a
+@uref{https://github.com/UMCUGenetics/hpcguix-web/blob/master/hpcweb-configuration.scm,
+complete example}.
+
+@item @code{package} (default: @code{hpcguix-web})
+The hpcguix-web package to use.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+A typical hpcguix-web service declaration looks like this:
+
+@example
+(service hpcguix-web-service-type
+         (hpcguix-web-configuration
+          (specs
+           #~(define site-config
+               (hpcweb-configuration
+                (title-prefix "Guix-HPC - ")
+                (menu '(("/about" "ABOUT"))))))))
+@end example
+
+@quotation Anmerkung
+The hpcguix-web service periodically updates the package list it publishes
+by pulling channels from Git.  To that end, it needs to access X.509
+certificates so that it can authenticate Git servers when communicating over
+HTTPS, and it assumes that @file{/etc/ssl/certs} contains those
+certificates.
+
+Thus, make sure to add @code{nss-certs} or another certificate package to
+the @code{packages} field of your configuration.  @ref{X.509-Zertifikate},
+for more information on X.509 certificates.
+@end quotation
+
+@node Zertifikatsdienste
+@subsubsection Zertifikatsdienste
+
+@cindex Web
+@cindex HTTP, HTTPS
+@cindex Let's Encrypt
+@cindex TLS certificates
+The @code{(gnu services certbot)} module provides a service to automatically
+obtain a valid TLS certificate from the Let's Encrypt certificate
+authority.  These certificates can then be used to serve content securely
+over HTTPS or other TLS-based protocols, with the knowledge that the client
+will be able to verify the server's authenticity.
+
+@url{https://letsencrypt.org/, Let's Encrypt} provides the @code{certbot}
+tool to automate the certification process.  This tool first securely
+generates a key on the server.  It then makes a request to the Let's Encrypt
+certificate authority (CA) to sign the key.  The CA checks that the request
+originates from the host in question by using a challenge-response protocol,
+requiring the server to provide its response over HTTP.  If that protocol
+completes successfully, the CA signs the key, resulting in a certificate.
+That certificate is valid for a limited period of time, and therefore to
+continue to provide TLS services, the server needs to periodically ask the
+CA to renew its signature.
+
+The certbot service automates this process: the initial key generation, the
+initial certification request to the Let's Encrypt service, the web server
+challenge/response integration, writing the certificate to disk, the
+automated periodic renewals, and the deployment tasks associated with the
+renewal (e.g.@: reloading services, copying keys with different
+permissions).
+
+Certbot is run twice a day, at a random minute within the hour.  It won't do
+anything until your certificates are due for renewal or revoked, but running
+it regularly would give your service a chance of staying online in case a
+Let's Encrypt-initiated revocation happened for some reason.
+
+By using this service, you agree to the ACME Subscriber Agreement, which can
+be found there: @url{https://acme-v01.api.letsencrypt.org/directory}.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} certbot-service-type
+A service type for the @code{certbot} Let's Encrypt client.  Its value must
+be a @code{certbot-configuration} record as in this example:
+
+@example
+(define %nginx-deploy-hook
+  (program-file
+   "nginx-deploy-hook"
+   #~(let ((pid (call-with-input-file "/var/run/nginx/pid" read)))
+       (kill pid SIGHUP))))
+
+(service certbot-service-type
+         (certbot-configuration
+          (email "foo@@example.net")
+          (certificates
+           (list
+            (certificate-configuration
+             (domains '("example.net" "www.example.net"))
+             (deploy-hook %nginx-deploy-hook))
+            (certificate-configuration
+             (domains '("bar.example.net")))))))
+@end example
+
+See below for details about @code{certbot-configuration}.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} certbot-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of the @code{certbot} service.
+This type has the following parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @code{certbot})
+The certbot package to use.
+
+@item @code{webroot} (default: @code{/var/www})
+The directory from which to serve the Let's Encrypt challenge/response
+files.
+
+@item @code{certificates} (default: @code{()})
+A list of @code{certificates-configuration}s for which to generate
+certificates and request signatures.  Each certificate has a @code{name} and
+several @code{domains}.
+
+@item @code{email}
+Mandatory email used for registration, recovery contact, and important
+account notifications.
+
+@item @code{rsa-key-size} (default: @code{2048})
+Size of the RSA key.
+
+@item @code{default-location} (default: @i{see below})
+The default @code{nginx-location-configuration}.  Because @code{certbot}
+needs to be able to serve challenges and responses, it needs to be able to
+run a web server.  It does so by extending the @code{nginx} web service with
+an @code{nginx-server-configuration} listening on the @var{domains} on port
+80, and which has a @code{nginx-location-configuration} for the
+@code{/.well-known/} URI path subspace used by Let's Encrypt.  @xref{Web-Dienste}, for more on these nginx configuration data types.
+
+Requests to other URL paths will be matched by the @code{default-location},
+which if present is added to all @code{nginx-server-configuration}s.
+
+By default, the @code{default-location} will issue a redirect from
+@code{http://@var{domain}/...} to @code{https://@var{domain}/...}, leaving
+you to define what to serve on your site via @code{https}.
+
+Pass @code{#f} to not issue a default location.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} certificate-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of a certificate.  This type has
+the following parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{name} (default: @i{see below})
+This name is used by Certbot for housekeeping and in file paths; it doesn't
+affect the content of the certificate itself.  To see certificate names, run
+@code{certbot certificates}.
+
+Its default is the first provided domain.
+
+@item @code{domains} (default: @code{()})
+The first domain provided will be the subject CN of the certificate, and all
+domains will be Subject Alternative Names on the certificate.
+
+@item @code{deploy-hook} (default: @code{#f})
+Command to be run in a shell once for each successfully issued certificate.
+For this command, the shell variable @code{$RENEWED_LINEAGE} will point to
+the config live subdirectory (for example,
+@samp{"/etc/letsencrypt/live/example.com"}) containing the new certificates
+and keys; the shell variable @code{$RENEWED_DOMAINS} will contain a
+space-delimited list of renewed certificate domains (for example,
+@samp{"example.com www.example.com"}.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+For each @code{certificate-configuration}, the certificate is saved to
+@code{/etc/letsencrypt/live/@var{name}/fullchain.pem} and the key is saved
+to @code{/etc/letsencrypt/live/@var{name}/privkey.pem}.
+@node DNS-Dienste
+@subsubsection DNS-Dienste
+@cindex DNS (domain name system)
+@cindex domain name system (DNS)
+
+The @code{(gnu services dns)} module provides services related to the
+@dfn{domain name system} (DNS).  It provides a server service for hosting an
+@emph{authoritative} DNS server for multiple zones, slave or master.  This
+service uses @uref{https://www.knot-dns.cz/, Knot DNS}.  And also a caching
+and forwarding DNS server for the LAN, which uses
+@uref{http://www.thekelleys.org.uk/dnsmasq/doc.html, dnsmasq}.
+
+@subsubheading Knot Service
+
+An example configuration of an authoritative server for two zones, one
+master and one slave, is:
+
+@lisp
+(define-zone-entries example.org.zone
+;; Name TTL Class Type Data
+  ("@@"  ""  "IN"  "A"  "127.0.0.1")
+  ("@@"  ""  "IN"  "NS" "ns")
+  ("ns" ""  "IN"  "A"  "127.0.0.1"))
+
+(define master-zone
+  (knot-zone-configuration
+    (domain "example.org")
+    (zone (zone-file
+            (origin "example.org")
+            (entries example.org.zone)))))
+
+(define slave-zone
+  (knot-zone-configuration
+    (domain "plop.org")
+    (dnssec-policy "default")
+    (master (list "plop-master"))))
+
+(define plop-master
+  (knot-remote-configuration
+    (id "plop-master")
+    (address (list "208.76.58.171"))))
+
+(operating-system
+  ;; ...
+  (services (cons* (service knot-service-type
+                     (knot-configuration
+                       (remotes (list plop-master))
+                       (zones (list master-zone slave-zone))))
+                   ;; ...
+                   %base-services)))
+@end lisp
+
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} knot-service-type
+This is the type for the Knot DNS server.
+
+Knot DNS is an authoritative DNS server, meaning that it can serve multiple
+zones, that is to say domain names you would buy from a registrar.  This
+server is not a resolver, meaning that it can only resolve names for which
+it is authoritative.  This server can be configured to serve zones as a
+master server or a slave server as a per-zone basis.  Slave zones will get
+their data from masters, and will serve it as an authoritative server.  From
+the point of view of a resolver, there is no difference between master and
+slave.
+
+The following data types are used to configure the Knot DNS server:
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} knot-key-configuration
+Data type representing a key.  This type has the following parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{id} (default: @code{""})
+An identifier for other configuration fields to refer to this key. IDs must
+be unique and must not be empty.
+
+@item @code{algorithm} (default: @code{#f})
+The algorithm to use.  Choose between @code{#f}, @code{'hmac-md5},
+@code{'hmac-sha1}, @code{'hmac-sha224}, @code{'hmac-sha256},
+@code{'hmac-sha384} and @code{'hmac-sha512}.
+
+@item @code{secret} (default: @code{""})
+The secret key itself.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} knot-acl-configuration
+Data type representing an Access Control List (ACL) configuration.  This
+type has the following parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{id} (default: @code{""})
+An identifier for ether configuration fields to refer to this key. IDs must
+be unique and must not be empty.
+
+@item @code{address} (default: @code{'()})
+An ordered list of IP addresses, network subnets, or network ranges
+represented with strings.  The query must match one of them.  Empty value
+means that address match is not required.
+
+@item @code{key} (default: @code{'()})
+An ordered list of references to keys represented with strings.  The string
+must match a key ID defined in a @code{knot-key-configuration}.  No key
+means that a key is not require to match that ACL.
+
+@item @code{action} (default: @code{'()})
+An ordered list of actions that are permitted or forbidden by this ACL.
+Possible values are lists of zero or more elements from @code{'transfer},
+@code{'notify} and @code{'update}.
+
+@item @code{deny?} (default: @code{#f})
+When true, the ACL defines restrictions.  Listed actions are forbidden.
+When false, listed actions are allowed.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} zone-entry
+Data type represnting a record entry in a zone file.  This type has the
+following parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{name} (default: @code{"@@"})
+The name of the record.  @code{"@@"} refers to the origin of the zone.
+Names are relative to the origin of the zone.  For example, in the
+@code{example.org} zone, @code{"ns.example.org"} actually refers to
+@code{ns.example.org.example.org}.  Names ending with a dot are absolute,
+which means that @code{"ns.example.org."} refers to @code{ns.example.org}.
+
+@item @code{ttl} (default: @code{""})
+The Time-To-Live (TTL) of this record.  If not set, the default TTL is used.
+
+@item @code{class} (default: @code{"IN"})
+The class of the record.  Knot currently supports only @code{"IN"} and
+partially @code{"CH"}.
+
+@item @code{type} (default: @code{"A"})
+The type of the record.  Common types include A (IPv4 address), AAAA (IPv6
+address), NS (Name Server) and MX (Mail eXchange).  Many other types are
+defined.
+
+@item @code{data} (default: @code{""})
+The data contained in the record.  For instance an IP address associated
+with an A record, or a domain name associated with an NS record.  Remember
+that domain names are relative to the origin unless they end with a dot.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} zone-file
+Data type representing the content of a zone file.  This type has the
+following parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{entries} (default: @code{'()})
+The list of entries.  The SOA record is taken care of, so you don't need to
+put it in the list of entries.  This list should probably contain an entry
+for your primary authoritative DNS server.  Other than using a list of
+entries directly, you can use @code{define-zone-entries} to define a object
+containing the list of entries more easily, that you can later pass to the
+@code{entries} field of the @code{zone-file}.
+
+@item @code{origin} (default: @code{""})
+The name of your zone.  This parameter cannot be empty.
+
+@item @code{ns} (default: @code{"ns"})
+The domain of your primary authoritative DNS server.  The name is relative
+to the origin, unless it ends with a dot.  It is mandatory that this primary
+DNS server corresponds to an NS record in the zone and that it is associated
+to an IP address in the list of entries.
+
+@item @code{mail} (default: @code{"hostmaster"})
+An email address people can contact you at, as the owner of the zone.  This
+is translated as @code{<mail>@@<origin>}.
+
+@item @code{serial} (default: @code{1})
+The serial number of the zone.  As this is used to keep track of changes by
+both slaves and resolvers, it is mandatory that it @emph{never} decreases.
+Always increment it when you make a change in your zone.
+
+@item @code{refresh} (default: @code{(* 2 24 3600)})
+The frequency at which slaves will do a zone transfer.  This value is a
+number of seconds.  It can be computed by multiplications or with
+@code{(string->duration)}.
+
+@item @code{retry} (default: @code{(* 15 60)})
+The period after which a slave will retry to contact its master when it
+fails to do so a first time.
+
+@item @code{expiry} (default: @code{(* 14 24 3600)})
+Default TTL of records.  Existing records are considered correct for at most
+this amount of time.  After this period, resolvers will invalidate their
+cache and check again that it still exists.
+
+@item @code{nx} (default: @code{3600})
+Default TTL of inexistant records.  This delay is usually short because you
+want your new domains to reach everyone quickly.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} knot-remote-configuration
+Data type representing a remote configuration.  This type has the following
+parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{id} (default: @code{""})
+An identifier for other configuration fields to refer to this remote. IDs
+must be unique and must not be empty.
+
+@item @code{address} (default: @code{'()})
+An ordered list of destination IP addresses.  Addresses are tried in
+sequence.  An optional port can be given with the @@ separator.  For
+instance: @code{(list "1.2.3.4" "2.3.4.5@@53")}.  Default port is 53.
+
+@item @code{via} (default: @code{'()})
+An ordered list of source IP addresses.  An empty list will have Knot choose
+an appropriate source IP.  An optional port can be given with the @@
+separator.  The default is to choose at random.
+
+@item @code{key} (default: @code{#f})
+A reference to a key, that is a string containing the identifier of a key
+defined in a @code{knot-key-configuration} field.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} knot-keystore-configuration
+Data type representing a keystore to hold dnssec keys.  This type has the
+following parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{id} (default: @code{""})
+The id of the keystore.  It must not be empty.
+
+@item @code{backend} (default: @code{'pem})
+The backend to store the keys in.  Can be @code{'pem} or @code{'pkcs11}.
+
+@item @code{config} (default: @code{"/var/lib/knot/keys/keys"})
+The configuration string of the backend.  An example for the PKCS#11 is:
+@code{"pkcs11:token=knot;pin-value=1234
+/gnu/store/.../lib/pkcs11/libsofthsm2.so"}.  For the pem backend, the string
+reprensents a path in the file system.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} knot-policy-configuration
+Data type representing a dnssec policy.  Knot DNS is able to automatically
+sign your zones.  It can either generate and manage your keys automatically
+or use keys that you generate.
+
+Dnssec is usually implemented using two keys: a Key Signing Key (KSK) that
+is used to sign the second, and a Zone Signing Key (ZSK) that is used to
+sign the zone.  In order to be trusted, the KSK needs to be present in the
+parent zone (usually a top-level domain).  If your registrar supports
+dnssec, you will have to send them your KSK's hash so they can add a DS
+record in their zone.  This is not automated and need to be done each time
+you change your KSK.
+
+The policy also defines the lifetime of keys.  Usually, ZSK can be changed
+easily and use weaker cryptographic functions (they use lower parameters) in
+order to sign records quickly, so they are changed often.  The KSK however
+requires manual interaction with the registrar, so they are changed less
+often and use stronger parameters because they sign only one record.
+
+This type has the following parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{id} (default: @code{""})
+The id of the policy.  It must not be empty.
+
+@item @code{keystore} (default: @code{"default"})
+A reference to a keystore, that is a string containing the identifier of a
+keystore defined in a @code{knot-keystore-configuration} field.  The
+@code{"default"} identifier means the default keystore (a kasp database that
+was setup by this service).
+
+@item @code{manual?} (default: @code{#f})
+Whether the key management is manual or automatic.
+
+@item @code{single-type-signing?} (default: @code{#f})
+When @code{#t}, use the Single-Type Signing Scheme.
+
+@item @code{algorithm} (default: @code{"ecdsap256sha256"})
+An algorithm of signing keys and issued signatures.
+
+@item @code{ksk-size} (default: @code{256})
+The length of the KSK.  Note that this value is correct for the default
+algorithm, but would be unsecure for other algorithms.
+
+@item @code{zsk-size} (default: @code{256})
+The length of the ZSK.  Note that this value is correct for the default
+algorithm, but would be unsecure for other algorithms.
+
+@item @code{dnskey-ttl} (default: @code{'default})
+The TTL value for DNSKEY records added into zone apex.  The special
+@code{'default} value means same as the zone SOA TTL.
+
+@item @code{zsk-lifetime} (default: @code{(* 30 24 3600)})
+The period between ZSK publication and the next rollover initiation.
+
+@item @code{propagation-delay} (default: @code{(* 24 3600)})
+An extra delay added for each key rollover step.  This value should be high
+enough to cover propagation of data from the master server to all slaves.
+
+@item @code{rrsig-lifetime} (default: @code{(* 14 24 3600)})
+A validity period of newly issued signatures.
+
+@item @code{rrsig-refresh} (default: @code{(* 7 24 3600)})
+A period how long before a signature expiration the signature will be
+refreshed.
+
+@item @code{nsec3?} (default: @code{#f})
+When @code{#t}, NSEC3 will be used instead of NSEC.
+
+@item @code{nsec3-iterations} (default: @code{5})
+The number of additional times the hashing is performed.
+
+@item @code{nsec3-salt-length} (default: @code{8})
+The length of a salt field in octets, which is appended to the original
+owner name before hashing.
+
+@item @code{nsec3-salt-lifetime} (default: @code{(* 30 24 3600)})
+The validity period of newly issued salt field.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} knot-zone-configuration
+Data type representing a zone served by Knot.  This type has the following
+parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{domain} (default: @code{""})
+The domain served by this configuration.  It must not be empty.
+
+@item @code{file} (default: @code{""})
+The file where this zone is saved.  This parameter is ignored by master
+zones.  Empty means default location that depends on the domain name.
+
+@item @code{zone} (default: @code{(zone-file)})
+The content of the zone file.  This parameter is ignored by slave zones.  It
+must contain a zone-file record.
+
+@item @code{master} (default: @code{'()})
+A list of master remotes.  When empty, this zone is a master.  When set,
+this zone is a slave.  This is a list of remotes identifiers.
+
+@item @code{ddns-master} (default: @code{#f})
+The main master.  When empty, it defaults to the first master in the list of
+masters.
+
+@item @code{notify} (default: @code{'()})
+A list of slave remote identifiers.
+
+@item @code{acl} (default: @code{'()})
+A list of acl identifiers.
+
+@item @code{semantic-checks?} (default: @code{#f})
+When set, this adds more semantic checks to the zone.
+
+@item @code{disable-any?} (default: @code{#f})
+When set, this forbids queries of the ANY type.
+
+@item @code{zonefile-sync} (default: @code{0})
+The delay between a modification in memory and on disk.  0 means immediate
+synchronization.
+
+@item @code{serial-policy} (default: @code{'increment})
+A policy between @code{'increment} and @code{'unixtime}.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} knot-configuration
+Data type representing the Knot configuration.  This type has the following
+parameters:
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{knot} (default: @code{knot})
+The Knot package.
+
+@item @code{run-directory} (default: @code{"/var/run/knot"})
+The run directory.  This directory will be used for pid file and sockets.
+
+@item @code{listen-v4} (default: @code{"0.0.0.0"})
+An ip address on which to listen.
+
+@item @code{listen-v6} (default: @code{"::"})
+An ip address on which to listen.
+
+@item @code{listen-port} (default: @code{53})
+A port on which to listen.
+
+@item @code{keys} (default: @code{'()})
+The list of knot-key-configuration used by this configuration.
+
+@item @code{acls} (default: @code{'()})
+The list of knot-acl-configuration used by this configuration.
+
+@item @code{remotes} (default: @code{'()})
+The list of knot-remote-configuration used by this configuration.
+
+@item @code{zones} (default: @code{'()})
+The list of knot-zone-configuration used by this configuration.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@subsubheading Dnsmasq Service
+
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} dnsmasq-service-type
+This is the type of the dnsmasq service, whose value should be an
+@code{dnsmasq-configuration} object as in this example:
+
+@example
+(service dnsmasq-service-type
+         (dnsmasq-configuration
+           (no-resolv? #t)
+           (servers '("192.168.1.1"))))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} dnsmasq-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of dnsmasq.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @var{dnsmasq})
+Package object of the dnsmasq server.
+
+@item @code{no-hosts?} (default: @code{#f})
+When true, don't read the hostnames in /etc/hosts.
+
+@item @code{port} (default: @code{53})
+The port to listen on.  Setting this to zero completely disables DNS
+responses, leaving only DHCP and/or TFTP functions.
+
+@item @code{local-service?} (default: @code{#t})
+Accept DNS queries only from hosts whose address is on a local subnet, ie a
+subnet for which an interface exists on the server.
+
+@item @code{listen-addresses} (default: @code{'()})
+Listen on the given IP addresses.
+
+@item @code{resolv-file} (default: @code{"/etc/resolv.conf"})
+The file to read the IP address of the upstream nameservers from.
+
+@item @code{no-resolv?} (default: @code{#f})
+When true, don't read @var{resolv-file}.
+
+@item @code{servers} (default: @code{'()})
+Specify IP address of upstream servers directly.
+
+@item @code{cache-size} (default: @code{150})
+Set the size of dnsmasq's cache.  Setting the cache size to zero disables
+caching.
+
+@item @code{negative-cache?} (default: @code{#t})
+When false, disable negative caching.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@subsubheading ddclient Service
+
+@cindex ddclient
+The ddclient service described below runs the ddclient daemon, which takes
+care of automatically updating DNS entries for service providers such as
+@uref{https://dyn.com/dns/, Dyn}.
+
+The following example show instantiates the service with its default
+configuration:
+
+@example
+(service ddclient-service-type)
+@end example
+
+Note that ddclient needs to access credentials that are stored in a
+@dfn{secret file}, by default @file{/etc/ddclient/secrets} (see
+@code{secret-file} below.)  You are expected to create this file manually,
+in an ``out-of-band'' fashion (you @emph{could} make this file part of the
+service configuration, for instance by using @code{plain-file}, but it will
+be world-readable @i{via} @file{/gnu/store}.)  See the examples in the
+@file{share/ddclient} directory of the @code{ddclient} package.
+
+@c %start of fragment
+
+Available @code{ddclient-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ddclient-configuration} parameter} package ddclient
+The ddclient package.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ddclient-configuration} parameter} integer daemon
+The period after which ddclient will retry to check IP and domain name.
+
+Defaults to @samp{300}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ddclient-configuration} parameter} boolean syslog
+Use syslog for the output.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ddclient-configuration} parameter} string mail
+Mail to user.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"root"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ddclient-configuration} parameter} string mail-failure
+Mail failed update to user.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"root"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ddclient-configuration} parameter} string pid
+The ddclient PID file.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/var/run/ddclient/ddclient.pid"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ddclient-configuration} parameter} boolean ssl
+Enable SSL support.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ddclient-configuration} parameter} string user
+Specifies the user name or ID that is used when running ddclient program.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"ddclient"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ddclient-configuration} parameter} string group
+Group of the user who will run the ddclient program.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"ddclient"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ddclient-configuration} parameter} string secret-file
+Secret file which will be appended to @file{ddclient.conf} file.  This file
+contains credentials for use by ddclient.  You are expected to create it
+manually.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/etc/ddclient/secrets.conf"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{ddclient-configuration} parameter} list extra-options
+Extra options will be appended to @file{ddclient.conf} file.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+
+@c %end of fragment
+
+
+@node VPN-Dienste
+@subsubsection VPN-Dienste
+@cindex VPN (virtual private network)
+@cindex virtual private network (VPN)
+
+The @code{(gnu services vpn)} module provides services related to
+@dfn{virtual private networks} (VPNs).  It provides a @emph{client} service
+for your machine to connect to a VPN, and a @emph{servire} service for your
+machine to host a VPN.  Both services use @uref{https://openvpn.net/,
+OpenVPN}.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} openvpn-client-service @
+       [#:config (openvpn-client-configuration)]
+
+Return a service that runs @command{openvpn}, a VPN daemon, as a client.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} openvpn-server-service @
+       [#:config (openvpn-server-configuration)]
+
+Return a service that runs @command{openvpn}, a VPN daemon, as a server.
+
+Both can be run simultaneously.
+@end deffn
+
+@c %automatically generated documentation
+
+Available @code{openvpn-client-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-client-configuration} parameter} package openvpn
+The OpenVPN package.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-client-configuration} parameter} string pid-file
+The OpenVPN pid file.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/var/run/openvpn/openvpn.pid"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-client-configuration} parameter} proto proto
+The protocol (UDP or TCP) used to open a channel between clients and
+servers.
+
+Defaults to @samp{udp}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-client-configuration} parameter} dev dev
+The device type used to represent the VPN connection.
+
+Defaults to @samp{tun}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-client-configuration} parameter} string ca
+The certificate authority to check connections against.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/etc/openvpn/ca.crt"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-client-configuration} parameter} string cert
+The certificate of the machine the daemon is running on.  It should be
+signed by the authority given in @code{ca}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/etc/openvpn/client.crt"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-client-configuration} parameter} string key
+The key of the machine the daemon is running on.  It must be the key whose
+certificate is @code{cert}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/etc/openvpn/client.key"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-client-configuration} parameter} boolean comp-lzo?
+Whether to use the lzo compression algorithm.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-client-configuration} parameter} boolean persist-key?
+Don't re-read key files across SIGUSR1 or --ping-restart.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-client-configuration} parameter} boolean persist-tun?
+Don't close and reopen TUN/TAP device or run up/down scripts across SIGUSR1
+or --ping-restart restarts.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-client-configuration} parameter} number verbosity
+Verbosity level.
+
+Defaults to @samp{3}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-client-configuration} parameter} tls-auth-client tls-auth
+Add an additional layer of HMAC authentication on top of the TLS control
+channel to protect against DoS attacks.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-client-configuration} parameter} key-usage verify-key-usage?
+Whether to check the server certificate has server usage extension.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-client-configuration} parameter} bind bind?
+Bind to a specific local port number.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-client-configuration} parameter} resolv-retry resolv-retry?
+Retry resolving server address.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-client-configuration} parameter} openvpn-remote-list remote
+A list of remote servers to connect to.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+Available @code{openvpn-remote-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-remote-configuration} parameter} string name
+Server name.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"my-server"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-remote-configuration} parameter} number port
+Port number the server listens to.
+
+Defaults to @samp{1194}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@end deftypevr
+@c %end of automatic openvpn-client documentation
+
+@c %automatically generated documentation
+
+Available @code{openvpn-server-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} package openvpn
+The OpenVPN package.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} string pid-file
+The OpenVPN pid file.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/var/run/openvpn/openvpn.pid"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} proto proto
+The protocol (UDP or TCP) used to open a channel between clients and
+servers.
+
+Defaults to @samp{udp}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} dev dev
+The device type used to represent the VPN connection.
+
+Defaults to @samp{tun}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} string ca
+The certificate authority to check connections against.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/etc/openvpn/ca.crt"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} string cert
+The certificate of the machine the daemon is running on.  It should be
+signed by the authority given in @code{ca}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/etc/openvpn/client.crt"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} string key
+The key of the machine the daemon is running on.  It must be the key whose
+certificate is @code{cert}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/etc/openvpn/client.key"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} boolean comp-lzo?
+Whether to use the lzo compression algorithm.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} boolean persist-key?
+Don't re-read key files across SIGUSR1 or --ping-restart.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} boolean persist-tun?
+Don't close and reopen TUN/TAP device or run up/down scripts across SIGUSR1
+or --ping-restart restarts.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} number verbosity
+Verbosity level.
+
+Defaults to @samp{3}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} tls-auth-server tls-auth
+Add an additional layer of HMAC authentication on top of the TLS control
+channel to protect against DoS attacks.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} number port
+Specifies the port number on which the server listens.
+
+Defaults to @samp{1194}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} ip-mask server
+An ip and mask specifying the subnet inside the virtual network.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"10.8.0.0 255.255.255.0"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} cidr6 server-ipv6
+A CIDR notation specifying the IPv6 subnet inside the virtual network.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} string dh
+The Diffie-Hellman parameters file.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/etc/openvpn/dh2048.pem"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} string ifconfig-pool-persist
+The file that records client IPs.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/etc/openvpn/ipp.txt"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} gateway redirect-gateway?
+When true, the server will act as a gateway for its clients.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} boolean client-to-client?
+When true, clients are allowed to talk to each other inside the VPN.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} keepalive keepalive
+Causes ping-like messages to be sent back and forth over the link so that
+each side knows when the other side has gone down.  @code{keepalive}
+requires a pair.  The first element is the period of the ping sending, and
+the second element is the timeout before considering the other side down.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} number max-clients
+The maximum number of clients.
+
+Defaults to @samp{100}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} string status
+The status file.  This file shows a small report on current connection.  It
+is truncated and rewritten every minute.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/var/run/openvpn/status"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-server-configuration} parameter} openvpn-ccd-list client-config-dir
+The list of configuration for some clients.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+Available @code{openvpn-ccd-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-ccd-configuration} parameter} string name
+Client name.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"client"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-ccd-configuration} parameter} ip-mask iroute
+Client own network
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{openvpn-ccd-configuration} parameter} ip-mask ifconfig-push
+Client VPN IP.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+
+@c %end of automatic openvpn-server documentation
+
+
+@node Network File System
+@subsubsection Network File System
+@cindex NFS
+
+The @code{(gnu services nfs)} module provides the following services, which
+are most commonly used in relation to mounting or exporting directory trees
+as @dfn{network file systems} (NFS).
+
+@subsubheading RPC Bind Service
+@cindex rpcbind
+
+The RPC Bind service provides a facility to map program numbers into
+universal addresses.  Many NFS related services use this facility.  Hence it
+is automatically started when a dependent service starts.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} rpcbind-service-type
+A service type for the RPC portmapper daemon.
+@end defvr
+
+
+@deftp {Data Type} rpcbind-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of the RPC Bind Service.  This type
+has the following parameters:
+@table @asis
+@item @code{rpcbind} (default: @code{rpcbind})
+The rpcbind package to use.
+
+@item @code{warm-start?} (default: @code{#t})
+If this parameter is @code{#t}, then the daemon will read a state file on
+startup thus reloading state information saved by a previous instance.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+
+@subsubheading Pipefs Pseudo File System
+@cindex pipefs
+@cindex rpc_pipefs
+
+The pipefs file system is used to transfer NFS related data between the
+kernel and user space programs.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} pipefs-service-type
+A service type for the pipefs pseudo file system.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} pipefs-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of the pipefs pseudo file system
+service.  This type has the following parameters:
+@table @asis
+@item @code{mount-point} (default: @code{"/var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs"})
+The directory to which the file system is to be attached.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+
+@subsubheading GSS Daemon Service
+@cindex GSSD
+@cindex GSS
+@cindex global security system
+
+The @dfn{global security system} (GSS) daemon provides strong security for
+RPC based protocols.  Before exchanging RPC requests an RPC client must
+establish a security context.  Typically this is done using the Kerberos
+command @command{kinit} or automatically at login time using PAM services
+(@pxref{Kerberos-Dienste}).
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} gss-service-type
+A service type for the Global Security System (GSS) daemon.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} gss-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of the GSS daemon service.  This
+type has the following parameters:
+@table @asis
+@item @code{nfs-utils} (default: @code{nfs-utils})
+The package in which the @command{rpc.gssd} command is to be found.
+
+@item @code{pipefs-directory} (default: @code{"/var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs"})
+The directory where the pipefs file system is mounted.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+
+@subsubheading IDMAP Daemon Service
+@cindex idmapd
+@cindex name mapper
+
+The idmap daemon service provides mapping between user IDs and user names.
+Typically it is required in order to access file systems mounted via NFSv4.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} idmap-service-type
+A service type for the Identity Mapper (IDMAP) daemon.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} idmap-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of the IDMAP daemon service.  This
+type has the following parameters:
+@table @asis
+@item @code{nfs-utils} (default: @code{nfs-utils})
+The package in which the @command{rpc.idmapd} command is to be found.
+
+@item @code{pipefs-directory} (default: @code{"/var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs"})
+The directory where the pipefs file system is mounted.
+
+@item @code{domain} (default: @code{#f})
+The local NFSv4 domain name.  This must be a string or @code{#f}.  If it is
+@code{#f} then the daemon will use the host's fully qualified domain name.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@node Kontinuierliche Integration
+@subsubsection Kontinuierliche Integration
+
+@cindex continuous integration
+@uref{https://git.savannah.gnu.org/cgit/guix/guix-cuirass.git, Cuirass} is a
+continuous integration tool for Guix.  It can be used both for development
+and for providing substitutes to others (@pxref{Substitute}).
+
+The @code{(gnu services cuirass)} module provides the following service.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Procedure} cuirass-service-type
+The type of the Cuirass service.  Its value must be a
+@code{cuirass-configuration} object, as described below.
+@end defvr
+
+To add build jobs, you have to set the @code{specifications} field of the
+configuration.  Here is an example of a service that polls the Guix
+repository and builds the packages from a manifest.  Some of the packages
+are defined in the @code{"custom-packages"} input, which is the equivalent
+of @code{GUIX_PACKAGE_PATH}.
+
+@example
+(define %cuirass-specs
+  #~(list
+     '((#:name . "my-manifest")
+       (#:load-path-inputs . ("guix"))
+       (#:package-path-inputs . ("custom-packages"))
+       (#:proc-input . "guix")
+       (#:proc-file . "build-aux/cuirass/gnu-system.scm")
+       (#:proc . cuirass-jobs)
+       (#:proc-args . ((subset . "manifests")
+                       (systems . ("x86_64-linux"))
+                       (manifests . (("config" . "guix/manifest.scm")))))
+       (#:inputs . (((#:name . "guix")
+                     (#:url . "git://git.savannah.gnu.org/guix.git")
+                     (#:load-path . ".")
+                     (#:branch . "master")
+                     (#:no-compile? . #t))
+                    ((#:name . "config")
+                     (#:url . "git://git.example.org/config.git")
+                     (#:load-path . ".")
+                     (#:branch . "master")
+                     (#:no-compile? . #t))
+                    ((#:name . "custom-packages")
+                     (#:url . "git://git.example.org/custom-packages.git")
+                     (#:load-path . ".")
+                     (#:branch . "master")
+                     (#:no-compile? . #t)))))))
+
+(service cuirass-service-type
+         (cuirass-configuration
+          (specifications %cuirass-specs)))
+@end example
+
+While information related to build jobs is located directly in the
+specifications, global settings for the @command{cuirass} process are
+accessible in other @code{cuirass-configuration} fields.
+
+@deftp {Data Type} cuirass-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of Cuirass.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{log-file} (default: @code{"/var/log/cuirass.log"})
+Location of the log file.
+
+@item @code{cache-directory} (default: @code{"/var/cache/cuirass"})
+Location of the repository cache.
+
+@item @code{user} (default: @code{"cuirass"})
+Owner of the @code{cuirass} process.
+
+@item @code{group} (default: @code{"cuirass"})
+Owner's group of the @code{cuirass} process.
+
+@item @code{interval} (default: @code{60})
+Number of seconds between the poll of the repositories followed by the
+Cuirass jobs.
+
+@item @code{database} (default: @code{"/var/lib/cuirass/cuirass.db"})
+Location of sqlite database which contains the build results and previously
+added specifications.
+
+@item @code{ttl} (default: @code{(* 30 24 3600)})
+Specifies the time-to-live (TTL) in seconds of garbage collector roots that
+are registered for build results.  This means that build results are
+protected from garbage collection for at least @var{ttl} seconds.
+
+@item @code{port} (default: @code{8081})
+Port number used by the HTTP server.
+
+@item --listen=@var{host}
+Listen on the network interface for @var{host}.  The default is to accept
+connections from localhost.
+
+@item @code{specifications} (default: @code{#~'()})
+A gexp (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke}) that evaluates to a list of specifications,
+where a specification is an association list (@pxref{Associations Lists,,,
+guile, GNU Guile Reference Manual}) whose keys are keywords
+(@code{#:keyword-example}) as shown in the example above.
+
+@item @code{use-substitutes?} (default: @code{#f})
+This allows using substitutes to avoid building every dependencies of a job
+from source.
+
+@item @code{one-shot?} (default: @code{#f})
+Only evaluate specifications and build derivations once.
+
+@item @code{fallback?} (default: @code{#f})
+When substituting a pre-built binary fails, fall back to building packages
+locally.
+
+@item @code{cuirass} (default: @code{cuirass})
+The Cuirass package to use.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@node Power Management Services
+@subsubsection Power Management Services
+
+@cindex tlp
+@cindex power management with TLP
+@subsubheading TLP daemon
+
+The @code{(gnu services pm)} module provides a Guix service definition for
+the Linux power management tool TLP.
+
+TLP enables various powersaving modes in userspace and kernel.  Contrary to
+@code{upower-service}, it is not a passive, monitoring tool, as it will
+apply custom settings each time a new power source is detected.  More
+information can be found at @uref{http://linrunner.de/en/tlp/tlp.html, TLP
+home page}.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} tlp-service-type
+The service type for the TLP tool.  Its value should be a valid TLP
+configuration (see below).  To use the default settings, simply write:
+@example
+(service tlp-service-type)
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+By default TLP does not need much configuration but most TLP parameters can
+be tweaked using @code{tlp-configuration}.
+
+Each parameter definition is preceded by its type; for example,
+@samp{boolean foo} indicates that the @code{foo} parameter should be
+specified as a boolean.  Types starting with @code{maybe-} denote parameters
+that won't show up in TLP config file when their value is @code{'disabled}.
+
+@c The following documentation was initially generated by
+@c (generate-tlp-documentation) in (gnu services pm).  Manually maintained
+@c documentation is better, so we shouldn't hesitate to edit below as
+@c needed.  However if the change you want to make to this documentation
+@c can be done in an automated way, it's probably easier to change
+@c (generate-documentation) than to make it below and have to deal with
+@c the churn as TLP updates.
+
+Available @code{tlp-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} package tlp
+The TLP package.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} boolean tlp-enable?
+Set to true if you wish to enable TLP.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} string tlp-default-mode
+Default mode when no power supply can be detected.  Alternatives are AC and
+BAT.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"AC"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer disk-idle-secs-on-ac
+Number of seconds Linux kernel has to wait after the disk goes idle, before
+syncing on AC.
+
+Defaults to @samp{0}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer disk-idle-secs-on-bat
+Same as @code{disk-idle-ac} but on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{2}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer max-lost-work-secs-on-ac
+Dirty pages flushing periodicity, expressed in seconds.
+
+Defaults to @samp{15}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer max-lost-work-secs-on-bat
+Same as @code{max-lost-work-secs-on-ac} but on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{60}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-space-separated-string-list cpu-scaling-governor-on-ac
+CPU frequency scaling governor on AC mode.  With intel_pstate driver,
+alternatives are powersave and performance.  With acpi-cpufreq driver,
+alternatives are ondemand, powersave, performance and conservative.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-space-separated-string-list cpu-scaling-governor-on-bat
+Same as @code{cpu-scaling-governor-on-ac} but on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-non-negative-integer cpu-scaling-min-freq-on-ac
+Set the min available frequency for the scaling governor on AC.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-non-negative-integer cpu-scaling-max-freq-on-ac
+Set the max available frequency for the scaling governor on AC.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-non-negative-integer cpu-scaling-min-freq-on-bat
+Set the min available frequency for the scaling governor on BAT.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-non-negative-integer cpu-scaling-max-freq-on-bat
+Set the max available frequency for the scaling governor on BAT.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-non-negative-integer cpu-min-perf-on-ac
+Limit the min P-state to control the power dissipation of the CPU, in AC
+mode.  Values are stated as a percentage of the available performance.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-non-negative-integer cpu-max-perf-on-ac
+Limit the max P-state to control the power dissipation of the CPU, in AC
+mode.  Values are stated as a percentage of the available performance.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-non-negative-integer cpu-min-perf-on-bat
+Same as @code{cpu-min-perf-on-ac} on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-non-negative-integer cpu-max-perf-on-bat
+Same as @code{cpu-max-perf-on-ac} on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-boolean cpu-boost-on-ac?
+Enable CPU turbo boost feature on AC mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-boolean cpu-boost-on-bat?
+Same as @code{cpu-boost-on-ac?} on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} boolean sched-powersave-on-ac?
+Allow Linux kernel to minimize the number of CPU cores/hyper-threads used
+under light load conditions.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} boolean sched-powersave-on-bat?
+Same as @code{sched-powersave-on-ac?} but on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} boolean nmi-watchdog?
+Enable Linux kernel NMI watchdog.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-string phc-controls
+For Linux kernels with PHC patch applied, change CPU voltages.  An example
+value would be @samp{"F:V F:V F:V F:V"}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} string energy-perf-policy-on-ac
+Set CPU performance versus energy saving policy on AC.  Alternatives are
+performance, normal, powersave.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"performance"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} string energy-perf-policy-on-bat
+Same as @code{energy-perf-policy-ac} but on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"powersave"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list disks-devices
+Hard disk devices.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list disk-apm-level-on-ac
+Hard disk advanced power management level.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list disk-apm-level-on-bat
+Same as @code{disk-apm-bat} but on BAT mode.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-space-separated-string-list disk-spindown-timeout-on-ac
+Hard disk spin down timeout.  One value has to be specified for each
+declared hard disk.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-space-separated-string-list disk-spindown-timeout-on-bat
+Same as @code{disk-spindown-timeout-on-ac} but on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-space-separated-string-list disk-iosched
+Select IO scheduler for disk devices.  One value has to be specified for
+each declared hard disk.  Example alternatives are cfq, deadline and noop.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} string sata-linkpwr-on-ac
+SATA aggressive link power management (ALPM) level.  Alternatives are
+min_power, medium_power, max_performance.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"max_performance"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} string sata-linkpwr-on-bat
+Same as @code{sata-linkpwr-ac} but on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"min_power"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-string sata-linkpwr-blacklist
+Exclude specified SATA host devices for link power management.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-on-off-boolean ahci-runtime-pm-on-ac?
+Enable Runtime Power Management for AHCI controller and disks on AC mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-on-off-boolean ahci-runtime-pm-on-bat?
+Same as @code{ahci-runtime-pm-on-ac} on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer ahci-runtime-pm-timeout
+Seconds of inactivity before disk is suspended.
+
+Defaults to @samp{15}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} string pcie-aspm-on-ac
+PCI Express Active State Power Management level.  Alternatives are default,
+performance, powersave.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"performance"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} string pcie-aspm-on-bat
+Same as @code{pcie-aspm-ac} but on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"powersave"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} string radeon-power-profile-on-ac
+Radeon graphics clock speed level.  Alternatives are low, mid, high, auto,
+default.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"high"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} string radeon-power-profile-on-bat
+Same as @code{radeon-power-ac} but on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"low"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} string radeon-dpm-state-on-ac
+Radeon dynamic power management method (DPM).  Alternatives are battery,
+performance.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"performance"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} string radeon-dpm-state-on-bat
+Same as @code{radeon-dpm-state-ac} but on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"battery"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} string radeon-dpm-perf-level-on-ac
+Radeon DPM performance level.  Alternatives are auto, low, high.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"auto"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} string radeon-dpm-perf-level-on-bat
+Same as @code{radeon-dpm-perf-ac} but on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"auto"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} on-off-boolean wifi-pwr-on-ac?
+Wifi power saving mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} on-off-boolean wifi-pwr-on-bat?
+Same as @code{wifi-power-ac?} but on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} y-n-boolean wol-disable?
+Disable wake on LAN.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer sound-power-save-on-ac
+Timeout duration in seconds before activating audio power saving on Intel
+HDA and AC97 devices.  A value of 0 disables power saving.
+
+Defaults to @samp{0}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} non-negative-integer sound-power-save-on-bat
+Same as @code{sound-powersave-ac} but on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{1}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} y-n-boolean sound-power-save-controller?
+Disable controller in powersaving mode on Intel HDA devices.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} boolean bay-poweroff-on-bat?
+Enable optical drive in UltraBay/MediaBay on BAT mode.  Drive can be powered
+on again by releasing (and reinserting) the eject lever or by pressing the
+disc eject button on newer models.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} string bay-device
+Name of the optical drive device to power off.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"sr0"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} string runtime-pm-on-ac
+Runtime Power Management for PCI(e) bus devices.  Alternatives are on and
+auto.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"on"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} string runtime-pm-on-bat
+Same as @code{runtime-pm-ac} but on BAT mode.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"auto"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} boolean runtime-pm-all?
+Runtime Power Management for all PCI(e) bus devices, except blacklisted
+ones.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-space-separated-string-list runtime-pm-blacklist
+Exclude specified PCI(e) device addresses from Runtime Power Management.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} space-separated-string-list runtime-pm-driver-blacklist
+Exclude PCI(e) devices assigned to the specified drivers from Runtime Power
+Management.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} boolean usb-autosuspend?
+Enable USB autosuspend feature.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-string usb-blacklist
+Exclude specified devices from USB autosuspend.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} boolean usb-blacklist-wwan?
+Exclude WWAN devices from USB autosuspend.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-string usb-whitelist
+Include specified devices into USB autosuspend, even if they are already
+excluded by the driver or via @code{usb-blacklist-wwan?}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} maybe-boolean usb-autosuspend-disable-on-shutdown?
+Enable USB autosuspend before shutdown.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{tlp-configuration} parameter} boolean restore-device-state-on-startup?
+Restore radio device state (bluetooth, wifi, wwan) from previous shutdown on
+system startup.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@cindex thermald
+@cindex CPU frequency scaling with thermald
+@subsubheading Thermald daemon
+
+The @code{(gnu services pm)} module provides an interface to thermald, a CPU
+frequency scaling service which helps prevent overheating.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} thermald-service-type
+This is the service type for @uref{https://01.org/linux-thermal-daemon/,
+thermald}, the Linux Thermal Daemon, which is responsible for controlling
+the thermal state of processors and preventing overheating.
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} thermald-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of @code{thermald-service-type}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{ignore-cpuid-check?} (default: @code{#f})
+Ignore cpuid check for supported CPU models.
+
+@item @code{thermald} (default: @var{thermald})
+Package object of thermald.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@node Audio-Dienste
+@subsubsection Audio-Dienste
+
+The @code{(gnu services audio)} module provides a service to start MPD (the
+Music Player Daemon).
+
+@cindex mpd
+@subsubheading Music Player Daemon
+
+The Music Player Daemon (MPD) is a service that can play music while being
+controlled from the local machine or over the network by a variety of
+clients.
+
+The following example shows how one might run @code{mpd} as user
+@code{"bob"} on port @code{6666}.  It uses pulseaudio for output.
+
+@example
+(service mpd-service-type
+         (mpd-configuration
+          (user "bob")
+          (port "6666")))
+@end example
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} mpd-service-type
+The service type for @command{mpd}
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} mpd-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of @command{mpd}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{user} (default: @code{"mpd"})
+The user to run mpd as.
+
+@item @code{music-dir} (default: @code{"~/Music"})
+The directory to scan for music files.
+
+@item @code{playlist-dir} (default: @code{"~/.mpd/playlists"})
+The directory to store playlists.
+
+@item @code{port} (default: @code{"6600"})
+The port to run mpd on.
+
+@item @code{address} (default: @code{"any"})
+The address that mpd will bind to.  To use a Unix domain socket, an absolute
+path can be specified here.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@node Virtualisierungsdienste
+@subsubsection Virtualization services
+
+The @code{(gnu services virtualization)} module provides services for the
+libvirt and virtlog daemons, as well as other virtualization-related
+services.
+
+@subsubheading Libvirt daemon
+@code{libvirtd} is the server side daemon component of the libvirt
+virtualization management system. This daemon runs on host servers and
+performs required management tasks for virtualized guests.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} libvirt-service-type
+This is the type of the @uref{https://libvirt.org, libvirt daemon}.  Its
+value must be a @code{libvirt-configuration}.
+
+@example
+(service libvirt-service-type
+         (libvirt-configuration
+          (unix-sock-group "libvirt")
+          (tls-port "16555")))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@c Auto-generated with (generate-libvirt-documentation)
+Available @code{libvirt-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} package libvirt
+Libvirt package.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} boolean listen-tls?
+Flag listening for secure TLS connections on the public TCP/IP port.  must
+set @code{listen} for this to have any effect.
+
+It is necessary to setup a CA and issue server certificates before using
+this capability.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} boolean listen-tcp?
+Listen for unencrypted TCP connections on the public TCP/IP port.  must set
+@code{listen} for this to have any effect.
+
+Using the TCP socket requires SASL authentication by default.  Only SASL
+mechanisms which support data encryption are allowed.  This is DIGEST_MD5
+and GSSAPI (Kerberos5)
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string tls-port
+Port for accepting secure TLS connections This can be a port number, or
+service name
+
+Defaults to @samp{"16514"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string tcp-port
+Port for accepting insecure TCP connections This can be a port number, or
+service name
+
+Defaults to @samp{"16509"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string listen-addr
+IP address or hostname used for client connections.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"0.0.0.0"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} boolean mdns-adv?
+Flag toggling mDNS advertisement of the libvirt service.
+
+Alternatively can disable for all services on a host by stopping the Avahi
+daemon.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string mdns-name
+Default mDNS advertisement name.  This must be unique on the immediate
+broadcast network.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"Virtualization Host <hostname>"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string unix-sock-group
+UNIX domain socket group ownership.  This can be used to allow a 'trusted'
+set of users access to management capabilities without becoming root.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"root"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string unix-sock-ro-perms
+UNIX socket permissions for the R/O socket.  This is used for monitoring VM
+status only.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"0777"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string unix-sock-rw-perms
+UNIX socket permissions for the R/W socket.  Default allows only root.  If
+PolicyKit is enabled on the socket, the default will change to allow
+everyone (eg, 0777)
+
+Defaults to @samp{"0770"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string unix-sock-admin-perms
+UNIX socket permissions for the admin socket.  Default allows only owner
+(root), do not change it unless you are sure to whom you are exposing the
+access to.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"0777"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string unix-sock-dir
+The directory in which sockets will be found/created.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/var/run/libvirt"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string auth-unix-ro
+Authentication scheme for UNIX read-only sockets.  By default socket
+permissions allow anyone to connect
+
+Defaults to @samp{"polkit"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string auth-unix-rw
+Authentication scheme for UNIX read-write sockets.  By default socket
+permissions only allow root.  If PolicyKit support was compiled into
+libvirt, the default will be to use 'polkit' auth.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"polkit"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string auth-tcp
+Authentication scheme for TCP sockets.  If you don't enable SASL, then all
+TCP traffic is cleartext.  Don't do this outside of a dev/test scenario.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"sasl"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string auth-tls
+Authentication scheme for TLS sockets.  TLS sockets already have encryption
+provided by the TLS layer, and limited authentication is done by
+certificates.
+
+It is possible to make use of any SASL authentication mechanism as well, by
+using 'sasl' for this option
+
+Defaults to @samp{"none"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} optional-list access-drivers
+API access control scheme.
+
+By default an authenticated user is allowed access to all APIs.  Access
+drivers can place restrictions on this.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string key-file
+Server key file path.  If set to an empty string, then no private key is
+loaded.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string cert-file
+Server key file path.  If set to an empty string, then no certificate is
+loaded.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string ca-file
+Server key file path.  If set to an empty string, then no CA certificate is
+loaded.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string crl-file
+Certificate revocation list path.  If set to an empty string, then no CRL is
+loaded.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} boolean tls-no-sanity-cert
+Disable verification of our own server certificates.
+
+When libvirtd starts it performs some sanity checks against its own
+certificates.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} boolean tls-no-verify-cert
+Disable verification of client certificates.
+
+Client certificate verification is the primary authentication mechanism.
+Any client which does not present a certificate signed by the CA will be
+rejected.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} optional-list tls-allowed-dn-list
+Whitelist of allowed x509 Distinguished Name.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} optional-list sasl-allowed-usernames
+Whitelist of allowed SASL usernames.  The format for username depends on the
+SASL authentication mechanism.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string tls-priority
+Override the compile time default TLS priority string.  The default is
+usually "NORMAL" unless overridden at build time.  Only set this is it is
+desired for libvirt to deviate from the global default settings.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"NORMAL"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer max-clients
+Maximum number of concurrent client connections to allow over all sockets
+combined.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5000}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer max-queued-clients
+Maximum length of queue of connections waiting to be accepted by the
+daemon.  Note, that some protocols supporting retransmission may obey this
+so that a later reattempt at connection succeeds.
+
+Defaults to @samp{1000}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer max-anonymous-clients
+Maximum length of queue of accepted but not yet authenticated clients.  Set
+this to zero to turn this feature off
+
+Defaults to @samp{20}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer min-workers
+Number of workers to start up initially.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer max-workers
+Maximum number of worker threads.
+
+If the number of active clients exceeds @code{min-workers}, then more
+threads are spawned, up to max_workers limit.  Typically you'd want
+max_workers to equal maximum number of clients allowed.
+
+Defaults to @samp{20}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer prio-workers
+Number of priority workers.  If all workers from above pool are stuck, some
+calls marked as high priority (notably domainDestroy) can be executed in
+this pool.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer max-requests
+Total global limit on concurrent RPC calls.
+
+Defaults to @samp{20}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer max-client-requests
+Limit on concurrent requests from a single client connection.  To avoid one
+client monopolizing the server this should be a small fraction of the global
+max_requests and max_workers parameter.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer admin-min-workers
+Same as @code{min-workers} but for the admin interface.
+
+Defaults to @samp{1}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer admin-max-workers
+Same as @code{max-workers} but for the admin interface.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer admin-max-clients
+Same as @code{max-clients} but for the admin interface.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer admin-max-queued-clients
+Same as @code{max-queued-clients} but for the admin interface.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer admin-max-client-requests
+Same as @code{max-client-requests} but for the admin interface.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer log-level
+Logging level.  4 errors, 3 warnings, 2 information, 1 debug.
+
+Defaults to @samp{3}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string log-filters
+Logging filters.
+
+A filter allows to select a different logging level for a given category of
+logs The format for a filter is one of:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+x:name
+
+@item
+x:+name
+
+@end itemize
+
+where @code{name} is a string which is matched against the category given in
+the @code{VIR_LOG_INIT()} at the top of each libvirt source file, e.g.,
+"remote", "qemu", or "util.json" (the name in the filter can be a substring
+of the full category name, in order to match multiple similar categories),
+the optional "+" prefix tells libvirt to log stack trace for each message
+matching name, and @code{x} is the minimal level where matching messages
+should be logged:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+1: DEBUG
+
+@item
+2: INFO
+
+@item
+3: WARNING
+
+@item
+4: ERROR
+
+@end itemize
+
+Multiple filters can be defined in a single filters statement, they just
+need to be separated by spaces.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"3:remote 4:event"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string log-outputs
+Logging outputs.
+
+An output is one of the places to save logging information The format for an
+output can be:
+
+@table @code
+@item x:stderr
+output goes to stderr
+
+@item x:syslog:name
+use syslog for the output and use the given name as the ident
+
+@item x:file:file_path
+output to a file, with the given filepath
+
+@item x:journald
+output to journald logging system
+
+@end table
+
+In all case the x prefix is the minimal level, acting as a filter
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+1: DEBUG
+
+@item
+2: INFO
+
+@item
+3: WARNING
+
+@item
+4: ERROR
+
+@end itemize
+
+Multiple outputs can be defined, they just need to be separated by spaces.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"3:stderr"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer audit-level
+Allows usage of the auditing subsystem to be altered
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+0: disable all auditing
+
+@item
+1: enable auditing, only if enabled on host
+
+@item
+2: enable auditing, and exit if disabled on host.
+
+@end itemize
+
+Defaults to @samp{1}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} boolean audit-logging
+Send audit messages via libvirt logging infrastructure.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} optional-string host-uuid
+Host UUID.  UUID must not have all digits be the same.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} string host-uuid-source
+Source to read host UUID.
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+@code{smbios}: fetch the UUID from @code{dmidecode -s system-uuid}
+
+@item
+@code{machine-id}: fetch the UUID from @code{/etc/machine-id}
+
+@end itemize
+
+If @code{dmidecode} does not provide a valid UUID a temporary UUID will be
+generated.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"smbios"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer keepalive-interval
+A keepalive message is sent to a client after @code{keepalive_interval}
+seconds of inactivity to check if the client is still responding.  If set to
+-1, libvirtd will never send keepalive requests; however clients can still
+send them and the daemon will send responses.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer keepalive-count
+Maximum number of keepalive messages that are allowed to be sent to the
+client without getting any response before the connection is considered
+broken.
+
+In other words, the connection is automatically closed approximately after
+@code{keepalive_interval * (keepalive_count + 1)} seconds since the last
+message received from the client.  When @code{keepalive-count} is set to 0,
+connections will be automatically closed after @code{keepalive-interval}
+seconds of inactivity without sending any keepalive messages.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer admin-keepalive-interval
+Same as above but for admin interface.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer admin-keepalive-count
+Same as above but for admin interface.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{libvirt-configuration} parameter} integer ovs-timeout
+Timeout for Open vSwitch calls.
+
+The @code{ovs-vsctl} utility is used for the configuration and its timeout
+option is set by default to 5 seconds to avoid potential infinite waits
+blocking libvirt.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@c %end of autogenerated docs
+
+@subsubheading Virtlog daemon
+The virtlogd service is a server side daemon component of libvirt that is
+used to manage logs from virtual machine consoles.
+
+This daemon is not used directly by libvirt client applications, rather it
+is called on their behalf by @code{libvirtd}. By maintaining the logs in a
+standalone daemon, the main @code{libvirtd} daemon can be restarted without
+risk of losing logs. The @code{virtlogd} daemon has the ability to re-exec()
+itself upon receiving @code{SIGUSR1}, to allow live upgrades without
+downtime.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Variable} virtlog-service-type
+This is the type of the virtlog daemon.  Its value must be a
+@code{virtlog-configuration}.
+
+@example
+(service virtlog-service-type
+         (virtlog-configuration
+          (max-clients 1000)))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+@deftypevr {@code{virtlog-configuration} parameter} integer log-level
+Logging level.  4 errors, 3 warnings, 2 information, 1 debug.
+
+Defaults to @samp{3}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{virtlog-configuration} parameter} string log-filters
+Logging filters.
+
+A filter allows to select a different logging level for a given category of
+logs The format for a filter is one of:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+x:name
+
+@item
+x:+name
+
+@end itemize
+
+where @code{name} is a string which is matched against the category given in
+the @code{VIR_LOG_INIT()} at the top of each libvirt source file, e.g.,
+"remote", "qemu", or "util.json" (the name in the filter can be a substring
+of the full category name, in order to match multiple similar categories),
+the optional "+" prefix tells libvirt to log stack trace for each message
+matching name, and @code{x} is the minimal level where matching messages
+should be logged:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+1: DEBUG
+
+@item
+2: INFO
+
+@item
+3: WARNING
+
+@item
+4: ERROR
+
+@end itemize
+
+Multiple filters can be defined in a single filters statement, they just
+need to be separated by spaces.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"3:remote 4:event"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{virtlog-configuration} parameter} string log-outputs
+Logging outputs.
+
+An output is one of the places to save logging information The format for an
+output can be:
+
+@table @code
+@item x:stderr
+output goes to stderr
+
+@item x:syslog:name
+use syslog for the output and use the given name as the ident
+
+@item x:file:file_path
+output to a file, with the given filepath
+
+@item x:journald
+output to journald logging system
+
+@end table
+
+In all case the x prefix is the minimal level, acting as a filter
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+1: DEBUG
+
+@item
+2: INFO
+
+@item
+3: WARNING
+
+@item
+4: ERROR
+
+@end itemize
+
+Multiple outputs can be defined, they just need to be separated by spaces.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"3:stderr"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{virtlog-configuration} parameter} integer max-clients
+Maximum number of concurrent client connections to allow over all sockets
+combined.
+
+Defaults to @samp{1024}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{virtlog-configuration} parameter} integer max-size
+Maximum file size before rolling over.
+
+Defaults to @samp{2MB}
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{virtlog-configuration} parameter} integer max-backups
+Maximum number of backup files to keep.
+
+Defaults to @samp{3}
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@subsubheading Transparent Emulation with QEMU
+
+@cindex emulation
+@cindex @code{binfmt_misc}
+@code{qemu-binfmt-service-type} provides support for transparent emulation
+of program binaries built for different architectures---e.g., it allows you
+to transparently execute an ARMv7 program on an x86_64 machine.  It achieves
+this by combining the @uref{https://www.qemu.org, QEMU} emulator and the
+@code{binfmt_misc} feature of the kernel Linux.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} qemu-binfmt-service-type
+This is the type of the QEMU/binfmt service for transparent emulation.  Its
+value must be a @code{qemu-binfmt-configuration} object, which specifies the
+QEMU package to use as well as the architecture we want to emulated:
+
+@example
+(service qemu-binfmt-service-type
+         (qemu-binfmt-configuration
+           (platforms (lookup-qemu-platforms "arm" "aarch64" "ppc"))))
+@end example
+
+In this example, we enable transparent emulation for the ARM and aarch64
+platforms.  Running @code{herd stop qemu-binfmt} turns it off, and running
+@code{herd start qemu-binfmt} turns it back on (@pxref{Invoking herd, the
+@command{herd} command,, shepherd, The GNU Shepherd Manual}).
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} qemu-binfmt-configuration
+This is the configuration for the @code{qemu-binfmt} service.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{platforms} (default: @code{'()})
+The list of emulated QEMU platforms.  Each item must be a @dfn{platform
+object} as returned by @code{lookup-qemu-platforms} (see below).
+
+@item @code{guix-support?} (default: @code{#f})
+When it is true, QEMU and all its dependencies are added to the build
+environment of @command{guix-daemon} (@pxref{Aufruf des guix-daemon,
+@code{--chroot-directory} option}).  This allows the @code{binfmt_misc}
+handlers to be used within the build environment, which in turn means that
+you can transparently build programs for another architecture.
+
+For example, let's suppose you're on an x86_64 machine and you have this
+service:
+
+@example
+(service qemu-binfmt-service-type
+         (qemu-binfmt-configuration
+           (platforms (lookup-qemu-platforms "arm"))
+           (guix-support? #t)))
+@end example
+
+You can run:
+
+@example
+guix build -s armhf-linux inkscape
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+and it will build Inkscape for ARMv7 @emph{as if it were a native build},
+transparently using QEMU to emulate the ARMv7 CPU.  Pretty handy if you'd
+like to test a package build for an architecture you don't have access to!
+
+@item @code{qemu} (default: @code{qemu})
+The QEMU package to use.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} lookup-qemu-platforms @var{platforms}@dots{}
+Return the list of QEMU platform objects corresponding to
+@var{platforms}@dots{}.  @var{platforms} must be a list of strings
+corresponding to platform names, such as @code{"arm"}, @code{"sparc"},
+@code{"mips64el"}, and so on.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} qemu-platform? @var{obj}
+Return true if @var{obj} is a platform object.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} qemu-platform-name @var{platform}
+Return the name of @var{platform}---a string such as @code{"arm"}.
+@end deffn
+
+@node Versionskontrolldienste
+@subsubsection Versionskontrolldienste
+
+The @code{(gnu services version-control)} module provides a service to allow
+remote access to local Git repositories.  There are three options: the
+@code{git-daemon-service}, which provides access to repositories via the
+@code{git://} unsecured TCP-based protocol, extending the @code{nginx} web
+server to proxy some requests to @code{git-http-backend}, or providing a web
+interface with @code{cgit-service-type}.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} git-daemon-service [#:config (git-daemon-configuration)]
+
+Return a service that runs @command{git daemon}, a simple TCP server to
+expose repositories over the Git protocol for anonymous access.
+
+The optional @var{config} argument should be a
+@code{<git-daemon-configuration>} object, by default it allows read-only
+access to exported@footnote{By creating the magic file
+"git-daemon-export-ok" in the repository directory.} repositories under
+@file{/srv/git}.
+
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} git-daemon-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration for @code{git-daemon-service}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @var{git})
+Package object of the Git distributed version control system.
+
+@item @code{export-all?} (default: @var{#f})
+Whether to allow access for all Git repositories, even if they do not have
+the @file{git-daemon-export-ok} file.
+
+@item @code{base-path} (default: @file{/srv/git})
+Whether to remap all the path requests as relative to the given path.  If
+you run git daemon with @var{(base-path "/srv/git")} on example.com, then if
+you later try to pull @code{git://example.com/hello.git}, git daemon will
+interpret the path as @code{/srv/git/hello.git}.
+
+@item @code{user-path} (default: @var{#f})
+Whether to allow @code{~user} notation to be used in requests.  When
+specified with empty string, requests to @code{git://host/~alice/foo} is
+taken as a request to access @code{foo} repository in the home directory of
+user @code{alice}.  If @var{(user-path "path")} is specified, the same
+request is taken as a request to access @code{path/foo} repository in the
+home directory of user @code{alice}.
+
+@item @code{listen} (default: @var{'()})
+Whether to listen on specific IP addresses or hostnames, defaults to all.
+
+@item @code{port} (default: @var{#f})
+Whether to listen on an alternative port, which defaults to 9418.
+
+@item @code{whitelist} (default: @var{'()})
+If not empty, only allow access to this list of directories.
+
+@item @code{extra-options} (default: @var{'()})
+Extra options will be passed to @code{git daemon}, please run @command{man
+git-daemon} for more information.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+The @code{git://} protocol lacks authentication.  When you pull from a
+repository fetched via @code{git://}, you don't know that the data you
+receive was modified is really coming from the specified host, and you have
+your connection is subject to eavesdropping.  It's better to use an
+authenticated and encrypted transport, such as @code{https}.  Although Git
+allows you to serve repositories using unsophisticated file-based web
+servers, there is a faster protocol implemented by the
+@code{git-http-backend} program.  This program is the back-end of a proper
+Git web service.  It is designed to sit behind a FastCGI proxy.  @xref{Web-Dienste}, for more on running the necessary @code{fcgiwrap} daemon.
+
+Guix has a separate configuration data type for serving Git repositories
+over HTTP.
+
+@deftp {Data Type} git-http-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration for @code{git-http-service}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @var{git})
+Package object of the Git distributed version control system.
+
+@item @code{git-root} (default: @file{/srv/git})
+Directory containing the Git repositories to expose to the world.
+
+@item @code{export-all?} (default: @var{#f})
+Whether to expose access for all Git repositories in @var{git-root}, even if
+they do not have the @file{git-daemon-export-ok} file.
+
+@item @code{uri-path} (default: @file{/git/})
+Path prefix for Git access.  With the default @code{/git/} prefix, this will
+map @code{http://@var{server}/git/@var{repo}.git} to
+@code{/srv/git/@var{repo}.git}.  Requests whose URI paths do not begin with
+this prefix are not passed on to this Git instance.
+
+@item @code{fcgiwrap-socket} (default: @code{127.0.0.1:9000})
+The socket on which the @code{fcgiwrap} daemon is listening.  @xref{Web-Dienste}.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+There is no @code{git-http-service-type}, currently; instead you can create
+an @code{nginx-location-configuration} from a @code{git-http-configuration}
+and then add that location to a web server.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} git-http-nginx-location-configuration @
+       [config=(git-http-configuration)] Compute an
+@code{nginx-location-configuration} that corresponds to the given Git http
+configuration.  An example nginx service definition to serve the default
+@file{/srv/git} over HTTPS might be:
+
+@example
+(service nginx-service-type
+         (nginx-configuration
+          (server-blocks
+           (list
+            (nginx-server-configuration
+             (listen '("443 ssl"))
+             (server-name "git.my-host.org")
+             (ssl-certificate
+              "/etc/letsencrypt/live/git.my-host.org/fullchain.pem")
+             (ssl-certificate-key
+              "/etc/letsencrypt/live/git.my-host.org/privkey.pem")
+             (locations
+              (list
+               (git-http-nginx-location-configuration
+                (git-http-configuration (uri-path "/"))))))))))
+@end example
+
+This example assumes that you are using Let's Encrypt to get your TLS
+certificate.  @xref{Zertifikatsdienste}.  The default @code{certbot}
+service will redirect all HTTP traffic on @code{git.my-host.org} to HTTPS.
+You will also need to add an @code{fcgiwrap} proxy to your system services.
+@xref{Web-Dienste}.
+@end deffn
+
+@subsubheading Cgit Service
+
+@cindex Cgit service
+@cindex Git, web interface
+@uref{https://git.zx2c4.com/cgit/, Cgit} is a web frontend for Git
+repositories written in C.
+
+The following example will configure the service with default values.  By
+default, Cgit can be accessed on port 80 (@code{http://localhost:80}).
+
+@example
+(service cgit-service-type)
+@end example
+
+The @code{file-object} type designates either a file-like object
+(@pxref{G-Ausdrücke, file-like objects}) or a string.
+
+@c %start of fragment
+
+Available @code{cgit-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} package package
+The CGIT package.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} nginx-server-configuration-list nginx
+NGINX configuration.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} file-object about-filter
+Specifies a command which will be invoked to format the content of about
+pages (both top-level and for each repository).
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string agefile
+Specifies a path, relative to each repository path, which can be used to
+specify the date and time of the youngest commit in the repository.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} file-object auth-filter
+Specifies a command that will be invoked for authenticating repository
+access.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string branch-sort
+Flag which, when set to @samp{age}, enables date ordering in the branch ref
+list, and when set @samp{name} enables ordering by branch name.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"name"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string cache-root
+Path used to store the cgit cache entries.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/var/cache/cgit"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer cache-static-ttl
+Number which specifies the time-to-live, in minutes, for the cached version
+of repository pages accessed with a fixed SHA1.
+
+Defaults to @samp{-1}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer cache-dynamic-ttl
+Number which specifies the time-to-live, in minutes, for the cached version
+of repository pages accessed without a fixed SHA1.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer cache-repo-ttl
+Number which specifies the time-to-live, in minutes, for the cached version
+of the repository summary page.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer cache-root-ttl
+Number which specifies the time-to-live, in minutes, for the cached version
+of the repository index page.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer cache-scanrc-ttl
+Number which specifies the time-to-live, in minutes, for the result of
+scanning a path for Git repositories.
+
+Defaults to @samp{15}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer cache-about-ttl
+Number which specifies the time-to-live, in minutes, for the cached version
+of the repository about page.
+
+Defaults to @samp{15}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer cache-snapshot-ttl
+Number which specifies the time-to-live, in minutes, for the cached version
+of snapshots.
+
+Defaults to @samp{5}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer cache-size
+The maximum number of entries in the cgit cache.  When set to @samp{0},
+caching is disabled.
+
+Defaults to @samp{0}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean case-sensitive-sort?
+Sort items in the repo list case sensitively.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} list clone-prefix
+List of common prefixes which, when combined with a repository URL,
+generates valid clone URLs for the repository.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} list clone-url
+List of @code{clone-url} templates.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} file-object commit-filter
+Command which will be invoked to format commit messages.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string commit-sort
+Flag which, when set to @samp{date}, enables strict date ordering in the
+commit log, and when set to @samp{topo} enables strict topological ordering.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"git log"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} file-object css
+URL which specifies the css document to include in all cgit pages.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/share/cgit/cgit.css"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} file-object email-filter
+Specifies a command which will be invoked to format names and email address
+of committers, authors, and taggers, as represented in various places
+throughout the cgit interface.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean embedded?
+Flag which, when set to @samp{#t}, will make cgit generate a HTML fragment
+suitable for embedding in other HTML pages.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean enable-commit-graph?
+Flag which, when set to @samp{#t}, will make cgit print an ASCII-art commit
+history graph to the left of the commit messages in the repository log page.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean enable-filter-overrides?
+Flag which, when set to @samp{#t}, allows all filter settings to be
+overridden in repository-specific cgitrc files.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean enable-follow-links?
+Flag which, when set to @samp{#t}, allows users to follow a file in the log
+view.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean enable-http-clone?
+If set to @samp{#t}, cgit will act as an dumb HTTP endpoint for Git clones.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean enable-index-links?
+Flag which, when set to @samp{#t}, will make cgit generate extra links
+"summary", "commit", "tree" for each repo in the repository index.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean enable-index-owner?
+Flag which, when set to @samp{#t}, will make cgit display the owner of each
+repo in the repository index.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean enable-log-filecount?
+Flag which, when set to @samp{#t}, will make cgit print the number of
+modified files for each commit on the repository log page.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean enable-log-linecount?
+Flag which, when set to @samp{#t}, will make cgit print the number of added
+and removed lines for each commit on the repository log page.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean enable-remote-branches?
+Flag which, when set to @code{#t}, will make cgit display remote branches in
+the summary and refs views.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean enable-subject-links?
+Flag which, when set to @code{1}, will make cgit use the subject of the
+parent commit as link text when generating links to parent commits in commit
+view.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean enable-html-serving?
+Flag which, when set to @samp{#t}, will make cgit use the subject of the
+parent commit as link text when generating links to parent commits in commit
+view.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean enable-tree-linenumbers?
+Flag which, when set to @samp{#t}, will make cgit generate linenumber links
+for plaintext blobs printed in the tree view.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#t}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean enable-git-config?
+Flag which, when set to @samp{#f}, will allow cgit to use Git config to set
+any repo specific settings.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} file-object favicon
+URL used as link to a shortcut icon for cgit.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/favicon.ico"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string footer
+The content of the file specified with this option will be included verbatim
+at the bottom of all pages (i.e.@: it replaces the standard "generated
+by..."@: message).
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string head-include
+The content of the file specified with this option will be included verbatim
+in the HTML HEAD section on all pages.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string header
+The content of the file specified with this option will be included verbatim
+at the top of all pages.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} file-object include
+Name of a configfile to include before the rest of the current config- file
+is parsed.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string index-header
+The content of the file specified with this option will be included verbatim
+above the repository index.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string index-info
+The content of the file specified with this option will be included verbatim
+below the heading on the repository index page.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean local-time?
+Flag which, if set to @samp{#t}, makes cgit print commit and tag times in
+the servers timezone.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} file-object logo
+URL which specifies the source of an image which will be used as a logo on
+all cgit pages.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/share/cgit/cgit.png"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string logo-link
+URL loaded when clicking on the cgit logo image.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} file-object owner-filter
+Command which will be invoked to format the Owner column of the main page.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer max-atom-items
+Number of items to display in atom feeds view.
+
+Defaults to @samp{10}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer max-commit-count
+Number of entries to list per page in "log" view.
+
+Defaults to @samp{50}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer max-message-length
+Number of commit message characters to display in "log" view.
+
+Defaults to @samp{80}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer max-repo-count
+Specifies the number of entries to list per page on the repository index
+page.
+
+Defaults to @samp{50}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer max-repodesc-length
+Specifies the maximum number of repo description characters to display on
+the repository index page.
+
+Defaults to @samp{80}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer max-blob-size
+Specifies the maximum size of a blob to display HTML for in KBytes.
+
+Defaults to @samp{0}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string max-stats
+Maximum statistics period.  Valid values are @samp{week},@samp{month},
+@samp{quarter} and @samp{year}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} mimetype-alist mimetype
+Mimetype for the specified filename extension.
+
+Defaults to @samp{((gif "image/gif") (html "text/html") (jpg "image/jpeg")
+(jpeg "image/jpeg") (pdf "application/pdf") (png "image/png") (svg
+"image/svg+xml"))}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} file-object mimetype-file
+Specifies the file to use for automatic mimetype lookup.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string module-link
+Text which will be used as the formatstring for a hyperlink when a submodule
+is printed in a directory listing.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean nocache?
+If set to the value @samp{#t} caching will be disabled.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean noplainemail?
+If set to @samp{#t} showing full author email addresses will be disabled.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean noheader?
+Flag which, when set to @samp{#t}, will make cgit omit the standard header
+on all pages.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} project-list project-list
+A list of subdirectories inside of @code{repository-directory}, relative to
+it, that should loaded as Git repositories.  An empty list means that all
+subdirectories will be loaded.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} file-object readme
+Text which will be used as default value for @code{cgit-repo-readme}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean remove-suffix?
+If set to @code{#t} and @code{repository-directory} is enabled, if any
+repositories are found with a suffix of @code{.git}, this suffix will be
+removed for the URL and name.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer renamelimit
+Maximum number of files to consider when detecting renames.
+
+Defaults to @samp{-1}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string repository-sort
+The way in which repositories in each section are sorted.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} robots-list robots
+Text used as content for the @code{robots} meta-tag.
+
+Defaults to @samp{("noindex" "nofollow")}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string root-desc
+Text printed below the heading on the repository index page.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"a fast webinterface for the git dscm"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string root-readme
+The content of the file specified with this option will be included verbatim
+below thef "about" link on the repository index page.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string root-title
+Text printed as heading on the repository index page.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean scan-hidden-path
+If set to @samp{#t} and repository-directory is enabled,
+repository-directory will recurse into directories whose name starts with a
+period.  Otherwise, repository-directory will stay away from such
+directories, considered as "hidden".  Note that this does not apply to the
+".git" directory in non-bare repos.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} list snapshots
+Text which specifies the default set of snapshot formats that cgit generates
+links for.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} repository-directory repository-directory
+Name of the directory to scan for repositories (represents
+@code{scan-path}).
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/srv/git"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string section
+The name of the current repository section - all repositories defined after
+this option will inherit the current section name.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string section-sort
+Flag which, when set to @samp{1}, will sort the sections on the repository
+listing by name.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer section-from-path
+A number which, if defined prior to repository-directory, specifies how many
+path elements from each repo path to use as a default section name.
+
+Defaults to @samp{0}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} boolean side-by-side-diffs?
+If set to @samp{#t} shows side-by-side diffs instead of unidiffs per
+default.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} file-object source-filter
+Specifies a command which will be invoked to format plaintext blobs in the
+tree view.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer summary-branches
+Specifies the number of branches to display in the repository "summary"
+view.
+
+Defaults to @samp{10}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer summary-log
+Specifies the number of log entries to display in the repository "summary"
+view.
+
+Defaults to @samp{10}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} integer summary-tags
+Specifies the number of tags to display in the repository "summary" view.
+
+Defaults to @samp{10}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string strict-export
+Filename which, if specified, needs to be present within the repository for
+cgit to allow access to that repository.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} string virtual-root
+URL which, if specified, will be used as root for all cgit links.
+
+Defaults to @samp{"/"}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} repository-cgit-configuration-list repositories
+A list of @dfn{cgit-repo} records to use with config.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+Available @code{repository-cgit-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-list snapshots
+A mask of snapshot formats for this repo that cgit generates links for,
+restricted by the global @code{snapshots} setting.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-file-object source-filter
+Override the default @code{source-filter}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-string url
+The relative URL used to access the repository.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-file-object about-filter
+Override the default @code{about-filter}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-string branch-sort
+Flag which, when set to @samp{age}, enables date ordering in the branch ref
+list, and when set to @samp{name} enables ordering by branch name.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-list clone-url
+A list of URLs which can be used to clone repo.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-file-object commit-filter
+Override the default @code{commit-filter}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-string commit-sort
+Flag which, when set to @samp{date}, enables strict date ordering in the
+commit log, and when set to @samp{topo} enables strict topological ordering.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-string defbranch
+The name of the default branch for this repository.  If no such branch
+exists in the repository, the first branch name (when sorted) is used as
+default instead.  By default branch pointed to by HEAD, or "master" if there
+is no suitable HEAD.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-string desc
+The value to show as repository description.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-string homepage
+The value to show as repository homepage.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-file-object email-filter
+Override the default @code{email-filter}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} maybe-repo-boolean enable-commit-graph?
+A flag which can be used to disable the global setting
+@code{enable-commit-graph?}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} maybe-repo-boolean enable-log-filecount?
+A flag which can be used to disable the global setting
+@code{enable-log-filecount?}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} maybe-repo-boolean enable-log-linecount?
+A flag which can be used to disable the global setting
+@code{enable-log-linecount?}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} maybe-repo-boolean enable-remote-branches?
+Flag which, when set to @code{#t}, will make cgit display remote branches in
+the summary and refs views.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} maybe-repo-boolean enable-subject-links?
+A flag which can be used to override the global setting
+@code{enable-subject-links?}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} maybe-repo-boolean enable-html-serving?
+A flag which can be used to override the global setting
+@code{enable-html-serving?}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{disabled}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-boolean hide?
+Flag which, when set to @code{#t}, hides the repository from the repository
+index.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-boolean ignore?
+Flag which, when set to @samp{#t}, ignores the repository.
+
+Defaults to @samp{#f}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-file-object logo
+URL which specifies the source of an image which will be used as a logo on
+this repo’s pages.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-string logo-link
+URL loaded when clicking on the cgit logo image.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-file-object owner-filter
+Override the default @code{owner-filter}.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-string module-link
+Text which will be used as the formatstring for a hyperlink when a submodule
+is printed in a directory listing.  The arguments for the formatstring are
+the path and SHA1 of the submodule commit.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} module-link-path module-link-path
+Text which will be used as the formatstring for a hyperlink when a submodule
+with the specified subdirectory path is printed in a directory listing.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-string max-stats
+Override the default maximum statistics period.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-string name
+The value to show as repository name.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-string owner
+A value used to identify the owner of the repository.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-string path
+An absolute path to the repository directory.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-string readme
+A path (relative to repo) which specifies a file to include verbatim as the
+"About" page for this repo.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-string section
+The name of the current repository section - all repositories defined after
+this option will inherit the current section name.
+
+Defaults to @samp{""}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{repository-cgit-configuration} parameter} repo-list extra-options
+Extra options will be appended to cgitrc file.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{cgit-configuration} parameter} list extra-options
+Extra options will be appended to cgitrc file.
+
+Defaults to @samp{()}.
+
+@end deftypevr
+
+
+@c %end of fragment
+
+However, it could be that you just want to get a @code{cgitrc} up and
+running.  In that case, you can pass an @code{opaque-cgit-configuration} as
+a record to @code{cgit-service-type}.  As its name indicates, an opaque
+configuration does not have easy reflective capabilities.
+
+Available @code{opaque-cgit-configuration} fields are:
+
+@deftypevr {@code{opaque-cgit-configuration} parameter} package cgit
+The cgit package.
+@end deftypevr
+
+@deftypevr {@code{opaque-cgit-configuration} parameter} string string
+The contents of the @code{cgitrc}, as a string.
+@end deftypevr
+
+For example, if your @code{cgitrc} is just the empty string, you could
+instantiate a cgit service like this:
+
+@example
+(service cgit-service-type
+         (opaque-cgit-configuration
+          (cgitrc "")))
+@end example
+
+@subsubheading Gitolite Service
+
+@cindex Gitolite service
+@cindex Git, hosting
+@uref{http://gitolite.com/gitolite/, Gitolite} is a tool for hosting Git
+repositories on a central server.
+
+Gitolite can handle multiple repositories and users, and supports flexible
+configuration of the permissions for the users on the repositories.
+
+The following example will configure Gitolite using the default @code{git}
+user, and the provided SSH public key.
+
+@example
+(service gitolite-service-type
+         (gitolite-configuration
+           (admin-pubkey (plain-file
+                           "yourname.pub"
+                           "ssh-rsa AAAA... guix@@example.com"))))
+@end example
+
+Gitolite is configured through a special admin repository which you can
+clone, for example, if you setup Gitolite on @code{example.com}, you would
+run the following command to clone the admin repository.
+
+@example
+git clone git@@example.com:gitolite-admin
+@end example
+
+When the Gitolite service is activated, the provided @code{admin-pubkey}
+will be inserted in to the @file{keydir} directory in the gitolite-admin
+repository.  If this results in a change in the repository, it will be
+committed using the message ``gitolite setup by GNU Guix''.
+
+@deftp {Data Type} gitolite-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration for @code{gitolite-service-type}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @var{gitolite})
+Gitolite package to use.
+
+@item @code{user} (default: @var{git})
+User to use for Gitolite.  This will be user that you use when accessing
+Gitolite over SSH.
+
+@item @code{group} (default: @var{git})
+Group to use for Gitolite.
+
+@item @code{home-directory} (default: @var{"/var/lib/gitolite"})
+Directory in which to store the Gitolite configuration and repositories.
+
+@item @code{rc-file} (default: @var{(gitolite-rc-file)})
+A ``file-like'' object (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke, file-like objects}),
+representing the configuration for Gitolite.
+
+@item @code{admin-pubkey} (default: @var{#f})
+A ``file-like'' object (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke, file-like objects}) used to
+setup Gitolite.  This will be inserted in to the @file{keydir} directory
+within the gitolite-admin repository.
+
+To specify the SSH key as a string, use the @code{plain-file} function.
+
+@example
+(plain-file "yourname.pub" "ssh-rsa AAAA... guix@@example.com")
+@end example
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} gitolite-rc-file
+Data type representing the Gitolite RC file.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{umask} (default: @code{#o0077})
+This controls the permissions Gitolite sets on the repositories and their
+contents.
+
+A value like @code{#o0027} will give read access to the group used by
+Gitolite (by default: @code{git}). This is necessary when using Gitolite
+with software like cgit or gitweb.
+
+@item @code{git-config-keys} (default: @code{""})
+Gitolite allows you to set git config values using the "config"
+keyword. This setting allows control over the config keys to accept.
+
+@item @code{roles} (default: @code{'(("READERS" . 1) ("WRITERS" . ))})
+Set the role names allowed to be used by users running the perms command.
+
+@item @code{enable} (default: @code{'("help" "desc" "info" "perms" "writable" "ssh-authkeys" "git-config" "daemon" "gitweb")})
+This setting controls the commands and features to enable within Gitolite.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+
+@node Spieldienste
+@subsubsection Spieldienste
+
+@subsubheading The Battle for Wesnoth Service
+@cindex wesnothd
+@uref{https://wesnoth.org, The Battle for Wesnoth} is a fantasy, turn based
+tactical strategy game, with several single player campaigns, and
+multiplayer games (both networked and local).
+
+@defvar {Scheme Variable} wesnothd-service-type
+Service type for the wesnothd service.  Its value must be a
+@code{wesnothd-configuration} object.  To run wesnothd in the default
+configuration, instantiate it as:
+
+@example
+(service wesnothd-service-type)
+@end example
+@end defvar
+
+@deftp {Data Type} wesnothd-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of @command{wesnothd}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{package} (default: @code{wesnoth-server})
+The wesnoth server package to use.
+
+@item @code{port} (default: @code{15000})
+The port to bind the server to.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@node Verschiedene Dienste
+@subsubsection Verschiedene Dienste
+
+@cindex fingerprint
+@subsubheading Fingerprint Service
+
+The @code{(gnu services fingerprint)} module provides a DBus service to read
+and identify fingerprints via a fingerprint sensor.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} fprintd-service-type
+The service type for @command{fprintd}, which provides the fingerprint
+reading capability.
+
+@example
+(service fprintd-service-type)
+@end example
+@end defvr
+
+@cindex sysctl
+@subsubheading System Control Service
+
+The @code{(gnu services sysctl)} provides a service to configure kernel
+parameters at boot.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} sysctl-service-type
+The service type for @command{sysctl}, which modifies kernel parameters
+under @file{/proc/sys/}.  To enable IPv4 forwarding, it can be instantiated
+as:
+
+@example
+(service sysctl-service-type
+         (sysctl-configuration
+           (settings '(("net.ipv4.ip_forward" . "1")))))
+@end example
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} sysctl-configuration
+The data type representing the configuration of @command{sysctl}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{sysctl} (default: @code{(file-append procps "/sbin/sysctl"})
+The @command{sysctl} executable to use.
+
+@item @code{settings} (default: @code{'()})
+An association list specifies kernel parameters and their values.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@cindex pcscd
+@subsubheading PC/SC Smart Card Daemon Service
+
+The @code{(gnu services security-token)} module provides the following
+service to run @command{pcscd}, the PC/SC Smart Card Daemon.
+@command{pcscd} is the daemon program for pcsc-lite and the MuscleCard
+framework. It is a resource manager that coordinates communications with
+smart card readers, smart cards and cryptographic tokens that are connected
+to the system.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} pcscd-service-type
+Service type for the @command{pcscd} service.  Its value must be a
+@code{pcscd-configuration} object.  To run pcscd in the default
+configuration, instantiate it as:
+
+@example
+(service pcscd-service-type)
+@end example
+@end defvr
+
+@deftp {Data Type} pcscd-configuration
+The data type representing the configuration of @command{pcscd}.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{pcsc-lite} (default: @code{pcsc-lite})
+The pcsc-lite package that provides pcscd.
+@item @code{usb-drivers} (default: @code{(list ccid)})
+List of packages that provide USB drivers to pcscd. Drivers are expected to
+be under @file{pcsc/drivers} in the store directory of the package.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@cindex lirc
+@subsubheading Lirc Service
+
+The @code{(gnu services lirc)} module provides the following service.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} lirc-service [#:lirc lirc] @
+       [#:device #f] [#:driver #f] [#:config-file #f] @ [#:extra-options '()]
+Return a service that runs @url{http://www.lirc.org,LIRC}, a daemon that
+decodes infrared signals from remote controls.
+
+Optionally, @var{device}, @var{driver} and @var{config-file} (configuration
+file name) may be specified.  See @command{lircd} manual for details.
+
+Finally, @var{extra-options} is a list of additional command-line options
+passed to @command{lircd}.
+@end deffn
+
+@cindex spice
+@subsubheading Spice Service
+
+The @code{(gnu services spice)} module provides the following service.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} spice-vdagent-service [#:spice-vdagent]
+Returns a service that runs @url{http://www.spice-space.org,VDAGENT}, a
+daemon that enables sharing the clipboard with a vm and setting the guest
+display resolution when the graphical console window resizes.
+@end deffn
+
+@subsubsection Dictionary Services
+@cindex dictionary
+The @code{(gnu services dict)} module provides the following service:
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} dicod-service [#:config (dicod-configuration)]
+Return a service that runs the @command{dicod} daemon, an implementation of
+DICT server (@pxref{Dicod,,, dico, GNU Dico Manual}).
+
+The optional @var{config} argument specifies the configuration for
+@command{dicod}, which should be a @code{<dicod-configuration>} object, by
+default it serves the GNU Collaborative International Dictonary of English.
+
+You can add @command{open localhost} to your @file{~/.dico} file to make
+@code{localhost} the default server for @command{dico} client
+(@pxref{Initialization File,,, dico, GNU Dico Manual}).
+@end deffn
+
+@deftp {Data Type} dicod-configuration
+Data type representing the configuration of dicod.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{dico} (default: @var{dico})
+Package object of the GNU Dico dictionary server.
+
+@item @code{interfaces} (default: @var{'("localhost")})
+This is the list of IP addresses and ports and possibly socket file names to
+listen to (@pxref{Server Settings, @code{listen} directive,, dico, GNU Dico
+Manual}).
+
+@item @code{handlers} (default: @var{'()})
+List of @code{<dicod-handler>} objects denoting handlers (module instances).
+
+@item @code{databases} (default: @var{(list %dicod-database:gcide)})
+List of @code{<dicod-database>} objects denoting dictionaries to be served.
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} dicod-handler
+Data type representing a dictionary handler (module instance).
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{name}
+Name of the handler (module instance).
+
+@item @code{module} (default: @var{#f})
+Name of the dicod module of the handler (instance).  If it is @code{#f}, the
+module has the same name as the handler.  (@pxref{Module,,, dico, GNU Dico
+Manual}).
+
+@item @code{options}
+List of strings or gexps representing the arguments for the module handler
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} dicod-database
+Data type representing a dictionary database.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{name}
+Name of the database, will be used in DICT commands.
+
+@item @code{handler}
+Name of the dicod handler (module instance) used by this database
+(@pxref{Handlers,,, dico, GNU Dico Manual}).
+
+@item @code{complex?} (default: @var{#f})
+Whether the database configuration complex.  The complex configuration will
+need a corresponding @code{<dicod-handler>} object, otherwise not.
+
+@item @code{options}
+List of strings or gexps representing the arguments for the database
+(@pxref{Databases,,, dico, GNU Dico Manual}).
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %dicod-database:gcide
+A @code{<dicod-database>} object serving the GNU Collaborative International
+Dictionary of English using the @code{gcide} package.
+@end defvr
+
+The following is an example @code{dicod-service} configuration.
+
+@example
+(dicod-service #:config
+  (dicod-configuration
+   (handlers (list (dicod-handler
+                    (name "wordnet")
+                    (module "dictorg")
+                    (options
+                     (list #~(string-append "dbdir=" #$wordnet))))))
+   (databases (list (dicod-database
+                     (name "wordnet")
+                     (complex? #t)
+                     (handler "wordnet")
+                     (options '("database=wn")))
+                    %dicod-database:gcide))))
+@end example
+
+@node Setuid-Programme
+@subsection Setuid-Programme
+
+@cindex setuid programs
+Some programs need to run with ``root'' privileges, even when they are
+launched by unprivileged users.  A notorious example is the @command{passwd}
+program, which users can run to change their password, and which needs to
+access the @file{/etc/passwd} and @file{/etc/shadow} files---something
+normally restricted to root, for obvious security reasons.  To address that,
+these executables are @dfn{setuid-root}, meaning that they always run with
+root privileges (@pxref{How Change Persona,,, libc, The GNU C Library
+Reference Manual}, for more info about the setuid mechanism.)
+
+The store itself @emph{cannot} contain setuid programs: that would be a
+security issue since any user on the system can write derivations that
+populate the store (@pxref{Der Store}).  Thus, a different mechanism is
+used: instead of changing the setuid bit directly on files that are in the
+store, we let the system administrator @emph{declare} which programs should
+be setuid root.
+
+The @code{setuid-programs} field of an @code{operating-system} declaration
+contains a list of G-expressions denoting the names of programs to be
+setuid-root (@pxref{Das Konfigurationssystem nutzen}).  For instance, the
+@command{passwd} program, which is part of the Shadow package, can be
+designated by this G-expression (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke}):
+
+@example
+#~(string-append #$shadow "/bin/passwd")
+@end example
+
+A default set of setuid programs is defined by the @code{%setuid-programs}
+variable of the @code{(gnu system)} module.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %setuid-programs
+A list of G-expressions denoting common programs that are setuid-root.
+
+The list includes commands such as @command{passwd}, @command{ping},
+@command{su}, and @command{sudo}.
+@end defvr
+
+Under the hood, the actual setuid programs are created in the
+@file{/run/setuid-programs} directory at system activation time.  The files
+in this directory refer to the ``real'' binaries, which are in the store.
+
+@node X.509-Zertifikate
+@subsection X.509-Zertifikate
+
+@cindex HTTPS, certificates
+@cindex X.509 certificates
+@cindex TLS
+Web servers available over HTTPS (that is, HTTP over the transport-layer
+security mechanism, TLS) send client programs an @dfn{X.509 certificate}
+that the client can then use to @emph{authenticate} the server.  To do that,
+clients verify that the server's certificate is signed by a so-called
+@dfn{certificate authority} (CA).  But to verify the CA's signature, clients
+must have first acquired the CA's certificate.
+
+Web browsers such as GNU@tie{}IceCat include their own set of CA
+certificates, such that they are able to verify CA signatures
+out-of-the-box.
+
+However, most other programs that can talk HTTPS---@command{wget},
+@command{git}, @command{w3m}, etc.---need to be told where CA certificates
+can be found.
+
+@cindex @code{nss-certs}
+In GuixSD, this is done by adding a package that provides certificates to
+the @code{packages} field of the @code{operating-system} declaration
+(@pxref{„operating-system“-Referenz}).  GuixSD includes one such package,
+@code{nss-certs}, which is a set of CA certificates provided as part of
+Mozilla's Network Security Services.
+
+Note that it is @emph{not} part of @var{%base-packages}, so you need to
+explicitly add it.  The @file{/etc/ssl/certs} directory, which is where most
+applications and libraries look for certificates by default, points to the
+certificates installed globally.
+
+Unprivileged users, including users of Guix on a foreign distro, can also
+install their own certificate package in their profile.  A number of
+environment variables need to be defined so that applications and libraries
+know where to find them.  Namely, the OpenSSL library honors the
+@code{SSL_CERT_DIR} and @code{SSL_CERT_FILE} variables.  Some applications
+add their own environment variables; for instance, the Git version control
+system honors the certificate bundle pointed to by the @code{GIT_SSL_CAINFO}
+environment variable.  Thus, you would typically run something like:
+
+@example
+$ guix package -i nss-certs
+$ export SSL_CERT_DIR="$HOME/.guix-profile/etc/ssl/certs"
+$ export SSL_CERT_FILE="$HOME/.guix-profile/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt"
+$ export GIT_SSL_CAINFO="$SSL_CERT_FILE"
+@end example
+
+As another example, R requires the @code{CURL_CA_BUNDLE} environment
+variable to point to a certificate bundle, so you would have to run
+something like this:
+
+@example
+$ guix package -i nss-certs
+$ export CURL_CA_BUNDLE="$HOME/.guix-profile/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt"
+@end example
+
+For other applications you may want to look up the required environment
+variable in the relevant documentation.
+
+
+@node Name Service Switch
+@subsection Name Service Switch
+
+@cindex name service switch
+@cindex NSS
+The @code{(gnu system nss)} module provides bindings to the configuration
+file of the libc @dfn{name service switch} or @dfn{NSS} (@pxref{NSS
+Configuration File,,, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}).  In a
+nutshell, the NSS is a mechanism that allows libc to be extended with new
+``name'' lookup methods for system databases, which includes host names,
+service names, user accounts, and more (@pxref{Name Service Switch, System
+Databases and Name Service Switch,, libc, The GNU C Library Reference
+Manual}).
+
+The NSS configuration specifies, for each system database, which lookup
+method is to be used, and how the various methods are chained together---for
+instance, under which circumstances NSS should try the next method in the
+list.  The NSS configuration is given in the @code{name-service-switch}
+field of @code{operating-system} declarations (@pxref{„operating-system“-Referenz, @code{name-service-switch}}).
+
+@cindex nss-mdns
+@cindex .local, host name lookup
+As an example, the declaration below configures the NSS to use the
+@uref{http://0pointer.de/lennart/projects/nss-mdns/, @code{nss-mdns}
+back-end}, which supports host name lookups over multicast DNS (mDNS)  for
+host names ending in @code{.local}:
+
+@example
+(name-service-switch
+   (hosts (list %files    ;first, check /etc/hosts
+
+                ;; If the above did not succeed, try
+                ;; with 'mdns_minimal'.
+                (name-service
+                  (name "mdns_minimal")
+
+                  ;; 'mdns_minimal' is authoritative for
+                  ;; '.local'.  When it returns "not found",
+                  ;; no need to try the next methods.
+                  (reaction (lookup-specification
+                             (not-found => return))))
+
+                ;; Then fall back to DNS.
+                (name-service
+                  (name "dns"))
+
+                ;; Finally, try with the "full" 'mdns'.
+                (name-service
+                  (name "mdns")))))
+@end example
+
+Do not worry: the @code{%mdns-host-lookup-nss} variable (see below)
+contains this configuration, so you will not have to type it if all you want
+is to have @code{.local} host lookup working.
+
+Note that, in this case, in addition to setting the
+@code{name-service-switch} of the @code{operating-system} declaration, you
+also need to use @code{avahi-service} (@pxref{Netzwerkdienste,
+@code{avahi-service}}), or @var{%desktop-services}, which includes it
+(@pxref{Desktop-Dienste}).  Doing this makes @code{nss-mdns} accessible to
+the name service cache daemon (@pxref{Basisdienste, @code{nscd-service}}).
+
+For convenience, the following variables provide typical NSS configurations.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %default-nss
+This is the default name service switch configuration, a
+@code{name-service-switch} object.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %mdns-host-lookup-nss
+This is the name service switch configuration with support for host name
+lookup over multicast DNS (mDNS) for host names ending in @code{.local}.
+@end defvr
+
+The reference for name service switch configuration is given below.  It is a
+direct mapping of the configuration file format of the C library , so please
+refer to the C library manual for more information (@pxref{NSS Configuration
+File,,, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}).  Compared to the
+configuration file format of libc NSS, it has the advantage not only of
+adding this warm parenthetic feel that we like, but also static checks: you
+will know about syntax errors and typos as soon as you run @command{guix
+system}.
+
+@deftp {Data Type} name-service-switch
+
+This is the data type representation the configuration of libc's name
+service switch (NSS).  Each field below represents one of the supported
+system databases.
+
+@table @code
+@item aliases
+@itemx ethers
+@itemx group
+@itemx gshadow
+@itemx hosts
+@itemx initgroups
+@itemx netgroup
+@itemx networks
+@itemx password
+@itemx public-key
+@itemx rpc
+@itemx services
+@itemx shadow
+The system databases handled by the NSS.  Each of these fields must be a
+list of @code{<name-service>} objects (see below).
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} name-service
+
+This is the data type representing an actual name service and the associated
+lookup action.
+
+@table @code
+@item name
+A string denoting the name service (@pxref{Services in the NSS
+configuration,,, libc, The GNU C Library Reference Manual}).
+
+Note that name services listed here must be visible to nscd.  This is
+achieved by passing the @code{#:name-services} argument to
+@code{nscd-service} the list of packages providing the needed name services
+(@pxref{Basisdienste, @code{nscd-service}}).
+
+@item reaction
+An action specified using the @code{lookup-specification} macro
+(@pxref{Actions in the NSS configuration,,, libc, The GNU C Library
+Reference Manual}).  For example:
+
+@example
+(lookup-specification (unavailable => continue)
+                      (success => return))
+@end example
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@node Initiale RAM-Disk
+@subsection Initiale RAM-Disk
+
+@cindex initrd
+@cindex initial RAM disk
+For bootstrapping purposes, the Linux-Libre kernel is passed an @dfn{initial
+RAM disk}, or @dfn{initrd}.  An initrd contains a temporary root file system
+as well as an initialization script.  The latter is responsible for mounting
+the real root file system, and for loading any kernel modules that may be
+needed to achieve that.
+
+The @code{initrd-modules} field of an @code{operating-system} declaration
+allows you to specify Linux-libre kernel modules that must be available in
+the initrd.  In particular, this is where you would list modules needed to
+actually drive the hard disk where your root partition is---although the
+default value of @code{initrd-modules} should cover most use cases.  For
+example, assuming you need the @code{megaraid_sas} module in addition to the
+default modules to be able to access your root file system, you would write:
+
+@example
+(operating-system
+  ;; @dots{}
+  (initrd-modules (cons "megaraid_sas" %base-initrd-modules)))
+@end example
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %base-initrd-modules
+This is the list of kernel modules included in the initrd by default.
+@end defvr
+
+Furthermore, if you need lower-level customization, the @code{initrd} field
+of an @code{operating-system} declaration allows you to specify which initrd
+you would like to use.  The @code{(gnu system linux-initrd)} module provides
+three ways to build an initrd: the high-level @code{base-initrd} procedure
+and the low-level @code{raw-initrd} and @code{expression->initrd}
+procedures.
+
+The @code{base-initrd} procedure is intended to cover most common uses.  For
+example, if you want to add a bunch of kernel modules to be loaded at boot
+time, you can define the @code{initrd} field of the operating system
+declaration like this:
+
+@example
+(initrd (lambda (file-systems . rest)
+          ;; Create a standard initrd but set up networking
+          ;; with the parameters QEMU expects by default.
+          (apply base-initrd file-systems
+                 #:qemu-networking? #t
+                 rest)))
+@end example
+
+The @code{base-initrd} procedure also handles common use cases that involves
+using the system as a QEMU guest, or as a ``live'' system with volatile root
+file system.
+
+The @code{base-initrd} procedure is built from @code{raw-initrd} procedure.
+Unlike @code{base-initrd}, @code{raw-initrd} doesn't do anything high-level,
+such as trying to guess which kernel modules and packages should be included
+to the initrd. An example use of @code{raw-initrd} is when a user has a
+custom Linux kernel configuration and default kernel modules included by
+@code{base-initrd} are not available.
+
+The initial RAM disk produced by @code{base-initrd} or @code{raw-initrd}
+honors several options passed on the Linux kernel command line (that is,
+arguments passed @i{via} the @code{linux} command of GRUB, or the
+@code{-append} option of QEMU), notably:
+
+@table @code
+@item --load=@var{boot}
+Tell the initial RAM disk to load @var{boot}, a file containing a Scheme
+program, once it has mounted the root file system.
+
+GuixSD uses this option to yield control to a boot program that runs the
+service activation programs and then spawns the GNU@tie{}Shepherd, the
+initialization system.
+
+@item --root=@var{root}
+Mount @var{root} as the root file system.  @var{root} can be a device name
+like @code{/dev/sda1}, a file system label, or a file system UUID.
+
+@item --system=@var{System}
+Have @file{/run/booted-system} and @file{/run/current-system} point to
+@var{system}.
+
+@item modprobe.blacklist=@var{modules}@dots{}
+@cindex module, black-listing
+@cindex black list, of kernel modules
+Instruct the initial RAM disk as well as the @command{modprobe} command
+(from the kmod package) to refuse to load @var{modules}.  @var{modules} must
+be a comma-separated list of module names---e.g., @code{usbkbd,9pnet}.
+
+@item --repl
+Start a read-eval-print loop (REPL) from the initial RAM disk before it
+tries to load kernel modules and to mount the root file system.  Our
+marketing team calls it @dfn{boot-to-Guile}.  The Schemer in you will love
+it.  @xref{Using Guile Interactively,,, guile, GNU Guile Reference Manual},
+for more information on Guile's REPL.
+
+@end table
+
+Now that you know all the features that initial RAM disks produced by
+@code{base-initrd} and @code{raw-initrd} provide, here is how to use it and
+customize it further.
+
+@cindex initrd
+@cindex initial RAM disk
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} raw-initrd @var{file-systems} @
+       [#:linux-modules '()] [#:mapped-devices '()] @ [#:helper-packages '()]
+[#:qemu-networking? #f] [#:volatile-root? #f] Return a derivation that
+builds a raw initrd.  @var{file-systems} is a list of file systems to be
+mounted by the initrd, possibly in addition to the root file system
+specified on the kernel command line via @code{--root}.  @var{linux-modules}
+is a list of kernel modules to be loaded at boot time.  @var{mapped-devices}
+is a list of device mappings to realize before @var{file-systems} are
+mounted (@pxref{Abgebildete Geräte}).  @var{helper-packages} is a list of
+packages to be copied in the initrd. It may include @code{e2fsck/static} or
+other packages needed by the initrd to check the root file system.
+
+When @var{qemu-networking?} is true, set up networking with the standard
+QEMU parameters.  When @var{virtio?} is true, load additional modules so
+that the initrd can be used as a QEMU guest with para-virtualized I/O
+drivers.
+
+When @var{volatile-root?} is true, the root file system is writable but any
+changes to it are lost.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} base-initrd @var{file-systems} @
+       [#:mapped-devices '()] [#:qemu-networking? #f] [#:volatile-root? #f]@
+[#:linux-modules '()] Return as a file-like object a generic initrd, with
+kernel modules taken from @var{linux}.  @var{file-systems} is a list of
+file-systems to be mounted by the initrd, possibly in addition to the root
+file system specified on the kernel command line via @code{--root}.
+@var{mapped-devices} is a list of device mappings to realize before
+@var{file-systems} are mounted.
+
+@var{qemu-networking?} and @var{volatile-root?} behaves as in
+@code{raw-initrd}.
+
+The initrd is automatically populated with all the kernel modules necessary
+for @var{file-systems} and for the given options.  Additional kernel modules
+can be listed in @var{linux-modules}.  They will be added to the initrd, and
+loaded at boot time in the order in which they appear.
+@end deffn
+
+Needless to say, the initrds we produce and use embed a statically-linked
+Guile, and the initialization program is a Guile program.  That gives a lot
+of flexibility.  The @code{expression->initrd} procedure builds such an
+initrd, given the program to run in that initrd.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} expression->initrd @var{exp} @
+       [#:guile %guile-static-stripped] [#:name "guile-initrd"] Return as a
+file-like object a Linux initrd (a gzipped cpio archive)  containing
+@var{guile} and that evaluates @var{exp}, a G-expression, upon booting.  All
+the derivations referenced by @var{exp} are automatically copied to the
+initrd.
+@end deffn
+
+@node Bootloader-Konfiguration
+@subsection Bootloader-Konfiguration
+
+@cindex bootloader
+@cindex boot loader
+
+The operating system supports multiple bootloaders.  The bootloader is
+configured using @code{bootloader-configuration} declaration.  All the
+fields of this structure are bootloader agnostic except for one field,
+@code{bootloader} that indicates the bootloader to be configured and
+installed.
+
+Some of the bootloaders do not honor every field of
+@code{bootloader-configuration}.  For instance, the extlinux bootloader does
+not support themes and thus ignores the @code{theme} field.
+
+@deftp {Data Type} bootloader-configuration
+The type of a bootloader configuration declaration.
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @code{bootloader}
+@cindex EFI, bootloader
+@cindex UEFI, bootloader
+@cindex BIOS, bootloader
+The bootloader to use, as a @code{bootloader} object. For now
+@code{grub-bootloader}, @code{grub-efi-bootloader},
+@code{extlinux-bootloader} and @code{u-boot-bootloader} are supported.
+
+@vindex grub-efi-bootloader
+@code{grub-efi-bootloader} allows to boot on modern systems using the
+@dfn{Unified Extensible Firmware Interface} (UEFI).  This is what you should
+use if the installation image contains a @file{/sys/firmware/efi} directory
+when you boot it on your system.
+
+@vindex grub-bootloader
+@code{grub-bootloader} allows you to boot in particular Intel-based machines
+in ``legacy'' BIOS mode.
+
+@cindex ARM, bootloaders
+@cindex AArch64, bootloaders
+Available bootloaders are described in @code{(gnu bootloader @dots{})}
+modules.  In particular, @code{(gnu bootloader u-boot)} contains definitions
+of bootloaders for a wide range of ARM and AArch64 systems, using the
+@uref{http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot/, U-Boot bootloader}.
+
+@item @code{target}
+This is a string denoting the target onto which to install the bootloader.
+
+The interpretation depends on the bootloader in question.  For
+@code{grub-bootloader}, for example, it should be a device name understood
+by the bootloader @command{installer} command, such as @code{/dev/sda} or
+@code{(hd0)} (@pxref{Invoking grub-install,,, grub, GNU GRUB Manual}).  For
+@code{grub-efi-bootloader}, it should be the mount point of the EFI file
+system, usually @file{/boot/efi}.
+
+@item @code{menu-entries} (default: @code{()})
+A possibly empty list of @code{menu-entry} objects (see below), denoting
+entries to appear in the bootloader menu, in addition to the current system
+entry and the entry pointing to previous system generations.
+
+@item @code{default-entry} (default: @code{0})
+The index of the default boot menu entry.  Index 0 is for the entry of the
+current system.
+
+@item @code{timeout} (default: @code{5})
+The number of seconds to wait for keyboard input before booting.  Set to 0
+to boot immediately, and to -1 to wait indefinitely.
+
+@item @code{theme} (default: @var{#f})
+The bootloader theme object describing the theme to use.  If no theme is
+provided, some bootloaders might use a default theme, that's true for GRUB.
+
+@item @code{terminal-outputs} (default: @code{'gfxterm})
+The output terminals used for the bootloader boot menu, as a list of
+symbols.  GRUB accepts the values: @code{console}, @code{serial},
+@code{serial_@{0-3@}}, @code{gfxterm}, @code{vga_text}, @code{mda_text},
+@code{morse}, and @code{pkmodem}.  This field corresponds to the GRUB
+variable @code{GRUB_TERMINAL_OUTPUT} (@pxref{Simple configuration,,,
+grub,GNU GRUB manual}).
+
+@item @code{terminal-inputs} (default: @code{'()})
+The input terminals used for the bootloader boot menu, as a list of
+symbols.  For GRUB, the default is the native platform terminal as
+determined at run-time.  GRUB accepts the values: @code{console},
+@code{serial}, @code{serial_@{0-3@}}, @code{at_keyboard}, and
+@code{usb_keyboard}.  This field corresponds to the GRUB variable
+@code{GRUB_TERMINAL_INPUT} (@pxref{Simple configuration,,, grub,GNU GRUB
+manual}).
+
+@item @code{serial-unit} (default: @code{#f})
+The serial unit used by the bootloader, as an integer from 0 to 3.  For
+GRUB, it is chosen at run-time; currently GRUB chooses 0, which corresponds
+to COM1 (@pxref{Serial terminal,,, grub,GNU GRUB manual}).
+
+@item @code{serial-speed} (default: @code{#f})
+The speed of the serial interface, as an integer.  For GRUB, the default
+value is chosen at run-time; currently GRUB chooses 9600@tie{}bps
+(@pxref{Serial terminal,,, grub,GNU GRUB manual}).
+@end table
+
+@end deftp
+
+@cindex dual boot
+@cindex boot menu
+Should you want to list additional boot menu entries @i{via} the
+@code{menu-entries} field above, you will need to create them with the
+@code{menu-entry} form.  For example, imagine you want to be able to boot
+another distro (hard to imagine!), you can define a menu entry along these
+lines:
+
+@example
+(menu-entry
+  (label "The Other Distro")
+  (linux "/boot/old/vmlinux-2.6.32")
+  (linux-arguments '("root=/dev/sda2"))
+  (initrd "/boot/old/initrd"))
+@end example
+
+Details below.
+
+@deftp {Data Type} menu-entry
+The type of an entry in the bootloader menu.
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @code{label}
+The label to show in the menu---e.g., @code{"GNU"}.
+
+@item @code{linux}
+The Linux kernel image to boot, for example:
+
+@example
+(file-append linux-libre "/bzImage")
+@end example
+
+For GRUB, it is also possible to specify a device explicitly in the file
+path using GRUB's device naming convention (@pxref{Naming convention,,,
+grub, GNU GRUB manual}), for example:
+
+@example
+"(hd0,msdos1)/boot/vmlinuz"
+@end example
+
+If the device is specified explicitly as above, then the @code{device} field
+is ignored entirely.
+
+@item @code{linux-arguments} (default: @code{()})
+The list of extra Linux kernel command-line arguments---e.g.,
+@code{("console=ttyS0")}.
+
+@item @code{initrd}
+A G-Expression or string denoting the file name of the initial RAM disk to
+use (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke}).
+@item @code{device} (default: @code{#f})
+The device where the kernel and initrd are to be found---i.e., for GRUB,
+@dfn{root} for this menu entry (@pxref{root,,, grub, GNU GRUB manual}).
+
+This may be a file system label (a string), a file system UUID (a
+bytevector, @pxref{Dateisysteme}), or @code{#f}, in which case the
+bootloader will search the device containing the file specified by the
+@code{linux} field (@pxref{search,,, grub, GNU GRUB manual}).  It must
+@emph{not} be an OS device name such as @file{/dev/sda1}.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@c FIXME: Write documentation once it's stable.
+Fow now only GRUB has theme support. GRUB themes are created using the
+@code{grub-theme} form, which is not documented yet.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %default-theme
+This is the default GRUB theme used by the operating system if no
+@code{theme} field is specified in @code{bootloader-configuration} record.
+
+It comes with a fancy background image displaying the GNU and Guix logos.
+@end defvr
+
+
+@node Aufruf von guix system
+@subsection Invoking @code{guix system}
+
+Once you have written an operating system declaration as seen in the
+previous section, it can be @dfn{instantiated} using the @command{guix
+system} command.  The synopsis is:
+
+@example
+guix system @var{options}@dots{} @var{action} @var{file}
+@end example
+
+@var{file} must be the name of a file containing an @code{operating-system}
+declaration.  @var{action} specifies how the operating system is
+instantiated.  Currently the following values are supported:
+
+@table @code
+@item search
+Display available service type definitions that match the given regular
+expressions, sorted by relevance:
+
+@example
+$ guix system search console font
+name: console-fonts
+location: gnu/services/base.scm:729:2
+extends: shepherd-root
+description: Install the given fonts on the specified ttys (fonts are
++ per virtual console on GNU/Linux).  The value of this service is a list
++ of tty/font pairs like:
++ 
++      '(("tty1" . "LatGrkCyr-8x16"))
+relevance: 20
+
+name: mingetty
+location: gnu/services/base.scm:1048:2
+extends: shepherd-root
+description: Provide console login using the `mingetty' program.
+relevance: 2
+
+name: login
+location: gnu/services/base.scm:775:2
+extends: pam
+description: Provide a console log-in service as specified by its
++ configuration value, a `login-configuration' object.
+relevance: 2
+
+@dots{}
+@end example
+
+As for @command{guix package --search}, the result is written in
+@code{recutils} format, which makes it easy to filter the output
+(@pxref{Top, GNU recutils databases,, recutils, GNU recutils manual}).
+
+@item reconfigure
+Build the operating system described in @var{file}, activate it, and switch
+to it@footnote{This action (and the related actions @code{switch-generation}
+and @code{roll-back}) are usable only on systems already running GuixSD.}.
+
+This effects all the configuration specified in @var{file}: user accounts,
+system services, global package list, setuid programs, etc.  The command
+starts system services specified in @var{file} that are not currently
+running; if a service is currently running this command will arrange for it
+to be upgraded the next time it is stopped (e.g.@: by @code{herd stop X} or
+@code{herd restart X}).
+
+This command creates a new generation whose number is one greater than the
+current generation (as reported by @command{guix system list-generations}).
+If that generation already exists, it will be overwritten.  This behavior
+mirrors that of @command{guix package} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}).
+
+It also adds a bootloader menu entry for the new OS configuration, ---unless
+@option{--no-bootloader} is passed.  For GRUB, it moves entries for older
+configurations to a submenu, allowing you to choose an older system
+generation at boot time should you need it.
+
+@quotation Anmerkung
+@c The paragraph below refers to the problem discussed at
+@c <http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/guix-devel/2014-08/msg00057.html>.
+It is highly recommended to run @command{guix pull} once before you run
+@command{guix system reconfigure} for the first time (@pxref{Aufruf von guix pull}).  Failing to do that you would see an older version of Guix once
+@command{reconfigure} has completed.
+@end quotation
+
+@item switch-generation
+@cindex Generationen
+Switch to an existing system generation.  This action atomically switches
+the system profile to the specified system generation.  It also rearranges
+the system's existing bootloader menu entries.  It makes the menu entry for
+the specified system generation the default, and it moves the entries for
+the other generatiors to a submenu, if supported by the bootloader being
+used.  The next time the system boots, it will use the specified system
+generation.
+
+The bootloader itself is not being reinstalled when using this command.
+Thus, the installed bootloader is used with an updated configuration file.
+
+The target generation can be specified explicitly by its generation number.
+For example, the following invocation would switch to system generation 7:
+
+@example
+guix system switch-generation 7
+@end example
+
+The target generation can also be specified relative to the current
+generation with the form @code{+N} or @code{-N}, where @code{+3} means ``3
+generations ahead of the current generation,'' and @code{-1} means ``1
+generation prior to the current generation.'' When specifying a negative
+value such as @code{-1}, you must precede it with @code{--} to prevent it
+from being parsed as an option.  For example:
+
+@example
+guix system switch-generation -- -1
+@end example
+
+Currently, the effect of invoking this action is @emph{only} to switch the
+system profile to an existing generation and rearrange the bootloader menu
+entries.  To actually start using the target system generation, you must
+reboot after running this action.  In the future, it will be updated to do
+the same things as @command{reconfigure}, like activating and deactivating
+services.
+
+This action will fail if the specified generation does not exist.
+
+@item roll-back
+@cindex rücksetzen
+Switch to the preceding system generation.  The next time the system boots,
+it will use the preceding system generation.  This is the inverse of
+@command{reconfigure}, and it is exactly the same as invoking
+@command{switch-generation} with an argument of @code{-1}.
+
+Currently, as with @command{switch-generation}, you must reboot after
+running this action to actually start using the preceding system generation.
+
+@item build
+Build the derivation of the operating system, which includes all the
+configuration files and programs needed to boot and run the system.  This
+action does not actually install anything.
+
+@item init
+Populate the given directory with all the files necessary to run the
+operating system specified in @var{file}.  This is useful for first-time
+installations of GuixSD.  For instance:
+
+@example
+guix system init my-os-config.scm /mnt
+@end example
+
+copies to @file{/mnt} all the store items required by the configuration
+specified in @file{my-os-config.scm}.  This includes configuration files,
+packages, and so on.  It also creates other essential files needed for the
+system to operate correctly---e.g., the @file{/etc}, @file{/var}, and
+@file{/run} directories, and the @file{/bin/sh} file.
+
+This command also installs bootloader on the target specified in
+@file{my-os-config}, unless the @option{--no-bootloader} option was passed.
+
+@item vm
+@cindex virtual machine
+@cindex VM
+@anchor{guix system vm}
+Build a virtual machine that contains the operating system declared in
+@var{file}, and return a script to run that virtual machine (VM).  Arguments
+given to the script are passed to QEMU as in the example below, which
+enables networking and requests 1@tie{}GiB of RAM for the emulated machine:
+
+@example
+$ /gnu/store/@dots{}-run-vm.sh -m 1024 -net user
+@end example
+
+The VM shares its store with the host system.
+
+Additional file systems can be shared between the host and the VM using the
+@code{--share} and @code{--expose} command-line options: the former
+specifies a directory to be shared with write access, while the latter
+provides read-only access to the shared directory.
+
+The example below creates a VM in which the user's home directory is
+accessible read-only, and where the @file{/exchange} directory is a
+read-write mapping of @file{$HOME/tmp} on the host:
+
+@example
+guix system vm my-config.scm \
+   --expose=$HOME --share=$HOME/tmp=/exchange
+@end example
+
+On GNU/Linux, the default is to boot directly to the kernel; this has the
+advantage of requiring only a very tiny root disk image since the store of
+the host can then be mounted.
+
+The @code{--full-boot} option forces a complete boot sequence, starting with
+the bootloader.  This requires more disk space since a root image containing
+at least the kernel, initrd, and bootloader data files must be created.  The
+@code{--image-size} option can be used to specify the size of the image.
+
+@cindex System images, creation in various formats
+@cindex Creating system images in various formats
+@item vm-image
+@itemx disk-image
+@itemx docker-image
+Return a virtual machine, disk image, or Docker image of the operating
+system declared in @var{file} that stands alone.  By default, @command{guix
+system} estimates the size of the image needed to store the system, but you
+can use the @option{--image-size} option to specify a value.  Docker images
+are built to contain exactly what they need, so the @option{--image-size}
+option is ignored in the case of @code{docker-image}.
+
+You can specify the root file system type by using the
+@option{--file-system-type} option.  It defaults to @code{ext4}.
+
+When using @code{vm-image}, the returned image is in qcow2 format, which the
+QEMU emulator can efficiently use. @xref{GuixSD in einer VM starten}, for more
+information on how to run the image in a virtual machine.
+
+When using @code{disk-image}, a raw disk image is produced; it can be copied
+as is to a USB stick, for instance.  Assuming @code{/dev/sdc} is the device
+corresponding to a USB stick, one can copy the image to it using the
+following command:
+
+@example
+# dd if=$(guix system disk-image my-os.scm) of=/dev/sdc
+@end example
+
+When using @code{docker-image}, a Docker image is produced.  Guix builds the
+image from scratch, not from a pre-existing Docker base image.  As a result,
+it contains @emph{exactly} what you define in the operating system
+configuration file.  You can then load the image and launch a Docker
+container using commands like the following:
+
+@example
+image_id="$(docker load < guixsd-docker-image.tar.gz)"
+docker run -e GUIX_NEW_SYSTEM=/var/guix/profiles/system \\
+    --entrypoint /var/guix/profiles/system/profile/bin/guile \\
+    $image_id /var/guix/profiles/system/boot
+@end example
+
+This command starts a new Docker container from the specified image.  It
+will boot the GuixSD system in the usual manner, which means it will start
+any services you have defined in the operating system configuration.
+Depending on what you run in the Docker container, it may be necessary to
+give the container additional permissions.  For example, if you intend to
+build software using Guix inside of the Docker container, you may need to
+pass the @option{--privileged} option to @code{docker run}.
+
+@item container
+Return a script to run the operating system declared in @var{file} within a
+container.  Containers are a set of lightweight isolation mechanisms
+provided by the kernel Linux-libre.  Containers are substantially less
+resource-demanding than full virtual machines since the kernel, shared
+objects, and other resources can be shared with the host system; this also
+means they provide thinner isolation.
+
+Currently, the script must be run as root in order to support more than a
+single user and group.  The container shares its store with the host system.
+
+As with the @code{vm} action (@pxref{guix system vm}), additional file
+systems to be shared between the host and container can be specified using
+the @option{--share} and @option{--expose} options:
+
+@example
+guix system container my-config.scm \
+   --expose=$HOME --share=$HOME/tmp=/exchange
+@end example
+
+@quotation Anmerkung
+This option requires Linux-libre 3.19 or newer.
+@end quotation
+
+@end table
+
+@var{options} can contain any of the common build options (@pxref{Gemeinsame Erstellungsoptionen}).  In addition, @var{options} can contain one of the
+following:
+
+@table @option
+@item --expression=@var{expr}
+@itemx -e @var{expr}
+Consider the operating-system @var{expr} evaluates to.  This is an
+alternative to specifying a file which evaluates to an operating system.
+This is used to generate the GuixSD installer @pxref{Ein Abbild zur Installation erstellen}).
+
+@item --system=@var{System}
+@itemx -s @var{system}
+Attempt to build for @var{system} instead of the host system type.  This
+works as per @command{guix build} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix build}).
+
+@item --derivation
+@itemx -d
+Return the derivation file name of the given operating system without
+building anything.
+
+@item --file-system-type=@var{type}
+@itemx -t @var{type}
+For the @code{disk-image} action, create a file system of the given
+@var{type} on the image.
+
+When this option is omitted, @command{guix system} uses @code{ext4}.
+
+@cindex ISO-9660 format
+@cindex CD image format
+@cindex DVD image format
+@code{--file-system-type=iso9660} produces an ISO-9660 image, suitable for
+burning on CDs and DVDs.
+
+@item --image-size=@var{size}
+For the @code{vm-image} and @code{disk-image} actions, create an image of
+the given @var{size}.  @var{size} may be a number of bytes, or it may
+include a unit as a suffix (@pxref{Block size, size specifications,,
+coreutils, GNU Coreutils}).
+
+When this option is omitted, @command{guix system} computes an estimate of
+the image size as a function of the size of the system declared in
+@var{file}.
+
+@item --root=@var{file}
+@itemx -r @var{file}
+Make @var{file} a symlink to the result, and register it as a garbage
+collector root.
+
+@item --skip-checks
+Skip pre-installation safety checks.
+
+By default, @command{guix system init} and @command{guix system reconfigure}
+perform safety checks: they make sure the file systems that appear in the
+@code{operating-system} declaration actually exist (@pxref{Dateisysteme}),
+and that any Linux kernel modules that may be needed at boot time are listed
+in @code{initrd-modules} (@pxref{Initiale RAM-Disk}).  Passing this option
+skips these tests altogether.
+
+@item --on-error=@var{strategy}
+Apply @var{strategy} when an error occurs when reading @var{file}.
+@var{strategy} may be one of the following:
+
+@table @code
+@item nothing-special
+Report the error concisely and exit.  This is the default strategy.
+
+@item backtrace
+Likewise, but also display a backtrace.
+
+@item debug
+Report the error and enter Guile's debugger.  From there, you can run
+commands such as @code{,bt} to get a backtrace, @code{,locals} to display
+local variable values, and more generally inspect the state of the program.
+@xref{Debug Commands,,, guile, GNU Guile Reference Manual}, for a list of
+available debugging commands.
+@end table
+@end table
+
+@quotation Anmerkung
+All the actions above, except @code{build} and @code{init}, can use KVM
+support in the Linux-libre kernel.  Specifically, if the machine has
+hardware virtualization support, the corresponding KVM kernel module should
+be loaded, and the @file{/dev/kvm} device node must exist and be readable
+and writable by the user and by the build users of the daemon (@pxref{Einrichten der Erstellungsumgebung}).
+@end quotation
+
+Once you have built, configured, re-configured, and re-re-configured your
+GuixSD installation, you may find it useful to list the operating system
+generations available on disk---and that you can choose from the bootloader
+boot menu:
+
+@table @code
+
+@item list-generations
+List a summary of each generation of the operating system available on disk,
+in a human-readable way.  This is similar to the @option{--list-generations}
+option of @command{guix package} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}).
+
+Optionally, one can specify a pattern, with the same syntax that is used in
+@command{guix package --list-generations}, to restrict the list of
+generations displayed.  For instance, the following command displays
+generations that are up to 10 days old:
+
+@example
+$ guix system list-generations 10d
+@end example
+
+@end table
+
+The @command{guix system} command has even more to offer! The following
+sub-commands allow you to visualize how your system services relate to each
+other:
+
+@anchor{system-extension-graph}
+@table @code
+
+@item extension-graph
+Emit in Dot/Graphviz format to standard output the @dfn{service extension
+graph} of the operating system defined in @var{file} (@pxref{Dienstkompositionen}, for more information on service extensions.)
+
+The command:
+
+@example
+$ guix system extension-graph @var{file} | dot -Tpdf > services.pdf
+@end example
+
+produces a PDF file showing the extension relations among services.
+
+@anchor{system-shepherd-graph}
+@item shepherd-graph
+Emit in Dot/Graphviz format to standard output the @dfn{dependency graph} of
+shepherd services of the operating system defined in @var{file}.
+@xref{Shepherd-Dienste}, for more information and for an example graph.
+
+@end table
+
+@node GuixSD in einer VM starten
+@subsection Running GuixSD in a Virtual Machine
+
+@cindex virtual machine
+To run GuixSD in a virtual machine (VM), one can either use the pre-built
+GuixSD VM image distributed at
+@indicateurl{https://alpha.gnu.org/gnu/guix/guixsd-vm-image-@value{VERSION}.@var{system}.xz}
+, or build their own virtual machine image using @command{guix system
+vm-image} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix system}).  The returned image is in qcow2
+format, which the @uref{http://qemu.org/, QEMU emulator} can efficiently
+use.
+
+@cindex QEMU
+If you built your own image, you must copy it out of the store (@pxref{Der Store}) and give yourself permission to write to the copy before you can use
+it.  When invoking QEMU, you must choose a system emulator that is suitable
+for your hardware platform.  Here is a minimal QEMU invocation that will
+boot the result of @command{guix system vm-image} on x86_64 hardware:
+
+@example
+$ qemu-system-x86_64 \
+   -net user -net nic,model=virtio \
+   -enable-kvm -m 256 /tmp/qemu-image
+@end example
+
+Here is what each of these options means:
+
+@table @code
+@item qemu-system-x86_64
+This specifies the hardware platform to emulate.  This should match the
+host.
+
+@item -net user
+Enable the unprivileged user-mode network stack.  The guest OS can access
+the host but not vice versa.  This is the simplest way to get the guest OS
+online.
+
+@item -net nic,model=virtio
+You must create a network interface of a given model.  If you do not create
+a NIC, the boot will fail.  Assuming your hardware platform is x86_64, you
+can get a list of available NIC models by running
+@command{qemu-system-x86_64 -net nic,model=help}.
+
+@item -enable-kvm
+If your system has hardware virtualization extensions, enabling the virtual
+machine support (KVM) of the Linux kernel will make things run faster.
+
+@item -m 256
+RAM available to the guest OS, in mebibytes.  Defaults to 128@tie{}MiB,
+which may be insufficient for some operations.
+
+@item /tmp/qemu-image
+The file name of the qcow2 image.
+@end table
+
+The default @command{run-vm.sh} script that is returned by an invocation of
+@command{guix system vm} does not add a @command{-net user} flag by
+default.  To get network access from within the vm add the
+@code{(dhcp-client-service)} to your system definition and start the VM
+using @command{`guix system vm config.scm` -net user}.  An important caveat
+of using @command{-net user} for networking is that @command{ping} will not
+work, because it uses the ICMP protocol.  You'll have to use a different
+command to check for network connectivity, for example @command{guix
+download}.
+
+@subsubsection Connecting Through SSH
+
+@cindex SSH
+@cindex SSH server
+To enable SSH inside a VM you need to add a SSH server like
+@code{(dropbear-service)} or @code{(lsh-service)} to your VM.  The
+@code{(lsh-service}) doesn't currently boot unsupervised.  It requires you
+to type some characters to initialize the randomness generator.  In addition
+you need to forward the SSH port, 22 by default, to the host.  You can do
+this with
+
+@example
+`guix system vm config.scm` -net user,hostfwd=tcp::10022-:22
+@end example
+
+To connect to the VM you can run
+
+@example
+ssh -o UserKnownHostsFile=/dev/null -o StrictHostKeyChecking=no -p 10022
+@end example
+
+The @command{-p} tells @command{ssh} the port you want to connect to.
+@command{-o UserKnownHostsFile=/dev/null} prevents @command{ssh} from
+complaining every time you modify your @command{config.scm} file and the
+@command{-o StrictHostKeyChecking=no} prevents you from having to allow a
+connection to an unknown host every time you connect.
+
+@subsubsection Using @command{virt-viewer} with Spice
+
+As an alternative to the default @command{qemu} graphical client you can use
+the @command{remote-viewer} from the @command{virt-viewer} package.  To
+connect pass the @command{-spice port=5930,disable-ticketing} flag to
+@command{qemu}.  See previous section for further information on how to do
+this.
+
+Spice also allows you to do some nice stuff like share your clipboard with
+your VM.  To enable that you'll also have to pass the following flags to
+@command{qemu}:
+
+@example
+-device virtio-serial-pci,id=virtio-serial0,max_ports=16,bus=pci.0,addr=0x5
+-chardev spicevmc,name=vdagent,id=vdagent
+-device virtserialport,nr=1,bus=virtio-serial0.0,chardev=vdagent,
+name=com.redhat.spice.0
+@end example
+
+You'll also need to add the @pxref{Verschiedene Dienste, Spice service}.
+
+@node Dienste definieren
+@subsection Dienste definieren
+
+The previous sections show the available services and how one can combine
+them in an @code{operating-system} declaration.  But how do we define them
+in the first place? And what is a service anyway?
+
+@menu
+* Dienstkompositionen::      Wie Dienste zusammengestellt werden.
+* Diensttypen und Dienste::  Typen und Dienste.
+* Service-Referenz::         Referenz zur Programmierschnittstelle.
+* Shepherd-Dienste::         Eine spezielle Art von Dienst.
+@end menu
+
+@node Dienstkompositionen
+@subsubsection Dienstkompositionen
+
+@cindex services
+@cindex daemons
+Here we define a @dfn{service} as, broadly, something that extends the
+functionality of the operating system.  Often a service is a process---a
+@dfn{daemon}---started when the system boots: a secure shell server, a Web
+server, the Guix build daemon, etc.  Sometimes a service is a daemon whose
+execution can be triggered by another daemon---e.g., an FTP server started
+by @command{inetd} or a D-Bus service activated by @command{dbus-daemon}.
+Occasionally, a service does not map to a daemon.  For instance, the
+``account'' service collects user accounts and makes sure they exist when
+the system runs; the ``udev'' service collects device management rules and
+makes them available to the eudev daemon; the @file{/etc} service populates
+the @file{/etc} directory of the system.
+
+@cindex service extensions
+GuixSD services are connected by @dfn{extensions}.  For instance, the secure
+shell service @emph{extends} the Shepherd---the GuixSD initialization
+system, running as PID@tie{}1---by giving it the command lines to start and
+stop the secure shell daemon (@pxref{Netzwerkdienste,
+@code{lsh-service}}); the UPower service extends the D-Bus service by
+passing it its @file{.service} specification, and extends the udev service
+by passing it device management rules (@pxref{Desktop-Dienste,
+@code{upower-service}}); the Guix daemon service extends the Shepherd by
+passing it the command lines to start and stop the daemon, and extends the
+account service by passing it a list of required build user accounts
+(@pxref{Basisdienste}).
+
+All in all, services and their ``extends'' relations form a directed acyclic
+graph (DAG).  If we represent services as boxes and extensions as arrows, a
+typical system might provide something like this:
+
+@image{images/service-graph,,5in,Typical service extension graph.}
+
+@cindex system service
+At the bottom, we see the @dfn{system service}, which produces the directory
+containing everything to run and boot the system, as returned by the
+@command{guix system build} command.  @xref{Service-Referenz}, to learn
+about the other service types shown here.  @xref{system-extension-graph, the
+@command{guix system extension-graph} command}, for information on how to
+generate this representation for a particular operating system definition.
+
+@cindex service types
+Technically, developers can define @dfn{service types} to express these
+relations.  There can be any number of services of a given type on the
+system---for instance, a system running two instances of the GNU secure
+shell server (lsh) has two instances of @var{lsh-service-type}, with
+different parameters.
+
+The following section describes the programming interface for service types
+and services.
+
+@node Diensttypen und Dienste
+@subsubsection Diensttypen und Dienste
+
+A @dfn{service type} is a node in the DAG described above.  Let us start
+with a simple example, the service type for the Guix build daemon
+(@pxref{Aufruf des guix-daemon}):
+
+@example
+(define guix-service-type
+  (service-type
+   (name 'guix)
+   (extensions
+    (list (service-extension shepherd-root-service-type guix-shepherd-service)
+          (service-extension account-service-type guix-accounts)
+          (service-extension activation-service-type guix-activation)))
+   (default-value (guix-configuration))))
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+It defines three things:
+
+@enumerate
+@item
+A name, whose sole purpose is to make inspection and debugging easier.
+
+@item
+A list of @dfn{service extensions}, where each extension designates the
+target service type and a procedure that, given the parameters of the
+service, returns a list of objects to extend the service of that type.
+
+Every service type has at least one service extension.  The only exception
+is the @dfn{boot service type}, which is the ultimate service.
+
+@item
+Optionally, a default value for instances of this type.
+@end enumerate
+
+In this example, @var{guix-service-type} extends three services:
+
+@table @var
+@item shepherd-root-service-type
+The @var{guix-shepherd-service} procedure defines how the Shepherd service
+is extended.  Namely, it returns a @code{<shepherd-service>} object that
+defines how @command{guix-daemon} is started and stopped (@pxref{Shepherd-Dienste}).
+
+@item account-service-type
+This extension for this service is computed by @var{guix-accounts}, which
+returns a list of @code{user-group} and @code{user-account} objects
+representing the build user accounts (@pxref{Aufruf des guix-daemon}).
+
+@item activation-service-type
+Here @var{guix-activation} is a procedure that returns a gexp, which is a
+code snippet to run at ``activation time''---e.g., when the service is
+booted.
+@end table
+
+A service of this type is instantiated like this:
+
+@example
+(service guix-service-type
+         (guix-configuration
+           (build-accounts 5)
+           (use-substitutes? #f)))
+@end example
+
+The second argument to the @code{service} form is a value representing the
+parameters of this specific service instance.
+@xref{guix-configuration-type, @code{guix-configuration}}, for information
+about the @code{guix-configuration} data type.  When the value is omitted,
+the default value specified by @code{guix-service-type} is used:
+
+@example
+(service guix-service-type)
+@end example
+
+@var{guix-service-type} is quite simple because it extends other services
+but is not extensible itself.
+
+@c @subsubsubsection Extensible Service Types
+
+The service type for an @emph{extensible} service looks like this:
+
+@example
+(define udev-service-type
+  (service-type (name 'udev)
+                (extensions
+                 (list (service-extension shepherd-root-service-type
+                                          udev-shepherd-service)))
+
+                (compose concatenate)       ;concatenate the list of rules
+                (extend (lambda (config rules)
+                          (match config
+                            (($ <udev-configuration> udev initial-rules)
+                             (udev-configuration
+                              (udev udev)   ;the udev package to use
+                              (rules (append initial-rules rules)))))))))
+@end example
+
+This is the service type for the
+@uref{https://wiki.gentoo.org/wiki/Project:Eudev, eudev device management
+daemon}.  Compared to the previous example, in addition to an extension of
+@var{shepherd-root-service-type}, we see two new fields:
+
+@table @code
+@item compose
+This is the procedure to @dfn{compose} the list of extensions to services of
+this type.
+
+Services can extend the udev service by passing it lists of rules; we
+compose those extensions simply by concatenating them.
+
+@item extend
+This procedure defines how the value of the service is @dfn{extended} with
+the composition of the extensions.
+
+Udev extensions are composed into a list of rules, but the udev service
+value is itself a @code{<udev-configuration>} record.  So here, we extend
+that record by appending the list of rules it contains to the list of
+contributed rules.
+
+@item description
+This is a string giving an overview of the service type.  The string can
+contain Texinfo markup (@pxref{Overview,,, texinfo, GNU Texinfo}).  The
+@command{guix system search} command searches these strings and displays
+them (@pxref{Aufruf von guix system}).
+@end table
+
+There can be only one instance of an extensible service type such as
+@var{udev-service-type}.  If there were more, the @code{service-extension}
+specifications would be ambiguous.
+
+Still here? The next section provides a reference of the programming
+interface for services.
+
+@node Service-Referenz
+@subsubsection Service-Referenz
+
+We have seen an overview of service types (@pxref{Diensttypen und Dienste}).  This section provides a reference on how to manipulate services
+and service types.  This interface is provided by the @code{(gnu services)}
+module.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} service @var{type} [@var{value}]
+Return a new service of @var{type}, a @code{<service-type>} object (see
+below.)  @var{value} can be any object; it represents the parameters of this
+particular service instance.
+
+When @var{value} is omitted, the default value specified by @var{type} is
+used; if @var{type} does not specify a default value, an error is raised.
+
+For instance, this:
+
+@example
+(service openssh-service-type)
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+is equivalent to this:
+
+@example
+(service openssh-service-type
+         (openssh-configuration))
+@end example
+
+In both cases the result is an instance of @code{openssh-service-type} with
+the default configuration.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} service? @var{obj}
+Return true if @var{obj} is a service.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} service-kind @var{service}
+Return the type of @var{service}---i.e., a @code{<service-type>} object.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} service-value @var{service}
+Return the value associated with @var{service}.  It represents its
+parameters.
+@end deffn
+
+Here is an example of how a service is created and manipulated:
+
+@example
+(define s
+  (service nginx-service-type
+           (nginx-configuration
+            (nginx nginx)
+            (log-directory log-directory)
+            (run-directory run-directory)
+            (file config-file))))
+
+(service? s)
+@result{} #t
+
+(eq? (service-kind s) nginx-service-type)
+@result{} #t
+@end example
+
+The @code{modify-services} form provides a handy way to change the
+parameters of some of the services of a list such as @var{%base-services}
+(@pxref{Basisdienste, @code{%base-services}}).  It evaluates to a list of
+services.  Of course, you could always use standard list combinators such as
+@code{map} and @code{fold} to do that (@pxref{SRFI-1, List Library,, guile,
+GNU Guile Reference Manual}); @code{modify-services} simply provides a more
+concise form for this common pattern.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Syntax} modify-services @var{services} @
+  (@var{type} @var{variable} => @var{body}) @dots{}
+
+Modify the services listed in @var{services} according to the given
+clauses.  Each clause has the form:
+
+@example
+(@var{type} @var{variable} => @var{body})
+@end example
+
+where @var{type} is a service type---e.g., @code{guix-service-type}---and
+@var{variable} is an identifier that is bound within the @var{body} to the
+service parameters---e.g., a @code{guix-configuration} instance---of the
+original service of that @var{type}.
+
+The @var{body} should evaluate to the new service parameters, which will be
+used to configure the new service.  This new service will replace the
+original in the resulting list.  Because a service's service parameters are
+created using @code{define-record-type*}, you can write a succinct
+@var{body} that evaluates to the new service parameters by using the
+@code{inherit} feature that @code{define-record-type*} provides.
+
+@xref{Das Konfigurationssystem nutzen}, for example usage.
+
+@end deffn
+
+Next comes the programming interface for service types.  This is something
+you want to know when writing new service definitions, but not necessarily
+when simply looking for ways to customize your @code{operating-system}
+declaration.
+
+@deftp {Data Type} service-type
+@cindex service type
+This is the representation of a @dfn{service type} (@pxref{Diensttypen und Dienste}).
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{name}
+This is a symbol, used only to simplify inspection and debugging.
+
+@item @code{extensions}
+A non-empty list of @code{<service-extension>} objects (see below).
+
+@item @code{compose} (default: @code{#f})
+If this is @code{#f}, then the service type denotes services that cannot be
+extended---i.e., services that do not receive ``values'' from other
+services.
+
+Otherwise, it must be a one-argument procedure.  The procedure is called by
+@code{fold-services} and is passed a list of values collected from
+extensions.  It may return any single value.
+
+@item @code{extend} (default: @code{#f})
+If this is @code{#f}, services of this type cannot be extended.
+
+Otherwise, it must be a two-argument procedure: @code{fold-services} calls
+it, passing it the initial value of the service as the first argument and
+the result of applying @code{compose} to the extension values as the second
+argument.  It must return a value that is a valid parameter value for the
+service instance.
+@end table
+
+@xref{Diensttypen und Dienste}, for examples.
+@end deftp
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} service-extension @var{target-type} @
+                              @var{compute} Return a new extension for services of type
+@var{target-type}.  @var{compute} must be a one-argument procedure:
+@code{fold-services} calls it, passing it the value associated with the
+service that provides the extension; it must return a valid value for the
+target service.
+@end deffn
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} service-extension? @var{obj}
+Return true if @var{obj} is a service extension.
+@end deffn
+
+Occasionally, you might want to simply extend an existing service.  This
+involves creating a new service type and specifying the extension of
+interest, which can be verbose; the @code{simple-service} procedure provides
+a shorthand for this.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} simple-service @var{name} @var{target} @var{value}
+Return a service that extends @var{target} with @var{value}.  This works by
+creating a singleton service type @var{name}, of which the returned service
+is an instance.
+
+For example, this extends mcron (@pxref{Geplante Auftragsausführung}) with an
+additional job:
+
+@example
+(simple-service 'my-mcron-job mcron-service-type
+                #~(job '(next-hour (3)) "guix gc -F 2G"))
+@end example
+@end deffn
+
+At the core of the service abstraction lies the @code{fold-services}
+procedure, which is responsible for ``compiling'' a list of services down to
+a single directory that contains everything needed to boot and run the
+system---the directory shown by the @command{guix system build} command
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix system}).  In essence, it propagates service
+extensions down the service graph, updating each node parameters on the way,
+until it reaches the root node.
+
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} fold-services @var{services} @
+                            [#:target-type @var{system-service-type}] Fold @var{services} by propagating
+their extensions down to the root of type @var{target-type}; return the root
+service adjusted accordingly.
+@end deffn
+
+Lastly, the @code{(gnu services)} module also defines several essential
+service types, some of which are listed below.
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} system-service-type
+This is the root of the service graph.  It produces the system directory as
+returned by the @command{guix system build} command.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} boot-service-type
+The type of the ``boot service'', which produces the @dfn{boot script}.  The
+boot script is what the initial RAM disk runs when booting.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} etc-service-type
+The type of the @file{/etc} service.  This service is used to create files
+under @file{/etc} and can be extended by passing it name/file tuples such
+as:
+
+@example
+(list `("issue" ,(plain-file "issue" "Welcome!\n")))
+@end example
+
+In this example, the effect would be to add an @file{/etc/issue} file
+pointing to the given file.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} setuid-program-service-type
+Type for the ``setuid-program service''.  This service collects lists of
+executable file names, passed as gexps, and adds them to the set of
+setuid-root programs on the system (@pxref{Setuid-Programme}).
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} profile-service-type
+Type of the service that populates the @dfn{system profile}---i.e., the
+programs under @file{/run/current-system/profile}.  Other services can
+extend it by passing it lists of packages to add to the system profile.
+@end defvr
+
+
+@node Shepherd-Dienste
+@subsubsection Shepherd-Dienste
+
+@cindex shepherd services
+@cindex PID 1
+@cindex init system
+The @code{(gnu services shepherd)} module provides a way to define services
+managed by the GNU@tie{}Shepherd, which is the GuixSD initialization
+system---the first process that is started when the system boots, also known
+as PID@tie{}1 (@pxref{Einführung,,, shepherd, The GNU Shepherd Manual}).
+
+Services in the Shepherd can depend on each other.  For instance, the SSH
+daemon may need to be started after the syslog daemon has been started,
+which in turn can only happen once all the file systems have been mounted.
+The simple operating system defined earlier (@pxref{Das Konfigurationssystem nutzen}) results in a service graph like this:
+
+@image{images/shepherd-graph,,5in,Typical shepherd service graph.}
+
+You can actually generate such a graph for any operating system definition
+using the @command{guix system shepherd-graph} command
+(@pxref{system-shepherd-graph, @command{guix system shepherd-graph}}).
+
+The @var{%shepherd-root-service} is a service object representing
+PID@tie{}1, of type @var{shepherd-root-service-type}; it can be extended by
+passing it lists of @code{<shepherd-service>} objects.
+
+@deftp {Data Type} shepherd-service
+The data type representing a service managed by the Shepherd.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{provision}
+This is a list of symbols denoting what the service provides.
+
+These are the names that may be passed to @command{herd start},
+@command{herd status}, and similar commands (@pxref{Invoking herd,,,
+shepherd, The GNU Shepherd Manual}).  @xref{Slots of services, the
+@code{provides} slot,, shepherd, The GNU Shepherd Manual}, for details.
+
+@item @code{requirements} (default: @code{'()})
+List of symbols denoting the Shepherd services this one depends on.
+
+@item @code{respawn?} (default: @code{#t})
+Whether to restart the service when it stops, for instance when the
+underlying process dies.
+
+@item @code{start}
+@itemx @code{stop} (default: @code{#~(const #f)})
+The @code{start} and @code{stop} fields refer to the Shepherd's facilities
+to start and stop processes (@pxref{Service De- and Constructors,,,
+shepherd, The GNU Shepherd Manual}).  They are given as G-expressions that
+get expanded in the Shepherd configuration file (@pxref{G-Ausdrücke}).
+
+@item @code{actions} (default: @code{'()})
+@cindex actions, of Shepherd services
+This is a list of @code{shepherd-action} objects (see below) defining
+@dfn{actions} supported by the service, in addition to the standard
+@code{start} and @code{stop} actions.  Actions listed here become available
+as @command{herd} sub-commands:
+
+@example
+herd @var{action} @var{service} [@var{arguments}@dots{}]
+@end example
+
+@item @code{Dokumentation}
+A documentation string, as shown when running:
+
+@example
+herd doc @var{service-name}
+@end example
+
+where @var{service-name} is one of the symbols in @var{provision}
+(@pxref{Invoking herd,,, shepherd, The GNU Shepherd Manual}).
+
+@item @code{modules} (default: @var{%default-modules})
+This is the list of modules that must be in scope when @code{start} and
+@code{stop} are evaluated.
+
+@end table
+@end deftp
+
+@deftp {Data Type} shepherd-action
+This is the data type that defines additional actions implemented by a
+Shepherd service (see above).
+
+@table @code
+@item name
+Symbol naming the action.
+
+@item Dokumentation
+This is a documentation string for the action.  It can be viewed by running:
+
+@example
+herd doc @var{service} action @var{action}
+@end example
+
+@item procedure
+This should be a gexp that evaluates to a procedure of at least one
+argument, which is the ``running value'' of the service (@pxref{Slots of
+services,,, shepherd, The GNU Shepherd Manual}).
+@end table
+
+The following example defines an action called @code{say-hello} that kindly
+greets the user:
+
+@example
+(shepherd-action
+  (name 'say-hello)
+  (documentation "Say hi!")
+  (procedure #~(lambda (running . args)
+                 (format #t "Hello, friend! arguments: ~s\n"
+                         args)
+                 #t)))
+@end example
+
+Assuming this action is added to the @code{example} service, then you can
+do:
+
+@example
+# herd say-hello example
+Hello, friend! arguments: ()
+# herd say-hello example a b c
+Hello, friend! arguments: ("a" "b" "c")
+@end example
+
+This, as you can see, is a fairly sophisticated way to say hello.
+@xref{Service Convenience,,, shepherd, The GNU Shepherd Manual}, for more
+info on actions.
+@end deftp
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} shepherd-root-service-type
+The service type for the Shepherd ``root service''---i.e., PID@tie{}1.
+
+This is the service type that extensions target when they want to create
+shepherd services (@pxref{Diensttypen und Dienste}, for an example).
+Each extension must pass a list of @code{<shepherd-service>}.
+@end defvr
+
+@defvr {Scheme Variable} %shepherd-root-service
+This service represents PID@tie{}1.
+@end defvr
+
+
+@node Dokumentation
+@section Dokumentation
+
+@cindex documentation, searching for
+@cindex searching for documentation
+@cindex Info, documentation format
+@cindex man pages
+@cindex manual pages
+In most cases packages installed with Guix come with documentation.  There
+are two main documentation formats: ``Info'', a browseable hypertext format
+used for GNU software, and ``manual pages'' (or ``man pages''), the linear
+documentation format traditionally found on Unix.  Info manuals are accessed
+with the @command{info} command or with Emacs, and man pages are accessed
+using @command{man}.
+
+You can look for documentation of software installed on your system by
+keyword.  For example, the following command searches for information about
+``TLS'' in Info manuals:
+
+@example
+$ info -k TLS
+"(emacs)Network Security" -- STARTTLS
+"(emacs)Network Security" -- TLS
+"(gnutls)Core TLS API" -- gnutls_certificate_set_verify_flags
+"(gnutls)Core TLS API" -- gnutls_certificate_set_verify_function
+@dots{}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The command below searches for the same keyword in man pages:
+
+@example
+$ man -k TLS
+SSL (7)              - OpenSSL SSL/TLS library
+certtool (1)         - GnuTLS certificate tool
+@dots {}
+@end example
+
+These searches are purely local to your computer so you have the guarantee
+that documentation you find corresponds to what you have actually installed,
+you can access it off-line, and your privacy is respected.
+
+Once you have these results, you can view the relevant documentation by
+running, say:
+
+@example
+$ info "(gnutls)Core TLS API"
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or:
+
+@example
+$ man certtool
+@end example
+
+Info manuals contain sections and indices as well as hyperlinks like those
+found in Web pages.  The @command{info} reader (@pxref{Top, Info reader,,
+info-stnd, Stand-alone GNU Info}) and its Emacs counterpart (@pxref{Misc
+Help,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}) provide intuitive key bindings to
+navigate manuals.  @xref{Getting Started,,, info, Info: An Introduction},
+for an introduction to Info navigation.
+
+@node Dateien zur Fehlersuche installieren
+@section Dateien zur Fehlersuche installieren
+
+@cindex debugging files
+Program binaries, as produced by the GCC compilers for instance, are
+typically written in the ELF format, with a section containing
+@dfn{debugging information}.  Debugging information is what allows the
+debugger, GDB, to map binary code to source code; it is required to debug a
+compiled program in good conditions.
+
+The problem with debugging information is that is takes up a fair amount of
+disk space.  For example, debugging information for the GNU C Library weighs
+in at more than 60 MiB.  Thus, as a user, keeping all the debugging info of
+all the installed programs is usually not an option.  Yet, space savings
+should not come at the cost of an impediment to debugging---especially in
+the GNU system, which should make it easier for users to exert their
+computing freedom (@pxref{GNU-Distribution}).
+
+Thankfully, the GNU Binary Utilities (Binutils) and GDB provide a mechanism
+that allows users to get the best of both worlds: debugging information can
+be stripped from the binaries and stored in separate files.  GDB is then
+able to load debugging information from those files, when they are available
+(@pxref{Separate Debug Files,,, gdb, Debugging with GDB}).
+
+The GNU distribution takes advantage of this by storing debugging
+information in the @code{lib/debug} sub-directory of a separate package
+output unimaginatively called @code{debug} (@pxref{Pakete mit mehreren Ausgaben.}).  Users can choose to install the @code{debug} output of a package
+when they need it.  For instance, the following command installs the
+debugging information for the GNU C Library and for GNU Guile:
+
+@example
+guix package -i glibc:debug guile:debug
+@end example
+
+GDB must then be told to look for debug files in the user's profile, by
+setting the @code{debug-file-directory} variable (consider setting it from
+the @file{~/.gdbinit} file, @pxref{Startup,,, gdb, Debugging with GDB}):
+
+@example
+(gdb) set debug-file-directory ~/.guix-profile/lib/debug
+@end example
+
+From there on, GDB will pick up debugging information from the @code{.debug}
+files under @file{~/.guix-profile/lib/debug}.
+
+In addition, you will most likely want GDB to be able to show the source
+code being debugged.  To do that, you will have to unpack the source code of
+the package of interest (obtained with @code{guix build --source},
+@pxref{Aufruf von guix build}), and to point GDB to that source directory
+using the @code{directory} command (@pxref{Source Path, @code{directory},,
+gdb, Debugging with GDB}).
+
+@c XXX: keep me up-to-date
+The @code{debug} output mechanism in Guix is implemented by the
+@code{gnu-build-system} (@pxref{Erstellungssysteme}).  Currently, it is
+opt-in---debugging information is available only for the packages with
+definitions explicitly declaring a @code{debug} output.  This may be changed
+to opt-out in the future if our build farm servers can handle the load.  To
+check whether a package has a @code{debug} output, use @command{guix package
+--list-available} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix package}).
+
+
+@node Sicherheitsaktualisierungen
+@section Sicherheitsaktualisierungen
+
+@cindex security updates
+@cindex security vulnerabilities
+Occasionally, important security vulnerabilities are discovered in software
+packages and must be patched.  Guix developers try hard to keep track of
+known vulnerabilities and to apply fixes as soon as possible in the
+@code{master} branch of Guix (we do not yet provide a ``stable'' branch
+containing only security updates.)  The @command{guix lint} tool helps
+developers find out about vulnerable versions of software packages in the
+distribution:
+
+@smallexample
+$ guix lint -c cve
+gnu/packages/base.scm:652:2: glibc@@2.21: probably vulnerable to CVE-2015-1781, CVE-2015-7547
+gnu/packages/gcc.scm:334:2: gcc@@4.9.3: probably vulnerable to CVE-2015-5276
+gnu/packages/image.scm:312:2: openjpeg@@2.1.0: probably vulnerable to CVE-2016-1923, CVE-2016-1924
+@dots{}
+@end smallexample
+
+@xref{Aufruf von guix lint}, for more information.
+
+@quotation Anmerkung
+As of version @value{VERSION}, the feature described below is considered
+``beta''.
+@end quotation
+
+Guix follows a functional package management discipline
+(@pxref{Einführung}), which implies that, when a package is changed,
+@emph{every package that depends on it} must be rebuilt.  This can
+significantly slow down the deployment of fixes in core packages such as
+libc or Bash, since basically the whole distribution would need to be
+rebuilt.  Using pre-built binaries helps (@pxref{Substitute}), but
+deployment may still take more time than desired.
+
+@cindex grafts
+To address this, Guix implements @dfn{grafts}, a mechanism that allows for
+fast deployment of critical updates without the costs associated with a
+whole-distribution rebuild.  The idea is to rebuild only the package that
+needs to be patched, and then to ``graft'' it onto packages explicitly
+installed by the user and that were previously referring to the original
+package.  The cost of grafting is typically very low, and order of
+magnitudes lower than a full rebuild of the dependency chain.
+
+@cindex replacements of packages, for grafts
+For instance, suppose a security update needs to be applied to Bash.  Guix
+developers will provide a package definition for the ``fixed'' Bash, say
+@var{bash-fixed}, in the usual way (@pxref{Pakete definieren}).  Then, the
+original package definition is augmented with a @code{replacement} field
+pointing to the package containing the bug fix:
+
+@example
+(define bash
+  (package
+    (name "bash")
+    ;; @dots{}
+    (replacement bash-fixed)))
+@end example
+
+From there on, any package depending directly or indirectly on Bash---as
+reported by @command{guix gc --requisites} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix gc})---that
+is installed is automatically ``rewritten'' to refer to @var{bash-fixed}
+instead of @var{bash}.  This grafting process takes time proportional to the
+size of the package, usually less than a minute for an ``average'' package
+on a recent machine.  Grafting is recursive: when an indirect dependency
+requires grafting, then grafting ``propagates'' up to the package that the
+user is installing.
+
+Currently, the length of the name and version of the graft and that of the
+package it replaces (@var{bash-fixed} and @var{bash} in the example above)
+must be equal.  This restriction mostly comes from the fact that grafting
+works by patching files, including binary files, directly.  Other
+restrictions may apply: for instance, when adding a graft to a package
+providing a shared library, the original shared library and its replacement
+must have the same @code{SONAME} and be binary-compatible.
+
+The @option{--no-grafts} command-line option allows you to forcefully avoid
+grafting (@pxref{Gemeinsame Erstellungsoptionen, @option{--no-grafts}}).  Thus, the
+command:
+
+@example
+guix build bash --no-grafts
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+returns the store file name of the original Bash, whereas:
+
+@example
+guix build bash
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+returns the store file name of the ``fixed'', replacement Bash.  This allows
+you to distinguish between the two variants of Bash.
+
+To verify which Bash your whole profile refers to, you can run
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix gc}):
+
+@example
+guix gc -R `readlink -f ~/.guix-profile` | grep bash
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+@dots{} and compare the store file names that you get with those above.
+Likewise for a complete GuixSD system generation:
+
+@example
+guix gc -R `guix system build my-config.scm` | grep bash
+@end example
+
+Lastly, to check which Bash running processes are using, you can use the
+@command{lsof} command:
+
+@example
+lsof | grep /gnu/store/.*bash
+@end example
+
+
+@node Paketmodule
+@section Paketmodule
+
+From a programming viewpoint, the package definitions of the GNU
+distribution are provided by Guile modules in the @code{(gnu packages
+@dots{})} name space@footnote{Note that packages under the @code{(gnu
+packages @dots{})} module name space are not necessarily ``GNU packages''.
+This module naming scheme follows the usual Guile module naming convention:
+@code{gnu} means that these modules are distributed as part of the GNU
+system, and @code{packages} identifies modules that define packages.}
+(@pxref{Module, Guile modules,, guile, GNU Guile Reference Manual}).  For
+instance, the @code{(gnu packages emacs)} module exports a variable named
+@code{emacs}, which is bound to a @code{<package>} object (@pxref{Pakete definieren}).
+
+The @code{(gnu packages @dots{})} module name space is automatically scanned
+for packages by the command-line tools.  For instance, when running
+@code{guix package -i emacs}, all the @code{(gnu packages @dots{})} modules
+are scanned until one that exports a package object whose name is
+@code{emacs} is found.  This package search facility is implemented in the
+@code{(gnu packages)} module.
+
+@cindex Anpassung, von Paketen
+@cindex package module search path
+Users can store package definitions in modules with different names---e.g.,
+@code{(my-packages emacs)}@footnote{Note that the file name and module name
+must match.  For instance, the @code{(my-packages emacs)} module must be
+stored in a @file{my-packages/emacs.scm} file relative to the load path
+specified with @option{--load-path} or @code{GUIX_PACKAGE_PATH}.
+@xref{Modules and the File System,,, guile, GNU Guile Reference Manual}, for
+details.}.  There are two ways to make these package definitions visible to
+the user interfaces:
+
+@enumerate
+@item
+By adding the directory containing your package modules to the search path
+with the @code{-L} flag of @command{guix package} and other commands
+(@pxref{Gemeinsame Erstellungsoptionen}), or by setting the @code{GUIX_PACKAGE_PATH}
+environment variable described below.
+
+@item
+By defining a @dfn{channel} and configuring @command{guix pull} so that it
+pulls from it.  A channel is essentially a Git repository containing package
+modules.  @xref{Channels}, for more information on how to define and use
+channels.
+@end enumerate
+
+@code{GUIX_PACKAGE_PATH} works similarly to other search path variables:
+
+@defvr {Environment Variable} GUIX_PACKAGE_PATH
+This is a colon-separated list of directories to search for additional
+package modules.  Directories listed in this variable take precedence over
+the own modules of the distribution.
+@end defvr
+
+The distribution is fully @dfn{bootstrapped} and @dfn{self-contained}: each
+package is built based solely on other packages in the distribution.  The
+root of this dependency graph is a small set of @dfn{bootstrap binaries},
+provided by the @code{(gnu packages bootstrap)} module.  For more
+information on bootstrapping, @pxref{Bootstrapping}.
+
+@node Paketrichtlinien
+@section Paketrichtlinien
+
+@cindex packages, creating
+The GNU distribution is nascent and may well lack some of your favorite
+packages.  This section describes how you can help make the distribution
+grow.  @xref{Mitwirken}, for additional information on how you can help.
+
+Free software packages are usually distributed in the form of @dfn{source
+code tarballs}---typically @file{tar.gz} files that contain all the source
+files.  Adding a package to the distribution means essentially two things:
+adding a @dfn{recipe} that describes how to build the package, including a
+list of other packages required to build it, and adding @dfn{package
+metadata} along with that recipe, such as a description and licensing
+information.
+
+In Guix all this information is embodied in @dfn{package definitions}.
+Package definitions provide a high-level view of the package.  They are
+written using the syntax of the Scheme programming language; in fact, for
+each package we define a variable bound to the package definition, and
+export that variable from a module (@pxref{Paketmodule}).  However,
+in-depth Scheme knowledge is @emph{not} a prerequisite for creating
+packages.  For more information on package definitions, @pxref{Pakete definieren}.
+
+Once a package definition is in place, stored in a file in the Guix source
+tree, it can be tested using the @command{guix build} command
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix build}).  For example, assuming the new package is
+called @code{gnew}, you may run this command from the Guix build tree
+(@pxref{Guix vor der Installation ausführen}):
+
+@example
+./pre-inst-env guix build gnew --keep-failed
+@end example
+
+Using @code{--keep-failed} makes it easier to debug build failures since it
+provides access to the failed build tree.  Another useful command-line
+option when debugging is @code{--log-file}, to access the build log.
+
+If the package is unknown to the @command{guix} command, it may be that the
+source file contains a syntax error, or lacks a @code{define-public} clause
+to export the package variable.  To figure it out, you may load the module
+from Guile to get more information about the actual error:
+
+@example
+./pre-inst-env guile -c '(use-modules (gnu packages gnew))'
+@end example
+
+Once your package builds correctly, please send us a patch
+(@pxref{Mitwirken}).  Well, if you need help, we will be happy to help
+you too.  Once the patch is committed in the Guix repository, the new
+package automatically gets built on the supported platforms by
+@url{http://hydra.gnu.org/jobset/gnu/master, our continuous integration
+system}.
+
+@cindex substituter
+Users can obtain the new package definition simply by running @command{guix
+pull} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix pull}).  When @code{hydra.gnu.org} is done
+building the package, installing the package automatically downloads
+binaries from there (@pxref{Substitute}).  The only place where human
+intervention is needed is to review and apply the patch.
+
+
+@menu
+* Software-Freiheit::        Was in die Distribution aufgenommen werden 
+                               darf.
+* Paketbenennung::           Was macht einen Namen aus?
+* Versionsnummern::          Wenn der Name noch nicht genug ist.
+* Zusammenfassungen und Beschreibungen::  Den Nutzern helfen, das richtige 
+                                            Paket zu finden.
+* Python-Module::            Ein Touch britischer Comedy.
+* Perl-Module::              Kleine Perlen.
+* Java-Pakete::              Kaffeepause.
+* Schriftarten::             Schriften verschriftlicht.
+@end menu
+
+@node Software-Freiheit
+@subsection Software-Freiheit
+
+@c Adapted from http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/philosophy.html.
+@cindex free software
+The GNU operating system has been developed so that users can have freedom
+in their computing.  GNU is @dfn{free software}, meaning that users have the
+@url{http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/free-sw.html,four essential freedoms}: to
+run the program, to study and change the program in source code form, to
+redistribute exact copies, and to distribute modified versions.  Packages
+found in the GNU distribution provide only software that conveys these four
+freedoms.
+
+In addition, the GNU distribution follow the
+@url{http://www.gnu.org/distros/free-system-distribution-guidelines.html,free
+software distribution guidelines}.  Among other things, these guidelines
+reject non-free firmware, recommendations of non-free software, and discuss
+ways to deal with trademarks and patents.
+
+Some otherwise free upstream package sources contain a small and optional
+subset that violates the above guidelines, for instance because this subset
+is itself non-free code.  When that happens, the offending items are removed
+with appropriate patches or code snippets in the @code{origin} form of the
+package (@pxref{Pakete definieren}).  This way, @code{guix build --source}
+returns the ``freed'' source rather than the unmodified upstream source.
+
+
+@node Paketbenennung
+@subsection Paketbenennung
+
+@cindex package name
+A package has actually two names associated with it: First, there is the
+name of the @emph{Scheme variable}, the one following @code{define-public}.
+By this name, the package can be made known in the Scheme code, for instance
+as input to another package.  Second, there is the string in the @code{name}
+field of a package definition.  This name is used by package management
+commands such as @command{guix package} and @command{guix build}.
+
+Both are usually the same and correspond to the lowercase conversion of the
+project name chosen upstream, with underscores replaced with hyphens.  For
+instance, GNUnet is available as @code{gnunet}, and SDL_net as
+@code{sdl-net}.
+
+We do not add @code{lib} prefixes for library packages, unless these are
+already part of the official project name.  But @pxref{Python-Module} and
+@ref{Perl-Module} for special rules concerning modules for the Python and
+Perl languages.
+
+Font package names are handled differently, @pxref{Schriftarten}.
+
+
+@node Versionsnummern
+@subsection Versionsnummern
+
+@cindex package version
+We usually package only the latest version of a given free software
+project.  But sometimes, for instance for incompatible library versions, two
+(or more) versions of the same package are needed.  These require different
+Scheme variable names.  We use the name as defined in @ref{Paketbenennung}
+for the most recent version; previous versions use the same name, suffixed
+by @code{-} and the smallest prefix of the version number that may
+distinguish the two versions.
+
+The name inside the package definition is the same for all versions of a
+package and does not contain any version number.
+
+For instance, the versions 2.24.20 and 3.9.12 of GTK+ may be packaged as
+follows:
+
+@example
+(define-public gtk+
+  (package
+    (name "gtk+")
+    (version "3.9.12")
+    ...))
+(define-public gtk+-2
+  (package
+    (name "gtk+")
+    (version "2.24.20")
+    ...))
+@end example
+If we also wanted GTK+ 3.8.2, this would be packaged as
+@example
+(define-public gtk+-3.8
+  (package
+    (name "gtk+")
+    (version "3.8.2")
+    ...))
+@end example
+
+@c See <https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/guix-devel/2016-01/msg00425.html>,
+@c for a discussion of what follows.
+@cindex version number, for VCS snapshots
+Occasionally, we package snapshots of upstream's version control system
+(VCS) instead of formal releases.  This should remain exceptional, because
+it is up to upstream developers to clarify what the stable release is.  Yet,
+it is sometimes necessary.  So, what should we put in the @code{version}
+field?
+
+Clearly, we need to make the commit identifier of the VCS snapshot visible
+in the version string, but we also need to make sure that the version string
+is monotonically increasing so that @command{guix package --upgrade} can
+determine which version is newer.  Since commit identifiers, notably with
+Git, are not monotonically increasing, we add a revision number that we
+increase each time we upgrade to a newer snapshot.  The resulting version
+string looks like this:
+
+@example
+2.0.11-3.cabba9e
+  ^    ^    ^
+  |    |    `-- upstream commit ID
+  |    |
+  |    `--- Guix package revision
+  |
+latest upstream version
+@end example
+
+It is a good idea to strip commit identifiers in the @code{version} field
+to, say, 7 digits.  It avoids an aesthetic annoyance (assuming aesthetics
+have a role to play here) as well as problems related to OS limits such as
+the maximum shebang length (127 bytes for the Linux kernel.)  It is best to
+use the full commit identifiers in @code{origin}s, though, to avoid
+ambiguities.  A typical package definition may look like this:
+
+@example
+(define my-package
+  (let ((commit "c3f29bc928d5900971f65965feaae59e1272a3f7")
+        (revision "1"))          ;Guix package revision
+    (package
+      (version (git-version "0.9" revision commit))
+      (source (origin
+                (method git-fetch)
+                (uri (git-reference
+                      (url "git://example.org/my-package.git")
+                      (commit commit)))
+                (sha256 (base32 "1mbikn@dots{}"))
+                (file-name (git-file-name name version))))
+      ;; @dots{}
+      )))
+@end example
+
+@node Zusammenfassungen und Beschreibungen
+@subsection Zusammenfassungen und Beschreibungen
+
+@cindex package description
+@cindex package synopsis
+As we have seen before, each package in GNU@tie{}Guix includes a synopsis
+and a description (@pxref{Pakete definieren}).  Synopses and descriptions
+are important: They are what @command{guix package --search} searches, and a
+crucial piece of information to help users determine whether a given package
+suits their needs.  Consequently, packagers should pay attention to what
+goes into them.
+
+Synopses must start with a capital letter and must not end with a period.
+They must not start with ``a'' or ``the'', which usually does not bring
+anything; for instance, prefer ``File-frobbing tool'' over ``A tool that
+frobs files''.  The synopsis should say what the package is---e.g., ``Core
+GNU utilities (file, text, shell)''---or what it is used for---e.g., the
+synopsis for GNU@tie{}grep is ``Print lines matching a pattern''.
+
+Keep in mind that the synopsis must be meaningful for a very wide audience.
+For example, ``Manipulate alignments in the SAM format'' might make sense
+for a seasoned bioinformatics researcher, but might be fairly unhelpful or
+even misleading to a non-specialized audience.  It is a good idea to come up
+with a synopsis that gives an idea of the application domain of the
+package.  In this example, this might give something like ``Manipulate
+nucleotide sequence alignments'', which hopefully gives the user a better
+idea of whether this is what they are looking for.
+
+Descriptions should take between five and ten lines.  Use full sentences,
+and avoid using acronyms without first introducing them.  Please avoid
+marketing phrases such as ``world-leading'', ``industrial-strength'', and
+``next-generation'', and avoid superlatives like ``the most
+advanced''---they are not helpful to users looking for a package and may
+even sound suspicious.  Instead, try to be factual, mentioning use cases and
+features.
+
+@cindex Texinfo markup, in package descriptions
+Descriptions can include Texinfo markup, which is useful to introduce
+ornaments such as @code{@@code} or @code{@@dfn}, bullet lists, or hyperlinks
+(@pxref{Overview,,, texinfo, GNU Texinfo}).  However you should be careful
+when using some characters for example @samp{@@} and curly braces which are
+the basic special characters in Texinfo (@pxref{Special Characters,,,
+texinfo, GNU Texinfo}).  User interfaces such as @command{guix package
+--show} take care of rendering it appropriately.
+
+Synopses and descriptions are translated by volunteers
+@uref{http://translationproject.org/domain/guix-packages.html, at the
+Translation Project} so that as many users as possible can read them in
+their native language.  User interfaces search them and display them in the
+language specified by the current locale.
+
+To allow @command{xgettext} to extract them as translatable strings,
+synopses and descriptions @emph{must be literal strings}.  This means that
+you cannot use @code{string-append} or @code{format} to construct these
+strings:
+
+@lisp
+(package
+  ;; @dots{}
+  (synopsis "This is translatable")
+  (description (string-append "This is " "*not*" " translatable.")))
+@end lisp
+
+Translation is a lot of work so, as a packager, please pay even more
+attention to your synopses and descriptions as every change may entail
+additional work for translators.  In order to help them, it is possible to
+make recommendations or instructions visible to them by inserting special
+comments like this (@pxref{xgettext Invocation,,, gettext, GNU Gettext}):
+
+@example
+;; TRANSLATORS: "X11 resize-and-rotate" should not be translated.
+(description "ARandR is designed to provide a simple visual front end
+for the X11 resize-and-rotate (RandR) extension. @dots{}")
+@end example
+
+
+@node Python-Module
+@subsection Python-Module
+
+@cindex python
+We currently package Python 2 and Python 3, under the Scheme variable names
+@code{python-2} and @code{python} as explained in @ref{Versionsnummern}.  To
+avoid confusion and naming clashes with other programming languages, it
+seems desirable that the name of a package for a Python module contains the
+word @code{python}.
+
+Some modules are compatible with only one version of Python, others with
+both.  If the package Foo compiles only with Python 3, we name it
+@code{python-foo}; if it compiles only with Python 2, we name it
+@code{python2-foo}. If it is compatible with both versions, we create two
+packages with the corresponding names.
+
+If a project already contains the word @code{python}, we drop this; for
+instance, the module python-dateutil is packaged under the names
+@code{python-dateutil} and @code{python2-dateutil}.  If the project name
+starts with @code{py} (e.g.@: @code{pytz}), we keep it and prefix it as
+described above.
+
+@subsubsection Specifying Dependencies
+@cindex inputs, for Python packages
+
+Dependency information for Python packages is usually available in the
+package source tree, with varying degrees of accuracy: in the
+@file{setup.py} file, in @file{requirements.txt}, or in @file{tox.ini}.
+
+Your mission, when writing a recipe for a Python package, is to map these
+dependencies to the appropriate type of ``input'' (@pxref{„package“-Referenz,
+inputs}).  Although the @code{pypi} importer normally does a good job
+(@pxref{Aufruf von guix import}), you may want to check the following check
+list to determine which dependency goes where.
+
+@itemize
+
+@item
+We currently package Python 2 with @code{setuptools} and @code{pip}
+installed like Python 3.4 has per default.  Thus you don't need to specify
+either of these as an input.  @command{guix lint} will warn you if you do.
+
+@item
+Python dependencies required at run time go into @code{propagated-inputs}.
+They are typically defined with the @code{install_requires} keyword in
+@file{setup.py}, or in the @file{requirements.txt} file.
+
+@item
+Python packages required only at build time---e.g., those listed with the
+@code{setup_requires} keyword in @file{setup.py}---or only for
+testing---e.g., those in @code{tests_require}---go into
+@code{native-inputs}.  The rationale is that (1) they do not need to be
+propagated because they are not needed at run time, and (2) in a
+cross-compilation context, it's the ``native'' input that we'd want.
+
+Examples are the @code{pytest}, @code{mock}, and @code{nose} test
+frameworks.  Of course if any of these packages is also required at
+run-time, it needs to go to @code{propagated-inputs}.
+
+@item
+Anything that does not fall in the previous categories goes to
+@code{inputs}, for example programs or C libraries required for building
+Python packages containing C extensions.
+
+@item
+If a Python package has optional dependencies (@code{extras_require}), it is
+up to you to decide whether to add them or not, based on their
+usefulness/overhead ratio (@pxref{Einreichen von Patches, @command{guix size}}).
+
+@end itemize
+
+
+@node Perl-Module
+@subsection Perl-Module
+
+@cindex perl
+Perl programs standing for themselves are named as any other package, using
+the lowercase upstream name.  For Perl packages containing a single class,
+we use the lowercase class name, replace all occurrences of @code{::} by
+dashes and prepend the prefix @code{perl-}.  So the class @code{XML::Parser}
+becomes @code{perl-xml-parser}.  Modules containing several classes keep
+their lowercase upstream name and are also prepended by @code{perl-}.  Such
+modules tend to have the word @code{perl} somewhere in their name, which
+gets dropped in favor of the prefix.  For instance, @code{libwww-perl}
+becomes @code{perl-libwww}.
+
+
+@node Java-Pakete
+@subsection Java-Pakete
+
+@cindex java
+Java programs standing for themselves are named as any other package, using
+the lowercase upstream name.
+
+To avoid confusion and naming clashes with other programming languages, it
+is desirable that the name of a package for a Java package is prefixed with
+@code{java-}.  If a project already contains the word @code{java}, we drop
+this; for instance, the package @code{ngsjava} is packaged under the name
+@code{java-ngs}.
+
+For Java packages containing a single class or a small class hierarchy, we
+use the lowercase class name, replace all occurrences of @code{.} by dashes
+and prepend the prefix @code{java-}.  So the class @code{apache.commons.cli}
+becomes package @code{java-apache-commons-cli}.
+
+
+@node Schriftarten
+@subsection Schriftarten
+
+@cindex Schriftarten
+For fonts that are in general not installed by a user for typesetting
+purposes, or that are distributed as part of a larger software package, we
+rely on the general packaging rules for software; for instance, this applies
+to the fonts delivered as part of the X.Org system or fonts that are part of
+TeX Live.
+
+To make it easier for a user to search for fonts, names for other packages
+containing only fonts are constructed as follows, independently of the
+upstream package name.
+
+The name of a package containing only one font family starts with
+@code{font-}; it is followed by the foundry name and a dash @code{-} if the
+foundry is known, and the font family name, in which spaces are replaced by
+dashes (and as usual, all upper case letters are transformed to lower
+case).  For example, the Gentium font family by SIL is packaged under the
+name @code{font-sil-gentium}.
+
+For a package containing several font families, the name of the collection
+is used in the place of the font family name.  For instance, the Liberation
+fonts consist of three families, Liberation Sans, Liberation Serif and
+Liberation Mono.  These could be packaged separately under the names
+@code{font-liberation-sans} and so on; but as they are distributed together
+under a common name, we prefer to package them together as
+@code{font-liberation}.
+
+In the case where several formats of the same font family or font collection
+are packaged separately, a short form of the format, prepended by a dash, is
+added to the package name.  We use @code{-ttf} for TrueType fonts,
+@code{-otf} for OpenType fonts and @code{-type1} for PostScript Type 1
+fonts.
+
+
+
+@node Bootstrapping
+@section Bootstrapping
+
+@c Adapted from the ELS 2013 paper.
+
+@cindex bootstrapping
+
+Bootstrapping in our context refers to how the distribution gets built
+``from nothing''.  Remember that the build environment of a derivation
+contains nothing but its declared inputs (@pxref{Einführung}).  So there's
+an obvious chicken-and-egg problem: how does the first package get built?
+How does the first compiler get compiled? Note that this is a question of
+interest only to the curious hacker, not to the regular user, so you can
+shamelessly skip this section if you consider yourself a ``regular user''.
+
+@cindex bootstrap binaries
+The GNU system is primarily made of C code, with libc at its core.  The GNU
+build system itself assumes the availability of a Bourne shell and
+command-line tools provided by GNU Coreutils, Awk, Findutils, `sed', and
+`grep'.  Furthermore, build programs---programs that run @code{./configure},
+@code{make}, etc.---are written in Guile Scheme (@pxref{Ableitungen}).
+Consequently, to be able to build anything at all, from scratch, Guix relies
+on pre-built binaries of Guile, GCC, Binutils, libc, and the other packages
+mentioned above---the @dfn{bootstrap binaries}.
+
+These bootstrap binaries are ``taken for granted'', though we can also
+re-create them if needed (more on that later).
+
+@unnumberedsubsec Preparing to Use the Bootstrap Binaries
+
+@c As of Emacs 24.3, Info-mode displays the image, but since it's a
+@c large image, it's hard to scroll.  Oh well.
+@image{images/bootstrap-graph,6in,,Dependency graph of the early bootstrap
+derivations}
+
+The figure above shows the very beginning of the dependency graph of the
+distribution, corresponding to the package definitions of the @code{(gnu
+packages bootstrap)} module.  A similar figure can be generated with
+@command{guix graph} (@pxref{Aufruf von guix graph}), along the lines of:
+
+@example
+guix graph -t derivation \
+  -e '(@@@@ (gnu packages bootstrap) %bootstrap-gcc)' \
+  | dot -Tps > t.ps
+@end example
+
+At this level of detail, things are slightly complex.  First, Guile itself
+consists of an ELF executable, along with many source and compiled Scheme
+files that are dynamically loaded when it runs.  This gets stored in the
+@file{guile-2.0.7.tar.xz} tarball shown in this graph.  This tarball is part
+of Guix's ``source'' distribution, and gets inserted into the store with
+@code{add-to-store} (@pxref{Der Store}).
+
+But how do we write a derivation that unpacks this tarball and adds it to
+the store? To solve this problem, the @code{guile-bootstrap-2.0.drv}
+derivation---the first one that gets built---uses @code{bash} as its
+builder, which runs @code{build-bootstrap-guile.sh}, which in turn calls
+@code{tar} to unpack the tarball.  Thus, @file{bash}, @file{tar}, @file{xz},
+and @file{mkdir} are statically-linked binaries, also part of the Guix
+source distribution, whose sole purpose is to allow the Guile tarball to be
+unpacked.
+
+Once @code{guile-bootstrap-2.0.drv} is built, we have a functioning Guile
+that can be used to run subsequent build programs.  Its first task is to
+download tarballs containing the other pre-built binaries---this is what the
+@code{.tar.xz.drv} derivations do.  Guix modules such as
+@code{ftp-client.scm} are used for this purpose.  The
+@code{module-import.drv} derivations import those modules in a directory in
+the store, using the original layout.  The @code{module-import-compiled.drv}
+derivations compile those modules, and write them in an output directory
+with the right layout.  This corresponds to the @code{#:modules} argument of
+@code{build-expression->derivation} (@pxref{Ableitungen}).
+
+Finally, the various tarballs are unpacked by the derivations
+@code{gcc-bootstrap-0.drv}, @code{glibc-bootstrap-0.drv}, etc., at which
+point we have a working C tool chain.
+
+
+@unnumberedsubsec Building the Build Tools
+
+Bootstrapping is complete when we have a full tool chain that does not
+depend on the pre-built bootstrap tools discussed above.  This no-dependency
+requirement is verified by checking whether the files of the final tool
+chain contain references to the @file{/gnu/store} directories of the
+bootstrap inputs.  The process that leads to this ``final'' tool chain is
+described by the package definitions found in the @code{(gnu packages
+commencement)} module.
+
+The @command{guix graph} command allows us to ``zoom out'' compared to the
+graph above, by looking at the level of package objects instead of
+individual derivations---remember that a package may translate to several
+derivations, typically one derivation to download its source, one to build
+the Guile modules it needs, and one to actually build the package from
+source.  The command:
+
+@example
+guix graph -t bag \
+  -e '(@@@@ (gnu packages commencement)
+          glibc-final-with-bootstrap-bash)' | dot -Tps > t.ps
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+produces the dependency graph leading to the ``final'' C
+library@footnote{You may notice the @code{glibc-intermediate} label,
+suggesting that it is not @emph{quite} final, but as a good approximation,
+we will consider it final.}, depicted below.
+
+@image{images/bootstrap-packages,6in,,Dependency graph of the early
+packages}
+
+@c See <http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/gnu-system-discuss/2012-10/msg00000.html>.
+The first tool that gets built with the bootstrap binaries is
+GNU@tie{}Make---noted @code{make-boot0} above---which is a prerequisite for
+all the following packages.  From there Findutils and Diffutils get built.
+
+Then come the first-stage Binutils and GCC, built as pseudo cross
+tools---i.e., with @code{--target} equal to @code{--host}.  They are used to
+build libc.  Thanks to this cross-build trick, this libc is guaranteed not
+to hold any reference to the initial tool chain.
+
+From there the final Binutils and GCC (not shown above) are built.  GCC uses
+@code{ld} from the final Binutils, and links programs against the just-built
+libc.  This tool chain is used to build the other packages used by Guix and
+by the GNU Build System: Guile, Bash, Coreutils, etc.
+
+And voilà! At this point we have the complete set of build tools that the
+GNU Build System expects.  These are in the @code{%final-inputs} variable of
+the @code{(gnu packages commencement)} module, and are implicitly used by
+any package that uses @code{gnu-build-system} (@pxref{Erstellungssysteme,
+@code{gnu-build-system}}).
+
+
+@unnumberedsubsec Building the Bootstrap Binaries
+
+@cindex bootstrap binaries
+Because the final tool chain does not depend on the bootstrap binaries,
+those rarely need to be updated.  Nevertheless, it is useful to have an
+automated way to produce them, should an update occur, and this is what the
+@code{(gnu packages make-bootstrap)} module provides.
+
+The following command builds the tarballs containing the bootstrap binaries
+(Guile, Binutils, GCC, libc, and a tarball containing a mixture of Coreutils
+and other basic command-line tools):
+
+@example
+guix build bootstrap-tarballs
+@end example
+
+The generated tarballs are those that should be referred to in the
+@code{(gnu packages bootstrap)} module mentioned at the beginning of this
+section.
+
+Still here? Then perhaps by now you've started to wonder: when do we reach a
+fixed point? That is an interesting question! The answer is unknown, but if
+you would like to investigate further (and have significant computational
+and storage resources to do so), then let us know.
+
+@unnumberedsubsec Reducing the Set of Bootstrap Binaries
+
+Our bootstrap binaries currently include GCC, Guile, etc.  That's a lot of
+binary code! Why is that a problem? It's a problem because these big chunks
+of binary code are practically non-auditable, which makes it hard to
+establish what source code produced them.  Every unauditable binary also
+leaves us vulnerable to compiler backdoors as described by Ken Thompson in
+the 1984 paper @emph{Reflections on Trusting Trust}.
+
+This is mitigated by the fact that our bootstrap binaries were generated
+from an earlier Guix revision.  Nevertheless it lacks the level of
+transparency that we get in the rest of the package dependency graph, where
+Guix always gives us a source-to-binary mapping.  Thus, our goal is to
+reduce the set of bootstrap binaries to the bare minimum.
+
+The @uref{http://bootstrappable.org, Bootstrappable.org web site} lists
+on-going projects to do that.  One of these is about replacing the bootstrap
+GCC with a sequence of assemblers, interpreters, and compilers of increasing
+complexity, which could be built from source starting from a simple and
+auditable assembler.  Your help is welcome!
+
+
+@node Portierung
+@section Porting to a New Platform
+
+As discussed above, the GNU distribution is self-contained, and
+self-containment is achieved by relying on pre-built ``bootstrap binaries''
+(@pxref{Bootstrapping}).  These binaries are specific to an operating system
+kernel, CPU architecture, and application binary interface (ABI).  Thus, to
+port the distribution to a platform that is not yet supported, one must
+build those bootstrap binaries, and update the @code{(gnu packages
+bootstrap)} module to use them on that platform.
+
+Fortunately, Guix can @emph{cross compile} those bootstrap binaries.  When
+everything goes well, and assuming the GNU tool chain supports the target
+platform, this can be as simple as running a command like this one:
+
+@example
+guix build --target=armv5tel-linux-gnueabi bootstrap-tarballs
+@end example
+
+For this to work, the @code{glibc-dynamic-linker} procedure in @code{(gnu
+packages bootstrap)} must be augmented to return the right file name for
+libc's dynamic linker on that platform; likewise,
+@code{system->linux-architecture} in @code{(gnu packages linux)} must be
+taught about the new platform.
+
+Once these are built, the @code{(gnu packages bootstrap)} module needs to be
+updated to refer to these binaries on the target platform.  That is, the
+hashes and URLs of the bootstrap tarballs for the new platform must be added
+alongside those of the currently supported platforms.  The bootstrap Guile
+tarball is treated specially: it is expected to be available locally, and
+@file{gnu/local.mk} has rules to download it for the supported
+architectures; a rule for the new platform must be added as well.
+
+In practice, there may be some complications.  First, it may be that the
+extended GNU triplet that specifies an ABI (like the @code{eabi} suffix
+above) is not recognized by all the GNU tools.  Typically, glibc recognizes
+some of these, whereas GCC uses an extra @code{--with-abi} configure flag
+(see @code{gcc.scm} for examples of how to handle this).  Second, some of
+the required packages could fail to build for that platform.  Lastly, the
+generated binaries could be broken for some reason.
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@include contributing.de.texi
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node Danksagungen
+@chapter Danksagungen
+
+Guix is based on the @uref{http://nixos.org/nix/, Nix package manager},
+which was designed and implemented by Eelco Dolstra, with contributions from
+other people (see the @file{nix/AUTHORS} file in Guix.)  Nix pioneered
+functional package management, and promoted unprecedented features, such as
+transactional package upgrades and rollbacks, per-user profiles, and
+referentially transparent build processes.  Without this work, Guix would
+not exist.
+
+The Nix-based software distributions, Nixpkgs and NixOS, have also been an
+inspiration for Guix.
+
+GNU@tie{}Guix itself is a collective work with contributions from a number
+of people.  See the @file{AUTHORS} file in Guix for more information on
+these fine people.  The @file{THANKS} file lists people who have helped by
+reporting bugs, taking care of the infrastructure, providing artwork and
+themes, making suggestions, and more---thank you!
+
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node GNU-Lizenz für freie Dokumentation
+@appendix GNU-Lizenz für freie Dokumentation
+@cindex license, GNU Free Documentation License
+@include fdl-1.3.texi
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node Konzeptverzeichnis
+@unnumbered Konzeptverzeichnis
+@printindex cp
+
+@node Programmierverzeichnis
+@unnumbered Programmierverzeichnis
+@syncodeindex tp fn
+@syncodeindex vr fn
+@printindex fn
+
+@bye
+
+@c Local Variables:
+@c ispell-local-dictionary: "american";
+@c End: